JP2021078828A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To show novel amusement.SOLUTION: When separation between a current index (NowIndex) and the maximum variation value (MaxIndex) becomes a certain value or larger during execution of a button successive hitting performance, a current index is updated (+1) until the separation width becomes a designated range or less regardless of a lottery result. The current index is also forced to be progressed to the maximum fixed value by operating a lever member. Accordingly, when a lottery for progressing the current index is not won continuously, the progress of a scenario is not hindered as long as proper depression of a push button is performed. Just before effective time of the push button expires, depressing the push button once can prevent a performance that is nearly identical to a final result from being seen. Further, a player who does not wish to successively hit or long-press the push button can confirm the final result as fast as possible by operating the lever member.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a big hit lottery is executed on the condition that a game ball enters the starting winning opening, and a special symbol is changed and displayed based on the result of the big hit lottery. In such a gaming machine, when the jackpot lottery is executed, the special symbol display device executes the variable display of the special symbol, and when the variable time ends, the special symbol display device stops and displays the special symbol. Then, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the jackpot game is executed.

Further, in recent years, the number of gaming machines provided with operating means has increased. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the continuous hit counter value reaches a threshold value, the countdown effect is started even if the remaining time of the effect end timer remains.

Further, conventionally, various methods have been adopted for controlling a game and controlling an effect associated with a game (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Further, in Patent Document 3, when a power-on is detected, a gaming machine that executes control to light the multi-color light emitting unit one or more times while limiting the number of simultaneous lighting of the single-color light emitting unit until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Are listed.

Further, in Patent Document 4, when there is a problem that a predetermined position is not detected even in one of the groups including a plurality of movable accessories whose operating ranges interfere with each other, the movable accessories physically interfere with each other. A gaming machine that executes control to return all movable accessories in the group to their respective initial positions according to an operation sequence that is not performed is described.

Further, Patent Document 5 describes a gaming machine having a game property of a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer.

In addition, in the gaming machine, when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the game is not performed (during a so-called customer waiting state), the manufacturer name and model name of the gaming machine are displayed on the liquid crystal display to demonstrate the game. Demonstration production is generally performed. Then, while waiting for customers and the launch handle is not operated, it is possible to set various settings at the bottom of the screen while displaying the model name and playing a video introducing the characters and stories appearing in the game. It is known that a gaming machine that executes a game start suggestion effect that terminates the model demo display and suggests the start of a game when the launch handle is operated while executing a model-specific demo display that notifies that the game is (See, for example, Patent Document 6).

Further, conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a big hit lottery is executed on the condition that a game ball enters the starting port, and a special symbol is changed and displayed based on the result of the big hit lottery. In such a gaming machine, when the jackpot lottery is executed, the special symbol display device executes the variable display of the special symbol, and when the variable time ends, the special symbol display device stops and displays the special symbol. Then, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the game state may be changed to one of a plurality of game states.

Further, in recent years, many gaming machines are provided with two starting ports and a special symbol display device is provided for each starting port. In a gaming machine provided with two special symbol display devices, priority is given to the variable display of one of the special symbols, or the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. I'm doing it. Further, for example, as described in Patent Document 7, there is also a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous turning machine) capable of simultaneously executing variable display of two special symbols in two special symbol display devices.

Further, in this type of gaming machine, the data used for the production is generally stored in the ROM. For example, there is known a gaming machine in which a control program is expanded into a RAM by a boot program in a process at startup when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and after this process, control is performed based on the control program expanded in the RAM (for example). , Patent Document 8).

Further, in this type of gaming machine, the data used for the production is generally stored in the ROM. For example, there is known a gaming machine in which a control program is expanded into a RAM by a boot program in a process at startup when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and after this process, control is performed based on the control program expanded in the RAM (for example). , Patent Document 9).

Further, Patent Document 10 describes a configuration for displaying an image in which a color has been changed.

Further, Patent Document 11 describes a structure in which a decorative member provided so as to project forward from the upper edge of the game board is covered with a transparent storage portion provided on the front door so that the cover can be covered. ..

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-180137 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-165643 JP-A-2018-171305 JP-A-2017-185205 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-208334 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-208334 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-146940 JP-A-2019-97725 JP-A-2019-97725 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-54443 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-028351

In recent years, it has been desired to suppress a decrease in playability.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for suppressing a decrease in playability.

As described above, by providing the operating means, various playability is exhibited.
However, in recent years, only gaming machines having similar gaming characteristics have been proposed, and novel gaming characteristics are desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of demonstrating novel playability.

Further improvements are required in the control method in order to ensure control within the limited resources.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine characterized by a control method.

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and innovative gaming machines are desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the above-mentioned prior art, it is possible to suggest the start of the game by operating the launch handle. Therefore, when the player really starts the game, the demo display for each model is executed until the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. You don't have to feel uncomfortable by continuing. However, since the player's hand may unexpectedly touch the launch handle while selecting the platform to be played, the operation of the launch handle does not necessarily mean that the game has started. In addition, since the settable notification is not made during the game start suggestion effect, the player sees the settable notification in the demo display for each model and touches the launch handle at the tip of the arrow trying to switch to the setting screen. In that case, it becomes impossible to switch to the setting screen until the game start suggestion effect is completed, which causes discomfort to the player.

An object of the present invention is to provide a technique for effectively performing a demonstration effect.

As described above, various game playability can be exhibited by setting the starting port, the number of gaming states, the order of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol display device, and the like.
However, in recent years, only gaming machines having similar game characteristics have been proposed, and novel gaming machines are desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

The above-mentioned prior art is devised in the processing content at the time of power-on so that the work at the time of development can be efficiently carried out. By the way, when the power is turned on, the preparations for playing the game are not yet ready, so it is necessary to make sure that it is in the preparation stage, but there is room for improvement in the control when the power is turned on, and further ingenuity is required. Be done.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine characterized by control when the power is turned on.

The above-mentioned prior art is devised in the processing content at the time of power-on so that the work at the time of development can be efficiently carried out. By the way, when the power is turned on (at the time of starting and restarting), it is necessary to make sure that it is in the preparation stage because the preparation for playing the game is not yet completed, but the control at the time of turning on the power is improved. There is room for this, and further ingenuity is required.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine characterized by control when the power is turned on.

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and innovative gaming machines are desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and innovative gaming machines are desired.

An object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

[Solution Group A]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution uses an operation means capable of accepting an operation input and the operation means to execute a stepwise effect in which the stage of the effect is gradually advanced from the first stage to the final stage. If a predetermined condition is not satisfied between the start and the end of the effective stage effect execution means for enabling the operation of the operation means and the effective time for enabling the operation of the operation means, the stage effect effect is produced according to the first progress mode. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the progress effect executing means for advancing the stage of the effect of the stage effect by the second progress mode different from the first mode of the process. It is a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) An operation means (push button, lever member, cross button, etc.) capable of accepting operation input (operation by a player, one press, repeated hits, long press, etc.) is provided.

(2) Using the operation means of (1) above, a stepwise effect (button effect, button press effect, button repeated press effect, button long press effect, etc.) in which the stage of the effect is gradually advanced from the first stage to the final stage. Lever member operation effect, etc.) can be executed.

The staged effect may be an effect in which the stage of the effect reaches the final stage, or may be an effect in which the final stage is not reached. Further, the stepwise effect may be an effect in which the stages of the effect do not progress step by step (an effect that progresses to an arbitrary stage such as skipping one step).

In the staged production, if the stage of the production reaches the final stage, it can be regarded as a success, and if the stage of the production does not reach the final stage, it can be regarded as a failure. If it succeeds, it is more advantageous for the player than if it fails (a big hit, a suggestion of winning expectations, a development that develops into another, a reach, a probabilistic promotion, a round). (Continuous production, etc.) can be executed.

(3) If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied from the start to the end of the effective time for validating the operation of the operation means of (1) above (if the lever member is not operated, MaxIndex and NowIndex). If the divergence of is not more than a certain number), the stage of the stage production is advanced according to the first progress mode, and if the predetermined conditions are satisfied (if the lever member is operated, the divergence between MaxIndex and NowIndex is generated. (If it is a certain number or more), it is possible to execute the progress effect that advances the stage of the effect of the stage effect by the second progress mode different from the first progress mode.

Here, "different" may mean a mode in which the progress of the stages of the stage production is different (for example, one progresses one step at a time, but the other does not progress one step at a time). The progress may be different, but the progress timing may be different (for example, one progresses one step at a time and the other progresses one step at a time, but the timing of progress is different).

According to the present solution, the progress of the stepwise effect differs depending on whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Therefore, as compared with the method in which there is only one type of progress of the stepwise effect, the effect is produced. The variation can be increased, and as a result, a novel playability can be exhibited.

SOLUTION: In any of the above-mentioned solving means, the gaming machine of the present solving means includes the first operating means and the second operating means, and the progress effect executing means is the first operating means. Is operated, the progress effect can be executed, and when the second operation means is operated, a special notification effect for notifying the final result of the stage effect can be executed. It is a machine.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) The operating means includes a first operating means (push button) and a second operating means (lever member).
(2) The progress effect execution means enables the progress effect to be executed when the first operation means is operated.
(3) When the second operating means is operated, the progress effect executing means can execute a special notification effect for notifying the final result of the stage effect. When executing the special notification effect, the special notification effect may be executed after the progress effect is executed, or the special notification effect may be executed without executing the progress effect. In the special notification effect, the result of success or the result of failure can be notified.

According to the present solution, the content of the effect differs depending on whether the first operating means is operated or the second operating means is operated. Therefore, the same effect is executed regardless of which operating means is operated. Compared with the method or the method in which only one of the operating means can be operated, the variation of the production can be increased, and as a result, a novel playability can be exhibited.

Further, according to the present solution means, if the second operating means is operated, the final result of the stage effect is notified, so that the player can quickly confirm the final result.

Solution 3: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution sets the stage of the stage effect one step at a time according to the passage of the effective time. A gaming machine characterized in that the second progress mode is a mode in which the stage of the production of the stage production is advanced one step at a time regardless of the passage of the effective time. Is.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) The first mode of progress is a mode in which the stage of the stage effect is advanced one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.

(2) The second progress mode is a mode in which the stage of the stage production is advanced one step at a time to the next stage regardless of the passage of the effective time.

According to this solution, the stage of the staged production is advanced one step at a time according to the passage of the effective time, or the stage of the staged production is staged one step regardless of the passage of the effective time. Since it advances to the next stage one by one, regardless of how the effective time elapses, it is possible to surely advance the stage of the stage production to the next stage one step at a time, and as a result, it is novel. It is possible to demonstrate a good playability.

[Solution B group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution means an effect operation executing means for executing an effect operation and an effect control means for issuing an effect operation command for uniquely specifying an effect operation to be executed by the effect operation execution means. When a storage means capable of storing the effect operation command and one effect operation associated with one or more of the effect operation commands are specified with reference to the effect operation command, and a predetermined condition is not satisfied. The specified effect operation is executed by the effect operation executing means, while at least a part of the specified effect operation is restricted and executed by the effect operation executing means when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is equipped with a production operation control means that enables this.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following features.
(1) When a game ball is launched, it flows down in the game area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc., and in the process, it passes through some area or enters various entrances. To do. The progress of the game is controlled according to these events that occur in the game area.

(2) As the game progresses, various effects are executed by the effect execution means. The effect operation executing means is a device that executes the effect operation, and examples thereof include a liquid crystal display, a speaker, a lamp, and a movable body.

(3) The progress of the effect is controlled by the effect control means. Specifically, the effect control means issues an effect operation command (for example, a command) for uniquely specifying the effect operation to be executed by the effect operation execution means of the above (2), whereby an instruction regarding the effect is given. To.

(4) The effect operation command of (3) above can be temporarily stored by a storage means (for example, RAM).

(5) Execution of the effect operation by the effect operation execution means of the above (2) is controlled by the effect operation control means. Specifically, the effect operation control means first refers to the effect operation command. The reference may be performed on the effect operation command stored in the storage means of (4) above, or may be performed on the effect operation command stored in the storage means and then transferred or the like. .. In any case, the effect operation control means refers to the same effect operation command issued by the effect control means. Then, one effect operation associated with one or more effect operation commands is specified and executed by the effect operation execution means of (2) above. That is, the effect operation command and the effect operation may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis or on a many-to-one basis.

Further, when the effect operation control means does not satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of an abnormality or an error), the effect operation control means causes the effect operation execution means to execute the specified effect operation. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an abnormality or an error occurs), at least a part of the specified effect operation can be restricted and executed by the effect operation executing means. .. As a result of such control, when a part is restricted, only the unrestricted part of the specified effect operation is executed by the effect operation execution means, and when all are restricted, the specific effect operation is specified. The effected action will not be executed at all.

As for the content of the effect operation to be executed by the device (effect execution means), first, an instruction as a whole (instruction by the effect control means) is given, and based on the instruction, the control means (effect operation control means) on the device side further produces the effect. Generally, a lottery is performed and the final decision is made based on the lottery result, that is, the content is decided by adding a random element to the instruction as a whole. In this case, the control by the control means on the device side tends to be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present solution means, the control means on the device side causes the device to execute the effect operation associated with the effect operation command without further performing the effect lottery. Therefore, according to the present solution, the control by the control means on the device side can be simply implemented, and as a result, the execution of the effect operation can be efficiently controlled.

Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution includes a plurality of types of the effect operation execution means and a plurality of types of the effect operation control means corresponding to the individual effect operation execution means in the solution 1. , The plurality of types of the effect operation control means cause the corresponding effect operation execution means to execute an effect operation unique to each of the effect operation execution means associated with the same effect operation command. Is possible.

The following features are added to the present solution.
(6) As the effect executing means of the above (2), a plurality of types of devices (for example, a plurality of devices among a liquid crystal display, a speaker, a lamp, a movable body, and the like) are provided.

(7) Further, as the effect operation control means of the above (5), a plurality of types of effect operation control means (for example, when a plurality of types of devices are a liquid crystal display and a speaker) corresponding to each type of device, A display control unit corresponding to a liquid crystal display and a voice control unit corresponding to a speaker) are provided.

(8) The plurality of types of effect operation control means of the above (7) give the corresponding effect operation execution means a unique effect operation unique to each effect operation execution means associated with the same effect operation command. (For example, when the effect operation command is "conversation notice 1", the liquid crystal display is made to display the effect image associated with "conversation notice 1", and the speaker is made to execute "conversation notice 1". The output of the voice associated with "" can be executed). Depending on the situation, one of the effect operation executing means may not execute the effect operation. For example, when an effect operation command unrelated to any one of a plurality of types of effect operation execution means is issued, the effect operation execution means does not execute the effect operation according to the effect operation command.

According to the present solution, since it is possible to cause a plurality of types of devices to execute an effect operation unique to each device associated with the same effect operation command, a plurality of types of devices can be executed by the same effect operation command. It is possible to control the movements of the above movements collectively, and it is possible to more efficiently control the execution of the production movements.

Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution has a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game in the solution means 1 or 2, and a lottery when the predetermined lottery is executed. A symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined according to the result and then stopping the display, and a predetermined effect symbol displayed corresponding to the symbol within the variable time of the symbol are changed. Further provided with a pseudo-variation effect executing means for executing a pseudo-variation effect capable of pseudo-stopping the effect symbol once or a plurality of times during the fluctuation, the storage means is related to the pseudo-variation effect. It has a pseudo area for temporarily storing the effect command issued as a result.

The following features are added to the present solution.
(9) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the starting winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed by the lottery execution means.

(10) When the predetermined lottery of the above (9) is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed by the symbol display means over a variable time determined according to the lottery result. The stop display mode of the symbol represents the result of a predetermined lottery.

(11) Within the fluctuation time of (10) above, the pseudo-variation effect is executed by the pseudo-variation effect executing means, and a predetermined effect symbol displayed corresponding to the symbol (for example, the effect symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display). ) Is displayed in a variable manner. Further, during this variable display, the effect symbol may be stopped in a pseudo manner once or a plurality of times. In other words, during the execution of the pseudo-variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol may be stopped in a pseudo manner, and if the variation until the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped is regarded as the pseudo-variation, the variation of the symbol In some cases, the final fluctuation (main fluctuation) is made after the pseudo fluctuation is performed 0 times or more.

(12) The storage means of the above (4) is provided with a pseudo area. In this pseudo area, an effect command issued in connection with the pseudo variation effect of (11) is temporarily stored.

Before the start of the change of the symbol, the contents of the effect executed after the start of the change, that is, the various effects executed in connection with the pseudo change effect (pseudo change and the main change) are determined according to the result of the effect lottery or the like. , A production command corresponding to the determined content of the production is issued. According to the present solution, since the storage means is provided with the pseudo area, the effect command issued in connection with the pseudo variation effect can be temporarily stored in the pseudo area.

SOLUTION: In the game machine of the present solution means, in the solution means 3, the effect control means issues the effect command with respect to the effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes in which effects having different characteristics are executed. The storage means has, for each effect mode, a number of pseudo areas corresponding to the maximum number of pseudo stops in the pseudo-variation effect that can be executed in the effect mode.

(13) A plurality of production modes (for example, earth mode and space mode) in which effects having different characteristics are executed are prepared, and the production in one of the production modes (for example, the production mode selected by the player) is related. The effect command is issued by the effect control means of (3) above.

(14) In the storage means of the above (4), the pseudo area of the above (12) is provided for each of the effect modes of the above (13). Specifically, a few minutes according to the maximum number of pseudo stops in the pseudo-variation effect (11) that can be executed in each effect mode (for example, 6 times in the earth mode and 30 times in the space mode). Pseudo area (for example, the number of pseudo areas obtained by adding 1 to the maximum number of pseudo stops in each mode: 7 pseudo areas for the earth mode and 31 pseudo areas for the space mode. Areas for use) are provided respectively.

In the present solution, pseudo areas are provided for each effect mode, and the number of pseudo areas corresponding to the number of pseudo stops is provided for each effect mode. Therefore, according to the present solution, the structure in the simulated area can be made a structure suitable for use in each effect mode, and the simulated area is secured for a number of minutes suitable for use in each effect mode. Therefore, the usage amount of the internal area of the storage means can be minimized without securing an unnecessary area for the pseudo area. In addition, since the size of the area reserved for the simulated area in each effect mode is minimized, the simulated area can be initialized in a short time, and the efficiency of the control process is improved. It becomes possible.

[Solution Group C]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of this solution means a first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect, and a second effect that satisfies a predetermined condition related to the progress of the effect when executed at the same time as the first effect. It is a gaming machine including a second effect executing means that can be executed and an effect control means that enables the second effect to be started after the end of the first effect.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) A first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect is provided. The first effect is a movable effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position, a light emission effect of emitting light (rainbow-colored lighting, single-color lighting) of the light emitting means (lamp, LED), or a predetermined effect provided in the gaming machine. This is an effect that includes at least one of an emphasis effect that vibrates the operating member, the movable body, or the specific part of the above, or outputs wind or sound from the specific part.

(2) A second effect executing means capable of executing the second effect is provided. The second effect is an effect including at least one of a movable effect, a light emitting effect, or an emphasis effect different from the first effect of the above (1). The second effect is an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition (establishment of an operation hindrance) related to the progress of the effect when executed at the same time as the first effect.

(3) Regarding the light emitting effect (second effect) that satisfies a predetermined condition (establishment of an operation hindrance) related to the progress of the effect when executed at the same time as the first effect related to at least one of the movable effect or the emphasized effect. The second effect can be started (execution restriction) after the end of the effect (for example, after the physical detection indicating that the end of the operation has been reached).
In addition, the first effect is a movable effect (second effect) that satisfies a predetermined condition (establishment of an operation hindrance) related to the progress of the effect when executed at the same time as the first effect related to at least one of the light emission effect and the emphasis effect. The second effect can be started (execution limitation) after the end of (for example, after the current detection indicating that the current drop has been reached) is completed.
Further, the first effect is the emphasis effect (second effect) that satisfies the predetermined condition (establishment of motion hindrance) related to the progress of the effect when executed at the same time as the first effect related to at least one of the movable effect and the light emission effect. The second effect can be started (execution restriction) after the end of.
That is, the effect control means (central processing unit) has a different type of movable effect from the first effect after determining confirmation that the first effect related to at least one of the movable effect, the light emitting effect, and the emphasized effect has been completed. , The second effect of the light emission effect or the emphasis effect can be started. The second effect may be the same type of effect as the first effect.

According to the present solution, in order to enable the second effect to be started after the end of the first effect, the second effect is started during the execution of the first effect and a predetermined condition related to the progress of the effect is satisfied (for example, a predetermined value). Situations such as exceeding the current value limit, occurrence of abnormalities such as operation failure or failure of the gaming machine, and deterioration of the visibility of the effect will not occur. As a result, it is possible to avoid satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, a problem of current value limitation) while improving the quality of the gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution 2: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution is a movable effect in which the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, and the second effect is. It is a light emitting effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light, and includes a detecting means for detecting that the movable body is in the second position, and the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position. It is a gaming machine characterized in that when it moves and the detection by the detection means is performed, the light emission effect can be started as if the movable effect was completed.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) The first effect is a movable effect of moving the movable body from the first position (origin position) to the second position (movable position).
(2) The second effect is a light emission effect that causes the light emitting means (lamp, LED) to emit light.

(3) A detection means (photo sensor) for detecting that the movable body is in the second position is provided.
(4) The effect control means ends the movable effect when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position and the detection means of (3) above detects that the movable body is in the second position. As a result, it is possible to start the light emission effect.

According to the present solution, up to the maximum movable position beyond the movable position that can be established as a notification (movable effect) to the player based on the detection that the movable body is in the second position by the detecting means. When moving (when the second pushing operation is achieved), it is possible to start a specific light emission effect different from the normal one (for example, a strong light emission that strongly appeals to the player compared to the normal one) as if the movable effect was completed. Therefore, the specific light emitting effect can be started based on the fact that the movable body has actually moved to the second position. For this reason, compared to the method of starting the light emission effect after the operation of a predetermined number of steps related to the motor or the elapse of a predetermined time (command monitoring based on the execution of control processing), physical detection monitoring (ON / OFF) by the detection means is performed. There is an advantage that the above-mentioned light emission effect can be started after the movable effect is surely completed by the flag control based on the above. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid satisfying a predetermined condition (problem of current value limitation) while further improving the quality of the gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[Solution Group D]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution means a lottery executing means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game, and a symbol is changed over a predetermined fluctuation time when the predetermined lottery is executed. After the display, the symbol display means that enables the stop display of the symbol in an manner according to the result of the predetermined lottery, the movable body that can perform a predetermined operation during the variable display of the symbol, and the movable body Based on the detection means for detecting the arranged position and the detection result of the detection means, a process of determining whether or not the movable body is in the predetermined position is executed, and the movable body is not in the predetermined position. When a determination is made, a movable body control means that enables execution of a movement process for moving the movable body to the predetermined position is provided, and the determination process is performed from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the end of the stop display of the symbol. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be executed based on different judgment motives.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (when a game ball enters the starting winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(2) When the predetermined lottery of (1) above is executed, the symbols (special symbols) are displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time, and then the symbols are displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery of (1) above. Allows the stop display of.

(3) A movable body capable of performing a predetermined operation during the variable display of the symbol is provided.
(4) A detection means (for example, a photosensor arranged at the origin position and the movable position of the movable body) for detecting the position where the movable body is arranged according to the above (3) is provided.

(5) Based on the detection result of the detection means of (4) above, the process of determining whether or not the movable body of (3) is in a predetermined position is executed, and the movable body of (3) is moved to a predetermined position. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the movement process of moving the movable body of the above (3) to a predetermined position can be executed. The predetermined position is a predetermined position (correct position) according to the gaming state. The predetermined position is the first position (initial position) or the second position (movable position).

(6) The judgment process of (5) above can be executed based on different judgment triggers from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the end of the stop display of the symbol. The determination process is executed a plurality of times based on a plurality of determination triggers.

The determination process may be executed once during the variable display of the symbol and once during the stop display of the symbol.
Further, the determination process may be executed twice during the variable display of the symbol and may not be executed during the stop display of the symbol.
Further, the determination process may not be executed during the variable display of the symbol, but may be executed twice during the stop display of the symbol.
The number of times the determination process is executed is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

According to the present solution, since the determination process can be executed a plurality of times in one symbol variation game (from the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol stop display), one symbol In the variable game, after the movable body is uniquely arranged and corrected to the specific position (for example, the non-effect position at the start of the symbol variation) related to the specific mode in the normal state (initial setting), the specific state (animal mode) It is possible to provide a normal game (suppress processing mistakes) as compared with a method in which only one judgment process of performing placement correction at a predetermined position according to a predetermined mode in the game is executed, and different judgment triggers (for example, for example). It is possible to improve the specialty of the judgment processing according to (the beginning and the end of one symbol change), and to reduce the amount of data used in the judgment processing when it becomes a judgment trigger within one symbol change. (It is possible to generalize the judgment processing that can respond to changes in the type of gaming state), and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

SOLUTION: In any of the above-mentioned solving means, the gaming machine of the present solving means performs a first moving process capable of moving the movable body to a predetermined first position according to a predetermined mode as the moving process. Execution of the first movement processing execution means that can be executed, and the second movement processing that enables the movement of the movable body to be executed at a predetermined second position according to a specific embodiment as the movement processing. The movable body control means includes means, and based on the detection result of the detection means, the movable body control means executes a determination process of whether or not the movable body is in the predetermined position based on the first position or the second position. However, when it is determined that the movable body is not in the predetermined position, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first movement process or the second movement process can be executed based on the determination triggers different from each other.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) As the movement process, the first movement process (first correction process) capable of moving the movable body to the predetermined first position (position A, initial position) according to the predetermined mode can be executed.
(2) As the movement process, it is possible to execute the second movement process (second correction process) in which the movable body can be moved to the predetermined second position (position B, movable position) according to the specific mode.

(3) When the process of determining whether or not the movable body is in the predetermined position based on the first position or the second position is executed based on the detection result of the detection means and it is determined that the movable body is not in the predetermined position. The first movement process or the second movement process can be executed based on different judgment triggers.

According to the present solution, the first movement process or the second movement process can be executed from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the end of the stop display of the symbol based on different judgment triggers. It is possible to efficiently execute the movement process according to the situation.

Other Solution: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution has a plurality of the movable bodies, and the first movement process uses the specific movable body among the plurality of the movable bodies. It is a process that can move to a predetermined position, and the second movement process is a process that can move all movable bodies or movable bodies other than the specific movable body to the specific position. is there.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) There are a plurality of movable bodies.
(2) The first movement process is a process in which a specific movable body among the plurality of the movable bodies can be moved to a predetermined position.
(3) The second movement process is a process in which all movable bodies or movable bodies other than a specific movable body can be moved to a specific position.

The determination trigger for executing the first movement process is at the end of the symbol change (at the time of notifying the lottery result), so that one or more movable bodies displaced based on a predetermined effect, or a specific movable body It is preferable because it is possible to ensure that the movable body other than the above is returned to the specific position at the start of the symbol change (initialization correction can be performed before the next symbol change).

The time when the second movement process can be executed is set to be later than the time required to move from the second position (position B) to the first position (position A) (45 frames after the start of fluctuation). It is preferable that the execution (correction) of the first movement process and the execution of the second movement process based on the specific effect can be avoided.

Other Solution: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution has a plurality of the movable bodies, and the specific movable body among the plurality of the movable bodies is in the first position to the second position. In the first state, it is in the first position, in the second state, it is in the second position, and when the movable body control means is in the first state, the specific determination process is performed. When the first determination process of whether or not the movable body is arranged at the first position is executed and it is determined that the specific movable body is not arranged at the first position, the movement process is described as the above. If the first movement process of moving the specific movable body to the first position can be executed and the second state is reached, is the specific movable body arranged at the second position as the determination process? When the second determination process of whether or not is executed and it is determined that the specific movable body is not arranged at the second position, as the movement process, the specific movable body is moved to the second position. 2 The movement process can be executed, and in the case of the first state, the first movement process can be executed based on the first table that defines the operation to be executed by each movable body of the plurality of the movable bodies. In the second state, the first movement process can be executed based on the first table in which the operation of the specific movable body is restricted among the plurality of movable bodies, and the first movement process is performed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the second movement process can be executed based on the second table that targets the movement of the specific movable body whose movement is restricted in the table.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(1) There are a plurality of movable bodies.
(2) Of the plurality of movable bodies, a specific movable body (upper movable body, lower movable body) can be moved from the first position (origin position, initial position) to the second position (movable position, appearance position). , In the first state (normal mode), it is in the first position, and in the second state (animal mode), it is in the second position.

(3) In the first state, as a determination process, the first determination process of whether or not the specific movable body is arranged in the first position is executed, and the specific movable body is arranged in the first position. If it is determined that there is no movement, the first movement process of moving the specific movable body to the first position can be executed as the movement process.

(4) In the second state, as a determination process, a second determination process of whether or not a specific movable body is arranged at the second position is executed, and the specific movable body is arranged at the second position. If it is determined that there is no movement, a second movement process for moving a specific movable body to the second position can be executed as the movement process.

(5) In the first state, the first movement process can be executed based on the first table (first correction table) that defines the operation to be executed by each movable body of the plurality of movable bodies.

(6) In the second state, the first movement process can be executed based on the first table in which the operation of a specific movable body among the plurality of movable bodies is restricted, and the operation is performed in the first table. The second movement process can be executed based on the second table (second correction table) that targets the restricted movement of the specific movable body.

According to the present solution, the contents of the judgment process and the move process can be different depending on whether the state is the first state or the second state. Therefore, the judgment process or the move process according to each state is executed. be able to.

Further, according to the present solution, since the first table is a commonly used table regardless of whether it is in the first state or the second state, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by standardizing the tables. it can.

[Solution Group E]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solving means uses a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element related to a predetermined lottery, a lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery element, and the predetermined lottery using the lottery element. If the state of the lottery execution means for executing the above, the state transition means for enabling the transition from the first state to the second state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the state of the lottery element storage means are special states, the above-mentioned It is a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a common effect in the first state and the second state.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) Acquire lottery elements (special symbol jackpot random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) related to a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery).
(2) A lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery element of the above (1) is provided. The lottery elements can be stored, for example, up to a predetermined upper limit (up to 4 or 1 per symbol).
(3) A predetermined lottery is executed using the lottery element of (2) above.

(4) When the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied (when the winning symbol shifts to the time shortened state is applicable, or when the winning symbol is shifted to the high probability state), the transition from the first state to the second state is possible. (It is possible to shift to an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

The first state (normal state) is preferably a state in which predetermined conditions are applied to the game.
Further, the second state (advantageous state) is preferably a state in which more advantageous conditions than predetermined conditions are applied. The second state is at least one of a high probability state (a state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high) or a time reduction state (a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, an electric chew support state, etc.). It is preferable that the state includes one state.

(5) If the lottery element storage means of the above (2) is in a special state (if the storage state of the lottery element is in a special state, the number of memories related to the second special symbol is equal to or more than the specified number (for example, 1 or more)). If), a common effect (effect with common contents) can be executed in the first state and the second state.
The common effect is preferably a mode in which the same background image is used. The reason for this is that even after the end of the second state, it is possible to give the player a strong impression as if the mode being executed in the second state continues.
The common effect may be a completely common effect, or may be an effect in which at least some elements (for example, background image, mode, stage, BGM, characters appearing, etc.) are common.

According to the present solution, if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, a common effect can be executed in the first state and the second state, so that the game state is changed from the second state to the first state. Even if it shifts to, it is possible to give the player the impression that the second state is continuing. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

Solution 2: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution means that the effect executing means has the first state and the first state unless the state of the lottery element storage means is the special state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that non-common effects can be executed in two states.

In this solution, if the state of the lottery element storage means is not a special state (if the number of stored items related to the second special symbol is less than the specified number (for example, 0)), the first state and the second state are non-existent. Make it possible to execute common effects (effects with different contents).

According to the present solution, the common effect is executed or the non-common effect is executed depending on the state of the lottery element storage means. Therefore, the player who wants to execute the common effect is stored in the memory. It can motivate you to save. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[Solution F group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution includes an operation means for receiving an operation related to the game, an operation detection means for detecting the operation of the operation means, and a movable body provided to enable a plurality of types of operations including stationary. , When a lottery opportunity occurs, a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery, and when the predetermined lottery is executed, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a variable time determined according to the lottery result, and then stopped and displayed. When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display means and the symbol are stopped and displayed, the state transitions to the first state and the first effect can be executed, and the operation detection means does not detect in the first state. If a predetermined time elapses, the second state can be transitioned to execute the second effect, and if the predetermined time elapses without being detected by the operation detecting means in the second state, the state is transitioned to the third state. When the operation detection means detects the third effect in the third state, the effect control means that transitions to the first state and enables the first effect to be executed, and each of the states. It is characterized by providing a movable body control means capable of operating the movable body in different modes accordingly.

In the gaming machine of the present solution, for example, the gaming proceeds in the following flow.
(1) The gaming machine is provided with various operating means (launching handle, effect switching button, direction key, etc.) for receiving operations related to the game. When the player operates any of the operating means, the operation is detected by the operation detecting means corresponding to the operating means.

For example, when the player operates the launch handle, the launch operation is detected by the handle sensor, and the game ball is launched toward the game area formed on the game board surface accordingly. The handle sensor detects not only the firing operation but also an unintended movement (simply touching the firing handle, etc.) as an operation.

(2) Further, the gaming machine is provided with a movable body. The movable body can perform a plurality of types of movements including stationary (for example, displacement, vibration, rotation, etc. in addition to stationary).

(3) When a game ball is launched, it flows down in the game area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc., and in the process, it passes through some area or enters various entrances. To do. When the game ball passes / enters the starting area (starting gate, starting winning opening), a lottery opportunity occurs.

(4) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the starting winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(5) When the predetermined lottery is executed in (4) above, the symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed over a predetermined variable time. The stop display mode of the symbol represents the result of a predetermined lottery.

(6) When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the symbol of (5) above is stopped and displayed (for example, when the operation is not detected when the number of working memories is 0), the state is controlled by the effect control means. The production can be performed according to the situation.

Specifically, first, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to the first state (standby A). When the state transitions to the first state, the first effect (display of the confirmation screen) can be executed with this as an opportunity. Then, when a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation by the operation detecting means of the above (1) in the first state, the transition to the second state (movie playback) occurs. When the transition to the second state occurs, the second production (playback of the customer waiting demo movie) can be executed with this as an opportunity. Then, when a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation in the second state, the state transitions to the third state (standby B). When the state transitions to the third state, the third effect (display of the confirmation screen) can be executed with this as an opportunity. Then, when the operation is detected in the third state, the process returns to the first state (standby A), and the above flow is repeated.

(7) During the execution of the effect of (6), the movable body of (2) can be operated in a different manner according to each state of (6) by the movable body control means.

In a gaming machine, when a customer is waiting, it is common to produce a content demonstrating the game of the model. However, the effect is hard to be noticed by the player simply by displaying a predetermined screen or playing back a predetermined image.

On the other hand, in the present solution, the state changes during the customer waiting state, the effect to be executed is switched according to the state, and the operation mode of the movable body changes according to the state. Therefore, according to this solution, it is possible to give freshness to the production and further enhance the appealing power to the player, and to be movable, as compared with a general gaming machine in which the screen is simply displayed and the image is reproduced. It is possible to draw attention to the production while attracting the player by the movement of the body.

Further, according to the present solution, since the effect to be executed while waiting for the customer and the operation of the movable body are controlled based on the state and the presence / absence of detection of the operation, the execution control of the effect can be performed efficiently and concisely. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution further includes, in the solution 1, a display means for displaying an image related to the game provided on the back side of the movable body, and the effect control means is at least the display. The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed by using the means, and the movable body control means can move the movable body control means at a position that does not shield a predetermined area of the display means in the first state. It is characterized in that the body can be operated, and in the second state and the third state, the movable body can be operated at a position that shields at least a part of the predetermined region.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(8) A display means (liquid crystal display) is provided on the back side of the movable body according to (2) above. Various images such as an effect image corresponding to the progress of the game and an interface image for guiding the method related to the game are displayed on the display means.

(9) The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed by the effect control means of the above (6) at least by using the display means of the above (8). In addition to the display means, each of these effects may be executed using other effect executing means (for example, an effect device such as a speaker or a lamp).

(10) By the movable body control means of the above (7), in the first state (standby A), the movable body of the above (2) is in a predetermined area of the display means of the above (8) (for example, in the entire screen). It can operate in a position that does not block the operation interface), while in the second state (movie playback) and the third state (standby B), it is a position that blocks at least a part of the predetermined area of the display means. It can work.

Some of the various images displayed on the display means do not cause much trouble even if the whole cannot be seen, and some of them hinder the progress of the game and the operation of the player if the whole cannot be seen. Then, when an image such as the latter is displayed on the display means, if at least a part of the image is shielded by the movable body, the player cannot surely see the image. At this time, if the game is not performed (operation is not detected), there is no particular problem, but if it seems that the game has started (operation is detected), the player is notified. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of operability because the entire image cannot be visually recognized.

On the other hand, in the present solution, in the second state (movie playback) and the third state (standby B), the movable body operates at a position of shielding at least a part of a predetermined area of the display means, while operating. In the first state (standby A), which returns with the detection of the above, the movable body operates in an area where the predetermined area is not shielded. Therefore, according to the present solution, the predetermined area of the display means changes to an unobstructed state with the detection of the operation, so that the player can surely visually recognize the image displayed in the predetermined area, and the image is displayed. It is possible to reliably inform the contents to be shown, and it is possible to further improve the operability as compared with the case where at least a part of the predetermined area is shielded.

Other Solution: The gaming machine of the present solution is a movable body provided with an operation means for receiving an operation related to the game, an operation detection means for detecting the operation of the operation means, and a plurality of types of operations including stationary. When the lottery opportunity occurs, the lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery, and when the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbols are changed and displayed for a variable time determined according to the lottery result, and then stopped and displayed. When the symbol display means and the predetermined condition are satisfied while the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to the first state and the first effect is executed, and the operation detection means does not detect in the first state. When a predetermined time elapses, the second state is transitioned to execute the second effect, and when the execution of the second effect is completed without being detected by the operation detection means, the state is transitioned to the third state and the second effect is executed. When the predetermined time elapses without being detected by the operation detecting means in the third state after executing one effect, the process returns to the second state and the second effect is executed, while the second state or the above is performed. When the operation detection means detects the third state, the effect control means for returning to the first state and executing the first effect and the movable body can be operated in different modes according to each state. It is characterized by being provided with a movable body control means.

In the gaming machine of the present solution, for example, the game progresses in the flow of (1) to (5) above, and the following features are added.

(11) When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the symbol of (5) above is stopped and displayed (for example, when the operation is not detected when the number of working memories is 0), the state is controlled by the effect control means. The production according to is executed.

Specifically, first, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to the first state (standby A). When the state transitions to the first state, the first effect (display of the confirmation screen) is executed with this as an opportunity. Then, when a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation by the operation detecting means of the above (1) in the first state, the transition to the second state (movie playback) occurs. When the state transitions to the second state, the second production (playback of the customer waiting demo movie) is executed with this as an opportunity. Then, when the execution of the second effect is completed without detecting the operation in the second state, the transition to the third state (standby B) occurs. When the state transitions to the third state, the first effect (display of the confirmation screen) is executed with this as an opportunity. Then, when a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation in the third state, the process returns to the second state (movie playback), and the above flow is repeated. On the other hand, when the operation is detected in the second state or the third state, the process returns to the first state (standby A) and the above flow is repeated.

(12) During the execution of the effect of the above (11), the movable body of the above (2) may operate in a different manner according to each state of the above (11) by the movable body control means.

Even with such a solution, as in the case of the above-mentioned solution 1, the player is given a freshness in the production as compared with a general gaming machine in which the screen is simply displayed and the image is reproduced. The appealing power can be further enhanced, and the movement of the movable body makes it possible to attract the player and pay attention to the production. Further, since the effect to be executed during the customer waiting state and the operation of the movable body are controlled based on the state and the presence / absence of detection of the operation, the execution control of the effect can be performed efficiently and concisely.

[Solution G group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solving means uses a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element related to a predetermined lottery, a lottery element storage means for storing the lottery element, and the predetermined lottery element. Depending on the lottery execution means for executing the lottery, the special game execution means for executing the special game when the result of the predetermined lottery is won, and the memory state of the lottery element during the execution of the special game. The special game effect executing means is provided with a special game effect executing means capable of executing a special game effect having different contents of the effect, and the special game effect executing means is in a state in which the memory state of the lottery element is capable of executing the continuous special game. If there is, it is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a special gaming effect suggesting that an advantageous gaming state continues.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) Acquire lottery elements (special symbol jackpot random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) related to a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery).
(2) The lottery element of (1) above can be stored. The lottery elements can be stored, for example, up to a predetermined upper limit (up to 4 per symbol).
(3) A predetermined lottery is executed using the lottery element of (2) above.

(4) If the result of the predetermined lottery in (3) above is a winning (big hit or small hit), a special game (big hit game or small hit game) is executed.
(5) During the execution of the special game of (4) above, it is possible to execute a special game effect in which the content of the effect differs depending on the memory state (content of memory or number of memories) of the lottery element.

(6) The special game effect executing means suggests that if the memory state of the lottery element is a state in which continuous special games can be executed, the game state advantageous to the player continues (continuous special games). (Suggesting that is executed) Makes it possible to execute a special game effect. In addition, continuous means that the special game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined number of fluctuations (within several times to several hundred times). The continuity may be a continuation using the limiter function, or may be a continuation due to an accidental event (a situation in which a big hit happens to be continuous). The advantageous gaming state is a state in which at least one of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a high probability state.

According to the present solution, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the special game effect in which the content of the effect differs depending on the state of the memory of the lottery element. Therefore, the memory of the lottery element which is not related to the special game is stored. The content of the special game production can be changed depending on the state of, and as a result, a novel game machine can be provided.

Further, according to the present solution, since a special game effect suggesting that the advantageous game state continues (continuity) is executed based on the state of memory of the lottery element, the advantageous game is performed by the special game effect. Whether or not the state (special game) is continuous can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solving means uses a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element related to a predetermined lottery, a lottery element storage means for storing the lottery element, and the predetermined lottery element. Depending on the lottery execution means for executing the lottery, the special game execution means for executing the special game when the result of the predetermined lottery is won, and the memory state of the lottery element during the execution of the special game. The special game effect executing means is provided with a special game effect executing means capable of executing a special game effect having different contents of the effect, and the special game effect executing means is in a state in which the memory state of the lottery element is capable of executing the continuous special game. If there is, the first special game effect suggesting that the advantageous game state continues can be executed, and if the memory state of the lottery element is a state in which the continuous special game cannot be executed, the advantageous game It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second special gaming effect that does not suggest that the state continues.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) Acquire lottery elements (special symbol jackpot random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) related to a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery).
(2) The lottery element of (1) above can be stored. The lottery elements can be stored, for example, up to a predetermined upper limit (up to 4 per symbol).
(3) A predetermined lottery is executed using the lottery element of (2) above.

(4) If the result of the predetermined lottery in (3) above is a winning (big hit or small hit), a special game (big hit game or small hit game) is executed.
(5) During the execution of the special game of (4) above, it is possible to execute a special game effect in which the content of the effect differs depending on the memory state (content of memory or number of memories) of the lottery element.
For example, if the memory state of the lottery element is the first state (a state in which the memory of a specific content does not exist), the first special game effect can be executed, and the memory state of the lottery element is the second state (a specific state). If there is a memory of the contents), the second special game effect can be executed.

(6) The special game effect executing means suggests that if the memory state of the lottery element is a state in which continuous special games can be executed, the game state advantageous to the player continues (continuous special games). (Suggesting that) 1st special game effect can be executed. In addition, continuous means that the special game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined number of fluctuations (within several times to several hundred times). The continuity may be a continuation using the limiter function, or may be a continuation due to an accidental event (a situation in which a big hit happens to be continuous). The advantageous gaming state is a state in which at least one of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a high probability state.

(7) The special game effect executing means does not suggest that the game state advantageous to the player continues if the memory state of the lottery element is a state in which continuous special games cannot be executed (continuous special games). (Does not suggest that is executed) The second special game effect can be executed.

According to the present solution, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the special game effect in which the content of the effect differs depending on the state of the memory of the lottery element. Therefore, the memory of the lottery element which is not related to the special game is stored. The content of the special game production can be changed depending on the state of, and as a result, a novel game machine can be provided.

Further, according to the present solution, the first special game effect suggesting that the advantageous game state continues (continuity) is executed based on the memory state of the lottery element, or the advantageous game state continues. In order to execute the second special game effect that does not suggest what to do (continuity), the game determines whether or not the advantageous game state (special game) is continuous by the first special game effect and the second special game effect. It can be communicated to people in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, according to the present solution, in a gaming machine having a game property in which an advantageous gaming state (special game) is basically continuous, an exceptional (as an irregular) advantageous gaming state (special game) is present. When a discontinuous situation occurs, the second special game effect that does not suggest that the advantageous gaming state continues (continuity) can be executed, so that the player can use the gaming machine when an exceptional situation occurs. You can avoid the risk of distrust of the game.

SOLUTION: In any of the above-mentioned solving means, the gaming machine of the present solving means is that the special game effect executing means is triggered by the occurrence of a predetermined event during the execution of the special game, and the lottery element is described. It is a gaming machine characterized by being able to confirm the state of memory of.

In the present solution, the special game effect executing means is a lottery element triggered by the occurrence of a predetermined event during the execution of the special game (V winning occurs, the game ball passes through the probability variation area). Makes it possible to check the state of memory.

According to the present solution, in order to confirm the memory state of the lottery element when a predetermined event occurs during the execution of the special game, a method of confirming the memory state of the lottery element at the start of the special game. In comparison with the above, the execution time of the confirmation process can be delayed, and the occurrence of irregularity can be dealt with for a longer period of time by the delay.

[Solution H group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution means a first storage means that stores data for production in advance, a second storage means that is different from the first storage means, and a first storage means in the first storage means after the power is turned on. A transfer means for transferring data stored in a predetermined area to the second storage means, a lamp capable of emitting light in a plurality of modes, and a predetermined period until the transfer of data by the transfer means is completed. It is characterized by being provided with an effect operation control means capable of causing the lamp to emit light in a predetermined mode.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) In the first storage means (for example, CGROM), data used for the effect (for example, a drawing material necessary for drawing an effect image to be displayed on a liquid crystal screen and an audio material output from a speaker) are stored in the first storage means (for example, CGROM). It is stored in advance.

(2) In addition to the first storage means of (1) above, a second storage means (for example, DRAM) is provided.

(3) The data stored in the predetermined area (for example, the area allocated for the audio material) in the first storage means of the above (1) is stored in the second storage means of the above (2) after the power is turned on. Transferred.

(4) The lamp is provided so as to be capable of emitting light in a plurality of modes.

(5) The effect operation control means has the above (4) over a predetermined period until the data transfer of the above (3) is completed (for example, the period from when the lamp can be controlled until the data transfer is completed). ) Can be made to emit light in a predetermined mode (for example, alternating blinking every second). At this time, a liquid crystal display may be used in addition to the lamp to display the screen in a predetermined manner (for example, display an image composed of the characters "returning to screen display").

According to the present solution, at least the lamp can emit light in a predetermined mode for a predetermined period until the data transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means is completed, so that the gaming machine is in the stage of preparation for activation. It is possible to reliably notify the people around (the staff of the game hall and the players) of the fact that the game is located.

Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution has a first storage means that stores data for production in advance, a second storage means that is different from the first storage means, and a first storage means in the first storage means after the power is turned on. A transfer means for transferring data stored in a predetermined area to the second storage means, a movable body capable of operating in a plurality of modes, and a predetermined period until the transfer of data by the transfer means is completed. The movable body is provided with an effect motion control means capable of operating the movable body in a predetermined mode.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations in addition to the configurations (1) to (3) above.
(6) The movable body is provided so as to be able to operate in a plurality of modes.

(7) The effect operation control means is used for the above-mentioned (for example, the period from when the movable body can be controlled until the data transfer is completed) until the data transfer of the above (3) is completed. It is possible to operate the movable body of 6) in a predetermined mode (for example, small vibration at the origin position). At this time, a liquid crystal display may be used in addition to the movable body to perform screen display in a predetermined mode (for example, display of an image composed of the characters "returning to screen display").

According to the present solution, at least the movable body can operate in a predetermined mode for a predetermined period until the data transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means is completed, so that the gaming machine is ready to start. It is possible to reliably notify the people around (game staff and players) that they are in the stage.

Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is the solution 1 or 2, based on the main control means for controlling the execution of the game and the instruction information from the main control means after the lapse of the predetermined period. While giving an effect instruction to the effect operation control means, the effect control means further includes an effect control means for limiting the effect instruction based on the instruction information in the predetermined period, and the effect control means is the effect control means from the effect control means. It is characterized in that the above-mentioned aspect can be controlled based on an effect instruction.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(8) In the gaming machine, when the gaming ball is launched, it flows down in the gaming area while being guided by an obstacle nail, a windmill, a structure, or the like. In the process, when the game ball enters the starting area (starting winning opening) and a lottery opportunity occurs, a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed, and the symbol (special symbol) is displayed over a predetermined variation time. After the variable display, the stop display is performed in a manner indicating the result of a predetermined lottery. Then, when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode, the winning game is executed thereafter. The execution of such a game is controlled by the main control means.

(9) The effect control means gives an effect instruction to the effect operation control means according to (5) or (7) above. More specifically, the effect control means gives an effect instruction based on the instruction information (effect command) from the main control means in (8) above after the elapse of a predetermined period. On the other hand, in the predetermined period, the effect instruction based on the instruction information from the main control means is restricted, and the effect instruction based on the instruction information (for example, the production inspection start command) is given only to a part of the instruction information (for example, the production inspection start command).

(10) The effect operation control means of the above (5) or (7) is based on the effect instruction from the effect control means of the above (9), and the mode of the effect operation (specifically, the lamp of the above (4)). It is possible to control the light emitting mode of (6) or the operating mode of the movable body according to (6) above.

In the present solution, even if the effect control means receives instruction information from the main control means, all of them are received for a predetermined period, that is, during the data transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means. Does not process, but processes some instruction information and gives an effect instruction to the effect operation control means, while discards all other instruction information without processing. Then, the effect operation control means can control the effect operation of the target effect device (lamp or movable body) based on the effect instruction from the effect control means.

Therefore, according to the present solution, no effect instruction is given to the effect operation control means based on the instruction information except for a part, so that the operation by the above effect device is continued for a predetermined period, and the gaming machine is activated. It is possible to give the highest priority to the notification that the game is in the preparation stage, and it is possible to more reliably notify the people around the gaming machine.

Further, according to the present solution, since some instruction information is given a production instruction based on the instruction information, under a specific situation where some instruction information is output (for example, at the time of development or production inspection). It is possible to end the operation to be executed in the start preparation stage and quickly shift to a state in which another operation can be executed, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency under such a situation.

[Solution Group I]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution means a main control means that controls the execution of a game and outputs various information, a first storage means that stores data for production in advance, and the first storage means. A second storage means that is different from the second storage means, and a transfer means that transfers data stored in a predetermined area in the first storage means to the second storage means after the power is turned on. It is possible to perform the effect operation by the operation execution means and the effect operation execution means in a predetermined mode over a predetermined period until the transfer of data by the transfer means is completed, and the main control means within the predetermined period. It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect control means capable of continuing the effect operation according to the predetermined mode even if the maintenance operation information indicating the execution of the maintenance operation is output.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) In a gaming machine, when a gaming ball is launched, it flows down in the gaming area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc., and in the process, it passes through some area or various entrances. Or enter the ball. The execution of the game is controlled by the main control means in response to these events occurring in the game area. In addition, various information (effect commands) are output from the main control means.

(2) In the first storage means (for example, CGROM), data used for the effect (for example, a drawing material necessary for drawing an effect image to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen and an audio material output from the speaker) are stored in the first storage means (for example, CGROM). It is stored in advance.

(3) In addition to the first storage means of (2) above, a second storage means (for example, DRAM) is provided.

(4) The data stored in the predetermined area (for example, the area allocated for the audio material) in the first storage means of the above (2) is stored in the second storage means of the above (3) after the power is turned on. Transferred.

(5) The effect operation execution means is a device capable of executing an effect operation in a plurality of types, and examples thereof include a lamp, a speaker, a liquid crystal display, and a movable body.

(6) The effect control means controls the effect operation of the effect operation execution means of the above (5). Specifically, the effect operation is executed over a predetermined period until the data transfer of the above (4) is completed (for example, a section in which SATA is being prepared from the time when the device can be controlled until the data transfer is completed). The means can be produced and operated in a predetermined mode (unique mode according to a predetermined period). In addition, within a predetermined period, maintenance operation information (for example, RAM clear designation command, power recovery designation command, setting change / confirmation-related production command, etc.) indicating execution of maintenance operation is provided from the main control means of (1) above. Even if it is output, the effect control means can continue the effect operation according to a predetermined mode of the effect operation execution means.

According to the present solution, even if the maintenance operation information is output within a predetermined period until the data transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means is completed (even if the maintenance operation is executed). Since the operation control of the effect device based on the maintenance operation information is not executed and the effect device can continue the effect operation in a predetermined mode for a predetermined period, it is certain that the gaming machine is in the stage of preparation for activation. Can be notified to.

SOLUTION: In the gaming machine of the present solution means, in the solution means 1, when the maintenance operation information is output after the lapse of the predetermined period, the effect control means has the effect operation based on the maintenance operation information. It is characterized in that the executing means can be operated in a manner different from the predetermined mode.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(7) When the maintenance operation information is output after the lapse of the predetermined period of the above (4), the effect control means of the above (6) uses the effect control means of the above (5) based on the maintenance operation information. The effect operation can be performed in a mode different from the predetermined mode (6) above (for example, when a RAM clear designation command is output, a unique mode corresponding to the RAM clear).

According to the present solution, when the maintenance operation information is output after the data transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means is completed (when the maintenance operation is executed), it is based on the maintenance operation information. Since the operation of the effect device can be controlled, it is possible to reliably notify that the maintenance operation has been executed. In addition, if the above notification is executed during the execution of the game, it is possible to make the surrounding players and the staff of the game hall aware that the maintenance operation may have been executed illegally. It is possible to make the notified gaming machine take some action.

Other Solution: In the game machine of the present solution, in Solution 1 or 2, the effect control means has a plurality of abnormality occurrence information indicating the occurrence of an abnormality in the game and a plurality of information among the plurality of maintenance operation information. Is output at the same time after the elapse of the predetermined period, the predetermined effect execution means is set according to the information based on the information having the higher priority set in advance among the plurality of information. It is characterized in that the effect can be operated in a mode different from that of the above.

The following features are added in the present solution.
(8) There is a possibility that a plurality of maintenance operation information of (6) above may be output from the main control means of (1) above, and further, abnormality occurrence information indicating the occurrence of an abnormality in the game (for example, illegal winning or illegal winning) There is a possibility that multiple production commands) indicating abnormal winning frequency, radio wave error, magnetic error, etc. will be output.

(9) The effect control means according to (6) or (7) includes a plurality of information (for example, the abnormality occurrence information and the maintenance operation information) among the plurality of abnormality occurrence information and the plurality of maintenance operation information of the above (8), respectively. Various combinations such as one by one, a plurality of abnormality occurrence information and a plurality of maintenance operation information can occur) are output at the same time after the lapse of the predetermined period of (4) above, and among these information Based on the information having a higher priority (priority) set in advance, the mode of the effect operation executing means of the above (5) according to the information, and a mode different from the predetermined mode of the above (6). Can be operated by

For example, if an effect command (abnormality occurrence information) indicating an illegal prize and a power recovery designation command (maintenance operation information) are output at the same time after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect command indicating an illegal prize is used. Is set to have a higher priority than the power return designation command, so that the operation of the effect operation executing means is controlled in a mode corresponding to the effect command indicating an illegal winning.

In the present solution, if a plurality of abnormality occurrence information or maintenance operation information is output at the same time after the data transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means is completed, the priority among the plurality of output information is given. The operation of the effect device can be controlled based on the higher information of. Higher priority means higher severity of information. Therefore, according to the present solution, since the operation of the effect device is controlled by giving priority to the information having a higher priority, it is possible to more reliably execute the notification regarding the information having a higher severity.

[Solution J group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution has a special image display means that displays a special image at a predetermined opportunity and hides the special image after a lapse of a certain period of time, and when the special image is displayed, the special image is displayed. A covered image display means capable of displaying a transparent or semi-transparent covered image covering the special image in a layer higher than the layer displaying the image, and the covered image in a state where the covered image is displayed. It is a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of effects in a time series in a layer lower than the displayed layer.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) Special image display that displays a special image (image of a premium character) at a predetermined opportunity (when a predetermined production execution lottery is won) and hides the special image after a certain period of time (after a few seconds). Means are provided.

(2) When the special image of the above (1) is displayed, the above (1) is placed in a layer higher than the layer displaying the special image of the above (1) (the layer in front of the player). A covered image display means capable of displaying a transparent or semi-transparent covered image (image of an iridescent filter) covering the special image of the above is provided. Transparent or translucent includes halftone dot indications.

(3) With the cover image of (2) above displayed, a plurality of layers below the layer displaying the cover image of (2) above (layers behind the player) in chronological order. There is an effect execution means that enables the effect of (variable display effect, notice effect, reach effect, etc.) to be executed.

According to the present solution, in the state where the cover image is displayed, the display of the cover image is continued in order to enable the execution of a plurality of effects in a time-series manner in a layer lower than the layer in which the cover image is displayed. Even so, the player can confirm a plurality of effects through the transparent or translucent covered image while looking at the covered image, and as a result, can provide a novel game machine.

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution means, in any of the above-mentioned solutions, an effect symbol display means capable of displaying an effect symbol in a layer lower than the layer for displaying the cover image, and the cover. A special display means capable of displaying at least one of a special effect symbol that fluctuates in conjunction with the effect symbol or a stored image that is an element that changes the effect symbol in a layer higher than the layer for displaying the image. It is a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In this solution, the following configurations are added.
(1) An effect symbol display means for displaying an effect symbol is provided in a layer lower than the layer for displaying the covered image.
(2) A special effect symbol (fourth symbol) that fluctuates in conjunction with the effect symbol or a stored image (holding image) that is an element that changes the effect symbol in a layer higher than the layer on which the cover image is displayed. A special display means for displaying at least one of them is provided.

Only the special effect symbol may be displayed, only the stored image may be displayed, or the special effect symbol and the stored image may be displayed in the layer higher than the layer on which the covered image is displayed. Further, an image (information image) different from the special effect symbol or the stored image may be displayed in a layer higher than the layer in which the cover image is displayed.

According to the present solution, since the effect symbol is displayed in a layer lower than the layer in which the cover image is displayed, the variable display effect of the effect symbol does not interfere with the cover image, and the cover image has a special feeling. Can be emphasized.

Further, according to the present solution, since the special effect symbol that fluctuates in conjunction with the effect symbol is displayed in the layer higher than the layer in which the cover image is displayed, the special effect symbol that plays a role of displaying the lottery result. It is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility.

Further, according to the present solution, since the stored image, which is an element for changing the effect pattern, is displayed in the layer higher than the layer in which the covered image is displayed, the color of the covered image overlaps with the stored image, and the player It is possible to avoid misunderstanding the expectation of the stored image.

[Solution K group]

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution has a gaming area in which a game ball flows down, a first area in the game area where decorations overlap in the horizontal direction, and a decoration in the horizontal direction in the game area. The second region where the two regions do not overlap, the first light emitting means arranged at the position corresponding to the first region, and the second light emitting means arranged at the position corresponding to the second region are determined to be in a predetermined state. When this is done, the gaming machine includes a light emitting control means that makes it possible to make the light emitting control of the first light emitting means different from the light emitting control of the second light emitting means.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) A game area is provided in which the game ball flows down (moves).
(2) Of the game areas of (1) above, a first area is provided in which decorations (decorative units) overlap in the horizontal direction.
(3) Of the game areas of (1) above, a second area in which decorations do not overlap in the horizontal direction is provided. The decoration of (3) may be the decoration of the above (2), or may be a decoration different from the decoration of the above (2).

(4) A first light emitting means (upper ball passage lamp) is arranged at a position (rear position, overlapping position) corresponding to the first region of the above (2). The first light emitting means does not have to overlap the first region as long as the first region can be irradiated with light.
(5) A second light emitting means (board lamp) is arranged at a position (rear position, overlapping position) corresponding to the second region of the above (3). The second light emitting means does not have to overlap the second region as long as the second region can be irradiated with light.

(6) When it is determined that a predetermined state has occurred (when it is determined that no error has occurred, when it is determined that a specific error has not occurred, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied, an error has occurred. If it does not occur, or if a specific error does not occur), it is possible to make the light emission control of the first light emitting means of the above (4) different from the light emission control of the second light emitting means of the above (5). And.
For example, the light emission control of the first light emitting means can be controlled to be constantly lit from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the power is turned off, and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means is controlled to be lit according to the content of the effect. Can be done.

According to the present solution, when a predetermined state is determined, the light emission control of the first light emitting means and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means can be made different by arranging decorations. The darkened area can be brightened, and the light emission control can be executed according to the content of the effect in the area where the decoration is not arranged. In this way, by flexibly changing the light emission control depending on the presence or absence of the arrangement of the decorations, it is possible to execute efficient light emission control, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

SOLUTION: In the gaming machine of the present solution, when the light emitting control means is not determined to be in the predetermined state, the light emitting control of the first light emitting means and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means are common. It is a gaming machine characterized by making it possible.

In the present solution, if the light emission control means is not determined to be in a predetermined state (if it is determined that an error has occurred, or if it is determined that a specific error has occurred, the predetermined condition is satisfied. If not, if an error has occurred, or if a specific error has occurred), it is possible to share the light emission control of the first light emitting means and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means. For example, the light emission control of the first light emitting means and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means are all turned off, and the light emitting control of the first light emitting means and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means are all turned on. be able to.

According to the present solution, basically, the light emission control of the first light emitting means and the light emitting control of the second light emitting means are different, but in some cases, the light emitting control of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are different. Since the light emission control of the means is common, it is possible to execute flexible light emission control according to the situation as compared with the method in which the light emission control is uniformly different, and as a result, a novel gaming machine is provided. can do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in playability.

According to the present invention, a novel game property can be exhibited.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by a control method.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the demonstration effect can be effectively executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by control when the power is turned on.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by control when the power is turned on.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[FIGS. 1 to 86: Embodiment A] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a figure which shows the detail of the start device 400. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the solenoid management processing. It is a timing chart which shows the movable pattern of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (4/4). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (1/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (2/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (3/4). It is a figure which shows the 1st effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect (4/4). It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect example of the button repeated hitting effect executed during the reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the button repeated hitting effect management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the button continuous press effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the start of a button repeated press effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during execution of a button continuous press effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a button pressing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a lever input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the end of a button repeated press effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the success scenario and the failure scenario of the button repeated hitting production. It is a figure which shows the operation image of a success scenario. It is a figure which shows the operation image of the failure scenario. [FIGS. 87 to 164: Embodiment B] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process in preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the non-time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a launch direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a table which compares and shows two effect modes which can be selected in a drive mode. It is a figure explaining the usage mode of RAM in an effect control device. It is a figure explaining the usage mode of the execution area, the pseudo area for earth mode, and the pseudo area for space mode. It is a figure which shows the use example of the execution area at each time point after the change start of a special symbol. It is a figure explaining the flow of the command stored in the execution area. It is a figure explaining the usage mode of the RAM in the effect control device as a comparative example. It is a table which compares the embodiment and the comparative example with respect to the usage mode of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the drum unit production management processing. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern of the measures for immediate termination of a villa state. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special variation pattern considering irregular hitting. [FIGS. 165 to 269: Embodiment C] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the state that a plurality of movable bodies are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that each movable body is in the origin position. It is a figure which shows the state that each movable body is in the origin position, but only the middle front left movable body 40f6 is in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process in preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the non-time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in the animal mode of the non-time shortening state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the outline of the drive mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the out-of-situ fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is executed in a memory digestion section. It is a figure which shows the difference between the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in the memory digestion section, and the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 1st correction process executed in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd correction process executed in an animal mode. It is a figure which shows the production example of the deciding object operation (1/4). It is a figure which shows the production example of the deciding object operation (2/4). It is a figure which shows the production example of the deciding object operation (3/4). It is a figure which shows the production example of the deciding object operation (4/4). It is a figure which shows the registration method of a message. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the comparative example. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a launch direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a mode effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of a big hit variable winning device operation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of system operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a correction process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a motor and a movable body. It is a figure which shows the 1st correction table which is referred in the 1st correction process which is executed at the time of the fluctuation determination of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd correction table which is referred in the 2nd correction process which is executed after the lapse of a predetermined time after the start of fluctuation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correction table which is referred in the correction processing which is executed at the time of the fluctuation determination of a comparative example. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the movable body control part processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the lamp control part processing. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern of the measures for immediate termination of a villa state. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special variation pattern considering irregular hitting. [Fig. 270-Fig. 365: Embodiment D] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the state that a plurality of movable bodies are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that each movable body is in the origin position. It is a figure which shows the state that each movable body is in the origin position, but only the middle front left movable body 40f6 is in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position. It is a figure which shows the state that the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the state that the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in a movable position. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process in preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the non-time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in the animal mode of the non-time shortening state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the outline of the drive mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the out-of-situ fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is executed in a memory digestion section. It is a figure which shows the difference between the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in the memory digestion section, and the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 1st correction process executed in a normal mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd correction process executed in an animal mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a launch direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a mode effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of a big hit variable winning device operation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of system operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a correction process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a motor and a movable body. It is a figure which shows the 1st correction table which is referred in the 1st correction process which is executed at the time of the fluctuation determination of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd correction table which is referred in the 2nd correction process which is executed after the lapse of a predetermined time after the start of fluctuation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correction table which is referred in the correction processing which is executed at the time of the fluctuation determination of a comparative example. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern of the measures for immediate termination of a villa state. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special variation pattern considering irregular hitting. [FIGS. 366 to 443: Embodiment E] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process in preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the non-time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of a jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the time shortening state, and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in the animal mode of the non-time shortening state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the outline of the drive mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the out-of-situ fluctuation of the 1st special symbol is executed in a memory digestion section. It is a figure which shows the difference between the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in the memory digestion section, and the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a launch direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a mode effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of a big hit variable winning device operation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the drum unit production management processing. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern of the measures for immediate termination of a villa state. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special variation pattern considering irregular hitting. [Fig. 444 to Fig. 531: Embodiment F] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a start device. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a figure which shows the 7-segment display device and its periphery in an enlarged manner. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the constituent column of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the solenoid management processing. It is a timing chart which shows the movable pattern of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in a drive mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time shortening state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. (4/4). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the demo management process of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the movable body management process at the time of a demonstration of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the operation detection time processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the demo state reset process of 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change of the demo state immediately after power-on of 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change of the demo state before and after a break during a game of 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure explaining the operation example of the 7-segment display device during the demonstration production of 1st Embodiment (1/2). It is a continuous figure explaining the operation example of the 7-segment display device during the demonstration production of 1st Embodiment (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the demo management process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the demo state update process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the handle detection time processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the demo state reset process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the reproduction permission flag reset process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change of the demo state immediately after power-on of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change of the demo state before and after the break during the game of 2nd Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the structural example of the model explanation demo movie of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the display stop display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a figure which shows the outline of the game property of this embodiment. [Fig. 532-Fig. 599: Embodiment G] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening). The second special symbol is a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol of a small hit, the winning probability of a small hit, and the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol small hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening). The second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the count cut counter value management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during special symbol change. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the limiter management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a premium bonus production (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a premium bonus production (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a premium bonus production (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a premium bonus production. It is a continuous figure which shows the other production example about a premium bonus production (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the other production example about a premium bonus production (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special bonus effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of the first hit V prize occurrence. [FIGS. 600 to 675: Embodiment H] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "12 round normal symbol" or "12 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (1/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (2/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (3/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (4/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which partially shows an example of a big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the like. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the example of the big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol". It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of sound-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of various interrupt processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing chart which shows the process executed by the effect control device at the time of turning on the power to the pachinko machine, and the change of the state in the effect control device and the main control device accompanying this. In the comparative example, it is a timing chart which shows the process executed by the effect control device at the time of turning on the power to the pachinko machine, and the change of the state in the effect control device and the main control device accompanying this. It is a timing chart which shows the detail of the change of the process executed by the effect control device when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows conceptually by comparing the flow of data in a drawing process with a power-on state and a normal time. It is a continuous figure which shows the operation example of the effect device with the lapse of time after the power is turned on to the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the normal production control processing. It is a block diagram which shows the main functional structure related to a display control process. It is the schematic (1/3) which shows the mode of the preload processing with a specific example. It is the schematic (2/3) which shows the mode of the preload processing with a specific example. It is a schematic diagram (3/3) which shows the mode of the preload processing with a specific example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the update mode of the preload area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of Vsync interrupt control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the upper task start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the drawing end interrupt process and the preload end interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process about drawing in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process at the time of delay of a command construction process. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process at the time of delay of a preload process. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process at the time of delay of a transfer / drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device. [FIGS. 676 to 756: Embodiment I] It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "12 round normal symbol" or "12 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (1/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (2/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (3/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (4/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which partially shows an example of a big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the like. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the example of the big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol". It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of sound-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of various interrupt processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing chart which shows the process executed by the effect control device at the time of turning on the power to the pachinko machine, and the change of the state in the effect control device and the main control device accompanying this. In the comparative example, it is a timing chart which shows the process executed by the effect control device at the time of turning on the power to the pachinko machine, and the change of the state in the effect control device and the main control device accompanying this. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the error notification about fraud (1/3). It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the error notification about fraud (2/3). It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the error notification about fraud (3/3). It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the error notification about payout. It is a timing chart which shows the detail of the change of the process executed by the effect control device when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows conceptually by comparing the flow of data in a drawing process with a power-on state and a normal time. It is a continuous figure which shows the operation example of the effect device with the lapse of time after the power is turned on to the effect control device (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the operation example of the effect device with the lapse of time after the power is turned on to the effect control device (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the normal production control processing. It is a block diagram which shows the main functional structure related to a display control process. It is the schematic (1/3) which shows the mode of the preload processing with a specific example. It is the schematic (2/3) which shows the mode of the preload processing with a specific example. It is a schematic diagram (3/3) which shows the mode of the preload processing with a specific example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the update mode of the preload area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of Vsync interrupt control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the upper task start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the drawing end interrupt process and the preload end interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process about drawing in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process at the time of delay of a command construction process. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process at the time of delay of a preload process. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process at the time of delay of a transfer / drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device. [FIGS. 757 to 837: Embodiment J] It is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening). The second special symbol is a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol of a small hit, the winning probability of a small hit, and the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol small hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening). The second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the count cut counter value management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during special symbol change. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the limiter management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a premium bonus production (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a premium bonus production (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a premium bonus production (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a premium bonus production. It is a continuous figure which shows the other production example about a premium bonus production (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the other production example about a premium bonus production (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the reach effect (1/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the reach production (2/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the reach production (3/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the reach production (4/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a rainbow color filter (1/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a rainbow color filter (2/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a rainbow color filter (3/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a rainbow color filter (4/5). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a rainbow color filter (5/5). It is a figure which shows typically the hierarchy which displays various images (1/2). It is a figure which shows typically the hierarchy which displays various images (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the advance notice selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a premium production lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special bonus effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of the first hit V prize occurrence. [FIGS. 838 to 904: Embodiment K] It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which showed the game board unit visually. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper end of the pachinko machine which showed the game board unit visually | tilted to the rear side. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows only the game board unit 8 and the decoration unit 400. FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken along line VII-VII of FIG. It is a figure which shows the LED board 600. It is a front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content about fraud etc. (1/5). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content about fraud etc. (2/5). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content about fraud etc. (3/5). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content about fraud etc. (4/5). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content about fraud etc. (5/5). It is a figure explaining the detail of the error processing content about payout and the like. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the big role production in the case of corresponding to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (1/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the big role production in the case of corresponding to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (2/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (3/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (4/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which partially shows an example of a big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the like. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the example of the big role middle production executed during the big hit game when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol". It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the processing at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a lamp effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the upper ball passage lamp management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of other lamp management processing.

The present invention presents a plurality of [Embodiment A], [Embodiment B], and the like below. Each of these plurality of embodiments (which are largely distinguished as [Embodiment A], [Embodiment B], etc.) is a single embodiment, and terms, symbols, and procedures used to describe each embodiment. (Step number), means name, etc., including those shown in the figure, may be the same as those used in the description of one embodiment and those used in the description of another embodiment, but one embodiment. When used in the above description, it is only for the one embodiment alone. For example, when [Embodiment A] is presented at the beginning of the explanation, the terms used in the following explanations are terms for [Embodiment A] and are not used in other explanations such as [Embodiment B]. Means that. Similarly, when another [Embodiment B] is presented at the beginning of the explanation, it is a term used for the explanation of [Embodiment B], and is used for other explanations of [Embodiment A], [Embodiment C], etc. It means that it is not. Similarly, in the description, the cases of "this embodiment", "one embodiment", "another embodiment", "other embodiments", etc. are also used in the explanation of one embodiment. It is about the embodiment alone. Regarding the plurality of embodiments presented, it is possible to combine the configurations of the respective embodiments with each other, and the combination of the respective configurations is not excluded among the plurality of embodiments. Therefore, the present invention also includes aspects in which the configuration of one embodiment is combined with the configuration of another embodiment.

[Embodiment A]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to the CR unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the CR unit, but may be a model not connected to the CR unit.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral). The glass frame decorative lamp 52 includes a button lamp built in the push button 45a.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating means]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 45 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). A circular push button 45a is arranged in the center of the operation unit 45, and a rod-shaped lever member 45b is arranged on the left side of the push button 45a. The operation unit 45 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the push button 45a is pressed by the player, and in another scene, the lever member 45b is pulled toward the front side by the player. By operating the operation unit 45 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (preliminary effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game. The operation unit 45 (push button 45a and lever member 45b) is an operation means capable of receiving an operation input by a player. In the present embodiment, the push button 45a is the first operating means, and the lever member 45b is the second operating means.

Further, around the push button 45a, a ring-shaped portion 45c is installed so as to surround the push button 45a. Unlike the push button 45a and the lever member 45b, the ring-shaped portion 45c is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the lever member 45b. Further, the ring-shaped portion 45c has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image (button image) showing the operation method of the operation unit 45 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 45c in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, in the ring-shaped portion in the reduced image, all the cells are turned on and displayed when the operation is possible, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. Then, when the remaining time is exhausted, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 45c does not have a light source and does not turn on / off unlike the ring-shaped portion shown in the reduced version image displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but the ring-shaped portion in the reduced version image does not turn on / off. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation. A light source (LED) may be arranged in the ring-shaped portion 45c.

Further, the push button 45a can be projected upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. The push button 45a has a button lamp (light source) inside. The push button 45a normally emits light in the default color (for example, white), but if the expectation of winning is high, it may emit light in a colored color (blue or red), and may emit more colorfully when protruding. it can. By projecting the push button 45a, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button at the time of projecting is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are mounted on the same operation unit 45, but the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be provided as independent operating means. Further, these operating means may be arranged at a close position or may be arranged at a distant position.
Further, an operating member (third operating means) different from the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be arranged. As another operating member, for example, one that performs an operation such as pushing in the back direction of the gaming machine, or one that performs an operation such as pulling in the front direction of the gaming machine.

A cross key button 44 is installed on the right side of the operation unit 45. The cross key button 44 is composed of, for example, four push-type buttons. Specifically, the cross key button 44 is an upper button arranged on the gaming machine side, a right button arranged on the right side, a lower button arranged on the player side, and a left arranged on the left side when viewed from the player. It consists of buttons. By pressing the cross key button 44, the player can set the game environment and input the player's personal data into the game machine. Further, the player can switch the auto button function ON and OFF by pressing the upper button of the cross key button 44.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 14).

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is centered on the effect unit 40 on the left side portion (first area, left-handed area) and the right side portion ( It is roughly divided into a second area, a right-handed area) and a lower part. Further, in the game area 8a, a start device 400, a start gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, etc. are located around the effect unit 40. Are distributed and installed. Of these, the start device 400 is located in the lower center of the left side portion of the game area 8a. The details of the start device 400 will be described later. Further, on the right side portion of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters the start device 400, enters (wins) the normal winning openings 22 and 25, or , The variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the start device 400 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , The first special winning opening 30b can be entered (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28, and has one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example, to open / close the opening / closing member 30a. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced by using the lower end edge portion as a hinge so as to fall forward, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game balls can flow in, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 employs a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed inside the start device 400, and game balls that do not win in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, each start winning opening of the start device 400, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the device 31 (second prize opening 31b, specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward toward the specific region 31x, and the other second passage 31e extends downward toward the discharge hole 31y.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4C, at this time, the slide member 31c for the specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is the slide for the specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the right by the member 31c and heads toward the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 5D, it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the right by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

6 to 12 are views showing the details of the start device 400.
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the start device 400.
As shown in FIG. 6, the start device 400 includes a base member 410, a cover member 420, a passage port 430, a right movable device 480, a left movable device 490, and the like.

The base member 410 is a member that serves as a base for the start device 400, and is attached to the game board unit 8 by a fastening member such as a screw.
The cover member 420 is a member attached to the front surface side of the base member 410, and various start winning openings and out openings are arranged inside the cover member 420.

The passage port 430 is arranged in the center of the upper part of the cover member 420, and is an entrance (where the game ball can pass) for the game ball to enter the start device 400.

The right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 (see FIG. 7) of the start device 400.

The left movable device 490 is attached to the rear left side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the left blade member 442 (see FIG. 7) of the start device 400.

7 and 8 are views showing the internal structure of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 (right blade member 438 and left blade member 442) are closed, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 are open. Indicates the state.

As shown in FIG. 7, a guide passage 432 inclined in the lower right direction is formed below the passage port 430.
A one-hole crune member 434 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 432. The crune member 434 is a mortar-shaped member having a large opening on the upper side, and an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface.
Below the crune member 434, a guide passage 436 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

A right blade member 438 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 436.
At the lower left of the right blade member 438, a guide passage 440 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
A left blade member 442 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 440.
At the lower left of the left blade member 442, a guide passage 444 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

The start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454 are entry openings through which game balls can enter.
The right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 can operate to affect the entry into the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454 (openable / closable, movable). Possible) It is a movable body that can be moved.
Further, the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are arranged above (upstream) the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the game ball is placed on the start device right starting winning opening 450 or the start device. It is a member that affects whether or not to enter (whether or not to pass) the middle start winning opening 452.

When the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned on, the right blade member 438 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start device right start winning opening 450. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned off, the right blade member 438 maintains a closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the right blade member 438 and enters the guide passage 440. Be guided.

Further, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned on, the left blade member 442 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start winning opening 452 in the start device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned off, the left blade member 442 keeps the closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the left blade member 442 and enters the guide passage 444. Be guided.

In the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, when the movable pin inserted near the center of the member is pushed upward, the movable pin moves along the guide groove arranged rearward, and the left side rotates. It rotates about the axis and shifts to the open state (see FIG. 8).

Below the right blade member 438, a start device right start winning opening 450 is arranged. The start device right start winning opening 450 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass through) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. ..

Below the left blade member 442, a start winning opening 452 in the start device is arranged. The start winning opening 452 in the starting device is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass through) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. ..

At the lower left of the guide passage 444, a start device left start winning opening 454 is arranged. The start device left start winning opening 454 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery trigger (predetermined trigger) for a normal symbol lottery.

On the right side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 462 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 462. On the right side of the out port 32, a guide passage 460 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

On the left side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 464 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 464.

On the right side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 466 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
On the left side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 468 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 468.

On the right side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 470 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.
On the left side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 472 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.
An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 472. On the left side of the out port 32, a guide passage 474 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.

Below the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454, the start device illumination board 476 is arranged.
Three lamps (LEDs) 478 are arranged on the start device illumination board 476, and when a game ball enters each start winning opening, the corresponding lamps are turned on.

Next, the flow of the game ball inside the start device 400 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 9, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434.
Then, when the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device left start winning opening 454. Enter the ball.

Since the start device left start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device left starting winning opening 454, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device left starting winning opening switch.

On the other hand, even when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the flow of the game ball is the same as when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed until the middle.
That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434.

Then, when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls at the position of the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device right start winning opening 450. Alternatively, the ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device.

Since the start device right start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device right starting winning opening 450, the entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device right starting winning opening switch.
Further, since the start device middle start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device middle start winning opening 452, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device middle start winning opening switch.

Here, when the game ball enters the passage port 430 of the start device 400, it always enters any of the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454. This is not the case, and in some cases, the ball may enter the out port 32. Further, not only the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 of the start device 400 but also the game ball that has not entered the passage port 430 of the start device 400 may enter the out port 32 from the side surface side. ..
Although the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are described in the example of simultaneously shifting to the open state, it is also possible not to shift to the open state at the same time.

11 and 12 are side views of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 11 shows a state in which the blade member (for example, the right blade member 438 in FIG. 10) is closed, and FIG. 12 shows a state in which the blade member is open.

As described above, the right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 of the start device 400.

Further, the right movable device 480 includes a start device right solenoid 481, a coil member 482, a flapper member 483, an arm member 484, a hook member 485, a spring member 486, and the like. The hook member 485 may be configured as a part of the arm member 484 (the hook member 485 and the arm member 484 may be the same component).

When the start device right solenoid 481 is energized by the main control device, the coil member 482 is excited and the plate-shaped flapper member 483 is attracted to the coil member 482.
The flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 are connected to each other, and when the flapper member 483 moves upward, the arm member 484 also moves upward. Further, an arc-shaped hook member 485 is connected to the tip of the arm member 484. Therefore, as the flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 move, the hook member 485 also moves upward (see FIG. 12).

Then, when the hook member 485 moves upward, the hook member 485 pushes up the movable pin 487 inserted in the right blade member 438, and the right blade member 438 shifts from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 10). In this case, the coil member 482 and the flapper member 483 are prevented from coming into contact with each other by a stopper (not shown) (see FIG. 12).

Further, when the start device right solenoid 481 is not energized, the flapper member 483 is arranged at a position away from the coil member 482 by the spring member 486 (or the weight of the spring member 486 and the flapper member 483). (See FIG. 11).
Although the right movable device 480 has been described here, the same configuration is adopted for the left movable device 490.

[Characteristics of start device]
There are many prize-winning device units that are provided with an opening / closing member to limit winning in a specific winning area as a conventional technique, but as in the present embodiment, the starting winning opening is provided. There is no configuration in which the opening / closing member constantly opens / closes from the time the power is turned on, and the opening / closing stabilizes the starting winning rate.

The start device 400 randomly changes various symbols by allocating the game balls that have entered the passage port 430 into the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening (winning opening, operating opening) of the normal symbol. It has a function.

Hereinafter, the details of the flow of the game ball in the start device 400 will be described.
(1) A passage port 430 is set at the upper part of the start device 400, and the game ball that enters from there heads toward the crune member 434 in one hole, and the time until it is discharged from the crune member 434 is irregular. give away. As a result, it is possible to avoid the rattling due to vibration such as slamming. It is also possible to attach a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor, and a radio wave sensor to the start device 400 to strengthen measures against various types of goto. The crune member 434 is attached to the start device 400 with some play, and can absorb an external impact (such as pounding) by the play, so that the influence of vibration can be avoided.

(2) The game ball discharged from the crune member 434 is guided to a slope-shaped guide passage, and depends on the open / closed state of the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, which are arranged in the middle of the guide passage and open and close constantly. The sphere path changes as follows.

(A) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls from the slope and heads toward the start winning opening of the special symbol held below.
(B) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442. By mounting two blade members on the start device 400, the start device 400 is given two chances to win a prize in the start winning opening of the special symbol.

(3) The game ball that is not picked up by the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 finally heads for the start winning opening of the normal symbol (the normal symbol operating port in which the normal symbol fluctuates).

Further, the start device 400 has the following features.
Out ports are arranged on the left and right of the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol, and the out openings at the bottom of the board surface in general models are deleted.
Since the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are constantly movable, the actuator of the start device 400 is equipped with a flapper type solenoid instead of the generally used push-pull type solenoid to prevent deterioration due to wear. I'm preventing it.

In addition, since the player has to visually follow how the game balls that have entered the start device 400 are distributed, a special symbol start winning opening is used to visually inform the player of this. In addition, a lamp (LED) is placed at the bottom of the starting winning opening of the normal symbol to have a function to illuminate at the winning timing.

Then, by adopting the start device 400 having such a configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) By mounting the crune member 434, the timing of the game ball entering the start device 400 toward the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which is opened and closed, is given irregularity to the player. The movement of the game ball enhances the feeling of exhilaration, and the game ball is launched at the timing of opening the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which makes it possible to take measures against so-called capture strikes.

(2) By mounting the out port on the start device 400, the area of the out port arranged at the lower part of the board surface can be applied to the start device 400, and the start device 400 and the out port can be integrated to make the start device 400 compact. It is possible to make effective use of the lower part of the board.

(3) By adopting a flapper type solenoid, it is possible to prevent wear of the solenoid itself and ensure durability that can withstand constant movement.

(4) By arranging a lamp (LED) below the starting winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol and illuminating it at the winning timing, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the prize has been won.

FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33 alternately lights three lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the ordinary symbol by turning on or off the lamps. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

When the game ball passes through the start gate 20 or when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a causes a passage that triggers an operation lottery each time. In the sense of remembering that, the display mode changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the display mode after decreasing by one each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts with the passage. It changes to. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device middle starting winning opening 452, it is memorized that the entry has occurred. The display mode changes to the later display mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the display mode after the reduction by one. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the occurrence of the winning ball is memorized. It changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4), and changes to the display mode after the decrease by one each time the change of the special symbol is started triggered by the entry of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). , The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device starting winning opening 452. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start to fluctuate (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. A liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 is provided with an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol or a fourth symbol. First, various production images are displayed. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k flows into the passage port 430 of the start device 400 directly below the ball release path 40e. It will be easier.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

A 7-segment display device 200 is arranged below the liquid crystal display 42. Three 7-segment LEDs are arranged on the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment display device 200 fluctuates and displays the 7-segment effect symbol while the special symbol fluctuates, and displays the effect during the big hit game.

Further, a storage display device 300 is arranged at the lower right of the 7-segment display device 200. The storage display device 300 can execute an effect related to memory by emitting light (lighting, turning off, etc.) of the built-in LED.

The storage display device 300 is provided with a first special symbol storage display area M1, a second special symbol storage display area M2, the storage display area X1, and an effect display area X2.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the first special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a). There is.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the second special symbol storage display area M2, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the second special symbol (the number of displays of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a). There is.

One full-color LED is arranged in the storage display area X1, and the LED is lit, indicating that the special symbol is changing.
One or a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in the effect display area X2, and it is shown that the degree of expectation of winning the special symbol lottery increases depending on the lighting color of the LEDs. Since the effect display area X2 is lit in the same color as the internally drawn LED color (holding color), it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

When the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the target LED is changed, but in the present embodiment, the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 are white. The LED is arranged. Therefore, the color change effect cannot be executed in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2. Therefore, when the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the effect display area X2 is changed to substitute for the color change effect. However, in this case, since it is difficult to know which memory is the target, it is preferable to blink the target LED.
A full-color LED may be arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 to execute the color change effect.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the start device left start winning opening 454 is provided with a start device left starting winning opening switch 78a for detecting the entry of a game ball.
Further, the game board unit 8 starts corresponding to the start device middle start winning opening 452, the start device right starting winning opening 450, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The in-device start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 are provided.
The start device medium start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening switch 82 are the start device medium starting winning opening 452, the starting device medium starting winning opening 452, and the variable starting winning device 28 (right), respectively. This is for detecting the winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning openings on the left side are installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are used. The winning detection signal and the passing detection signal are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal. ..

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. Further, in the game board unit 8, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device correspond to the start device right start winning opening 450 (right movable device 480) and the start device middle start winning opening 452 (left movable device 490), respectively. A left solenoid 491 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, 491 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. , The specific area 31x, the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452 are opened and closed. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, 491 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The process of making the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player operates the push button 45a or the lever member 45b, the contact signal is sent to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136. Is input to the effect control device 124 through. Furthermore, the above-mentioned cross key button 44 is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player operates the cross key button 44, the contact signal is transmitted through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 to the effect control device 124. Is entered in. Here, an example in which the push button 45a, the lever member 45b, and the cross key button 44 are connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illuminated substrate is installed, the push button 45a and the lever member are used. The 45b and the cross key button 44 may be connected to the saucer illumination board. In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

Further, a button motor 45d is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136.
The button motor 45d is a stepping motor that raises and lowers the push button 45a, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 45. The operation unit control device drives the button motor 45d based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124 to bring the push button 45a into either a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). It can be displaced to the crab.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 and a storage display device 300 are connected to the effect control device 124. The 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 are driven by a control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls these devices. The effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) controls the 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 through a control device (not shown).

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually based on the image data buffered here. Drive to.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 16 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 18), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 18), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 18). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 15).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first It reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the 1-count switch 84, the 2nd count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signals from the mouth switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83, and another event is determined according to the event that has occurred. Execute the process. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the main control CPU 72 draws an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, first special symbol lottery lottery trigger) has occurred.
Further, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 triggers an internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (lottery trigger, second lottery trigger, second special symbol). It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery) has occurred.
Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, or when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the normal symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.

When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. Regarding the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, or the right starting winning opening switch 82, another flowchart is used. It will be described later.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by turning on and off the three LEDs of the normal symbol display device 33 in order, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and among the upper and lower three LEDs, for example, the upper LED is turned on. It is possible to display the stop at the time of non-winning and to display the stop at the time of winning with either of the two LEDs below turned on. Regarding which of the two LEDs below is to be turned on, the main control CPU 72 determines which of the two LEDs is to be turned on, based on the hit stop symbol number determined by the hit lottery, and the stop symbol (hit symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33. The display mode of is determined.

For example, when the winning probability of a normal symbol is set to about 1/1 in the non-time shortened state, the distribution ratio between the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2 existing in two types is "1300: 1". That is, the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 1 as the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol is "1299/1300", and the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 2 of the ordinary symbol as the winning symbol is "1/1300". Then, when the hit symbol 1 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is short-opened (opened for 0.1 seconds), so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, when the winning symbol 2 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds), so that there is a chance that the variable starting winning device 28 can enter the game ball even in the non-time shortened state. Occurs.

By setting the distribution rate of the winning symbol in this way, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuates 1300 times, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time at a rate of about once. In the time-reduced state, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time regardless of whether it corresponds to the hit symbol 1 or the hit symbol 2. In this case, the opening pattern can be different between the hit symbol 1 and the hit symbol 2. Further, when the variable start winning device 28 is long-opened in the non-time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 transmits a variable start winning device long open start command to the effect control device 124.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 78a, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command. The number of prize balls can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game. For example, the number of prize balls of the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, the number of winning balls of the starting winning opening corresponding to the normal symbol is one, and the first large winning opening The number of prize balls in the second major winning opening is 15, and the number of prize balls in the normal winning opening is four. Information on the number of prize balls can also be transmitted to the effect control device 124 as a prize ball content command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are stipulated. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S207a: The main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 that are always movable from the time the power is turned on. Details will be described later in FIG. 45.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) and normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 18). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the first special symbol. To do. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol or the start device left start winning opening switch 78a. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, it is necessary for the normal symbol lottery. Various random number values (ordinary random numbers per symbol, etc.) are acquired. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired various random number values in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 18).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (1st lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 20), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (2nd lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 20, step S46 in FIG. 21) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (when the ball enters the start device middle start winning opening 452 or the start device right start winning opening 450) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). ) Is executed for each. Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a three-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 3 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is three in total, these may be collectively referred to as "three rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the three-round jackpot. As the type of jackpot, not only the jackpot of 3 rounds but also the jackpot of other rounds may be provided.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). A gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state (first state) and a time reduction state (second state) different from the normal gaming state.
By executing such a process, when the transition condition to the time reduction state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode), the main control CPU 72 is displayed. It is possible to shift from the normal gaming state (first state) to the time saving state (second state) (state transition means).

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, "2 round jackpot", "3 round jackpot 1, 2", "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "10 round jackpot" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "2 round jackpot" and "3 round jackpot 1 and 2" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of jackpot, while "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot" are started. Is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. Of the "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot", the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first variable winning device 30 operates in the remaining rounds.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "3 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "1st winning symbol", "3 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "2nd winning symbol", and "2 round jackpot" corresponds to "3rd winning symbol". Corresponds to the big hit of "design". In addition, "10 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "4th winning symbol" (big hit when passing the specific area 31x), and "7 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "5th winning symbol" (passing the specific area 31x). The "4 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of the "6th winning symbol" (the big hit when passing through the specific area 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of prizes (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first prize opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[Second Winning Symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[Third winning symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the second round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which two rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[4th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fourth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the seventh round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player six rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the fourth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player three rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which of the winning symbols is applicable, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, it is possible to shift to the "time reduction state" only for a part of the winning symbols among the plurality of winning symbols.

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

In this way, when the game ball is launched into the left-handed area (first area) and the jackpot (predetermined first winning) is met, the main control CPU 72 enables the jackpot game (first game) to be executed (1st game). First game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is launched into the right-handed area (second area) and corresponds to a small hit (predetermined second winning), the main control CPU 72 may lead to a small hit game (second). (Game) can be executed (second game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is launched into the left-handed area (first area) and the winning symbol 2 is won in the normal symbol lottery (predetermined third winning), the main control CPU 72 receives the small hit winning (predetermined third). The open game (third game) of the variable start winning device 28, which may lead to (2 winning), can be executed (third game execution means).

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol (so-called priority). digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol is applicable), the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then erases (consumes) the remaining random numbers by 1. Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that a control in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored may be adopted without setting such a priority for each special symbol (so-called forward digestion). Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift processing. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 24), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. To do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 with respect to the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 24).

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big hit is set to 1/319, and the probability of winning the small hit is set to 1/6. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, and the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The fluctuation pattern includes various fluctuation patterns such as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern, and the like (the same applies to a large hit and a small hit). The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, may be common table contents regardless of the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, and may be a table according to the winning type at the time of winning. It may be the content.

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 29.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation), whereas the "reach fluctuation" The "pattern" corresponds to a longer fluctuation time (for example, about 30.0 seconds to 150.0 seconds).

The fluctuation pattern may be a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream) is executed. The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the effect symbol changes once or a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: 1st pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: 2nd pseudo variation). Pseudo-variation) is a variation in which the pseudo-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice. Further, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: 3rd pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed 3 times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: 4th pseudo variation). (Fluctuation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed four times.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is only "third winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "99" and "1" is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 99/100 (= 99%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100 minutes. It is 1 (= 1%) of. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 5 times, or 7 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "6 times (or 10 times)" means that when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 6 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times, the time It means that the shortened state ends.

Further, "100 times (or 104 times)" means that the time is shortened when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 104 times. It means that the state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 100/100 (= 100%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or the time reduction.

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "second winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means). When the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the non-time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset to OFF (00H), and the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the time shortened state. In this case, the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set to ON (01H).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the three types is "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fourth winning symbol", "fourth winning symbol A", "fourth winning symbol B", "fourth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "50", "14", "36" has the denominator. It corresponds to the ratio when it is set to 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fourth winning symbol", the "fifth winning symbol", and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol". Is 14/100 (= 14%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol" is 36/100 (= 36%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fourth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H02H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol" or "6th winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal or short. Times) Granted.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol" is applicable (the 4th winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol are limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time is shortened. It is possible that the migration conditions are satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Fig. 24: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 23: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 24). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time-cutting function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time-cutting state", the first number-of-times cutting counter value related to the time-cutting state is a predetermined value (for example, 6 times or 100 times). The second count cut counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a specified value (for example, 10 times or 104 times). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the second cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-of-times cutting counter values (first number-of-times cutting counter value or second number-of-times cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol missed fluctuation (including the small hit fluctuation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed 6 times in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. Will be done. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced six times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then four times in the time-reduced state, the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, 6 times), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 has all the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "10 rounds" (for example, all the lamps 38a, 38b, 38c). Generates a lighting signal for the lamp). Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 generates a lighting signal for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "2 rounds". .. Since the three indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the five types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly convey the details to the player.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is two, and two of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the second round takes 29.0 seconds during each round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain two rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 33: Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 3 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 3-land jackpot (first winning symbol and second winning symbol). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "3 rounds", so that the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[See Fig. 35: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol is the same, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fourth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbols related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit are "4th winning symbol" to "6th winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time). Shortened state transition means, time saving function operating means). In the present embodiment, when the game ball corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol" to the "sixth winning symbol" and passes through the specific area 31x, the time is always shortened. Only the winning symbols may be shifted to the time reduction state.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[4th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the 5th winning symbol and the 6th winning symbol). In addition, 9 out of 9 rounds are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 4th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 7 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 6), and 6 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the seventh round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially six rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 4 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 3), and 3 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is 29. It operates during each round for 0 seconds to open the first prize opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for closing the large winning opening. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 35). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 24) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 40.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 6 times (or 10 times), 100 times (or 104 times)). To do. The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "6" or "100" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" or "104" is set as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Solenoid management process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the solenoid management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described. This process is a detailed description of step S207a of FIG.

Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation at power-on is completed. If it is immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 at the time of turning on the power are not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810.

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes the power-on operation process. In this process, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 are operated in a predetermined movable pattern (operation pattern). As a result, the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 of the start device 400 operate based on a constant movable pattern from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. Then, when the power-on operation is completed, it is determined in step S2800 that the operation is completed (Yes), so that step S2810 is skipped thereafter.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the movable patterns of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491.

[Time t0]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t1]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device is activated.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t2]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device ends its operation and becomes inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t3]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is activated.

[Time t4]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 ends its operation and becomes inactive.

[Time t5]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

The time T1 from the time t0 to the time t1 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T2 from the time t1 to the time t2 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T3 from the time t2 to the time t3 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T4 from the time t3 to the time t4 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T5 from the time t4 to the time t5 is, for example, 500 ms.

Then, the time TA from the time t0 to the time t5 is one cycle (for example, 800 ms), and the movable pattern of this one cycle is repeatedly executed from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. A plurality of types of movable patterns for one cycle may be prepared, and the plurality of types of movable patterns may be repeatedly executed.

By applying such a movable pattern, the game ball that has entered the start device 400 is entered into the start winning opening (starting winning opening 452 in the starting device or starting winning opening 450 in the starting device right) of the first special symbol. On the other hand, more game balls can be entered into the starting winning opening (starting device left starting winning opening 454) of the normal symbol.

Specifically, assuming that 12 game balls enter the passage port 430 of the start device 400 per minute, on average, two of the game balls enter the start device right start winning opening 450. Two more game balls enter the start device starting winning opening 452, and the remaining eight game balls enter the starting device left starting winning opening 454.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 operates the left blade member 442 (movable body) and the right blade member 438 (movable body) in a predetermined movable pattern in the normal gaming state (first state). It is possible to enable the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 to operate in a predetermined movable pattern even in the time shortened state (second state) (control means).

[Game Flow (Part 1)] FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] During a game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device or the right starting winning opening 450 of the start device (the first in a state where the memory of the second special symbol does not exist). (If the memory of the special symbol exists), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the normal mode (non-time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol you correspond to, after the big hit game ends, you will drive. Move to mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)] FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode. [F1] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the normal mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery is "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[Game Flow (Part 3)] FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode. [F8] During a game in the drive mode, when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454 of the start device 400 or the start device middle start winning opening 452 of the start device 400 (the memory of the second special symbol exists). (If the memory of the first special symbol exists), the [F2] first special symbol fluctuates. The drive mode may be in a non-time reduction state.

[F3] If it becomes "missing" in the first special symbol lottery, it will be restarted from the state of [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the drive mode (time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol you correspond to, after the big hit game ends, you will be in the drive mode. Move to.

[Game Flow (Part 4)] FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode. [F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in "missing", the drive mode is restarted from the [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of whether you are staying in the normal mode (non-time reduction state) or the drive mode (time reduction state), after the jackpot game is over, , Shift to drive mode.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the display mode of the 7-segment display device 200 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and "winning symbol". The visual impact as "is poor. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like, and the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment production design is displayed on the screen.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The 7-segment effect symbol displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 includes, for example, a 7-segment effect symbol on the left side, a 7-segment effect symbol in the center, and a 7-segment effect symbol on the right side. It is displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the device 200. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, each of the 7-segment effect symbols constitutes a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

51 and 52 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 51 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three rows of effect symbol Hz in the upper right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner ("4"-"6"-"7").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since all four LEDs of the first special symbol storage display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol storage. Since all the LEDs in the display area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 51 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls. By doing so, the variable display effect is started. The variation display of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the special symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from four to three in conjunction with this. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the memory of the first special symbol has been reduced to three, and the memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach in an easy-to-understand manner what was done.

Further, before the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is not lit, but after the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is lit, and the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed. Keeps lighting until.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 51 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are left. The production pattern stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped, and the effect symbol "8" on the left side of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. The production design that represents is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 52 (D): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "3" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 52 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 has the number as the medium effect symbol of Hz. The production symbol representing "1" is stopped. In this case, since the combination of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are both out of "8"-"1"-"3", this fluctuation is normal. It is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the "off" of. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the LED of the storage display area X1 is turned off. As a result, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Example of production when hit symbol 2 is applicable]
FIGS. 53 to 56 are continuous diagrams showing an example of an effect when the result of the ordinary symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state corresponds to the winning symbol 2.

[Before the start of variable display production]
In FIG. 53 (A): In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a detached mode (“9”-“1”-“6”). Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("9"-"1"-"6").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is one, and the second special symbol storage display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 53 (B): When the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls to fluctuate to display the variation. The production is started. Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the first special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment is selected.

[Animal chance production]
Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the hit symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) in spite of the non-time reduction state.

[Occurrence of notice production (1st stage)]
In FIG. 53 (C): After a while from the start of fluctuation, a picture image displaying some character appears on the screen, and the advance notice effect is executed in a mode of stopping at the center of the screen. In this example, for example, the pattern image appears from the left side of the screen and is moved to the center of the screen as it is.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating and the game ball is flowing down toward the variable start winning device 28.

[Occurrence of notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 54 (D): Following the first-stage advance notice effect, the second-stage advance notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. By executing such a notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may reach.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is activated and the game ball is entered.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 54 (E): Following the advance notice effect, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped.

Further, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, so that one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 is lit.
The variable start winning device 28 becomes inactive after a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) has elapsed or after a predetermined number (for example, one) of winnings. In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is closed because one game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28. When the variable start winning device 28 is closed, the animal chance production ends. The specified number may be two or more.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 54 (F): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "4" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "4" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 55 (G): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "3" is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "" is stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 55 (H): When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. It will be started. Since the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the second special symbol storage display area M2 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit winning is selected. Here, when the control of preferential digestion of the second special symbol is adopted, the memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested. On the other hand, when the control of the forward digestion of the special symbols is adopted, the fluctuations of the special symbols are executed in the order of memory. In the illustrated example, since the memory of the first special symbol does not exist, the variation of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which control is adopted.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 55 (I): After a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol of Hz, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 56 (J): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "2" has stopped.

[Stop the middle production design]
In FIG. 56 (K): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is a small hit and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the stop display effect is performed in the form of a small hit. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the alphabet "A" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol "A" of the alphabet is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "" is stopped. In addition, an animal character is displayed large on the liquid crystal display 42. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that "it corresponds to a small hit via the animal chance". Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a small hit. Then, after this, a small hit game is executed.

[Direction during a major role]
57 and 58 are continuous views partially showing an example of a big role playing effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 57 (A): When the jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 57 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, three circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining two ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 3 rounds, the current round is the 1st round of the 3 rounds, and a circle is displayed each time one round that can be obtained is advanced. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○" marks increases according to the winning symbols. For example, when the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3", but the winning symbol is the "third winning symbol". In this case, the number of "○" is "2". If the winning symbol is the "4th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "9", and if the winning symbol is the "5th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "○". The number of "○" is "6", and when the winning symbol is the "sixth winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3".

[3rd round]
In FIG. 57 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and when, for example, the game shifts to the third round, all three circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the third round are completed.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 58 (D): Then, the effect of displaying the character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 58 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving medium effect] In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time saving state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) that displays the background image corresponding to the time saving state (advantageous game state) is performed. Will be executed.

[Right-handed suggestion effect] In addition, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed at the upper part of the screen. In the right-handed suggestion effect, right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect may be continuously executed when the game state is in the time shortened state, or may be executed only at the start of the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number of times display effect] Further, the remaining number of times display effect is executed at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 10 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is deducted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state, and is deducted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
59 to 61 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 59 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the 7-segment effect symbols displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7", and the combination of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is "7"-"7". "-" 7 "is the winning item. This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 59 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, one memory of the first special symbol is stored (one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit). Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also change. To start. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 59 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Z1 is also displayed as a stop in the form of being off. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and four game balls enter the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, four memories of the second special symbol are stored (all four LEDs in the second special symbol display area M2 are lit).

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining 10 times.

In FIG. 60 (D): Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also change. To start. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 60 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 (combination of "5"-"2"-"6"). , The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6" of the liquid crystal display 42) and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. .. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as 9 times remaining.

In FIG. 60 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be inserted into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 61 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 61 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 57B, and the same production during the big hit game as described above is started, and the big hit game proceeds. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

62 and 63 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated, although it is different in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state.

Here, it is assumed that four memories of the second special symbol exist before the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of variation of special symbol] In FIG. 62 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is accompanied by the start. Starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start to fluctuate. Since the situation here is not in a time-reduced state, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is low even if the player passes through the starting gate 20. Therefore, it is difficult for the variable start winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates up to four times.

[Stop display effect] In FIG. 62 (B): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The symbol Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining three times.

[Start of small hit, opening of second big winning opening] In FIG. 62 (C): Then, when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened and the car on which the female character is riding is opened. The effect of increasing the speed and moving to the right side of the screen is executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area] In FIG. 63 (D): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to a small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is the fourth winning symbol. It is assumed that it was. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game] In FIG. 63 (E): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 57B, and the same production during the big hit game as described above is started, and the big hit game proceeds.

FIGS. 64 to 67 are diagrams showing an example of a first effect of the button continuous striking effect executed during the reach effect. The first production example is an production example when the player properly presses (continuously hits) the push button 45a. The push button 45a may be pressed for a long time to accept an operation input as if the player is repeatedly hitting the push button 45a. The push button 45a may be pressed by the player at the start of the game or during the game by setting the automatic pressing function. The operation input may be accepted without pressing 45a.

In FIG. 64 (A): The variable display effect is executed by the 7-segment display device 200 and the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 64 (B): When a certain time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the reach effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol are displayed in the reach state (tempai) mode ("5"-"changing"-"5").

In FIG. 64 (C): Reach production is in progress. In the illustrated example, the ally character (female character) is displayed on the left side of the screen, the enemy character (animal character) is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the character information of "VS" is displayed in the center. In this situation, if the ally character wins, it will be a big hit.

[SU1] In FIG. 65 (D): When a certain period of time has elapsed from the occurrence of the reach state, the button repeated hitting effect is started. Specifically, a button image imitating the push button 45a is displayed in the center of the screen. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the passage of the effective time of the button repeated hitting effect is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the illustrated example, since all the time meters of 8 squares are displayed as colored images, pressing the push button 45a is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. That is, the effective time of the button repeated hitting effect is 8 seconds. In addition, each cell of the time meter decreases by 1 cell every 1 second elapses.

Further, at the lower part of the screen, a horizontally long rod-shaped meter M having four squares is displayed. The meter M is a physical strength meter that indicates the remaining physical strength of the enemy character. When all the colored parts of the meter M are exhausted, the remaining physical strength of the enemy character is exhausted, and the ally character wins. When the player presses the push button 45a once during the execution of the button continuous striking effect and the condition for advancing the meter M is satisfied, the effect of reducing the colored portion of the meter value M (progress effect) is executed. At the top of the screen, an animal character that utters the line "continuous hit" is displayed. "SU1" is the first stage of the button repeated hitting effect.

[SU2] In FIG. 65 (E): Then, it is assumed that the condition that the player starts repeatedly hitting the push button 45a and advances the meter M by one is satisfied. In this case, the effect of reducing the colored portion of the meter M by one square is executed. "SU2" is the second stage of the button repeated hitting effect. When the player presses the push button 45a, an image of an ally character attacking is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the pressing of the push button 45a is output, and the push button 45a is pressed at the top of the button image. An image of the fist is displayed to indicate that it is. Further, in the illustrated example, since 6 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 6 seconds remaining.

[SU3] In FIG. 65 (F): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing only one meter M is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU3" is the third stage of the button repeated hitting effect. Further, in the illustrated example, since 4 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 4 seconds remaining.

[SU4] In FIG. 66 (G): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing only one meter M is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU4" is the fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect. Further, in the illustrated example, since 2 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 2 seconds remaining.

[Success] In FIG. 66 (H): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing the meter M by one more is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "Success" is the final stage of the button stroke production. As a result, all the colored parts of the meter M disappear. In this case, the accessory falling effect in which the movable body 40f falls in the center of the screen is executed, and the character information of "success" is displayed on the meter M. The time meter indicating the effective time of the push button 45a is hidden.

In FIG. 66 (I): When a successful result is obtained in the button repeated hitting effect, the winning effect indicating that the current fluctuation is a big hit is executed. In the illustrated example, the ally character is displayed in a large size, and the effect that the enemy character leaves is executed. In this case, the first special symbol, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol 1 are stopped and displayed in the winning mode.

The above is an production example when the button continuous striking effect is successful, but when the button continuous striking effect is unsuccessful, the following production example is used.

[SU4] In FIG. 67 (J): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing only one meter M is satisfied. In this case, an effect is executed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU4" is the fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect. Further, in the illustrated example, since 2 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 2 seconds remaining.

[Failure] In FIG. 67 (K): It is assumed that the player continues to repeatedly hit the push button 45a, and here, the condition for advancing only one meter M is not satisfied. In this case, the effect of maintaining the colored portion of the meter M is executed. As a result, the colored portion of the meter M remains for one square. In this case, the character fall effect is not executed, the effect that the enemy character flicks off the attack of the ally character is executed, and the character information of "failure" is displayed on the meter M. It should be noted that such a failure effect may be executed before the valid time ends, at the same time as the valid time ends, or after the valid time ends.

In FIG. 67 (L): When the result of failure is obtained in the button repeated hitting effect, the off-set effect indicating that the current fluctuation is out of order is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect is executed in which the ally character is displayed small and the enemy character is displayed large. In this case, the first special symbol, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol 1 are stopped and displayed in a detached manner.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a second effect example of the button continuous striking effect executed during the reach effect. The second production example is an production example when the player does not properly press the push button 45a.

[SU1] In FIG. 68 (A): A certain time has passed since the reach state occurred, and the button repeated hitting effect is being executed. However, here, it is assumed that the player has not pressed the push button 45a. Further, in the illustrated example, since all the time meters of 8 squares are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 8 seconds remaining.

[SU1] In FIG. 68 (B): Unless the player presses the push button 45a, the colored portion of the meter M does not decrease. However, the effective time of the button repeated hitting effect is gradually decreasing. In the illustrated example, since 2 squares of the 8 squares time meter are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 2 seconds remaining.

[SU2] In FIG. 68 (C): Then, it is assumed that the player starts the continuous striking of the push button 45a immediately before the effective time of the button continuous striking effect ends. Then, the condition for advancing only one meter M is forcibly satisfied due to the dissociation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later. In this case, the effect of reducing the colored portion of the meter M by one square is executed.

As described above, even if the player starts the continuous striking of the push button 45a immediately before the end of the effective time, the stage of the button continuous striking effect proceeds only one step at a time until the effective time ends. After that, when the valid time ends, the effect at the time of winning or the effect at the time of losing is executed.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a third effect of the button continuous striking effect executed during the reach effect. The third effect example is an effect example when the player operates the lever member 45b.

[SU1] In FIG. 69 (A): A certain time has passed since the reach state was generated, and the button repeated hitting effect is being executed. However, here, it is assumed that the player has not pressed the push button 45a. In the illustrated example, since all the time meters of 8 squares are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 8 seconds remaining.

In FIG. 69 (B): Here, it is assumed that the player operates the lever member 45b instead of the push button 45a.

[Success] In FIG. 69 (C): When the lever member 45b is operated, the player can suddenly know the final result. When the success scenario is selected, the accessory drop effect in which the movable body 40f falls in the center of the screen is executed, and the special notification effect in which the character information of "success" is displayed on the meter M is executed. After that, such a special notification effect is continuously executed until the valid time elapses, and after the valid time elapses, the effect at the time of winning (the effect of aligning three effect symbols, etc.) is executed. Will be done.

If the failure scenario is selected, the character fall effect is not executed, the effect that the enemy character flicks off the attack of the ally character is executed, and the special notification that the character information of "failure" is displayed on the meter M. The production is executed. After that, such a special notification effect is continuously executed until the effective time elapses, and after the effective time elapses, the effect at the time of disconnection (the effect of not aligning three effect symbols, etc.) is executed. Will be done.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, major role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 or 7-segment display device 200, storage display device 300, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number of times The display effect, the button repeated press effect, and the like are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and 7-segment display device. Effect management process (step S403), normal symbol effect management process (step S403a), button repeated press effect management process (step S403b), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408). ), The effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, number cut counter command, various error commands, variable start winning device long open start command, etc.

Step S401: In the working memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the effect using the storage display device 300. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, effect content related to the important role production, etc., content of various advance notice effects). Executes the process of determining. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the 7-segment display device effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the 7-segment display device 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content (content related to the 7-segment effect symbol) to be displayed on the 7-segment display device 200. It is preferable that the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol basically perform the same operation, but they may perform different operations. When different operations are performed, for example, the timing at which the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol stop may be different, or the stop symbol may be different.

Step S403a: In the normal symbol effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect (animal chance effect) when a chance state for the second special symbol occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the animal chance effect between the time when the variable start prize device long open start command is received and the time when the variable start prize device 28 is closed. To do.

Step S403b: In the button continuous striking effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the content related to the button continuous striking effect.

By executing this process, the effect control CPU 126 uses the push button 45a and the lever member 45b to execute a button continuous striking effect (stage effect) in which the stage of the effect is gradually advanced from the first stage to the final stage. It is possible (means for executing stepwise production).

Further, by executing this process, the effect control CPU 126 does not satisfy a predetermined condition from the start to the end of the effective time for enabling the operation of the push button 45a and the lever member 45b ( If the lever member is not operated (unless the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later, is a certain number or more), the stage of producing the button continuous striking effect is advanced according to the first progress mode, and if the predetermined conditions are satisfied ( If the lever member is operated (if the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later, is a certain number or more), a progress effect is executed in which the stage of the effect of the button repeated hitting effect is advanced by the second progress mode different from the first progress mode. Make it possible (progressive production execution means).

The first mode of progress is a mode in which the stage of the effect of repeatedly pressing the buttons is advanced one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.
The second mode of progress when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more is a mode in which the stage of the effect of repeatedly pressing the buttons is advanced one step at a time regardless of the passage of the effective time.
The second progress mode executed when the lever member is operated is a mode in which a special notification effect is executed (progress effect execution means).

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 transmits the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of lighting one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may determine the effect pattern and effect scenario of the color change effect (for example, the display color of the LED in the storage display area X1 and the display color of the LED in the effect display area X2). it can.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of turning off one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. , Select an effect of lighting the LED of the storage display area X1. The LED of the storage display area X1 is selected to be turned off when the change of the special symbol is completed. Further, when the LED of the effect display area X2 is turned on, the effect of turning off the LED of the effect display area X2 when the change of the special symbol is completed is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 23) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (reach) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when an effect using the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is performed during the execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( The control information of the button repeated pressing effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 70) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 70). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time) and stop of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, and finally becomes small. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the hit is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 has, for example, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or the normal mode. The process of varying the symbol Z2 and finally selecting the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. For example, when a variation pattern corresponding to the reach effect (reach variation pattern, super reach variation pattern, etc.) is selected, the effect control CPU 126 can select a reach effect in which a ally character and an enemy character are made to play against each other. It should be noted that this point is the same at the time of a miss or a small hit.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When determining the variable effect pattern at the time of a small hit, a large hit, or a miss, it is possible to also determine the effect pattern of the pseudo continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream).

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process. The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time saving and medium effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control CPU 126 has a case where the memory of the second special symbol exists when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. Select a background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 72), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing during effect symbol stop display] FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol stop display processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-of-times counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. ..

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time saving counter, and "4" is set in the pseudo time saving counter when the number of stored second special symbols is "4". When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S658.

Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660 and determines that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ..

Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP152), as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of reading according to the winning symbol is executed.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game, and suggests right-handed strike. If you select the effect to be performed and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a heart mark with the letter V drawn by the female character in the car) Execute the process of selecting the effect to be listed).

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing] FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and selects an effect pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "4" to the second count cut counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the process to be performed. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 10 times to remaining 5 times" or "remaining 100 times to remaining 5 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays a liquid crystal display when it becomes necessary to execute a right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened. At the upper part of the screen of the vessel 42, a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking is executed.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the simulated time reduction, the value of "remaining 4 times to remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Button repeated hitting production management process]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the button repeated hitting effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the state before the start of the change (at the start of the change, the timing of executing the effect symbol change pre-processing).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the state before the start of fluctuation (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S861. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the state before the start of fluctuation (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862.

Step S861: The effect control CPU 126 executes the button repeated press effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the button continuous striking effect, and if it is determined to execute, determines the effect content of the button continuous striking effect.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the button repeated press effect based on the variation pattern, the variation display effect, the content of the advance notice effect, and the like. When it is decided to execute the button continuous striking effect, a process of determining what kind of content of the button continuous striking effect is to be executed at what timing and schedule is executed.

Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the start of the button repeated press effect. The start time of the button continuous striking effect is the timing when the button continuous striking effect is actually started. Whether or not it is the start of the button continuous striking effect can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation while referring to the execution timing of the button continuous striking effect.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the start time of the button continuous striking effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S863. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the start time of the button repeated pressing effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S864.

Step S863: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the start of the button repeated press effect.
In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be displayed at the start of the button continuous press effect and setting the effective time of the button.

Step S864: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is executing the button repeated press effect. The execution of the button continuous striking effect means that the button continuous striking effect is actually being executed. Whether or not the button continuous striking effect is being executed can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation while referring to the execution timing of the button continuous striking effect.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is executing the button continuous striking effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S865. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the execution of the button continuous striking effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S866.

Step S865: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process during the button repeated press effect execution.
In this process, a process of selecting the content of the effect to be displayed during the execution of the button repeated press effect is executed.

Step S866: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the end of the button repeated press effect. The end of the button continuous striking effect is the timing at which the button continuous striking effect actually ends. Whether or not it is the end of the button continuous striking effect can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation while referring to the execution timing of the button continuous striking effect.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the end of the button repeated striking effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S867. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is at the end of the button repeated striking effect (No), the process returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

Step S867: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the end of the button repeated press effect.
In this process, a process of selecting the content of the effect to be displayed at the end of the button repeated press effect is executed.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

[Button repeated hitting effect selection process]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the button repeated hitting effect selection process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S870: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the effect execution condition of the button repeated press effect is satisfied. As the effect execution condition of the button repeated hitting effect, for example, a variation pattern having a variation time of a predetermined time or more is selected, or a reach effect (reach variation pattern, etc.) in which a friendly character and an enemy character compete against each other is selected. In some cases, the conditions can be met. Even if the reach effect is not selected, the button repeated press effect may be executed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the effect execution condition of the button repeated press effect is satisfied (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S872. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the effect execution condition of the button continuous press effect is satisfied (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press effect management process (FIG. 77).

Step S872: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation corresponding to a big hit.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation corresponding to the big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S874. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation corresponding to the big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S876.

Step S874: The effect control CPU 126 executes the success scenario selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a success scenario for notifying the result of success in the button repeated press effect. If there is a success scenario table in which a plurality of success scenarios are stored, one of the success scenarios is selected from the table.

Step S876: The effect control CPU 126 executes the failure scenario selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a failure scenario for notifying the result of the failure in the button repeated press effect. If there is a failure scenario table in which a plurality of failure scenarios are stored, one of the failure scenarios is selected from the table.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

[Processing at the start of repeated button press production]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process at the start of the button repeated pressing effect. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S877: The effect control CPU 126 executes the scenario setting process of the button repeated press effect. In this process, a process of setting a success scenario or a failure scenario selected in the process of step S874 or step S876 of FIG. 78 is executed. The button repeated hitting effect is executed based on the scenario set in this process.

Step S878: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effective time setting process. In this embodiment, the effective time of the push button is 8 seconds (240 frames). The effective time is subtracted with the passage of time from the start of the button repeated hitting effect, and the effective time ends when it reaches 0 seconds. The elapsed time is indicated by a time meter displayed around the button image.

Step S879: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process at the start of the button repeated press effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as displaying a button image, displaying a time meter, or displaying a meter M as an effect at the start of a button repeated press effect. ..
In this case, with respect to the button image to be displayed, one of the button image patterns may be selected from a plurality of button image patterns according to the degree of expectation of winning. As a result, it is possible to display a button image having the same shape but different colors and sizes.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

[Processing during continuous button press production]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during the execution of the button repeated pressing effect. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S880: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the button has been pressed. Whether or not the button is pressed can be confirmed by checking whether or not the contact signal from the push button 45a is input to the effect control device 124.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the button is pressed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S881. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the button has been pressed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S882.

Step S881: The effect control CPU 126 executes the button pressing process. Specifically, a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed when the push button 45a is pressed is executed.

Step S882: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a lever input has been performed. Whether or not the lever is input can be confirmed by checking whether or not the contact signal from the lever member 45b is input to the effect control device 124.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the lever input has been performed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S883. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the lever input has been performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

Step S883: The effect control CPU 126 executes the lever input process. Specifically, a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed when the lever member 45b is operated is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

[Button press processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the button pressing process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of calculating the current “maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex)” of the index of the referenced scenario from the number of elapsed frames from the start of the effective time. The number of elapsed frames from the start of the effective time can be confirmed by counting the number of elapsed frames from the start of the effective time of the button repeated pressing effect.
The "maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex)" is basically a value that is updated to a large value with the passage of time, although it depends on the referenced scenario.

For example, assuming that the referenced scenario is a successful scenario, if the "number of elapsed frames" is "60 frames", the "MaxIndex" is "4" and the "number of elapsed frames" is "120 frames". If, "MaxIndex" is "8" (see (A) in FIG. 84).

Step S9111: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not NowIndex <MaxIndex.
"Now Index" is a value indicating the current Index. "NowIndex" may be updated to a large value according to the pressing of the button.
"NowIndex" may be "NowIndex = MaxIndex" at the maximum. However, "NowIndex>MaxIndex" does not occur. That is, no matter how much the button is pressed, "NowIndex" does not exceed "MaxIndex".
"NowIndex" is the first variable that may be updated according to the operation input of the operating means, and "MaxIndex" is the second variable that may be updated according to the passage of time. is there.

Then, when it is confirmed that NowIndex <MaxIndex (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that NowIndex <MaxIndex (No), that is, when "NowIndex = MaxIndex", the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916.

The reason why step S912 is not executed when "NowIndex = MaxIndex" is that when "NowIndex = MaxIndex", the stage of the production has progressed to the maximum at the present time, so the step update lottery of step S912 This is to prevent the execution of.

Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the step update lottery has been won or whether or not the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number (for example, 6) or more. The step update lottery can be a lottery based on a predetermined winning probability (for example, a lottery that wins with a probability of 1/2 to 1/10 or the like).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the step update lottery is won or the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S913. On the other hand, when the step update lottery is won or when it cannot be confirmed that the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916.

Step S913: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of incrementing NowIndex (NowIndex + 1).

Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful. Whether or not the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful can be confirmed by whether or not the value of NowIndex is "15".

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful when the value of NowIndex is "15", and determines that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful when the value of NowIndex is less than "15". It can be judged that the content of the scenario is not successful.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S915. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916.

Step S915: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the character information of success on the meter M is executed while executing the effect of dropping the accessory.

Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process at the time of input (progress effect execution means). Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an effect at the time of input that is not a success is executed. As processing at the time of input, select an effect pattern that displays the effect corresponding to the button press (image of the ally character attacking, image of the fist at the top of the button image, etc.), or output the sound effect at the time of button input. Performs processing such as selecting the effect pattern to be performed.

In addition, when the stage of the production is switched (for example, when SU1 → SU2), the effect pattern of the progress effect that reduces the colored part of the meter value M is selected, or when the stage of the effect is not switched, the meter value. Select an effect pattern that maintains the colored part of M.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of executing the button repeated pressing effect (FIG. 80).

[Lever input processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the lever input process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of storing the fixed maximum value of the index of the reference scenario in the NowIndex. The fixed maximum value of the index of the reference scenario means the maximum value of the index of the reference scenario regardless of the number of frames elapsed from the start of the valid time. That is, the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) fluctuates with the passage of time, but the fixed maximum value is fixed regardless of the passage of time.

For example, when the referenced scenario is a "success scenario", the fixed maximum value of Index in the reference scenario is "15" (see (A) in FIG. 84), so "15" is used for "NowIndex". Execute the process to store.
On the other hand, when the referenced scenario is a "failure scenario", the fixed maximum value of Index in the reference scenario is "14" (see (B) in FIG. 84), so "14" is used for "NowIndex". Execute the process to store.

Step S921: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful. The confirmation method is as described in step S914.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S922. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S923.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern (the effect pattern of the special notification effect at the time of success) for displaying the character information of success on the meter M is executed while executing the effect of dropping the accessory.

Step S923: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process at the time of failure. Specifically, the effect pattern in which the enemy character flicks off the attack of the ally character and displays the character information of the failure on the meter M without executing the character fall effect (the effect of the special notification effect at the time of failure). Executes the process of selecting the pattern).
It should be noted that the effect pattern selected by the processing at the time of success or the processing at the time of failure can be continuously executed until the valid time ends (the same applies hereinafter).
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of executing the button repeated pressing effect (FIG. 80).

Then, by executing the processes of FIGS. 81 and 82, the effect control CPU 126 enables the progress effect to be executed when the push button 45a is operated, and when the lever member 45b is operated, the final button continuous effect effect. It is possible to execute a special notification effect for notifying a specific result (progress effect execution means).

[Processing at the end of repeated button press production]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process at the end of the button repeated pressing effect. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the currently referenced scenario (reference scenario) is a successful scenario.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the reference scenario is a successful scenario (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S931. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the reference scenario is a successful scenario (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S932.

Step S931: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the process at the time of success has been executed. Whether or not the successful processing has been executed can be confirmed by setting the successful processing executed flag when the successful processing is executed. It should be noted that the successful processing executed flag can be reset at the end of the button repeated hitting effect, the end of the fluctuation, or the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the successful processing has been executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the successful processing has been executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S933.

Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the process at the time of failure has been executed. Whether or not the failure process has been executed can be confirmed by setting the failure process execution flag when the failure process is executed. It should be noted that the failure processing executed flag can be reset at the end of the button repeated hitting effect, the end of the fluctuation, or the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the processing at the time of failure has been executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the processing at the time of failure has been executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S934.

Step S933: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the character information of success on the meter M is executed while executing the effect of dropping the accessory.

Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process at the time of failure. Specifically, the effect of the enemy character flipping off the attack of the ally character is executed without executing the effect of dropping the character, and the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the character information of the failure on the meter M is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button repeated press effect management process (FIG. 77).

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a success scenario and a failure scenario of the button repeated hitting effect.
The effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the button repeated press effect while referring to the selected scenario.
Each scenario is composed of "number of frames", "scenario details", and "index" as information for managing the scenario.

The "number of frames" represents the elapsed time during the valid time. The effective time of the button repeated hitting effect (button effective time) starts from "number of frames = 0" and ends at "number of frames = 240".

"Scenario details" represents the stage of the production of the button repeated hitting production. "SU1" to "SU4" correspond to the first to fourth stages of the button repeated hitting effect, "success" corresponds to the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect, and "failure" corresponds to the button repeated hitting effect. It corresponds to the non-final stage of the production.

"Index" is an internal variable that manages the scenario. "Index" starts with "0", ends with "15" in the case of a success scenario, and ends with "14" in the case of a failure scenario.

In this way, in the button repeated hitting effect, the effective time starts from the time when the "number of frames" is "0" regardless of whether the success scenario is selected or the failure scenario is selected. The valid time ends when the "number of frames" is "240".

The effective time is the time during which the operation of the push button 45a and the lever member 45b is effective. Therefore, if the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated within the effective time (during the effective time) of the button continuous striking effect, the operation affects the content of the button continuous striking effect, but is outside the effective time (effective time). Even if the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated before the start or after the effective time ends), the operation does not affect the content of the button repeated striking effect.

[(A) Success scenario]
The details of the success scenario are as follows.
The "number of frames" is set every 15 frames from "0" to "240".
"Scenario details" include "SU1" to "SU4" and "success".
"Index" is set step by step from "0" to "15".

"SU1" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "0,15" in "Number of frames" and "0,1" in "Index".
"SU2" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "30 to 90" in "Number of frames" and "2 to 6" in "Index".
"SU3" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "105 to 150" in "Number of frames" and "7 to 10" in "Index".
"SU4" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "165 to 210" in "Number of frames" and "11 to 14" in "Index".
"Success" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "225,240" in "Number of frames" and "15" in "Index".

For example, in the situation where the success scenario is selected, when the "number of frames" is "15", the "MaxIndex" is "1". In this case, the button repeated hitting effect can proceed to "SU1". is there.

[(B) Failure scenario]
The details of the failure scenario are as follows.
The "number of frames" is set every 15 frames from "0" to "240". This is similar to the success scenario.
"Scenario details" include "SU1" to "SU4" and "failure".
"Index" is set step by step from "0" to "14". However, the last part of "Index" (on the right side in the figure) is "14" → "14", and in the failure scenario, "Index" does not shift to "15".

"SU1" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "0,15" in "Number of frames" and "0,1" in "Index".
"SU2" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "30 to 90" in "Number of frames" and "2 to 6" in "Index".
"SU3" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "105 to 150" in "Number of frames" and "7 to 10" in "Index".
"SU4" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "165-225" in "Number of frames" and "11-14 (two 14s)" in "Index".
"Failure" in "Scenario details" corresponds to "240" in "Number of frames".

For example, in the situation where the failure scenario is selected, when the "number of frames" is "165", the "MaxIndex" is "11". In this case, the button repeated hitting effect can proceed to "SU4". is there.
Note that these scenarios are just examples, and other scenarios may be prepared.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an operation image of a success scenario. When the success scenario is selected, the button repeated hitting effect is executed as the following effect mode.

[(A) Repeated hits]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is continuously pressed from the start of the effective time. Further, in the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed, it is assumed that the player has won the lottery.

When the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1", so the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 90", the "index" is "2 to 6", so the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "105 to 150", the "index" is "7 to 10" and the "scenario details" is "SU3 (third stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "165 to 210", the "index" is "11 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "SU4 (fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "index" is "15" and the "scenario details" is "success (the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and the "scenario details" is "success".
Such a mode of progress of the effect is the first mode of progress at the time of success in advancing the stage of the effect of the button continuous striking effect one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.

[(B) Start pressing from 225 frame]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the push button 45a is repeatedly hit with the "number of frames" set to "225". Further, it is assumed that the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed has not been won.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0 to 210", the "index" is "0 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "index" is "15" and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and the "scenario details" is "success (final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".
In such a mode of progress of the production, when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more, the stage of the production of the button repeated striking effect is advanced step by step to the next stage regardless of the elapse of the effective time. This is the second step of the above.

[(C) Lever input at 30 frames]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the lever member 45b is operated while the "number of frames" is "30".

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 225", the "index" is "0 to 15" and the "scenario details" is "success (the final stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and the "scenario details" is "success".
This mode of progress of the effect is the second mode of progress at the time of success in executing the special notification effect when the lever member is being operated.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an operation image of a failure scenario. When the failure scenario is selected, the button repeated hitting effect is executed as the following effect mode.

[(A) Repeated hits]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is continuously pressed from the start of the effective time. Further, in the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed, it is assumed that the player has won the lottery.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 90", the "index" is "2 to 6" and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "105 to 150", the "index" is "7 to 10" and the "scenario details" is "SU3 (third stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "165-225", the "index" is "11-14" and the "scenario details" is "SU4 (fourth stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".
Such a mode of progress of the effect is the first mode of progress at the time of failure in advancing the stage of the effect of the button continuous striking effect one step at a time to the next stage according to the passage of the effective time.

[(B) Start pressing from 225 frame]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the push button 45a is repeatedly hit with the "number of frames" set to "225". Further, it is assumed that the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed has not been won.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0 to 210", the "index" is "0 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "index" is "14" and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".
In such a mode of progress of the production, when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more, the stage of the production of the button repeated hitting production is advanced one step at a time to the next stage regardless of the elapse of the effective time. This is the second step of the above.

[(C) Lever input at 30 frames]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the effective time, and the lever member 45b is operated while the "number of frames" is "30".

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0,15", the "Index" is "0,1" and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of the button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 225", the "index" is "0 to 14" and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button repeated hitting effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", the "index" does not exist and the "scenario details" is "failure".
This mode of progress of the effect is the second mode of progress at the time of failure to execute the special notification effect when the lever member is being operated.

Then, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect mode of the button repeated press effect as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 by monitoring the operation status of various operation means while referring to the above-mentioned success scenario and failure scenario. Can be done.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the button depends on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (whether or not the lever member 45b is operated and whether or not the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more). Since the progress of the continuous hitting effect is different, the variation of the effect can be increased as compared with the method in which there is only one type of progress of the button repeated hitting effect, and as a result, a novel playability is exhibited. be able to.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the content of the button repeated striking effect differs depending on whether the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated, so that the same effect can be obtained regardless of which operation means is operated. Compared with the method to be executed or the method in which only one of the operating means can be operated, the variation of the production can be increased, and as a result, a novel playability can be exhibited.

(3) According to the present embodiment, if the lever member 45b is operated during the execution of the button continuous striking effect, the final result of the button continuous striking effect is notified, so that the player quickly confirms the final result. can do.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the stage of the effect of the button repeated hitting effect is advanced one step at a time according to the passage of the effective time, or the effect of the button repeated hitting effect is produced regardless of the passage of the effective time. Since the stage of is advanced one step at a time to the next stage, regardless of how the effective time elapses, it is possible to surely advance the stage of the continuous button press production to the next stage one step at a time. As a result, it is possible to demonstrate a novel playability.

(5) In the present embodiment, if the push button 45a is pressed only once just before (immediately before) the effective time of the push button 45a ends, an effect almost equal to the final result can be seen. One issue is to avoid the situation. Further, if the player wants to know the final result in the middle of the button repeated hitting effect, the player has to press the push button 45a many times, and avoiding such a situation is also one of the problems. There is.

[Prerequisites]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control device (effect control CPU) holds the index (index, stage of the effect content) of the pre-lottery scenario currently referred to, and the frame from the start of the button repeated press effect. The progress of the scenario is managed by determining the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) of the index that can be referred to by the number.
In addition, it is determined by lottery whether or not to advance the current index (NowIndex) each time the push button 45a is pressed, and if it is not won, the current state is maintained (the value of NowIndex is maintained). There is.

Then, when such a control process is adopted, if the lottery for advancing the current index (NowIndex) is not continuously won, the scenario progresses even though the push button 45a is correctly pressed. A situation that does not occur will occur. Therefore, if the deviation between the current index (NowIncrement) and the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) exceeds a certain number, the index is updated regardless of the lottery result until the deviation width becomes less than the specified range ( NowIndex is incremented). Further, by operating the lever member 45b, the current index (NowIndex) is forcibly advanced to the fixed maximum value regardless of such processing.

By adopting such a process, it is possible that the scenario does not proceed even though the push button 45a is correctly pressed. Further, if the push button 45a is pressed only once just before the effective time of the push button 45a ends, it is possible to prevent an effect almost equal to the final result from being seen. Further, a player who does not want to repeatedly hit or hold down the push button 45a can quickly confirm the final result of the button repeated hitting effect by operating the lever member 45b.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine including the 7-segment display device 200 has been described, but the gaming machine may not have the 7-segment display device 200.
Further, the 7-segment display device 200 may be changed to a drum unit (for example, a device having three rows of reels) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a setting changing device.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

Although the stepwise effect has been described in the example of the button continuous press effect, it may be a button long press effect.
Although the stepwise effect has been described in the example of being executed during the fluctuation, it may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.
Although the stepwise effect has been described in the example of being executed during the reach effect, it may be executed in a scene other than the reach effect (for example, during the execution of the advance notice effect).
The stepwise effect has been described as an example of an effect in which the meter value decreases, but it may be an effect in which the meter value increases.

The stepwise effect may be an effect that does not use a meter. In this case, for example, it is possible to execute an effect of increasing or decreasing a predetermined effect element.
The stepwise effect may be an effect executed by the auto button function (a function in which the push button is assumed to be pressed even if the player does not press the push button).

In the above-described embodiment, the first operating means is the push button 45a and the second operating means is the lever member 45b. However, the first operating means is the lever member 45b and the second operating means is the push button. Button 45a may be used.
The predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined lottery for the production is won, a lottery for whether or not to execute the progress production according to the second progress mode is won, and the like.

The above-described embodiment can be modified as follows.
(1) When the lever input to the lever member 45b is detected, the button pressing process may be invalidated (not executed) thereafter.
(2) The effective time start timing of the button input for the push button 45a and the effective time start timing of the lever input for the lever member 45b may be different. In this case, the effective time start timing of the lever input to the lever member 45b may be effective when a predetermined frame (predetermined time) has elapsed from the effective time start timing of the button input to the push button 45a.

(3) When executing a scenario in which the operation effective time is short (the effect with a short effect time, the effect of about several seconds), the lever input to the lever member 45b may be invalidated from the beginning. That is, it may have a scenario pattern (effect pattern) that does not accept lever input but accepts only button input.
(4) As for the progress effect executing means, the game state in which the game state is advantageous (high probability state or time reduction state) satisfies the predetermined conditions as compared with the normal state (low probability state or non-time reduction state). It may be easier to do. Further, as the progress effect executing means, the predetermined condition is satisfied in the gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous (high probability state or time shortening state) as compared with the normal state (low probability state or non-time reduction state). You may make it difficult.

The present invention is applicable not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines.
In this case, the first operating means can be a push button and the second operating means can be a bet button.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment B]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 87 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 88) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 87. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 87, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. Although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the card unit, it may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. By pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or perform some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probabilistic promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 88, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. In addition to various units such as the back cover unit 178, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, and a power cord (power plug). 164, ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 93).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 140 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 140 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 140, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 88 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 89 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. In the right side portion (so-called right-handed area) of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top. Has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters (wins) the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, or opens. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that have entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (combined game board units 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 89, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , It is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Is. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to collapse to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a type of device (single-bladed tulip-type attacker) in which the opening / closing member 30a is tilted to the right, whereas the second variable winning device 31 has the opening / closing member 31a. A type of device that slides inside the board is used (sliding attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. This can be achieved. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 31b, the specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

90 and 91 are diagrams showing details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 90 (A), the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, it is a state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 90 (B), the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 90 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for a specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is a slide for a specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the left side by the member 31c, and the traveling direction is changed to the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 91 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 91 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 91 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 92 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers depending on a display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs) (memory number display means). ). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a displays one storage number by, for example, a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or turning on one lamp (LED) (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned off, the number of stored items is 0, and in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the occurrence of the entry is memorized. Every time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering (up to 4), the display mode is changed by 1 each. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a shifts to the display mode after the increase in the sense that when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the winning ball is memorized. When the special symbol changes (up to one) and the special symbol starts to change when the ball enters, the display mode changes to the reduced display mode. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start fluctuating (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a has not yet started to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. It represents the number of times the ball has not entered.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see FIG. 89]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 includes an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, and the like. Various production images are displayed, including a storage marker (hold display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a drum unit 200 is installed in the lower part inside the effect unit 40.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and pseudo-effect symbols (7 symbols, panda symbols, cherry symbols, etc.) are displayed on each reel. For example, when seven symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line, which is the effective line, it indicates that a big hit result has been obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body that can be moved at a plurality of moving speeds.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 includes a RAM clear switch 304 used for initializing the RAM 76, an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and peripheral ICs such as a counter / timer circuit (CTC). Are equipped, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300 and a setting key switch 302. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for changing the setting, and for example, the setting can be changed by the following procedure.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting is changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages. Further, the set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 140.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 140, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

In this case, the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed to change the setting to any stage, but the RAM clear switch 304 is not used for changing the setting, and a dedicated setting change switch is separately provided. May be good. In this case, in the above procedure (6), the separately provided setting change switch is pressed an arbitrary number of times.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning openings on the left side are installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 pass through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and indicates the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by a number (the number of game balls detected by the out switch 141). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 140 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 140 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 140 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 140 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, and movable motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls the output from the speakers 54, 55, 56. The internal configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to another figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 and jog dial 45a, a volume adjustment switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136, and when the player operates these operating members, their contact signals are sub-connected. It is input to the effect control device 124 through the substrate 136. Although an example in which each operation member is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, each operation member may be connected to the saucer illumination board when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 58 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The movable body sensor 58 is, for example, a photo sensor provided at the origin position (initial position) of the movable body 40f, and outputs a detection signal when the movable body 40f is detected. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[Drum unit] Further, a drum unit 200 is connected to the driver board 138. The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 arranged coaxially. The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, and a reel band having a plurality of pseudo-effect symbols attached in a row at intervals is wound around the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203, respectively. .. The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have a rotation axis at the center thereof, and can be rotated or reversely rotated about the rotation axis.

Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a motor) corresponding to each reel and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be arranged inside the stepping motor or may be arranged outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be configured by, for example, a light-shielding plate and a photo sensor.

The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200. The drum unit control device drives each reel according to the movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124. Further, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 via the driver board 138 in response to the detection of the position (for example, the origin position) of each reel detected by the position detection mechanism.

Then, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, and controls the operation of each reel.

The stepping motor is a motor that drives each reel (movable body) (1-2 phase excitation drive) by alternately repeating 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation, and the stepping motor has four coils (coils 1 to 1). Coil 4) is included.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

By the way, by controlling the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, the operation of devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56 is finally performed. Is controlled. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the pachinko machine 1 uses each device for effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body operation). Etc.) is realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used. In FIG. 94, the tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, and the input control unit. It is shown as 228, Time Management Department (ACT) 230 and the like. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operator, and the time management unit (ACT) 230 that manages the time progress of the effect controls the flow of the entire effect. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operators according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190, a VDP 152 (effect display control board) for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, an audio IC 134, an LED driver 198, and an SMC. (Serial control controller) 199 and driver IC 132 are equipped.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when developing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads out the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 and one chip like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, or a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded audio to various speakers via an amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (may be a larger number of channels) is realized. Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of various speakers based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with the execution of the effects of various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the motor that is the drive source of various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and relays the detection signal output by the sensor for the movable body to control the movable body. Hand over to department 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps and movable motors to manage their operation. By doing so, it is possible to realize a directing reproduction using a lamp or a movable body. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 of the above is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

95 and 96 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 96 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 100), but the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 100), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 100). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the reset start process. Note that duplicate description will be omitted for the same processing as in the first procedure example of the reset start processing. Further, the process of FIG. 96 is the same in the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process is different from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that the preparatory process (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, if it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the process under preparation (Step S112a) is executed.
The execution timing of the preparatory process (step S112a) is not limited to such a timing, and can be executed at any timing in the reset start process. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, it suffices to be controlled so as to shift from "preparing" to "playable state (shifted to the main loop)".

Step S112a: In the preparatory process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. The details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the preparatory process (step S112a) is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process in preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes the preparing operation control process. Details of the operation control process during preparation will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 97). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch is being operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the operation control process during preparation in step S126 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Preparing operation control process]
The details of the operation contents of the operation control process during preparation are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute the process of adopting at least one state and operation among the following states and operation contents in the preparation operation control process.

(1) During preparation, the state shifts when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During the preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. If the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the game shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (movable body connected to the main control device 70) managed by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is movably controlled, and whether or not the movable body operates normally. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside the special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a probability variation area or a specific area, a rotating body that constantly rotates in the case of a two-type system, and a specified trigger. The movable body that can be moved by the above, the mechanism, solenoid, motor, etc. associated with these, and the ordinary electric accessory (electric tulip) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movable control is executed, for example, by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movable pattern in which "0.4 seconds ON → 0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated a plurality of times.
The movable control may be continuously executed from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed up to a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clear from the outside that preparation is in progress. In this case, for example, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "finished when the RAM clear switch is pressed", "change the effect setting by pressing the effect button", etc. can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display. it can. In this case, the audio output such as "Preparing" may be repeatedly executed at the same time.

(4) During preparation, the setting related to the effect may be changed by operating the effect button. For example, when the effect switching button (effect button) is pressed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display is switched, and the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 steps), effect frequency setting (1 to 3 steps), effect type setting, etc. are selected. Can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the launch control of the game ball may be disabled. This is because the launch control board 108 can launch the game ball on condition that the “launch permission signal” is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the payout control device 92. The main control device 70 can perform a process of transmitting a "launch permission signal" in the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" is being performed during preparation. Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for the process being prepared (the program for operating various movable bodies) can be implemented (arranged) in the used area. The used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation may be made may be output to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.).

(8) The preparation is in the stage before shifting to the main loop (before the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) is executed). Therefore, during the preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Further, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine an error that can be determined during the playable state (for example, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls, the fluctuation of special symbols, and the fluctuation of ordinary symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is finished, a command indicating "preparing finished" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, a command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before shifting to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, the RAM clear process is not executed, and the RAM clear process can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during the preparation. However, after executing the RAM clear process, the transition may be made during preparation, and then the transition to the main loop may be performed.

The background to adopting such a configuration has the following problems.
In conventional gaming machines, the operation of special electric and ordinary electric pachinko machines cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may be discovered.

Then, by adopting the above configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the various electric accessories can operate when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the problem that the various electric accessories do not operate during the game and to play the game normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.
(3) Since the problem can be solved in advance (before the game), the process of confirming the problem during the game can be eliminated, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load on the control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during the preparation (operation check), it is possible to provide an efficient game.

The following technical contents can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while the predetermined operating member (RAM clear switch), the movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operating member are being operated. It is a gaming machine provided with a movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a constant motion pattern in order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of the above (1), it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant operation pattern until the predetermined operating member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 95).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 of the number of prize balls based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) and normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 determines various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 100). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 100).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 101). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol random number. Can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, each random number of the first special symbol is not stored any more. Similarly, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is not stored any more. The reason why there are five sections is that a total number of sections is required, which is the sum of the maximum storage number (4) of the first special symbol and the maximum storage number (1) of the second special symbol. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fifth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fifth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 101). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 102), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and these are transferred to the random number storage area. Random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 102) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 101).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 102, step S46 in FIG. 103) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 103). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 103). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 103). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 102) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 103).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 100) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 10-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as "10 rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 10-round jackpot. In addition to the 10-round jackpot, other jackpots may be provided as the type of jackpot.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 100). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). A gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10 round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "10 round big hits 1 to 4" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and "10 round big hits 5 and 6" are stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the hit game. When the big hit is executed by "10 round big hits 5 and 6" (when the big hit is executed via the small hit), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first round in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 operates.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of the "second winning symbol". Further, "10 round jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of the "third winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 4" corresponds to the jackpot of the "fourth winning symbol". Furthermore, "10 round big hit 5" corresponds to a small hit of "5th winning symbol" (big hit when passing through a specific area 31x), and "10 round big hit 6" corresponds to a small hit of "6th winning symbol" (specific area). It corresponds to the big hit when passing 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of prizes (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first prize opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[Second Winning Symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Third winning symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. ..

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 100). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read out in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (winning order digestion). It should be noted that the control of priority digestion that prioritizes the digestion of the second special symbol may be used instead of the control of the winning order digestion for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 106), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest storage corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, when the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target special symbol this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target special symbol this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 106).

[See FIG. 106: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. In the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (= approximately 1/1), and it corresponds to a loss. It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to the loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Further, the main control CPU 72 has a second special symbol lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) that is less likely to occur than the first special symbol lottery opportunity (first lottery opportunity) in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). When the occurrence occurs, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 100).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, and the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is "third winning symbol" or "fourth winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "52" and "48" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (= 52%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. It is 48 minutes (= 48%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 1 (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value and may be 2 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means time when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 10. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" and the "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. It is 50 minutes (= 50%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

[See FIG. 106: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time saving state (when a special condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 starts from the non-time saving state (first state) a plurality of times. It is possible to shift to a continuous villa state (a state in which the second special symbol can be changed in a time shortened state and a non-time shortened state: a second state, a special state) in which the special game can be executed (state transition means). ).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "5th winning symbol" and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol A", "fifth winning symbol B", "fifth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "50" and "50" are when the denominator is 100. Corresponds to the ratio of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol". Is 50/100 (= 50%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "sixth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol", "3rd winning symbol" or "5th winning symbol" is applicable (the 5th winning symbol is limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time. It can be assumed that the transition condition to the shortened state is satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See FIG. 106: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 105: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 106). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 105) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if both the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 causes the first special symbol. It is possible to send a special variation number designation command that reflects the value of the special variation number of the second special symbol and the special variation number of the second special symbol to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cutting counter value (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) regarding the time reduction state is adopted. (Time reduction number of times) is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 10 times), and the second number cut counter value (time reduction number of times of the second special symbol) related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 1 time). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the first count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-of-times cutting counter values (first number-of-times cutting counter value or second number-of-times cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once or 10 times). When the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced 9 times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once in the time-reduced state. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of a display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 100) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The time shortened state can be ended at the end of the fluctuation (at the start of the stop display time) of the final fluctuation (missing fluctuation, small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation) in the time shortened state. In this case, the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time shortened state can be set to a time (15.0 seconds) longer than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) other than the final fluctuation. The time reduction state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 makes it possible to select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the gaming state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the variation pattern selected may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other fluctuation pattern tables. The "game state" in the figure indicates the game state (game state of the transition destination) after the end of the big hit game. However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state before the start of the big hit game (the game state before the transition).

The variation pattern table A is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. This table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B is that the fluctuation pattern table B is a table that is selected within the specified number of fluctuations (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) after the time reduction state ends. .. The variation pattern table B is a so-called immediate shaving prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "time reduction available (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuates from 1 to 4, 6 to 9 when the symbol with time reduction in the normal state is won (when the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol" is won). Be selected. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, 1-second fluctuation) is set for the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 120-second fluctuation) is set for the second special symbol. Is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the gaming state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the time saving state. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (1 time remaining = when the second special symbol fluctuates by one variation after the end of the time reduction state). In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table B.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with a time reduction in the normal state is won. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
Here, the "time reduction number" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the first number cut counter value (the total time reduction number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 115).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5" or "10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
In this embodiment, since a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the second number cut counter value (the time reduction number of only the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 116).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.
As in FIG. 114, in the present embodiment, a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, so that there is no special change table after the second change.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) (For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (variation time determining means). ..

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). It is possible to make the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (for example, less than 120 seconds) in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). Fluctuation time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) should be made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) The fluctuation time can be determined so that the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state). Time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). The fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) is made to be relatively longer than the fluctuation time (variation pattern table C) of the first special symbol when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. The fluctuation time can be determined (variation time determination means).

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[4th winning symbol]
When the fourth winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 120: Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of corresponding to the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 119).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[See FIG. 122: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 119).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 118).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 122)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 122)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 118). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 124). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 125).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 125).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time reduction state transition means, time reduction). Function operating means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time saving state (when a special condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 starts from the non-time saving state (first state) a plurality of times. It is possible to shift to a continuous villa state (a state in which the second special symbol can be changed in a time shortened state and a non-time shortened state: a second state) in which a jackpot game (special game) can be executed (state transition means). ).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 125).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (the same applies to the 6th winning symbol below). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain nine rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 9). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 6th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 120) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 127)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 120) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 127)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 118). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 124). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the winning opening. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 118). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 122). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 118). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 106) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 127.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "1" is set as the initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG. 127.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 105) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)] FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] If a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode at this time is the "time reduction state". In the present embodiment, in the drive mode, two effect modes having different appearances of the effect are prepared, and the player can select one of them. Specifically, the two production modes are the earth drive mode (hereinafter, abbreviated as "earth mode") in which a background image showing a state in which a car in which a female character is riding is traveling on the ground is displayed. , There are two space drive modes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "space mode") in which a background image showing a state in which a spacecraft on which an alien is aboard swims in outer space is displayed.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)] FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortened state. [F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F15] fourth winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F20] a drive in a non-time shortened state. Move to mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F20] shifts to the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.

[Game Flow (Part 3)] FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. [F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol Fluctuates.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F15] fourth winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the time is shortened (consecutive villa state), the fluctuation of one time reduction of the second special symbol and one memory of the second special symbol are totaled by 2. You can get the chance of hitting (big hit or small hit). Then, if one of the two opportunities is won with a winning symbol with a time reduction, the game will return to the time shortened state (consecutive villa state) again. Therefore, it is possible to continue to stay in the drive mode as long as it does not correspond to the winning symbol with no time reduction in succession in these two opportunities.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 and the operation of the drum unit 200 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and also “ It has little visual impact as a "winning symbol". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the markers M1, the markers M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like. , A pseudo-effect symbol such as 7 symbols is displayed on the drum unit 200.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

There are three pseudo-effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200: a pseudo-left effect symbol displayed on the left reel 201, a pseudo-middle effect symbol displayed on the middle reel 202, and a pseudo-right effect symbol displayed on the right reel 203. These are included and are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right sides of the display area of the drum unit 200. Each reel includes 7 symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and as each reel rotates, the simulated effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

FIGS. 135 and 136 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 135 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three rows of effect symbol Hz in the lower right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (with reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. These markers M1 and M2 display the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) corresponding to the respective display numbers. It is represented, and the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game. Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0. Since the maximum number of working memories of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is lit at the maximum.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

On the other hand, on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200, a "panda symbol" corresponding to "off" is displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
FIG. 135 (B): For example, each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. Is started (design production execution means). In the figure, the variation display of the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Left production symbol stop]
FIG. 135 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz left effect of the liquid crystal display 42 are produced. The symbol stops changing. In this example, "7 green symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "8" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 135 (B) above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the position is located on the leftmost side in conjunction with this. The number of displayed markers M1 has been reduced by one. That is, up to that time, there were a total of four working memory numbers of the marker M1, but the marker M1, which is the earliest (oldest) memory number display, is hidden, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is combined. Be told. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach the working memory in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the example of FIG. 135 (C), since the working memory at the head in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three are, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are one by one. The effect is to shift in the direction (here, to the left). As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the production, and to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 136 (D): Next, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 136 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are the same. The stop display effect is performed in the form of non-winning (missing). That is, in the illustrated example, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo-middle effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "1" is used as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production design that represents is stopped. In this case, the combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the deviation of "green 7 symbols"-"panda symbol"-"panda symbol", and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. Since the combination of Hz is the deviation of "8"-"1"-"3", it is expressed in the production that this fluctuation corresponds to the normal "outside". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
137 to 139 are continuous views showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, after the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is an aspect of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol". (For example, 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed ( Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 137 (A): Each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. By doing so, the variable display effect is started.

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 137 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed on the liquid crystal display 42. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The picture image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes may be used). The "pre-reach notice" is a production that announces the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 137 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 137 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display effect is being continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 138 (D): When the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 138 (E): Then, the pseudo right effect symbol of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop fluctuating. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. As a result, the reach state of "7 red symbols"-"changing"-"7 red symbols" is generated in the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200, and "7" is generated in the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. "-" Fluctuating "-" 7 "reach state has occurred. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time. After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed. Regarding the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, the display state may be "changing"-"changing"-"changing" without generating a clear reach state.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 138 (F): After a short time after the reach state occurs, on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, images representing a "heart" figure form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. Will be done. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 139 (G): Following the notice effect after the reach occurs, a "ghost of a pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen. "Appears, and the characters" VS "appear in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 139 (H): At the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" punches innumerably, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss.

[Stop display production (production at the time of winning)]
In FIG. 139 (I): When the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small together with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a big hit. Then, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, the pseudo medium effect symbol of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the intermediate effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a big hit (for example, a red display color).

At the time of non-winning (at the time of loss), "Pumpkin ghost" is displayed large and "Male character" is displayed small along with the characters "Defeat ...". In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than the number "7" as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The symbol is stopped.

[Direction during a major role]
FIGS. 140 and 141 are continuous views partially showing an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 140 (A): When the jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 140 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, 10 circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining 9 ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 10 rounds, the current round is the first of the 10 rounds, and each round in which a ball can be obtained is marked with a circle. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

[10th round]
In FIG. 140 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the 10th round are completed.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 141 (D): Then, the effect of displaying the character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed by using the end time (ending time) of the big hit game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 141 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving medium effect] In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time saving state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) that displays the background image corresponding to the time saving state (advantageous game state) is performed. Will be executed.

[Right-handed suggestion effect] In addition, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed at the upper part of the screen. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect] Further, at the lower left of the screen, the remaining number display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 2 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the drive mode in the time shortened state or the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
FIGS. 142 to 144 are continuous views showing an example of the effect of the drive mode.

In FIG. 142 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image showing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the pseudo-effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the winning of "7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols", and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42. The combination of symbol Hz is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may be made to emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 142 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (marker M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also start to fluctuate. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 142 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the disengaged manner, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also disengaged. It is stopped and displayed in the mode of. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining two times.

In FIG. 143 (D): Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the order of winning, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested after that. Then, when the digestion of the remaining memory of the first special symbol is completed, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start to fluctuate. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 143 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"), The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Further, for example, the player executes a right-handed strike while the second special symbol is fluctuating, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball is opened to the right start winning opening. It is assumed that the ball has entered 28b. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

In FIG. 143 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be inserted into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 144 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 144 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, the ball is substantially obtained for 9 rounds (10 rounds of balls including the small hit game). can do. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

FIGS. 145 and 146 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state, in which the big hit game is executed corresponding to the big hit of the "4th winning symbol" or the small hit of the "6th winning symbol", and the first 2 This is the case where the memory of the special symbol is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining one time" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of variation of special symbol] In FIG. 145 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the drum unit 200 starts rotating and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start to fluctuate.

[Continuation of Variable Display Effect] In FIG. 145 (B): The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Along with this, the rotation of the drum unit 200 continues, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also continue to fluctuate. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability that the variable start winning device 28 will be open for a long time is low even if the start gate 20 is passed. Therefore, basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates at most once.

[Stop display effect] In FIG. 145 (C): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol") and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 The Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining.

[Start of small hit, opening of second big winning opening] In Fig. 146 (D): Then, when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened and the car on which the female character is riding is opened. The effect of increasing the speed and moving to the right side of the screen is executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area] In FIG. 146 (E): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to a small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is the sixth winning symbol. It is assumed that it was. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game] In FIG. 146 (F): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed corresponding to the sixth winning symbol in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the launch direction. The following game flow is the game flow when the consecutive villa state ends in the shortest time. Specifically, in the non-time reduction state, the big hit of the "1st winning type (with time reduction)" is won, and in the time reduction state, the small hit of the "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won, and the non-time reduction is achieved. This is the flow of the game when a small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won in the state. The gaming state progresses in the order of No1 to No13.

[No1] The "gaming state" is the "first special symbol variation", and the "launching direction" is "left-handed". At the start of the game, the first special symbol is changed to aim for a big hit.

[No2] The "game state" is "big hit (first hit, first big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of the "first winning type (with time reduction)" is won.

[No3] The "game state" is the "time reduction state", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". When the gaming state shifts from the non-time shortened state to the time shortened state, the firing direction becomes right-handed.

[No4] The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is digested at high speed.

[No5] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (time reduction state, memory +1)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". During the change of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be stored.

[No6] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (time shortened state end)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". When the game state shifts from the time-shortened state to the non-time-shortened state when the second special symbol is stopped, the firing direction is switched from right-handed to left-handed.

[No7] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No8] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (second big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No9] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (non-time shortened state)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Here, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No10] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No11] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". The launch direction continues to be left-handed.

[No12] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (third big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No13] The "game state" is "the end of a big hit for one set (three times)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". In this case, the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this way, if the winning symbol without time reduction (for example, "sixth winning type (no time reduction)") is applied twice in a row, the consecutive villa state ends.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, advance notice effect before reach occurrence, memory number display effect, large role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 or drum unit 200, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number display effect, etc. Are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
As described with reference to FIG. 94, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). By linking, the operation of each device (screen display by liquid crystal display 42, audio output by speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, etc., various movable bodies by movable body motor 57, etc. By controlling the operation, etc.), the effect reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operating subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor (overall control unit) is referred to as the effect control unit 210, and the effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). ), The "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", or "movable body control unit 226", as appropriate, depending on the device to be controlled. It is referred to as "input control unit 228". In addition, these control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228 that function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Further, the operation main body that manages the time related to the effect reproduction is referred to as "time management unit 230" or "ACT".

As a rough flow of the effect control, first, when the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, a command for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents is issued in the RAM 130 (storage means). Output to a predetermined area of (effect control means). The command output by the effect control unit 210 is transmitted by the time management unit 230 to each individual control unit at a predetermined timing. In response to this, each individual control unit refers to a command, gives a specific instruction to each device based on the content of the command, and controls the operation of each device (effect operation control means). As a result of such control, the effect operation by each device is executed (effect operation execution means). That is, the command output by the effect control unit 210 uniquely specifies the effect operation of each device (effect operation command).

In addition, each individual control unit can specify one effect operation by one received command or by combining a plurality of commands when controlling the effect operation of each device. Further, the time management unit 230 activates the control table in which the details of the effect operation associated with the content of the command are defined at the same time as the transmission of the command to each individual control unit or instead of the transmission of the command. Is also possible. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control unit 210. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control unit 210 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and drum unit effect management process. (Step S403), special fluctuation effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410), and others. It is a configuration including a group of subroutines of the process (step S412) of. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received commands and saves them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect commands, fluctuation pattern destination judgment commands, stop display time end commands, count cut counter commands, various error commands, special fluctuation count specification commands, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It controls the content of the effect when the variable winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 displays the effect contents (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, markers M1, M2, production contents related to the important role production, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of determining the contents of various notice effects) is executed. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control unit 210 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. In this way, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect content to be displayed on the drum unit 200 (effect content related to the pseudo effect symbol, content related to the movement of the drum unit 200). The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special variation effect management process, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not to execute the special variation effect based on the special variation number designation command, and if it is determined to execute, what kind of content is there? Executes the process of determining whether to execute the effect during the special fluctuation of.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 performs an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that fluctuates the effect symbol at high speed) when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected. When the special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, the process of selecting the effect pattern for executing the reach effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control unit 210 first tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. Outputs a command instructing the effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the variable time notice effect number, the background pattern number, etc.). In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the content of the command, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a command instructing the lamp control unit 224 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the command, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and drives (lights up) various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. Or turn off, blink, change brightness gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends the effect content (for example, during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, and the jackpot effect) to the voice control unit 222, and the sound data. Etc.) is output as a command. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the command, and sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) according to the production contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56. Is output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In another process, for example, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a command instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 of specific control contents based on the contents of the command. In response to this, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on the instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 eliminates the markers M1 or M2 corresponding to the lottery elements consumed by the internal lottery, and slides the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Select.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 105) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (preliminary effect) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( Button effect) is instructed to each individual control unit by a command.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit in order to control the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect by a command. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Comparison of two production modes in drive mode]
FIG. 151 is a table comparing two effect modes that can be selected in the drive mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, two effect modes (earth mode and space mode) are prepared in the drive mode, and during the drive mode stay, one of the effect modes selected by the player is selected. Various productions are performed.

The two production modes differ greatly in the characteristics (how they are shown and tendencies) of the production. First, in the earth mode, a wide variety of notice effects such as conversation notice, step-up notice, mini character notice, cut-in notice, etc. can be executed. On the other hand, in the space mode, the effect is composed mainly of the movement of the symbol, and the effect that makes the special symbol appear to change many times during one change of the special symbol is executed. (Pseudo-variation effect executing means. Hereinafter, pseudo-variation that is continuously executed during one variation of a special symbol is referred to as "pseudo-ream"). That is, in the space mode, a preliminary expression is made by changing the appearance of the pattern in various ways, and the preliminary production itself is hardly executed.

Therefore, when comparing the two, in the earth mode, the frequency of the advance notice effect is high, and the number of commands (designated information related to the effect) output by the effect control unit 210 increases accordingly, and the maximum is Although 1146 kinds of commands can be output, the pseudo-ream occurs only 7 times at the maximum. On the other hand, in the space mode, the frequency of occurrence of the advance notice effect is low, and the number of commands output by the effect control unit 210 is also reduced accordingly, and the maximum number of commands that can be output is only 46. Pseudo-ream can occur up to 31 times.

In this way, the number of commands and the number of pseudo-reams differ greatly between the earth mode and the space mode. In the process of effect control, various information is stored in the RAM 130, but since the capacity of the RAM 130 is limited, it is necessary to devise how to use the area in the RAM 130 in order to efficiently control the execution of the effect. is there.

It should be noted that the number of occurrences of the pseudo-ream described above includes one time of this fluctuation, and among the plurality of pseudo-variations (pseudo-variations) constituting the pseudo-ream, the last pseudo-variation is the main fluctuation. Corresponds to. For example, when the number of occurrences of the pseudo-ream is 3, the first and second pseudo-variations are apparent fluctuations, and the third pseudo-variation is the main variation. In addition, although not shown, in the normal mode, various warning effects are executed as in the earth mode (the types of commands that can be output fall within the range of the types in the earth mode), but the fluctuation of the symbol is not shown. It is composed only of this fluctuation, and no apparent fluctuation occurs.

[Usage mode of RAM in production control device: Embodiment]
FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating a usage mode of the RAM 130 (built-in RAM of the effect control CPU 126).

In the present embodiment, in order to control the effect in each effect mode, an execution area 240, a pseudo area 250 for the earth mode, and a pseudo area 260 for the space mode are provided inside the RAM 130. All of these areas are storage areas for temporarily storing commands output by the effect control unit 210. Of these, the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260 are special symbols. It is used to store various commands that are output in response to the content of the effect that is determined before the start of the fluctuation of. On the other hand, the execution area 240 is used to store the command corresponding to the effect at a predetermined timing before the effect is executed, and is stored in a part of the earth mode pseudo area 250 or the space mode pseudo area 260. The command that has been executed is transcribed and stored. Hereinafter, the configuration of each region will be described in detail.

The earth mode pseudo area 250 is a storage area used when the earth mode is selected in the drive mode. As described above, since the pseudo-ream occurs up to 7 times in the earth mode, the pseudo-region 250 for the earth mode starts from the pseudo-region 250-1 for the first pseudo-variation (pseudo 1). A total of seven pseudo regions are provided up to the pseudo regions 250-7 for the seventh pseudo fluctuation (pseudo 7). Further, since a maximum of 1146 types of commands are output in the earth mode, the pseudo regions 250-1 to 250-7 have 1146 storage areas inside each of them. Therefore, the total number of storage areas in the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode is 8022 (= 1146 × 7).

In the normal mode, as described above, there is no apparent fluctuation and it is composed only of this fluctuation, and the types of commands that can be output fall within the range of the types in the earth mode. It is possible to store all commands in the earth mode pseudo region 250 without providing an region. Therefore, in the normal mode, the earth mode pseudo region 250 is used. That is, the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode is used in both the earth mode and the normal mode.

Further, the space mode pseudo area 260 is a storage area used when the space mode is selected in the drive mode. As described above, in the space mode, the pseudo-ream occurs up to 31 times. Therefore, in accordance with this, the pseudo-region 260 for the space mode starts from the pseudo-region 260-1 for the first pseudo-variation (pseudo 1). A total of 31 pseudo regions are provided up to the pseudo regions 260-31 for the 31st pseudo fluctuation (pseudo 31). Further, since a maximum of 46 types of commands are output in the space mode, each of the pseudo regions 260-1 to 260-31 has 46 storage areas inside. Therefore, the total number of storage areas in the space mode pseudo region 260 is 1426 (= 46 × 31).

Before the start of the change of the special symbol, in the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502 in FIG. 150), the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern to be executed according to the result of the effect lottery or the like. At this time, the effect control unit 210 stores various commands corresponding to the effect pattern in a predetermined area of the earth mode pseudo area 250 or the space mode pseudo area 260. For example, a command having a content corresponding to an effect pattern related to the first pseudo-variation in the earth mode is stored in a predetermined area of the earth mode pseudo area 250-1 (for pseudo 1), and 5 in the space mode. The command of the content corresponding to the effect pattern of the effect related to the second pseudo-variation is stored in a predetermined area of the space mode pseudo area 260-5 (for pseudo 5).

Then, the execution area 240 is stored at a predetermined timing before the effect is executed, that is, before the command corresponding to the effect to be executed (effect to be constructed) is transmitted to each individual control unit. It is a storage area and has 1146 storage areas inside. The execution area 240 can store all kinds of commands that can be stored in the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260. Before the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, various commands are stored in advance in the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode or the pseudo region 260 for the space mode, and in the execution region 240, the execution timing is matched from these pseudo regions. The command is transcribed and stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo region is provided with a structure different for each mode. Further, the total number of storage areas in the entire pseudo area including the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260 is 9448 (= 8022 + 1426).

The entity of the execution area 240, the pseudo area 250 for the earth mode, and the pseudo area 260 for the space mode is, for example, an array variable, and the number of the storage area in each area is the position in the array (index number of the array). Is shown.

FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating usage modes of the execution region 240, the earth mode pseudo region 250, and the space mode pseudo region 260. In order to facilitate the understanding of the invention, here, it is assumed that the area where the command is stored is fixed for each type of command in each area.

In FIG. 153 (A): An example of using the execution area 240 is shown. Of the 1146 storage areas of the execution area 240, for example, 10 storage areas in areas 1-10 store commands related to conversation notice. When executing the conversation notice, information such as the display color, the character that appears, and the dialogue that the character utters is specified, and each command corresponding to this information is individually assigned to a predetermined area in areas 1-10. It will be stored. For example, the area 1 stores a command for designating a display color, and the area 2 stores a command for specifying a character to appear. It should be noted that the command is not necessarily stored in all the storage areas, and the command is not stored in the storage area corresponding to the information not specified.

The same applies to other storage areas. For example, commands related to step-up notices are stored in the 10 storage areas in areas 11-20, and commands related to mini character notices are stored in the 10 storage areas in areas 21-30. The command is stored. Further, for example, commands related to variable operation (design operation) are stored in the five storage areas of areas 1101-1105, and symbols (stop rolls) are stored in the five storage areas of area 1106-1110. Commands related to are stored, commands related to fluctuation details (SP reach designation, etc.) are stored in the 10 storage areas of area 1111-1120, and hold storage sections are stored in the 10 storage areas of area 1121-1130. Commands related to (the effect performed in the section where the player is charged with the operation memory) are stored, and the five storage areas of the area 1131-1135 are related to the device system notice (notice not related to the effect by the liquid crystal display 42). Commands are stored, and commands related to irregular relations (correspondence when an unusual way of hitting is made) are stored in the 11 storage areas of areas 1136-1146.

In FIG. 153 (B): An example of use of the pseudo region 250-1 to 250-7 for the earth mode is shown. The pseudo regions 250-1 to 250-7 for the earth mode all have the same structure as the execution region 240, and the 1146 storage areas of each pseudo region 250-1 to 250-7 are used. This is the same as the execution area 240. Therefore, the individual commands stored in the pseudo areas 250-1 to 250-7 are transferred to and stored in the storage area having the same area number in the execution area 240 at a predetermined timing before the execution of the effect. It becomes.

In FIG. 153 (C): An example of use of the space mode pseudo region 260-1 to 260-31 is shown. Each of the space mode pseudo areas 260-1 to 260-31 has 46 storage areas, and the usage of these storage areas is the usage of the storage areas 1101-1146 in the execution area 240. Is similar to. That is, commands related to variable operation are stored in the five storage areas of storage areas 1-5, commands related to symbols are stored in the five storage areas of areas 6-10, and commands related to symbols are stored in areas 11-20 of 10. Commands related to fluctuation details are stored in the storage areas, commands related to the hold storage section are stored in the 10 storage areas in areas 21-30, and commands related to the reserved storage section are stored in the 5 storage areas in areas 31-35. Commands related to device notification are stored, and commands related to irregularity are stored in the 11 storage areas of areas 36-46.

Further, each command stored in each pseudo area 260-1 to 260-31 is in the execution area 240 having an area number obtained by adding "1100" to the original area number at a predetermined timing before executing the effect. It is transferred to the storage area of and stored. For example, the command stored in the area 1 of each pseudo area 260-1 to 260-31 is transferred to and stored in the area 1101 in the execution area 240 at a predetermined timing before the execution of the effect.

It should be noted that the above usage mode is given as an example only, and is not limited to this. Further, in the above description, for convenience of explanation, the area where the command is stored is fixed for each type of command, but the area where the command is stored is dynamic immediately before the command is stored in each area. May be decided. In other words, which type of command is stored in which storage area in each area is managed in some way (a specific type of command can be obtained from each area), and the pseudo area for earth mode is used. When a command is transferred and stored from 250 to the execution area 240 or from the space mode pseudo area 260 to the execution area 240, the execution area depends on the type of the transferred command. The configuration may be such that the command can be stored in an appropriate storage area in 240, and in that case, each command may be stored in any storage area in each area.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of use of the execution area 240 at each time point after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, the case where the earth mode is selected in the drive mode will be taken as an example. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 154 (A): The state of the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode before the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is shown. Depending on the result of the effect lottery executed before the start of the change of the special symbol, the command related to the effect executed after the start of the change is stored in the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode. For example, it is determined by the production lottery that the pseudo-ren is executed up to three times, and that the conversation notice, the step-up notice, the mini-character notice, etc. are executed according to each pseudo-variation constituting the pseudo-ren. Then, the commands corresponding to the determined contents of the effect are the pseudo region 250-1 for the earth mode (for pseudo 1), the pseudo region 250-2 for the earth mode (for pseudo 2), and the pseudo region 250-3 for the earth mode. It is stored in a predetermined area (for pseudo 3).

In FIG. 154 (B): The state of the execution area 240 immediately before the start of pseudo 1 (first pseudo variation) is shown. In Pseudo 1, it is decided in advance to execute "conversation notice (weak)" and "step-up notice (first stage)", and in the pseudo region 250-1 for earth mode (for pseudo 1), it is determined. Commands corresponding to these effects are stored. Therefore, immediately before the start of the pseudo 1, the contents of the pseudo area 250-1 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 1) are copied to the execution area 240, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in the pseudo 1 is executed in the execution area 240. It is stored in the predetermined storage area of.

The command stored in the execution area 240 is transmitted to each individual control unit by ACT at a predetermined timing, whereby the storage area in which the command is stored is cleared (it becomes empty). It should be noted that the storage area may not be cleared at this timing, but may be collectively performed at the timing of initializing the entire pseudo area described later. Further, the subsequent flow of the command stored in the execution area 240 will be described in detail later with reference to the following drawings.

FIG. 154 (C): The state of the execution area 240 immediately before the start of pseudo 2 (second pseudo variation) is shown. In Pseudo 2, it is decided in advance to execute "conversation notice (strong)", "step-up notice (second stage)", and "mini character notice (weak)", and the pseudo area 250-2 for the earth mode is executed. Commands corresponding to these effects are stored in (for pseudo 2). Therefore, immediately before the start of the pseudo 2, the contents of the pseudo area 250-2 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 2) are copied to the execution area 240, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in the pseudo 2 is executed in the execution area 240. It is stored in the predetermined storage area of.

In FIG. 154 (D): The state of the execution region 240 immediately before the start of pseudo 3 (third pseudo variation, that is, this variation) is shown. In Pseudo 3, it is decided in advance to execute "step-up notice (third stage)" and "mini character notice (strong)", and in the pseudo region 250-3 for earth mode (for pseudo 3), it is determined. Commands corresponding to these effects are stored. Therefore, immediately before the start of the pseudo 3, the contents of the pseudo area 250-2 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 2) are copied to the execution area 240, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in the pseudo 3 is executed in the execution area 240. It is stored in the predetermined storage area of.

In FIG. 154 (E): The state of the execution area 240 after the determination of the special symbol is shown. After the determination, the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode (for pseudo 1 to pseudo 7) is initialized in preparation for use in the next fluctuation. The timing of initializing the entire pseudo region is not limited after the determination. For example, the entire pseudo area may be initialized before the start of the change (before the command for the next change is stored in each pseudo area) or during the so-called customer waiting state.

Before the start of the change of the special symbol shown in FIG. 154 (A), a command corresponding to the result of the effect lottery executed before the start of the change is stored in a predetermined storage area of each pseudo area. However, the command can be stored even after the special symbol starts to change depending on the situation. For example, if an additional effect lottery is executed after the start of fluctuation, commands are appropriately stored at that timing. In addition, for example, a command output when the number of working memories changes, which is not linked to the start timing of each pseudo-variation and requires an immediate instruction, is pseudo. It may be stored directly in the execution area 240 without going through the areas 250 and 260.

Further, the initialization of each pseudo region may be performed one by one at any time without targeting the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode or the entire pseudo region 260 for the space mode. For example, the initialization may be performed individually immediately after the copying from the individual pseudo area to the execution area 240 is completed.

FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a flow of commands stored in the execution area 240. In order to facilitate the understanding of the invention, FIG. 155 shows only the blocks related to the transfer of commands in the effect control device 124. Further, here, the flow of commands corresponding to the "step-up notice (first stage)" in Pseudo 1 when the earth mode is selected in the drive mode will be given as an example. Hereinafter, the command flow will be described in chronological order.

First, the effect control unit 210 executes (1) an effect lottery before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and (2) determines a command corresponding to the effect to be executed in the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode according to the result or the like. Store in the area of. Here, each command is composed of, for example, 4 bytes. The command corresponding to the "step-up notice (first stage)" is "0x01040101". Therefore, when the command is stored in the earth mode pseudo area 250 by the effect control unit 210, the command "0x01040101" is stored in a predetermined area (for example, "area 11") of the earth mode pseudo area 250-1 (for pseudo 1). Is stored.

Immediately before the start of the pseudo 1, the contents of (3) the pseudo region 250-1 for the earth mode (for the pseudo 1) are copied to the execution region 240. As a result, the command "0x01040101" is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, "area 11") of the execution area 240. Then, at a predetermined timing, the time management unit 230 (ACT) outputs each command stored in (4) the execution area 240 to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, It is transmitted to the movable body control unit 226). As a result, the command "0x01040101" corresponding to the "step-up notice (first stage)" is transmitted to each individual control unit.

A mailbox is provided in each individual control unit, and commands sent from the ACT are received in each mailbox. In the present embodiment, each individual control unit is configured to check the mailbox each time a timer interrupt occurs. Check the mailbox, and if a command is being received, (5) refer to the command received by each individual control unit. Then, based on the content of the command (6), a specific instruction is given to the effect device to control the operation of the effect device.

More specifically, the display control unit 220 gives a specific instruction to the VDP 152 to control the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42, and the voice control unit 222 gives a specific instruction to the voice IC 134 to give a specific instruction to the speaker 54. , 55, 56, the lamp control unit 224 gives specific instructions to the LED driver 198 to control the light emission of various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, etc., and the movable body control unit 226. Gives specific instructions to the SMC 199 to control the operation of the movable body 40f and the drum unit 200. In this way, the command "0x01040101" is flowed from the upstream side to the downstream side inside the effect control device 124, so that the effect of "step-up notice (first stage)" is constructed in the pseudo 1 and the effect is produced. The device (liquid crystal display, speaker, lamp, movable body) executes the effect operation of "step-up notice (first stage)".

As described above, in the present embodiment, each effect device executes the effect operation uniquely associated with the command output by the effect control unit 210. The above example is an example in which the command and the effect effect are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, but the mode of the association is not limited to this, and the command and the effect effect are associated with each other on a many-to-one basis. An effect operation associated with a combination of a plurality of commands may be executed by each effect device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the control of the effect device by each individual control unit is, in principle, performed based on the command output by the effect control unit 210, and the effect device is not instructed differently from the command. .. However, under specific conditions, each individual control unit may give an instruction different from the command. For example, when the effect control unit 210 outputs a "normal effect symbol command", the display control unit 220 determines whether or not the user is staying in the zone, and if the command is staying in the zone, among the commands. It is also possible to instruct the VDP 152 to display an effect image corresponding to the effect symbol command for the zone, based on the "effect symbol command" part.

The size of the command is not limited to 4 bytes. Further, the confirmation of the mailbox by each individual control unit may be performed by another method instead of performing each time the timer interrupt occurs. For example, when a command is received in the mailbox, a signal indicating that effect may be input, and each individual control unit may check the mailbox with this signal input as a trigger. Further, in the above procedure (4), the ACT can also read the control table provided corresponding to the content of the command from the control ROM 180 and start it. When the control table is activated by ACT, each individual control unit analyzes the effect operation defined in the activated control table in the above procedure (5), and then performs the above procedure (6). In, specific instructions will be given to the production device.

The above example is an example of operation in normal times (when a predetermined condition is not satisfied), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when some error or abnormality occurs), it is specified by a command. It is also possible not to let the effect device execute the effect operation, or to limit a part of the effect operation specified by the command to execute the effect operation. For example, while the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is darkened, the voice control unit 222 may be controlled to interrupt (mute) the output of the symbol stop sound from the speaker by ignoring the "design stop" command. When an error occurs, the lamp control unit 224 may be controlled so as not to execute the lamp emission pattern for the effect A by ignoring the command of "effect A".

Further, depending on the content of the command, not all the effect devices may execute the effect operation corresponding to the command. For example, when each individual control unit receives a command related to a device system notice (notice not related to the effect of the liquid crystal display 42), at least the liquid crystal display 42 is not involved in the device system notice, so at least the liquid crystal display. The display control unit 220 does not control the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42 based on this command because the effect operation for this command does not exist in the 42.

[Usage of RAM in production control device: Comparative example]
FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating a usage mode of the RAM 130'as a comparative example.

In the comparative example, the execution area 240'and the common pseudo area 250' are provided inside the RAM 130'. Of these, the execution area 240'is provided for the same purpose as the execution area 240 in the above-described embodiment, and has the same structure. On the other hand, the common pseudo region 250'is provided as an region that has both the purpose of the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode and the use of the pseudo region 260 for the space mode in the embodiment, and both the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode are in space. It has a structure that is the least common multiple of both, which is different from the pseudo region 260 for mode.

More specifically, based on the fact that the maximum number of occurrences of pseudo-ream is 7 in the earth mode and 31 in the space mode, the common pseudo-region can be used in any mode. A total of 31 250's are provided (common pseudo areas 250'-1 to 250'-31). In addition, considering that the maximum number of commands that can be output is 1146 in the earth mode and 46 in the space mode, each common pseudo region 250 can be used in any mode. Inside ´, 1146 storage areas are provided. Therefore, the total number of storage areas in the common pseudo area 250'in the comparative example is 35526 (= 1146 × 31). By making the common pseudo area 250'with such a structure, all the commands output by the effect control unit 210 can be stored in the common pseudo area 250'in the earth mode, the space mode, and the earth mode. Can be done.

However, when the common pseudo-region 250'is used in the earth mode, the pseudo-ream occurs only 7 times at the maximum. In this case, the common pseudo-region 250'-8 to 250'-31, that is, 24 The pseudo areas (total 27504 storage areas, which correspond to about 77.4% of the total common pseudo area 250') are not used at all. Further, when the common pseudo area 250'is used in the space mode, only 46 types of commands are output at the maximum. In this case, the areas in each of the common pseudo areas 250'-1 to 250'-31 are output. The 1100 storage areas of 47-1146 (a total of 34100 storage areas, which corresponds to about 96.0% of the total common pseudo area 250') are not used at all. As described above, in the common pseudo area 250', there are many unused storage areas, which is wasteful, and the limited capacity of the RAM 130' cannot be effectively utilized.

[Advantage of Embodiment]
FIG. 157 is a table showing a comparison between the embodiment and the comparative example regarding the usage mode of the RAM.

As described with reference to FIG. 152, in the embodiment, the pseudo region is provided with a structure different for each mode, and the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode is used in the earth mode, while the pseudo region 250 for the space mode is used in the space mode. Region 260 is used. Further, 8022 storage areas (= 1146 × 7) are secured in the entire earth mode pseudo area 250, while 1426 storage areas (= 46 × 31) are secured in the entire space mode pseudo area 260. Therefore, 9448 (= 8022 + 1426) storage areas are secured as the entire pseudo area including the earth mode pseudo area 250 and the space mode pseudo area 260.

On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 156, in the comparative example, the common pseudo region 250'is provided as a common region between the modes, and the common pseudo region 250'is also used in the earth mode and the space mode. To. Then, as a whole of the common pseudo area 250', 35526 storage areas (= 1146 × 31) are secured.

Therefore, when comparing the amount of RAM consumed by the pseudo area between the embodiment and the comparative example, the amount of RAM consumed by the pseudo region is overwhelmingly smaller, and the amount of RAM consumed in the example is about 26.6% of that of the comparative example. is there. From this, it can be seen that in the embodiment, the amount of RAM consumed is suppressed to about 1/4 of that of the comparative example.

Further, let's compare the time required for initialization of each pseudo area under the assumption that the time required for each storage area is the same. In the embodiment, since the pseudo region is provided for each mode, it is sufficient to initialize only the pseudo region used (either the pseudo region 250 for the earth mode or the pseudo region 260 for the space mode). In the comparative example, even if an unused storage area or an unused pseudo area exists depending on the mode, the entire common pseudo area 250'must be initialized, so that the embodiment overwhelmingly initializes. It can be done in a short time. More specifically, in the embodiment, the entire pseudo region 250 for the earth mode can be initialized in about 22.6% of the time of the comparative example in the earth mode, and about 4 of the comparative example in the space mode. The entire pseudo region 260 for space mode can be initialized in 0.0% of time.

As described above, according to the embodiment, the minimum required number of storage areas is secured in the pseudo area (unnecessary storage areas are not secured), so that the consumption of the RAM 130 is significantly suppressed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the limited capacity of the RAM 130. Further, according to the embodiment, the time required for initializing the pseudo region can be significantly shortened, and the efficiency of the control process in the effect control CPU 126 can be improved. From these comparison results, the superiority of the embodiment is clear.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 148) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 148), the content of the demo effect is displayed based on the demo effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time) of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. Determine the mode of stop display.

For example, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state, and finally corresponds to the small hit. The process of selecting the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2, for example, in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or in the normal mode. Then, the process of selecting the effect pattern Hz and the effect pattern Z2 corresponding to the small hit and finally displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and The presence or absence of reach occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, as a general rule, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state. , Drive mode (more specifically, the mode selected by the player among the earth mode and the space mode. In the initial state, for example, the earth mode is selected). The process of selecting the middle effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control unit 210 has a memory of the second special symbol when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. In this case, a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

By the way, when the effect pattern and the like of the variable effect are determined in step S608, step S610, and step S612 above, and the content of the advance notice effect is determined in step S614, the effect control unit 210 corresponds to the content of these effects. Various commands are stored in the pseudo area for the time being. At this time, when the earth mode is selected in the drive mode, or when the normal mode is set, the effect control unit 210 stores each command in a predetermined storage area in the pseudo area 250 for the earth mode. .. On the other hand, when the space mode is selected in the drive mode, the effect control unit 210 stores individual commands in a predetermined storage area in the space mode pseudo area 260. On that basis, the effect control unit 210 transfers the contents of the pseudo 1 region (earth mode pseudo region 250-1 or space mode pseudo region 260-1) to the execution region 240 immediately before the start of the pseudo 1. It will be copied to prepare for the start of fluctuations in the design.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 150), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing during effect symbol stop display] FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S656.

Step S652: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-cut counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final fluctuation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control unit 210 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control unit 210 performs step S666. Execute.

Step S654: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the effect control unit 210 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S658.

Step S658: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. (No), that is, when the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control unit 210 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 has a pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value of is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ).

Step S662: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control unit 210 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 150).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control unit 210 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit of the effect content corresponding to the selected effect pattern. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 wins, for example, various effect images corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit stored in the CGROM 190 in advance as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 for the VDP 152. Instruct to read according to the design.

Step S804: The effect control unit 210 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game and an effect pattern suggesting right-handed hitting, and the game ball is played during the small hit game. When passing through the specific area 31x, the effect pattern at the time of passing through the specific area is selected, and the effect contents corresponding to these effect patterns are instructed to each individual control unit. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 reads out from the VDP 152 an effect image showing how the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and an effect image suggesting right-handed strike at the start of the small hit game. In addition, when passing through a specific area, a female character in a car is instructed to read out a production image showing a state in which a heart mark with the letter V is drawn.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 150).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing] FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect is produced. The control unit 210 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the remaining time reduction number. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and displays an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding "1" to the second count cut counter value is displayed as the remaining number of times. Executes the selected process. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 2 times" or "remaining 1 time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control unit 210 executes a right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control unit 210 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, when the effect control unit 210 needs to execute the right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened (particularly). , 5th variation or 10th variation of the first special symbol), a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed.

Step S856: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

Step S858: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

[Drum unit effect management process] FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the drum unit effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S900: The effect control unit 210 executes the movable body operation schedule determination process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 operates the operation schedule (variation mode, stop mode, etc.) of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern (effect pattern number, etc.) determined by the effect symbol management process (step S402 in FIG. 148). ) Is executed.

When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control unit 210 stores the determined operation schedule in the operation schedule storage buffer of the RAM 130. Further, when the operation schedule is determined, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of turning on the drum unit operating flag of the RAM 130, and executes a process of turning off the drum unit operating flag when all the determined schedules are executed. To do.

The operation schedule is set for each reel (each movable body). For example, in the case of the left reel 201, "acceleration"-> "constant velocity"-> "deceleration"-> "stop" in order from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. And so on. Among them, "acceleration" and "deceleration" have a plurality of speed changes, and "constant speed" may also have a plurality of speed changes (for example, "low speed constant speed", "medium speed, etc." "Speed", "High speed constant speed", etc.).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of speeds (for example, about 100 types of speeds) are prepared as the set speeds of the motor (reel), and various setting information (number of steps of the motor) is provided in a plurality of movable body data tables (not shown). , The set speed of the motor, the time required for the operation of the motor, the excitation method of the motor, the phase designation information for specifying the phase to be excited by the motor, etc.) are stored. Different setting information is stored in each movable body data table.

The movable body control unit 226 determines which movable body data table is referred to in what order and at what timing based on the operation schedule of the drum unit (movable body unit) 200. The movable body data stored in the movable body data table being referred to is transmitted to the driver (IC) of the drum unit 200 by being stored in the movable body data setting area (not shown). The driver of the drum unit 200 drives each reel based on the movable body data.

The movable body control unit 226 basically overwrites the new movable body data in the movable body data setting area (switches the movable body data table being referenced) when the speed of each reel is changed. However, even when the speed of each reel is maintained, new movable body data may be overwritten in the movable body data setting area (the moving body data table being referenced is not switched).

This is because, when maintaining a constant speed, if the number of movable data tables corresponding to the number of seconds of change of the special symbol is prepared, the number of movable data tables corresponding to the number of seconds of change of the special symbol will be displayed. This is because the capacity of the movable data table becomes large.

The operation schedule of the drum unit 200 corresponding to the effect pattern is as follows. For example, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the non-reach out-of-reach effect, the movable body control unit 226 starts the rotation of the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the fluctuation, and left after a lapse of a predetermined time. The operation schedule is such that the reel 201 is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitch can be an arbitrary shift stitch or a stop stitch corresponding to the stop stitch of the effect symbol Hz.

On the other hand, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the reach effect (big hit fluctuation, small hit fluctuation, missed fluctuation), the movable body control unit 226 rotates the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the fluctuation. Is started, the left reel 201 is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, then the right reel 203 is stopped, a reach state is generated, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitches correspond to the stop stitches corresponding to the stop stitches of the production symbol Hz (three sets of seven symbols of the same color corresponding to the big hit, the three sets of cherry symbols corresponding to the small hits, and the misses. It can be set to the deviation of one frame of the middle reel 202).

In any case, the effect control unit 210 determines the operation schedule of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect symbol management process in the movable body operation schedule determination process. Further, the movable body control unit 226 refers to a movable body data table (deceleration sequence, deceleration sequence to which a control code is added, acceleration sequence, drive start sequence, drive stop sequence, etc.) to be referred to during the production based on the determined operation schedule. Determine the content and order of.

Step S902: The effect control unit 210 (or the movable body control unit 226) executes the movable body data setting start process. This process is executed only when the setting of the movable body data is started during the execution of the effect, that is, when the movable body data is overwritten.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 (or the movable body control unit 226) overwrites the movable body data of the currently referenced movable body data table with the movable body data of the movable body data table to be referred to next. That is, the process of storing the movable body data stored in the movable body data table to be referred to next in the movable body data setting area is executed, and whether or not it is the end of the movable body data is determined. (Check if there is a movable body data table to be referred to next), and move the movable body data stored in the movable body data table until it is determined that it is the end of the movable body data. Executes the process of storing in the data setting area. When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 148).

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern of measures for immediate termination of the consecutive villa state.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played without following the transition in the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol memory is stored. When the second special symbol became a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol and the time was shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, the launch of the game ball was stopped during the memory digestion of the second special symbol. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "first variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the jackpot game ends is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation (reach effect) dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.

In the figure (B), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the transition in the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), four special symbol memories are stored. If you save and become a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and shift to the time shortened state at the end of the big hit game, that is, hit left during the memory digestion of the second special symbol and hit the first special symbol When four memories are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are fluctuations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.
By executing the striking method shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate end of the consecutive villa state (the situation where the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern in consideration of irregular striking.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the firing direction is shown.
For example, if four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit and right-handed is continued in a state of shortening the time after the end of the big hit game, that is, all the memories of the first special symbol are digested and the first 2 When the memory of the special symbol is stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game (the first variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

In the figure (B), an example of the transition of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played without following the firing direction is shown.
For example, when four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit, and the left hit is continued even though the time is shortened after the big hit game is completed, that is, the first hit. When all the memories of the special symbol are digested and the time reduction state ends (punctures) by continuing to accumulate the memory of the first special symbol, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (first time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "sixth to ninth variation", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. .. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "10th variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "11th variation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the eleventh variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. After the end of the time reduction (puncture), the normal state (non-time reduction state, normal mode) is entered.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the command stored in the execution area 240 by the effect control unit 210 is ACT to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control). Since it is transmitted to the unit 226, etc. and the operation of each effect device is controlled by each individual control unit based on the same command, the operation of a plurality of effect devices can be uniquely specified and controlled by the same command. ..

(2) According to the present embodiment, since a pseudo area is provided separately from the execution area 240, various commands output by the effect control unit 210 are temporarily stored in the execution area 240. Can be stored as a target.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the earth mode is used as a pseudo region having a structure suitable for storing commands output for controlling the production in each production mode in which the characteristics (how to show and tendencies) of the production are different. Is provided with a pseudo region 250 for the earth mode, and a pseudo region 260 for the space mode is provided for the space mode, so that the amount of RAM used can be suppressed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, as a structure suitable for each effect mode, the number of pseudo areas having storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of commands that can be output in each effect mode is corresponding to the maximum number of pseudo stations. Is provided only. Specifically, for the earth mode, seven pseudo regions 250 for the earth mode having 1146 storage areas are provided (pseudo regions for the earth mode 250-1 to 250-7), and for the space mode, the pseudo regions 250 for the earth mode are provided. Since 31 space mode pseudo areas 260 having 46 storage areas are provided (space mode pseudo areas 260-1 to 260-31), RAM is not secured in any mode. The amount of use can be minimized.

(5) According to the present embodiment, the size of the pseudo area (total number of storage areas in the pseudo area) used in each effect mode is suppressed to the minimum, so that the initialization process performed after the use of the pseudo area is performed. This can be performed in a short time, and the efficiency of the control process in the effect control CPU 126 can be improved.

(6) According to the present embodiment, the size of the pseudo area (total number of storage areas in the pseudo area) used in each effect mode is suppressed to the minimum, so that the remaining area of the RAM 130 is used for other processing. It can be allocated and the limited capacity of the RAM 130 can be effectively utilized.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control unit 210 stores the command in the execution area 240, and the ACT executes the command at a predetermined timing for each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, Although it is transmitted to the movable body control unit 226), the transmission mode of the command is not limited to this. For example, the command output by the effect control unit 210 is not stored in the execution area 240, but directly in each individual control unit (display control unit 220, voice control unit 222, lamp control unit 224, movable body control unit 226). It may be configured to transmit to. Alternatively, each individual control unit may directly refer to the command stored in the execution area 240 without transmitting the command by ACT.

In the above-described embodiment, the number of pseudo areas corresponding to the maximum number of pseudo-series is provided, and the command corresponding to the effect executed in relation to the pseudo variation of each time is stored in the pseudo area for each time (for example). Although the example (the command corresponding to the effect executed in connection with the first pseudo-variation is stored in the pseudo 1 area) has been described, the usage mode of the pseudo area is not limited to this. For example, when an addition scale (adjustment of fluctuation time) occurs in a fluctuation in which the pseudo-ream is not executed up to the maximum number of times, the pseudo area is used to store the command corresponding to the effect executed in the section of the addition scale. Alternatively, when reach occurs a plurality of times, it is also possible to use one pseudo region for each reach.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine including the drum unit 200 has been described, but the gaming machine may not include the drum unit 200.
Further, the drum unit 200 may be changed to a 7-segment display (for example, a device including a plurality of 7-segment displays, a 7-segment display for displaying an effect symbol), or may be changed to a liquid crystal display.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment C]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 165 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 166 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 166) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 165. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 165, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. Although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the card unit, it may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. By pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or perform some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probabilistic promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 166, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. In addition to various units such as the back cover unit 178, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, and a power cord (power plug). 164, ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 181).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 140 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 140 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 140, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 166 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 167 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. In the right side portion (so-called right-handed area) of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top. Has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters (wins) the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, or opens. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that have entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (combined game board units 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 167, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , It is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Is. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to collapse to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a type of device (single-bladed tulip-type attacker) in which the opening / closing member 30a is tilted to the right, whereas the second variable winning device 31 has the opening / closing member 31a. A type of device that slides inside the board is used (sliding attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 31b, the specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

[Other configurations of the game board]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts (without reference numerals) inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 includes an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, and the like. Various production images are displayed, including a storage marker (hold display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, around the liquid crystal display 42 of the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f (40f1 to 40f8) for effect. The movable body 40f (40f1 to 40f8) for the effect is a movable body capable of performing a predetermined operation during the variable display of the special symbol. Note that FIG. 167 illustrates a state in which all the movable bodies are in the origin position, and some movable bodies cannot be visually recognized. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing how a plurality of movable bodies are in movable positions.
Specifically, the three arms 51a in which the middle-rear movable body 40f8 rotates 240 degrees clockwise from the origin position to move the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7. Shows the state of being movable in the center.

The upper movable body 40f1 is a horizontally long movable body, and when it is moved, only the central portion is lowered and moved so as to be bent in a V shape. The upper movable body 40f1 may be a movable body that simply moves up and down.
The lower movable body 40f2 is a horizontally long movable body on which character information and the like are displayed, and is a movable body that can move from the origin position to the upward movable position.
The left movable body 40f3 is an arc-shaped movable body, and is a movable body that can move from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction.
The right movable body 40f4 is an arc-shaped movable body, and is a movable body that can move from the origin position to the left movable position.

The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are heart-shaped movable bodies.
The middle-rear movable body 40f8 is an annular movable body that serves as a base for the middle-front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and is movable by rotating 240 degrees clockwise from the origin position. It can be moved to the position.
The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 can rotate independently.
By gathering the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 in the center of the liquid crystal display 42, one large modeled object can be formed.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing how each movable body is at the origin position.
When each movable body is in the origin position, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are arranged at positions overlapping with the middle front movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction.
When each movable body is in the origin position, the middle front right movable body 40f5 is arranged at the lower left of the liquid crystal display 42, the middle front left movable body 40f6 is arranged at the upper left of the liquid crystal display 42, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7. Is located at the lower right of the liquid crystal display 42.

All movable bodies are provided with sensors (photosensors using a light-shielding plate) at the origin position and the movable position, and the effect control device determines whether the movable body is at the origin position or the movable position based on this sensor. You can figure out if it is in. Such a sensor is a detecting means for detecting the position where the movable body is arranged.

For example, exemplifying the middle-rear movable body 40f8 as an example, two light-shielding plates 51b that move together with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 are attached to the upper right position and the lower right position of the middle-rear movable body 40f8. If one of the light-shielding plates 51b blocks the light of the origin position photosensor 51c, the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is at the origin position, and the other light-shielding plate 51b blocks the light of the movable position photosensor 51d. For example, it is assumed that the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is in the movable position.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a state in which each movable body is in the origin position, but only the middle front left movable body 40f6 is in the movable position.
If the game is normal, there is no state in which only the middle front left movable body 40f6 can move, but if something goes wrong (for example, when the rotation mechanism is unlocked), the middle front left movable body Only 40f6 may be movable. When such an abnormal state occurs, there is a possibility that the first correction process and the second correction process described later will be executed.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position.
When the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6 and the middle front upper The movable body 40f7 moves toward the center of the middle-rear movable body 40f8 (moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42), and is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, the three arms 51a are gathered in the center, and the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is rotated 240 degrees clockwise from the origin position.
Then, such an effect can be executed, for example, at the final stage of the variable display effect at the time of winning (when the so-called deciding object operation is executed).

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position.
In this figure, only the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are extracted and shown.
The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are arranged so as to overlap the middle front upper movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are in the movable position.
In this figure, only the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are extracted and shown. The middle / rear movable body 40f8 is at the origin position.
The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are arranged inside the middle front movable body 40f8.

The three arms 51a are connected to a motor for moving each movable body via a mechanical mechanism such as a link mechanism or a cam mechanism.
Then, when each motor moves, the three arms 51a operate via a mechanical mechanism, and the middle front right movable body 40f5 and the middle front left movable body arranged at the tips of the three arms 51a are moved. The 40f6 and the middle-front upper movable body 40f7 move toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

Specifically, the middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i is arranged in the upper left of the figure, and when the middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i is moved, the arm 51a arranged in the upper left of the figure is moved. , The middle front left movable body 40f6 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.
Further, a middle-front upper movable body elevating motor 57j is arranged in the upper right of the figure, and when the middle-front upper movable body elevating motor 57j is moved, the arm 51a arranged in the upper right of the figure is moved, and the middle front is moved. The upper movable body 40f7 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.
Further, a center front right movable body elevating motor 57h is arranged in the lower part of the middle of the figure, and when the middle front right movable body elevating motor 57h is moved, the arm 51a arranged in the lower part of the figure is moved, and the middle front is moved. The right movable body 40f5 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

Further, in this state, when the motor that rotates the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 is moved, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f6. The movable body 40f7 rotates.

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position.
In this figure, only the rear part (back box part) of the game board unit 8 is shown.
When the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position, the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the left movable body 40f3, and The right movable body 40f4 is visible, but the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are almost invisible.

An upper movable body elevating motor 57a is arranged in the upper right of the drawing, and when the upper movable body elevating motor 57a is moved, the upper movable body 40f1 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position.
In this figure, only the rear part (back box part) of the game board unit 8 is shown.
When the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position, the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the left movable body 40f3, and The right movable body 40f4 is visible, and in addition, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 also move near the center of the middle rear movable body 40f8. , Become visible.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing how the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position.
Specifically, the upper movable body 40f1 has moved from the origin position to the movable position, and the lower movable body 40f2 has moved from the origin position to the movable position.

As described above, when the upper movable body 40f1 moves, only the central portion descends and moves while deforming so as to bend in a V shape, and the lower movable body 40f2 moves upward from the origin position without being deformed. It can move to the movable position of.

The upper movable body 40f1 is composed of a vertical movable body 52a in a central portion, a left arm 52b extending in the left direction from the vertical movable body 52a, and a right arm 52c extending in the right direction from the vertical movable body 52a.

When the vertically movable body 52a is in the origin position, the left arm 52b and the right arm 52c are arranged horizontally without tilting, and when the vertically movable body 52a moves to the movable position, the left arm 52b and the right arm 52c move up and down. By being pulled by the movable body 52a, they are arranged so as to be inclined toward the vertically movable body 52a.

FIG. 177 is a diagram showing how the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position.
In this figure, only the rear part (back box part) of the game board unit 8 is shown.
Insertion pins 52d are arranged at the left end of the left arm 52b and the right end of the right arm 52c, respectively, and the insertion pins 52d are inserted into the guide grooves 52e of the structure arranged at the rear.

As a result, the left end portion of the left arm 52b and the right end portion of the right arm 52c are not only simply tilted but also movable in the left-right direction within the length of the guide groove 52e.
Therefore, when the vertically movable body 52a moves to the movable position, the left arm 52b and the right arm 52c tilt toward the vertically movable body 52a while moving toward the center.

When the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position, the display area of the liquid crystal display is narrowed as compared with the case where the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the origin position. As a result, various effects can be executed while attracting the attention of the player.

178 and 179 are views showing the details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 178 (A), the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, it is a state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 178 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for a specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is a slide for a specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the left side by the member 31c, and the traveling direction is changed to the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 179 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 179 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 179 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 180 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers depending on a display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs) (memory number display means). ). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a displays one storage number by, for example, a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or turning on one lamp (LED) (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned off, the number of stored items is 0, and in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the occurrence of the entry is memorized. Every time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering (up to 4), the display mode is changed by 1 each. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a shifts to the display mode after the increase in the sense that when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the winning ball is memorized. When the special symbol changes (up to one) and the special symbol starts to change when the ball enters, the display mode changes to the reduced display mode. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start fluctuating (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a has not yet started to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. It represents the number of times the ball has not entered.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 181 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 includes a RAM clear switch 304 used for initializing the RAM 76, an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and peripheral ICs such as a counter / timer circuit (CTC). Are equipped, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300 and a setting key switch 302. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for changing the setting, and for example, the setting can be changed by the following procedure.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting is changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages. Further, the set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 140.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 140, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Details of setting change]
The details of the setting change are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is being changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. LED. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off, the game is ready for play. Transition.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used is described, but the setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Details of setting confirmation]
The details of the setting confirmation (see setting) are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation mode).
Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being confirmed, the main display is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and a set value such as "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the setting is terminated, and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning openings on the left side are installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 pass through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and indicates the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by a number (the number of game balls detected by the out switch 141). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 140 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 140 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 140 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 140 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, and movable motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls the output from the speakers 54, 55, 56. The internal configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to another figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 and jog dial 45a, a volume adjustment switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136, and when the player operates these operating members, their contact signals are sub-connected. It is input to the effect control device 124 through the substrate 136. Although an example in which each operation member is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, each operation member may be connected to the saucer illumination board when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 58 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). In this embodiment, 11 motors are installed as movable body motors 57 (57a to 57k). The 11 motors are shown in the range that can be illustrated, but the motors installed in the invisible portion are shown in the list of FIG. 262. The movable body sensor 58 is, for example, a photosensor provided at the origin position (first position), the movable position (appearance position), or the like of the movable body 40f, and is a movable body 40f (or a shading plate attached to the movable body 40f). Is detected, a detection signal is output. In the present embodiment, a plurality of motors are provided as the movable body motor 57, and a plurality of sensors are provided as the movable body sensor 58. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 182 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

By the way, by controlling the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, the operation of devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56 is finally performed. Is controlled. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the pachinko machine 1 uses each device for effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body operation). Etc.) is realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used. The tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, the input control unit 228, and the time management unit. It is shown as (ACT) 230 and the like. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operator, and the time management unit (ACT) 230 that manages the time progress of the effect controls the flow of the entire effect. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operators according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190, a VDP 152 (effect display control board) for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, an audio IC 134, an LED driver 198, and an SMC. (Serial control controller) 199 and driver IC 132 are equipped.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when developing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads out the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 and one chip like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, or a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded audio to various speakers via an amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (may be a larger number of channels) is realized. Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of various speakers based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with the execution of the effects of various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the motor that is the drive source of various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and relays the detection signal output by the sensor for the movable body to control the movable body. Hand over to department 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps and movable motors to manage their operation. By doing so, it is possible to realize a directing reproduction using a lamp or a movable body. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 of the above is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

Here, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, and the input control unit 228 can also transmit and receive a message (control signal) via the effect control unit 210. However, it is also possible to send and receive messages without going through the effect control unit 210.

For example, demonstrating the movable body control unit 226 as an example, the movable body control unit 226 is connected to the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, and the input control unit 228 without going through the effect control unit 210. On the other hand, the message can be sent directly.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

183 and 184 are flowcharts showing an example of the first procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to an input signal from a RAM clear switch (not shown), and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 184 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 188), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 188), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 188). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the reset start process. Note that duplicate description will be omitted for the same processing as in the first procedure example of the reset start processing. Further, the process of FIG. 184 is the same in the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process is different from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that the preparatory process (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, if it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the process under preparation (Step S112a) is executed.
The execution timing of the preparatory process (step S112a) is not limited to such a timing, and can be executed at any timing in the reset start process. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, it suffices to be controlled so as to shift from "preparing" to "playable state (shifted to the main loop)".

Step S112a: In the preparatory process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. The details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the preparatory process (step S112a) is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process in preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes the preparing operation control process. Details of the operation control process during preparation will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 185). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch is being operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the preparatory operation control process in step S125 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Preparing operation control process]
The details of the operation contents of the operation control process during preparation are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute the process of adopting at least one state and operation among the following states and operation contents in the preparation operation control process.

(1) During preparation, the state shifts when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During the preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. If the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the game shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (movable body connected to the main control device 70) managed by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is movably controlled, and whether or not the movable body operates normally. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside the special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a probability variation area or a specific area, a rotating body that constantly rotates in the case of a two-type system, and a specified trigger. The movable body that can be moved by the above, the mechanism, solenoid, motor, etc. associated with these, and the ordinary electric accessory (electric tulip) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movable control is executed, for example, by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movable pattern in which "0.4 seconds ON → 0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated a plurality of times.
The movable control may be continuously executed from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed up to a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clear from the outside that preparation is in progress. In this case, for example, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "finished when the RAM clear switch is pressed", "change the effect setting by pressing the effect button", etc. can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display. it can. In this case, the audio output such as "Preparing" may be repeatedly executed at the same time.

(4) During preparation, the setting related to the effect may be changed by operating the effect button. For example, when the effect switching button (effect button) is pressed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display is switched, and the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 steps), effect frequency setting (1 to 3 steps), effect type setting, etc. are selected. Can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the launch control of the game ball may be disabled. This is because the launch control board 108 can launch the game ball on condition that the “launch permission signal” is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the payout control device 92. The main control device 70 can perform a process of transmitting a "launch permission signal" in the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" is being performed during preparation. Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for the process being prepared (the program for operating various movable bodies) can be implemented (arranged) in the used area. The used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation may be made may be output to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.).

(8) The preparation is in the stage before shifting to the main loop (before the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) is executed). Therefore, during the preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Further, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine an error that can be determined during the playable state (for example, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls, the fluctuation of special symbols, and the fluctuation of ordinary symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is finished, a command indicating "preparing finished" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, a command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before shifting to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, the RAM clear process is not executed, and the RAM clear process can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during the preparation. However, after executing the RAM clear process, the transition may be made during preparation, and then the transition to the main loop may be performed.

The background to adopting such a configuration has the following problems.
In conventional gaming machines, the operation of special electric and ordinary electric pachinko machines cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may be discovered.

Then, by adopting the above configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the various electric accessories can operate when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the problem that the various electric accessories do not operate during the game and to play the game normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.
(3) Since the problem can be solved in advance (before the game), the process of confirming the problem during the game can be eliminated, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load on the control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during the preparation (operation check), it is possible to provide an efficient game.

The following technical contents can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while the predetermined operating member (RAM clear switch), the movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operating member are being operated. It is a gaming machine provided with a movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a constant motion pattern in order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of the above (1), it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant operation pattern until the predetermined operating member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 183).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S204a: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when the set value is changed or a setting confirmation process executed when the set value is confirmed. (Setting-related processing execution means). It should be noted that this process can be prevented from being executed when the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed (when the game is in the normal game state). Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to calculate the base and execute the process of displaying the calculated base on the performance display monitor 200. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the outswitch) (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means).

When the setting change process (setting-related process) is actually executed in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a "setting-related end designation command" as a subcommand. The "setting-related end specification command" can include information that the setting-related processing (processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation) has been completed and information on the setting value. The generated "setting-related end designation command" is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 of the number of prize balls based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) and normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 determines various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 188). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 188).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 189). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol random number. Can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, each random number of the first special symbol is not stored any more. Similarly, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is not stored any more. The reason why there are five sections is that a total number of sections is required, which is the sum of the maximum storage number (4) of the first special symbol and the maximum storage number (1) of the second special symbol. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 189). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 188).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fifth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fifth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 189).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 189). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 189). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 190), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 190) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 190) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 190) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and these are transferred to the random number storage area. Random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The memory method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 190) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 189).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 190, step S46 in FIG. 191) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 190) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 191). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 190) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 191). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 190) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 191). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 190) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 191).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 188) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 10-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as "10 rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 10-round jackpot. In addition to the 10-round jackpot, other jackpots may be provided as the type of jackpot.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 188). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means, advantageous state transition means). ). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). A gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10 round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "10 round big hits 1 to 4" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and "10 round big hits 5 and 6" are stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the hit game. When the big hit is executed by "10 round big hits 5 and 6" (when the big hit is executed via the small hit), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first round in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 operates.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of the "second winning symbol". Further, "10 round jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of the "third winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 4" corresponds to the jackpot of the "fourth winning symbol". Furthermore, "10 round big hit 5" corresponds to a small hit of "5th winning symbol" (big hit when passing through a specific area 31x), and "10 round big hit 6" corresponds to a small hit of "6th winning symbol" (specific area). It corresponds to the big hit when passing 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of prizes (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first prize opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[Second Winning Symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Third winning symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. ..

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 188). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read out in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (winning order digestion). It should be noted that the control of priority digestion that prioritizes the digestion of the second special symbol may be used instead of the control of the winning order digestion for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 188), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 194), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest storage corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, when the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target special symbol this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target special symbol this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 194).

[See Fig. 194: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. In the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (= approximately 1/1), and it corresponds to a loss. It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to the loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Further, the main control CPU 72 has a second special symbol lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) that is less likely to occur than the first special symbol lottery opportunity (first lottery opportunity) in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). When the occurrence occurs, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 188).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, and the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is "third winning symbol" or "fourth winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "52" and "48" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (= 52%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. It is 48 minutes (= 48%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 1 (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value and may be 2 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means time when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 10. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" and the "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. It is 50 minutes (= 50%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

[See Fig. 194: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means, advantageous state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the time is more advantageous than the non-time reduction state (first state). It is possible to shift to the shortened state (second state) (advantageous state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "5th winning symbol" and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol A", "fifth winning symbol B", "fifth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "50" and "50" are when the denominator is 100. Corresponds to the ratio of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol". Is 50/100 (= 50%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "sixth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol", "3rd winning symbol" or "5th winning symbol" is applicable (the 5th winning symbol is limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time. It can be assumed that the transition condition to the shortened state is satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Fig. 194: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 193: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 194). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100a: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. It is preferable that this process is executed only once during the stop display time of the special symbol. Further, when the changing flag is set to ON while the special symbol is changing, the main control CPU 72 can set the symbol changing flag to OFF in this process.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 193) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if both the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 causes the first special symbol. It is possible to send a special variation number designation command that reflects the value of the special variation number of the second special symbol and the special variation number of the second special symbol to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cutting counter value (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) regarding the time reduction state is adopted. (Time reduction number of times) is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 10 times), and the second number cut counter value (time reduction number of times of the second special symbol) related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 1 time). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the first count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-of-times cutting counter values (first number-of-times cutting counter value or second number-of-times cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once or 10 times). When the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced 9 times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once in the time-reduced state. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 makes it possible to select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the gaming state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the variation pattern selected may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other fluctuation pattern tables. The "game state" in the figure indicates the game state (game state of the transition destination) after the end of the big hit game. However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state before the start of the big hit game (the game state before the transition).

The variation pattern table A is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. This table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B is that the fluctuation pattern table B is a table that is selected within the specified number of fluctuations (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) after the time reduction state ends. .. The variation pattern table B is a so-called immediate stop prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "time reduction available (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuates from 1 to 4, 6 to 9 when the symbol with time reduction in the normal state is won (when the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol" is won). Be selected. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, 1-second fluctuation) is set for the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 120-second fluctuation) is set for the second special symbol. Is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the gaming state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the time saving state. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (1 time remaining = when the second special symbol fluctuates by one variation after the end of the time reduction state). In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table B.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with a time reduction in the normal state is won. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
Here, the “time reduction number” in the figure indicates a value to be set in the first number cut counter value (the total time reduction number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 203).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5" or "10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
In this embodiment, since a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the second number cut counter value (the time reduction number of only the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 204).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.
As in FIG. 202, in the present embodiment, a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, so that there is no special change table after the second change.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) (For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (variation time determining means). ..

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). It is possible to make the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (for example, less than 120 seconds) in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). Fluctuation time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) should be made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) The fluctuation time can be determined so that the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state). Time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). The fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) is made to be relatively longer than the fluctuation time (variation pattern table C) of the first special symbol when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. The fluctuation time can be determined (variation time determination means).

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 188) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 manages the launch position by the launch position designation flag (0 = left strike state, 1 = right strike state) indicating whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state, and specifies the launch position at an arbitrary timing. A launch position specification command including the contents of the flag can be transmitted to the effect control device. Here, when the right-handed notification lamp is connected to the effect control device, the effect control device can control the lighting mode of the right-handed notification lamp based on the firing position designation command. The non-time reduction state is a left-handed state, and the time reduction state is a right-handed state. During the big hit game and the small hit game, the player is basically right-handed, but may be left-handed during each ending time (during the end time).

The time shortened state can be ended at the end of the fluctuation (at the start of the stop display time) of the final fluctuation (missing fluctuation, small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation) in the time shortened state. In this case, the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time shortened state can be set to a time (15.0 seconds) longer than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) other than the final fluctuation. The time reduction state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[4th winning symbol]
When the fourth winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 208: Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of corresponding to the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 207).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[See Fig. 210: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 207).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 206).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the second special winning opening. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a small hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a small hit is transmitted only once during the small hit.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 210)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 210)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 206). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 212). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 213).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 213).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time reduction state transition means, time reduction). Function operating means, advantageous state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the time is more advantageous than the non-time reduction state (first state). It is possible to shift to the shortened state (second state) (advantageous state transition means).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 204.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 213).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (the same applies to the 6th winning symbol below). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain nine rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 9). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 6th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a big hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a big hit is transmitted only once during the big hit.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 208) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 215)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 208) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 215)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 206). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 212). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening closing process. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 206). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 210). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 206). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501a: The main control CPU 72 executes the end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5501b: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time (ending time) has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 206).

After that, when the value of the end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes the processes after step S5502.
Regarding the end time, different times may be set for the big hit and the small hit.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 194) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 215.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "1" is set as the initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 of FIG. 215.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 193) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)] FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] If a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode. [F9] The animal mode is a "non-time reduction state". The variation pattern of the [F9] animal mode may be different from that of the [F1] normal mode, or may be the same as that of the [F1] normal mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)] FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortened state. [F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F15] fourth winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F20] a drive in a non-time shortened state. Move to mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F20] shifts to the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.

[Game Flow (Part 3)] FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. [F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol Fluctuates.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F15] fourth winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F9] animal mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the time is shortened (consecutive villa state), the fluctuation of one time reduction of the second special symbol and one memory of the second special symbol are totaled by 2. You can get the chance of hitting (big hit or small hit). Then, if one of the two opportunities is won with a winning symbol with a time reduction, the game will return to the time shortened state (consecutive villa state) again.

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the animal mode.
[F9] If the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during the game in the animal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] In the first special symbol lottery, it becomes "missing", and when such "missing" continues a specified number of times (for example, when 15 fluctuations are executed), [F20] specified fluctuation progress occurs, and [F1] Shift to normal mode. If a "big hit" is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the flow is the same as the game flow shown in FIG. 220.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and also “ It has little visual impact as a "winning symbol". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect using the liquid crystal display 42 are performed.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays an effect symbol, markers M1, markers M2, fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, a background image corresponding to the stay mode, an image related to the advance notice effect, and the like.

The effect symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are arranged left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Is displayed. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

FIGS. 224 and 225 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 224 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a row of three effect symbols is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (with reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. These markers M1 and M2 display the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) corresponding to the respective display numbers. It is represented, and the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game. Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0. Since the maximum number of working memories of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is lit at the maximum.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 224 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the effect symbol scrolls to start the variation display effect (symbol effect execution means). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 224 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol of the effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 224 (B) above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the position is located on the leftmost side in conjunction with this. The number of displayed markers M1 has been reduced by one. That is, up to that time, there were a total of four working memory numbers of the marker M1, but the marker M1, which is the earliest (oldest) memory number display, is hidden, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is combined. Be told. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach the working memory in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the example of FIG. 224 (C), since the working memory at the head in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three are, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are one by one. The effect is to shift in the direction (here, to the left). As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the production, and to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 225 (D): Next, as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 225 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol. In this case, since the combination of the effect symbols is the deviation of "8"-"1"-"3", it is expressed in the production that this fluctuation corresponds to the normal "outside". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 225 (F): When the operation memory of the first special symbol exists, the next fluctuation is started when the stop display time ends. In this case, the variation display effect is started by scrolling the effect symbol in synchronization with the start of the variation of the first special symbol. When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the number of displayed markers M1 located on the leftmost side is reduced by one in conjunction with the change. Then, such a variable display effect and a stop display effect are repeatedly executed.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
226 to 228 are continuous views showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, after the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is an aspect of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol". (For example, 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed ( Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 226 (A): The variation display effect is started by scrolling the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the start of the variation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 226 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed on the liquid crystal display 42. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The picture image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes may be used). The "pre-reach notice" is a production that announces the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 226 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 226 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display effect is being continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 227 (D): When the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, the left effect symbol of the effect symbol stops fluctuating. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "7" is stopped as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 227 (E): Then, the right effect symbol of the effect symbol stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "7" is stopped as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol. As a result, in the effect symbol, the reach state of "7"-"changing"-"7" is generated. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time. After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning or losing is executed.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 227 (F): Shortly after the reach state occurs, on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an image representing a "heart" figure forms a group and passes diagonally on the screen. Will be done. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 228 (G): Following the notice effect after the reach occurs, a "ghost of a pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen. "Appears, and the characters" VS "appear in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 228 (H): At the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" punches innumerably, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss.

[Stop display production (production at the time of winning)]
In FIG. 228 (I): When the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small together with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a big hit. Then, the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol stops fluctuating substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "7" is stopped as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a big hit (for example, a red display color).

At the time of non-winning (at the time of loss), "Pumpkin ghost" is displayed large and "Male character" is displayed small along with the characters "Defeat ...". In this case, the effect symbol representing a number other than the number "7" is stopped as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol.

[Direction during a major role]
FIG. 229 and FIG. 230 are continuous views partially showing an example of a large-scale production during a big-hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 229 (A): When the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the big hit game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 229 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, 10 circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining 9 ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 10 rounds, the current round is the first of the 10 rounds, and each round in which a ball can be obtained is marked with a circle. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

[10th round]
In FIG. 229 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the 10th round are completed.

Here, if it corresponds to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, or if there is a memory of the second special symbol even if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, as shown in the figure. , A fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to drive mode) is executed in which fireworks are launched. In addition, if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, or if there is no memory of the second special symbol, the fireworks effect is not executed. Fireworks production can be performed in any round.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 230 (D): When shifting to the time shortened state, an effect of displaying character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 230 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving medium effect] In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time saving state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) that displays the background image corresponding to the time saving state (advantageous game state) is performed. Will be executed.

[Right-handed suggestion effect] In addition, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed at the upper part of the screen. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect] Further, at the lower left of the screen, the remaining number display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 2 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the drive mode in the time shortened state or the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
231 to 233 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 231 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image showing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the production symbols is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 231 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (marker M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation of the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 is also started. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 231 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the detached mode, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 are also stopped and displayed in the detached manner. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining two times.

In FIG. 232 (D): Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the order of winning, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested after that. Then, when the digestion of the remaining memory of the first special symbol is completed, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started accordingly. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 232 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the effect symbol (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") and the fourth symbol Z2 (displayed in green). The color) is also stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Further, for example, the player executes a right-handed strike while the second special symbol is fluctuating, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball is opened to the right start winning opening. It is assumed that the ball has entered 28b. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

In FIG. 232 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be inserted into the second variable winning device 31. After that, the effect symbol can be displayed small at the lower right of the display screen.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 233 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 233 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, the ball is substantially obtained for 9 rounds (10 rounds of balls including the small hit game). can do. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

234 and 235 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state, in which the big hit game is executed corresponding to the big hit of the "4th winning symbol" or the small hit of the "6th winning symbol", and the first 2 This is the case where the memory of the special symbol is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining one time" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of variation of special symbol] In FIG. 234 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 also change accordingly. To start.

[Continuing the variable display effect] In FIG. 234 (B): The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. In addition, the production symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 will continue to change. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability that the variable start winning device 28 will be open for a long time is low even if the start gate 20 is passed. Therefore, basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates at most once.

[Stop display effect] In FIG. 234 (C): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the effect symbol (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) are also small hit. It is stopped and displayed in the mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed. After that, the effect symbol can be displayed small at the lower right of the display screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining.

[Start of small hit, opening of second big winning opening] In Fig. 235 (D): And when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened and the car with the female character is on it. The effect of increasing the speed and moving to the right side of the screen is executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area] In FIG. 235 (E): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to a small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is the sixth winning symbol. It is assumed that it was. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game] In FIG. 235 (F): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed corresponding to the sixth winning symbol in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the mode shifts to the animal mode after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an outline of the drive mode. The first effect example shows an effect example when a normal game is performed, and the second effect example shows an effect example when an irregular game is performed.

[Example of the first effect] The state (A) in FIG. 236 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times (a state in which a big hit may occur at least the remaining two times), and is a gaming state of the main control device 70. Is a time-saving state. If the state shown in FIG. 236 (A) corresponds to the time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 236 (A) again after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 236 (A) corresponds to the time saving hit and the second special symbol is memorized, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 236 (B) after the big hit game is completed.

The state (B) in FIG. 236 is a state in which the drive mode is one remaining time (a state in which a big hit may occur at least once remaining), and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state. (Memory digestion section). If the state in FIG. 236 (B) corresponds to the time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 236 (A) after the big hit game is completed. On the other hand, if the state in FIG. 236 (B) corresponds to the time saving hit, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 236 (C) after the end of the big hit game.

The state (C) in FIG. 236 is the animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is the non-time shortened state (immediate stop prevention section). The animal mode ends after a specified number of fluctuations, and then shifts to the normal mode.

[Example of Second Production] The state (D) in FIG. 236 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a time reduction state. If the state shown in FIG. 236 (D) corresponds to the time saving hit and there is no memory of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 236 (E) after the big hit game is completed.

The state (E) in FIG. 236 is the animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is the non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and eventually the memory of the first special symbol will be digested.

[Overview of Drive Mode] The drive mode (consecutive villa state) transitions as shown in FIGS. 236 (A) to (C) when a normal game is performed. If the player wins the game with no time reduction in the time reduction state, the game state of the main control device becomes the memory digestion section after the big hit game. At this time, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol is stored, there is a 1/1 probability of a big hit (a big hit or a big hit via a small hit). The upper limit of the memory of the second special symbol is one. Therefore, when the second special symbol is remembered, the drive mode production is continued (it looks like the continuation of the consecutive villas; see (A) to (C) in FIGS. 236).

When a normal game is played, since the memory of the second special symbol is stored at the time of the big hit in the time shortened state, such a state transition occurs, but at the time of no time saving hit in the time shortened state, the second special If there is no memory of the design, the consecutive villas will end there.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gaming state of the main control device is shifted to the animal mode in which the continuous villa is not continued even in the memory digestion section (see (D) and (E) in FIGS. 236). Since the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol at the time of winning is related to the jackpot effect, the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol is determined when the opening command of the small hit or the jackpot is received.

Therefore, if you win without the memory of the second special symbol and the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated during the round of the jackpot game, after shifting to the animal mode, in the memory digestion section, the second I am trying to change the special design.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section. The first effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section, but the second special symbol is stored. The second effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section and the second special symbol is not stored.

[Example of First Production] The state (A) in FIG. 237 is a state in which the drive mode is one time remaining, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortening state (memory digestion section). When the first special symbol is displaced in the state of FIG. 237 (A), a reach effect (for example, an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched) is produced as shown in FIG. 237 (B). Is executed, and as shown in FIG. 237 (C), an effect that is finally out of alignment (for example, an effect that fails to launch fireworks) is executed.

[Second Production Example] The state (D) in FIG. 237 is an animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and if the player hits the left, the first special symbol will fluctuate.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 237 (E), during the execution of the out-of-order variation of the first special symbol, a special pseudo-variation effect in which a plurality of variations are simulated is executed, and finally, a special pseudo-variation effect is executed. An out-of-order effect is executed. In the special pseudo-variation effect, the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time (variation scale).

When the apparent effect is the animal mode in spite of the memory digestion section, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of several tens of seconds) is set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the player shifts to the drive mode and performs an off-the-shelf effect, the appearance can be consistent, but there is a risk that the player may misunderstand because there is a relationship of "drive mode = during the consecutive villas".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the memory digestion section and the apparent effect is the animal mode, the lottery for executing the content of the variable display effect is switched to change the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop. After repeating the scale, the effect is determined so that it is out of place so that there is no apparent discomfort.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the difference between the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the memory digestion section and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section.

As shown in FIG. 238 (A), in the variation pattern selection table of the memory digestion section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, the variation pattern of long-term variation is selected as the variation pattern to be selected. May be done. For example, the fluctuation pattern of long-term fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 56.0 seconds.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 238 (B), in the variation pattern selection table of the immediate stop prevention section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, the variation pattern to be selected is the first short-time variation. ~ Third short-term fluctuation pattern may be selected. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20.0 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the second short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the third short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 6.0 seconds.

The deviation variation of the first special symbol, which is the problem this time, is the long-term variation shown in FIG. 238 (A), and this variation is selected in the memory digestion section but not in the immediate stop prevention section. Therefore, when the game state is the memory digestion section and the apparent mode is the animal mode corresponding to the immediate stop prevention section, as described above, in order to match the production, a special pseudo A variable effect is being performed.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a flow of the first correction process executed in the normal mode. The first correction process is a process that may be executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is determined.

In FIG. 239 (A): In the normal mode, the upper movable body 40f1 is at the origin position, and the lower movable body 40f2 is also at the origin position.

In FIG. 239 (B): In the normal mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, here, it is assumed that the upper movable body 40f1 has moved from the origin position to the movable position due to some cause (malfunction, malfunction, etc.).

FIG. 239 (C): In this case, in the normal mode, the first correction process is executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (when the fluctuation is confirmed). The first correction process is a process of moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 in the movable position to the origin position when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is in the movable position at the time of determining the fluctuation. .. By executing the first correction process, in the illustrated example, the upper movable body 40f1 is moved from the movable position to the origin position.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing a flow of the second correction process executed in the animal mode. The second correction process is a process that may be executed after a certain period of time has elapsed after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

In FIG. 240 (A): In the animal mode, the upper movable body 40f1 is in the movable position, and the lower movable body 40f2 is also in the movable position.

In FIG. 240 (B): In the animal mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, here, it is assumed that the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 have moved from the movable position to the origin position due to some cause (malfunction or malfunction, execution of demonstration effect, execution of effect related to game recording, etc.).

In FIG. 240 (C): In this case, in the animal mode, the first correction process is not executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (when the fluctuation is confirmed). Therefore, the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in a state of staying at the origin position.

In FIG. 240 (D): Then, in the animal mode, the second correction process is executed after a certain period of time has elapsed (after the start of fluctuation) from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol. In the second correction process, when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is at the origin position after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 at the origin position is moved to the movable position. It is a process to make it. By executing the second correction process, in the illustrated example, the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are moved from the origin position to the movable position.

FIGS. 241 to 244 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of the operation of the deciding object. In the decisive movement, a plurality of movable bodies are movable.

In FIG. 241 (A): In the illustrated example, the reach effect in the final stage is executed, the "ghost of the pumpkin" delivers innumerable punches, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown.

In FIG. 241 (B): A button image imitating the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the center of the screen. When the change this time is the change of winning, when the player presses the effect switching button 45, the following decisive action is executed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation this time is an out-of-order fluctuation, even if the player presses the effect switching button 45, the following deciding feature operation is not executed.

[Decisive accessory operation] In FIG. 242 (C): When the player presses the effect switching button 45, the middle front right movable body elevating motor 57h, the middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i, and the middle front upper movable body move. The body lifting motor 57j is movable. As a result, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 move toward the center of the screen. In addition, the middle front right movable body rotation motor 57e, the middle front left movable body rotation motor 57f, and the middle front upper movable body rotation motor 57g are movable. As a result, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 rotate. Further, the middle / rear movable body rotation motor 57k, which is the base of the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7, is movable. As a result, the middle-rear movable body 40f8 (see FIG. 169) rotates.

As a result, while the heart-shaped middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body 40f7 rotate, the middle rear movable body 40f8, which is the base portion, also rotates, and one final large one is large. The operation for forming the modeled object starts. It should be noted that the display screen may display an image of a special effect for the operation of the deciding object.

In FIG. 242 (D): In the illustrated example, the heart-shaped middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body 40f7 rotate, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 serving as a base portion also It's spinning. The final one large model is in a state of being formed little by little.

In FIG. 243 (E): In the illustrated example, the heart-shaped middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body 40f7 rotate, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 serving as a base portion also It's spinning. The final one large model is about half formed.

FIG. 243 (F): In the illustrated example, the heart-shaped middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body 40f7 rotate, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 serving as a base portion also It's spinning. The final one large sculpture is in a state where most of it is formed.

In FIG. 244 (G): In the illustrated example, the heart-shaped middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body 40f7 move to the final movable position and become the base portion. The rear movable body 40f8 has also moved to the final movable position. The final one big model is the completed state (the state where the heart character is completed). At this time, the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 may also be moved together.

[Rainbow-colored lighting effect] Then, when the movement of the deciding object shifts to the final stage, the LEDs built in the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the right movable body 40f4, and the left movable body 40f3 are rainbow-colored. The color lighting effect is executed. Other lamps (board lamps and frame lamps) may also be lit in rainbow colors.

In FIG. 244 (H): Then, when a certain period of time elapses while the rainbow-colored lighting effect is executed, each movable body returns to the origin position and the stop display effect is executed. In the stop display effect, the effect symbol is stopped in the winning mode ("7"-"7"-"7").

[Countermeasures for moving body movement and lamp current value limitation] (1) Outline of deciding accessory operation The deciding feature operation that occurs at the time of some big hits is a heart-shaped movable body (middle front right movable body) as described above. 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6 and middle front upper movable body 40f7) rotate, while the base part movable body (middle rear movable body 40f8) also rotates to form one final large model. is there.

(2) Operation Restriction at the Time of Operation of the Determinant Object The section of "Operation 1" to "Operation 4" shown in FIGS. And in this section, the lighting of the lamp is restricted (the rainbow color is not lit) due to the problem of the current value limitation.

The lamps that can be turned on in the sections of "operation 1" to "operation 4" are as follows. (A) A lamp built into a heart-shaped movable body (b) A frame (button) and a part of the frame (c) A special lamp (for example, a lamp used in a one-shot notification system)

(3) Specifications, problems, and countermeasures against current value [Specifications] When the operation of the deciding object is completed (when the state of operation 5 shown in FIG. 244 is reached), the lamp is turned on in rainbow colors to express a feeling of blessing. That is, when the base middle-rear movable body 40f8 is rotating, the rainbow-colored lighting cannot be performed, but after the base middle-rear movable body 40f8 is stopped, the rainbow-colored lighting can be performed.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a method of registering a message. As shown in FIG. 245, both the lamp and the movable body are linked to the message, and the data is registered so as to be reproduced after a certain number of frames have elapsed. It should be noted that the method of registering this message is a diagram for explanation, and is not executed as it is in the present embodiment.

For example, the lamp control unit reproduces the appearance data 20F after receiving the determinant operation execution message, reproduces the completion data 120F after the message is received, and stores the storage data after 270F after receiving the message. Execute the process to play. On the other hand, the movable body control unit executes a process of reproducing the appearance data 20F after receiving the deciding object operation execution message and reproducing the storage data 20F after receiving the message.

In this way, basically, the data is reproduced after a certain period of time has passed (by time management), but for the movable body, the time until completion is not always constant. The reason for this is due to the following method of controlling the movable body.

[Movable body control method] The movable body data at the time of appearance is created as follows. (A) A movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8) appears from the origin position to the movable position (until the movable position sensor is shielded from light). For example, the number of steps is 1086 x 2.5 times (the middle and rear movable body rotation motor 57k is operated), but when the movable position sensor is in the light-shielded state, the next registration operation ((b) below) is performed. Transition. In addition, 2.5 times is a margin. (B) When the light is shielded, move it by 80 steps to move it to the completed position of the heart accessory.

Originally, it seems that it is possible to operate to the movable position by operating 992 + 80 = 1072 steps, but the number of steps may be larger than expected due to back crash and other influences, so the number of steps When fixed, the movable body may not move to the movable position. Therefore, by performing the next registration operation after detection by the movable position sensor, it is possible to reliably operate the movable body up to the movable position even if more steps than the theoretical value are required. It will be possible.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a comparative example. The middle-rear movable body 40f8 can move from the origin position to the movable position, and further can move to the maximum movable position beyond the movable position. It is necessary to operate in 1090 (1086) steps from the origin position to the maximum movable position. The numerical value in parentheses for the number of steps is the recommended value for the number of steps, and the numerical value in parentheses is the design value for the number of steps.

The number of steps from the origin position to 60 (58) steps is the number of steps required for the first pushing operation. During this time, the origin position sensor is in a light-shielded state (ON), and when the 60 (58) steps are exceeded, the origin position sensor is activated. The light is transmitted (OFF).

From the origin position to the 992 (992) step, the movable position sensor is in the light transmission state (OFF), and the subsequent 80 (80) step is the number of steps required for the second pushing operation, and from the 992 (992) step. After 94 (90) steps, the maximum movable position is reached. The first pushing operation and the second pushing operation are parts to which the deceleration sequence is applied because the movable body does not stop suddenly.

[Problems due to the control method of the movable body and the lamp] As described above, the lamp lights up at the registered timing after receiving the message, but the movable body has a change in the operating time until the completed position. For this reason, if the number of steps required for the movement of the movable body is larger than expected, the lamp may light up even though the movable body as the base is moving, and the current value limit may not be observed. ..

[Current value limit] The details of the current value limit are as follows. In this embodiment, there are four voltage groups such as 5V, 12V, 18V, and 37V. Then, a movable body and a lamp are assigned to any of such current groups, and when the total power consumption exceeds 300 VA, it is determined that "the current value limit is applicable (there is a problem)". As described above, the value of the current value limit (upper limit value) is 300 VA. Then, when the deciding object operation (first effect, movable effect) by the movable body and the rainbow-colored lighting effect (second effect, light emission effect) by the LED are executed at the same time, it exceeds 300 VA.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the present embodiment. The operation content is the same as the timing chart of the comparative example, but in the timing chart of the present embodiment, when the middle-rear movable body 40f8 reaches the movable position, the middle-rear movable body rotation motor 57k corresponding to the middle-rear movable body 40f8 Is stopped after the excitation is maintained, and the decisive character completion flag is turned on at this timing.

The timing for turning on the deciding object completion flag may be the timing when the movable position sensor of the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is in the light-shielding state, and after the movable position sensor of the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is in the light-shielding state. It may be after a certain period of time required for the second pushing operation has elapsed.

[Countermeasure] In the present embodiment, in order to keep the current value limit, after the operation of the base middle / rear movable body 40f8 is stopped, the movable body control unit sends a deciding object completion message to the lamp control unit. By doing so, the lamp does not turn on in rainbow colors during the operation of the middle-rear movable body 40f8, which is the base.

[Detailed Procedure] The detailed control procedure of the present embodiment is as follows. Step 1: Add one message, and execute the data for completion of the lamp control unit based on the added deciding factor completion message. Step 2: After the operation of the middle-rear movable body 40f8, which is the base, is stopped (when the movable position sensor of the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is detected), the deciding object completion flag is set to ON. Step 3: The movable body control unit monitors every 1F whether or not the determined accessory completion flag is ON. Step 4: When the deciding character completion flag is ON, the deciding character completion message for the lamp control unit is transmitted, and the deciding character completion flag is set to OFF.

By doing so, the lamp is not regenerated at a fixed timing, and the lamp data can be regenerated after the operation of the movable body is surely completed. It is possible to keep the current value limit.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the launch direction. The following game flow is the game flow when the consecutive villa state ends in the shortest time. Specifically, in the non-time reduction state, the big hit of the "1st winning type (with time reduction)" is won, and in the time reduction state, the small hit of the "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won, and the non-time reduction is achieved. This is the flow of the game when a small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won in the state. The gaming state progresses in the order of No1 to No13.

[No1] The "gaming state" is the "first special symbol variation", and the "launching direction" is "left-handed". At the start of the game, the first special symbol is changed to aim for a big hit.

[No2] The "game state" is "big hit (first hit, first big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of the "first winning type (with time reduction)" is won.

[No3] The "game state" is the "time reduction state", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". When the gaming state shifts from the non-time shortened state to the time shortened state, the firing direction becomes right-handed.

[No4] The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is digested at high speed.

[No5] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (time reduction state, memory +1)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". During the change of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be stored.

[No6] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (time shortened state end)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". When the game state shifts from the time-shortened state to the non-time-shortened state when the second special symbol is stopped, the firing direction is switched from right-handed to left-handed.

[No7] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No8] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (second big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No9] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (non-time shortened state)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Here, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No10] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No11] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". The launch direction continues to be left-handed.

[No12] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (third big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No13] The "game state" is "the end of a big hit for one set (three times)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". In this case, the mode shifts to the animal mode. In this way, if the winning symbol without time reduction (for example, "sixth winning type (no time reduction)") is applied twice in a row, the consecutive villa state ends.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, memory number display effect, large role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number display effect, etc. Is also controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). Controls device operation (screen display by liquid crystal display 42, audio output by speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, etc., operation of various movable bodies by movable body motor 57, etc.) Then, the production reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operating subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor (overall control unit) is referred to as the effect control unit 210, and the effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). ), The "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", or "movable body control unit 226", as appropriate, depending on the device to be controlled. It is referred to as "input control unit 228". In addition, these control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228 that function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Further, the operation main body that manages the time related to the effect reproduction is referred to as "time management unit 230" or "ACT".

As a rough flow of the effect control, first, when the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, a message instructing the reproduction of the effect is sent to a predetermined area in the RAM 130 according to the contents. Output to. The message output by the effect control unit 210 is transmitted by the time management unit 230 to each individual control unit at a predetermined timing. In response to this, each individual control unit gives specific instructions to each device based on the content of the message and controls the operation of each device. As a result of such control, the effect by each device is executed.

The time management unit 230 activates the control table in which the details of the effect contents associated with the message contents are defined at the same time as the message is transmitted to each individual control unit or instead of the message transmission. Is also possible. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control unit 210. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control unit 210 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and system operation processing (step S402a). Step S403), special fluctuation effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), movable body control unit process (step S405), lamp control unit process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), and It is a configuration including a subroutine group of the effect random number update process (step S410). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received commands and saves them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot end Directing command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, count cut counter command, various error commands, special fluctuation count specification command, big hit opening command, small hit opening command, setting related end specification command, etc. There is.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the effect symbol and the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 displays the effect contents (effect symbol, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, markers M1, M2, production contents related to the important role production, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of determining the content of the advance notice effect) is executed. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control unit 210 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the system operation process, the effect control unit 210 executes processes related to the system operation (initial process, retry process, correction process). The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special variation effect management process, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not to execute the special variation effect based on the special variation number designation command, and if it is determined to execute, what kind of content is there? Executes the process of determining whether to execute the effect during the special fluctuation of. In addition, this processing may be executed in the effect symbol change pre-processing.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 performs an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that fluctuates the effect symbol at high speed) when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected. When the special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, the process of selecting the effect pattern for executing the reach effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control unit 210 first tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. Outputs a message instructing the effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the variable time notice effect number, the background pattern number, etc.). In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the content of the message, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S405: In the process of the movable body control unit, for example, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a message instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the content of the effect. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 of specific control contents based on the contents of the message. In response to this, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on the instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Step S406: In the lamp control unit processing, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a message instructing the lamp control unit 224 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the message, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and drives (lights up) various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. Or turn off, blink, change brightness gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends the effect content (for example, during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, and the jackpot effect) to the voice control unit 222, and the sound data. Etc.) is output as an instruction. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the message, and sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) according to the production contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56. Is output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 eliminates the markers M1 or M2 corresponding to the lottery elements consumed by the internal lottery, and slides the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Select.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 249).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 193) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the effect symbol and the variation display effect using the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (preliminary effect) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( Button effect) is instructed to each individual control unit.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit in order to control the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). When shifting to the animal mode after the jackpot game is completed, the effect control unit 210 can select an operation pattern for moving the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 from the origin position to the movable position. Such an operation pattern may be selected at the end of the jackpot game, or may be selected at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

In the demo production, the production related to the game method and the game explanation (displaying the demo movie) and the production related to the game record (the production that can save the game record using a predetermined code, password, etc.) are executed. At this time, the effect control unit 210 can select an operation pattern for returning to the origin position when the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 249) and the like.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number at that time, the variation schedule (variation time) of the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the stop. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state, and finally corresponds to the small hit. The process of selecting the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in a state where the "drive mode" is continued or a normal mode, for example. Finally, the process of selecting the effect symbol corresponding to the small hit and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number at that time and the variation schedule of the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

Here, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not to execute the deciding character operation at the time of a miss, a big hit, or a small hit based on a fluctuation pattern, a predetermined effect lottery, or the like, and determines the deciding character operation. When it is decided to execute, the effect pattern corresponding to the deciding object operation is selected, and the deciding object operation is performed on the device to be controlled (for example, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, etc.). Executes the process of sending an execution message.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, as a general rule, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state. , Execute the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time saving and medium effect).

However, as an exception, the effect control unit 210 has a memory of the second special symbol when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. In this case, a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 251), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection]
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S620: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory digestion section. The memory digestion section is a section for digesting the memory of the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state shifted after the end of the time reduction state. The memory digestion section is, for example, the first fluctuation section of the second special symbol and the first to fourth fluctuation sections of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. After the memory digestion section is completed, an immediate stop prevention section for the animal mode is set.

The memory digestion section and the immediate stop prevention section may be managed only by the main control device, may be managed only by the effect control device, or may be managed by both devices. For example, the memory digestion section can be managed by the memory digestion section stay flag. The memory digestion section stay flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, and when the first variation section of the second special symbol ends after the end of the jackpot game, or when the fifth variation section of the first special symbol ends. Set to OFF when starting. On the other hand, the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON at the timing when the memory digestion section stay flag is set from ON to OFF, and the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times is completed while the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON. Set to OFF at the time.

When the game is played normally (when the right-handed striking is continued in the time shortened state), the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the memory digestion section, but when the game is not played normally (when the game is not performed normally). If the time is shortened and the right-handed stroke is not continued), the memory of the first special symbol may be digested in the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S621, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), The effect control unit 210 executes step S625.

Step S621: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the change this time is a change of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S622 and confirms that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. If it cannot be done (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S625.

Step S622: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S623, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S624.

Step S623: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a special pseudo-variation effect. The special pseudo-variation effect is an effect in which the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time.

Step S624: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a reach-out effect. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched, and finally selects an effect that fails to launch the fireworks.

Step S625: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an out-of-effect effect according to the stay mode and the fluctuation pattern. The effect control unit 210 may, for example, select a mere off-effect effect, or execute a reach effect to select an out-of-effect effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 252).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S630: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game state is the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S634, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current game state is the time shortened state (No). ), The effect control unit 210 executes step S631.

Step S631: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S632, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), The effect control unit 210 executes step S633.

Step S632: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S635, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S634.

Step S633: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation is within the specified number of times (for example, within 15 times) after the big hit game.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S635 and cannot confirm that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game. (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S636.

Step S634: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image for the drive mode.

Step S635: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image for the animal mode.

Step S636: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image for the normal mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 252).

By executing such a process, if the effect control unit 210 has a memory of the second special symbol (if the memory state of the lottery element is a special state), the effect control unit 210 is in a non-time shortened state (normal state). It is possible to execute a drive mode effect (common effect) having common contents in the time saving state (advantageous state) (effect execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 is in a non-time shortened state (normal state) if there is no memory of the second special symbol (unless the memory state of the lottery element is a special state). ) And the time reduction state (advantageous state), it is possible to execute a drive mode effect (non-common effect) and an animal mode effect (non-common effect) with different contents (effect execution means).

[Processing during effect symbol stop display] FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S656.

Step S652: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-cut counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final fluctuation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control unit 210 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control unit 210 performs step S666. Execute.

Step S654: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the effect control unit 210 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S658.

Step S658: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. (No), that is, when the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control unit 210 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 has a pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value of is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ).

Step S662: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control unit 210 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 251).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control unit 210 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit of the effect content corresponding to the selected effect pattern. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 wins, for example, various effect images corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit stored in the CGROM 190 in advance as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 for the VDP 152. Instruct to read according to the design.

Step S804: The effect control unit 210 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game and an effect pattern suggesting right-handed hitting, and the game ball is played during the small hit game. When passing through the specific area 31x, the effect pattern at the time of passing through the specific area is selected, and the effect contents corresponding to these effect patterns are instructed to each individual control unit. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 reads out from the VDP 152 an effect image showing how the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and an effect image suggesting right-handed strike at the start of the small hit game. In addition, when passing through a specific area, a female character in a car is instructed to read out a production image showing a state in which a heart mark with the letter V is drawn.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 251).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of big hit]
FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a big hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit has been received (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S811, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit has been received (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the process when the variable winning device is activated (FIG. 256).

Step S811: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S812, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S814.

Step S812: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is a winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current jackpot is the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S814, and the current jackpot shifts to the time shortened state. If it cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S813.

Step S813: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the first selection table. The jackpot effect included in the first selection table is a jackpot effect that does not include a fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to the drive mode).

Step S814: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the second selection table. The jackpot effect included in the second selection table is a jackpot effect including a fireworks effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 252).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated for small hits]
FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device for small hits is activated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S820: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a small hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of a small hit has been received (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S821, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of a small hit has been received (No), The effect control unit 210 returns to the process when the variable winning device is operated (FIG. 256).

Step S821: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S822, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S824.

Step S822: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the small hit this time is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current small hit is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S824, and the current small hit shifts to the time shortened state. If it cannot be confirmed that the symbol is a winning symbol that leads to a big hit (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S823.

Step S823: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the third selection table. The small hit effect included in the third selection table is a small hit effect that does not include an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.

Step S824: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the fourth selection table. The small hit effect included in the fourth selection table is a small hit effect including an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 252).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing] FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect is produced. The control unit 210 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the remaining time reduction number. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and displays an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding "1" to the second count cut counter value is displayed as the remaining number of times. Executes the selected process. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 2 times" or "remaining 1 time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control unit 210 executes a right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control unit 210 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, when the effect control unit 210 needs to execute the right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened (particularly). , 5th variation or 10th variation of the first special symbol), a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed.

Step S856: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 249).

Step S858: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 249).

[System operation processing] FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of system operation processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S902: The effect control unit 210 executes the initial processing. The initial processing can be executed only once when the power is turned on. The effect control unit 210 operates all the movable bodies in the initial process, and confirms whether or not each movable body operates normally.

Sensors are arranged at the origin position and the movable position on all movable bodies. The effect control unit 210 moves the movable body from the origin position to the movable position after detecting the predetermined movable body with the sensor at the origin position, and after detecting with the sensor at the movable position, moves the movable body from the movable position to the origin position. If it can be moved and finally detected by the sensor at the origin position, it can be determined that the movable body operates normally. Depending on the movable body, another sensor may be arranged at a position between the origin position and the movable position, or the sensor may be arranged only at the origin position or only at the movable position.

Step S904: The effect control unit 210 executes the retry process. The retry process can be executed after the movement of the movable body. For example, when the operation of moving a predetermined movable body to the movable position is executed, the operation of returning the movable body to the origin position is executed after that, but when the movable body is returned to the origin position, the movable body is movable by the sensor at the origin position. If the body cannot be detected, a retry operation is performed to move the movable body again. In the retry process, the effect control unit 210 moves the target movable body again when the movable body has not returned to the correct position, and confirms whether or not the movable body has returned to the correct position.

Step S906: The effect control unit 210 executes the correction process. The correction process is executed when a specified opportunity occurs. In the correction process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of moving the target movable body and moving it to the correct position when the movable body is not in the correct position.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 249).

[Correction processing] FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the correction processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S910: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is at the time when the fluctuation is confirmed. Whether or not the fluctuation is confirmed can be the period from the reception of the symbol stop command to the reception of the stop display time end command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current gaming state is at the time of determining the fluctuation (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S911, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current gaming state is at the time of determining the fluctuation (No). ), The effect control unit 210 executes step S912.

Step S9111: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current mode is the animal mode. Whether or not it is in the animal mode can be confirmed by whether or not the background image for the animal mode is selected.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S914, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (No), the effect control Unit 210 executes step S915.

Step S912: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is in a state after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, after 45 frames (1.5 seconds) have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation). Whether or not the state is in a state after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation can be confirmed by counting (timekeeping) the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current gaming state is the state after a certain time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S913, and the current gaming state has elapsed a certain time after the start of the fluctuation. If it cannot be confirmed that the state is later (No), the effect control unit 210 returns to the system operation process (FIG. 260).

Step S913: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current mode is the animal mode. Whether or not it is in the animal mode can be confirmed by whether or not the background image for the animal mode is selected.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S916, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the system operation process (FIG. 260).

Step S914: The effect control unit 210 executes the first correction process based on the first correction table in which the operation of some movable bodies is restricted. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 limits the operation of "No. 1 to No. 3" of the first correction table to be described later, that is, the first correction table, that is, "No. 1 to No. 3" of the first correction table. The first correction process is executed based on the first correction table that does not execute the operation of ".3" (ignores) and executes only the operations of "No. 4 to No. 7" of the first correction table.

Step S915: The effect control unit 210 executes the first correction process based on the first correction table. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes the first correction process based on the first correction table capable of executing the operations of "No. 1 to No. 7" of the first correction table described later.

When executing the first correction process, the effect control unit 210 transmits a message for the first correction process (first correction message) to the movable body control unit 226, and the movable body control unit 226 sends the received message to the received message. The position of the movable body is corrected based on this.

Step S916: The effect control unit 210 executes the second correction process based on the second correction table. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes the second correction process based on the second correction table capable of executing the operations of "No. 1 to No. 3" of the second correction table described later.

When executing the second correction process, the effect control unit 210 transmits a message for the second correction process (second correction message) to the movable body control unit 226, and the movable body control unit 226 sends the received message to the received message. The position of the movable body is corrected based on this.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the system operation processing (FIG. 260).

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 sets the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 in advance at a predetermined position or a specific position based on the signal from the photo sensor (detection result of the detecting means). The upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is the origin by executing the judgment process (judgment process referring to the first correction table or the second correction table) as to whether or not the body is arranged at the specified specified position (correct position). When it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the position or the movable position, the first movement process or the second movement process using the first correction table is performed as the movement process for moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the origin position or the movable position. The second movement process using the correction table can be executed (movable body control means).

The first movement process is a process in which a specific movable body (upper movable body 40f1 or lower movable body 40f2) among a plurality of movable bodies can be moved to a predetermined position (position A, movable position). The second movement process includes all movable bodies or movable bodies other than specific movable bodies (left movable body 40f3, right movable body 40f4, middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body. This is a process in which the body 40f7 and the middle / rear movable body 40f8) can be moved to a specific position (position B, initial position).

Further, the effect control unit 210 can execute the first movement process or the second movement process based on different determination triggers from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the stop display of the special symbol. (Movable body control means). The determination process of whether to execute the first movement process or the second movement process is executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the plurality of times is twice, but it may be three times or more.

Further, by executing such a process, when the effect control unit 210 is in the normal mode (first state), is the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 arranged at the origin position as a determination process? When the first judgment process (judgment process referring to the first correction table) of whether or not is executed and it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the origin position, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is moved upward as a moving process. It is possible to execute the first movement process (movement process using the first correction table) for moving the body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the origin position (movable body control means).

Furthermore, by executing such a process, when the effect control unit 210 is in the animal mode (second state), the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is arranged at the movable position as a determination process. When the second judgment process (judgment process referring to the second correction table) of whether or not is executed is executed and it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the movable position, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is determined as the moving process. It is possible to execute a second movement process (movement process using the second correction table) for moving the movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the movable position (movable body control means).

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 usually performs the period from the start of the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once to the end of the stop display time of the special symbol. The first correction process for moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the origin position when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the origin position (first position) in the mode (first state). And, when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged in the movable position (second position) in the animal mode (second state), the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is moved to the movable position. The second correction process can be executed (movable body control means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 defines the operation to be executed by each movable body of the plurality of movable bodies in the normal mode (first state) (first correction table (first state)). When the first correction process (first movement process) can be executed based on (1 table) and the animal mode (second state) is set, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 among the plurality of movable bodies The operation of the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 which can execute the first correction process (first movement process) based on the first correction table whose operation is restricted and whose operation is restricted in the first correction table. The second correction process (second movement process) can be executed based on the second correction table (second table) for the target.

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 can move the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 or the like to a predetermined predetermined position (position A, movable position) according to the predetermined mode. First movement processing can be executed (first movement processing execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 can move the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 or the like to a predetermined specific position (position B, initial position) according to the specific mode. 2nd movement processing can be executed (second movement processing execution means).

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the relationship between the motor and the movable body. The motor in the figure is included in a plurality of motors existing as the movable body motor 57.

[No. 1] The upper movable body elevating motor 57a is a motor for raising and lowering the upper movable body 40f1. The upper movable body 40f1 (specific movable body) moves from the origin position (first position, the position arranged above the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (second position, the center side of the liquid crystal display 42). It is movable up to the position where it is arranged), is in the origin position in the normal mode (first state), and is in the movable position in the animal mode (second state).

[No. 2] The lower movable body elevating motor 57b is a motor for raising and lowering the lower movable body 40f2. The lower movable body 40f2 (specific movable body) moves from the origin position (first position, the position arranged below the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (second position, the center side of the liquid crystal display 42). It is movable up to the position where it is arranged), is in the origin position in the normal mode (first state), and is in the movable position in the animal mode (second state).

[No. 3] The left movable body motor 57c is a motor for moving the left movable body 40f3 in the left-right direction. The left movable body 40f3 is movable from the origin position (the position arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (the position moved to the center side of the liquid crystal display 42) and is the left movable body. It is in the origin position when the effect using 40f3 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the left movable body 40f3 is executed.

[No. 4] The right movable body motor 57d is a motor for moving the right movable body 40f4 in the left-right direction. The right movable body 40f4 is movable from the origin position (the position arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (the position moved to the center side of the liquid crystal display 42) and is the right movable body. It is in the origin position when the effect using 40f4 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the right movable body 40f4 is executed.

[No. 5] The middle front right movable body rotation motor 57e is a motor for rotating the middle front right movable body 40f5. The middle front right movable body 40f5 can rotate while moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42 or in a state of moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

[No. 6] The middle front left movable body rotation motor 57f is a motor for rotating the middle front left movable body 40f6. The middle front left movable body 40f6 can rotate while moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42 or in a state of moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

[No. 7] The middle-front upper movable body rotation motor 57g is a motor for rotating the middle-front upper movable body 40f7. The middle-front upper movable body 40f7 can rotate while moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42 or in a state of moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

[No. 8] The middle front right movable body elevating motor 57h is a motor for raising and lowering the middle front right movable body 40f5. The middle-front right movable body 40f5 is movable from the origin position (the position where it overlaps with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction) to the movable position (the position where it does not overlap the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction), and the middle front right movable body is movable. It is in the origin position when the effect using the body 40f5 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the middle front right movable body 40f5 is executed.

[No. 9] The middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i is a motor for raising and lowering the middle front left movable body 40f6. The middle-front left movable body 40f6 is movable from the origin position (the position where it overlaps with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction) to the movable position (the position where it does not overlap the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction), and the middle front left movable body is movable. It is in the origin position when the effect using the body 40f6 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the middle front left movable body 40f6 is executed.

[No. 10] The middle-front upper movable body elevating motor 57j is a motor for raising and lowering the middle-front upper movable body 40f7. The middle-front upper movable body 40f7 is movable from the origin position (the position where it overlaps with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction) to the movable position (the position where it does not overlap the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction), and is movable in the middle front upper direction. It is in the origin position when the effect using the body 40f7 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the middle front upper movable body 40f7 is executed.

[No. 11] The middle-rear movable body rotation motor 57k is a motor for rotating the middle-rear movable body 40f8. The middle-rear movable body 40f8 is movable from the origin position to the movable position (a position rotated about 240 degrees from the origin position), and is in the origin position when the effect using the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is not executed. It is in the movable position when the effect using the rear movable body 40f8 is executed.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing a first correction table to be referred to in the first correction process executed at the time of determining the fluctuation of the present embodiment. This table is referred to in step S914 and step S915 of the correction process (FIG. 261).

[No. 1] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "upper movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "upper movable body correction" is a pattern for moving the upper movable body 40f1 from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 2] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "lower movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "lower movable body correction" is a pattern in which the lower movable body 40f2 is moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 3] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "up and down movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "up and down movable body correction" is a pattern in which the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 4] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "x", the operation pattern of "left and right movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "left and right movable body correction" is a pattern in which the left movable body 40f3 and the right movable body 40f4 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 5] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "x", the operation pattern of "up / down / left / right movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of "up / down / left / right movable body correction" is a pattern in which the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the left movable body 40f3, and the right movable body 40f4 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 6] The "heart character" is "x", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "heart character correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "heart accessory correction" is a pattern in which the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 7] The "heart character" is "-", the "upper movable body" is "-", the "lower movable body" is "-", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "-", the operation pattern of "all movable body correction" is selected. The operation patterns of "all movable body correction" are upper movable body 40f1, lower movable body 40f2, left movable body 40f3, right movable body 40f4, middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, middle front upper movable body. This is a pattern for moving the 40f7 and the middle / rear movable body 40f8 from the movable position to the origin position.

[About system operation] As a premise, the system operation includes the operation of initial processing, retry processing, and correction processing, and each operation table is created and each processing is executed. Taking the correction process as an example, as shown in this figure, the operation is switched according to the status of each movable body sensor.

Here, if the sensor at the origin position of each movable body can detect the movable body, the value is "○", and if the sensor at the origin position cannot detect the movable body, the value is "x". In addition, "-" is No. Although it does not correspond to 1 to 6, it indicates a state in which a plurality of movable bodies are "x". In addition, the "heart character" is No. 262 in FIG. It is a movable body of 5 to 11. The case where the "heart character" is "x" means that the No. Even one of the movable bodies 5 to 11 is in a state where the movable body cannot be detected by the sensor at the origin position.

Here, No. 1 will be described as an example. No. The state of 1 is a situation in which only the upper movable body 40f1 cannot be detected by the sensor at the origin position. In this case, an operation pattern (upper movable body correction) for correcting (moving to the correct position) the upper movable body 40f1 is selected. When the operation pattern of "upper movable body correction" is selected, the process of moving the upper movable body 40f1 to the origin position is executed.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a second correction table to be referred to in the second correction process executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation of the present embodiment. This table is referred to in step S916 of the correction process (FIG. 261).

[No. 1] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "lower movable body special correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "lower movable body special correction" is a pattern for moving the lower movable body 40f2 from the origin position to the movable position.

[No. 2] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "upper movable body special correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "upper movable body special correction" is a pattern for moving the upper movable body 40f1 from the origin position to the movable position.

[No. 3] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "upper and lower movable body special correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "up and down movable body special correction" is a pattern in which the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are moved from the origin position to the movable position.

Here, No. 1 will be described as an example. No. In the state of 1, only the upper movable body 40f1 cannot be detected by the sensor at the origin position. In addition, No. In the state of 1, the lower movable body 40f2 can be detected by the sensor at the origin position. In the animal mode, it is necessary to move the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 to the movable position. Therefore, here, the operation pattern for correcting the lower movable body 40f2 (moving to the correct position) (lower movable body special correction). Is selected. When the operation pattern of "lower movable body special correction" is selected, the process of moving the lower movable body 40f2 to the movable position is executed.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing a correction table referred to in the correction process executed at the time of determining the fluctuation of the comparative example. [No. 1] to [No. 7] is the same as the operation of the first correction table (FIG. 263). [No. 8] to [No. 14] is [No. 1] to [No. It is the same as the operation of 7], but after that, the operation of "animal mode position formation" is executed.

In the present embodiment, there are two patterns of origin positions of the movable body, and if it is attempted to correspond to these by the correction table of the comparative example, it is necessary to prepare twice the operation patterns. Specifically, it is necessary to further divide the table by additional information called stage information, which increases the number of data and makes it difficult to manage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of data is reduced by providing two execution timings of the correction process (correction operation).

[Realization Means] (A) In the first correction process of the present embodiment, the table shown in FIG. 263 is used. (B) By providing two execution timings of the correction process, it is possible to suppress simply increasing the number of data.

The execution timing of the first first correction process is when the fluctuation is confirmed. As a result, in principle, each movable body can be returned to the normal mode position. Here, the table shown in FIG. 263 is used.

The execution timing of the second second correction process is after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (45 frames after the start of the fluctuation). Only when the change of the animal mode starts, a message for the second correction process (for correction timing 2) is transmitted, and if the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 do not appear at that timing, the upper movable body 40f1 and lower movable body 40f2 are made to appear.

The reason why the execution timing of the second correction process is set to 45 frames after the start of fluctuation (about 1.5 seconds later) is the time for the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 of the present embodiment to return from the movable position to the origin position. Is about 30F (about 1.0 second), and this is to secure a time for preventing the appearance operation during the return operation.

[Movable Body Control Unit Processing] FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the movable body control unit processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described. This process is executed by the movable body control unit 226.

Step S920: The movable body control unit 226 confirms whether or not the deciding object operation execution message has been received. The deciding object operation execution message is transmitted from the effect control unit 210 to the movable body control unit 226.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the determinant action execution message has been received (Yes), the movable body control unit 226 executes step S921, and when it cannot be confirmed that the determinant action execution message has been received (No). , The movable body control unit 226 executes step S922.

Step S921: The movable body control unit 226 executes the effect selection process related to the movement of the deciding object. Specifically, the movable body control unit 226 executes a process of reproducing the appearance data 20F after receiving the determinant operation execution message and reproducing the storage data 20F after receiving the message. That is, the movable body control unit 226 executes the appearance data reproduction and the storage data reproduction shown in FIG. 245. The reproduction of the appearance data is controlled by the sensor, but the reproduction of the storage data is controlled by the time because the lighting part of the lamp is limited. If the lighting portion of the lamp is not limited, the reproduction of the storage data may also be managed by the sensor.

By executing such a process, the movable body control unit 226 can execute the deciding object operation (first effect) by the various movable bodies (first effect executing means).

Further, by executing such a process, the movable body control unit 226 can execute a movable effect of moving the middle-rear movable body 40f8 from the origin position (first position) to the movable position (second position). (Movable production execution means).

Step S922: The movable body control unit 226 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the movable position sensor of the middle-rear movable body.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input from the movable position sensor of the middle / rear movable body (Yes), the movable body control unit 226 executes step S923 and detects the detection signal from the movable position sensor of the middle / rear movable body. If it cannot be confirmed that is input (No), the movable body control unit 226 executes step S928.

Step S923: The movable body control unit 226 executes a process of setting the determinant completion flag to ON.

Step S924: The movable body control unit 226 confirms whether or not one frame has elapsed. Whether or not one frame has elapsed can be confirmed by counting (timekeeping) the elapsed time from the start of this process (movable body control unit process).

As a result, when it is confirmed that one frame has elapsed (Yes), the movable body control unit 226 executes step S925, and when it cannot be confirmed that one frame has elapsed (No), the movable body control unit 226 steps. Execute S928. When adopting control that does not wait for the elapse of one frame, it is possible not to execute this process.

Step S925: The movable body control unit 226 confirms whether or not the determinant completion flag is ON.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the deciding character completion flag is ON (Yes), the movable body control unit 226 executes step S926, and when it cannot be confirmed that the deciding character completion flag is ON (No). , The movable body control unit 226 executes step S928.

Step S926: The movable body control unit 226 executes a process of transmitting a determinant completion message for the lamp control unit to the lamp control unit 224.

Step S927: The movable body control unit 226 executes a process of setting the determinant completion flag to OFF. The deciding object completion flag may be turned off after a certain frame has elapsed.

Step S928: The movable body control unit 226 executes other processing. Specifically, the movable body control unit 226 executes a process of moving various movable bodies based on the message transmitted from the effect control unit 210.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the movable body control unit 226 returns to the effect control processing (FIG. 249).

[Lamp Control Unit Processing] FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the lamp control unit processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described. This process is executed by the lamp control unit 224.

Step S930: The lamp control unit 224 confirms whether or not the determinant operation execution message has been received. The deciding object operation execution message is transmitted from the effect control unit 210 to the lamp control unit 224.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the deciding character operation execution message has been received (Yes), the lamp control unit 224 executes step S931 and cannot confirm that the deciding character operation execution message has been received (No). The lamp control unit 224 executes step S932.

Step S931: The lamp control unit 224 executes the effect selection process related to the operation of the deciding object. Specifically, the lamp control unit 224 executes a process of reproducing the appearance data 20F after receiving the determinant operation execution message and reproducing the storage data 20F after the message is received. That is, the lamp control unit 224 executes the appearance data reproduction and the storage data reproduction shown in FIG. 245.

By executing such a process, when the lamp control unit 224 is executed at the same time as the deciding object operation (first effect) by the various movable bodies, the rainbow-colored lighting effect (the rainbow-colored lighting effect) that satisfies the predetermined condition related to the effect progress (the first effect). The second effect) can be executed (second effect execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the lamp control unit 224 can execute a rainbow-colored lighting effect (light emitting effect) that causes various lamps (light emitting means) to emit light (light emitting effect executing means).

Step S932: The lamp control unit 224 confirms whether or not the determinant completion message for the lamp control unit has been received. The decisive object completion message for the lamp control unit is transmitted from the movable body control unit 226 to the lamp control unit 224.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the determinant completion message for the lamp control unit has been received (Yes), the lamp control unit 224 executes step S933 and has received the determinant completion message for the lamp control unit. If (No) cannot be confirmed, the lamp control unit 224 executes step S934.

Step S933: The lamp control unit 224 executes the rainbow-colored lighting effect selection process. Specifically, the lamp control unit 224 executes a process of selecting a light emitting pattern that causes various lamps (LEDs) to emit light in rainbow colors.

By executing such a process, the lamp control unit 224 can execute the rainbow-colored lighting effect (second effect) after the end of the deciding object operation (first effect) by the various movable bodies (effect control means). ).

Further, by executing such a process, when the lamp control unit 224 is executed at the same time as the deciding object operation (movable effect), the predetermined condition related to the effect progress is satisfied (establishment of operation hindrance, predetermined). The rainbow-colored lighting effect (second effect) (corresponding to the current value limit) can be started (execution limit) after the end of the deciding object operation (movable effect) (effect control means).

Here, the deciding object operation (first effect) by various movable bodies includes a movable effect of moving the middle-rear movable body 40f8 (movable body) from the origin position (first position) to the movable position (second position). .. The rainbow-colored lighting effect (second effect) includes a light emitting effect that causes various lamps (light emitting means) to emit light.

Further, by executing such a process, the lamp control unit 224 moves the middle / rear movable body 40f8 (movable body) from the origin position (first position) to the movable position (second position), and the middle / rear movable body is movable. When the movable position sensor (detection means) of the body 40f8 detects that the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is in the movable position, it is assumed that the deciding object operation (first effect) by the various movable bodies has been completed. The lighting effect (second effect) can be started (effect control means).

Step S934: The lamp control unit 224 executes other processing. Specifically, the movable body control unit 226 is the effect control unit 21.
Based on the message transmitted from 0, the process of making various lamps emit light is executed.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the lamp control unit 224 returns to the effect control processing (FIG. 249).

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern of measures for immediate termination of the consecutive villa state.
In the figure (A), an example of a transition of a special variation pattern when a game is played without following the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol memory is stored. When the second special symbol became a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol and the time was shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, the launch of the game ball was stopped during the memory digestion of the second special symbol. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "first variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the jackpot game ends is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation (reach effect) dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.

In the figure (B), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is performed according to the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), four special symbol memories are stored. If you save and become a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and shift to the time shortened state at the end of the big hit game, that is, hit left during the memory digestion of the second special symbol and hit the first special symbol When four memories are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are fluctuations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.
By executing the striking method shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate end of the consecutive villa state (the situation where the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern in consideration of irregular striking.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the firing direction is shown.
For example, if four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit and right-handed is continued in a state of shortening the time after the end of the big hit game, that is, all the memories of the first special symbol are digested and the first 2 When the memory of the special symbol is stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game (the first variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

In the figure (B), an example of the transition of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played without following the firing direction is shown.
For example, when four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit, and the left hit is continued even though the time is shortened after the big hit game is completed, that is, the first hit. When all the memories of the special symbol are digested and the time reduction state ends (punctures) by continuing to accumulate the memory of the first special symbol, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (first time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "sixth to ninth variation", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. .. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "10th variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "11th variation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the eleventh variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. After the end of the time reduction (puncture), the normal state (non-time reduction state, normal mode) is entered.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in order to start the rainbow-colored lighting effect (second effect) after the end of the deciding object operation (first effect) by the various movable bodies, the execution of the deciding object operation by the various movable bodies. A situation in which the rainbow-colored lighting effect is started and the predetermined current value limit is exceeded will not occur. As a result, it is possible to avoid the problem of current value limitation while improving the quality of the gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(2) According to the present embodiment, when the movable position sensor of the middle-rear movable body 40f8 detects that the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is in the movable position, various movable bodies perform a decisive movement (first effect). Since it is possible to start the rainbow-colored lighting effect (second effect), the rainbow-colored lighting effect can be started with the fact that the middle-rear movable body 40f8 has actually moved to the movable position. Therefore, as compared with the method of executing the rainbow-colored lighting effect after the operation of a predetermined number of steps related to the motor or after the lapse of a predetermined time, the rainbow-colored lighting effect is more accurately performed after the deciding object operation by the various movable bodies is completed. Can be started. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the problem of current value limitation while further improving the quality of the gaming machine, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(3) In the deciding object operation (first effect) by the various movable bodies of the present embodiment, the lamp (LED) has a lighting limit (current value limit). After the operation in which the deciding accessory operation completely appears (after the middle-rear movable body 40f8, which is the base accessory, has stopped), the lamp lighting restriction is released. In addition, when the movement of the deciding object reaches the completed position, I would like to congratulate you with rainbow-colored lighting, etc., using the lamps of the game machines (light emitting parts such as the board and doors) that are completely closed. The lamp is basically designed to light up at a fixed timing after receiving a message.

〔problem〕
The movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8) related to the ring (base) portion that constitutes the deciding object has an origin position sensor at the origin position and a movable position sensor at the movable position, and is a movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8). The movable body data that is movable has a data structure in which the movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8) is pushed in after the movable position sensor is detected.

For this reason, there are cases where it takes longer than the number of steps expected for the accessory movement due to reasons such as the movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8) being caught. In this case, if the lamp is turned on at a timing after a certain period of time has passed since the message was received, the lamp is turned on during the operation of the movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8) that is the base of the decisive character (heart character). , The current value limit may be exceeded.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the determinant completion flag is set to ON based on the detection of the movable position sensor of the movable body (middle-rear movable body 40f8).
Then, the accessory completion flag is monitored every 1F, and if the accessory completion flag is ON, a determined accessory completion message is transmitted to the lamp control unit 224 side, and the determined accessory completion flag is set to OFF. The lamp control unit executes the rainbow-colored lighting effect when the message of completion of the accessory is received. The deciding object completion flag may be turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed (for example, two frames after the end of the operation).
This can solve both the quality improvement and the current value limitation problem.

(4) In the present embodiment, when the strong character (special movable body) is in operation and then the operation of the strong character ends (when the movable position sensor is detected), the deciding character completion flag is turned on. By making it possible to execute a plurality of LED lighting (rainbow-colored lighting modes) based on the condition determination that the deciding object completion flag is ON, the current value limit is not exceeded.
That is, the movable body whose operating time is not always constant is given information that the operation is completed, and the LED lighting or the number of LED lightings is limited until the movable body is completed, and the specified current value limit is not exceeded. I am trying to do it.
The light emitting device (LED control board, lamp control unit) is provided with a communication path capable of directly transmitting a message from the accessory device (movable body control unit), and if the deciding accessory completion message is not received, Even if the rainbow-colored lighting timing comes, the LED is not turned on.

(5) In the present embodiment, even at the execution timing of LED lighting in which the predetermined mode (rainbow-colored lighting) is set based on the reception of the predetermined lighting message, the LED is performed according to the movement of the movable body (effect effect). A predetermined mode (rainbow) when the predetermined timing (completion of pushing the return position of the accessory, reception of the final accessory completion message) is reached, which is restricted so that the current state of lighting is maintained or not executed, and the processing of the movable body operation is surely waited for. Allows the execution of LED lighting (color lighting).

(6) In the present embodiment, it is said that "when there is information indicating that the accessory is operating (when the accessory is operating), the LED lighting is maintained as it is (restricting the update of the LED lighting mode)". The point is the point.

(7) In the present embodiment, when the deciding character completion message is not received, the LED lighting mode according to the character production is restricted to be maintained as it is, and the LED lighting execution trigger for notifying the reliability. Even if there is, the LED lighting is permitted on condition that a certain period of time has passed (completion of pushing the return position of the accessory) after receiving the determined accessory completion message.

(8) In the present embodiment, the mode of reliability notification related to LED lighting is a special light emitting mode using a large number of LEDs so as to emit light according to high reliability. That is, the light emission of a large number of LEDs is a mode in which the entire gaming machine is lit in rainbow colors, and the current value limit is easily exceeded.

(9) In the present embodiment, the first control processing unit (LED circuit base, lamp control unit) for lighting the LED and the second control processing unit (accessory circuit base, movable body control unit) for detecting the position of the movable body. ) Is provided as a signal communication path (a function that enables transmission and reception of messages), and the LED is lit by exchanging information regarding the sensor detection signal during and after the operation of the movable body through this communication path. Limit control is performed.

(10) In the present embodiment, the movable body is based on the effect control information (message) including the execution information of the first effect (the effect of moving the movable body) and the second effect (the effect of lighting the LED in rainbow colors). And LED lighting can be executed respectively, and the effect control means is predetermined when the end information (decision character completion message) regarding the end of execution of the first effect is acquired during the execution of the first effect. It is possible to execute the second effect regarding the update of the LED lighting mode (rainbow-colored lighting).

(11) In the present embodiment, the second operation position (the pushing part of the operation completion) is operated more than the first operation position (the part imitating the end of the operation on the mechanism) based on the effect control information (number of steps). ), The end information can be generated based on the case where the movable body can be mistaken (detection of the movable position sensor of the middle and rear movable body and the end of the subsequent pushing operation).

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

In the above-described embodiment, the first correction process is executed when the fluctuation is confirmed, and the second correction process is executed after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. However, the second correction process is executed when the fluctuation is confirmed and the fluctuation starts. The first correction process may be executed after a certain period of time has elapsed, the first correction process and the second correction process may be executed when the fluctuation is confirmed, and the first correction process and the second correction process may be executed after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. The process may be executed.

Although the present invention has been described with the example of being applied to the correction process, the present invention can also be applied to other processes such as the initial process and the retry process.

In the above-described embodiment, the first effect is an effect by a movable body and the second effect is an example of an effect by a lamp. However, the first effect is an effect by a lamp and the second effect is an effect by a movable body. The first effect and the second effect may be an effect by a movable body, and the first effect and the second effect may be an effect by a lamp.

The above-described embodiment can also be modified as follows.
(1) The variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol may be different depending on whether or not the first special symbol is stored.
For example, when the first special symbol is stored and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined, a variation pattern selection table capable of selecting a variation pattern for a long time (several tens of seconds to several minutes) is referred to. ..
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined when the first special symbol is not stored, the variation pattern selection table capable of selecting the variation pattern for a short time (several seconds) is referred to.

(2) A state (left-handed state) in which the memory of the first special symbol is accumulated may be generated during the consecutive villas (time reduction state, drive mode).
For example, the ending time of the jackpot is left-handed. That is, from the opening of the jackpot game to the end of the final round, the player is in a right-handed state, and is in a left-handed state only during the ending of the jackpot game.
In addition, during the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation (from the start to the end of the stop display time), the player is in a left-handed state. The time shortening state can be turned off at the start of the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, whereby the non-time reduction state is set during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time.
Furthermore, "Big hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) ≒ Outlier fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) <Small hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 15 seconds, number) About 10 seconds) ”. In this case, since the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation is longer than that of the big hit or the miss, it is possible to secure a long time for the non-time shortened state.

(3) The definitions of "left-handed state" and "right-handed state" can be as follows.
The main controller has an area for storing the left-handed state or the right-handed state (for example, an area for storing the launch position designation flag), and if the stored content is a value (0) indicating left-handed, "left-handed". It is a "state", and if the content of the memory is not a value indicating left-handed, it is a "right-handed state". The "left-handed state" is a non-time shortened state (a state in which electric chew support is not performed) or the ending of a jackpot game. The other state is the "right-handed state".

The main control device transmits a command for transmitting the state of the current launch position to the effect control device depending on whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state. Such a command may send a command indicating the left-handed state at "when the power is turned on" and "when switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state", and the left-handed state is periodically performed during the left-handed state. You may send the command of.

In the left-handed state, the effect control device can turn off the right-handed notification lamp based on a command from the main control device. Further, in the left-handed state, the effect control device can hide the right-handed instruction display displayed on the liquid crystal display. Further, in the left-handed state, when the effect control device detects the passage of the game ball by the sensor (gate switch 76 of the starting gate 20 or the like) in the right-handed area, the effect control device prompts the left-handed effect, for example, "left-handed". "Please return to" and audio output can be executed. However, after the time reduction state is completed, it is possible to prevent such an effect from being executed until a predetermined number of fluctuations are made in consideration of the remaining balls on the board surface.

By putting the left-handed state during the ending of the big hit and during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, the memory of the first special symbol can be stored regularly, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the consecutive villa can be stored. Can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing due to the end of the consecutive villa state in an extremely short time. On the other hand, if the player does not hit the left side during the consecutive villa, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will be short, so that the player can quickly digest the consecutive villa state.

Since the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine having a game property of a 1-type and 2-type mixer, a winning while the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is open in a non-time shortened state is an error. It may be determined and an error notification may be performed.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment D]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 270 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 271 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 271) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 270. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 270, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. Although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the card unit, it may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. By pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or perform some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probabilistic promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 271, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. In addition to various units such as the back cover unit 178, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown)) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, and a power cord (power plug). 164, ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 286).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 140 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 140 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 140, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 271 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 272 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. In the right side portion (so-called right-handed area) of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top. Has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters (wins) the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, or opens. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that have entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (combined game board units 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 272, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , It is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Is. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to collapse to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a type of device (single-bladed tulip-type attacker) in which the opening / closing member 30a is tilted to the right, whereas the second variable winning device 31 has the opening / closing member 31a. A type of device that slides inside the board is used (sliding attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. This can be achieved. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 31b, the specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

[Other configurations of the game board]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts (without reference numerals) inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 includes an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, and the like. Various production images are displayed, including a storage marker (hold display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, around the liquid crystal display 42 of the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f (40f1 to 40f8) for effect. The movable body 40f (40f1 to 40f8) for the effect is a movable body capable of performing a predetermined operation during the variable display of the special symbol. Note that FIG. 272 illustrates a state in which all the movable bodies are in the origin position, and some movable bodies cannot be visually recognized. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

FIG. 273 is a diagram showing how a plurality of movable bodies are in movable positions.
Specifically, the three arms 51a in which the middle-rear movable body 40f8 rotates 240 degrees clockwise from the origin position to move the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7. Shows the state of being movable in the center.

The upper movable body 40f1 is a horizontally long movable body, and when it is moved, only the central portion is lowered and moved so as to be bent in a V shape. The upper movable body 40f1 may be a movable body that simply moves up and down.
The lower movable body 40f2 is a horizontally long movable body on which character information and the like are displayed, and is a movable body that can move from the origin position to the upward movable position.
The left movable body 40f3 is an arc-shaped movable body, and is a movable body that can move from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction.
The right movable body 40f4 is an arc-shaped movable body, and is a movable body that can move from the origin position to the left movable position.

The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are heart-shaped movable bodies.
The middle-rear movable body 40f8 is an annular movable body that serves as a base for the middle-front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and is movable by rotating 240 degrees clockwise from the origin position. It can be moved to the position.
The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 can rotate independently.
By gathering the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 in the center of the liquid crystal display 42, one large modeled object can be formed.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing how each movable body is at the origin position.
When each movable body is in the origin position, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are arranged at positions overlapping with the middle front movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction.
When each movable body is in the origin position, the middle front right movable body 40f5 is arranged at the lower left of the liquid crystal display 42, the middle front left movable body 40f6 is arranged at the upper left of the liquid crystal display 42, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7. Is located at the lower right of the liquid crystal display 42.

All movable bodies are provided with sensors (photosensors using a light-shielding plate) at the origin position and the movable position, and the effect control device determines whether the movable body is at the origin position or the movable position based on this sensor. You can figure out if it is in. Such a sensor is a detecting means for detecting the position where the movable body is arranged.

For example, exemplifying the middle-rear movable body 40f8 as an example, two light-shielding plates 51b that move together with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 are attached to the upper right position and the lower right position of the middle-rear movable body 40f8. If one of the light-shielding plates 51b blocks the light of the origin position photosensor 51c, the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is at the origin position, and the other light-shielding plate 51b blocks the light of the movable position photosensor 51d. For example, it is assumed that the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is in the movable position.

FIG. 275 is a diagram showing a state in which each movable body is in the origin position, but only the middle front left movable body 40f6 is in the movable position.
If the game is normal, there is no state in which only the middle front left movable body 40f6 can move, but if something goes wrong (for example, when the rotation mechanism is unlocked), the middle front left movable body Only 40f6 may be movable. When such an abnormal state occurs, there is a possibility that the first correction process and the second correction process described later will be executed.

FIG. 276 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position.
When the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6 and the middle front upper The movable body 40f7 moves toward the center of the middle-rear movable body 40f8 (moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42), and is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction.

Specifically, the three arms 51a are gathered in the center, and the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is rotated 240 degrees clockwise from the origin position.
Then, such an effect can be executed, for example, at the final stage of the variable display effect at the time of winning (when the so-called deciding object operation is executed).

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position.
In this figure, only the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are extracted and shown.
The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are arranged so as to overlap the middle front upper movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 278 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are in the movable position.
In this figure, only the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are extracted and shown. The middle / rear movable body 40f8 is at the origin position.
The middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 are arranged inside the middle front movable body 40f8.

The three arms 51a are connected to a motor for moving each movable body via a mechanical mechanism such as a link mechanism or a cam mechanism.
Then, when each motor moves, the three arms 51a operate via a mechanical mechanism, and the middle front right movable body 40f5 and the middle front left movable body arranged at the tips of the three arms 51a are moved. The 40f6 and the middle-front upper movable body 40f7 move toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

Specifically, the middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i is arranged in the upper left of the figure, and when the middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i is moved, the arm 51a arranged in the upper left of the figure is moved. , The middle front left movable body 40f6 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.
Further, a middle-front upper movable body elevating motor 57j is arranged in the upper right of the figure, and when the middle-front upper movable body elevating motor 57j is moved, the arm 51a arranged in the upper right of the figure is moved, and the middle front is moved. The upper movable body 40f7 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.
Further, a center front right movable body elevating motor 57h is arranged in the lower part of the middle of the figure, and when the middle front right movable body elevating motor 57h is moved, the arm 51a arranged in the lower part of the figure is moved, and the middle front is moved. The right movable body 40f5 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

Further, in this state, when the motor that rotates the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 is moved, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f6. The movable body 40f7 rotates.

FIG. 279 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position.
In this figure, only the rear part (back box part) of the game board unit 8 is shown.
When the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are at the origin position, the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the left movable body 40f3, and The right movable body 40f4 is visible, but the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are almost invisible.

An upper movable body elevating motor 57a is arranged in the upper right of the drawing, and when the upper movable body elevating motor 57a is moved, the upper movable body 40f1 moves toward the center of the liquid crystal display.

FIG. 280 is a diagram showing how the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position.
In this figure, only the rear part (back box part) of the game board unit 8 is shown.
When the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7 and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are in the movable position, the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the left movable body 40f3, and The right movable body 40f4 is visible, and in addition, the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, and the middle front upper movable body 40f7 also move near the center of the middle rear movable body 40f8. , Become visible.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing how the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position.
Specifically, the upper movable body 40f1 has moved from the origin position to the movable position, and the lower movable body 40f2 has moved from the origin position to the movable position.

As described above, when the upper movable body 40f1 moves, only the central portion descends and moves while deforming so as to bend in a V shape, and the lower movable body 40f2 moves upward from the origin position without being deformed. It can move to the movable position of.

The upper movable body 40f1 is composed of a vertical movable body 52a in a central portion, a left arm 52b extending in the left direction from the vertical movable body 52a, and a right arm 52c extending in the right direction from the vertical movable body 52a.

When the vertically movable body 52a is in the origin position, the left arm 52b and the right arm 52c are arranged horizontally without tilting, and when the vertically movable body 52a moves to the movable position, the left arm 52b and the right arm 52c move up and down. By being pulled by the movable body 52a, they are arranged so as to be inclined toward the vertically movable body 52a.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing how the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position.
In this figure, only the rear part (back box part) of the game board unit 8 is shown.
Insertion pins 52d are arranged at the left end of the left arm 52b and the right end of the right arm 52c, respectively, and the insertion pins 52d are inserted into the guide grooves 52e of the structure arranged at the rear.

As a result, the left end portion of the left arm 52b and the right end portion of the right arm 52c are not only simply tilted but also movable in the left-right direction within the length of the guide groove 52e.
Therefore, when the vertically movable body 52a moves to the movable position, the left arm 52b and the right arm 52c tilt toward the vertically movable body 52a while moving toward the center.

When the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position, the display area of the liquid crystal display is narrowed as compared with the case where the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the origin position. As a result, various effects can be executed while attracting the attention of the player.

283 and 284 are views showing the details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 283 (A), the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, it is a state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 283 (B), the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 283 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for the specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is the slide for the specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the left side by the member 31c, and the traveling direction is changed to the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 284 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 284 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 284 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 285 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers depending on a display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs) (memory number display means). ). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a displays one storage number by, for example, a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or turning on one lamp (LED) (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned off, the number of stored items is 0, and in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the occurrence of the entry is memorized. Every time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering (up to 4), the display mode is changed by 1 each. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a shifts to the display mode after the increase in the sense that when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the winning ball is memorized. When the special symbol changes (up to one) and the special symbol starts to change when the ball enters, the display mode changes to the reduced display mode. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start fluctuating (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a has not yet started to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. It represents the number of times the ball has not entered.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 286 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 includes a RAM clear switch 304 used for initializing the RAM 76, an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and peripheral ICs such as a counter / timer circuit (CTC). Are equipped, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300 and a setting key switch 302. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for changing the setting, and for example, the setting can be changed by the following procedure.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting is changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages. Further, the set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 140.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 140, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Details of setting change]
The details of the setting change are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is being changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. LED. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off, the game is ready for play. Transition.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used is described, but the setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Details of setting confirmation]
The details of the setting confirmation (see setting) are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation mode).
Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being confirmed, the main display is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and a set value such as "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the setting is terminated, and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning openings on the left side are installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 pass through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 140 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and indicates the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by a number (the number of game balls detected by the out switch 141). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 140 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 140 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 140 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 140 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 140 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, and movable motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls the output from the speakers 54, 55, 56. The internal configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to another figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 and jog dial 45a, a volume adjustment switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136, and when the player operates these operating members, their contact signals are sub-connected. It is input to the effect control device 124 through the substrate 136. Although an example in which each operation member is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, each operation member may be connected to the saucer illumination board when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 58 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). In this embodiment, 11 motors are installed as movable body motors 57 (57a to 57k). The 11 motors are shown in the range that can be illustrated, but the motors installed in the invisible portion are shown in the list of FIG. 360. The movable body sensor 58 is, for example, a photosensor provided at the origin position (first position), the movable position (appearance position), or the like of the movable body 40f, and is a movable body 40f (or a shading plate attached to the movable body 40f). Is detected, a detection signal is output. In the present embodiment, a plurality of motors are provided as the movable body motor 57, and a plurality of sensors are provided as the movable body sensor 58. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 287 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

By the way, by controlling the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, the operation of devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56 is finally performed. Is controlled. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the pachinko machine 1 uses each device for effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body operation). Etc.) is realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used. The tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, the input control unit 228, and the time management unit. It is shown as (ACT) 230 and the like. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operator, and the time management unit (ACT) 230 that manages the time progress of the effect controls the flow of the entire effect. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operators according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190, a VDP 152 (effect display control board) for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, an audio IC 134, an LED driver 198, and an SMC. (Serial control controller) 199 and driver IC 132 are equipped.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when developing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads out the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 and one chip like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, or a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded audio to various speakers via an amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (may be a larger number of channels) is realized. Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of various speakers based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with the execution of the effects of various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the motor that is the drive source of various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and relays the detection signal output by the sensor for the movable body to control the movable body. Hand over to department 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps and movable motors to manage their operation. By doing so, it is possible to realize a directing reproduction using a lamp or a movable body. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 of the above is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

288 and 289 are flowcharts showing an example of the first procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to an input signal from a RAM clear switch (not shown), and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 289 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 293), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 293). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the reset start process. Note that duplicate description will be omitted for the same processing as in the first procedure example of the reset start processing. Further, the process of FIG. 289 is the same in the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process is different from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that the preparatory process (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, if it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the process under preparation (Step S112a) is executed.
The execution timing of the preparatory process (step S112a) is not limited to such a timing, and can be executed at any timing in the reset start process. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, it suffices to be controlled so as to shift from "preparing" to "playable state (shifted to the main loop)".

Step S112a: In the preparatory process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. The details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the preparatory process (step S112a) is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process in preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes the preparing operation control process. Details of the operation control process during preparation will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 290). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch is being operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the preparatory operation control process in step S125 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Preparing operation control process]
The details of the operation contents of the operation control process during preparation are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute the process of adopting at least one state and operation among the following states and operation contents in the preparation operation control process.

(1) During preparation, the state shifts when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During the preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. If the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the game shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (movable body connected to the main control device 70) managed by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is movably controlled, and whether or not the movable body operates normally. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside the special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a probability variation area or a specific area, a rotating body that constantly rotates in the case of a two-type system, and a specified trigger. The movable body that can be moved by the above, the mechanism, solenoid, motor, etc. associated with these, and the ordinary electric accessory (electric tulip) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movable control is executed, for example, by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movable pattern in which "0.4 seconds ON → 0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated a plurality of times.
The movable control may be continuously executed from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed up to a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clear from the outside that preparation is in progress. In this case, for example, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "finished when the RAM clear switch is pressed", "change the effect setting by pressing the effect button", etc. can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display. it can. In this case, the audio output such as "Preparing" may be repeatedly executed at the same time.

(4) During preparation, the setting related to the effect may be changed by operating the effect button. For example, when the effect switching button (effect button) is pressed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display is switched, and the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 steps), effect frequency setting (1 to 3 steps), effect type setting, etc. are selected. Can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the launch control of the game ball may be disabled. This is because the launch control board 108 can launch the game ball on condition that the “launch permission signal” is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the payout control device 92. The main control device 70 can perform a process of transmitting a "launch permission signal" in the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" is being performed during preparation. Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for the process being prepared (the program for operating various movable bodies) can be implemented (arranged) in the used area. The used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation may be made may be output to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.).

(8) The preparation is in the stage before shifting to the main loop (before the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) is executed). Therefore, during the preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Further, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine an error that can be determined during the playable state (for example, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls, the fluctuation of special symbols, and the fluctuation of ordinary symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is finished, a command indicating "preparing finished" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, a command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before shifting to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, the RAM clear process is not executed, and the RAM clear process can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during the preparation. However, after executing the RAM clear process, the transition may be made during preparation, and then the transition to the main loop may be performed.

The background to adopting such a configuration has the following problems.
In conventional gaming machines, the operation of special electric and ordinary electric pachinko machines cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may be discovered.

Then, by adopting the above configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the various electric accessories can operate when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the problem that the various electric accessories do not operate during the game and to play the game normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.
(3) Since the problem can be solved in advance (before the game), the process of confirming the problem during the game can be eliminated, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load on the control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during the preparation (operation check), it is possible to provide an efficient game.

The following technical contents can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while the predetermined operating member (RAM clear switch), the movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operating member are being operated. It is a gaming machine provided with a movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a constant motion pattern in order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of the above (1), it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant operation pattern until the predetermined operating member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 292 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 288).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S204a: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when the set value is changed or a setting confirmation process executed when the set value is confirmed. (Setting-related processing execution means). It should be noted that this process can be prevented from being executed when the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed (when the game is in the normal game state). Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to calculate the base and execute the process of displaying the calculated base on the performance display monitor 200. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the outswitch) (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means).

When the setting change process (setting-related process) is actually executed in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a "setting-related end designation command" as a subcommand. The "setting-related end specification command" can include information that the setting-related processing (processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation) has been completed and information on the setting value. The generated "setting-related end designation command" is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 of the number of prize balls based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) and normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 determines various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 293). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 293).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 294). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol random number. Can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, each random number of the first special symbol is not stored any more. Similarly, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is not stored any more. The reason why there are five sections is that a total number of sections is required, which is the sum of the maximum storage number (4) of the first special symbol and the maximum storage number (1) of the second special symbol. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 294). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 293).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fifth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fifth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 294).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 294). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 294). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 295), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 293) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 295) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 295) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 295) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and these are transferred to the random number storage area. Random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The memory method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 295) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 294).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 295, step S46 in FIG. 296) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 295) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 296). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 295) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 296). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 295) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 296). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 295) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 296).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 293) will be described. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 10-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as "10 rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 10-round jackpot. In addition to the 10-round jackpot, other jackpots may be provided as the type of jackpot.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 293). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means, advantageous state transition means). ). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). A gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10 round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "10 round big hits 1 to 4" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and "10 round big hits 5 and 6" are stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the hit game. When the big hit is executed by "10 round big hits 5 and 6" (when the big hit is executed via the small hit), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first round in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 operates.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of the "second winning symbol". Further, "10 round jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of the "third winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 4" corresponds to the jackpot of the "fourth winning symbol". Furthermore, "10 round big hit 5" corresponds to a small hit of "5th winning symbol" (big hit when passing through a specific area 31x), and "10 round big hit 6" corresponds to a small hit of "6th winning symbol" (specific area). It corresponds to the big hit when passing 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of prizes (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first prize opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[Second Winning Symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Third winning symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. ..

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 293). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read out in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (winning order digestion). It should be noted that the control of priority digestion that prioritizes the digestion of the second special symbol may be used instead of the control of the winning order digestion for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 293), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 299), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest storage corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, when the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target special symbol this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target special symbol this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 299).

[See Fig. 299: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. In the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (= approximately 1/1), and it corresponds to a loss. It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to the loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Further, the main control CPU 72 has a second special symbol lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) that is less likely to occur than the first special symbol lottery opportunity (first lottery opportunity) in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). When the occurrence occurs, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 293).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, and the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is "third winning symbol" or "fourth winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 301 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "52" and "48" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (= 52%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. It is 48 minutes (= 48%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 1 (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value and may be 2 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means time when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 10. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 302 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" and the "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. It is 50 minutes (= 50%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

[See Fig. 299: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means, advantageous state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the time is more advantageous than the non-time reduction state (first state). It is possible to shift to the shortened state (second state) (advantageous state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "5th winning symbol" and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol A", "fifth winning symbol B", "fifth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 303 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "50" and "50" are when the denominator is 100. Corresponds to the ratio of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol". Is 50/100 (= 50%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "sixth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol", "3rd winning symbol" or "5th winning symbol" is applicable (the 5th winning symbol is limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time. It can be assumed that the transition condition to the shortened state is satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Fig. 299: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 298: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 299). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100a: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. It is preferable that this process is executed only once during the stop display time of the special symbol. Further, when the changing flag is set to ON while the special symbol is changing, the main control CPU 72 can set the symbol changing flag to OFF in this process.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 298) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if both the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 causes the first special symbol. It is possible to send a special variation number designation command that reflects the value of the special variation number of the second special symbol and the special variation number of the second special symbol to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cutting counter value (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) regarding the time reduction state is adopted. (Time reduction number of times) is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 10 times), and the second number cut counter value (time reduction number of times of the second special symbol) related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 1 time). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the first count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-of-times cutting counter values (first number-of-times cutting counter value or second number-of-times cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once or 10 times). When the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced 9 times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once in the time-reduced state. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

FIG. 305 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 makes it possible to select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the gaming state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the variation pattern selected may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other fluctuation pattern tables. The "game state" in the figure indicates the game state (game state of the transition destination) after the end of the big hit game. However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state before the start of the big hit game (the game state before the transition).

The variation pattern table A is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. This table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B is that the fluctuation pattern table B is a table that is selected within the specified number of fluctuations (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) after the time reduction state ends. is there. The variation pattern table B is a so-called immediate stop prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "time reduction available (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuates from 1 to 4, 6 to 9 when the symbol with time reduction in the normal state is won (when the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol" is won). Be selected. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, 1-second fluctuation) is set for the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 120-second fluctuation) is set for the second special symbol. Is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the gaming state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the time saving state. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (1 time remaining = when the second special symbol fluctuates by one variation after the end of the time reduction state). In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table B.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with a time reduction in the normal state is won. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
Here, the “time reduction number” in the figure indicates a value to be set in the first number cut counter value (the total time reduction number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 308).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5" or "10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 307 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
In this embodiment, since a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the second number cut counter value (the time reduction number of only the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 309).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 309 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.
As in FIG. 307, in the present embodiment, a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, so that there is no special change table after the second change.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) (For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (variation time determining means). ..

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). It is possible to make the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (for example, less than 120 seconds) in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). Fluctuation time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) should be made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) The fluctuation time can be determined so that the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state). Time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). The fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) is made to be relatively longer than the fluctuation time (variation pattern table C) of the first special symbol when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. The fluctuation time can be determined (variation time determination means).

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 293) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 manages the launch position by the launch position designation flag (0 = left strike state, 1 = right strike state) indicating whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state, and specifies the launch position at an arbitrary timing. A launch position specification command including the contents of the flag can be transmitted to the effect control device. Here, when the right-handed notification lamp is connected to the effect control device, the effect control device can control the lighting mode of the right-handed notification lamp based on the firing position designation command. The non-time reduction state is a left-handed state, and the time reduction state is a right-handed state. During the big hit game and the small hit game, the player is basically right-handed, but may be left-handed during each ending time (during the end time).

The time shortened state can be ended at the end of the fluctuation (at the start of the stop display time) of the final fluctuation (missing fluctuation, small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation) in the time shortened state. In this case, the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time shortened state can be set to a time (15.0 seconds) longer than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) other than the final fluctuation. The time reduction state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 314 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[4th winning symbol]
When the fourth winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 313: Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of corresponding to the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 312).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 316 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[Refer to Fig. 315: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 312).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 311).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a small hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a small hit is transmitted only once during the small hit.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 315)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 315)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 311). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 317). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 318).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 318).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time reduction state transition means, time reduction). Function operating means, advantageous state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the time is more advantageous than the non-time reduction state (first state). It is possible to shift to the shortened state (second state) (advantageous state transition means).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 309.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second prize opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 318).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 321 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (the same applies to the 6th winning symbol below). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain nine rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 9). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 6th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a big hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a big hit is transmitted only once during the big hit.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 313) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 320)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 313) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 320)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 311). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 317). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening closing process. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 311). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 315). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 311). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501a: The main control CPU 72 executes the end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5501b: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time (ending time) has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 311).

After that, when the value of the end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes the processes after step S5502.
Regarding the end time, different times may be set for the big hit and the small hit.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 299) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 320.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "1" is set as the initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG. 320.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 298) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)] FIG. 325 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] If a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode. [F9] The animal mode is a "non-time reduction state". The variation pattern of the [F9] animal mode may be different from that of the [F1] normal mode, or may be the same as that of the [F1] normal mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)] FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortened state. [F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F15] fourth winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F20] a drive in a non-time shortened state. Move to mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F20] shifts to the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.

[Game Flow (Part 3)] FIG. 327 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. [F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol Fluctuates.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F15] fourth winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F9] animal mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the time is shortened (consecutive villa state), the fluctuation of one time reduction of the second special symbol and one memory of the second special symbol are totaled by 2. You can get the chance of hitting (big hit or small hit). Then, if one of the two opportunities is won with a winning symbol with a time reduction, the game will return to the time shortened state (consecutive villa state) again.

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 328 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the animal mode.
[F9] If the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during the game in the animal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] In the first special symbol lottery, it becomes "missing", and when such "missing" continues a specified number of times (for example, when 15 fluctuations are executed), [F20] specified fluctuation progress occurs, and [F1] Shift to normal mode. If a "big hit" is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the flow is the same as the game flow of FIG. 325.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and also “ It has little visual impact as a "winning symbol". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect using the liquid crystal display 42 are performed.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays an effect symbol, markers M1, markers M2, fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, a background image corresponding to the stay mode, an image related to the advance notice effect, and the like.

The effect symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are arranged left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Is displayed. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

FIGS. 329 and 330 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 329 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a row of three effect symbols is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (with reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. These markers M1 and M2 display the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) corresponding to the respective display numbers. It is represented, and the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game. Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0. Since the maximum number of working memories of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is lit at the maximum.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 329 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the effect symbol scrolls to start the variation display effect (symbol effect execution means). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 329 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol of the effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 329 (B) above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the position is located on the leftmost side in conjunction with this. The number of displayed markers M1 has been reduced by one. That is, up to that time, there were a total of four working memory numbers of the marker M1, but the marker M1, which is the earliest (oldest) memory number display, is hidden, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is combined. Be told. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach the working memory in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the example of FIG. 329 (C), since the working memory at the head in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three are, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are one by one. The effect is to shift in the direction (here, to the left). As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the production, and to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 330 (D): Next, as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 330 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol. In this case, since the combination of the effect symbols is the deviation of "8"-"1"-"3", it is expressed in the production that this fluctuation corresponds to the normal "outside". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 330 (F): When the operation memory of the first special symbol exists, the next fluctuation is started when the stop display time ends. In this case, the variation display effect is started by scrolling the effect symbol in synchronization with the start of the variation of the first special symbol. When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the number of displayed markers M1 located on the leftmost side is reduced by one in conjunction with the change. Then, such a variable display effect and a stop display effect are repeatedly executed.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIGS. 331 to 333 are continuous views showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, after the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is an aspect of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol". (For example, 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed ( Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 331 (A): The variation display effect is started by scrolling the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the start of variation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 331 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed on the liquid crystal display 42. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The picture image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes may be used). The "pre-reach notice" is a production that announces the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 331 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 331 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display effect is being continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 332 (D): When the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, the left effect symbol of the effect symbol stops fluctuating. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "7" is stopped as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 332 (E): Then, the right effect symbol of the effect symbol stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "7" is stopped as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol. As a result, in the effect symbol, the reach state of "7"-"changing"-"7" is generated. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time. After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning or losing is executed.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 332 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, images representing a "heart" figure form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. Will be done. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 333 (G): Following the notice effect after the reach occurs, a "ghost of a pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen. "Appears, and the characters" VS "appear in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 333 (H): At the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" punches innumerably, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss.

[Stop display production (production at the time of winning)]
In FIG. 333 (I): When the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small together with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a big hit. Then, the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol stops fluctuating substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "7" is stopped as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a big hit (for example, a red display color).

At the time of non-winning (at the time of loss), "Pumpkin ghost" is displayed large and "Male character" is displayed small along with the characters "Defeat ...". In this case, the effect symbol representing a number other than the number "7" is stopped as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol.

[Direction during a major role]
334 and 335 are continuous views that partially show an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 334 (A): When the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the big hit game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 334 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, 10 circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining 9 ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 10 rounds, the current round is the first of the 10 rounds, and each round in which a ball can be obtained is marked with a circle. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

[10th round]
In FIG. 334 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the 10th round are completed.

Here, if it corresponds to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, or if there is a memory of the second special symbol even if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, as shown in the figure. , A fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to drive mode) is executed in which fireworks are launched. In addition, if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, or if there is no memory of the second special symbol, the fireworks effect is not executed. Fireworks production can be performed in any round.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 335 (D): When shifting to the time shortened state, an effect of displaying character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 335 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving medium effect] In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time saving state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) that displays the background image corresponding to the time saving state (advantageous game state) is performed. Will be executed.

[Right-handed suggestion effect] In addition, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed at the upper part of the screen. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect] Further, at the lower left of the screen, the remaining number display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 2 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the drive mode in the time shortened state or the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
336 to 338 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 336 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the production symbols is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 336 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (marker M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation of the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 is also started. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 336 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the detached mode, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 are also stopped and displayed in the detached mode. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining two times.

In FIG. 337 (D): Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the order of winning, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested after that. Then, when the digestion of the remaining memory of the first special symbol is completed, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started accordingly. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 337 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the effect symbol (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") and the fourth symbol Z2 (displayed in green). The color) is also stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Further, for example, the player executes a right-handed strike while the second special symbol is fluctuating, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball is opened to the right start winning opening. It is assumed that the ball has entered 28b. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

In FIG. 337 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be inserted into the second variable winning device 31. After that, the effect symbol can be displayed small at the lower right of the display screen.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 338 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 338 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, the ball is substantially obtained for 9 rounds (10 rounds of balls including the small hit game). can do. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

339 and 340 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state, in which the big hit game is executed corresponding to the big hit of the "4th winning symbol" or the small hit of the "6th winning symbol", and the first 2 This is the case where the memory of the special symbol is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining one time" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of variation of special symbol] In FIG. 339 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 also change accordingly. To start.

[Continuing the variable display effect] In FIG. 339 (B): The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. In addition, the production symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 will continue to change. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability that the variable start winning device 28 will be open for a long time is low even if the start gate 20 is passed. Therefore, basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates at most once.

[Stop display effect] In FIG. 339 (C): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the effect symbol (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) are also small hit. It is stopped and displayed in the mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed. After that, the effect symbol can be displayed small at the lower right of the display screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining.

[Start of small hit, opening of second big winning opening] In Fig. 340 (D): And when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened and the car on which the female character is riding is The effect of increasing the speed and moving to the right side of the screen is executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area] In FIG. 340 (E): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to a small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is the sixth winning symbol. It is assumed that it was. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game] In FIG. 340 (F): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed corresponding to the sixth winning symbol in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the mode shifts to the animal mode after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 341 is a diagram showing an outline of the drive mode. The first effect example shows an effect example when a normal game is performed, and the second effect example shows an effect example when an irregular game is performed.

[Example of the first effect] The state (A) in FIG. 341 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times (a state in which a big hit may occur at least the remaining two times), and is a gaming state of the main control device 70. Is a time-saving state. If the state shown in FIG. 341 (A) corresponds to a time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 341 (A) again after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 341 (A) corresponds to the time saving hit and the second special symbol is memorized, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 341 (B) after the big hit game is completed.

The state (B) in FIG. 341 is a state in which the drive mode is one remaining time (a state in which a big hit may occur at least once remaining), and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state. (Memory digestion section). If the state shown in FIG. 341 (B) corresponds to the time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 341 (A) after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, if the state shown in FIG. 341 (B) corresponds to the time saving hit, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 341 (C) after the end of the big hit game.

The state (C) in FIG. 341 is the animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is the non-time shortened state (immediate stop prevention section). The animal mode ends after a specified number of fluctuations, and then shifts to the normal mode.

[Second production example] The state (D) in FIG. 341 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a time shortening state. If the state shown in FIG. 341 (D) corresponds to the time saving hit and there is no memory of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 341 (E) after the big hit game is completed.

The state (E) in FIG. 341 is an animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and eventually the memory of the first special symbol will be digested.

[Overview of Drive Mode] The drive mode (consecutive villa state) transitions as shown in FIGS. 341 (A) to (C) when a normal game is performed. If the player wins the game with no time reduction in the time reduction state, the game state of the main control device becomes the memory digestion section after the big hit game. At this time, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol is stored, there is a 1/1 probability of a big hit (a big hit or a big hit via a small hit). The upper limit of the memory of the second special symbol is one. Therefore, when the second special symbol is remembered, the drive mode production is continued (it looks like the continuation of the consecutive villas; see (A) to (C) in FIGS. 341).

When a normal game is played, since the memory of the second special symbol is stored at the time of the big hit in the time shortened state, such a state transition occurs, but at the time of no time saving hit in the time shortened state, the second special If there is no memory of the design, the consecutive villas will end there.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gaming state of the main control device is shifted to the animal mode in which the continuous villa is not continued even in the memory digestion section (see (D) and (E) in FIGS. 341). Since the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol at the time of winning is related to the jackpot effect, the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol is determined when the opening command of the small hit or the jackpot is received.

Therefore, if you win without the memory of the second special symbol and the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated during the round of the jackpot game, after shifting to the animal mode, in the memory digestion section, the second I am trying to change the special design.

FIG. 342 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section. The first effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section, but the second special symbol is stored. The second effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section and the second special symbol is not stored.

[Example of first effect] The state (A) in FIG. 342 is a state in which the drive mode is one time remaining, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortening state (memory digestion section). When the first special symbol is displaced in the state of FIG. 342 (A), a reach effect (for example, an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched) is produced as shown in FIG. 342 (B). Is executed, and as shown in FIG. 342 (C), an effect that is finally out of alignment (for example, an effect that fails to launch fireworks) is executed.

[Second production example] The state (D) in FIG. 342 is the animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is the non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and if the player hits the left, the first special symbol will fluctuate.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 342 (E), during the execution of the out-of-order variation of the first special symbol, a special pseudo-variation effect in which the variation is pseudo-executed a plurality of times is executed, and finally, a special pseudo-variation effect is executed. An out-of-order effect is executed. In the special pseudo-variation effect, the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time (variation scale).

When the apparent effect is the animal mode in spite of the memory digestion section, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of several tens of seconds) is set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the player shifts to the drive mode and performs an off-the-shelf effect, the appearance can be consistent, but there is a risk that the player may misunderstand because there is a relationship of "drive mode = during the consecutive villas".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the memory digestion section and the apparent effect is the animal mode, the lottery for executing the content of the variable display effect is switched to change the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop. After repeating the scale, the effect is determined so that it is out of place so that there is no apparent discomfort.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing the difference between the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the memory digestion section and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section.

As shown in FIG. 343 (A), in the variation pattern selection table of the memory digestion section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, the variation pattern of long-term variation is selected as the variation pattern to be selected. May be done. For example, the fluctuation pattern of long-term fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 56.0 seconds.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 343 (B), in the variation pattern selection table of the immediate stop prevention section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, the variation pattern to be selected is the first short-time variation. ~ Third short-term fluctuation pattern may be selected. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20.0 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the second short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the third short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 6.0 seconds.

The deviation variation of the first special symbol, which is the problem this time, is the long-term variation shown in FIG. 343 (A), and this variation is selected in the memory digestion section but not in the immediate stop prevention section. Therefore, when the game state is the memory digestion section and the apparent mode is the animal mode corresponding to the immediate stop prevention section, as described above, in order to match the production, a special pseudo A variable effect is being performed.

FIG. 344 is a diagram showing a flow of the first correction process executed in the normal mode. The first correction process is a process that may be executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is determined.

In FIG. 344 (A): In the normal mode, the upper movable body 40f1 is at the origin position, and the lower movable body 40f2 is also at the origin position.

In FIG. 344 (B): In the normal mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, here, it is assumed that the upper movable body 40f1 has moved from the origin position to the movable position due to some cause (malfunction, malfunction, etc.).

FIG. 344 (C): In this case, in the normal mode, the first correction process is executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (when the fluctuation is confirmed). The first correction process is a process of moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 in the movable position to the origin position when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is in the movable position at the time of determining the fluctuation. .. By executing the first correction process, in the illustrated example, the upper movable body 40f1 is moved from the movable position to the origin position.

FIG. 345 is a diagram showing a flow of the second correction process executed in the animal mode. The second correction process is a process that may be executed after a certain period of time has elapsed after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

In FIG. 345 (A): In the animal mode, the upper movable body 40f1 is in the movable position, and the lower movable body 40f2 is also in the movable position.

In FIG. 345 (B): In the animal mode, the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, here, it is assumed that the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 have moved from the movable position to the origin position due to some cause (malfunction or malfunction, execution of demonstration effect, execution of effect related to game recording, etc.).

In FIG. 345 (C): In this case, in the animal mode, the first correction process is not executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (when the fluctuation is confirmed). Therefore, the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in a state of staying at the origin position.

In FIG. 345 (D): Then, in the animal mode, the second correction process is executed after a certain period of time has elapsed (after the start of fluctuation) from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol. In the second correction process, when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is at the origin position after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 at the origin position is moved to the movable position. It is a process to make it. By executing the second correction process, in the illustrated example, the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are moved from the origin position to the movable position.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the launch direction. The following game flow is the game flow when the consecutive villa state ends in the shortest time. Specifically, in the non-time reduction state, the big hit of the "1st winning type (with time reduction)" is won, and in the time reduction state, the small hit of the "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won, and the non-time reduction is achieved. This is the flow of the game when a small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won in the state. The gaming state progresses in the order of No1 to No13.

[No1] The "gaming state" is the "first special symbol variation", and the "launching direction" is "left-handed". At the start of the game, the first special symbol is changed to aim for a big hit.

[No2] The "game state" is "big hit (first hit, first big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of the "first winning type (with time reduction)" is won.

[No3] The "game state" is the "time reduction state", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". When the gaming state shifts from the non-time shortened state to the time shortened state, the firing direction becomes right-handed.

[No4] The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is digested at high speed.

[No5] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (time reduction state, memory +1)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". During the change of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be stored.

[No6] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (time shortened state end)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". When the game state shifts from the time-shortened state to the non-time-shortened state when the second special symbol is stopped, the firing direction is switched from right-handed to left-handed.

[No7] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No8] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (second big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No9] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (non-time shortened state)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Here, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No10] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No11] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". The launch direction continues to be left-handed.

[No12] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (third big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No13] The "game state" is "the end of a big hit for one set (three times)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". In this case, the mode shifts to the animal mode. In this way, if the winning symbol without time reduction (for example, "sixth winning type (no time reduction)") is applied twice in a row, the consecutive villa state ends.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, memory number display effect, large role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number display effect, etc. Is also controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). Controls device operation (screen display by liquid crystal display 42, audio output by speakers 54, 55, 56, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, etc., operation of various movable bodies by movable body motor 57, etc.) Then, the production reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operating subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor (overall control unit) is referred to as the effect control unit 210, and the effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). ), The "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", or "movable body control unit 226", as appropriate, depending on the device to be controlled. It is referred to as "input control unit 228". In addition, these control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228 that function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Further, the operation main body that manages the time related to the effect reproduction is referred to as "time management unit 230" or "ACT".

As a rough flow of the effect control, first, when the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, a message instructing the reproduction of the effect is sent to a predetermined area in the RAM 130 according to the contents. Output to. The message output by the effect control unit 210 is transmitted by the time management unit 230 to each individual control unit at a predetermined timing. In response to this, each individual control unit gives specific instructions to each device based on the content of the message and controls the operation of each device. As a result of such control, the effect by each device is executed.

The time management unit 230 activates the control table in which the details of the effect contents associated with the message contents are defined at the same time as the message is transmitted to each individual control unit or instead of the message transmission. Is also possible. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control unit 210. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control unit 210 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and system operation processing (step S402a). Step S403), special fluctuation effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410), and others. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received commands and saves them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot end Directing command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, count cut counter command, various error commands, special fluctuation count specification command, big hit opening command, small hit opening command, setting related end specification command, etc. There is.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the effect symbol and the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 displays the effect contents (effect symbol, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, markers M1, M2, production contents related to the important role production, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of determining the content of the advance notice effect) is executed. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control unit 210 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the system operation process, the effect control unit 210 executes processes related to the system operation (initial process, retry process, correction process). The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special variation effect management process, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not to execute the special variation effect based on the special variation number designation command, and if it is determined to execute, what kind of content is there? Executes the process of determining whether to execute the effect during the special fluctuation of. In addition, this processing may be executed in the effect symbol change pre-processing.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 performs an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that fluctuates the effect symbol at high speed) when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected. When the special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, the process of selecting the effect pattern for executing the reach effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control unit 210 first tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. Outputs a message instructing the effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the variable time notice effect number, the background pattern number, etc.). In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the content of the message, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 outputs a message instructing the lamp control unit 224 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the message, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and drives (lights up) various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. Or turn off, blink, change brightness gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends the effect content (for example, during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, and the jackpot effect) to the voice control unit 222, and the sound data. Etc.) is output as an instruction. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the message, and sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) according to the production contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56. Is output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In another process, for example, the effect control unit 210 first outputs a message instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the content of the effect. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 of specific control contents based on the contents of the message. In response to this, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on the instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 eliminates the markers M1 or M2 corresponding to the lottery elements consumed by the internal lottery, and slides the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Select.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 347).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 298) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the effect symbol and the variation display effect using the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (preliminary effect) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content according to the result ( Button effect) is instructed to each individual control unit.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 gives an instruction to each individual control unit in order to control the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. For example, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). When shifting to the animal mode after the jackpot game is completed, the effect control unit 210 can select an operation pattern for moving the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 from the origin position to the movable position. Such an operation pattern may be selected at the end of the jackpot game, or may be selected at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

In the demo production, the production related to the game method and the game explanation (displaying the demo movie) and the production related to the game record (the production that can save the game record using a predetermined code, password, etc.) are executed. At this time, the effect control unit 210 can select an operation pattern for returning to the origin position when the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are in the movable position.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 347) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 347), the content of the demo effect is displayed based on the demo effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number at that time, the variation schedule (variation time) of the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the stop. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state, and finally corresponds to the small hit. The process of selecting the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 in a state where the "drive mode" is continued or a normal mode, for example. Finally, the process of selecting the effect symbol corresponding to the small hit and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable effect pattern number at that time and the variation schedule of the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, as a general rule, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state. , Execute the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time saving and medium effect).

However, as an exception, the effect control unit 210 has a memory of the second special symbol when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. In this case, a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 349), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection]
FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S620: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory digestion section. The memory digestion section is a section for digesting the memory of the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state shifted after the end of the time reduction state. The memory digestion section is, for example, the first fluctuation section of the second special symbol and the first to fourth fluctuation sections of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. After the memory digestion section is completed, an immediate stop prevention section for the animal mode is set.

The memory digestion section and the immediate stop prevention section may be managed only by the main control device, may be managed only by the effect control device, or may be managed by both devices. For example, the memory digestion section can be managed by the memory digestion section stay flag. The memory digestion section stay flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, and when the first variation section of the second special symbol ends after the end of the jackpot game, or when the fifth variation section of the first special symbol ends. Set to OFF when starting. On the other hand, the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON at the timing when the memory digestion section stay flag is set from ON to OFF, and the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times is completed while the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON. Set to OFF at the time.

When the game is played normally (when the right-handed striking is continued in the time shortened state), the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the memory digestion section, but when the game is not played normally (when the game is not performed normally). If the time is shortened and the right-handed stroke is not continued), the memory of the first special symbol may be digested in the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S621, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), The effect control unit 210 executes step S625.

Step S621: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the change this time is a change of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S622 and confirms that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. If it cannot be done (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S625.

Step S622: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S623, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S624.

Step S623: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a special pseudo-variation effect. The special pseudo-variation effect is an effect in which the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time.

Step S624: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a reach-out effect. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched, and finally selects an effect that fails to launch the fireworks.

Step S625: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an out-of-effect effect according to the stay mode and the fluctuation pattern. The effect control unit 210 may, for example, select a mere off-effect effect, or execute a reach effect to select an out-of-effect effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 350).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S630: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game state is the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S634, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current game state is the time shortened state (No). ), The effect control unit 210 executes step S631.

Step S631: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S632, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), The effect control unit 210 executes step S633.

Step S632: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S635, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S634.

Step S633: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation is within the specified number of times (for example, within 15 times) after the big hit game.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S635 and cannot confirm that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game. (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S636.

Step S634: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image for the drive mode.

Step S635: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image for the animal mode.

Step S636: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image for the normal mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 350).

By executing such a process, if the effect control unit 210 has a memory of the second special symbol (if the memory state of the lottery element is a special state), the effect control unit 210 is in a non-time shortened state (normal state). It is possible to execute a drive mode effect (common effect) having common contents in the time saving state (advantageous state) (effect execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 is in a non-time shortened state (normal state) if there is no memory of the second special symbol (unless the memory state of the lottery element is a special state). ) And the time reduction state (advantageous state), it is possible to execute a drive mode effect (non-common effect) and an animal mode effect (non-common effect) with different contents (effect execution means).

[Processing during effect symbol stop display] FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S656.

Step S652: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-cut counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final fluctuation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control unit 210 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control unit 210 performs step S666. Execute.

Step S654: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the effect control unit 210 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control unit 210 Executes step S658.

Step S658: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. (No), that is, when the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control unit 210 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 has a pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value of is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ).

Step S662: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control unit 210 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 349).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control unit 210 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 instructs each individual control unit of the effect content corresponding to the selected effect pattern. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 wins, for example, various effect images corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit stored in the CGROM 190 in advance as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 for the VDP 152. Instruct to read according to the design.

Step S804: The effect control unit 210 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game and an effect pattern suggesting right-handed hitting, and the game ball is played during the small hit game. When passing through the specific area 31x, the effect pattern at the time of passing through the specific area is selected, and the effect contents corresponding to these effect patterns are instructed to each individual control unit. In response to this, for example, the display control unit 220 reads out from the VDP 152 an effect image showing how the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and an effect image suggesting right-handed strike at the start of the small hit game. In addition, when passing through a specific area, a female character in a car is instructed to read out a production image showing a state in which a heart mark with the letter V is drawn.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 349).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of big hit]
FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process when the jackpot variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a big hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit has been received (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S811, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit has been received (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the process when the variable winning device is operated (FIG. 354).

Step S811: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S812, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S814.

Step S812: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is a winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current jackpot is the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S814, and the current jackpot shifts to the time shortened state. If it cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S813.

Step S813: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the first selection table. The jackpot effect included in the first selection table is a jackpot effect that does not include a fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to the drive mode).

Step S814: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the second selection table. The jackpot effect included in the second selection table is a jackpot effect including a fireworks effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 350).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated for small hits]
FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device for small hits is activated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S820: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a small hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of a small hit has been received (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S821, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of a small hit has been received (No), The effect control unit 210 returns to the process when the variable winning device is operated (FIG. 354).

Step S821: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the second special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S822, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, When it is confirmed that the second special symbol is stored, the effect control unit 210 executes step S824.

Step S822: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the small hit this time is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current small hit is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S824, and the current small hit shifts to the time shortened state. If it cannot be confirmed that the symbol is a winning symbol that leads to a big hit (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S823.

Step S823: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the third selection table. The small hit effect included in the third selection table is a small hit effect that does not include an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.

Step S824: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the fourth selection table. The small hit effect included in the fourth selection table is a small hit effect including an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 350).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing] FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect is produced. The control unit 210 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the remaining time reduction number. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and displays an effect pattern in which the value obtained by adding "1" to the second count cut counter value is displayed as the remaining number of times. Executes the selected process. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 2 times" or "remaining 1 time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control unit 210 executes a right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control unit 210 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, when the effect control unit 210 needs to execute the right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened (particularly). , 5th variation or 10th variation of the first special symbol), a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed.

Step S856: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 347).

Step S858: The effect control unit 210 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 347).

[System operation processing] FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the system operation processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S902: The effect control unit 210 executes the initial processing. The initial processing can be executed only once when the power is turned on. The effect control unit 210 operates all the movable bodies in the initial process, and confirms whether or not each movable body operates normally.

Sensors are arranged at the origin position and the movable position on all movable bodies. The effect control unit 210 moves the movable body from the origin position to the movable position after detecting the predetermined movable body with the sensor at the origin position, and after detecting with the sensor at the movable position, moves the movable body from the movable position to the origin position. If it can be moved and finally detected by the sensor at the origin position, it can be determined that the movable body operates normally. Depending on the movable body, another sensor may be arranged at a position between the origin position and the movable position, or the sensor may be arranged only at the origin position or only at the movable position.

Step S904: The effect control unit 210 executes the retry process. The retry process can be executed after the movement of the movable body. For example, when the operation of moving a predetermined movable body to the movable position is executed, the operation of returning the movable body to the origin position is executed after that, but when the movable body is returned to the origin position, the movable body is movable by the sensor at the origin position. If the body cannot be detected, a retry operation is performed to move the movable body again. In the retry process, the effect control unit 210 moves the target movable body again when the movable body has not returned to the correct position, and confirms whether or not the movable body has returned to the correct position.

Step S906: The effect control unit 210 executes the correction process. The correction process is executed when a specified opportunity occurs. In the correction process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of moving the target movable body and moving it to the correct position when the movable body is not in the correct position.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 347).

[Correction processing] FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the correction processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S910: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is at the time when the fluctuation is confirmed. Whether or not the fluctuation is confirmed can be the period from the reception of the symbol stop command to the reception of the stop display time end command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current gaming state is at the time of determining the fluctuation (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S911, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current gaming state is at the time of determining the fluctuation (No). ), The effect control unit 210 executes step S912.

Step S9111: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current mode is the animal mode. Whether or not it is in the animal mode can be confirmed by whether or not the background image for the animal mode is selected.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S914, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (No), the effect control Unit 210 executes step S915.

Step S912: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is in a state after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, after 45 frames (1.5 seconds) have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation). Whether or not the state is in a state after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation can be confirmed by counting (timekeeping) the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current gaming state is the state after a certain time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S913, and the current gaming state has elapsed a certain time after the start of the fluctuation. If it cannot be confirmed that the state is later (No), the effect control unit 210 returns to the system operation process (FIG. 358).

Step S913: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the current mode is the animal mode. Whether or not it is in the animal mode can be confirmed by whether or not the background image for the animal mode is selected.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S916, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current mode is the animal mode (No), the effect control The unit 210 returns to the system operation process (FIG. 358).

Step S914: The effect control unit 210 executes the first correction process based on the first correction table in which the operation of some movable bodies is restricted. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 limits the operation of "No. 1 to No. 3" of the first correction table to be described later, that is, the first correction table, that is, "No. 1 to No. 3" of the first correction table. The first correction process is executed based on the first correction table that does not execute the operation of ".3" (ignores) and executes only the operations of "No. 4 to No. 7" of the first correction table.

Step S915: The effect control unit 210 executes the first correction process based on the first correction table. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes the first correction process based on the first correction table capable of executing the operations of "No. 1 to No. 7" of the first correction table described later.

When executing the first correction process, the effect control unit 210 transmits a message for the first correction process (first correction message) to the movable body control unit 226, and the movable body control unit 226 sends the received message to the received message. The position of the movable body is corrected based on this.

Step S916: The effect control unit 210 executes the second correction process based on the second correction table. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes the second correction process based on the second correction table capable of executing the operations of "No. 1 to No. 3" of the second correction table described later.

When executing the second correction process, the effect control unit 210 transmits a message for the second correction process (second correction message) to the movable body control unit 226, and the movable body control unit 226 sends the received message to the received message. The position of the movable body is corrected based on this.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the system operation processing (FIG. 358).

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 sets the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 in advance at a predetermined position or a specific position based on the signal from the photo sensor (detection result of the detecting means). The upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is the origin by executing the judgment process (judgment process referring to the first correction table or the second correction table) as to whether or not the body is arranged at the specified specified position (correct position). When it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the position or the movable position, the first movement process or the second movement process using the first correction table is performed as the movement process for moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the origin position or the movable position. The second movement process using the correction table can be executed (movable body control means).

The first movement process includes all movable bodies or movable bodies other than specific movable bodies (left movable body 40f3, right movable body 40f4, middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, and middle front upper movable body. This is a process in which the body 40f7 and the middle / rear movable body 40f8) can be moved to the first position (position A, initial position). The second movement process is a process in which a specific movable body (upper movable body 40f1 or lower movable body 40f2) among the plurality of movable bodies can be moved to the second position (position B, movable position).

Further, the effect control unit 210 can execute the first movement process or the second movement process based on different determination triggers from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the stop display of the special symbol. (Movable body control means). The determination process of whether to execute the first movement process or the second movement process is executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the plurality of times is twice, but it may be three times or more.

Further, by executing such a process, when the effect control unit 210 is in the normal mode (first state), is the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 arranged at the origin position as a determination process? When the first judgment process (judgment process referring to the first correction table) of whether or not is executed and it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the origin position, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is moved upward as a moving process. It is possible to execute the first movement process (movement process using the first correction table) for moving the body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the origin position (movable body control means).

Furthermore, by executing such a process, when the effect control unit 210 is in the animal mode (second state), the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is arranged at the movable position as a determination process. When the second judgment process (judgment process referring to the second correction table) of whether or not is executed is executed and it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the movable position, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is determined as the moving process. It is possible to execute a second movement process (movement process using the second correction table) for moving the movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the movable position (movable body control means).

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 usually performs the period from the start of the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once to the end of the stop display time of the special symbol. The first correction process for moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 to the origin position when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged at the origin position (first position) in the mode (first state). And, when the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is not arranged in the movable position (second position) in the animal mode (second state), the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 is moved to the movable position. The second correction process can be executed (movable body control means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 defines the operation to be executed by each movable body of the plurality of movable bodies in the normal mode (first state) (first correction table (first state)). When the first correction process (first movement process) can be executed based on (1 table) and the animal mode (second state) is set, the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 among the plurality of movable bodies The operation of the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 which can execute the first correction process (first movement process) based on the first correction table whose operation is restricted and whose operation is restricted in the first correction table. The second correction process (second movement process) can be executed based on the second correction table (second table) for the target.

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 moves the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 or the like to a predetermined first position (position A, initial position) according to a predetermined mode. It is possible to execute the possible first correction process (first move process) (first move process execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 moves the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 or the like to a predetermined second position (position B, movable position) according to the specific aspect. It is possible to execute a possible second correction process (second movement process) (second movement process execution means).

By executing such processing, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f is in a predetermined position based on the signal from the photo sensor (detection result of the detecting means). When the determination process is executed and it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f is not in the predetermined position, the correction process (movement process) for moving the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f to the predetermined position can be executed. (Movable body control means).

Further, the effect control unit 210 determines whether or not the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f is in a predetermined position based on the first position or the second position based on the signal from the photo sensor (detection result of the detection means). When it is determined that the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f is not in a predetermined position, the first correction process or the second correction process can be executed based on different judgment triggers (movable body). Control means).

Then, such a judgment process can be executed a plurality of times from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on different judgment triggers. The multiple judgment triggers are two times, one at the start of the fluctuation and the other at the stop of the fluctuation, but may be three or more times.

FIG. 360 is a diagram showing the relationship between the motor and the movable body. The motor in the figure is included in a plurality of motors existing as the movable body motor 57.

[No. 1] The upper movable body elevating motor 57a is a motor for raising and lowering the upper movable body 40f1. The upper movable body 40f1 (specific movable body) moves from the origin position (first position, the position arranged above the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (second position, the center side of the liquid crystal display 42). It is movable up to the position where it is arranged), is in the origin position in the normal mode (first state), and is in the movable position in the animal mode (second state).

[No. 2] The lower movable body elevating motor 57b is a motor for raising and lowering the lower movable body 40f2. The lower movable body 40f2 (specific movable body) moves from the origin position (first position, the position arranged below the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (second position, the center side of the liquid crystal display 42). It is movable up to the position where it is arranged), is in the origin position in the normal mode (first state), and is in the movable position in the animal mode (second state).

[No. 3] The left movable body motor 57c is a motor for moving the left movable body 40f3 in the left-right direction. The left movable body 40f3 is movable from the origin position (the position arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (the position moved to the center side of the liquid crystal display 42) and is the left movable body. It is in the origin position when the effect using 40f3 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the left movable body 40f3 is executed.

[No. 4] The right movable body motor 57d is a motor for moving the right movable body 40f4 in the left-right direction. The right movable body 40f4 is movable from the origin position (the position arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display 42) to the movable position (the position moved to the center side of the liquid crystal display 42) and is the right movable body. It is in the origin position when the effect using 40f4 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the right movable body 40f4 is executed.

[No. 5] The middle front right movable body rotation motor 57e is a motor for rotating the middle front right movable body 40f5. The middle front right movable body 40f5 can rotate while moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42 or in a state of moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

[No. 6] The middle front left movable body rotation motor 57f is a motor for rotating the middle front left movable body 40f6. The middle front left movable body 40f6 can rotate while moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42 or in a state of moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

[No. 7] The middle-front upper movable body rotation motor 57g is a motor for rotating the middle-front upper movable body 40f7. The middle-front upper movable body 40f7 can rotate while moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42 or in a state of moving to the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display 42.

[No. 8] The middle front right movable body elevating motor 57h is a motor for raising and lowering the middle front right movable body 40f5. The middle-front right movable body 40f5 is movable from the origin position (the position where it overlaps with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction) to the movable position (the position where it does not overlap the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction), and the middle front right movable body is movable. It is in the origin position when the effect using the body 40f5 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the middle front right movable body 40f5 is executed.

[No. 9] The middle front left movable body elevating motor 57i is a motor for raising and lowering the middle front left movable body 40f6. The middle-front left movable body 40f6 is movable from the origin position (the position where it overlaps with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction) to the movable position (the position where it does not overlap the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction), and the middle front left movable body is movable. It is in the origin position when the effect using the body 40f6 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the middle front left movable body 40f6 is executed.

[No. 10] The middle-front upper movable body elevating motor 57j is a motor for raising and lowering the middle-front upper movable body 40f7. The middle-front upper movable body 40f7 is movable from the origin position (the position where it overlaps with the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction) to the movable position (the position where it does not overlap the middle-rear movable body 40f8 in the front-rear direction), and is movable in the middle front upper direction. It is in the origin position when the effect using the body 40f7 is not executed, and is in the movable position when the effect using the middle front upper movable body 40f7 is executed.

[No. 11] The middle-rear movable body rotation motor 57k is a motor for rotating the middle-rear movable body 40f8. The middle-rear movable body 40f8 is movable from the origin position to the movable position (a position rotated about 240 degrees from the origin position), and is in the origin position when the effect using the middle-rear movable body 40f8 is not executed. It is in the movable position when the effect using the rear movable body 40f8 is executed.

FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a first correction table to be referred to in the first correction process executed at the time of determining the fluctuation of the present embodiment. This table is referred to in steps S914 and S915 of the correction process (FIG. 359).

[No. 1] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "upper movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "upper movable body correction" is a pattern for moving the upper movable body 40f1 from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 2] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "lower movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "lower movable body correction" is a pattern in which the lower movable body 40f2 is moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 3] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "up and down movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "up and down movable body correction" is a pattern in which the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 4] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "x", the operation pattern of "left and right movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "left and right movable body correction" is a pattern in which the left movable body 40f3 and the right movable body 40f4 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 5] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "x", the operation pattern of "up / down / left / right movable body correction" is selected. The operation pattern of "up / down / left / right movable body correction" is a pattern in which the upper movable body 40f1, the lower movable body 40f2, the left movable body 40f3, and the right movable body 40f4 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 6] The "heart character" is "x", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "heart character correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "heart accessory correction" is a pattern in which the middle front right movable body 40f5, the middle front left movable body 40f6, the middle front upper movable body 40f7, and the middle rear movable body 40f8 are moved from the movable position to the origin position.

[No. 7] The "heart character" is "-", the "upper movable body" is "-", the "lower movable body" is "-", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "-", the operation pattern of "all movable body correction" is selected. The operation patterns of "all movable body correction" are upper movable body 40f1, lower movable body 40f2, left movable body 40f3, right movable body 40f4, middle front right movable body 40f5, middle front left movable body 40f6, middle front upper movable body. This is a pattern for moving the 40f7 and the middle / rear movable body 40f8 from the movable position to the origin position.

[About system operation] As a premise, the system operation includes the operation of initial processing, retry processing, and correction processing, and each operation table is created and each processing is executed. Taking the correction process as an example, as shown in this figure, the operation is switched according to the status of each movable body sensor.

Here, if the sensor at the origin position of each movable body can detect the movable body, the value is "○", and if the sensor at the origin position cannot detect the movable body, the value is "x". In addition, "-" is No. Although it does not correspond to 1 to 6, it indicates a state in which a plurality of movable bodies are "x". In addition, the "heart character" is No. 360 in FIG. It is a movable body of 5 to 11. The case where the "heart character" is "x" means that the No. 360 in FIG. Even one of the movable bodies 5 to 11 is in a state where the movable body cannot be detected by the sensor at the origin position.

Here, No. 1 will be described as an example. No. The state of 1 is a situation in which only the upper movable body 40f1 cannot be detected by the sensor at the origin position. In this case, an operation pattern (upper movable body correction) for correcting (moving to the correct position) the upper movable body 40f1 is selected. When the operation pattern of "upper movable body correction" is selected, the process of moving the upper movable body 40f1 to the origin position is executed.

FIG. 362 is a diagram showing a second correction table to be referred to in the second correction process executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation of the present embodiment. This table is referred to in step S916 of the correction process (FIG. 359).

[No. 1] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "x", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "lower movable body special correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "lower movable body special correction" is a pattern for moving the lower movable body 40f2 from the origin position to the movable position.

[No. 2] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "x", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "upper movable body special correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "upper movable body special correction" is a pattern for moving the upper movable body 40f1 from the origin position to the movable position.

[No. 3] The "heart character" is "○", the "upper movable body" is "○", the "lower movable body" is "○", and the "left movable body" and "right movable body" are. If it is "○", the operation pattern of "upper and lower movable body special correction" is selected. The operation pattern of the "up and down movable body special correction" is a pattern in which the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 are moved from the origin position to the movable position.

Here, No. 1 will be described as an example. No. In the state of 1, only the upper movable body 40f1 cannot be detected by the sensor at the origin position. In addition, No. In the state of 1, the lower movable body 40f2 can be detected by the sensor at the origin position. In the animal mode, it is necessary to move the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 to the movable position. Therefore, here, the operation pattern for correcting the lower movable body 40f2 (moving to the correct position) (lower movable body special correction). Is selected. When the operation pattern of "lower movable body special correction" is selected, the process of moving the lower movable body 40f2 to the movable position is executed.

FIG. 363 is a diagram showing a correction table to be referred to in the correction process executed at the time of determining the fluctuation of the comparative example. [No. 1] to [No. 7] is the same as the operation of the first correction table (FIG. 361). [No. 8] to [No. 14] is [No. 1] to [No. It is the same as the operation of 7], but after that, the operation of "animal mode position formation" is executed.

In the present embodiment, there are two patterns of origin positions of the movable body, and if it is attempted to correspond to these by the correction table of the comparative example, it is necessary to prepare twice the operation patterns. Specifically, it is necessary to further divide the table by additional information called stage information, which increases the number of data and makes it difficult to manage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of data is reduced by providing two execution timings of the correction process (correction operation).

[Realization Means] (A) In the first correction process of the present embodiment, the table shown in FIG. 361 is used. (B) By providing two execution timings of the correction process, it is possible to suppress simply increasing the number of data.

The execution timing of the first first correction process is when the fluctuation is confirmed. As a result, in principle, each movable body can be returned to the normal mode position. Here, the table shown in FIG. 361 is used.

The execution timing of the second second correction process is after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (45 frames after the start of the fluctuation). Only when the change of the animal mode starts, a message for the second correction process (for correction timing 2) is transmitted, and if the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 do not appear at that timing, the upper movable body 40f1 and lower movable body 40f2 are made to appear.

The reason why the execution timing of the second correction process is set to 45 frames after the start of fluctuation (about 1.5 seconds later) is the time for the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 of the present embodiment to return from the movable position to the origin position. Is about 30F (about 1.0 second), and this is to secure a time for preventing the appearance operation during the return operation.

FIG. 364 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern of the countermeasure for immediate termination of the consecutive villa state.
In the figure (A), an example of a transition of a special variation pattern when a game is played without following the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol memory is stored. When the second special symbol became a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol and the time was shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, the launch of the game ball was stopped during the memory digestion of the second special symbol. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "first variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the jackpot game ends is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation (reach effect) dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.

In the figure (B), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is performed according to the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), four special symbol memories are stored. If you save and become a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and shift to the time shortened state at the end of the big hit game, that is, hit left during the memory digestion of the second special symbol and hit the first special symbol When four memories are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are fluctuations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.
By executing the striking method shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate end of the consecutive villa state (the situation where the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 365 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern in consideration of irregular striking.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the firing direction is shown.
For example, if four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit and right-handed is continued in a state of shortening the time after the end of the big hit game, that is, all the memories of the first special symbol are digested and the first 2 When the memory of the special symbol is stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game (the first variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

In the figure (B), an example of the transition of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played without following the firing direction is shown.
For example, when four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit, and the left hit is continued even though the time is shortened after the big hit game is completed, that is, the first hit. When all the memories of the special symbol are digested and the time reduction state ends (punctures) by continuing to accumulate the memory of the first special symbol, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (first time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "sixth to ninth variation", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. .. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "10th variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "11th variation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the eleventh variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. After the end of the time reduction (puncture), the normal state (non-time reduction state, normal mode) is entered.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation game (between the start of the special symbol variation display and the end of the special symbol stop display), the upper movable body 40f1 or the lower movable body 40f2 In order to enable the determination process of whether or not the game is placed in the correct position to be executed a plurality of times, in one special symbol variation game, a specific position (for example, symbol variation) related to a specific mode in the normal state (initial setting). Compared with the method in which the movable body is uniquely arranged and corrected to the non-effect position at the start of the above, and then the arrangement is corrected to the predetermined position according to the predetermined mode in the specific state (animal mode). Not only can it provide a normal game (suppress processing errors), but it also improves the expertise of correction processing according to each different judgment trigger (for example, the beginning and the end of one symbol change). It is possible to reduce the amount of data used in the judgment process when it becomes a judgment trigger within one symbol change (to generalize the judgment process that can respond to the type change of the gaming state). As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(2) According to the present embodiment, between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the end of the stop display of the special symbol, the first correction process (first movement process) or the first correction process (first movement process) or the first based on different judgment triggers. Since each of the two correction processes (second movement process) can be executed, the correction process according to the judgment situation can be efficiently executed.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the contents of the judgment process and the movement process, which are the processes related to the correction process, may be different depending on whether the mode is the normal mode (first state) or the animal mode (second state). Therefore, it is possible to execute a judgment process and a move process according to each state.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the first correction table is a commonly used table regardless of whether it is in the normal mode (first state) or the animal mode (second state). The amount of data can be reduced by standardization.

(5) In the present embodiment, the mode is shifted to the animal mode when the time is not shortened at the time of the first hit or after the time is shortened. In the animal mode, the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 appear, and the upper movable body 40f1 and the lower movable body 40f2 remain appearing across a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol to form a stage.

〔problem〕
When there are a plurality of movable bodies, if all the operation patterns of the system operation (initial processing, correction processing, retry processing) are prepared, the number of movable body data (the number of operation pattern data) increases, which makes management difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, two timings for executing the correction process are provided (when the fluctuation is confirmed and after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation of the animal mode).
Then, in the normal mode, the first correction process is executed by the operation pattern of returning to the origin position (the position of the basic stage), and in the animal mode, the upper movable body is 45 frames after the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the end time of the correction operation. The second correction process is executed according to the operation pattern that causes the lower movable body to appear (the second correction message for forming the movable body layout is transmitted).

As a result, the number of data is reduced, which facilitates management.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the customer waiting demo is entered in the animal mode (when the demo effect is executed), when the effect related to the game record is executed, when the game environment change effect is executed, etc., the upper movable body and the lower movable body Although it is a specification to return the appearance, it is necessary to perform complicated operations such as repeating the appearance and storage of the upper movable body and the lower movable body in order to execute the second correction process after a certain period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation in the animal mode. It disappears.

(6) In the present embodiment, the system operation (initialization correction) related to the position correction of the movable body is standardized to be only one pattern, and the first correction message is transmitted before the start of the symbol variation game to perform the movable body. The system operation (initialization) is performed, the second correction message is transmitted in the early stage of the symbol change, and the movable body can be moved to the operation position according to the effect mode (mode) of the execution base of the symbol change. Then, for the movable body specifications in which the operation position is different according to each mode state, a management process that can set the correction timing as a different trigger (during fluctuation) different from the basic trigger (when the fluctuation is confirmed) is provided to manage the pattern of system operation. It can be reduced.

(7) In the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the command timing of the movable body position correction, one is when the symbol change is confirmed (common specification) and the other is a predetermined trigger after the start of the symbol change (corresponding to each state). ..

(8) In the present embodiment, based on the return process (system operation), the movable body is maintained at the first position (initial position) at the start of the symbol change, and the movable body is moved at a predetermined trigger during the execution of the symbol change. It is moved to the second position (movable position) according to the effect mode (mode state of the execution base of the symbol variation).

(9) In the present embodiment, the determination conditions for transmitting the first correction message and the second correction message (system operation) are not only the conditions when a systematic error occurs, but also "when executing a demo effect or playing a game." Includes the conditions related to "when the production related to recording is executed".

(10) In the present embodiment, the timing of transmitting the second correction message is a predetermined opportunity after the time required from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the processing of the system operation (45 frames of the start of the fluctuation).

(11) In the present embodiment, as the process related to the position control (message) of the movable body (movable accessory), the first process of moving the movable body to the origin position and the movable position according to the gaming state (animal mode) ( A second process for moving to a non-origin position) is provided, and the first process can be executed based on the first trigger (end of fluctuation) related to one game (symbol change), and the second trigger after one game (the end of the change). The second process can be executed based on the start of the symbol change).

(12) In the present embodiment, a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of switchable gaming states (normal mode and animal mode) are provided, and in the case of a predetermined gaming state (normal mode), each operation of the plurality of movable bodies is provided. It is possible to execute the first correction process that controls the position according to (first correction table, first table), and in the case of the specific gaming state (animal mode), the execution regulation of some movable bodies (upper movable body and lower) It is possible to execute the first correction process that controls the position based on the fact that the initialization of the movable body is restricted (first correction table, first table), and the position control for some regulated movable bodies can be performed. The second correction process to be performed can be executed.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

In the above-described embodiment, the first correction process is executed when the fluctuation is confirmed, and the second correction process is executed after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. However, the second correction process is executed when the fluctuation is confirmed and the fluctuation starts. The first correction process may be executed after a certain period of time has elapsed, the first correction process and the second correction process may be executed when the fluctuation is confirmed, and the first correction process and the second correction process may be executed after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. The process may be executed.

Although the present invention has been described with the example of being applied to the correction process, the present invention can also be applied to other processes such as the initial process and the retry process.

The above-described embodiment can also be modified as follows.
(1) The variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol may be different depending on whether or not the first special symbol is stored.
For example, when the first special symbol is stored and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined, a variation pattern selection table capable of selecting a variation pattern for a long time (several tens of seconds to several minutes) is referred to. ..
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined when the first special symbol is not stored, the variation pattern selection table capable of selecting the variation pattern for a short time (several seconds) is referred to.

(2) A state (left-handed state) in which the memory of the first special symbol is accumulated may be generated during the consecutive villas (time reduction state, drive mode).
For example, the ending time of the jackpot is left-handed. That is, from the opening of the jackpot game to the end of the final round, the player is in a right-handed state, and is in a left-handed state only during the ending of the jackpot game.
In addition, during the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation (from the start to the end of the stop display time), the player is in a left-handed state. The time shortening state can be turned off at the start of the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, whereby the non-time reduction state is set during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time.
Furthermore, "Big hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) ≒ Outlier fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) <Small hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 15 seconds, number) About 10 seconds) ”. In this case, since the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation is longer than that of the big hit or the miss, it is possible to secure a long time for the non-time shortened state.

(3) The definitions of "left-handed state" and "right-handed state" can be as follows.
The main controller has an area for storing the left-handed state or the right-handed state (for example, an area for storing the launch position designation flag), and if the stored content is a value (0) indicating left-handed, "left-handed". It is a "state", and if the content of the memory is not a value indicating left-handed, it is a "right-handed state". The "left-handed state" is a non-time shortened state (a state in which electric chew support is not performed) or the ending of a jackpot game. The other state is the "right-handed state".

The main control device transmits a command for transmitting the state of the current launch position to the effect control device depending on whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state. Such a command may send a command indicating the left-handed state at "when the power is turned on" and "when switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state", and the left-handed state is periodically performed during the left-handed state. You may send the command of.

In the left-handed state, the effect control device can turn off the right-handed notification lamp based on a command from the main control device. Further, in the left-handed state, the effect control device can hide the right-handed instruction display displayed on the liquid crystal display. Further, in the left-handed state, when the effect control device detects the passage of the game ball by the sensor (gate switch 76 of the starting gate 20 or the like) in the right-handed area, the effect control device prompts the left-handed effect, for example, "left-handed". "Please return to" and audio output can be executed. However, after the time reduction state is completed, it is possible to prevent such an effect from being executed until a predetermined number of fluctuations are made in consideration of the remaining balls on the board surface.

By putting the left-handed state during the ending of the big hit and during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, the memory of the first special symbol can be stored regularly, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the consecutive villa can be stored. Can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing due to the end of the consecutive villa state in an extremely short time. On the other hand, if the player does not hit the left side during the consecutive villa, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will be short, so that the player can quickly digest the consecutive villa state.

Since the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine having a game property of a 1-type and 2-type mixer, a winning while the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is open in a non-time shortened state is an error. It may be determined and an error notification may be performed.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment E]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 366 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 367 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 367) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 366. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 366, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. Although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the card unit, it may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. By pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or perform some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probabilistic promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 367, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 372).

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 368 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. In the right side portion (so-called right-handed area) of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top. Has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters (wins) the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, or opens. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that have entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (combined game board units 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 368, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , It is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Is. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to collapse to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 employs a type of device (single-bladed tulip-type attacker) in which the opening / closing member 30a is tilted to the right, whereas the second variable winning device 31 has the opening / closing member 31a. A type of device that slides inside the board is used (sliding attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 31b, the specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

369 and 370 are views showing the details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 369 (A), the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, it is a state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 369 (B), the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 369 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for the specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is the slide for the specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the left side by the member 31c, and the traveling direction is changed to the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 370 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 370 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 370 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 371 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers depending on a display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs) (memory number display means). ). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a displays one storage number by, for example, a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or turning on one lamp (LED) (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned off, the number of stored items is 0, and in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the occurrence of the entry is memorized. Every time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering (up to 4), the display mode is changed by 1 each. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a shifts to the display mode after the increase in the sense that when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the winning ball is memorized. When the special symbol changes (up to one) and the special symbol starts to change when the ball enters, the display mode changes to the reduced display mode. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start fluctuating (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a has not yet started to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. It represents the number of times the ball has not entered.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see FIG. 368]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 includes an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, and the like. Various production images are displayed, including a storage marker (hold display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a drum unit 200 is installed in the lower part inside the effect unit 40.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and pseudo-effect symbols (7 symbols, panda symbols, cherry symbols, etc.) are displayed on each reel. For example, when seven symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line, which is the effective line, it indicates that a big hit result has been obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body that can be moved at a plurality of moving speeds.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 372 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning openings on the left side are installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are It is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The process of making the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated board 136. Entered. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the saucer illumination board. May be good. In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[Drum unit] Further, a drum unit 200 is connected to the effect control device 124. The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 arranged coaxially. The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, and a reel band having a plurality of pseudo-effect symbols attached in a row at intervals is wound around the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203, respectively. .. The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have a rotation axis at the center thereof, and can be rotated or reversely rotated about the rotation axis.

Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a motor) corresponding to each reel and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be arranged inside the stepping motor or may be arranged outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be configured by, for example, a light-shielding plate and a photo sensor.

The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200. The drum unit control device drives each reel according to the movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124. Further, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 in response to the detection of the position (for example, the origin position) of each reel detected by the position detection mechanism.

Then, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, and controls the operation of each reel.

The stepping motor is a motor that drives each reel (movable body) (1-2 phase excitation drive) by alternately repeating 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation, and the stepping motor has four coils (coils 1 to 1). Coil 4) is included.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually based on the image data buffered here. Drive to.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

373 and 374 are flowcharts showing an example of the first procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to an input signal from a RAM clear switch (not shown), and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 374 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 378), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 378), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 378). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the reset start process. Note that duplicate description will be omitted for the same processing as in the first procedure example of the reset start processing. Further, the process of FIG. 374 is the same in the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process is different from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that the preparatory process (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, if it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the process under preparation (Step S112a) is executed.
The execution timing of the preparatory process (step S112a) is not limited to such a timing, and can be executed at any timing in the reset start process. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, it suffices to be controlled so as to shift from "preparing" to "playable state (shifted to the main loop)".

Step S112a: In the preparatory process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. The details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the preparatory process (step S112a) is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process in preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes the preparing operation control process. Details of the operation control process during preparation will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 375). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch is being operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the preparatory operation control process in step S125 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Preparing operation control process]
The details of the operation contents of the operation control process during preparation are as follows.
The main control CPU 72 can execute the process of adopting at least one state and operation among the following states and operation contents in the preparation operation control process.

(1) During preparation, the state shifts when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. During the preparation, it stays until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. If the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the game shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (movable body connected to the main control device 70) managed by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is movably controlled, and whether or not the movable body operates normally. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside the special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a probability variation area or a specific area, a rotating body that constantly rotates in the case of a two-type system, and a specified trigger. The movable body that can be moved by the above, the mechanism, solenoid, motor, etc. associated with these, and the ordinary electric accessory (electric tulip) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movable control is executed, for example, by operating a solenoid or a motor according to a movable pattern in which "0.4 seconds ON → 0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated a plurality of times.
The movable control may be continuously executed from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed up to a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time.

(3) During preparation, it is possible to make it clear from the outside that preparation is in progress. In this case, for example, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "finished when the RAM clear switch is pressed", "change the effect setting by pressing the effect button", etc. can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display. it can. In this case, the audio output such as "Preparing" may be repeatedly executed at the same time.

(4) During preparation, the setting related to the effect may be changed by operating the effect button. For example, when the effect switching button (effect button) is pressed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display is switched, and the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 steps), effect frequency setting (1 to 3 steps), effect type setting, etc. are selected. Can be made possible.

(5) During the preparation, the launch control of the game ball may be disabled. This is because the launch control board 108 can launch the game ball on condition that the “launch permission signal” is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the payout control device 92. The main control device 70 can perform a process of transmitting a "launch permission signal" in the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)", but the "interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)" is being performed during preparation. Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for the process being prepared (the program for operating various movable bodies) can be implemented (arranged) in the used area. The used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used to control the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation may be made may be output to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.).

(8) The preparation is in the stage before shifting to the main loop (before the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) is executed). Therefore, during the preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Further, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine an error that can be determined during the playable state (for example, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls, the fluctuation of special symbols, and the fluctuation of ordinary symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is finished, a command indicating "preparing finished" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, a command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before shifting to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, the RAM clear process is not executed, and the RAM clear process can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during the preparation. However, after executing the RAM clear process, the transition may be made during preparation, and then the transition to the main loop may be performed.

The background to adopting such a configuration has the following problems.
In conventional gaming machines, the operation of special electric and ordinary electric pachinko machines cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may be discovered.

Then, by adopting the above configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the various electric accessories can operate when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the problem that the various electric accessories do not operate during the game and to play the game normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.
(3) Since the problem can be solved in advance (before the game), the process of confirming the problem during the game can be eliminated, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load on the control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during the preparation (operation check), it is possible to provide an efficient game.

The following technical contents can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while the predetermined operating member (RAM clear switch), the movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operating member are being operated. It is a gaming machine provided with a movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a constant motion pattern in order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of the above (1), it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant operation pattern until the predetermined operating member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 377 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 373).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 of the number of prize balls based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) and normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interrupt management process, the main control CPU 72 determines various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 378). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 378).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 379). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol random number. Can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, each random number of the first special symbol is not stored any more. Similarly, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is not stored any more. The reason why there are five sections is that a total number of sections is required, which is the sum of the maximum storage number (4) of the first special symbol and the maximum storage number (1) of the second special symbol. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 379). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 378).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fifth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fifth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 379).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 379). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 379). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 380), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 378) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 380) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 380) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 380) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and these are transferred to the random number storage area. Random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 380) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 379).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 380, step S46 in FIG. 381) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 380) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 381). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 380) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 381). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 380) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 381). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 380) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 381).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 378) will be described. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 10-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as "10 rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 10-round jackpot. In addition to the 10-round jackpot, other jackpots may be provided as the type of jackpot.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 378). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means, state transition means). .. In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). A gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10 round jackpots 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "10 round big hits 1 to 4" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and "10 round big hits 5 and 6" are stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the hit game. When the big hit is executed by "10 round big hits 5 and 6" (when the big hit is executed via the small hit), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first round in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 operates.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of the "first winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of the "second winning symbol". Further, "10 round jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of the "third winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 4" corresponds to the jackpot of the "fourth winning symbol". Furthermore, "10 round big hit 5" corresponds to a small hit of "5th winning symbol" (big hit when passing through a specific area 31x), and "10 round big hit 6" corresponds to a small hit of "6th winning symbol" (specific area). It corresponds to the big hit when passing 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of prizes (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first prize opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[Second Winning Symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Third winning symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time saving function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, there is a possibility of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. ..

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 378). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read out in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (winning order digestion). It should be noted that the control of priority digestion that prioritizes the digestion of the second special symbol may be used instead of the control of the winning order digestion for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 378), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift processing. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 384), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest storage corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, when the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target special symbol this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target special symbol this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 384).

[See Fig. 384: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. In the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (= approximately 1/1), and it corresponds to a loss. It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to the loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Further, the main control CPU 72 has a second special symbol lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) that is less likely to occur than the first special symbol lottery opportunity (first lottery opportunity) in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). When the occurrence occurs, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 378).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, and the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is "third winning symbol" or "fourth winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 386 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "52" and "48" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (= 52%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. It is 48 minutes (= 48%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 1 (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value and may be 2 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means time when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 10. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 387 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" and the "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. It is 50 minutes (= 50%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

[See Fig. 384: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means, state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time saving state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 changes from the non-time saving state (first state) to the time saving state (first state). It is possible to shift to the second state) (state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "5th winning symbol" and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol A", "fifth winning symbol B", "fifth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 388 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "50" and "50" are when the denominator is 100. Corresponds to the ratio of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol". Is 50/100 (= 50%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of corresponding to the "sixth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol", "3rd winning symbol" or "5th winning symbol" is applicable (the 5th winning symbol is limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time. It can be assumed that the transition condition to the shortened state is satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Fig. 384: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 383: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 384). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 383) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if both the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 causes the first special symbol. It is possible to send a special variation number designation command that reflects the value of the special variation number of the second special symbol and the special variation number of the second special symbol to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cutting counter value (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) regarding the time reduction state is adopted. (Time reduction number of times) is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 10 times), and the second number cut counter value (time reduction number of times of the second special symbol) related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 1 time). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the first count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-of-times cutting counter values (first number-of-times cutting counter value or second number-of-times cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once or 10 times). When the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced 9 times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once in the time-reduced state. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, once), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

FIG. 390 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 makes it possible to select any one of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the gaming state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the variation pattern selected may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other fluctuation pattern tables. The "game state" in the figure indicates the game state (game state of the transition destination) after the end of the big hit game. However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state before the start of the big hit game (the game state before the transition).

The variation pattern table A is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. This table is selected even after the RAM is cleared.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B is that the fluctuation pattern table B is a table that is selected within the specified number of fluctuations (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) after the time reduction state ends. .. The variation pattern table B is a so-called immediate stop prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the game state is "time reduction available (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuates from 1 to 4, 6 to 9 when the symbol with time reduction in the normal state is won (when the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol" is won). Be selected. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, 1-second fluctuation) is set for the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 120-second fluctuation) is set for the second special symbol. Is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the gaming state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the time saving state. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (1 time remaining = when the second special symbol fluctuates by one variation after the end of the time reduction state). In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the game state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table B.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the game state is "with time reduction". Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with a time reduction in the normal state is won. In this table, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
Here, the "time reduction number" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the first number cut counter value (the total time reduction number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 393).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5" or "10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 392 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
In this embodiment, since a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the second number cut counter value (the time reduction number of only the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 394).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 393 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special variation count" is " 10 times ".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or more, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 394 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern when the jackpot from the time shortened state and the fluctuation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol.
As in FIG. 392, in the present embodiment, a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, so that there is no special change table after the second change.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" is "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No5 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing through a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The fluctuation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) (For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (variation time determining means). ..

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). It is possible to make the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (for example, less than 120 seconds) in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). Fluctuation time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) should be made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state (second state) The fluctuation time can be determined so that the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state). Time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). The fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). It is possible (means for determining fluctuation time).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, and the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol The pattern table D) is made to be relatively longer than the fluctuation time (variation pattern table C) of the first special symbol when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the continuous villa state. The fluctuation time can be determined (variation time determination means).

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 378) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 manages the launch position by the launch position designation flag (0 = left strike state, 1 = right strike state) indicating whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state, and specifies the launch position at an arbitrary timing. A launch position specification command including the contents of the flag can be transmitted to the effect control device. Here, when the right-handed notification lamp is connected to the effect control device, the effect control device can control the lighting mode of the right-handed notification lamp based on the firing position designation command. The non-time reduction state is a left-handed state, and the time reduction state is a right-handed state. During the big hit game and the small hit game, the player is basically right-handed, but may be left-handed during each ending time (during the end time).

The time shortened state can be ended at the end of the fluctuation (at the start of the stop display time) of the final fluctuation (missing fluctuation, small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation) in the time shortened state. In this case, the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time shortened state can be set to a time (15.0 seconds) longer than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) other than the final fluctuation. The time reduction state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[4th winning symbol]
When the fourth winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 398: Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of corresponding to the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 397).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 401 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[See Fig. 400: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 397).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 396).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a small hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a small hit is transmitted only once during the small hit.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 400)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 400)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 396). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 402). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 403).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 403).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time reduction state transition means, time reduction). Function operating means, state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time saving state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 changes from the non-time saving state (first state) to the time saving state (first state). It is possible to shift to the second state) (state transition means).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 394.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 403).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 406 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (the same applies to the 6th winning symbol below). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain nine rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 9). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 6th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a big hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a big hit is transmitted only once during the big hit.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 398) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 405)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 398) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 405)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 396). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 402). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening closing process. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 396). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 400). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 396). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501a: The main control CPU 72 executes the end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5501b: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time (ending time) has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 396).

After that, when the value of the end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes the processes after step S5502.
Regarding the end time, different times may be set for the big hit and the small hit.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 384) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 405.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 1 time (or 10 times)). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "1" is set as the initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG. 405.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 383) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)] FIG. 410 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] If a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode. [F9] The animal mode is a "non-time reduction state". The variation pattern of the [F9] animal mode may be different from that of the [F1] normal mode, or may be the same as that of the [F1] normal mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)] FIG. 411 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortened state. [F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F15] fourth winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F20] a drive in a non-time shortened state. Move to mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F20] shifts to the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.

[Game Flow (Part 3)] FIG. 412 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. [F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol Fluctuates.

[F13] In the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F14] third winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed, and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state. Move to.

[F13] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F15] fourth winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to [F9] animal mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the time is shortened (consecutive villa state), the fluctuation of one time reduction of the second special symbol and one memory of the second special symbol are totaled by 2. You can get the chance of hitting (big hit or small hit). Then, if one of the two opportunities is won with a winning symbol with a time reduction, the game will return to the time shortened state (consecutive villa state) again.

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 413 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the animal mode.
[F9] If the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during the game in the animal mode, the [F2] first special symbol changes.

[F3] In the first special symbol lottery, it becomes "missing", and when such "missing" continues a specified number of times (for example, when 15 fluctuations are executed), [F20] specified fluctuation progress occurs, and [F1] Shift to normal mode. If a "big hit" is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the flow is the same as the game flow shown in FIG. 410.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 and the operation of the drum unit 200 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and also “ It has little visual impact as a "winning symbol". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the markers M1, the markers M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like. , A pseudo-effect symbol such as 7 symbols is displayed on the drum unit 200.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

There are three pseudo-effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200: a pseudo-left effect symbol displayed on the left reel 201, a pseudo-middle effect symbol displayed on the middle reel 202, and a pseudo-right effect symbol displayed on the right reel 203. These are included and are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right sides of the display area of the drum unit 200. Each reel includes 7 symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and as each reel rotates, the simulated effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

FIGS. 414 and 415 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 414 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three rows of effect symbol Hz in the lower right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (with reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. These markers M1 and M2 display the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) corresponding to the respective display numbers. It is represented, and the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game. Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0. Since the maximum number of working memories of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is lit at the maximum.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

On the other hand, on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200, a "panda symbol" corresponding to "off" is displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 414 (B): For example, each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variation display effect. Is started (design production execution means). In the figure, the variation display of the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 414 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are left. The symbol stops changing. In this example, "7 green symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "8" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 414 (B) above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the position is located on the leftmost side in conjunction with this. The number of displayed markers M1 has been reduced by one. That is, up to that time, there were a total of four working memory numbers of the marker M1, but the marker M1, which is the earliest (oldest) memory number display, is hidden, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is combined. Be told. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach the working memory in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the example of FIG. 414 (C), since the working memory at the head in the memory order is consumed and the remaining three are, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are one by one. The effect is to shift in the direction (here, to the left). As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the production, and to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one". it can.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 415 (D): Next, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 415 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are the same. The stop display effect is performed in the form of non-winning (missing). That is, in the illustrated example, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo-middle effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "1" is used as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production design that represents is stopped. In this case, the combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the deviation of "green 7 symbols"-"panda symbol"-"panda symbol", and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. Since the combination of Hz is the deviation of "8"-"1"-"3", it is expressed in the production that this fluctuation corresponds to the normal "outside". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIGS. 416 to 418 are continuous views showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, after the fluctuation display by the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is an aspect of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol". (For example, 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed ( Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 416 (A): Each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. By doing so, the variable display effect is started.

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 416 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed on the liquid crystal display 42. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The picture image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes may be used). The "pre-reach notice" is a production that announces the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 416 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 416 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display effect is being continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 417 (D): When the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 417 (E): Then, the pseudo right effect symbol of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop fluctuating. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. As a result, the reach state of "7 red symbols"-"changing"-"7 red symbols" is generated in the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200, and "7" is generated in the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. "-" Fluctuating "-" 7 "reach state has occurred. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time. After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed. Regarding the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, the display state may be "changing"-"changing"-"changing" without generating a clear reach state.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 417 (F): Shortly after the reach state occurs, on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an image representing a "heart" figure forms a group and passes diagonally on the screen. Will be done. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 418 (G): Following the notice effect after the reach occurs, a "ghost of a pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen. "Appears, and the characters" VS "appear in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 418 (H): At the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" punches innumerably, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss.

[Stop display production (production at the time of winning)]
In FIG. 418 (I): When the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small together with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a big hit. Then, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, the pseudo medium effect symbol of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the intermediate effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a big hit (for example, a red display color).

At the time of non-winning (at the time of loss), "Pumpkin ghost" is displayed large and "Male character" is displayed small along with the characters "Defeat ...". In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than the number "7" as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The symbol is stopped.

[Direction during a major role]
419 and 420 are continuous views partially showing an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
In FIG. 419 (A): When the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the big hit game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 419 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, 10 circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining 9 ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 10 rounds, the current round is the first of the 10 rounds, and each round in which a ball can be obtained is marked with a circle. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

[10th round]
In FIG. 419 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the 10th round are completed.

Here, if it corresponds to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, or if there is a memory of the second special symbol even if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, as shown in the figure. , A fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to drive mode) is executed in which fireworks are launched. In addition, if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state, or if there is no memory of the second special symbol, the fireworks effect is not executed. Fireworks production can be performed in any round.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 420 (D): When shifting to the time shortened state, an effect of displaying character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 420 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving medium effect] In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time saving state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) that displays the background image corresponding to the time saving state (advantageous game state) is performed. Will be executed.

[Right-handed suggestion effect] In addition, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed at the upper part of the screen. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect] Further, at the lower left of the screen, the remaining number display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 2 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the drive mode in the time shortened state or the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
421 to 423 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 421 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image showing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the pseudo-effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the winning of "7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols", and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42. The combination of symbol Hz is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may be made to emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 421 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (marker M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also start to fluctuate. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 421 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the disengaged manner, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also disengaged. It is stopped and displayed in the mode of. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining two times.

In FIG. 422 (D): Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the order of winning, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested after that. Then, when the digestion of the remaining memory of the first special symbol is completed, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start to fluctuate. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 422 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"), The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Further, for example, the player executes a right-handed strike while the second special symbol is fluctuating, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball is opened to the right start winning opening. It is assumed that the ball has entered 28b. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

In FIG. 422 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be inserted into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 423 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 423 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, the ball is substantially obtained for 9 rounds (10 rounds of balls including the small hit game). can do. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

424 and 425 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state, in which the big hit game is executed corresponding to the big hit of the "4th winning symbol" or the small hit of the "6th winning symbol", and the first 2 This is the case where the memory of the special symbol is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining one time" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of variation of special symbol] In FIG. 424 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the drum unit 200 starts rotating and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The fluctuation of the effect symbol Hz of the vessel 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 is also started.

[Continuing the variable display effect] In FIG. 424 (B): The variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Along with this, the rotation of the drum unit 200 continues, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also continue to fluctuate. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability that the variable start winning device 28 will be open for a long time is low even if the start gate 20 is passed. Therefore, basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates at most once.

[Stop display effect] In FIG. 424 (C): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol") and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 The Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining.

[Start of small hit, opening of second big winning opening] In Fig. 425 (D): And when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened and the car on which the female character is riding is The effect of increasing the speed and moving to the right side of the screen is executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area] In FIG. 425 (E): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to a small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is the sixth winning symbol. It is assumed that it was. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game] In FIG. 425 (F): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. Then, when the jackpot game is executed corresponding to the sixth winning symbol in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the mode shifts to the animal mode after the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 426 is a diagram showing an outline of the drive mode. The first effect example shows an effect example when a normal game is performed, and the second effect example shows an effect example when an irregular game is performed.

[Example of the first effect] The state (A) in FIG. 426 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times (a state in which a big hit may occur at least the remaining two times), and is a gaming state of the main control device 70. Is a time-saving state. If the state in FIG. 426 (A) corresponds to the time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 426 (A) again after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 426 (A) corresponds to the time saving hit and the second special symbol is memorized, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 426 (B) after the big hit game is completed.

The state (B) in FIG. 426 is a state in which the drive mode is one time remaining (a state in which a big hit may occur at least once remaining), and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state. (Memory digestion section). If the state in FIG. 426 (B) corresponds to the time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 426 (A) after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, if the state in FIG. 426 (B) corresponds to the time saving hit, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 426 (C) after the end of the big hit game.

The state (C) in FIG. 426 is the animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is the non-time shortened state (immediate stop prevention section). The animal mode ends after a specified number of fluctuations, and then shifts to the normal mode.

[Second Production Example] The state (D) in FIG. 426 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a time reduction state. If the state in FIG. 426 (D) corresponds to the time saving hit and there is no memory of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 426 (E) after the big hit game is completed.

The state (E) in FIG. 426 is the animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is the non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and eventually the memory of the first special symbol will be digested.

[Overview of Drive Mode] The drive mode (consecutive villa state) transitions as shown in FIGS. 426 (A) to (C) when a normal game is performed. If the player wins the game with no time reduction in the time reduction state, the game state of the main control device becomes the memory digestion section after the big hit game. At this time, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol is stored, there is a 1/1 probability of a big hit (a big hit or a big hit via a small hit). The upper limit of the memory of the second special symbol is one. Therefore, when there is a memory of the second special symbol, the effect of the drive mode is continued (it looks like the continuation of the consecutive villas; see (A) to (C) in FIGS. 426).

When a normal game is played, since the memory of the second special symbol is stored at the time of the big hit in the time shortened state, such a state transition occurs, but at the time of no time saving hit in the time shortened state, the second special If there is no memory of the design, the consecutive villas will end there.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gaming state of the main control device is shifted to the animal mode in which the continuous villa is not continued even in the memory digestion section (see (D) and (E) in FIGS. 426). Since the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol at the time of winning is related to the jackpot effect, the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol is determined when the opening command of the small hit or the jackpot is received.

Therefore, if you win without the memory of the second special symbol and the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated during the round of the jackpot game, after shifting to the animal mode, in the memory digestion section, the second I am trying to change the special design.

FIG. 427 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section. The first effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section, but the second special symbol is stored. The second effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section and the second special symbol is not stored.

[Example of First Production] The state (A) in FIG. 427 is a state in which the drive mode is one time remaining, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortening state (memory digestion section). When the first special symbol is displaced in the state of FIG. 427 (A), a reach effect (for example, an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched) is produced as shown in FIG. 427 (B). Is executed, and as shown in FIG. 427 (C), an effect that is finally out of alignment (for example, an effect that fails to launch fireworks) is executed.

[Second production example] The state (D) in FIG. 427 is an animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and if the player hits the left, the first special symbol will fluctuate.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 427 (E), during the execution of the out-of-order variation of the first special symbol, a special pseudo-variation effect in which a plurality of variations are simulated is executed, and finally, a special pseudo-variation effect is executed. An out-of-order effect is executed. In the special pseudo-variation effect, the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time (variation scale).

When the apparent effect is the animal mode in spite of the memory digestion section, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of several tens of seconds) is set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol. At this time, if the player shifts to the drive mode and performs an off-the-shelf effect, the appearance can be consistent, but there is a risk that the player may misunderstand because there is a relationship of "drive mode = during the consecutive villas".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the memory digestion section and the apparent effect is the animal mode, the lottery for executing the content of the variable display effect is switched to change the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop. After repeating the scale, the effect is determined so that it is out of place so that there is no apparent discomfort.

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing the difference between the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the memory digestion section and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section.

As shown in FIG. 428 (A), in the variation pattern selection table of the memory digestion section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, the variation pattern of long-term variation is selected as the variation pattern to be selected. May be done. For example, the fluctuation pattern of long-term fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 56.0 seconds.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 428 (B), in the variation pattern selection table of the immediate stop prevention section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is incorrect, the variation pattern to be selected is the first short-time variation. ~ Third short-term fluctuation pattern may be selected. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20.0 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the second short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the third short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 6.0 seconds.

The deviation variation of the first special symbol, which is the problem this time, is a long-term variation shown in FIG. 428 (A), and this variation is selected in the memory digestion section but not in the immediate stop prevention section. Therefore, when the game state is the memory digestion section and the apparent mode is the animal mode corresponding to the immediate stop prevention section, as described above, in order to match the production, a special pseudo A variable effect is being performed.

FIG. 429 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the launch direction. The following game flow is the game flow when the consecutive villa state ends in the shortest time. Specifically, in the non-time reduction state, the big hit of the "1st winning type (with time reduction)" is won, and in the time reduction state, the small hit of the "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won, and the non-time reduction is achieved. This is the flow of the game when a small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won in the state. The gaming state progresses in the order of No1 to No13.

[No1] The "gaming state" is the "first special symbol variation", and the "launching direction" is "left-handed". At the start of the game, the first special symbol is changed to aim for a big hit.

[No2] The "game state" is "big hit (first hit, first big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of the "first winning type (with time reduction)" is won.

[No3] The "game state" is the "time reduction state", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". When the gaming state shifts from the non-time shortened state to the time shortened state, the firing direction becomes right-handed.

[No4] The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is digested at high speed.

[No5] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (time reduction state, memory +1)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". During the change of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be stored.

[No6] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (time shortened state end)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". When the game state shifts from the time-shortened state to the non-time-shortened state when the second special symbol is stopped, the firing direction is switched from right-handed to left-handed.

[No7] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No8] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (second big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No9] The "game state" is the "second special symbol variation (non-time shortened state)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Here, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No10] The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No11] The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". The launch direction continues to be left-handed.

[No12] The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (third big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of the "sixth winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No13] The "game state" is "the end of a big hit for one set (three times)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". In this case, the mode shifts to the animal mode. In this way, if the winning symbol without time reduction (for example, "sixth winning type (no time reduction)") is applied twice in a row, the consecutive villa state ends.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, advance notice effect before reach occurrence, memory number display effect, large role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 or drum unit 200, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number display effect, etc. Are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and drum unit effect management process. (Step S403), special fluctuation effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410), and others. It is a configuration including a group of subroutines of the process (step S412) of. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, count cut counter command, various error commands, special fluctuation count specification command, opening command for big hit, opening command for small hit, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect contents (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, markers M1, M2, production contents related to the important role production, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of determining the content of the advance notice effect) is executed. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. In this way, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content to be displayed on the drum unit 200 (effect content related to the pseudo effect symbol, content related to the movement of the drum unit 200). The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special change effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the special change number of times production command, and if it is determined to execute the effect, what kind of content is there? Executes the process of determining whether to execute the effect during special fluctuation. In addition, this processing may be executed in the effect symbol change pre-processing.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that fluctuates the effect symbol at high speed) when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected. However, when a special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a reach effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 transmits the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.
In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may manage the effect of the drum unit 200 (process for controlling the drum unit 200).

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of extinguishing the markers M1 or M2 corresponding to the lottery elements consumed by the internal lottery, and moves the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Perform a sliding effect.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 430).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 383) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (reach) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. The control information of is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily execute the effect related to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 430) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 430). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time) and stop of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, and finally corresponds to the small hit. The process of selecting the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2, for example, in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or in the normal mode. Finally, the process of selecting the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process. The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time saving and medium effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control CPU 126 has a case where the memory of the second special symbol exists when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. Select a background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 432), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection]
FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of disconnection. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S620: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory digestion section. The memory digestion section is a section for digesting the memory of the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state shifted after the end of the time reduction state. The memory digestion section is, for example, the first fluctuation section of the second special symbol and the first to fourth fluctuation sections of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. After the memory digestion section is completed, an immediate stop prevention section for the animal mode is set.

The memory digestion section and the immediate stop prevention section may be managed only by the main control device, may be managed only by the effect control device, or may be managed by both devices. For example, the memory digestion section can be managed by the memory digestion section stay flag. The memory digestion section stay flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, and when the first variation section of the second special symbol ends after the end of the jackpot game, or when the fifth variation section of the first special symbol ends. Set to OFF when starting. On the other hand, the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON at the timing when the memory digestion section stay flag is set from ON to OFF, and the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times is completed while the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON. Set to OFF at the time.

When the game is played normally (when the right-handed striking is continued in the time shortened state), the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the memory digestion section, but when the game is not played normally (when the game is not performed normally). If the time is shortened and the right-handed stroke is not continued), the memory of the first special symbol may be digested in the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S621, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), the effect is produced. The control CPU 126 executes step S625.

Step S621: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S622, and it cannot be confirmed that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S625.

Step S622: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S623, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S624.

Step S623: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a special pseudo-variation effect. The special pseudo-variation effect is an effect in which the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time.

Step S624: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a reach-out effect. The effect control CPU 126 executes, for example, an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched, and finally selects an effect that fails to launch the fireworks.

Step S625: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an out-of-effect effect according to the stay mode and the fluctuation pattern. The effect control CPU 126 may, for example, select a mere off-effect effect or execute a reach effect to select an out-of-effect effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 433).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S630: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current game state is the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S634, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current game state is the time shortened state (No). , The effect control CPU 126 executes step S631.

Step S631: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S632, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), the effect is produced. The control CPU 126 executes step S633.

Step S632: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S635, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S634.

Step S633: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation is within the specified number of times (for example, within 15 times) after the big hit game.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S635, and when it cannot be confirmed that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes). No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S636.

Step S634: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the drive mode.

Step S635: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the animal mode.

Step S636: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the normal mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 433).

By executing such a process, if the effect control CPU 126 has a memory of the second special symbol (if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, the state of the lottery element storage is a special state). (If), the drive mode effect (common effect) with common contents can be executed in the non-time shortened state (first state, normal state) and the time shortened state (second state, advantageous state) (effect). Execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 has a special memory state of the lottery element unless the second special symbol is stored (unless the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state). Drive mode effect (non-common effect) and animal mode effect (non-common effect) with different contents in the non-time shortened state (first state, normal state) and time shortened state (second state, advantageous state) Makes it possible to execute (common production) (effect execution means).

[Processing during effect symbol stop display] FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-of-times counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. ..

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S658.

Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660 and determines that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ..

Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 432).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP152), as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of reading according to the winning symbol is executed.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game, and suggests right-handed strike. If you select the effect to be performed and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a heart mark with the letter V drawn by the female character in the car) Execute the process of selecting the effect to be listed).

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 432).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of big hit]
FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process when the jackpot variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a big hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit has been received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S811, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of the big hit has been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 Returns to the process when the variable winning device is activated (FIG. 437).

Step S811: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S812, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814.

Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is a winning symbol that shifts to the time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current jackpot is the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814, and the current jackpot is the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state. If (No) cannot be confirmed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S813.

Step S813: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the first selection table. The jackpot effect included in the first selection table is a jackpot effect that does not include a fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to the drive mode).

Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the second selection table. The jackpot effect included in the second selection table is a jackpot effect including a fireworks effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 433).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated for small hits]
FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device for small hits is activated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a small hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the small hit opening command has been received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S821, and when it cannot be confirmed that the small hit opening command has been received (No), the effect The control CPU 126 returns to the process when the variable winning device is activated (FIG. 437).

Step S821: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S822, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the small hit this time is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current small hit is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824, and the current small hit shifts to the time shortened state. If it cannot be confirmed that the symbol is a winning symbol that leads to a big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S823.

Step S823: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the third selection table. The small hit effect included in the third selection table is a small hit effect that does not include an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the fourth selection table. The small hit effect included in the fourth selection table is a small hit effect including an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 433).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing] FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and selects an effect pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "1" to the second count cut counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the process to be performed. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 2 times" or "remaining 1 time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 126 needs to execute the right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened (particularly,). The process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking is executed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the 5th or 10th variation of the first special symbol).

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the effect control process (FIG. 430).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 430).

[Drum unit effect management process] FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the drum unit effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body operation schedule determination process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 operates the operation schedule (variation mode, stop mode, etc.) of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern (effect pattern number, etc.) determined by the effect symbol management process (step S402 in FIG. 430). Executes the process of determining.

When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 stores the determined operation schedule in the operation schedule storage buffer of the RAM 130. Further, when the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of turning on the drum unit operating flag of the RAM 130, and executes a process of turning off the drum unit operating flag when all the determined schedules are executed. ..

The operation schedule is set for each reel (each movable body). For example, in the case of the left reel 201, "acceleration"-> "constant velocity"-> "deceleration"-> "stop" in order from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. And so on. Among them, "acceleration" and "deceleration" have a plurality of speed changes, and "constant speed" may also have a plurality of speed changes (for example, "low speed constant speed", "medium speed, etc." "Speed", "High speed constant speed", etc.).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of speeds (for example, about 100 types of speeds) are prepared as the set speeds of the motor (reel), and various setting information (number of steps of the motor) is provided in a plurality of movable body data tables (not shown). , The set speed of the motor, the time required for the operation of the motor, the excitation method of the motor, the phase designation information for specifying the phase to be excited by the motor, etc.) are stored. Different setting information is stored in each movable body data table.

The effect control CPU 126 determines which movable body data table is referred to in which order and at what timing based on the operation schedule of the drum unit (movable body unit) 200. The movable body data stored in the movable body data table being referred to is transmitted to the driver (IC) of the drum unit 200 by being stored in the movable body data setting area (not shown). The driver of the drum unit 200 drives each reel based on the movable body data.

The effect control CPU 126 basically overwrites the new movable body data in the movable body data setting area (switches the moving body data table being referenced) when the speed of each reel is changed. Even when the speed of each reel is maintained, new movable body data may be overwritten in the movable body data setting area (the moving body data table being referenced is not switched).

This is because, when maintaining a constant speed, if the number of movable data tables corresponding to the number of seconds of change of the special symbol is prepared, the number of movable data tables corresponding to the number of seconds of change of the special symbol will be displayed. This is because the capacity of the movable data table becomes large.

The operation schedule of the drum unit 200 corresponding to the effect pattern is as follows. For example, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to a non-reach out-of-reach effect, the effect control CPU 126 starts rotating the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of fluctuation, and the left reel 201 is after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitch can be an arbitrary shift stitch or a stop stitch corresponding to the stop stitch of the effect symbol Hz.

On the other hand, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the reach effect (big hit variation, small hit variation, missed variation), the effect control CPU 126 starts rotating the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the variation. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the left reel 201 is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, a reach state is generated, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitches correspond to the stop stitches corresponding to the stop stitches of the production symbol Hz (three sets of seven symbols of the same color corresponding to the big hit, the three sets of cherry symbols corresponding to the small hits, and the misses. It can be set to the deviation of one frame of the middle reel 202).

In any case, the effect control CPU 126 determines the operation schedule of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect symbol management process in the movable body operation schedule determination process, and produces the effect based on the determined operation schedule. The contents and order of the movable body data table (deceleration sequence, deceleration sequence to which the control code is added, acceleration sequence, drive start sequence, drive stop sequence, etc.) to be referred to are determined.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body data setting start process. This process is executed only when the setting of the movable body data is started during the execution of the effect, that is, when the movable body data is overwritten.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 overwrites the movable body data of the movable body data table currently being referred to with the movable body data of the movable body data table to be referred to next, that is, to be referred to next. The process of storing the movable body data stored in the planned movable body data table in the movable body data setting area is executed, and it is determined whether or not it is the end of the movable body data (the planned movable body to be referred to next). (Check if the body data table exists) and execute the process of storing the movable body data stored in the movable body data table in the movable body data setting area until it is determined that the end of the movable body data is reached. Execute the process to do. When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 430).

FIG. 442 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern of measures for immediate termination of the consecutive villa state.
In the figure (A), an example of a transition of a special variation pattern when a game is played without following the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol memory is stored. When the second special symbol became a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol and the time was shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, the launch of the game ball was stopped during the memory digestion of the second special symbol. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "first variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the jackpot game ends is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation (reach effect) dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.

In the figure (B), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is performed according to the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), four special symbol memories are stored. If you save and become a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and shift to the time shortened state at the end of the big hit game, that is, hit left during the memory digestion of the second special symbol and hit the first special symbol When four memories are stored, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are fluctuations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the jackpot game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.
By executing the striking method shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate end of the consecutive villa state (the situation where the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 443 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern in consideration of irregular striking.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special variation pattern when the game is played according to the firing direction is shown.
For example, if four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit and right-handed is continued in a state of shortening the time after the end of the big hit game, that is, all the memories of the first special symbol are digested and the first 2 When the memory of the special symbol is stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game (the first variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

In the figure (B), an example of the transition of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played without following the firing direction is shown.
For example, when four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit, and the left hit is continued even though the time is shortened after the big hit game is completed, that is, the first hit. When all the memories of the special symbol are digested and the time reduction state ends (punctures) by continuing to accumulate the memory of the first special symbol, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (first time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "sixth to ninth variation", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. .. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "10th variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "11th variation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the eleventh variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. After the end of the time reduction (puncture), the normal state (non-time reduction state, normal mode) is entered.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, if the second special symbol is stored (if the memory state of the lottery element is a special state), the non-time shortened state (normal state) and the time shortened state (advantageous). Since it is possible to execute a drive mode effect (common effect) with common contents in the state), even if the game state shifts from the time-reduced state to the non-time-reduced state, the time-reduced state is displayed for the player. It can give the impression that it is continuing. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the drive mode effect (common effect) or the animal mode effect (non-common effect) is executed depending on the state of memory. Therefore, it is desired to execute the drive mode effect. It is possible to give a motivation to the player who is playing to save the memory. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

(3) In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which only one memory of the second special symbol can be stored in the time-reduced state. Then, the memory of the second special symbol becomes a small hit or more (small hit or big hit). Therefore, when shifting from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state, there is only one fluctuation that digests the memory of the second special symbol, and the mode (stage) on the production at this time is the same as the time shortened state. Naru (drive mode production).

〔problem〕
During the transition to the time reduction state, the section is for storing the memory of the second special symbol, and if the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored in this section, the gaming state of the main control device is as follows. Although it is the memory digestion section of the second special symbol, since the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, if the mode on the production is selected one-to-one with the game state, the production cannot be established.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the game state of the main control device but also the information related to the memory (holding information) is taken into consideration, so that the state transition without a sense of incongruity is realized even at the time of irregularity.
Specifically, when a small hit opening command or a big hit opening command is received in a time-reduced state, the subsequent development is branched depending on whether or not the memory of the second special symbol exists. More specifically, when there is a memory of the second special symbol, the big role effect of the continuation of the consecutive villa (the big hit effect including the fireworks effect) is executed, and the mode is shifted to the drive mode (the consecutive villa state mode). On the other hand, when there is no memory of the second special symbol, the big role effect of the end of the consecutive villa (the big hit effect not including the fireworks effect) is executed, and the mode is shifted to the animal mode (the end mode of the consecutive villa). When the memory of the second special symbol occurs after receiving the opening command, the change of the second special symbol in the memory digestion section is started after the transition to the animal mode (the end mode of the consecutive villas) (in the animal mode). Small hits or big hits occur).

By adopting such control contents, it is possible to shift the mode (stage) by taking into account not only the game state of the main control device but also the number of memories, and the special consecutive villa specification of the present embodiment can be played. Can be communicated to people in an easy-to-understand manner.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine including the drum unit 200 has been described, but the gaming machine may not include the drum unit 200.
Further, the drum unit 200 may be changed to a 7-segment display (for example, a device including a plurality of 7-segment displays, a 7-segment display for displaying an effect symbol), or may be changed to a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the second special symbol is memorized is regarded as a special state, and the state in which the second special symbol is not memorized is not a special state, but the state in which the second special symbol is not memorized is special. The state in which the memory of the second special symbol is present may not be a special state.

In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the second special symbol is stored is regarded as a special state, and the state in which the second special symbol is not stored is not a special state. A certain state may be a special state, and a state in which the memory of the second special symbol is less than the specified number may not be a special state.

In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the second special symbol is memorized is regarded as a special state, and the state in which the second special symbol is not memorized is not a special state, but the state in which the first special symbol is memorized is special. The state in which the first special symbol is not remembered may not be a special state. Further, a state in which the memory of the first special symbol is equal to or more than the specified number may be set as a special state, and a state in which the memory of the first special symbol is less than the specified number may not be a special state. Further, a state in which the total memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is equal to or more than the specified number is defined as a special state, and a state in which the total memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is less than the specified number is special. It does not have to be in such a state.

The above-described embodiment can also be modified as follows.
(1) The variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol may be different depending on whether or not the first special symbol is stored.
For example, when the first special symbol is stored and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined, a variation pattern selection table capable of selecting a variation pattern for a long time (several tens of seconds to several minutes) is referred to. ..
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined when the first special symbol is not stored, the variation pattern selection table capable of selecting the variation pattern for a short time (several seconds) is referred to.

(2) A state (left-handed state) in which the memory of the first special symbol is accumulated may be generated during the consecutive villas (time reduction state, drive mode).
For example, the ending time of the jackpot is left-handed. That is, from the opening of the jackpot game to the end of the final round, the player is in a right-handed state, and is in a left-handed state only during the ending of the jackpot game.
In addition, during the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation (from the start to the end of the stop display time), the player is in a left-handed state. The time shortening state can be turned off at the start of the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, whereby the non-time reduction state is set during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time.
Furthermore, "Big hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) ≒ Outlier fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) <Small hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 15 seconds, number) About 10 seconds) ”. In this case, since the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation is longer than that of the big hit or the miss, it is possible to secure a long time for the non-time shortened state.

(3) The definitions of "left-handed state" and "right-handed state" can be as follows.
The main controller has an area for storing the left-handed state or the right-handed state (for example, an area for storing the launch position designation flag), and if the stored content is a value (0) indicating left-handed, "left-handed". It is a "state", and if the content of the memory is not a value indicating left-handed, it is a "right-handed state". The "left-handed state" is a non-time shortened state (a state in which electric chew support is not performed) or the ending of a jackpot game. The other state is the "right-handed state".

The main control device transmits a command for transmitting the state of the current launch position to the effect control device depending on whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state. Such a command may send a command indicating the left-handed state at "when the power is turned on" and "when switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state", and the left-handed state is periodically performed during the left-handed state. You may send the command of.

In the left-handed state, the effect control device can turn off the right-handed notification lamp based on a command from the main control device. Further, in the left-handed state, the effect control device can hide the right-handed instruction display displayed on the liquid crystal display. Further, in the left-handed state, when the effect control device detects the passage of the game ball by the sensor (gate switch 76 of the starting gate 20 or the like) in the right-handed area, the effect control device prompts the left-handed effect, for example, "left-handed". "Please return to" and audio output can be executed. However, after the time reduction state is completed, it is possible to prevent such an effect from being executed until a predetermined number of fluctuations are made in consideration of the remaining balls on the board (that is, the predetermined number of fluctuations are performed). Until then, the right-handed notification lamp and the launch position designation display lamp are turned off, the right-handed instruction display (guidance information prompting "right-handed") is hidden, and the execution of the effect of prompting left-handed is restricted. ).

By putting the left-handed state during the ending of the big hit and during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, the memory of the first special symbol can be stored regularly, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the consecutive villa can be stored. Can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing due to the end of the consecutive villa state in an extremely short time. On the other hand, if the player does not hit the left side during the consecutive villa, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will be short, so that the player can quickly digest the consecutive villa state.

Since the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine having a game property of a 1-type and 2-type mixer, a winning while the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is open in a non-time shortened state is an error. It may be determined and an error notification may be performed.

The above-described embodiment can also be modified as follows.
(1) External information If you have an external information signal (for example, "big hit 4" out of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" is the signal) that is output during the big hit and short time, the following control The content can be applied.
(A) When the transition from the "big hit game state" to the "normal state", if the number of stored second special symbols is 0, the signal output of "big hit 4" is turned on after the ending time of the big hit game has elapsed. May be turned off from.
(B) When shifting from the "big hit game state" to the "normal state", if the number of stored second special symbols is 1 or more, the signal output of "big hit 4" is output even after the ending time of the big hit game has elapsed. May be kept ON. In addition, if the memory of the second special symbol contains a loss fluctuation (a lottery element that is not a winning), the signal output of "big hit 4" is maintained until the loss fluctuation of the second special symbol is exhausted, and the second special symbol is stored. 2 The signal output of "big hit 4" may be turned off after the loss fluctuation of the special symbol is digested (after the fluctuation is completed).

(2) Special variation In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern table E (no time reduction) has been described with an example in which a variation time of 120 seconds is set in the case of the second special symbol. The first special symbol may also be controlled so that a long-term fluctuation pattern is selected (for example, the fluctuation time may be 320 seconds or more, or the fluctuation time may exceed 100 seconds).
Fluctuation pattern Regarding the fluctuation pattern selected in table B (no time reduction, immediate stop prevention section), in the case of the first special symbol, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (variation time of about several seconds) such as 13 seconds or 6 seconds. May be selected.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the first state is the normal state and the second state is described as an example of the time reduction state, but depending on the gaming machine (model configuration), the first state and the second state may be different. It may be another state, for example, the first state may be a latent state (high probability non-time reduction state), the second state may be a time reduction state (low probability time reduction state), and the first state may be. The state may be a time-reduced state and the second state may be a latent state.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the example of executing the common effect when the second special symbol is stored has been described, but depending on the gaming machine (model configuration), the information of the memory of the second special symbol is specific. The common effect is executed on the condition that it is information (predetermined big hit, predetermined small hit, etc.), and the information in the memory of the second special symbol is not specific information (predetermined loss, first 2 The common effect may not be executed on the condition that all the memories of the special symbols are out of order, etc.).

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the example of executing the common effect when the second special symbol is stored has been described, but it is common when the second special symbol is not stored depending on the gaming machine (model configuration). The effect may be executed and the common effect may not be executed when the second special symbol is memorized.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment F]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 444 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 445 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 444 and 445.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 445) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 444. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 444, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to the CR unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the CR unit, but may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (drive) the game ball toward the game area 8a (operation means). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. By pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), or perform some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probabilistic promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 445, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 458).

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Construction of board]
FIG. 446 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is centered on the effect unit 40 on the left side portion (first area, left-handed area) and the right side portion ( It is roughly divided into a second area, a right-handed area) and a lower part. Further, in the game area 8a, a start device 400, a start gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, etc. are located around the effect unit 40. Are distributed and installed. Of these, the start device 400 is located in the lower center of the left side portion of the game area 8a. The details of the start device 400 will be described later. Further, on the right side portion of the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow down, enters the start device 400, enters (wins) the normal winning openings 22 and 25, or , The variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the start device 400 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 enters the right starting winning opening 28b. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 446, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of the opening operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the predetermined operating conditions are satisfied, the state shifts to the easy entry state, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b, rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 opens the short (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If this is the case, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , The first special winning opening 30b can be entered (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28, and has one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example, to open / close the opening / closing member 30a. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced by using the lower end edge portion as a hinge so as to fall forward, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game balls can flow in, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 employs a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternately protruding protrusions on the opening / closing member 31a at a position where the game ball passes in a zigzag manner. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed inside the start device 400, and game balls that do not win in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, each start winning opening of the start device 400, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the device 31 (second prize opening 31b, specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

447 and 448 are views showing the details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward toward the specific region 31x, and the other second passage 31e extends downward toward the discharge hole 31y.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific region slide member 31c slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 447 (A), the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 447 (B), the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 447 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for the specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is the slide for the specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the right by the member 31c and heads toward the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 448 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific area is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 448 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 448 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the right by the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

449 to 455 are views showing the details of the start device 400. FIG. 449 is a perspective view of the start device 400. As shown in FIG. 449, the start device 400 includes a base member 410, a cover member 420, a passage port 430, a right movable device 480, a left movable device 490, and the like.

The base member 410 is a member that serves as a base for the start device 400, and is attached to the game board unit 8 by a fastening member such as a screw. The cover member 420 is a member attached to the front surface side of the base member 410, and various start winning openings and out openings are arranged inside the cover member 420.

The passage port 430 is arranged in the center of the upper part of the cover member 420, and is an entrance (where the game ball can pass) for the game ball to enter the start device 400.

The right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 (see FIG. 450) of the start device 400.

The left movable device 490 is attached to the rear left side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the left blade member 442 (see FIG. 450) of the start device 400.

450 and 451 are views showing the internal structure of the start device 400. Here, FIG. 450 shows a state in which the blade members (right blade member 438 and left blade member 442) of the start device 400 are closed, and FIG. 451 shows a state in which the blade members of the start device 400 are open. Indicates the state.

As shown in FIG. 450, a guide passage 432 inclined in the lower right direction is formed below the passage port 430. A one-hole crune member 434 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 432. The crune member 434 is a mortar-shaped member having a large opening on the upper side, and an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed on the bottom surface. Below the crune member 434, a guide passage 436 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

A right blade member 438 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 436. At the lower left of the right blade member 438, a guide passage 440 inclined in the lower left direction is formed. A left blade member 442 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 440. At the lower left of the left blade member 442, a guide passage 444 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

The start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454 are entry openings through which game balls can enter. The right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 can operate to affect the entry into the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454 (openable / closable, movable). It is a movable body (possible). Further, the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are arranged above (upstream) the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the game ball is placed above (upstream) the start device right starting winning opening 450 or the start device. It is a member that affects whether or not to enter (whether or not to pass) the middle start winning opening 452.

When the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned on, the right blade member 438 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start device right start winning opening 450. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is turned off, the right blade member 438 maintains a closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the right blade member 438 and enters the guide passage 440. Be guided.

Further, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned on, the left blade member 442 rises upward and shifts to the open state, and guides the game ball to the start winning opening 452 in the start device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the left blade member 442 is turned off, the left blade member 442 keeps the closed state without getting up, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the left blade member 442 and enters the guide passage 444. Be guided.

In the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, when the movable pin inserted near the center of the member is pushed upward, the movable pin moves along the guide groove arranged rearward, and the left side rotates. It rotates about the axis and shifts to the open state (see FIG. 451).

Below the right blade member 438, a start device right start winning opening 450 is arranged. The start device right start winning opening 450 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass through) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. ..

Below the left blade member 442, a start winning opening 452 in the start device is arranged. The start winning opening 452 in the starting device is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass through) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the first special symbol lottery. ..

At the lower left of the guide passage 444, a start device left start winning opening 454 is arranged. The start device left start winning opening 454 is an opportunity generation area in which a game ball that has entered the passing opening 430 can enter (pass) and can generate a lottery trigger (predetermined trigger) for a normal symbol lottery.

On the right side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 462 inclined in the lower right direction is formed. An out port 32 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 462. On the right side of the out port 32, a guide passage 460 inclined in the lower left direction is formed.

On the left side of the start device right start winning opening 450, a guide passage 464 inclined in the lower left direction is formed. An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 464.

On the right side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 466 inclined in the lower right direction is formed. On the left side of the start winning opening 452 in the start device, a guide passage 468 inclined in the lower left direction is formed. An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 468.

On the right side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 470 inclined in the lower right direction is formed. On the left side of the start device left start winning opening 454, a guide passage 472 inclined in the lower left direction is formed. An out port 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 472. On the left side of the out port 32, a guide passage 474 inclined in the lower right direction is formed.

Below the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454, the start device illumination board 476 is arranged. Three lamps (LEDs) 478 are arranged on the start device illumination board 476, and when a game ball enters each start winning opening, the corresponding lamps are turned on.

Next, the flow of the game ball inside the start device 400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 452, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434. Then, when the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device left start winning opening 454. Enter the ball.

Since the start device left start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device left starting winning opening 454, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device left starting winning opening switch.

On the other hand, even when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the flow of the game ball is the same as when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed until the middle. That is, as shown in FIG. 453, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right blade member 438 via the crune member 434.

Then, when the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls at the position of the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, and finally, the start device right start winning opening 450. Alternatively, the ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device.

Since the start device right start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device right starting winning opening 450, the entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device right starting winning opening switch. Further, since the start device middle start winning opening switch is arranged in the start device middle start winning opening 452, the entry of the game ball is detected by the start device middle start winning opening switch.

Here, when the game ball enters the passage port 430 of the start device 400, it always enters any of the start device right start winning opening 450, the start device middle start winning opening 452, and the start device left starting winning opening 454. This is not the case, and in some cases, the ball may enter the out port 32. Further, not only the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 of the start device 400 but also the game ball that has not entered the passage port 430 of the start device 400 may enter the out port 32 from the side surface side. .. Although the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are described in the example of simultaneously shifting to the open state, it is also possible not to shift to the open state at the same time.

454 and 455 are side views of the start device 400. Here, FIG. 454 shows a state in which the blade member (for example, the right blade member 438 in FIG. 453) is closed, and FIG. 455 shows a state in which the blade member is open.

As described above, the right movable device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right blade member 438 of the start device 400.

Further, the right movable device 480 includes a start device right solenoid 481, a coil member 482, a flapper member 483, an arm member 484, a hook member 485, a spring member 486, and the like. The hook member 485 may be configured as a part of the arm member 484 (the hook member 485 and the arm member 484 may be the same component).

When the start device right solenoid 481 is energized by the main control device, the coil member 482 is excited and the plate-shaped flapper member 483 is attracted to the coil member 482. The flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 are connected to each other, and when the flapper member 483 moves upward, the arm member 484 also moves upward. Further, an arc-shaped hook member 485 is connected to the tip of the arm member 484. Therefore, as the flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 move, the hook member 485 also moves upward (see FIG. 455).

Then, when the hook member 485 moves upward, the hook member 485 pushes up the movable pin 487 inserted in the right blade member 438, and the right blade member 438 shifts from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 453). In this case, the coil member 482 and the flapper member 483 are prevented from coming into contact with each other by a stopper (not shown) (see FIG. 455).

Further, when the start device right solenoid 481 is not energized, the flapper member 483 is arranged at a position away from the coil member 482 by the spring member 486 (or the weight of the spring member 486 and the flapper member 483). (See FIG. 454). Although the right movable device 480 has been described here, the same configuration is adopted for the left movable device 490.

[Characteristics of Start Device] There are many prize-winning device units that are provided with an opening / closing member in order to limit winning in a specific winning area, as in the prior art, but as in the present embodiment, there are many. There is no configuration in which the opening / closing member provided in the starting winning opening keeps opening / closing at all times from the time the power is turned on, and the opening / closing stabilizes the starting winning rate.

The start device 400 randomly changes various symbols by allocating the game balls that have entered the passage port 430 into the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening (winning opening, operating opening) of the normal symbol. It has a function.

Hereinafter, the details of the flow of the game ball in the start device 400 will be described. (1) A passage port 430 is set at the upper part of the start device 400, and the game ball that enters from there heads toward the crune member 434 in one hole, and the time until it is discharged from the crune member 434 is irregular. give away. As a result, it is possible to avoid the rattling due to vibration such as slamming. It is also possible to attach a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor, and a radio wave sensor to the start device 400 to strengthen measures against various types of goto. The crune member 434 is attached to the start device 400 with some play, and can absorb an external impact (such as pounding) by the play, so that the influence of vibration can be avoided.

(2) The game ball discharged from the crune member 434 is guided to a slope-shaped guide passage, and depends on the open / closed state of the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442, which are arranged in the middle of the guide passage and open and close constantly. The sphere path changes as follows.

(A) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is open, the game ball falls from the slope and heads toward the start winning opening of the special symbol held below. (B) When the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 is closed, the game ball passes over the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442. By mounting two blade members on the start device 400, the start device 400 is given two chances to win a prize in the start winning opening of the special symbol.

(3) The game ball that is not picked up by the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442 finally heads for the start winning opening of the normal symbol (the normal symbol operating port in which the normal symbol fluctuates).

Further, the start device 400 has the following features. Out ports are arranged on the left and right of the start winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol, and the out openings at the bottom of the board surface in general models are deleted. Since the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are constantly movable, the actuator of the start device 400 is equipped with a flapper type solenoid instead of the generally used push-pull type solenoid to prevent deterioration due to wear. I'm preventing it.

In addition, since the player has to visually follow how the game balls that have entered the start device 400 are distributed, a special symbol start winning opening is used to visually inform the player of this. In addition, a lamp (LED) is placed at the bottom of the starting winning opening of the normal symbol to have a function to illuminate at the winning timing.

Then, by adopting the start device 400 having such a configuration, the following effects can be exhibited. (1) By mounting the crune member 434, the timing of the game ball entering the start device 400 toward the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which is opened and closed, is given irregularity to the player. The movement of the game ball enhances the feeling of exhilaration, and the game ball is launched at the timing of opening the right blade member 438 or the left blade member 442, which makes it possible to take measures against so-called capture strikes.

(2) By mounting the out port on the start device 400, the area of the out port arranged at the lower part of the board surface can be applied to the start device 400, and the start device 400 and the out port can be integrated to make the start device 400 compact. It is possible to make effective use of the lower part of the board.

(3) By adopting a flapper type solenoid, it is possible to prevent wear of the solenoid itself and ensure durability that can withstand constant movement.

(4) By arranging a lamp (LED) below the starting winning opening of the special symbol and the starting winning opening of the normal symbol and illuminating it at the winning timing, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the prize has been won.

FIG. 456 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33 alternately lights three lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the ordinary symbol by turning on or off the lamps. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

When the game ball passes through the start gate 20 or when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a causes a passage that triggers an operation lottery each time. In the sense of remembering that, the display mode changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the display mode after decreasing by one each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts with the passage. It changes to. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a floating state and a stopped state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device middle starting winning opening 452, it is memorized that the entry has occurred. The display mode changes to the later display mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the display mode after the reduction by one. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the occurrence of the winning ball is memorized. It changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4), and changes to the display mode after the decrease by one each time the change of the special symbol is started triggered by the entry of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). , The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device starting winning opening 452. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored symbols is 0), the variable start winning device is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start to fluctuate (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see FIG. 446]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. A liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 is provided with an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol or a fourth symbol. First, various production images are displayed. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (the design of the cell board (not shown)) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k flows into the passage port 430 of the start device 400 directly below the ball release path 40e. It will be easier.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 is arranged below the liquid crystal display 42 (movable body). Three 7-segment LEDs are arranged on the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment display device 200 fluctuates and displays the 7-segment effect symbol while the special symbol fluctuates, and displays the effect during the big hit game. Further, the 7-segment display device 200 not only serves as a display device but also plays a role as a movable body for production, and a dedicated drive source (for example, a motor or solenoid) and a position (for example, a motor or a solenoid) not shown in the 7-segment display device 200 A sensor (for example, a photo sensor) is mounted. The details of the 7-segment display device 200 will be described in detail later with reference to the following drawings.

Further, a storage display device 300 is arranged at the lower right of the 7-segment display device 200. The storage display device 300 can execute an effect related to memory by emitting light (lighting, turning off, etc.) of the built-in LED.

The storage display device 300 is provided with a first special symbol storage display area M1, a second special symbol storage display area M2, the storage display area X1, and an effect display area X2.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the first special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a). There is.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the second special symbol storage display area M2, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of storages of the second special symbol (the number of displays of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a). There is.

One full-color LED is arranged in the storage display area X1, and the LED is lit, indicating that the special symbol is changing.
One or a plurality of full-color LEDs are arranged in the effect display area X2, and it is shown that the degree of expectation of winning the special symbol lottery increases depending on the lighting color of the LEDs. Since the effect display area X2 is lit in the same color as the internally drawn LED color (holding color), it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

When the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the target LED is changed, but in the present embodiment, the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 are white. The LED is arranged. Therefore, the color change effect cannot be executed in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2. Therefore, when the color change effect of the memory is executed, the lighting color of the effect display area X2 is changed to substitute for the color change effect. However, in this case, since it is difficult to know which memory is the target, it is preferable to blink the target LED.
A full-color LED may be arranged in the first special symbol storage display area M1 and the second special symbol storage display area M2 to execute the color change effect.

[Position of 7-segment display device] FIG. 457 is an enlarged view of the 7-segment display device 200 and its surroundings.

The 7-segment display device 200 has a shape imitating a vehicle, and three 7-segment LEDs are arranged on a portion corresponding to a side surface (side panel) of the loading platform. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display device 200 has a role as a movable body in addition to a role as a display device. The 7-segment display device 200 as a movable body is stationary at the position of the origin, is displaced in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, or the front-rear direction from the origin and is stationary, or is vibrated at any position (small operation). It is possible to rotate and rotate. The direction in which the 7-segment display device 200 is displaced may be other than the above (for example, an oblique direction), or the 7-segment display device 200 may rotate at the time of displacement. Here, two typical positions where the 7-segment display device 200 stays will be described.

FIG. 457 (A): Shows a state in which the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary at the position of the origin (hereinafter, this position is referred to as an “elevation position”). In the ascending position, the lower end of the 7-segment display device 200 is hidden behind the rolling stage 40e, but the entire 7-segment LED portion appears above the rolling stage 40e. Therefore, the 7-segment display device 200 in the ascending position can make the player visually recognize the contents displayed on the 7-segment LED. Further, since the wall portions that partition the front side and the back side of the rolling stage 40e are both made of translucent or transparent members, the 7-segment display device 200 hidden behind the rolling stage 40e. The lower end portion can also be slightly (or easily) visually recognized through these wall portions.

FIG. 457 (B): Shows a state in which the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary at a position where it is lowered to the maximum (hereinafter, this position is referred to as a "lowering position"). In the descending position, almost the entire 7-segment display device 200 is hidden behind the rolling stage 40e. Therefore, it is difficult for the 7-segment display device 200 in the descending position to allow the player to visually recognize the contents displayed on the 7-segment LED in a perfect state.

As described above, the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary in the ascending position in the scene where no special change occurs in the production. On the other hand, when the player is operating the custom setting menu, or when the effect accompanying the fluctuation of the special symbol develops into super reach, the 7-segment display device 200 is the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Retreat to the descending position to improve the visibility of the. Further, as a part of the effect (for example, a notice effect) executed in a scene where the player wants to pay attention to the effect in the process of executing the effect, the 7-segment display device 200 vibrates in the ascending position or is in the ascending position. It displaces further upward than it does, and then stands still or vibrates.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 458 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the start device left start winning opening 454 is provided with a start device left starting winning opening switch 78a for detecting the entry of a game ball.
Further, the game board unit 8 starts corresponding to the start device middle start winning opening 452, the start device right starting winning opening 450, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The in-device start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 are provided.
The start device medium start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening switch 82 are the start device medium starting winning opening 452, the starting device medium starting winning opening 452, and the variable starting winning device 28 (right), respectively. This is for detecting the winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning openings on the left side are installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning openings 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are used. The winning detection signal and the passing detection signal are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal. ..

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. Further, in the game board unit 8, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device correspond to the start device right start winning opening 450 (right movable device 480) and the start device middle start winning opening 452 (left movable device 490), respectively. A left solenoid 491 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, 491 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. , The specific area 31x, the start device right start winning opening 450 and the start device middle start winning opening 452 are opened and closed. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, 491 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal (operation detection means). Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

The detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118, as well as the launch relay terminal plate 118, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, and the payout control device. It is also transmitted to the main control device 70 via 92. The main control device 70 may be configured to transmit the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 in this order via the launch relay terminal plate 118, the launch control board 108, and the payout control device 92.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The process of making the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the jog dial 45a, the direction key 66, etc. (operation means), they are connected to the effect switching button 45. The corresponding contact signal is output (operation detecting means) and input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the saucer illumination board. May be good. In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 and a storage display device 300 are connected to the effect control device 124. The 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 are driven by a control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls these devices. The effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) controls the 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 through a control device (not shown).

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually based on the image data buffered here. Drive to.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

459 and 460 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter command, special game status specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 460 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, when the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 462), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 462), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 462). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 461 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 459).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first It reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the 1-count switch 84, the 2nd count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the start device right starting winning opening switch 81, and the right starting winning opening. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signals from the mouth switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83, and another event is determined according to the event that has occurred. Execute the process. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, the main control CPU 72 draws an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, first special symbol lottery lottery trigger) has occurred.
Further, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 triggers an internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (lottery trigger, second lottery trigger, second special symbol). It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery) has occurred.
Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, or when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device left start winning opening switch 78a, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the normal symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.

When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. Regarding the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80, the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81, or the right starting winning opening switch 82, another flowchart is used. It will be described later.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by turning on and off the three LEDs of the normal symbol display device 33 in order, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and among the upper and lower three LEDs, for example, the upper LED is turned on. It is possible to display the stop at the time of non-winning and to display the stop at the time of winning with either of the two LEDs below turned on. Regarding which of the two LEDs below is to be turned on, the main control CPU 72 determines which of the two LEDs is to be turned on, based on the hit stop symbol number determined by the hit lottery, and the stop symbol (hit symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33. The display mode of is determined.

For example, when the winning probability of a normal symbol is set to about 1/1 in the non-time shortened state, the distribution ratio between the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2 existing in two types is "1300: 1". That is, the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 1 is "1299/1300", and the probability of corresponding to the winning symbol 2 is "1/1300". Then, when the hit symbol 1 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is short-opened (opened for 0.1 seconds), so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, when the winning symbol 2 is applicable, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds), so that there is a chance that the variable starting winning device 28 can enter the game ball even in the non-time shortened state. Occurs.

By setting the distribution rate of the winning symbol in this way, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuates 1300 times, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time at a rate of about once. In the time-reduced state, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time regardless of whether it corresponds to the hit symbol 1 or the hit symbol 2. In this case, the opening pattern can be different between the hit symbol 1 and the hit symbol 2. Further, when the variable start winning device 28 is long-opened in the non-time shortened state, the main control CPU 72 transmits a variable start winning device long open start command to the effect control device 124.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 78a, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command. The number of prize balls can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game. For example, the number of prize balls of the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, the number of winning balls of the starting winning opening corresponding to the normal symbol is one, and the first large winning opening The number of prize balls in the second major winning opening is 15, and the number of prize balls in the normal winning opening is four. Information on the number of prize balls can also be transmitted to the effect control device 124 as a prize ball content command.

Step S207a: The main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 that are always movable from the time the power is turned on. Details will be described later in FIG. 489.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) and normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 462). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the start device middle start winning opening switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the first special symbol. To do. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol or the start device left start winning opening switch 78a. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, it is necessary for the normal symbol lottery. Various random number values (ordinary random numbers per symbol, etc.) are acquired. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired various random number values in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area reserve flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 462).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 463). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 463). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 462).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, lottery element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (1st lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are preliminarily (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 ( Memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 463).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 463). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 463). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 464), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 462) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 464) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 464) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 464) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (2nd lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 464) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46). Therefore, here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 463).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 464 and step S46 in FIG. 465) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (when the ball enters the start device middle start winning opening 452 or the start device right start winning opening 450) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). ) Is executed for each. Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 464) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 465). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 464) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 465). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 464) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 465). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to "00H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" when it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 464) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 465).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 462) will be described. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display processing. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a three-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 3 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively obtain a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is three in total, these may be collectively referred to as "three rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the three-round jackpot. As the type of jackpot, not only the jackpot of 3 rounds but also the jackpot of other rounds may be provided.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 462). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (time reduction function operation flag) (time reduction state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). A gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a fixed probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

The gaming state includes at least a normal gaming state (first state) and a time reduction state (second state) different from the normal gaming state.
By executing such a process, when the transition condition to the time reduction state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode), the main control CPU 72 is displayed. It is possible to shift from the normal gaming state (first state) to the time saving state (second state) (state transition means).

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 prizes are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or for a plurality of times). It is excited, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to obtain a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.) If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small hit game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, "2 round jackpot", "3 round jackpot 1, 2", "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "10 round jackpot" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "2 round jackpot" and "3 round jackpot 1 and 2" are started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of jackpot, while "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot" are started. Is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. Of the "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot", the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first variable winning device 30 operates in the remaining rounds.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "3 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "1st winning symbol", "3 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "2nd winning symbol", and "2 round jackpot" corresponds to "3rd winning symbol". Corresponds to the big hit of "design". In addition, "10 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "4th winning symbol" (big hit when passing the specific area 31x), and "7 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of "5th winning symbol" (passing the specific area 31x). The "4 round big hit" corresponds to the small hit of the "6th winning symbol" (the big hit when passing through the specific area 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In addition, when a specified number of prizes (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first prize opening 30b is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[Second Winning Symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "second winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which three rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[Third winning symbol] In the processing during the special symbol stop display, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol", the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the second round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which two rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 100 times).

[4th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fourth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the seventh round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player six rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the fourth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player three rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 6 times).

As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of which of the winning symbols is applicable, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, it is possible to shift to the "time reduction state" only for a part of the winning symbols among the plurality of winning symbols.

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

In this way, when the game ball is launched into the left-handed area (first area) and the jackpot (predetermined first winning) is met, the main control CPU 72 enables the jackpot game (first game) to be executed (1st game). First game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is launched into the right-handed area (second area) and corresponds to a small hit (predetermined second winning), the main control CPU 72 may lead to a small hit game (second). (Game) can be executed (second game execution means).

Further, when the game ball is launched into the left-handed area (first area) and the winning symbol 2 is won in the normal symbol lottery (predetermined third winning), the main control CPU 72 receives the small hit winning (predetermined third). 2 The open game (third game) of the variable start winning device 28 that may correspond to (winning) can be executed (third game execution means).

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 462). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol (so-called priority). digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol is applicable), the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then erases (consumes) the remaining random numbers by 1. Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that a control in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored may be adopted without setting such a priority for each special symbol (so-called forward digestion). Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 462), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 468), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. To do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 with respect to the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The above-mentioned preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 468).

[See FIG. 468: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. Further, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the big hit is set to 1/319, and the probability of winning the small hit is set to 1/6. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small hit winning probabilities, the jackpot value range and the small hit value range are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 462).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of disconnection (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a fluctuation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special fluctuation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, and the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The fluctuation pattern includes various fluctuation patterns such as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern, and the like (the same applies to a large hit and a small hit). The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, may be common table contents regardless of the number of working memories at the start of fluctuations, and may be a table according to the winning type at the time of winning. It may be the content.

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 29.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation), whereas the "reach fluctuation" The "pattern" corresponds to a longer fluctuation time (for example, about 30.0 seconds to 150.0 seconds).

The fluctuation pattern may be a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream) is executed. The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the effect symbol changes once or a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: 1st pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: 2nd pseudo variation). Pseudo-variation) is a variation in which the pseudo-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice. Further, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: 3rd pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed 3 times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: 4th pseudo variation). (Fluctuation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed four times.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is only "third winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 470 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "99" and "1" is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, the "first winning symbol" and the "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 99/100 (= 99%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100 minutes. It is 1 (= 1%) of. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 5 times, or 7 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "6 times (or 10 times)" means that when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 6 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times, the time It means that the shortened state ends.

Further, "100 times (or 104 times)" means that the time is shortened when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 104 times. It means that the state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 100/100 (= 100%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
The value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown in the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or the time reduction.

[See FIG. 468: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "second winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means). When the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the non-time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset to OFF (00H), and the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the time shortened state. In this case, the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set to ON (01H).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the three types is "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fourth winning symbol", "fourth winning symbol A", "fourth winning symbol B", "fourth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 472 is a diagram showing a constituent column of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "50", "14", "36" has the denominator. It corresponds to the ratio when it is set to 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fourth winning symbol", the "fifth winning symbol", and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol". Is 14/100 (= 14%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol" is 36/100 (= 36%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table also defines, for example, 2-byte command data as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the "fourth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the small hit this time, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H02H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in, for example, the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the stop symbol number at the time of small hit for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol" or "6th winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 6 times (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal or short. Times) Granted.

By using the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol" is applicable (the 4th winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol are limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time is shortened. It is possible that the migration conditions are satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See FIG. 468: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determining process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 467: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) to the next jump destination, and generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 462).

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 468). When the main control CPU 72 displays the stopped symbol for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 generates a confirmation command and erases the symbol changing flag. The generated confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 467), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing even in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a confirmation command. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed (the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time-cutting function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time-cutting state", the first number-of-times cutting counter value related to the time-cutting state is a predetermined value (for example, 6 times or 100 times). The second count cut counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a specified value (for example, 10 times or 104 times). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
The time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the second cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-of-times cutting counter values (first number-of-times cutting counter value or second number-of-times cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol missed fluctuation (including the small hit fluctuation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed 6 times in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. Will be done. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced six times in the time-reduced state, the time-saving function activation flag is not reset, and then four times in the time-reduced state, the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the out-of-order fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). Good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, 6 times), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition that is satisfied.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 462) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 sets the time saving status indicator lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 also emits a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. When the launch position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 has all the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "10 rounds" (for example, all the lamps 38a, 38b, 38c). Generates a lighting signal for the lamp). Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 generates a lighting signal for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "2 rounds". .. Since the three indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the five types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly convey the details to the player.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the large winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed at the time of a big hit or a small hit, and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. The "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 478 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) that is operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is three, and three of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the third round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially three rounds of balls.

[Third winning design]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is two, and two of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the second round takes 29.0 seconds during each round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the third winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain two rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 477: Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. To do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit is the first round to the final round, the first big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 3 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 3-land jackpot (first winning symbol and second winning symbol). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a command for the number of continuous operations. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "3 rounds", so that the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 476).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table at the time of small hit and selects the opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 480 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In the present embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. The number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[Refer to Fig. 479: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the standby time (interval timer) between the opening of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 476).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “important”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "in the big hit game" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is "in a big role". The flag of "during big hit (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the process when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 475).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the second special winning opening. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 479)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed per opening at the time of a small hit (the upper limit of the number of winning balls). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps of steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes the process when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the jackpot game is executed (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 479)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 475). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the opening count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 481). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 483 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has been started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific area operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area reserve flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the release time of the specific area 31x is Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x ends (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 482).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 482).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol is the same, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through the specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fourth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning opening for each round at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the release timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbols related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit are "4th winning symbol" to "6th winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time). Shortened state transition means, time saving function operating means). In the present embodiment, when the game ball corresponds to the "fourth winning symbol" to the "sixth winning symbol" and passes through the specific area 31x, the time is always shortened. Only the winning symbols may be shifted to the time reduction state.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 482).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 485 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. The open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[4th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. This is the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the 5th winning symbol and the 6th winning symbol). In addition, 9 out of 9 rounds are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the 4th winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain 9 rounds of balls.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 7 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 6), and 6 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the seventh round, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round to open the first large winning opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially six rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 4 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 3), and 3 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is 29. It operates during each round for 0 seconds to open the first prize opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 477) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 484)). Executes the countdown of the release timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 477) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 484)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 475). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, in order to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in the present embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 481). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process]
FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening closing process. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 475). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the large winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the opening count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release count counter after the increment has reached the set release count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 479). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 475). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. To do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the jackpot other setting process during the previous special symbol change preprocessing (step S2414 in FIG. 468) and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passing process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 484.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 6 times (or 10 times), 100 times (or 104 times)). To do. The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "6" or "100" is set as an initial value. The second special symbol value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" or "104" is set as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the transition condition to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) in which the opening time is extended (advantageous gaming state transitioning means).

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and also deletes "in small hit game" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as the internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 467) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Solenoid management process]
FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the solenoid management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described. This process is a detailed description of step S207a of FIG. 462.

Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the operation at power-on is completed. If it is immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 at the time of turning on the power are not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810.

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes the power-on operation process. In this process, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 are operated in a predetermined movable pattern. As a result, the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 of the start device 400 operate based on a constant movable pattern from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. Then, when the power-on operation is completed, it is determined in step S2800 that the operation is completed (Yes), so that step S2810 is skipped thereafter.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 462).

FIG. 490 is a timing chart showing the movable patterns of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491.

[Time t0]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t1]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device is activated.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t2]
The right solenoid 481 of the start device ends its operation and becomes inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t3]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is activated.

[Time t4]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 ends its operation and becomes inactive.

[Time t5]
The start device right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The start device left solenoid 491 is inactive.

The time T1 from the time t0 to the time t1 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T2 from the time t1 to the time t2 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T3 from the time t2 to the time t3 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T4 from the time t3 to the time t4 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T5 from the time t4 to the time t5 is, for example, 500 ms.

Then, the time TA from the time t0 to the time t5 is one cycle (for example, 800 ms), and the movable pattern of this one cycle is repeatedly executed from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the power is turned off. A plurality of types of movable patterns for one cycle may be prepared, and the plurality of types of movable patterns may be repeatedly executed.

By applying such a movable pattern, the game ball that has entered the start device 400 is entered into the start winning opening (starting winning opening 452 in the starting device or starting winning opening 450 in the starting device right) of the first special symbol. On the other hand, more game balls can be entered into the starting winning opening (starting device left starting winning opening 454) of the normal symbol.

Specifically, assuming that 12 game balls enter the passage port 430 of the start device 400 per minute, on average, two of the game balls enter the start device right start winning opening 450. Two more game balls enter the start device starting winning opening 452, and the remaining eight game balls enter the starting device left starting winning opening 454.

Further, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 operates the left blade member 442 (movable body) and the right blade member 438 (movable body) in a predetermined movable pattern in the normal gaming state (first state). It is possible to enable the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 to operate in a predetermined movable pattern even in the time shortened state (second state) (control means).

[Game Flow (Part 1)] FIG. 491 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] During a game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the start winning opening 452 in the start device or the right starting winning opening 450 of the start device (the first in a state where the memory of the second special symbol does not exist). (If the memory of the special symbol exists), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the normal mode (non-time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol you correspond to, after the big hit game ends, you will drive. Move to mode.

[Game Flow (Part 2)] FIG. 492 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode. [F1] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the normal mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery is "missing", the state of [F1] normal mode is restarted.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[Game Flow (Part 3)] FIG. 493 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode. [F8] During a game in the drive mode, when the game ball enters the start device left start winning opening 454 of the start device 400 or the start device middle start winning opening 452 of the start device 400 (the memory of the second special symbol exists). (If the memory of the first special symbol exists), the [F2] first special symbol fluctuates. The drive mode may be in a non-time reduction state.

[F3] If it becomes "missing" in the first special symbol lottery, it will be restarted from the state of [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)" and the [F7] second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the drive mode (time shortened state), no matter what winning symbol you correspond to, after the big hit game ends, you will be in the drive mode. Move to.

[Game Flow (Part 4)] FIG. 494 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode. [F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), the [F12] second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in "missing", the drive mode is restarted from the [F8] drive mode. However, in the case of the time saving final fluctuation at which the time shortening state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode at the end of this out-of-time fluctuation.

[F14] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F17] fourth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F19] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 1/6)", which corresponds to the [F20] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. The [F6] jackpot game is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of whether you are staying in the normal mode (non-time reduction state) or the drive mode (time reduction state), after the jackpot game is over, , Shift to drive mode.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the display mode of the 7-segment display device 200 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and "winning symbol". The visual impact as "is poor. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like, and the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment production design is displayed on the screen.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The 7-segment effect symbol displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 includes, for example, a 7-segment effect symbol on the left side, a 7-segment effect symbol in the center, and a 7-segment effect symbol on the right side. It is displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the device 200. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, each of the 7-segment effect symbols constitutes a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a sequence of symbols is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

FIGS. 495 and 496 are continuous views showing examples of effect images corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 495 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three rows of effect symbol Hz in the upper right region of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the area on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner ("4"-"6"-"7").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since all four LEDs of the first special symbol storage display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol storage. Since all the LEDs in the display area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 495 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is scrolled. By doing so, the variable display effect is started. The variation display of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the special symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from four to three in conjunction with this. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the memory of the first special symbol has been reduced to three, and the memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach in an easy-to-understand manner what was done.

Further, before the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is not lit, but after the start of the fluctuation, the LED of the storage display area X1 is lit, and the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed. Keeps lighting until.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 495 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, first, the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are left. The production pattern stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number "8" as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped, and the effect symbol "8" on the left side of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. The production design that represents is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 496 (D): Next, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "3" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 496 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "1" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 has the number as the medium effect symbol of Hz. The production symbol representing "1" is stopped. In this case, since the combination of the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are both out of "8"-"1"-"3", this fluctuation is normal. It is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the "off" of. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the LED of the storage display area X1 is turned off. As a result, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variation display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

[Example of production when hit symbol 2 is applicable]
FIGS. 497 to 500 are continuous diagrams showing an example of an effect when the result of the ordinary symbol lottery in the non-time shortened state corresponds to the winning symbol 2.

[Before the start of variable display production]
In FIG. 497 (A): In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached mode ("9"-"1"-"6"). Further, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect symbol Hz is stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("9"-"1"-"6").

Further, in the storage display device 300, since one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is one, and the second special symbol storage display. Since all the LEDs in the area M2 are turned off, it indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 497 (B): When the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls to fluctuate to display the variation. The production is started. Since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the first special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment is selected.

[Animal chance production]
Further, in the illustrated example, an effect in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen is executed. This effect is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the hit symbol 2 in the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) in spite of the non-time reduction state.

[Occurrence of notice production (1st stage)]
In FIG. 497 (C): After a while from the start of fluctuation, a picture image displaying some character appears on the screen, and the advance notice effect is executed in a mode of stopping at the center of the screen. In this example, for example, the pattern image appears from the left side of the screen and is moved to the center of the screen as it is.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating and the game ball is flowing down toward the variable start winning device 28.

[Occurrence of notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 498 (D): Following the first-stage advance notice effect, the second-stage advance notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. By executing such a notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may reach.

In addition, the animal chance production is continuing, and the production is being carried out in which the animal character utters the line "Animal chance right-handed." In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is activated and the game ball is entered.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 498 (E): Following the advance notice effect, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped.

Further, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the memory of the second special symbol is increased by one, so that one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 is lit.
The variable start winning device 28 becomes inactive after a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) has elapsed or after a predetermined number (for example, one) of winnings. In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is closed because one game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28. When the variable start winning device 28 is closed, the animal chance production ends. The specified number may be two or more.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 498 (F): Next, the effect symbol representing the number "4" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol Hz of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "4" has stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 499 (G): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also produced by the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number "3" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "3" is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "" is stopped.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 499 (H): When the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variable display effect. It will be started. Since the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of LEDs lit in the second special symbol storage display area M2 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol here, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit winning is selected. Here, when the control of preferential digestion of the second special symbol is adopted, the memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested. On the other hand, when the control of the forward digestion of the special symbols is adopted, the fluctuations of the special symbols are executed in the order of memory. In the illustrated example, since the memory of the first special symbol does not exist, the variation of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which control is adopted.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 499 (I): After a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped as the 7-segment effect symbol on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 is stopped. As the left effect symbol of Hz, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 500 (J): Next, as the 7-segment effect symbol on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol representing the number "2" is stopped, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is on the right. As a result, the production symbol representing the number "2" has stopped.

[Stop the middle production design]
In FIG. 500 (K): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. When the result of this internal lottery is a small hit and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is also the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the stop display effect is performed in the form of a small hit. In the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the alphabet "A" is stopped as the central 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect symbol "A" of the alphabet is used as the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "" is stopped. In addition, an animal character is displayed large on the liquid crystal display 42. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that "it corresponds to a small hit via the animal chance". Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a small hit. Then, after this, a small hit game is executed.

[Direction during a major role]
FIGS. 501 and 502 are continuous views that partially show an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game. In addition, the following production during the important role is an production executed by the liquid crystal display 42.

[Big hit game start]
FIG. 501 (A): When the jackpot game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating "right-handed" is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 501 (B): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, three circles are displayed along with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining two ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, the number of balls that can be obtained is 3 rounds, the current round is the 1st round of the 3 rounds, and a circle is displayed each time one round that can be obtained is advanced. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○" marks increases according to the winning symbols. For example, when the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3", but the winning symbol is the "third winning symbol". In this case, the number of "○" is "2". If the winning symbol is the "4th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "9", and if the winning symbol is the "5th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "○". The number of "○" is "6", and when the winning symbol is the "sixth winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3".

[3rd round]
In FIG. 501 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the third round, all three circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the third round are completed.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 502 (D): Then, the effect of displaying the character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed by using the end time (ending time) of the big hit game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" will be started from now on. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to urge the forgetting to remove the prepaid card such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or a notification such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" is prevented. The notification may be executed.

[Big hit game finished, time shortened state]
In FIG. 502 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the woman is riding. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of running on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving medium effect] In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time saving state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) that displays the background image corresponding to the time saving state (advantageous game state) is performed. Will be executed.

[Right-handed suggestion effect] In addition, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed at the upper part of the screen. In the right-handed suggestion effect, right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect may be continuously executed when the game state is in the time shortened state, or may be executed only at the start of the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number of times display effect] Further, the remaining number of times display effect is executed at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining 10 times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is deducted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state, and is deducted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
503 to 505 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 503 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a state in which a car in which a woman is riding is traveling on the ground. The combination of the 7-segment effect symbols displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7", and the combination of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 is "7"-"7". "-" 7 "is the winning item. This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.

[Start of fluctuation of special symbol]
In FIG. 503 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, one memory of the first special symbol is stored (one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit). Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also change. To start. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 503 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached manner, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. Z1 is also displayed as a stop in the form of being off. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and four game balls enter the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, four memories of the second special symbol are stored (all four LEDs in the second special symbol display area M2 are lit).

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining 10 times.

In FIG. 504 (D): Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 starts to change, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also change. To start. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Starting small hits, opening the second big prize opening]
In FIG. 504 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 (combination of "5"-"2"-"6"). , The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6" of the liquid crystal display 42) and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. .. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as 9 times remaining.

In FIG. 504 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be inserted into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 505 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. To do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End small hit, start big hit game]
In FIG. 505 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 501 (B), and the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game proceeds. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to substantially obtain three rounds of balls. When the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role production dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

506 and 507 are continuous views showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated, although it is different in the final fluctuation of the time shortened state.

Here, it is assumed that four memories of the second special symbol exist before the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. Further, as the remaining number of times display effect, the information of "remaining 4 times" is displayed. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of variation of special symbol] In FIG. 506 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 is accompanied by the start. Starts to fluctuate, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start to fluctuate. Since the situation here is not in a time-reduced state, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is low even if the player passes through the starting gate 20. Therefore, it is difficult for the variable start winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates up to four times.

[Stop display effect] In FIG. 506 (B): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery relating to the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") of the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42 are displayed. The symbol Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small hit mode. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining three times.

[Start of small hit, opening of second big winning opening] In Fig. 506 (C): And when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened and the car with the female character is on it. The effect of increasing the speed and moving to the right side of the screen is executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area] In FIG. 507 (D): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to a small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is the fourth winning symbol. It is assumed that it was. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and issues a line such as "Yeah! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game] In FIG. 507 (E): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 501 (B), and the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game proceeds.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, major role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 or 7-segment display device 200, storage display device 300, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number of times The display effects and the like are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and 7-segment display device. Effect management process (step S403), normal symbol effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410). And other processing (step S412) including the subroutine group. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, confirmation command, status specification command, round number command, firing position specification command, error notification command , Big hit end effect command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, number cut counter command, various error commands, variable start winning device long open start command, handle detection command, etc.

Step S401: In the working memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the effect using the storage display device 300. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, effect content related to the important role production, etc., content of various advance notice effects). Executes the process of determining. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes such as during the time reduction and during the pseudo time reduction. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect contents related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the 7-segment display device effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the 7-segment display device 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content (content related to the 7-segment effect symbol) to be displayed on the 7-segment display device 200. It is preferable that the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol basically perform the same operation, but they may perform different operations. When different operations are performed, for example, the timing at which the effect symbol Hz and the 7-segment effect symbol stop may be different, or the stop symbol may be different.

Step S403a: In the normal symbol effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect (animal chance effect) when a chance state for the second special symbol occurs. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the animal chance effect between the time when the variable start prize device long open start command is received and the time when the variable start prize device 28 is closed. To do.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 transmits the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of lighting one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may determine the effect pattern and effect scenario of the color change effect (for example, the display color of the LED in the storage display area X1 and the display color of the LED in the effect display area X2). it can.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of turning off one LED of the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED of the second special symbol storage display area M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. , Select an effect of lighting the LED of the storage display area X1. The LED of the storage display area X1 is selected to be turned off when the change of the special symbol is completed. Further, when the LED of the effect display area X2 is turned on, the effect of turning off the LED of the effect display area X2 when the change of the special symbol is completed is selected.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 508).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operating time process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 467) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (reach) for the advance notice effect. Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. The control information of is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 manages the state related to the demo and controls the content of the demo effect to be executed according to the state.

Here, the "demo effect" is a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in full operation (in addition to the case of a so-called customer waiting state, the first and second special symbol operation memories are 0 and the first And when the second special symbol has not changed and the game is temporarily interrupted due to the passage of a predetermined time while the player's hand is away from the grip unit 16) That is. The effect control CPU 126 displays a confirmation screen (a screen indicating a symbol stop state) as a demo effect, or plays a demo movie, depending on the state related to the demo.

By the way, two embodiments are assumed for the demo management process. In each case, the content of the demonstration effect is controlled according to the stage after the game of the pachinko machine 1 has transitioned to the non-production state, but one of them controls the operation by the player with particular priority. (1st embodiment). On the other hand, the other is an embodiment in which control is performed with particular priority given to effectively explaining the model (second embodiment). The specific contents of the demo management process in each embodiment will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 508) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 508). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time) and stop of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the time shortened state, and finally becomes small. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the hit is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol fluctuates in the non-time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 has, for example, the effect symbol Hz, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the fourth in the state where the "drive mode" is continued or the normal mode. The process of varying the symbol Z2 and finally selecting the effect symbol Hz corresponding to the small hit, the 7-segment effect symbol, and the effect pattern for stopping and displaying the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When determining the variable effect pattern at the time of a small hit, a large hit, or a miss, it is possible to also determine the effect pattern of the pseudo continuous notice effect (pseudo-ream).

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process. The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time saving and medium effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control CPU 126 has a case where the memory of the second special symbol exists when the state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state even when the internal state is the non-time shortened state. Select a background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process during the display of the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 510), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Demo Management Process (First Embodiment)] FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the demo management process in the first embodiment.

The demo management process is a process of controlling the content to be displayed / reproduced as a demo effect and managing the state related to the demo (effect control means), and is called in the process of preprocessing the effect symbol change (step S602 in FIG. 511). Is executed. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S300: The effect control CPU 126 executes the standby time counter update process. Here, the "waiting time counter" is a counter used for managing the elapsed time after transitioning to a predetermined state. The value of the standby time counter is stored in the counter area of the RAM 130, for example, and is set to "0" as an initial value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 counts up the value of the standby time counter.

Step S302: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “standby A”. Here, the "demo state" is the current state related to the demo, and in the present embodiment, there are a total of three types including "movie playback" and "standby B" in addition to "standby A". A demo state is provided. The demo state is managed as a flag by the effect control CPU 126 and stored in the flag area of the RAM 130. Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, "standby A" is set as the initial value in the demo state.

In this process, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is "standby A" based on the value of the corresponding flag (demo state flag). As a result of the confirmation, if the demo state is "standby A" (step S302: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S310. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "standby A" (step S302: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S330.

Step S310: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the process of causing the operation interface (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as “operation I / F”) has already been executed. Here, the "operation interface" is a simple interface that guides operations such as adjusting the volume and brightness and displaying a custom setting menu, and is a lower right (predetermined) screen of the liquid crystal display 42 under predetermined conditions. It is displayed in the area).

As a result of the confirmation, if the process of causing the operation I / F to appear has already been executed (step S310: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S320. On the other hand, if the process of causing the operation I / F to appear has not yet been executed (step S310: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S312.

Step S312: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last symbol was determined. If the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the game has never been played after the power is turned on (so-called one-morning state), it is confirmed whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. As a result of the confirmation, if 30 seconds have elapsed (step S312: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S314. On the other hand, if 30 seconds have not yet elapsed (step S312: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S318.

Step S314: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of causing the operation I / F to appear. As a result, the operation I / F is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S316: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body management process at the time of demonstration. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the movable body (7-segment display device 200) according to the demo state. The specific contents of the movable body management process during the demonstration will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S318: The effect control CPU 126 displays a confirmation screen. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 126 is not in the morning state, the effect symbol Hz when the special symbol is finally confirmed and the confirmation screen corresponding to the effect symbol Hz are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. On the other hand, in the case of one state in the morning, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect symbol Hz by the fixed symbol (for example, the deviation of "2"-"4"-"6") and the fixation corresponding to the fixed symbol Hz. The screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S320: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the demo state transitioned to “standby A” based on the value of the standby time counter. As a result of the confirmation, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the transition to the "standby A" (step S320: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S318 to continue displaying the confirmation screen. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has elapsed (step S320: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S322.

Step S322: The effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state to “movie playback”.

Step S324: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body management process at the time of demonstration. Specifically, the movable body (7-segment display device 200) is controlled according to the demo state (“movie playback”) updated in the previous step S322.

Step S326: The effect control CPU 126 starts playing the customer waiting demo movie. Here, the "customer waiting demo movie" is a video composed of a compact demonstration of a game executed on the pachinko machine 1, and is composed of, for example, a length of about one minute. The customer waiting demo movie corresponds to a video played in a so-called customer waiting state on a general gaming machine.

Step S330: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “standby B”. As a result of the confirmation, when the demo state is "standby B" (step S330: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S332. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "standby B" (step S330: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S340.

Step S332: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the demo state transitioned to “standby B” based on the value of the standby time counter. As a result of the confirmation, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the transition to the "standby B" (step S332: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S318 to continue displaying the confirmation screen. On the other hand, when the predetermined time has elapsed (step S332: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S322 to update the demo state to "movie playback".

Step S340: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the customer waiting demo movie is being played. As a result of the confirmation, if the customer waiting demo movie is being played (step S340: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller. As a result, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie will continue as it is. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo movie is not being played, that is, when the playback is finished (step S340: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S342.

Step S342: The effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state to “standby B”.

Step S344: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body management process at the time of demonstration. Specifically, the movable body (7-segment display device 200) is controlled according to the demo state (“standby B”) updated in the previous step S342.

Step S346: The effect control CPU 126 resets the value of the standby time counter to “0”. Then, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S318 to display the confirmation screen.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 511) of the caller.

The timing at which the operation I / F appears is not limited to 30 seconds after the symbol is confirmed, and may appear at a timing different from this. Further, the display position of the operation I / F is not limited to the lower right of the screen, and may be another position.

Regarding the demo state "standby A", there are two states (for example, "standby A1 (state with operation I / F display)" and "standby A2 (operation I / F display)" depending on whether or not the operation I / F is displayed. It may be subdivided into two) "state of nothing"), and the control may be different in each state.

Further, in the above example, the operation I / F is always displayed in the "standby B" in the demo state, but the operation I / F may not be displayed in the "standby B". That is, regarding "standby B", there are two states (for example, "standby B1 (state with operation I / F display)" and "standby B2 (without operation I / F display)" depending on whether or not the operation I / F is displayed. It may be subdivided into two states), and the control may be different in each state.

In addition, when playing the demo movie waiting for customers, a wording such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game" may be displayed together with the wording to prevent the user from being absorbed in the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to simply call attention to the prevention of entanglement at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

[Demo-time movable body management process] FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the demo-time movable body management process.

The movable body management process during the demonstration is a process of controlling the operation of the movable body (7-segment display device 200) during the demonstration production and the lighting mode of the 7-segment LED provided on the movable body according to the demonstration state (movable). Body control means). The movable body management process at the time of demonstration is accompanied by a process of causing an operation I / F to appear in the process of demo management process or an update of the demo state (steps S316, S324, S344 in FIG. 512), or at the time of operation detection described later. In the process, each is called and executed with the reset of the demo state (step S372 in FIG. 514). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S350: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “movie playback”. As a result of the confirmation, when the demo state is "movie playback" (step S350: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S352. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "movie playback" (step S350: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S356.

Step S352: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the 7-segment display device 200 is in the ascending position. The effect control CPU 126 can confirm the position of the 7-segment display device 200 based on the detection signal from the position sensor mounted on the 7-segment display device 200. As a result of the confirmation, when the 7-segment display device 200 is in the ascending position (step S352: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller. As a result, the 7-segment display device 200 is maintained in the ascending position. On the other hand, when the 7-segment display device 200 is not in the ascending position (step S352: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S354.

Step S354: The effect control CPU 126 displaces the 7-segment display device 200 to the ascending position and vibrates the 7-segment display device 200, and at the same time, makes the 7-segment LED a demo mode (for example, a pictogram imitating a smile that does not correspond to a hit or miss. Aspect) to light up.

Step S356: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “standby B”. As a result of the confirmation, when the demo state is "standby B" (step S356: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S357. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "standby B", that is, when the demo state is "standby A" (step S356: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S360.

Step S357: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary. As a result of the confirmation, when the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary (step S357: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller. As a result, the 7-segment display device 200 is maintained in a stationary state in the ascending position. On the other hand, when the 7-segment display device 200 is not stationary (step S357: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S358.

Step S358: The effect control CPU 126 makes the 7-segment display device 200 stationary. As a result, the 7-segment display device 200 is in a stationary state in the ascending position.

Step S360: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the 7-segment display device 200 is in the lowered position. As a result of the confirmation, when the 7-segment display device 200 is in the lowered position (step S360: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller. As a result, the 7-segment display device 200 is maintained in a stationary state in the lowered position. On the other hand, when the 7-segment display device 200 is not in the descending position (step S360: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S362.

Step S362: The 7-segment display device 200 is displaced to the lowered position to stand still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the demo management process (FIG. 512) of the caller.

By such control, when the demo state is updated from "standby A" to "movie playback", the 7-segment display device 200 is displaced to the ascending position and vibrates, and then the demo state is updated to "standby B". When this is done, the vibration stops, and after that, it continues to stand still in the ascending position unless the demo state is reset to "standby A". Then, when the demo state is reset to "standby A", the 7-segment display device 200 is displaced to the descending position and comes to rest.

Regarding the "movie playback" in the demo state, there are two states (for example, "movie playback 1 (vibration state)" and "movie" depending on the operating state (presence or absence of vibration) of the movable body (7-segment display device 200). It is also possible to subdivide into two (reproduction 2 (stationary state)) and make the control different in each state.

[Processing at the time of operation detection] FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the processing at the time of operation detection.

In the operation detection processing, the operation by the player (while waiting for the symbol to change) is detected when the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in operation, specifically, the handle is detected (specifically, the handle is detected). It is called when the handle detection command is received from the main control CPU 72) or when the operation of the effect switching button 45, the jog dial 45a, the direction key 66, etc. is detected (contact signals are output from various operation means). It is a process that is executed by (directing control means). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S370: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo state reset process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 resets the standby time counter and the demo state. The specific contents of the demo state reset process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S372: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body management process at the time of demonstration. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the movable body (7-segment display device 200) according to the demo state reset in the previous step S370.

Step S374: The effect control CPU 126 displays a confirmation screen on the liquid crystal display 42. If the operation is detected while the customer waiting demo movie is being played, the effect control CPU 126 interrupts the playback of the customer waiting demo movie and then displays the confirmation screen.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

[Demo state reset process (first embodiment)] FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the demo state reset process.

The demo state reset process is called when the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in production and the command for demo production is first received or the operation is detected by the player. This is the process to be executed (effect control means). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S380: The effect control CPU 126 resets the value of the standby time counter to “0”.

Step S382: The effect control CPU 126 resets the demo state to "standby A".

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

[Change in demo state immediately after power-on (first embodiment)]
FIG. 516 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in the demo state immediately after the power is turned on according to the first embodiment, and changes in the screen (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 (movable body). Is. The ON / OFF of the "input sensor" in the figure means the presence / absence of signal output indicating contact with the firing handle and operation of various operation means such as the effect switching button 45 and the direction key 66, that is, the operation by the player. Indicates the presence or absence of detection. In addition, the relative ratio of the band lengths in each of the illustrated items does not match the relative ratio of the actual time lengths. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0] In FIG. 516 (A): A fixed confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In FIG. 516 (B): At this time, "standby A" is set as an initial value in the demo state. In FIGS. 516 (C) and (D): At this point, the operation I / F has not yet been displayed. Further, the movable body is in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED is lit in a manner representing a fixed symbol. In FIG. 516 (E): Further, since the input sensor is OFF, it can be seen that the firing handle is not touched and various operating means are not operated.

[Time t1] In FIGS. 516 (C) and (D): When 30 seconds have passed from the time t0 (display of the confirmation screen), the operation I / F is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal screen. Further, in synchronization with the display of the operation I / F, the movable body is displaced to the descending position and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off. As a result, the visibility of the operation I / F displayed on the liquid crystal screen is enhanced. In FIG. 516 (B): At this time, the demo state remains "standby A" and does not change.

[Time t2] In FIG. 516 (B): When a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses from the time t0 (display of the confirmation screen), the demo state is updated to "movie playback". (A) and (C) in FIGS. 516: With the update of the demo state, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen. Since the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is executed on the front side of the layer on which the operation I / F is displayed, the operation I / F becomes invisible during the playback of the customer waiting demo movie. In FIG. 516 (D): At this time, the movable body is displaced to the ascending position and vibrates, and the 7-segment LED starts lighting in the demo mode.

[Time t3] In FIG. 516 (B): When the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is completed, the demo state is updated to "standby B". (A), (C) in FIG. 516: With the update of the demo state, the fixed confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen. In addition, since the playback of the customer waiting demo movie executed in the front layer ends, the operation I / F is displayed again (returns to a visible state). In FIG. 516 (D): At this time, the vibration of the movable body is stopped. Therefore, the movable body stands still in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED continues to light in the demo mode.

[Time t4] In FIG. 516 (B): When a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed from time t3 (display of the confirmation screen), the demo state is updated to "movie playback" again. (A) and (C) in FIGS. 516: With the update of the demo state, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started again on the liquid crystal screen. As a result, the operation I / F becomes invisible again. In FIG. 516 (D): At this time, the state of the movable body does not change. Therefore, the movable body continues to stand still in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED continues to light in the demo mode.

After that, as long as the input sensor is OFF, that is, until the firing handle is touched or various operating means are operated, the demo state is between "movie playback" and "standby B". Repeat the transition of. As a result, on the liquid crystal screen, a series of steps in which the confirmation screen is displayed for a predetermined time after the customer waiting demo movie is played are repeated. In addition, during the flow, the movable body stands still in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED continues to light in the demo mode.

[Time t5] In FIG. 516 (E): After a while, the input sensor is turned on during the playback of the customer waiting demo movie. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle was touched or various operating means were operated. In FIG. 516 (B): The demo state is reset to "standby A" as the input sensor is turned on. (A) and (C) in FIGS. 516: With the reset of the demo state, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is interrupted, and the fixed confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen. As a result, the operation I / F is displayed again (returns to a visible state). In FIG. 516 (D): Further, in synchronization with the display of the operation I / F, the movable body is displaced to the descending position again and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off. As a result, the visibility of the operation I / F displayed on the liquid crystal screen is enhanced.

[Times t6 to t7] In FIG. 516 (E): After a short time, the input sensor is turned on again. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle was touched or various operating means were operated. In FIG. 516 (B): At this time, the demo state remains "standby A" and does not change. (A), (C), (D) in FIG. 516: Therefore, the confirmation screen and the operation I / F continue to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Further, the movable body is maintained in a state where the 7-segment LED remains off while standing still in the descending position.

[Time t8] In FIG. 516 (B): When a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed from time t7 (when the input sensor is turned off = when the operation is no longer detected), the demo state is "movie". Updated to "Play". (A) and (C) in FIGS. 516: With the update of the demo state, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen. As a result, the operation I / F becomes invisible again. In FIG. 516 (D): At this time, the movable body is displaced to the ascending position again and vibrates, and the 7-segment LED starts lighting in the demo mode.

[Changes in demo state before and after a break during a game (first embodiment)]
FIG. 517 shows an example of changes in the demo state before and after the break during the game of the first embodiment, and changes in the screen (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 (movable body) accompanying the change. It is a timing chart. The timing chart is read in the same manner as in FIG. 516. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0] In FIG. 517 (F): The symbol is fluctuating. In FIG. 517 (A): A variable screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as the design fluctuates. (C), (D) in FIG. 517: The operation I / F is not displayed during the execution of the game. Further, the movement of the movable body changes at any time according to the progress of the game, but at the time t0, the movable body is stationary in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED displays the variation of the 7-segment effect symbol. ing. In FIG. 517 (E): Further, since the input sensor is ON, it can be seen that the firing handle is gripped or various operating means are operated, that is, the game is being performed. In FIG. 517 (B): At this time, the demo state remains cleared when the current game is started (at the start of fluctuation) (the demo state flag is not set with a value).

[Time t1] In FIG. 517 (F): The symbol is stopped (fixed). In FIG. 517 (A): A confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as the symbol is stopped (confirmed). In FIG. 517 (E): Further, since the input sensor is still ON, it can be seen that the game is being continued.

[Time t2] In FIG. 517 (A): The confirmation screen is still displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In FIG. 517 (E): The input sensor is turned off. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle or various operating means are no longer operated, that is, the game is no longer performed. In FIG. 517 (B): When the demo effect command is first received due to the input sensor being turned off, the demo state is reset to "standby A".

[Time t3] In FIGS. 517 (C) and (D): When 30 seconds have passed from the time t1 (determination of the symbol), the operation I / F is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal screen. Further, in synchronization with the display of the operation I / F, the movable body is displaced to the descending position and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off. As a result, the visibility of the operation I / F displayed on the liquid crystal screen is enhanced. In FIG. 517 (B): At this time, the demo state remains "standby A" and does not change.

[Time t4] In FIG. 517 (B): When a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed from time t2 (when the input sensor is turned off = when the operation is no longer detected), the demo state is "movie". Updated to "Play". (A) and (C) in FIG. 517: With the update of the demo state, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen. Since the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is executed on the front side of the layer on which the operation I / F is displayed, the operation I / F becomes invisible during the playback of the customer waiting demo movie. In FIG. 517 (D): At this time, the movable body is displaced to the ascending position and vibrates, and the 7-segment LED starts lighting in the demo mode.

[Time t5] In FIG. 517 (B): When the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is completed, the demo state is updated to "standby B". (A), (C) in FIG. 517: With the update of the demo state, the confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen. Further, since the playback of the customer waiting demo movie executed in the front layer is completed, the operation I / F is displayed again (returns to the visible state). In FIG. 517 (D): At this time, the vibration of the movable body is stopped. Therefore, the movable body stands still in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED continues to light in the demo mode.

[Time t6] In FIG. 517 (B): When a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed from time t5 (display of the confirmation screen), the demo state is updated to "movie playback" again. (A) and (C) in FIG. 517: With the update of the demo state, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started again on the liquid crystal screen. As a result, the operation I / F becomes invisible again. In FIG. 517 (D): At this time, the state of the movable body does not change. Therefore, the movable body continues to stand still in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED continues to light in the demo mode.

[Time t7] In FIG. 517 (B): When the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is completed, the demo state is updated to "standby B". (A), (C) in FIG. 517: With the update of the demo state, the confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen. Further, since the playback of the customer waiting demo movie executed in the front layer is completed, the operation I / F is displayed again (returns to the visible state). In FIG. 517 (D): At this time, the state of the movable body does not change. Therefore, the movable body continues to stand still in the ascending position, and the 7-segment LED continues to light in the demo mode.

[Time t8] In FIG. 517 (E): After a short time, the input sensor is turned on while the confirmation screen is being displayed. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle was touched or various operating means were operated. In FIG. 517 (B): The demo state is reset to "standby A" as the input sensor is turned on. (A), (C), (D) in FIG. 517: In synchronization with the reset of the demo state, the movable body is displaced to the descending position again and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off. As a result, the visibility of the operation I / F displayed on the liquid crystal screen is enhanced.

[Time t9] In FIG. 517 (F): The symbol starts to fluctuate. (A), (C) in FIG. 517: As the symbol starts to fluctuate, the fluctuating screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the operation I / F is not displayed. In FIG. 517 (D): Further, as the symbol starts to fluctuate, the movable body is displaced to the ascending position and stands still, and the 7-segment LED starts to display the fluctuation of the 7-segment effect symbol. By displacing the movable body in the ascending position, the visibility of the 7-segment effect design is enhanced. In FIG. 517 (B): At this time, the demo state is cleared (the demo state flag is not set to a value).

As described above, in the first embodiment, the demo state is "movie playback"-> "standby B"-> "movie playback"-> "standby B"-> ... after passing through "standby A" once. The transition between "movie playback" and "standby B" is repeated. Further, if the input sensor is turned on (operation is detected) while the demo state is "movie playback" or "standby B", the demo state is reset to "standby A". Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the input sensor is turned off (after the operation is not detected), the demo state is updated to "movie playback" again, and unless the input sensor is turned on, the "movie" is displayed again. The transition between "playback" and "standby B" is repeated.

At this time, the operation of the movable body (7-segment display device 200) changes according to the demo state. First, when the demo state is updated from "standby A" to "movie playback", the movable body is displaced to the ascending position and vibrates, and the 7-segment LED lights up in the demo mode. Subsequently, when the demo state is updated to "standby B", the vibration of the movable body stops. After that, the movable body stays in the ascending position and continues to light in the demo mode until the demo state is reset to "standby A", that is, unless the input sensor is turned on. On the other hand, when the input sensor is turned on, the demo state is reset to "standby A", and the movable body is displaced to the descending position and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

The operation mode of the movable body according to the demo state is not limited to the above example. For example, in the above example, when the demo state repeats the transition between "movie playback" and "standby B", the movable body is vibrated in the ascending position only in the first "movie playback", and thereafter. The mode is such that the movable body is stationary in the ascending position, but instead, when the demo state is "movie playback", the movable body is always vibrated in the ascending position, and when the demo state is "standby B". The movable body may always be stationary in the ascending position. Further, the lighting mode of the 7-segment LED may be different depending on whether the movable body is vibrated in the raised position or stationary in the raised position.

[Operation of the movable body during the demonstration effect] FIGS. 518 and 519 are continuous views for explaining an operation example of the movable body (7-segment display device 200) during the demonstration effect. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 518 (A): Immediately after the symbol is confirmed, the effect symbol Hz on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 are removed (for example, "4"-"1". -The stop is displayed at "5"). At this time, the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary in the ascending position in order to ensure that the confirmed 7-segment effect symbol can be visually recognized. Further, a confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The confirmation screen is composed of, for example, a background image showing that the mode is "normal mode" and an image showing how the flowers blooming in the park are beaked by wild birds and destroyed.

In FIG. 518 (B): When 30 seconds have passed from the determination of the symbol, the operation interface IF is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, in synchronization with the display of the operation interface IF, the 7-segment display device 200 is displaced to the lowered position and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off. By lowering the 7-segment display device 200, the player can surely see the entire operation interface IF.

The operation interface IF is composed of, for example, three areas, an upper area, a lower left area, and a lower right area. Of these, in the upper area, along with the characters "custom setting menu", an arrow indicating the pushing direction is displayed on the image imitating the effect switching button 45. With such a display, it is possible to inform the player that the custom setting menu can be displayed by pressing the effect switching button 45.

In addition, in the lower left area, an image imitating the state in which the downward key switch of the direction keys 66 is dyed is displayed along with the characters "volume", and below that, the current setting status (maximum volume). ) Is displayed. With such a display, it is possible to inform the player that the volume can be lowered by pressing and operating the downward key switch of the direction key 66.

Then, in the lower right area, an image imitating the state in which the right direction key switch of the direction keys 66 is dyed is displayed along with the characters "brightness", and below that, the current setting status (highest). An indicator indicating brightness) is displayed. With such a display, the brightness can be adjusted by pressing the right key switch of the direction key 66 (the focus can be switched from the lower left area to the lower right area). Can guide people. If the right key switch of the direction key 66 is pushed in this state, the dyeing in the image of the direction key 66 in the lower right area is switched from the right key switch to the downward key switch. , The dyeing in the image of the direction key 66 in the lower left area is switched from the downward key switch to the left key switch. Then, by pressing the downward key switch of the direction key 66 in this state, the brightness can be lowered one step at a time.

The configuration of the operation interface IF described above is shown as an example until it gets tired, and the configuration is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate.

In FIG. 518 (C): When a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed from the determination of the symbol without operating the launch handle or various operating means, the customer waiting demo movie is played on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It will be started. The operation interface IF becomes invisible during the playback of the customer waiting demo movie. Further, in synchronization with the start of reproduction, the 7-segment display device 200 is displaced to the ascending position and vibrates, and the 7-segment LED starts lighting in the demo mode. By operating the 7-segment display device 200 in this way, the player can be attracted to the customer waiting demo movie while being attracted by the operation of the 7-segment display device 200.

In FIG. 519 (D): When the reproduction of the customer waiting demo movie is completed, the confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal display 42, and the vibration of the 7-segment display device 200 is stopped. In addition, the operation interface IF, which was invisible during the playback of the customer waiting demo movie, becomes visible again. However, since the 7-segment display device 200 is stationary in the ascending position, a part of the operation interface IF is shielded behind the 7-segment display device 200.

In FIG. 519 (E): When the launch handle is gripped, the 7-segment display device 200 is displaced to the lowered position and stands still, and the 7-segment LED is turned off. By lowering the 7-segment display device 200, the player can surely see the entire operation interface IF. When the various operating means are operated in the state (D) in FIG. 519, the operation of the movable body and the display according to the content of the operation are displayed. For example, when the effect switching button 45 is pushed in, the custom setting menu is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

FIG. 519 (F): During the demonstration effect, for example, when one game ball enters the start device right start winning opening 450 or the start device starting winning opening 452, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. With the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the screen, the fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol starts the variable display and the effect symbol Hz scrolls and fluctuates. In addition, the operation interface IF that was displayed at the lower right of the screen until just before is hidden, and a background image indicating that the mode is "normal mode" is displayed in the background. Then, the 7-segment effect symbol of the 7-segment display device 200 also starts variable display, and the LED of the storage display area X1 is turned on in the storage display device 300.

Although the operation interface IF is not displayed when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to adjust the volume and brightness and display the custom setting menu by operating various operation means.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the operation interface IF is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 during the demo production, but the customer waiting demo movie is being played (the demo state is "movie playback"). During), the operation interface IF becomes invisible. Further, after the start of playback of the customer waiting demo movie, the 7-segment display device 200 stays in the ascending position and the 7-segment LED lights up in the demo mode. By operating the 7-segment display device 200 in this way, it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player and make the demonstration effect more attractive, and while attracting the player with the operation of the 7-segment display device 200. , You can pay attention to the demo movie waiting for customers.

After playing the customer waiting demo movie, the confirmation screen is displayed again while the movement of the movable body is maintained. After that, unless the launch handle or various operating means are operated, the confirmation screen is displayed for a predetermined time (demo state is "standby B"), and the customer waiting demo movie is played (demo state is "movie playback"). "), A series of steps is repeated.

Then, when the launch handle or various operating means are operated in the process of this series of flow, the confirmation screen is displayed, the movable body is stationary in the descending position, and the 7-segment LED is turned off (the demo state is "standby". A "). By operating the 7-segment display device 200 in this way, the entire operation interface IF displayed on the liquid crystal screen can be visually recognized without being shielded by the 7-segment display device 200. Therefore, the player who has performed some operation, that is, the player who seems to have started or restarted the game, can surely see the entire operation interface IF, and the pachinko machine 1 can make settings related to the game. It is possible to effectively guide the operation method.

As described above, according to the first embodiment, the content of the demo effect (content displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, operation of the 7-segment display device 200) is controlled according to the demo state, and thus the game It is possible to achieve both strengthening of appealing power to people (realization of attractive demonstration production) and improvement of convenience for players (improvement of visibility and operability), and demonstration production using the 7-segment display device 200. Can be effectively executed.

[Demo Management Process (Second Embodiment)] FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the demo management process in the second embodiment.

The demo management process is a process of controlling the content to be displayed / reproduced as a demo effect and managing the state related to the demo, and is called and executed in the process of the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S602 in FIG. 511). In the second embodiment, two types of demo movies (customer waiting demo movie and model explanation demo movie) are prepared, and the demo movie to be played is determined based on the demo state and other information. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is the “confirmed screen loop”. In the second embodiment, a total of three types of demo states are provided, including "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" and "after playing the customer waiting demo movie" in addition to the "confirmed screen loop". The demo state is managed as a flag by the effect control CPU 126 and stored in the flag area of the RAM 130. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, "before playing the demo movie waiting for customers" is set as an initial value.

In this process, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is a "confirmed screen loop" based on the value of the corresponding flag (demo state flag). As a result of the confirmation, when the demo state is the "confirmed screen loop" (step S900: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902. On the other hand, when the demo state is not the "confirmed screen loop" (step S900: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 displays a confirmation screen on the liquid crystal display 42. If the pachinko machine 1 is in the first morning state, the pachinko machine 1 has never played a game after the power is turned on (so-called first morning state), and the pachinko machine 1 has a fixed symbol (for example, "2"-"4"-. While the confirmation screen by "6") is displayed, when the state is not in the morning, the confirmation screen by the symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is finally stopped is displayed.

Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo state update process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state according to whether the player is touching the grip unit 16 (launch handle). The specific contents of the demo state update process will be described later with reference to the following flowchart.

Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo movie playback permission flag is “True”. Here, the demo movie reproduction permission flag is a flag that manages a value indicating whether or not the demo movie can be reproduced (whether or not reproduction is permitted), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 130. Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, "True" is set as an initial value. The demo movie playback permission flag indicates that the demo movie is allowed to be played if the value is "True" (a new demo movie can be played), while the demo movie is allowed to be played if the value is "False". Indicates that playback is not permitted (new demo movie cannot be played).

As a result of the confirmation, when the demo movie playback permission flag is "True", that is, when the demo movie is permitted to be played (a new demo movie can be played) (step S910: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 Executes step S912. On the other hand, when the demo movie playback permission flag is "False", that is, when playback of the demo movie is not permitted (reproduction of a new demo movie is impossible) (step S910: No), the effect control CPU 126 determines. Step S920 is executed. As a result, when the demo movie is being played (before the demo management process is called), the new demo movie cannot be played, so the playback is continued as it is.

Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “before playing the customer waiting demo movie”. When the demo state is "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S912: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S912: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S920.

Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 takes a predetermined time after the handle is not detected, that is, after the player does not touch the grip unit 16 (launch handle) (after the detection signal is not output by the touch sensor 114). Check if (for example, 1 minute) has passed. Whether or not the detection signal is output by the touch sensor 114 can be confirmed based on whether or not a handle detection command is received from the main control CPU 72. Further, the elapsed time since the last reception of the handle detection command is managed by, for example, a timer variable stored in the RAM 130, and based on this timer variable, the elapsed time since the handle is not detected is calculated. You can check.

As a result of the confirmation, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the handle was not detected (step S914: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the handle was not detected (step S914: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902.

Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 starts playing the customer waiting demo movie.

Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state to "after playing the customer waiting demo movie".

Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 sets “False” in the demo movie playback permission flag. This makes it impossible to play a new (another) demo movie while the customer-waiting demo movie is playing.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 511) of the caller.

[Demo status update process]
FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the demo state update process.

The demo state update process is executed when the demo state is either "confirmation screen loop" or "before playing the demo movie waiting for customers". Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S940: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “before playing the customer waiting demo movie”. When the demo state is "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S940: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S942. On the other hand, if the demo state is not "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S940: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S946.

Step S942: In the effect control CPU 126, the handle is detected, that is, the player is touching the grip unit 16 (launch handle) (because the detection signal is output by the touch sensor 114, the main control CPU 72 triggers this. Check if the handle detection command has been received). When the handle is detected (step S942: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S944. On the other hand, when the handle is not detected (step S942: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the demo management process (FIG. 520) of the caller.

Step S944: The effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state to the “confirmation screen loop”.

Step S946: The effect control CPU 126 is in a state where the handle is not detected, that is, the player is not touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) (because the detection signal is not output by the touch sensor 114, the main control is performed. Check whether or not the handle detection command has been received from the CPU 72). When the handle is not detected (step S946: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S948. On the other hand, when the handle is not non-detected (step S946: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the caller's demo management process (FIG. 520).

Step S948: The effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state to "before playing the customer waiting demo movie".

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the demo management process (FIG. 520) of the caller.

In this way, the demo state shifts to the "confirmation screen loop" when the handle is detected in the case of "before playing the demo movie waiting for customers", and the handle is detected in the case of the "confirmation screen loop". When it disappears, it will shift to "before playing the demo movie waiting for customers" again.

[Processing when handle is detected]
FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the handle detection processing.

The processing at the time of steering wheel detection is that the steering wheel is detected (the steering wheel detection command is received from the main control CPU 72) while the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in production (while waiting for the symbol to change). It is a process that is called and executed with the trigger. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “after playing the customer waiting demo movie”. When the demo state is "after playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S960: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S962. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "after playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S960: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S970.

Step S962: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo movie playback permission flag is “True”. When the demo movie playback permission flag is "True", that is, when the demo movie can be played back (step S962: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S964. On the other hand, when the demo movie playback permission flag is "False", that is, when the demo movie cannot be played (step S962: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S964: The effect control CPU 126 starts playing the model explanation demo movie. Here, the "model explanation demo movie" is a video composed of contents explaining the features, game characteristics, key points, etc. of the game executed in the pachinko machine 1, for example, about 15 to 30 seconds. It consists of lengths. A configuration example of the model explanation demo movie will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

Step S966: The effect control CPU 126 sets “False” in the demo movie playback permission flag. This makes it impossible to play a new (another) demo movie while the model description demo movie is playing.

Step S970: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the demo state is “before playing the customer waiting demo movie”. When the demo state is "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S970: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S972. On the other hand, when the demo state is not "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S970: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S972: The effect control CPU 126 updates the demo state to the “confirmation screen loop”.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

In addition to the above, the conditions for starting the playback of the model explanation demo movie may include that the custom setting menu for the game is not displayed, that the pachinko machine 1 is not in the power saving mode, and the like.

Further, in the above procedure, when the demo state when the handle is detected is "after playing the customer waiting demo movie" (step S960: Yes) and the demo movie playback permission flag is "True". (Step S962: Yes), the model description demo movie has started playing (step S964), but instead of this, step S962 is deleted and the demo movie playback permission flag is "True". You may start playing the model description demo movie unconditionally (without checking the demo movie playback permission flag). With such a configuration, if the steering wheel is detected while the confirmation screen is displayed, the confirmation screen is switched to and the model explanation demo movie is started to be played. Further, if the steering wheel is detected during the playback of the customer waiting demo movie, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie ends in the middle and the playback of the model explanation demo movie starts.

[Demo state reset process (second embodiment)]
FIG. 523 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the demo state reset process of the second embodiment.

The demo state reset process of the second embodiment is a process of resetting the demo state to the initial value "before playing the customer waiting demo movie", and is a command for demo production in a situation where the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in production. When the model description demo movie is played for the first time, or when the model description demo movie is playing, the normal symbol or special symbol starts to change, or the custom setting menu for the game is displayed. It is called and executed when it is displayed.

Step S980: The effect control CPU 126 resets the demo state to “before playing the customer waiting demo movie”.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

In this way, if the normal symbol or special symbol starts to fluctuate or the custom setting menu is displayed during the playback of the model description demo movie, the playback of the model description demo movie ends halfway. However, the demo state will be reset.

[Playback permission flag reset processing]
FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the reproduction permission flag reset process.

The playback permission flag reset process is a process of resetting the demo movie playback permission flag to the initial value "True", and when the demo production command is first received in a situation where the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in production. Or, it is called and executed when the playback of the demo movie (customer waiting demo movie, model explanation demo movie) is completed.

Step S990: The effect control CPU 126 resets the demo movie playback permission flag to “True”.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

Instead of executing the playback permission flag reset process at the end of playback of the demo movie, it may be executed triggered by the display of the confirmation screen performed after the end of playback of the demo movie.

[Change in demo state immediately after power-on (second embodiment)]
FIG. 525 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in the screen (liquid crystal screen) of the liquid crystal display 42 and the state related to the demonstration immediately after the power is turned on in the second embodiment with the passage of time. The relative ratio of the band lengths in each of the illustrated items does not match the relative ratio of the actual time lengths. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 525 (A): A confirmation screen with a fixed symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIGS. 525 (B) and (C): At this time, "Before playing the demo movie waiting for customers" is set as the initial value in the demo state, and "True" is set as the initial value in the demo movie playback permission flag. Has been done.
In FIG. 525 (D): Further, since the touch sensor 114 does not output the detection signal, it can be seen that the firing handle is not touched.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 525 (A): When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses from the time t0, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIGS. 525 (B) and (C): With the start of playback of the customer waiting demo movie, the demo state is updated to "after the customer waiting demo movie is played", and "False" is set in the demo movie playback permission flag. ..

[Time t2]
In FIG. 525 (A): Playback of the customer waiting demo movie is completed, and the confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIG. 525 (C): “True” is set in the demo movie playback permission flag when the playback of the customer waiting demo movie ends.
In FIG. 525 (B): At this time, the demo state does not change.
In FIG. 525 (D): Further, the touch sensor 114 still does not output a detection signal.

After that, until the firing handle is touched (while the detection signal is not output by the touch sensor 114), the flow of playing the customer waiting demo movie after the confirmation screen is displayed is repeated.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 525 (D): After a while, the touch sensor 114 outputs a detection signal. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle was touched.
In FIGS. 525 (B) and (C): At this time, the demo state is "after playing the demo movie waiting for customers", and the demo movie playback permission flag is "after playing the model description demo movie". True ".
In FIG. 525 (A): Therefore, the reproduction of the model explanation demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIG. 525 (C): Model description With the start of playback of the demo movie, "False" is set in the demo movie playback permission flag.
In FIG. 525 (B): At this time, the demo state does not change.

[Time t4, t5]
In FIG. 525 (A): A model explanation demo movie is being played on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIG. 525 (D): During that time, the touch sensor 114 intermittently outputs a detection signal. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle was touched or released.
(B) and (C) in FIGS. 525: At this time, the demo state and the demo movie playback permission flag do not change.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 525 (A): Playback of the model description demo movie is completed, and the confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIGS. 525 (B) and (C): Model description With the end of the demo movie playback, the demo state is reset to "before the customer waiting demo movie is played", and the demo movie playback permission flag is reset to "True".

[Time t7]
In FIG. 525 (A): When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses from the time t6, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started again on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIGS. 525 (B) and (C): With the start of playback of the customer waiting demo movie, the demo state is updated to "after the customer waiting demo movie is played", and "False" is set in the demo movie playback permission flag. ..

In this way, immediately after the power is turned on in the second embodiment, the flow of playing the customer waiting demo movie after the confirmation screen is displayed is repeated. Then, when the player who selects the table to play holds the handle with his / her hand and the launch handle is touched while the confirmation screen is displayed, the model explanation demo movie is played. Then, after the playback of the model explanation demo movie is completed, the demo state is reset to "before the customer waiting demo is played". Therefore, even if the launch handle is touched while the confirmation screen is displayed after the playback of the model description demo movie is completed, the model description demo movie is not played here.

[Changes in demo state before and after a break during a game (second embodiment)]
FIG. 526 is a timing chart showing an example of changes over time in the state related to the screen and the demonstration of the liquid crystal display 42 before and after the break during the game of the second embodiment. The relative ratio of the band lengths in each of the illustrated items does not match the relative ratio of the actual time lengths. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 526 (E): The design is fluctuating.
In FIG. 526 (A): A variable screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as the design fluctuates.
In FIG. 526 (D): Further, since the touch sensor 114 outputs a detection signal, it can be seen that the firing handle is gripped.
(B) and (C) in FIGS. 526: At this time, the demo state and the demo movie playback permission flag remain the values set before the start of the current game (the values are not empty).

[Time t1]
In FIG. 526 (E): The symbol is stopped (fixed).
In FIG. 526 (A): A confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as the symbol is stopped (confirmed).
In FIG. 526 (C): “True” is set in the demo movie playback permission flag as the confirmation screen is displayed.
In FIG. 526 (D): At this time, since the touch sensor 114 continues to output the detection signal, it can be seen that the launch handle is still held, that is, the launch of the game ball is continued.
In FIG. 526 (B): Therefore, the demo state is "confirmed screen loop" (within one interrupt process) immediately after being once updated to "before playing the customer waiting demo movie" along with the display of the confirmed screen. Will be updated to.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 526 (D): The touch sensor 114 stops outputting the detection signal. From this, it can be seen that the player's hand was released from the launch handle.
In FIG. 526 (B): As the touch sensor 114 stops outputting the detection signal, the demo state is updated to "before playing the customer waiting demo movie".
In FIG. 526 (A): At this time, the confirmation screen is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIG. 526 (C): Also, the movie playback permission flag does not change.

[Time t3]
FIG. 526 (A): When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses from the time t2, the playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIGS. 526 (B) and (C): With the start of playback of the customer waiting demo movie, the demo state is updated to "after the customer waiting demo movie is played", and "False" is set in the demo movie playback permission flag. ..

[Time t4]
In FIG. 526 (A): Playback of the customer waiting demo movie is completed, and the confirmation screen is displayed again on the liquid crystal screen. Here, a confirmation screen with a symbol stopped at time t1 is displayed.
In FIG. 526 (C): “True” is set in the demo movie playback permission flag when the playback of the customer waiting demo movie ends.
In FIG. 526 (B): At this time, the demo state does not change.
In FIG. 526 (D): Further, the touch sensor 114 still does not output a detection signal. From this, it can be seen that the player has not resumed the game (has not returned to his seat yet).

After that, until the firing handle is gripped again (while the detection signal is not output by the touch sensor 114), the flow of playing the customer waiting demo movie after the confirmation screen is displayed is repeated.

[Time t5]
In FIG. 526 (D): After a while, the touch sensor 114 starts to output the detection signal again. From this, it can be seen that the launch handle was gripped again (the player returned to his seat and resumed the game).
In FIGS. 526 (B) and (C): At this time, the demo state is "after playing the demo movie waiting for customers", and the demo movie playback permission flag is "after playing the model description demo movie". True ".
In FIG. 526 (A): Therefore, the reproduction of the model explanation demo movie is started on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIG. 526 (C): Model description With the start of playback of the demo movie, "False" is set in the demo movie playback permission flag.
In FIG. 526 (B): At this time, the demo state does not change.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 526 (E): The symbol starts to fluctuate.
In FIG. 526 (A): With the start of fluctuation of the symbol, the model explanation demo movie is terminated in the middle of playback, and the fluctuation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.
In FIG. 526 (B): Further, the demo state is updated to "before playing the customer waiting demo movie".
In FIG. 526 (C): At this time, the demo movie playback permission flag does not change.

In this way, before and after the break during the game in the second embodiment, first, before the break, the demo state becomes the "confirmed screen loop" until the player's hand is released from the handle, and finally. Since the confirmation screen is displayed for a while after the fluctuation has stopped, the customer waiting demo movie will not be played immediately after the fluctuation has stopped. Also, after returning from the break, if the handle is held while the confirmation screen is displayed, the model explanation demo movie will be played, and even if the game is resumed, the playback will continue, but the normal symbol or special symbol will be played. When the fluctuation of the model starts, the display on the LCD screen switches to the fluctuation screen, and the playback of the model explanation demo movie ends in the middle.

In the description of the second embodiment, in order to facilitate the understanding of the invention, the operation interface and the movable body (7-segment display device 200) displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in the first embodiment are controlled. Although not mentioned intentionally, in the second embodiment as well, in addition to the above-mentioned control, it is possible to display the operation interface and change the operation of the movable body according to the situation.

For example, 30 seconds after the design is confirmed, the operation interface is displayed on the LCD screen, the movable body is stopped in the descending position, the 7-segment LED is turned off, and the movable body is turned off when the customer waiting demo movie starts playing. The 7-segment LED is turned on in the demo mode by resting in the ascending position, and after that, the state of the movable body is maintained until the operation is detected, and after the demo state shifts to "after customer waiting demo playback", For example, when the launch handle is grasped, the reproduction of the model explanation demo movie is started while maintaining the state of the movable body, while various operation means such as the effect switching button 45 and the direction key 66 are operated. In that case, it is possible to make the control different depending on which operation is performed, such as displaying a confirmation screen on the liquid crystal screen and stopping the movable body in the lowered position.

[Model description demo movie configuration example]
FIG. 527 is a continuous diagram showing a configuration example of a model explanation demo movie. Hereinafter, the description will be given along the flow.

In FIG. 527 (A): The title character "great man" is displayed in large size in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 527 (B): After a short time, the characters "big hit probability" are displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the number "1/319" is displayed large below the characters. Also, at the bottom right of the screen, the characters "* Low accuracy" are displayed relatively small. With such a display, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (non-time shortened state) is "1/319".

In FIG. 527 (C): After a short time, the characters "Continuation rate 83.8%" are displayed at the top of the screen, and the characters "* Limited to special figure 445" are compared at the bottom right. It is displayed in a small size. In addition, the characters "10R jackpot is 1500 shots" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the characters "* The ball is a design value" are displayed relatively small at the bottom right. With such a display, the continuation rate in the game performed by changing the second special symbol is "83.8%", and the total number of balls that can be obtained when the 10R jackpot is hit is a maximum of 1500 shots. It is possible to notify the player.

In FIG. 527 (D): After a further lapse, the characters "Great chance due to the occurrence of a great challenge" are displayed in large size on the screen. With such a display, it is possible to make the player recognize that if the effect of "great man challenge" is executed during the game, it may develop into a big chance.

In FIG. 527 (E): The screen is further switched, and an image showing the face of a character reminiscent of a great man is displayed in the center of the screen, and "Respond to 83.8% of stimulation!" A catch phrase is displayed. With such a display, the image of the game in the pachinko machine 1 can be intuitively conveyed to the player.

As described above, the model explanation demo movie is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, five stages (A) to (E) in FIG. 527). Further, in the model explanation demo movie, in addition to these contents, an example of the effect executed during the game is notified. The production example is divided into lengths of about several seconds, and notifications are made little by little in order according to each stage of the model explanation demo movie. With such an aspect, even if the playback of the model explanation demo movie ends and the content is interrupted in the middle, the content of the game can be notified without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

By the way, as described above, the model explanation demo movie has a length of, for example, about 15 to 30 seconds, which is shorter than the customer waiting demo movie, which has a length of, for example, about 1 minute. .. This length is based on the fact that the model explanation demo movie is played with the handle detection as a trigger, and if the symbol changes in the started (or restarted) game, the screen is switched and the movie is not played after that. , It is decided after considering that the entire movie can be played as much as possible. In addition, by configuring the model explanation demo movie in such a short time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a case where the playback of the movie ends (the content is interrupted) while the production example is being notified. it can.

It should be noted that the above configuration is given as an example only, and a part of the content may be modified to be configured, or a further content may be added to the configuration.

[Processing during effect symbol stop display] FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-of-times counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value fluctuates when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the time reduction final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. ..

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time reduction counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", the pseudo time saving counter is set to "0" and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time saving counter, and "4" is set in the pseudo time saving counter when the number of stored second special symbols is "4". When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 steps. Execute S658.

Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660 and determines that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is a drive mode background in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the pseudo time reduction counter even when the time reduction state (advantageous game state) ends and the time shifts to the non-time reduction state (predetermined game state). When the value is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ..

Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect in the mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 510).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP152), as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of reading according to the winning symbol is executed.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game, and suggests right-handed strike. If you select the effect to be performed and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a heart mark with the letter V drawn by the female character in the car) Execute the process of selecting the effect to be listed).

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 510).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing] FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S852 and S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and selects an effect pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "4" to the second count cut counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the process to be performed. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 10 times to remaining 5 times" or "remaining 100 times to remaining 5 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays a liquid crystal display when it becomes necessary to execute a right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened. At the upper part of the screen of the vessel 42, a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking is executed.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the effect control process (FIG. 508).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, in the simulated time reduction, the value of "remaining 4 times to remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 508).

FIG. 531 is a diagram showing an outline of the game property of the present embodiment. By combining the above-mentioned new start device 400 with the game characteristics shown below, it is possible to realize game characteristics that were not possible with conventional gaming machines. In the present embodiment, the start device left start winning opening 454 of the start device 400 is used as the starting winning opening of the normal symbol, and the starting winning opening 452 in the starting device of the starting device 400 is used as the starting winning opening of the first special symbol. The start device right start winning opening 450 of the device 400 is used as the starting winning opening of the first special symbol.

The game ball that has entered the generally known navel-like entry slot 430 is distributed to the starting winning openings of the two first special symbols or the starting winning openings of the ordinary symbols. When a game ball enters the start winning opening of the normal symbol and the normal symbol hits and is stopped and displayed in the mode of the symbol 2, the variable start winning device 28 opens for a long time (opens for 6.0 seconds). In addition, by linking the sweetness of the small hit probability (about 1/5 to 1/6) of the second special symbol peculiar to the 1st and 2nd type mixer, "winning to the variable start winning device 28 (the second special symbol) A jackpot-like element is added by setting "memory) = chance state (extreme heat)".

In this way, in the normal time (in a non-time shortened state), the game "normal symbol fluctuation-> winning symbol 2 winning-> variable start winning device 28 open-> variable starting winning device 28 winning-> second special symbol fluctuation-> small hit winning" By adding the property, it is possible to show two types of effects, one is a case where the first special symbol is a big hit and the other is a case where the second special symbol is a big hit.

In addition, if the first special symbol hits a big hit, a winning symbol that does not shift to the time shortened state is provided, and if the second special symbol hits a big hit via a small hit or a simple big hit, the time is shortened. You can also make sure that you are migrating. As a result, the jackpot triggered by the change in the normal symbol can be differentiated by making it a premium jackpot.

As described above, according to the above embodiment, there are the following effects. (1) According to the first embodiment, the contents of the demonstration effect, that is, the display of the liquid crystal display 42, the operation of the movable body, the lighting mode of the LED provided on the movable body, and the like are three demo states (standby A, movie). Since the control is performed based on the presence / absence of detection of playback, standby B), and operation, it is possible to efficiently and concisely control the execution of the demo effect.

(2) According to the first embodiment, as the demo state is updated from "standby A" to "movie playback", playback of the customer waiting demo movie is started, and the movable body (7-segment display device 200). Is displaced to the ascending position and vibrates, and the LED (7-segment LED) provided on the movable body lights up in a demo mode, so that the appealing power to the player can be further enhanced, and the movement of the movable body allows the player to move. You can draw attention to the demo movie waiting for customers while attracting.

(3) According to the first embodiment, when the operation is detected in the process of repeating a series of flow of playing the customer waiting demo movie and displaying the confirmation screen, the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is displayed with the confirmation screen. The operation interface is displayed, and the movable body is displaced to the descending position to stand still, and the LED provided on the movable body is turned off. Therefore, it is considered that the player who performed the operation, that is, the game is started or restarted. The operation interface can be reliably visually recognized by the player without being shielded by the movable body, and the operation method for making settings related to the game can be effectively guided. Further, by changing the position of the movable body and displaying the confirmation screen, the player can intuitively recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is ready to start the game.

(4) According to the second embodiment, two types of demo movies to be played as a demo effect are prepared (customer waiting demo movie, model explanation demo movie), depending on the state related to the demo and the operation status of the launch handle. Since the content of the demo effect is controlled, it is possible to prevent the demo effect to be executed from becoming uniform, and by playing the model explanation demo movie, useful information about the game (features of the game and the game). Gender, etc.) can be notified to the player.

(5) According to the second embodiment, the state related to the demo is managed by two types of flags (demo state flag, demo movie playback permission flag), and depending on the contents of these flags and the presence / absence of detection by the touch sensor 114. Since the content displayed / reproduced as the demo effect is controlled based on the content of the handle detection command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, the execution control of the demo effect can be performed efficiently and concisely.

(6) According to the second embodiment, when the playback of the model description demo movie is completed, the demo state is reset to "Before playing the customer waiting demo movie", so that the confirmation screen is displayed after the playback of the model description demo movie is completed. Even if the handle is detected during this time, the model explanation demo movie will not be played at this time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the model explanation demo movie from being continuously played across the confirmation screen, which may give the player a possibility that a movie having the same content is continuously played. It is possible to avoid certain discomfort and annoyance.

The present invention can be implemented in various modifications without being restricted by the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in the embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the first embodiment described above, when the operation is detected and the demo state shifts to "standby A", a standby screen with an operation interface is displayed. However, this configuration is partially modified, and the operation interface is first displayed. The standby screen may be displayed, and the operation interface may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the first embodiment described above, the content of the demo effect is controlled based on three demo states (standby A, movie playback, standby B) and the presence / absence of operation detection, but the types of demo states are limited to three. Not done. For example, "standby A" is subdivided into two types of states ("standby A1" and "standby A2") depending on whether or not the operation interface is displayed, and four demo states (standby A1, standby A2, movie playback, standby B). ) May be used for control.

In such a configuration, when the transition to "standby A1" is first made, the standby screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time elapses in the state of "standby A1" without detecting the operation, "standby" is displayed. Transition to "A2", triggered by this, the operation interface is displayed in addition to the standby screen, and if a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation in the state of "standby A2", the transition to "movie playback" is performed, and this is displayed. A demo movie waiting for customers is played as an opportunity. Here, if the playback of the customer waiting demo movie ends (playback time elapses) without detecting the operation in the "movie playback" state, the transition to "standby B" is displayed and the standby screen is displayed, and "standby B" is displayed. If a predetermined time elapses without detecting the operation in the state of "", the transition to "movie playback" is made again and the customer waiting demo movie is played. On the other hand, when the operation is detected in the state of "movie playback" or "standby B", the transition to "standby A2" is made again and the standby screen and the operation interface are displayed. Then, by repeating the above flow, the content of the demonstration effect is controlled. When the operation is detected in the state of "movie playback" or "standby B", the transition is made to "standby A1" instead of "standby A2", and the standby screen without an operation interface is first displayed. May be good.

In the above-described embodiment, when the operation of various operation means such as the firing handle (grip unit 16), the effect switching button 45, and the direction key 66 is detected, the operation detection processing is executed. In addition to this, when the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are operated, the operation detection processing may be executed in the same manner.

In the above-described embodiment, the movable body controlled according to the demo state is the 7-segment display device 200, but the movable body to be controlled is not limited to this, and the operation of another movable body is changed according to the demo state. Alternatively, the movements of the plurality of movable bodies may be changed in a complex manner according to the demo state. Further, the control is not limited to the movable body provided in the game board unit 8, and the movable structure provided in the outer frame unit 2 or the integrated door unit 4 may be controlled. Needless to say, the output content from the speaker and the lighting mode of various lamps can be changed according to the demo state.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine including the 7-segment display device 200 has been described, but the gaming machine may not have the 7-segment display device 200.
Further, the 7-segment display device 200 may be changed to a drum unit (for example, a device having three rows of reels) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment G]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 532 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 533 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 533) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 532. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 532, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a saucer unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, a gaming machine connected to the card unit is given as an example, but a gaming machine not connected to the card unit may be used.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the saucer unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is being played. It is possible to generate some kind of production (notice production, probabilistic promotion production, promotion production during a major role, etc.).

Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 533, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. ..

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. Further, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each of the 7-segment LEDs has seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. It is composed of.
The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM (initializing the RAM 76), that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit. Further, the setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing a setting or referencing a setting.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92, and the RAM clear process is performed. Is executed. The RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power supply control unit 162. Further, when the RAM clear signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 receives the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. May be good.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 533 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 534 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40.

The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in the first game state (for example, low-probability non-time shortening state, left-handed state, etc.). The right part of the game area 8a is a second gaming state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, a high probability non-time shortened state, a right-handed state, a small hit rush This is the second game area (right-handed area) used in (state, etc.).

Further, in the game area 8a, in the vicinity of the effect unit 40, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, a middle starting winning opening 26, an upper right starting winning opening 27, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, The second variable winning device 31 and the like are distributed and installed.
Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 are arranged at the lower left of the game area 8a. Further, the starting gate 20, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a.

The game ball launched into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow, enters the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, and the upper right starting winning opening 27, or during the opening operation. The variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation.

The game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the normal winning opening 22 or the middle starting winning opening 26. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the upper right start winning opening 27, or enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation. Alternatively, there is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, The game ball entered in the second variable winning device 31 is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board 8b (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and the ball can be entered into the lower right starting winning opening 28b accordingly. (Normal electric accessory, special electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in the drawing, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with the tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult (impossible) to enter the lower right starting winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width of the variable start winning device 28 is expanded to the left and right. During this period, the game ball can easily flow into the lower right starting winning opening 28b. The variable start winning device 28 is a tongue piece type device that moves from a position where the opening / closing member is retracted to the back from the board surface to a position where the opening / closing member protrudes toward the front side, or a tongue piece type device that moves forward using the lower end edge of the opening / closing member as a hinge. It may be a device that is displaced so as to collapse.

The variable start winning device 28 is in an open state in which the lower right starting winning opening 28b (starting winning opening) is opened at a predetermined frequency (for example, a probability of 1 / 60,000 in a normal symbol lottery) in a non-time shortened state (normal state). It is a special electric accessory that can be shifted to the open state at a frequency higher than a predetermined frequency (for example, a probability of about 1 in the normal symbol lottery) in the time shortened state (advantageous state).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit), and enables the ball to enter the first big winning opening 30b (special). Electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 may be operated at the time of a small hit.

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged downstream of the variable starting winning device 28 (upper attacker, jackpot attacker, V attacker, attacker with probability variation region), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. There is. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

Further, inside the first variable winning device 30, a guidance passage 30c for guiding the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30 is arranged. The guide passage 30c extends downward from the entrance of the first winning opening 30b.

A first count switch 84 is arranged upstream of the guidance passage 30c, and a probability variation region blade member 30d and a probability variation region hole 30e are arranged in the middle flow of the guidance passage 30c. A discharge port 30f is arranged downstream.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30 is first entered by the first count switch 84. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 30d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 30d moves to the front side of the board surface and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 30e. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 30d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 30d is retracted to the rear side of the board surface, so that the game ball is in front of the probabilistic region blade member 30d. It passes through the side and heads for the discharge port 30f.

[Probability variation area (specific area, probability fluctuation function operation area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 30e. The probability variation region is an region through which the game ball cannot pass when the first variable winning device 30 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 30d operates even when the first variable winning device 30 is in the open state. If so, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 30d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 30d is that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time (for a long period of time (about 2 to 3 seconds)). Either a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probability variation region blade member 30d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 30d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 30d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region blade member 30d is opened. The opportunity for 30d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 30d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability variation region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the jackpot game, the probability shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The second variable winning device 31 (attacker) operates when special conditions are met (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and it is possible to enter the second large winning opening 31b. (Special electric accessory, second special ball entry event generating means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated at the time of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged downstream of the first variable winning device 30 (lower attacker, small hit attacker), and has one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 to the inside is arranged. The guide passage 31c is branched into two routes, and a second count switch 85 is arranged on each route.
The game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by any of the second count switches 85, and is finally guided to the discharge port 31f and collected inside.

Further, a plurality of protrusions 21 for reducing the moving speed of the game ball are arranged on the upper portion of the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31. The plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged on the front side and the rear side with respect to the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit.

For example, the protrusion on the front side is arranged on the front side of the game board unit (for example, the back surface of the cover of the front transparent member), and the protrusion on the rear side is the rear side (for example, the back side transparent) of the game board unit. It is arranged on the front surface of the cover of the member).

In this way, since the plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit 8, the game balls that randomly flow down can be advanced in a zigzag manner, and the game balls can be advanced. The deceleration effect of can be improved.
The plurality of protrusions 21 can be appropriately arranged at places where deceleration of the game ball is required, in addition to the upper portion of the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31.

The effect unit 40 is installed at the center of the game board unit 8. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts (including those not shown) inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f (for example, a decoration imitating a flame) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, a game including a game ball that has entered the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the lower right starting winning opening 28b, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31. All the game balls driven into the area 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 535 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (1st symbol display means, 2nd symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is the middle start winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 each time a game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b). In order to remember that the game ball has entered the (lower right start winning opening 28b), the display mode changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the special symbol is triggered by the entry. Each time the fluctuation of is started, the display mode is changed by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the upper right start winning opening 27, the game ball enters the upper right starting winning opening 27. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 Alternatively, the display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b). In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball enters the upper right start winning opening 27 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of stored items (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is still a variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. Indicates the number of times the ball has not been started.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the firing position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 536 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting change device 300 is a device that switches the setting (the setting value of a plurality of stages related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery can be changed to any setting value), such as the RAM clear switch 304 provided in the pachinko machine 1. Operated by operation (setting change means). Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting key keyhole 306 for inserting a setting key and a RAM clear switch 304, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 and the setting key is pressed. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the set value can be changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation state, setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of the six stages, for example.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment segment LED, or a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be pulled out from the keyhole for the setting key. By this operation, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment segment LED, the game status display device 38, or the like, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Details of setting change]
The details of the setting change are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is being changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. LED. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off, the game is ready for play. Transition.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used is described, but the setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Details of setting confirmation]
The details of the setting confirmation (see setting) are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation mode).
Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being confirmed, the main display is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and a set value such as "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the setting is terminated, and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 includes a middle start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b), an upper right starting winning opening 27, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31, respectively. Correspondingly, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, the upper right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84 and the second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80, 82, and 83 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b), and the upper right starting winning opening 27. Is. Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls. Regarding the two second count switches 85, a configuration in which a common switch is used is given as an example, but two switches may be installed to individually detect the entry of the game ball. Furthermore, the probability variation region switch 95a is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the first variable winning device 30.

Further, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 22. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to enter a game ball into each ordinary winning opening 22. May be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, and the upper right starting winning opening switch 83 most directly affect the interests of the player. Is transmitted to the main control device 70 without particularly passing through a relay object, and other detection signals are transmitted to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87. The panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 passes through the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the lower right starting winning opening 28b, the first major winning opening 30b, the second major winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32. A merging passage for merging the game balls is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in this merging passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the confluence passage, and each time the game ball is detected, a detection signal is input to the main control device 70. The main control device 70 counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from the out switch 99. Here, since the game balls launched into the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch 99 determines the number of launch balls launched into the game area 8a. That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of the 7 segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, in the game board unit 8, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream region of the probability variation region, respectively, and the first large A winning opening solenoid 90, a second large winning opening solenoid 97, and a probability variation region solenoid 95b are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 95b operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the probabilistic region blade member 30d. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, 95b are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The process of making the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator incorporating a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives speakers 54, 55, 56 to output acoustics.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated board 136. Entered. Further, the above-mentioned jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illumination substrate 136. .. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the glass frame illumination board 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are used for the saucer illumination. It may be connected to the board.

In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is displayed. Drive individually.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 537 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/313".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/308".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/291".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/273".

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/72".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/70".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/68".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/67".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/65".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/62".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example of providing a setting difference in the low probability state and the high probability state, but the setting difference may be provided only in the low probability state or only in the high probability state. .. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

538 and 539 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special symbol destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, and an operation memory number) to the effect control device 124. (Decrease production command, count cut counter value command, special game state specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 539 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, the probability variation region solenoid 95b, etc., and then the RAM 76 The entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is saved in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 541), but the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. Note that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 541), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 541). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 540 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: As described above, the main control CPU 72 has a test signal terminal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation region solenoid 95b. And clear the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 538).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above (step S120 in FIG. 539).

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation area switch 95a, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, the upper right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84, and the second It reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the count switch 85 and the winning opening switch 86.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the game is played based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, and the upper right starting winning opening switch 83. The events that have occurred during the process are determined, and further processing is executed according to the events that have occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, or the upper right starting winning opening switch 83, the main control CPU 72 has the first special symbol or the first special symbol, respectively. 2 It is determined that an event that triggers an internal lottery (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, or the upper right starting winning opening switch 83 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S204a: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when the set value is changed or a setting confirmation process executed when the set value is confirmed. (Setting-related processing execution means). It should be noted that this process can be prevented from being executed when the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed (when the game is in the normal game state). Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to calculate the base and execute the process of displaying the calculated base on the performance display monitor 200. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the outswitch) (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means).

When the setting change process (setting-related process) is actually executed in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a "setting-related end designation command" as a subcommand. The "setting-related end specification command" can include information that the setting-related processing (processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation) has been completed and information on the setting value. The generated "setting-related end designation command" is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S205, Step S206a, Step S206b: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol game process, the first special symbol game process, and the second special symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the normal symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the first special symbol game process (step S206a), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol (first lottery execution means, lottery execution means), or displays the first special symbol. The fluctuation display and the stop display by the device 34 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. Further, in the second special symbol game process (step S206b), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (second lottery execution means, lottery execution means), or displays the second special symbol. The fluctuation display and the stop display by the device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command.

The main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball instruction command for instructing the number of prize balls to the payout control device 92, or a period from the start of payout until the time predicted to be paying out elapses. For (for example, several seconds), a payout command indicating that the game ball is being paid out can be transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 10 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when a winning detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 86 corresponding to the normal winning opening 22, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for five game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 541).

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls that can be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). It may be set. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are specified. When the above condition is satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in the port output request buffer. The external information signal stored in the port output request buffer is transmitted to the data display device or the hall computer via the external terminal plate 160.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, fluctuation time shortening function operating). Generate and store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the above-mentioned normal symbol game processing (step S205), first special symbol game processing (step S206a), and second special symbol game processing (step S206b) is used. Output to port. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the probabilistic region solenoid 95b stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 541). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the middle-starting winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the middle-starting winning opening 26 (whether or not a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the lower right starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the lower right starting winning opening 28b (whether or not a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S15 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S16. In the present embodiment, the lower right starting winning opening 28b is a starting opening corresponding to the second special symbol, but it may be a starting opening corresponding to the first special symbol.

Step S16: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the upper right starting winning opening switch 83 corresponding to the upper right starting winning opening 27 (whether or not a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S17 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95a corresponding to the probability variation region provided inside the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S23 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region.

As the process when passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the probability variation area passage flag to ON. When the probability change area passage flag is set to ON, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means). , Probability fluctuation function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). The set of the probability fluctuation function operation flag may be executed in this process or in the jackpot end process. Even when the probability variation area passage flag is set to ON, when the limiter is reached (for example, when the number of limiters at the start of the big hit game = 1), the main control CPU 72 uses the game state flag as the game state flag. The value (01H) of the probability fluctuation function operation flag can be prevented from being set in the flag area of the RAM 76.

The probability variation area passage flag is reset at the end of the jackpot game. Further, the probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the next big hit game is started or when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (10000 times) without obtaining the winning result after the end of the big hit game.
The main control CPU 72 generates a probability change area passage command as a process when passing through the probability change area. The probability variation area passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probability variation region solenoid 95b is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 541).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections for the first special symbol and four sections for the second special symbol (for example, 2 bytes each), and each section contains a big hit determination random number and The jackpot symbol random numbers can be stored as a set (set) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 542). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 541).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When it is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing (memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 542).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 542). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 543), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 541) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 543) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 543) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 543) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 543) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (memory number notification means). .. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 542).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 543, step S46 in FIG. 544). Execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (at the time of entering the middle start winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b)) and the second special symbol (to the upper right starting winning opening 27). It is executed for each of (at the time of entering the ball). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 543) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 544). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "variation time shortening function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "fluctuation time shortening function" is operating, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "off reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "variation time shortening function" is not operating, whether or not the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach variation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. To judge. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 543) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 544). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this corresponds to the "probability variation symbol (10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3)". If so, for example, "A0H" is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this is a "normal symbol (10 round normal symbol)", then For example, "01H" is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the pre-determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot-determined random number acquired after the jackpot-determined random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag represents a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned pre-determination process (step S80) of the variation pattern information at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 543) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 544). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 above, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to the "probability variation symbol" or the "normal symbol". The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a "normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents the "probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "probability variation symbol". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. As described above, the probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. .. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely, the previous judgment result immediately before. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 543) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 544).

[Parallel fluctuation of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol]
Next, the details of the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing will be described. In the present embodiment, by separately executing the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol display device 34 changes the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to display the variation of the second special symbol by the display device 35 in parallel (symbol parallel variation means). Therefore, in the present embodiment, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process are separately performed (1 in one interrupt cycle) under the control of the main control CPU 72. It is supposed to be executed (once).

[1st special symbol game processing]
FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol game processing.
The first special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1000a) for confirming whether or not the internal state flag is "start of big win (during big hit game)".

Step S1000a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state (internal state) corresponding to the second special symbol is "start of big win (during big hit game)". This confirmation can be performed based on the progress of the processing (value of the second special symbol game management status) that has been performed so far for the second special symbol. This confirmation is performed in the present embodiment because when the jackpot game is in progress with respect to the other second special symbol, the game related to the first special symbol is not advanced.

At present, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of the next step S1000b unless it is during the jackpot game (the value of the second special symbol game management status is during the jackpot), particularly with respect to the second special symbol (No).

Further, in the first special symbol game process, a procedure (step S1000b) for confirming whether or not the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the game state is a small hit is performed. Have. If the fluctuation time measurement pause flag is ON, it means that the fluctuation time measurement is paused, and if the fluctuation time measurement pause flag is OFF, the fluctuation time measurement is performed. It means that it is not paused.

Step S1000b: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the gaming state is in the small hit. In the present embodiment, this confirmation is performed when the other second special symbol is in the small hit game and the first symbol is changing, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily performed. This is because it is supposed to be stopped.

At present, if the variable time measurement paused flag is not ON, or even if the variable time measurement paused flag is ON but the gaming state is not in the small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 takes the next step. The processing after S1000b1 is executed. Steps S1000b1 to S6000 are program modules that form the basis of the first special symbol game processing, respectively. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the first special symbol through the processes of steps S1000b1 to S6000, which are the basis thereof.

On the other hand, when the variable time measurement paused flag is ON and the small hit game is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S7000.

The basic part of the first special symbol game process is the special game special symbol determination flag update process (step S1000b1), the execution selection process (step S1000c), the special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), and the special symbol change process (step). S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000), small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000) subroutine (program module) group is included. .. Here, first, the basic flow of the basic part of the first special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000b1: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game special symbol determination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a symbol to be processed as to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be processed. Here, the special game special symbol discrimination flag is a flag for specifying the symbol to be processed, and is stored in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, "0") corresponding to the first special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1000c: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S6000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the first special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (first special symbol game management status). For example, if the first special symbol has not yet started the variation display (first special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (first special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changes. If the process during fluctuation is completed (first special symbol game management status: 02H), the process during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. Specifically, the jackpot determination (first lottery execution means, lottery execution means) and the fluctuation pattern are determined here, and in the case of a jackpot, the winning type is also determined. Further, according to the determination of the winning type, the main control CPU 72 sets a number-of-times cut counter for the "time reduction state" and the "high probability state". The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

Further, in this process, a process of determining whether or not to activate the skip function is also performed, and in the previous jackpot determination, for example, the first special symbol is changing the jackpot and the second special symbol is not elected. If applicable, the skip function is activated for the second special symbol. By operating this skip function, a process of forcibly ending the non-winning fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). Regarding the first special symbol During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, a preset number of continuous operations is performed for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) by the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97. It is excited over (for example, 10 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 in total, this is referred to as "10 rounds". Collectively.

When the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 or the first variable winning device 30 for one round 2 The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) with respect to the first special symbol only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operation flag, fluctuation time shortening function operation flag). (High-probability state transition means, time-reduced state transition means, low-probability time-reduced state transition means, high-probability non-time-reduced state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual. Further, in the "time reduction state", the fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended to open. The number of times increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

In the present embodiment, the "time reduction state" means that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is shortened by operating the fluctuation time shortening function, and the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high and variable. It means a state in which the opening time of the start winning device 28 is extended (opening extension function operation).

Further, in the "non-time shortening state", since the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is not shortened, and the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes low. It means a state in which the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is not extended (opening extension function is not activated).

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is selected when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes a predetermined number of times in a predetermined opening time.

Step S7000: The process during suspension of fluctuation time measurement is a process for maintaining the fluctuation of the first special symbol without stopping it. The main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 when the small hit game is in progress with respect to the second special symbol and the first special symbol is changing. As the drive control of the first special symbol display device 34, a process of outputting an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) for each segment and dot (No. 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED is executed. As a result, the state in which the first special symbol is not stopped is maintained. If the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Even if the main control CPU 72 determines that the second special symbol is in the small hit game, if the first special symbol is not changing, the main control CPU 72 does not execute the processing during the suspension of fluctuation time measurement. Further, the measurement of the fluctuation time may be a forced termination instead of a temporary stop.

[2nd special symbol game processing]
FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol game processing.
The second special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1900a) for confirming whether or not a big hit is being made with respect to the other first special symbol.

Step S1900a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state corresponding to the first special symbol is “big hit gaming”. This confirmation can also be performed based on the value of the first special symbol game management status as described above. In addition, a determination as to whether or not the player is in a small hit game may be added to this determination.

At present, if the first special symbol is not in the jackpot game (the first special symbol game management status is the value during the jackpot) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S1900a1 and subsequent processes. Steps S1900a1 to S6900 are program modules that form the basis of the second special symbol game processing, respectively. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the second special symbol through the processes of steps S1900a1 to S6900, which are the basis thereof.

As described in the first special symbol game process above, the special game special symbol determination flag update process (step S1900a1), execution selection process (step S1900b), and special symbol variation are also performed for the basic part of the second special symbol game process. Pre-processing (step S2900), special symbol change processing (step S3900), special symbol stop display processing (step S4900), big hit variable winning device management process (step S5900), small hit variable winning device management process (step) The subroutine (program module) group of S6900) is included. The description of the same content as that of the first special symbol game processing will be omitted as appropriate.

Step S1900a1: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game special symbol determination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a symbol to be processed as to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be processed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, "1") corresponding to the second special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1900b: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2900 to S6900) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the second special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Similarly, which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (second special symbol game management status). For example, if the second special symbol has not yet started the variation display (second special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (second special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3900) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changes. If the process during fluctuation is completed (second special symbol game management status: 02H), the process during display of special symbol stop display (step S4900) is selected as the next jump destination.

Step S2900: In the special symbol variation preprocessing in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the second special symbol (second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). ..

Step S3900: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer.

Step S4900: In the process during the special symbol stop display in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, whereby the stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

Step S5900: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. Here as well, the stop display mode of the second special symbol is determined in a mode according to the winning type. Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 sets the second variable winning device for one round. The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of 31 is completed. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) with respect to the second special symbol only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed with respect to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the jackpot game is completed based on the game state flags (probability variation function operation flag, fluctuation time shortening function operation flag).

Step S6900: The small hit variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing (special game execution means). For example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes a predetermined number of times in a predetermined opening time.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, as a plurality of winning types, (1) "10 round probability variation jackpot 1", (2) "10 round probability variation jackpot 2", (3) "10 round probability variation jackpot 3", (4) "10 rounds""Normaljackpot" is provided. A jackpot other than 10 rounds may be set.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", and "10 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "10 round probability variation jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 3", and "10 round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round normal symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 548 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[10 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long-opened (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds), the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, and the probabilistic region is long-opened. Therefore, the game ball may pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the first variable winning device 30 in the first round, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the game shifts to the "high probability state". ..

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Further, in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 1", after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is activated to shift to the "time reduction state".
As described above, the "10-round probability variation symbol 1" is a winning symbol that shifts to the high probability time shortening state.

[10 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long-opened (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds), the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, and the probabilistic region is long-opened. Therefore, the game ball may pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the first variable winning device 30 in the first round, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the game shifts to the "high probability state". ..

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 2", 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

Further, in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is not activated to shift to the "non-time reduction state".
In this way, the "10-round probability variation symbol 2" is a winning symbol that shifts to a high-probability non-time shortening state.

[10 round probability variation symbol 3]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 3" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long-opened (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds), the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, and the probabilistic region is long-opened. Therefore, the game ball may pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the first variable winning device 30 in the first round, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the game shifts to the "high probability state". ..

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 3", the player is given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Further, when the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is applied in the non-time shortened state, the "non-time shortened state" is entered by not activating the "time shortening function" after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the "10-round probability variation symbol 3" is applied in the time-reduced state, the "time-reduced state" is entered by activating the "time-reducing function" after the jackpot game is completed.
As described above, the "10-round probability variation symbol 3" is a winning symbol that shifts to a high-probability non-time shortening state or a high-probability time-shortening state according to the gaming state at the time of winning.

[10 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). However, although the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, the probabilistic region is not opened for a long time. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region. Therefore, after the jackpot game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated, and the state shifts to the "low probability state".

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 rounds normal symbol", the player is given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Further, in the case of corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol", after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is activated to shift to the "time reduction state".
As described above, the "10-round normal symbol" is a winning symbol that shifts to the low probability time shortened state.

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 also wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) within one round (during one small hit game), It will be closed without waiting for the longest opening time.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "one of the probabilistic symbols" and the game ball passes through the probabilistic region during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the "high probability time shortened state" or "high probability time shortened state" or " Shift to "high probability non-time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "10 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state". To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "one of the probability variation symbols", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the "low probability time shortened state" or "low probability time reduction state" or "low probability time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the "probability non-time reduction state".

In addition, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the opening time is common "10.0 seconds", the interval time between rounds is common "1.5 seconds", and the ending time is common. It is "8.0 seconds". The opening time is the start time set at the start of the jackpot game, the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between rounds, and the ending time is. , The end time set at the end of the jackpot game (after the final round is over). The interval time between rounds is also set in the final round.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type of the second special symbol. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). More specifically, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the game in which the second variable winning device 31 operates) is executed. .. In such a small hit game, since the second variable winning device 31 operates in a predetermined opening pattern (for example, 0.5 seconds x 1 opening), a certain number of prizes are generated in the second large winning opening (average). Then, about 1.7 pieces are generated).

Even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted. Further, even if a small hit is won in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the small hit game ends. It should be noted that the "time reduction state" may be terminated by winning a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. The contents of the special symbol change preprocessing listed below can be shared in the first special symbol game processing (FIG. 546) and the second special symbol game processing (FIG. 547). However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol. To do. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2090: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the fluctuation time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON.

When it is determined that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2092.

Step S2092: The main control CPU 72 executes the stop symbol reading process. In this process, the information of the stop symbol saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, based on the read stop symbol information, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2094: The main control CPU 72 executes the remaining fluctuation time reading process. In this process, the value of the fluctuation timer (value of the remaining fluctuation time) saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the read value of the variable timer in the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

Step S2096: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol revariation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the re-variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a re-variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This revariation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2098: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning off the variation time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76. As a result, the situation in which the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended is released.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed in step S2090 that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2100.

Step S2100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the number of controlled special symbol operation memories (first special symbol operation memory number or second special symbol operation memory number) remains (is greater than 0). To do. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of operation memories of the target symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2150.

Step S2150: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol operation memory number is 0. That is, if the control target is the first special symbol, it is confirmed whether or not the second special symbol operation memory number is 0, and if the control target is the second special symbol, the first special symbol operation memory is confirmed. Check if the number is 0. This confirmation can also be performed by referring to the value of the special symbol working memory counter. Then, when the other special symbol operation memory number is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process in step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not any of the start winning openings has won a prize for a predetermined time, and if it confirms that there has been no prize for a predetermined time, generates a command for demo production. .. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 546) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 547). At the time of return, it returns to the end address of each special symbol game processing (the same applies hereinafter).

On the other hand, when the other special symbol operation memory number is not 0 (step S2150: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute the demo setting process, and the first special symbol game process (FIG. 546) or the second special symbol game. Return to the process (FIG. 547).

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol operation memory counter to be controlled is larger than 0 (step S2100: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2160.

Step S2160: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag with respect to the other special symbol. The big hit flag or the small hit flag is a flag set when a big hit or a small hit is hit by an internal lottery, and is reset at the end of the big hit game or the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the confirmation in this process is confirmation of whether or not the result of the internal lottery regarding the other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If the variation display of the other special symbol is not executed, the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, so that the confirmation result is inevitably No. Further, although the determination content is set to "big hit or small hit" here, only "big hit" or only "small hit" may be used.

In this process, when a value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2202. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol, that is, when the value is "00H" (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S2200. To execute.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the special symbol to be controlled. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be controlled) stored in the RAM 76, and the value after the subtraction. Is set to "Working memory number at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process, the display mode of the number of stored symbols is changed (decreased by 1) for the control target of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random number value (big hit determination random number value) is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, second). Lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high-probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low-probability state. To. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag to "01H". By executing such processing, when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game, the main control CPU 72 can execute a special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) with a winning probability corresponding to the currently set set value. Yes (lottery execution means).

Step S2302: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit determination process (internal lottery).
When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution means).

The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the second variable winning device 31. If the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag to "01H".

In this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning (regulation means other than the non-winning), but the big hit determination table for each state is prepared in advance. The small hit determination table may be written in each ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2202: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the same process as in step S2200 is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination process is completed (step S2302), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2400.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2402, and if the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 is next. Step S2410 is executed.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous small hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the disconnection pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol to be controlled (variation pattern determining means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be controlled, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as non-reach fluctuation, reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). Information about the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command.

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process and is currently Check whether the state of is "high probability state" or "time reduction state". For example, in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to the shortened time (for example, about 4 to 12 seconds).

Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. May be shortened. However, when the special fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of stored items. The stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery by the first special symbol, for example, "reach effect" may be generated and the result may be missed, or "reach effect" may be generated and the result may be missed. It is supposed to control the operation. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of 1st special symbol deviation pattern selection table]
FIG. 550 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time reduction state) when the first special symbol is out of alignment.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the low-probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "6" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (hereinafter, the same applies).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

The fluctuation pattern may be a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed (the same applies to the fluctuation pattern selection table below). The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the effect symbol changes once or a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: 1st pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: 2nd pseudo variation). Pseudo-variation) is a variation in which the pseudo-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice. Further, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: 3rd pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed 3 times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: 4th pseudo variation). (Fluctuation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed four times.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 551 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state / high probability time shortened state) when the first special symbol is removed.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when non-winning is applicable) in the low probability time shortened state or the high probability time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "21" to "28" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 552 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state) when the first special symbol is out of alignment.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when non-winning is applicable) in the high-probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "41" to "48" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "48" correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 553 is a diagram showing a second special symbol off-time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss due to low probability non-time reduction in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is a specified time (for example, a time of several seconds to several hours)) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation) is set. The table configuration is such that pattern 51) is selected (variable time defining means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “51” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 554 is a second special symbol off-time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss in the second special symbol in the low probability time shortened state, the high probability time shortened state, or the high probability non-time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 52) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “52” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[See Fig. 549: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (in the case of non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols, which are selectively determined at the time of a big hit, are prepared. The breakdown of the four types is "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 2", "10 round probability variation symbol 3" and "10 round normal symbol". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 1a", "10 round probability variation symbol 1b", "10 round probability variation symbol 1c" and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 555 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "30", "30", "40" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. Further, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 2", and "10 round normal symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. At the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is 100 minutes. 30 (= 30%), and the ratio of selecting "10 round normal symbol" is 40/100 (= 40%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[When the limiter is not reached]
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1" or "10 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1" or "10 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given). ).

[When the limiter is reached]
When the limiter is reached, the number of probability changes is not given even if the game ball passes through the probability change area during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[Winning in non-time saving (non-time saving state)]
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times.

Further, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to the "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is not given. As a result, it shifts to the small hit rush state (latent probability change state). In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times.
On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "10 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Winning in a short time (shortened time)]
If you win during the time reduction, you will be given the same number of time reductions as if you won during the normal time. In addition, the number of time reductions different from the case of winning during normal times may be given.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 556 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and the distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation symbol 3" corresponding to the distribution value is shown. At the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is 100/100 (= 100%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H01H". Become.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[When the limiter is not reached]
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[When the limiter is reached]
When the limiter is reached, the number of probability changes is not given even if the game ball passes through the probability change area during the jackpot game.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[Winning in non-time saving (non-time saving state)]
If the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is not given, which corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3" in the non-time reduction period (non-time reduction state).
In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Further, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time reduction number may not be given (even if the time reduction number is 0 times). Good).

[Winning in a short time (shortened time)]
When the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 10,000 times, which corresponds to the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" during the time reduction (time reduction state).
In either case of non-time reduction or time reduction, when the limiter is reached, the probability change number is not given even if the game ball passes through the probability change area, so the time reduction number is given 100 times. ..

FIG. 557 is a diagram showing a small hit winning symbol, a small hit winning probability, and an opening pattern of a small hit game.
In the first special symbol lottery, there is no small hit.
In the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that it corresponds to a small hit, and in this case, the small hit symbol is selected as the winning symbol.

The small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery is 0, and the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is approximately 1/1 (for example, 317/319). The jackpot probability can be 1/319. The winning probability of a big hit or a small hit can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the game. The second special symbol lottery can be set to be out of order.

When a small hit is hit in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit game is executed based on a predetermined opening pattern (0.5 seconds x 1 opening). The second variable winning device 31 is an electric accessory that can shift to an open state in which the second large winning opening 31b is opened based on a predetermined opening pattern when a small hit is hit.

The opening pattern of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit is not limited to the one-time opening pattern, and an opening pattern such as a two-time opening pattern or a three-time opening pattern may be set.
However, the small hit game ends within a certain period of time (for example, within 1.8 seconds) regardless of which opening pattern is set.

[See Fig. 549: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be. In addition, when winning in a state where the fluctuation time shortening function is activated, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern without reach effect) is selected without selecting a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. May be good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 558 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is not distinguished according to the type of jackpot (winning symbol), but a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 559 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "71" to "78" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "71" to "78" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit without the reach effect being performed.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “72” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 560 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state / high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state or the high probability time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "81" to "88" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 561 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state / high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state or the high probability time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "91" to "98" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "91" to "98" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit without reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “92” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 562 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 101 per non-reach) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “101” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 563 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 102 per non-reach) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[See Fig. 549: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit.
In this process, the type of winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 3 (limited to short-time winning)" or "10 round normal". In the case of "design", the main control CPU 72 sets a value (01H) in the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag as the game state flag stored in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, fluctuation time reduction function operation). Means, advantageous state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
The winning symbol at the time of a small hit may be only one type of "small hit symbol that opens once", and in addition to this, for example, "small hit symbol that opens twice" or "small hit symbol that opens three times", etc. You may prepare the type of. As for the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery, a "small hit symbol of one opening" can be provided without being bound by the provision of "two rounds (opening twice) or more".

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

FIG. 564 is a diagram showing a second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit with a low probability of non-time reduction in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is a specified time (for example, a few minutes to several hours)) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small) is set. The table configuration is such that the hit fluctuation pattern 201) is selected (variation time defining means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “201” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 565 is a second special symbol small hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit with the second special symbol in the low probability time shortened state, the high probability time shortened state, or the high probability non-time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern) is set. The table structure is such that 202) is selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “202” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[See Fig. 549: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

Step S2416: The main control CPU 72 executes the number-cut counter value management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the value of the number-cut counter value. The details of the process will be described later. Further, such a process may be executed in the process during the special symbol stop display.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 546, Fig. 547: Processing during special symbol change]
In the special symbol change processing (step S3000 or step S3900), the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer set as described above from the register into the timer counter, and then the passage of time (count number of clock pulses). Or the value of the timer counter is decremented according to the value of the interrupt counter). Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be controlled until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination.

Further, in this process, a determination process of whether or not to activate the skip function is also performed, and in the big hit determination or the small hit determination of the previous special symbol change preprocessing, one of the special symbols is in the process of being out of order and is changing. When it is determined that the other special symbol corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, the skip function is activated for one special symbol. By operating this skip function, the variable display of one special symbol is forcibly terminated.

[Fig. 546, Fig. 547: Processing during special symbol stop display]
In the process during special symbol stop display (step S4000 or step S4900), the main control CPU 72 uses the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2092, step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 549). Controls the stop display of. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

Here, the execution conditions of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S2300) and small hit determination process (step S2302) will be briefly described.

[Internal lottery correspondence table]
FIG. 566 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of the internal lottery.
In the correspondence table of the internal lottery, when the corresponding special symbol executes the big hit lottery (big hit judgment processing) or the small hit lottery (small hit judgment processing) of the internal lottery, it is executed based on the state of the other special symbol. It is shown that it is decided whether or not to do it.

When the other special symbol is "during jackpot fluctuation (during variable display when the jackpot flag is 01H)", the jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to "missing".

Similarly, when the other special symbol is "small hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", in the internal lottery of the special symbol, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed. You may not execute it. In this case, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to "missing". In the case of "small hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", a method of executing the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery may be adopted.

On the other hand, when the other special symbol is "out of alignment (during display of fluctuation when the jackpot flag or small hit flag is 00H)", the jackpot lottery is first executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, if it does not correspond to a big hit, a small hit lottery is executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to either "big hit", "small hit" or "missing". It should be noted that the out-of-change fluctuation includes waiting for fluctuation and a stop display.

In this way, when one of the special symbols is "big hit fluctuating" (or "small hit fluctuating"), the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the other special symbol, and as a result, the big hit is not executed. No game or small hit game is executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is "big hit fluctuating" (or "small hit fluctuating"), the other special symbol is substantially in a big hit or small hit no lottery state.

[Counter value management process]
FIG. 567 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the counter value management process for cutting the number of times. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described according to an example.

Step S2420: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the number-cut counter value. As for the "count cut counter value", the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", respectively. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), but the number cut counter for the time reduction state is not set. .. Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "high probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is also set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times). Is set to.

Step S2422: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-cut counter value is not 0 (No), after the number-cut counter value command (time reduction count designation command, special count designation command, ST count designation command, etc.) is generated, the main control CPU 72 is next. Step S2424 is executed.

Step S2424: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-cut counter value.
Step S2426: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number-cut counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2428. On the other hand, when the value of the number-cut counter is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 549).

Step S2428: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the flag when the number-of-times cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number-of-count counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), so that the reset is performed in this case. Only the probability fluctuation function activation flag. Further, when shifting to the "low probability time shortening state", the number-of-count counter related to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that the variable time shortening function is reset in this case. Only the activation flag. When shifting to the "high probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), and the number cut counter for the high probability state is also set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times). ), So in this case, the probability fluctuation function activation flag and the fluctuation time shortening function activation flag are reset, but there is a situation where the special symbol fluctuates 10,000 times without obtaining the winning result. The probability of doing so is extremely low.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 549).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 568 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift processing. The content of the special symbol storage area shift processing can be common to the processing of the first special symbol and the processing of the second special symbol. However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol, the control target is the second special symbol. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: First, the main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 corresponding to the special symbol to be controlled. The specific contents of the processing are as already described in the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2212: Further, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the special symbol to be controlled. For example, if the special symbol to be controlled is the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special symbol to be controlled is the second special symbol. If so, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2214: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” for the special symbol to be controlled from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction.

Step S2216: Further, the main control CPU 72 sets an operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. That is, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol. If the control target is the second special symbol, the preceding value is a value (for example, "BCH") indicating that it is an operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2218: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled set in the previous step S2216 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 549).

FIG. 569 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol change. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the special symbol changing processing described below can be common to the first special symbol game processing (FIG. 546) and the second special symbol game processing (FIG. 547). That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S3100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the variable timer (decrements the value corresponding to the interrupt cycle) for the special symbol to be controlled.

Step S3200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the variable timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the fluctuation timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the fluctuation display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000b in FIG. 546 or step S1900b in FIG. 547) in the next interrupt cycle, and processes during special symbol variation display. Is repeated.

On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the fluctuation display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3300.

Step S3300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag for the special symbol to be controlled. When the jackpot flag has a value (01H) set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3400. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S3600.

Step S3400: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In this confirmation process, is it necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol (forcibly terminate the other missed variation) when the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the target special symbol ends? Executed to confirm whether or not. Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3500, assuming that it is necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and it is not necessary to activate the skip function, so that the main control CPU 72 steps next. Execute S3600.

Step S3500: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of activating the skip function for the other special symbol. That is, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of ending the variation display related to the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets 0 to the value of the variable timer for the other special symbol.

Step S3600: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol variation end processing. In this process, a value (01H) is set in the symbol stop display flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76 as the variable display of the special symbol to be controlled ends. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 546) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 547).

Here, the jackpot lottery probability of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is set as follows.
For example, the jackpot probability when the game state is the normal state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a low probability state) is set to about 1/319. Further, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is an advantageous state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a high probability state) is set to about 1/100.

[Skip function and fluctuation time measurement pause function]
Hereinafter, the skip function for forcibly stopping the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol display device 34 are temporarily stopped. The function will be described in detail.

FIG. 570 is a timing chart showing changes in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
Of these, FIG. 570 (A) shows an "example in which the skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function are not activated", and the first special symbol corresponds to the loss while the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display when the skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function are not activated when the fluctuation display is started.

Further, FIG. 570 (B) shows an "example of operating the fluctuation time measurement pause function", and the fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol while the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is a small hit is shown. It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display when the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated when is started.

Further, FIG. 570 (C) shows a "skip function operation example", and when the first special symbol starts the fluctuation display corresponding to the big hit during the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is removed. , It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display at each time when a skip function is activated. The skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function will be described by taking the timing charts (A) to (C) as an example.

[(A) in FIG. 570: Example of non-operation of each function]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of big hit.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a big hit, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not performed in the internal lottery related to the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery is out of order. In the illustrated example, a loss (non-winning) is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display ends at time t2. Is being done. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

Next, at time t2, since the fluctuation timer for the first special symbol becomes 0, the fluctuation display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss. Since the result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is not won, the skip function does not operate for the second special symbol here. Therefore, the variable display regarding the second special symbol is continued. That is, the variable timer related to the second special symbol (at the time of big hit) is not replaced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening for the other special symbol while the variable display at the time of a big hit (may be a small hit) in one special symbol, the other special symbol Of the internal lottery related to symbols, the big hit lottery is not executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a big hit, the other special symbol is in a non-lottery state.

[(B) in FIG. 570: Example of operation of the fluctuation time measurement pause function]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of a small hit.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a small hit, the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the internal lottery related to the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery is out of order. In the illustrated example, the outlier is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. There is. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

However, here, it is assumed that the fluctuation at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol ends at the time tx, which is the time between the times t1 and t2. Then, the small hit game related to the second special symbol is executed after the time tx. Here, it is assumed that the small hit game is executed from the time tx to the time t2. Then, the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated, and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, when the small hit game ends at time t2, the measurement of the remaining fluctuation time is restarted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the starting winning opening for the other special symbol during the variable display at the time of a small hit in one special symbol, the internal lottery for the other special symbol The big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed. Then, when the small hit game with one special symbol is started, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is suspended, and then the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted after the small hit game is completed. To. During the small hit fluctuation, a small hit lottery or a big hit lottery may be performed.

[(C) in FIG. 570: Example of skip function operation]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of disconnection.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when it is removed, the big hit lottery is first executed in the internal lottery related to the first special symbol, and the small hit lottery is performed when the big hit is not applicable. That is, the first special symbol is in a state where the big hit lottery can be executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. If a small hit is not selected in the first special symbol lottery, a big hit or a miss is applicable. In the illustrated example, a jackpot is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. There is. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

Next, at time t2, since the fluctuation timer for the first special symbol becomes 0, the fluctuation display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol stops and displays in a manner corresponding to the big hit. Since the result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is a big hit, and the variable display for the second special symbol is being executed, the skip function is activated. Then, by the operation of this skip function, the variation display at the time of a miss or a small hit regarding the second special symbol is terminated (forced termination means). Specifically, the variable timer related to the second special symbol is replaced with 0. Therefore, the set fluctuation time will be skipped. It should be noted that the variation display at the time of the skipped second special symbol is not executed again unlike the operation example in FIG. 570 (B).

As described above, in the present embodiment, if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening for the other special symbol while the fluctuation display at the time of loss is displayed for one special symbol, the internal lottery for the other special symbol is a big hit lottery or a small lottery. A winning lottery is executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is not in the variable display at the time of big hit or small hit, it means that the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is possible for the other special symbol. For example, if the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol while the fluctuation is displayed when the second special symbol is out of alignment or the second special symbol is waiting for the fluctuation as described above, the first Of the internal lottery related to special symbols, the big hit lottery is executed first, and then the small hit lottery is executed. In addition, while the fluctuation display at the time of a miss or a small hit regarding one special symbol (second special symbol) is started, the fluctuation display at the time of a big hit regarding the other special symbol (first special symbol) is started and ends after the fluctuation time elapses. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is skipped, and the variable display can be forcibly terminated.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
FIG. 571 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 in FIG. 546 or step S4900 in FIG. 547). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the processing during the special symbol stop display described below can also be common to the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing. That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer for the special symbol to be controlled (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 546 or step S1900b in FIG. 547) in the next interrupt cycle, and processes during the special symbol stop display. Is repeated.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set.

Step S4603: Then, when it is confirmed that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4300: Yes), the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. To do. This confirmation process is to confirm whether or not it is necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol when the variation display at the time of small hit of the target special symbol ends. Will be executed.

Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is displaying the fluctuation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next steps S4604a, assuming that it is necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol. And step S4604b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), it is assumed that the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and it is not necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function, and the main control CPU 72 Then executes step S4605.

Step S4604a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of activating the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol, that is, a process of saving the fluctuation information of the other special symbol. Specifically, in order to temporarily stop the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 transmits the current fluctuation timer value (the value of the remaining fluctuation time) and the information of the stop symbol to the RAM 76. Execute the process to save.

Step S4604b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning on the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 (variable time measurement pause means). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended.

Step S4605: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as a control internal state flag for the special symbol to be controlled. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress for the special symbol to be controlled. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4600: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table for the special symbol to be controlled to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated, and the fluctuation time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3" or "10 round normal symbol", the value corresponding to "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the special symbol to be controlled is in the jackpot. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 549). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3" or "10 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.
Then, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Then, when the processing of step S4500, step S4602 or step S4606 is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing (FIG. 546 or 547).

[Display output management process]
FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 541) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 lights the LED corresponding to the time saving state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Output a signal. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. In this case, the main control CPU 72 determines the launch direction of the game ball according to the progress of the game (value such as special game management status or internal state) (launch direction determining means). For example, when the gaming state is a left-handed gaming state (when it is a low-probability non-time shortening state), the main control CPU 72 determines that the gaming ball should be launched into the first gaming area (left-handed gaming area). On the other hand, when the game state is a right-handed game state (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state, big hit game state, small hit In the game state), the main control CPU 72 determines that the game ball should be launched into the second game area (right-handed area). Then, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a launch position designation command. The launch position designation command includes information for identifying whether the game state is the left-handed game state or the game state is the right-handed game state. The generated launch position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described.
FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the jackpot closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

When the jackpot game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command during the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is in progress to the effect control device 124.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. The number of winnings), the operation pattern of the probabilistic region solenoid 95b, the opening time, and the ending time are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the probabilistic region solenoid 95b, the interval time between rounds, the opening time, and the ending time are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 548. Is. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 549). Specifically, if "10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3" or "10 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 10. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation region timer (the opening time of the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 95b set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily closes the jackpot interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (temporarily closing the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 95b set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for this. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 573).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 548, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 574) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area opening process. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 95b is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 548. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 30d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the first variable winning device 30.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 574) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 95b is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 30d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the first variable winning device 30.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. To do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 95b is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 30d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 574) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not still 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 574) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, "the number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. If such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 573).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 573). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a big hit again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot, and performs steps S5402 to S5408 above. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (10 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 573). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 573).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag. This flag is set in the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 549) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5508: When the value is set in the probability variation function operation flag (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 10000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, for example, and becomes the above-mentioned number-cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol changes (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the high probability state is not provided with a substantial upper limit, the probability that the probability variation number is subtracted to 0 is low. If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag. This flag is set in the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 549) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value is set in the variable time shortening function operation flag (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 10000 times). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the variable time shortening function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

By executing such a process, when the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag is ON (when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 provides a predetermined condition (electric chew support) for the game. Time reduction state (advantageous state, winning state) to which advantageous conditions (state in which electric chew support is performed) are applied compared to non-time reduction state (normal state, non-winning easy state) to which no state) is applied It is possible to shift to (easy state) (advantageous state transition means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the limiter management process. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability medium" is generated as the internal state, and if the fluctuation time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction". Generates a state specification command that represents "medium". These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 546, step S1900b in FIG. 547) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 573).

[Limiter management process]
FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the limiter management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning of any of the probabilistic symbols (10 round probabilistic symbols 1 to 3).

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the current winning is a winning with any of the probabilistic symbols (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current winning is a winning with any of the probabilistic symbols, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5603a.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting (setting to 0) the number of limiters. Here, the number of limiters indicates the number of consecutive times that can be continuously shifted to the high probability state, that is, the number of consecutive times that the special game (big hit game) can be continuously executed. In this embodiment, a game specification in which four big hit games including the first hit are set as one set is adopted, and the value of the number of limiters takes any value of "0" to "3". ..

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can set the number of limiters (continuous number of times) capable of continuously shifting to the high probability state (continuous number of times setting means).

Here, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the limiter number to the effect control device 124 at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, at the start of big hit, at the end of big hit, at the time of updating the limiter number, etc.). The limiter count command including can be sent.

Step S5603a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning in a low probability state (whether or not the internal state at the time of winning is a low probability non-time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state). To do.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning is a winning in a low probability state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5603b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current winning is a winning in a low probability state (No), that is, when the current winning is a winning in a high probability state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5604.

Step S5603b: The main control CPU 72 executes the limiter number setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the limiter number of times to "4". For control purposes, the number of limiters is temporarily set to "4", but it is immediately subtracted to "3" in the next process.

Step S5604: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting (-1) the number of limiters.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can update the limiter number of times based on the winning in the internal lottery (continuous number of times updating means).

Step S5606: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the "limiter number of times" and the specified value (for example, "0") match.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the "limiter number of times" and the specified value match (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5608. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the "limiter number of times" and the specified value match, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot end process (FIG. 577).

Step S5608: The main control CPU 72 executes the transition process to the low probability state.
In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process when the specified value is reached (means for executing the process when the specified value is reached), which limits the transition to the high probability state (advantageous gaming state).

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to a winning symbol that does not shift to a high probability state (advantageous gaming state) by setting the probability variation number to 0 even if the probability variation number is set to 10000 times. Execute the processing when the specified value is reached (that is, the processing that does not shift to the high probability time shortened state without changing the winning symbol) (processing when the specified value is reached).

The process when the specified value is reached is a process that assumes that the winning symbol does not shift to the high-probability state even if it corresponds to the winning symbol that shifts to the high-probability contraction state (that is, the process of changing the winning symbol). There may be. In addition, the processing when the specified value is reached is a process that makes it impossible to select the winning symbol that shifts to the high probability state when the specified value is reached, that is, a process that makes it possible to select only the winning symbol that does not shift to the high probability state (breakdown of big hits (breakdown of big hits). (Breakdown of the winning symbol selection table) may be a process) in which all the winning symbols do not shift to the high probability state).
As a result, when the limiter is reached, the state is forcibly shifted to the low probability state.

Step S5610: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the number of limiters. As a result, the number of limiters is reset to "0 times". When this process is executed, the limiter count has already been reset to "0 times" in the subtraction process in step S5604, so that this process may not be executed.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot end processing (FIG. 577).

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described.
FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 580 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the present embodiment, a predetermined opening pattern (opening pattern that opens 0.5 seconds x 1 time) is set. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the second variable winning device 31 is operated.

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is a game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. The time is set so that the timers are lined up without any gap (for example, about 2 seconds).

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 579). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

When the small hit game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command during the small hit game indicating that the small hit game is in progress to the effect control device 124.

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 581 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is in the countdown (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 580) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (the opening second large winning opening 31b) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed in one opening (in one small hit game). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 579). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of small hit at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 is in step S6301 to step S6310 described above. Repeat the procedure.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 580).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 579). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 579). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 580). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 579) at the time of small hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 579). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process, and the actual number of opening times is set as the set number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times). The opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the value is reached.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 579) at the time of small hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 579).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in small hit game" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 546, step S1900b in FIG. 547) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.

[Game flow]
FIG. 584 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. [F1] In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "low probability state" (low probability non-time shortening state). [F1] In the normal mode, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

In [F1] normal mode, if [F2] "10 round normal symbol" is won, [F3] 10 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, [F4] coast mode is entered. To do.

[F4] In the coast mode, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "high probability state" (low probability time shortened state). In the [F4] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F5] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[F4] In the coastal mode, the variable start winning device 28 operates with high frequency, and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates. In the second special symbol lottery, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it corresponds to a substantially small hit, but in the coast mode in which the low probability time is shortened, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency, so that it is downstream of the variable start winning device 28. The game ball hardly reaches the second variable winning device 31 that executes the small hit game.

In [F1] normal mode, if [F6] "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is won, [F7] 10 round jackpot game (special bonus effect) is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, [F8] fireworks mode is set. Transition.

[F8] In the fireworks mode, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "high probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "high probability state" (high probability time shortened state). In the [F8] fireworks mode, when the [F9] limiter is reached (when the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is hit three times and the big hit game is executed three times), the mode shifts to the [F4] coast mode.

[F8] In the fireworks mode, the variable start winning device 28 operates with high frequency, and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates. In the second special symbol lottery, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it corresponds to a substantially small hit, but in the fireworks mode in which the probability time is shortened, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency, so that it is downstream of the fireworks mode. The game ball hardly reaches the second variable winning device 31 that executes the small hit game.

In the [F1] normal mode, when the [F10] "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the [F11] 10 round big hit game and the premium bonus effect by the small hit rush state are executed.

In the small hit rush state, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "high probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "low probability state" (high probability non-time shortening state). When the [F12] limiter is reached during the execution of the premium bonus effect (when the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is hit 3 times and the big hit game is executed 3 times), the mode shifts to the [F4] coast mode. If the [F12] limiter is reached during the execution of the premium bonus effect, the mode may be shifted to the [F1] normal mode.

In the high-probability non-time shortening state, the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, but since the variable start winning device 28 does not operate frequently, the second variable winning device 31 that executes the small hit game downstream thereof , Game balls are coming to arrive frequently.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 executes a variable display effect using an effect symbol or the like.

The effect symbols used in the normal mode include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 on the left, middle, and right. Liquid crystal. Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, middle area, and right area on the screen.

FIG. 585 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect is performed between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used) starts the variable display and the time when the stop display (including the fixed stop) is performed. It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 585 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory number display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually, for example, "15 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to them (for example, red display color). The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board instead of being displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 585 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol strings on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (effect execution). means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 by the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (the changing memory display effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 585 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 585 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed increases accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 585 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 585 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 585 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 586 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode.
The coast mode is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol". The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 586 (A): The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "coast mode". The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 586 (B): And, this fluctuation is won in a small hit, and all the production symbols are stopped and displayed by the end of this fluctuation ("1"-"1"-. "5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit.

In FIG. 586 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. If you win a big hit in the coastal mode, the reach effect will be executed and you will be a big hit.

[Example of fireworks mode production]
FIG. 587 is a continuous view showing an example of the effect of the fireworks mode.
The fireworks mode is shifted to after the end of the jackpot game in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 1". The fireworks mode is a "high probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 587 (A): The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks mode". The background image in the fireworks mode is a background image with the motif of an image in which fireworks are launched in the night sky. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 587 (B): Then, a small hit was won this time, and all the production symbols are stopped and displayed due to the end of this fluctuation ("2"-"2"-"6". ). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit.

In FIG. 587 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. If you win a big hit in the fireworks mode, the reach effect will be executed and you will be a big hit.

588 to 590 are continuous views showing a first production example of the premium bonus production.
The first effect example is an effect example in which the memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" does not exist in the memory of the first special symbol.

The premium bonus effect is a big hit game state based on the winning of "10 round probability variation symbol 2" or "10 round probability variation symbol 3" and a small hit rush state that shifts between two big hit games (small hits occur frequently). It is executed as a series of big hit-like effects using the state). The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 588 (A): When the "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is applied at the time of the first hit (when the jackpot is from the low probability non-time shortened state), the premium bonus effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot game. In the premium bonus production, the character information of the premium bonus and the character dedicated to the premium bonus are displayed.

[V prize → execution of guaranteed number of balls reported]
In FIG. 588 (B): In the first round in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the probability variation region is opened for a long time. Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the guaranteed number of balls to be announced is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect of displaying 3000 character information is executed as a guaranteed number of balls to be announced. The premium bonus effect in which the guaranteed number of balls to be notified is executed is the first big hit effect (first special game effect, special game effect, suggested special game effect) that suggests that a continuous big hit game is executed.
In addition, instead of or in addition to the guaranteed number of balls notification effect, even if a notification effect suggesting that the player enters a series of effects including a small hit rush state (for example, a zone advantageous to the player) is executed. Good.

Here, the character information of 3000 means the minimum number of game balls to be paid out in the premium bonus effect (= one big hit (1000 balls) x 3 big hits). In the present embodiment, 4000 game balls are paid out when all the limits are exhausted, but since the final jackpot is an ending bonus, at least 3000 game balls are paid out in the premium bonus production.

[Guaranteed ball icon display production]
In FIG. 588 (C): Following the guaranteed ball number notification effect, the guaranteed ball icon display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a guaranteed exit icon displaying 3000 character information is displayed. Once the guaranteed ball exit icon is displayed large on the screen, it will continue to be displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen until the number of acquired balls reaches 3000.
In addition, instead of or in addition to the guaranteed ball exit icon, an icon suggesting that the period (zone) is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

[Incremental production]
In FIG. 589 (D): During the execution of the premium bonus effect, the game ball is moved to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) or the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b). When the ball is entered, the chopping effect is executed every time 10 game balls are entered. The ticking effect is executed in the display mode of 001RUSH to 999RUSH. 1RUSH means that 10 game balls have entered the big winning opening, that is, a profit equivalent to one round of balls has been obtained.

[Acquired ball display production]
In addition, at the lower right of the display screen, the winning ball display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the character information of "100/3000" is displayed. With such a display, in the premium bonus production, the acquisition of 3000 game balls is guaranteed at a minimum (denominator part), and 100 game balls have been paid out so far (numerator part). Is expressed.

In FIG. 589 (E): In the ticking effect, the number part of the character information is updated every time 10 game balls are inserted into the large winning opening, such as 002RUSH and 003RUSH.
Here, when the update of the numerical part of RUSH occurs continuously for a predetermined period (time), the later display (for example, the second stage display) may be enlarged or later displayed than the previous display. The color of is different from the color of the previous display, and display control may be executed so that the player can easily recognize the color.

In FIG. 589 (F): Even if the jackpot game ends and the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the premium bonus effect is continuously executed. Here, the small hit variation of the second special symbol is executed. The effect pattern is displayed in a small variation at the lower center of the screen. The fourth symbol Z2 is also in a fluctuating state. The first special symbol is in a stopped state.

In FIG. 590 (G): In substantially synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the small hit game is started. When the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 31 is opened, and the game ball can be inserted into the second large winning opening 31b. Then, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

[Incremental production]
Here, too, the nicking effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the ticking effect is performed in the display mode of 011RUSH. In addition, at the lower right of the display screen, the winning ball display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the character information of "1100/3000" is displayed.

In FIG. 590 (H): When the small hit game is completed, the next variation starts. The effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 are in a fluctuating state.

In FIG. 590 (I): In substantially synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot, the jackpot game is started. Even if the jackpot game is started, the premium bonus effect will continue to be executed. Then, the premium bonus production continues until the small hit rush state immediately before the final big hit game that reaches the limiter ends.

FIG. 591 is a continuous diagram showing a second production example of the premium bonus production.
The second effect example is an effect example in which the memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" exists in the memory of the first special symbol.

In FIG. 591 (A): When the first hit (the big hit from the low probability non-time shortened state) corresponds to the "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the premium bonus effect is executed.

[V prize → non-execution of guaranteed number of balls reported]
In FIG. 591 (B): In the first round when "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is applied, the probability variation region is opened for a long time. Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region, the guaranteed number of balls to be announced is normally executed. However, here, since the memory of the first special symbol has a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol", the guaranteed number of balls to be notified effect (the effect of displaying 3000 character information) is not executed. The premium bonus effect in which the guaranteed number of balls notification effect is not executed is a second big hit effect (second special game effect, special game effect, non-suggested special game effect) that does not suggest that a continuous big hit game is executed.

[Other productions]
In FIG. 591 (C): In this case, it is possible not to execute the guaranteed ball exit icon display effect and the acquired ball exit display effect.

592 and 593 are continuous views showing other production examples related to the premium bonus production.

In FIG. 592 (A): The game is proceeding in the state of the premium bonus effect (small hit rush state). The guaranteed ball exit icon is displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the acquired ball is displayed in the lower right of the screen (2900/3000).

In FIG. 592 (B): Here, it is assumed that the number of acquired balls has reached 3000 (3000/3000). In this case, the guaranteed ball icon at the upper left of the screen is hidden. While the guaranteed ball icon is displayed, the guaranteed period is continuing, so the premium bonus effect will not end, but when the guaranteed ball icon is hidden, the guaranteed period will end, so the premium bonus effect will not end. , It becomes an unknown state when it ends (a state where it can be finished at any time).

[Special character display production]
In FIGS. 592 (C) and (D): When the guaranteed ball exit icon is hidden, an effect in which a special character is displayed may be executed. As shown in FIG. 593 (C), when the female character is displayed, it is determined that at least "5 RUSH minutes (round games for 5 rounds)" remain. Further, as shown in FIG. 593 (D), when the male character is displayed, it is confirmed that at least "8 RUSH minutes (8 rounds worth of round games)" remains.
For example, if a male character or a female character is displayed in the wake of the ticking effect, the warranty period will continue (because it will continue for at least 5 or 8 rounds), so the premium bonus will be the second or third. You may display the effect so that you can proceed to the next stage (development, story progress, etc.) to the premium bonus of.

In FIG. 593 (E): Then, it is assumed that the fourth big hit including the first hit is won. The effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

In FIG. 593 (F): In this case, the ending bonus effect is executed. The ending bonus effect is an effect that is executed after the premium bonus effect is completed, and is executed during the execution of the jackpot game when the limiter is reached (during the execution of the final jackpot game).

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. All of the above-mentioned effects are controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), special bonus effect management process (step S403), display output process (step S404), and so on. The configuration includes subroutines for lamp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the number of operation memories increases, an effect command when the number of operation memories decreases, a start opening winning sound control command, and a demo effect. Command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, status specification command, round number command, count cut counter value command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, launch position specification command, payout There are medium command, big hit game command, small hit game command, prize ball content command, setting related end specification command, probability change area passage command, limiter count command, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory display effect using the storage marker or the like while referring to the effect command when the number of operation memories increases, the effect command when the number of operation memories decreases, and the like. ..

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the variable display effect or the stop display effect using the effect symbol or the fourth symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or The effect content during the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled (effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.).

Step S403: In the special bonus effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the special bonus effect (premium bonus effect, ending bonus effect). The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 transmits the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S702 and S703. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute steps S702 and S703.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes the look-ahead effect management process (look-ahead effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a determination process as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (marker change effect, zone effect, continuous effect, etc.), and if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect Executes the process of determining the specific contents of.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 has an effect content to be executed when the change arrives, and an effect content to be executed in the previous change prior to the change (for example, the content of the marker color change effect and the deviation. The process of determining the content of the stop effect, the content of the zone effect, the content of the effect effect, the content of the continuous effect, the content of other notice effects, and the scenario of these effects) is executed. The determined content is stored (stored) in the look-ahead effect content holding buffer of the RAM 130, and is executed for the fluctuation. The effect control CPU 126 turns on the pre-reading effect executing flag from the time when the pre-reading effect scenario is set until the end of the scenario. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed can be confirmed by the look-ahead effect execution flag. The fluctuation is a fluctuation when the memory (hold) to be read ahead is consumed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 can execute the look-ahead effect that is executed over the fluctuation of the special symbol once or a plurality of times when the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is satisfied. (Pre-reading effect execution means).

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery is being changed from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 594).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination when the large hit variable winning device management process is selected or when the small hit variable winning device management process is selected in the main control CPU 72. Ru. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (reach other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines (selects) the content of the variable display effect when a small hit is won.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and an effect according to the result. The control information of the content (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type and the gaming state at the time of winning). For example, when the "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is won, the effect control CPU 126 selects a large role medium effect pattern corresponding to the "10 round probability variation symbol 1" as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and produces this effect. Instruct the display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses. Further, when a probability change area passing command is received during the big hit game, the effect control CPU 126 can execute an effect emphasizing that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area. In addition, when "10 round probability variation symbol 2" or "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is won, the process of selecting the image of the big role production corresponding to the premium bonus production and the ending bonus is executed. This process may be executed in this process, or may be executed in the special bonus effect management process (step S403) of FIG. 594.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 594) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 594). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time, and stop. Determine the display mode and the like. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. When the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect during execution of the variation display effect (at the time of loss). Is the same). In the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and revariated, the pseudo continuous symbol can be stopped at the middle effect symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, case of reach occurrence). Determines the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.).

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify the player that there is a possibility of a small hit or a big hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 126 wins the lottery for whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (when the specified effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 is elected during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect). The advance notice effect (related to the predetermined effect, which suggests the success or failure of the predetermined effect) suggesting that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode is executed (preliminary effect execution means).

Further, when the effect control CPU 126 determines in the advance notice selection process that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining at which timing during the variable display the advance notice effect is to be started. In addition, various notice effects (step-up notice effect, conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect, character drop effect, next notice effect, title color change effect) executed during the variable display are included in the notice effect. ), Pseudo continuous advance notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect, memory marker change advance notice effect, etc. are also included.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low probability non-time reduction state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. Further, when the stay mode is the "fireworks mode (high probability time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with a fireworks motif. Further, when the stay mode is the "coastal mode (low probability time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with the coast as a motif. When the stay mode is "high probability non-time reduction state", the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the premium bonus effect is executed, but such a process may be executed in this process. , May be executed in the special bonus effect management process (step S403) of FIG. 594.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 596), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern, and based on various advance notice effect patterns. The notice production is executed.

[Special bonus production management process]
FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special bonus effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the jackpot game transitions to the high-probability non-time reduction state or the high-probability non-time reduction state is in progress.
During the jackpot game that shifts to the high-probability non-time shortening state, is during the jackpot game when the low-probability non-time shortening state or the low-probability time-shortening state corresponds to "10-round probability variation symbol 2", or during the high-probability non-time reduction. It is in the big hit game when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3" in the shortened state (however, except during the big hit game when the limiter is reached).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the jackpot game to shift to the high-probability non-time reduction state or the high-probability non-time reduction state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S812 to enter the high-probability non-time reduction state. When it cannot be confirmed that the transitional jackpot game is in progress or the high-probability non-time reduction state is in effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826.

Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 executes the premium bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as displaying a background image of the premium bonus effect or displaying a character appearing in the premium bonus effect.

Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a V prize has occurred at the time of the first hit.
The V prize at the time of the first hit corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 2" in the low probability non-time reduction state or the low probability time reduction state, and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game (V). If you win a prize). Whether or not a V prize has occurred can be confirmed by a probability variation area passage command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the V winning at the first hit has occurred (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S816, and when it cannot be confirmed that the V winning at the first hit has occurred (No), the effect The control CPU 126 executes step S818.

Step S816: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the V prize is generated at the time of the first hit. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S818: The effect control CPU 126 executes the stepping effect management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 enters the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) or the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) during execution of the premium bonus effect. , Every time 10 game balls are inserted, the chopping effect is executed. In the stepping effect, every time the stepping effect is executed, a process of updating and displaying (+1) the numerical portion of the character information of RUSH is executed.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 executes the acquisition / exit management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 enters the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) or the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) during execution of the premium bonus effect. Every time a game ball enters, a process of updating and displaying (+10) the character information of the molecular part displayed in the acquired ball display effect is executed. The update display of the character information can be executed based on the prize ball content command.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 executes the guaranteed exit icon management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting an effect pattern for erasing the guaranteed ball exit icon when the character information of the molecular part displayed in the acquired ball output display effect reaches a specified value (3000). Execute. The process of first displaying the guaranteed ball exit icon is executed in the process of generating the V prize at the time of the first hit in step S816.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special character management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of erasing the guaranteed ball exit icon when the character information of the molecular part displayed in the acquired ball exit display effect has reached the specified value (3000). ), And if the remaining number of RUSH remains more than a certain number, an execution lottery for whether to display a special character is executed, and if this execution lottery is won, an effect pattern for displaying the special character is selected. Execute the process to be performed.

When the remaining number of RUSH is more than a certain number, when the third big hit including the first hit is not executed, the third big hit including the first hit is executed, but at least 5 rounds. It may be a case where a round game for a minute or at least 8 rounds has not been executed.

If at least 5 rounds of round games have not been executed, the effect of displaying a female character as a special character can be selected, and if at least 8 rounds of round games have not been executed, as a special character. An effect of displaying a female character or a male character can be selected.
In addition, when executing the second or third premium bonus, the second or third premium bonus depends on the situation of the small hit rush (the situation of the acquired ball, the situation of the number of small hits, the situation of the number of fluctuations). The rate of transition to (lottery probability) may be different.

Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 is a process of confirming whether or not the jackpot game at the time of reaching the limiter is in progress (during the jackpot game when the jackpot is from a high probability non-time reduction and the number of limiters is 1). To execute.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the jackpot game when the limiter is reached (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828, and when it cannot be confirmed that the jackpot game when the limiter is reached (No), the effect is produced. The control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 594).

Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes the ending bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as selecting a background image of the ending bonus effect or displaying a character appearing in the ending bonus effect. In the ending bonus effect, the total number of balls acquired during the premium bonus effect and the ending bonus effect may be displayed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 594).

[Processing when V prize occurs at the first hit]
FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when a V prize is generated at the time of the first hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S840: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming the contents of the memory of the first special symbol. For example, when the number of stored first special symbols is one, the contents of the stored first special symbol are confirmed by only one. On the other hand, when the number of stored first special symbols is four, the contents of the stored contents of all the first special symbols are confirmed. The confirmation of the stored contents can be executed based on the fluctuation pattern destination determination command or the like.

Step S842: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not there is a memory corresponding to the “10 round normal symbol” in the memory of the first special symbol confirmed in step S840.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S846 and cannot confirm that there is a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol". In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S844.

Step S844: The effect control CPU 126 executes the guaranteed number of balls notification effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (effect pattern shown in FIG. 588 (B)) for executing a guaranteed number of balls notification effect (effect of displaying 3000 character information), and guarantees output. Executes the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the effect of displaying the ball icon and the effect of displaying the acquired ball.

Step S846: The effect control CPU 126 executes the guaranteed number of balls notification effect non-selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (effect pattern shown in FIG. 591 (B)) that does not execute the guaranteed number of balls notification effect (effect of displaying 3000 character information). In this case, it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not execute the guaranteed ball icon display effect or the acquired ball display effect.

When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special bonus effect management process (FIG. 598).

By executing such a process (processes shown in FIGS. 598 and 599), the effect control CPU 126 performs a guaranteed number of balls notification effect according to the memory state of the first special symbol during the execution of the jackpot game. It is possible to execute the first big hit effect including the first big hit effect or the second big hit effect not including the guaranteed number of balls notification effect (special game effect in which the content of the effect differs depending on the memory state of the lottery element) (special game effect execution). means).

Further, by executing such a process, when the effect control CPU 126 does not have a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" in the memory of the first special symbol (the state of the memory of the lottery element is a continuous special game). (If it is in a state where it can be executed), the first big hit effect including the guaranteed number of balls notification effect (the first special game effect suggesting that the game state advantageous to the player continues, and the continuous special game are executed. When the memory of the first special symbol corresponds to the "10 round normal symbol" (the state of the memory of the lottery element is the continuous special game is executed) (If it is impossible), the second big hit effect that does not include the guaranteed number of balls notification effect (the second special game effect that does not suggest that the advantageous game state will continue, suggests that a continuous special game will be executed (No. 2 special game production) can be executed (special game production execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the memory state of the first special symbol when a V prize (predetermined event) occurs during the execution of the jackpot game. (Special game production execution means).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game, the first jackpot production including the guaranteed number of balls notification effect or the guaranteed number of balls notification effect is performed according to the state of memory of the first special symbol. Since the second jackpot effect that is not included can be executed, the content of the jackpot effect can be changed depending on the state of memory of the first special symbol that is not related to the jackpot game, and as a result, a novel game machine is provided. can do.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the first jackpot effect suggesting continuity is executed, or the second jackpot effect not suggesting continuity is executed based on the state of memory of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the big hit games are continuous by the first big hit effect and the second big hit effect.

(3) According to the present embodiment, in a gaming machine having a limiter function, exceptionally (as an irregular), when a situation occurs in which big hit games are not continuous (normal big hit is stored in the memory of the first special symbol). Since the second jackpot effect that does not suggest continuity can be executed (if it exists), the player feels distrust of the gaming machine when an exceptional situation occurs (3000 during the jackpot game). It is possible to avoid the risk of having a feeling of distrust due to the fact that 3000 game balls are not paid out even though they are displayed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, in order to confirm the memory state of the first special symbol when the V prize is generated during the execution of the jackpot game, the memory of the first special symbol is stored at the start of the jackpot game. Compared with the method of confirming the state of, the execution time of the confirmation process can be delayed, and the occurrence of irregularity can be dealt with for a longer period of time by the delay.

(5) In the game machine of the simultaneous turning machine (small hit rush) and the limiter machine (set type), when notifying the minimum guarantee of the number of balls to be released by the number of sets at the time of the probability change big hit of the first hit, a special symbol (first) When the high probability state ends due to an irregular jackpot due to fluctuations in the special symbol), the minimum guaranteed ball may not be reached.
Therefore, when the V prize during the probability change jackpot of the first hit occurs, the contents of the memory of the first special symbol are confirmed (except for the irregular prize during the high probability non-time shortening state, the high probability state is irregular. (Confirm that it will not end), and notify the number of balls that will be the minimum guarantee. Then, when the contents of the memory of the first special symbol are confirmed, if the high probability state ends irregularly (when there is a normal jackpot in the memory of the first special symbol), the minimum guaranteed number of balls is released. No notification is given. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk that the player feels distrust of the model when irregularities occur.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine not having a probability variation region.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine, but the present invention may be applied to a non-simultaneous turning machine.

The present invention is applicable when the jackpot is continuously generated by the limiter function, but is also applicable when the jackpot is continuously generated by the hold sequence which is not related to the limiter function.
The present invention is also applicable to cases where jackpots do not occur continuously.

In the above-described embodiment, the content of the jackpot effect is different depending on whether the memory of the first special symbol has a jackpot corresponding to the normal symbol or not, but the winning symbol of the second special symbol has a normal symbol. In the case of a game specification in which is present, the content of the jackpot effect may be different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot corresponding to the normal symbol in the memory of the second special symbol.

In the above-described embodiment, the second jackpot effect (second special game effect) has been described as an example of an effect that does not suggest that a continuous jackpot game is executed, but suggests that a continuous jackpot game is executed. It may be a production to be performed.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment H]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 600 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 601 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 600 and 601.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 601) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 600. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 600, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit), and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in the glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (preliminary effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off unlike the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times that of the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, the player can be made to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 601, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later with reference to another block diagram (FIGS. 604 and 605).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1. The change of the setting will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 601 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 602 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game state). , Small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.) is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area). The left side portion of the game area 8a is also used in a high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged below the variable start winning device 28. ..

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and a ball entry port 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the obstacle nails. The entry port 19a and the discharge port 19b are connected by a connecting passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the ball entry port 19a is decelerated and rectified through this connecting passage, and is discharged from the discharge port 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined ball entry port) is arranged on the right side of the starting gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but when it is flipped to the right by an obstacle nail, it enters the out port 19c.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a enters the ball entry port 19a and is discharged from the discharge port 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 and the out port 19c is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ) Needs to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It enables the ball to enter the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) retracted from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the 5th round, or the condition that it is the 7th to 16th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31 is a case where the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode) as in the case of the first variable winning device 30, and is a predetermined second condition (for example,). It operates when the condition that it is the sixth round of the jackpot game) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second major winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special entry). Sphere event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second prize opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second large winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends downward to the left, and then extends downward again.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the induction passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability variation region and a hole 31e for the probability variation region are arranged in the middle flow of the guidance passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is arranged downstream of the above.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is turned off, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so that the game ball passes through the upper part of the probability variation region blade member 31d. It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability variation area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is an region through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 opens during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is that the production region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probability variation region is opened for a long period of time. It is a pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds). Since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, the game ball is not guided to the probability variation region by this operation. Further, even if the blade member 31d for the probability variation region operates, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region when the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened.

In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the central position to the right side portion thereof. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating a vehicle on which a female character is on board). The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game area includes the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the game ball that has entered the out opening 19c. All the game balls driven into 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 603 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). As shown in the figure, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second. A special symbol display device 35 and a game status display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, it is memorized that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Suddenly (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the reduced one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter, referred to as “common”) for the purpose of controlling the switching between lighting and extinguishing. From a different point of view, the integrated display board 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are driven in order in common units at intervals of interrupt cycles (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, not all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 604 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. Of these, the random number circuit 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the random numbers generated here are It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and receives these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset as needed, and these are circuit boards together with the main control CPU 72. Implemented above. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least a setting value of a plurality of stages regarding the winning probability of the special symbol lottery) (setting changing means), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is opened with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the state shifts to the setting changing state (setting change state, setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared. To do.

In the state where the setting is being changed, the display is not performed on the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38), and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and a set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off. , Move to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, but the setting change switch may be separately provided without using the RAM clear switch 304.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). ..

Similar to the state where the setting is being changed, the state where the setting is being confirmed is not displayed on the main display, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. The set value is displayed. In the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being confirmed ends, and the power is temporarily turned off. After shifting to the previous state, it shifts to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls. Further, the probability variation region switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the probability change area switch 95 are used. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 to the display board 89.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 sets the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening) to the number of outs (out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected in 99). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream of the probability variation region, and a first large winning opening. A solenoid 90, a second winning opening solenoid 97, and a solenoid 99 for a probability variation region are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the blade member 31d for the probability variation region. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch solenoid 110 is installed together with a launch control board 108 (ball launching means). Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, when the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 is built in together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, and movable motor 57. The voice IC 134 also controls the driving of the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. The internal functional configuration of such an effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to the following figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of various effects commands (hereinafter, referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56 and 58. Further, a volume control switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136 in addition to the handle lever 62, the button motor 63, the push button 64, and the direction key 66, and when the player operates these operating members, they are connected. The contact signal of is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136. Here, an example in which the operating members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when the saucer illumination board is installed, the operation members 62, 64, 66 are attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124 to bring the push button 64 into either a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). Switch to (displace).

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 59 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The movable body sensor 59 is, for example, a photo sensor provided at the origin position (initial position) of the movable body 40f, and outputs a detection signal when the movable body 40f is detected. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 605 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

Normally, for controlling the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 are used as described above. Includes control of production using. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Etc.) are realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used. In FIG. 605, the tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210 (effect control means), the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, and the lamp control unit 224 (effect operation control means). ), Movable body control unit 226 (effect operation control means), input control unit 228, and the like. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operating body. Further, in the individual control stage, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 operate in accordance with the device to be controlled. Become the subject. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further stores the VDP 152 for drawing the effect screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, the sound IC 134 for generating the sound accompanying the effect and outputting it from the speaker, and the image and sound used for the effect. In addition to the CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190 and the DRAM 191 used as the loading destination of the data stored in the CGROM 190, the audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, the LED driver 198, and the SMC (serial control). The controller) 199 and the driver IC 132 are equipped. Of these, the VDP152, the audio IC134, and the SMC199 are integrated into the effect control CPU 126 and one chip. A PLL circuit (phase-locked loop) (not shown) is mounted on the chip 128 that integrates these circuits. The clock signal generated by the crystal oscillator 181 is multiplied / divided by the PLL circuit and then input to each circuit on the chip 128.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm (first storage means). .. The maximum capacity of the CGROM 190 is 64 Gbits, of which 60 Gbits are allocated for drawing material and 4 Gbits are allocated for audio material. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

By the way, in this embodiment, a NAND type SATA (Serial ATA) standard ROM is adopted as the CGROM 190. In the NAND ROM, data is read out in page units (for example, 1 page = 32 Kbytes), but when various drawing materials and audio materials stored in the CGROM 190 are used for production, a specific address is used. It is necessary to read only the necessary data from from by random access.

Therefore, with the adoption of the NAND type CGROM190, in the present embodiment, the DRAM 191 is further equipped and used as the loading destination (temporary storage destination) of the data read from the CGROM190 in page units (second storage). means). As a result, the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 can read out the necessary drawing material and audio material from the data loaded in the DRAM 191 by random access. In addition, DDR3 (Double-Data-Rate3) standard SDRAM is adopted as DRAM 191. The maximum capacity of the DRAM 191 is 8 Gbits, and 4 Gbits are allocated for drawing material and audio material. Further, the DRAM 191 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a bus (not shown).

The maximum capacities and allocation ratios of the CGROM 190 and the DRAM 191 described above are examples until they get tired of them, and can be appropriately changed depending on the situation. Further, the CGROM 190 may be provided separately for the drawing material and the audio material.

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 on the same chip 128. Further, the VDP 152 incorporates a preload circuit 154, a drawing circuit 155, a VRAM 156, a drawing material decoder 157, and a display circuit 153. When an instruction (command) from the display control unit 220 is input to the VDP 152, the drawing material required by the preload circuit 154 is transferred from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 in advance and saved (hereinafter referred to as "preload"). , The drawing circuit 155 draws the effect image on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) the preloaded drawing material using the decoder 157, and the effect image is stored in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). expand. Then, the display circuit 153 individually drives each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the frame buffer, so that the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

Each mode of data preloading from the NAND type CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 and data transfer in the DRAM 191 performed by the preload circuit 154 will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated into the same chip 128 together with the production control CPU 126 like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is also connected to an amplifier (not shown) or an external DRAM other than the DRAM 191. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. When an instruction from the audio control unit 222 is input to the audio IC 134, the audio IC 134 reads out the necessary audio material from the DRAM 191 according to the instruction, and decodes the read audio material on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. While generating sound, the generated sound is output to the speaker 54 on the glass frame, the speaker 55 in the glass frame, the inner frame speaker 56, and the outer frame speaker 58 via the amplifier, so that the sound of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch Achieve playback (the number of channels is not limited to this). Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated. In the present embodiment, the amplifier IC 193 is provided between the audio IC 134 and the amplifier, and the amplifier IC 193 sets and adjusts the amplifier.

By the way, the audio IC 134 reads out the necessary audio material from the DRAM 191 as described above, which is related to the fact that the audio IC 134 does not have a function corresponding to the preload circuit 154 of the VDP 152. If the audio IC 134 reads data from the CGROM 190 at the stage when the audio material is needed, it cannot read a specific audio material because it can only read in page units, and it is difficult to control the audio. It becomes. Therefore, with the adoption of the NAND type CGROM190, in the present embodiment, all the audio materials stored in the CGROM190 are transferred to the DRAM 191 when the power is turned on. As a result, the audio IC 134 can read the necessary audio material by random access from the data loaded in the DRAM 191 without reading the data from the CGROM 190.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with the execution of the effects of the various lamps 46 to 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of a motor (for example, the movable body motor 57) that is a drive source for various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and also controls a sensor for the movable body (for example, the movable body). The detection signal output by the sensor 59) is relayed and passed to the movable body control unit 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated into the same chip 128 together with the effect control CPU 126. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps 46 to 53 and the movable motor 57. By managing the operation, the effect reproduction using the lamp and the movable body is realized. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 of the above is included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Further, although an example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer illumination board is attached to the glass frame decoration lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the driver IC 132.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the handle lever 62 or the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between set value and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 606 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or conversely clears the backup information to restore the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

607 and 608 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control the interrupt request generated during the execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets the priority defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, multiple interrupt requests will be executed in order. The control of the interrupt process will be described in detail later.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the values of the input port into which the RAM clear signal is input are acquired twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes the standby process here. This process is for securing a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) after the power is turned on, and checking the power off warning signal (signal indicating that the power is being cut off) during that time. It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power cutoff warning signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power off warning signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been operated (switch ON). To do. If the RAM clear switch 304 is not operated (No), step S112 is then executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the time of the previous power cutoff and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A5H") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S114. The process executed when the power is cut off will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of a part of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a continuous work area within a predetermined range based on the address of the backup valid determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. The main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power is cut off by clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes) and keeping the saved valid backup information as it is. (Memory restoration means).

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 should transmit a power return designation effect command (command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124) and a payout command (transmit to the payout control device 92) indicating that the main control CPU 72 has returned from the power cutoff and started. Command) is set.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 304 is operated when the power is turned on (step S110: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S112: No), or the backup information is not normal. In the case (step S114: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S122: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets a RAM clear designated effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and a payout command (command for the payout control device 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been started.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear specification) set in step S124 to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU 72 further includes various other effect commands (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state specification command, special symbol destination determination effect command, effect command when the number of operation memories increases, and decrease in the number of operation memories) required for the effect control. Set the time effect command, the number of times cut counter remaining number command, special game state specification command, launch position specification command, etc.) and output these to the effect command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect command transmission process (step S142), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, internal) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emitting state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal indicating to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits the command transmission to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, the payout control device 92 receives the payout command permission signal to indicate to the main control device 70 that the payout command is permitted to be transmitted. It becomes.

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow of power restoration in the CPU initialization process, and the state of the main control device 70 when the power is cut off based on the backup information. (Step S116), but as part of that, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

The emission permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76. However, the address of the output port buffer targeted here is located in the address space of the RAM 76, which is outside the continuous area targeted for clearing in step S116. Therefore, if, as part of the process of step S116, an attempt is made to clear the value of the specific bit of the specific address in which the launch permission signal is set in addition to the area to be cleared, the specific address is specified and then the specific address is specified. , It is necessary to perform an exceptional process of clearing only the data of a specific bit out of the 8-bit data stored at that address and maintaining the data of the remaining 7 bits, which is a part of the RAM 76. The efficiency of the process of clearing the area becomes very poor. Under such circumstances, the main control CPU 72 handles the launch permission signal in the same manner as other backup target data without clearing the launch permission signal in the previous step S116, and temporarily returns to the state when the power is cut off.

However, at the stage where the backup information is returned in the main control device 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 has not yet been established, and is the payout control device 92 started normally (main control device 92)? It has not been confirmed whether or not the instruction by the command from 70 can be accepted. When the power is cut off while the launch permission signal is ON, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, and as a result, the game ball can be launched even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. A condition will occur. Here, tentatively, the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product (for example, one in which the number of prize balls is modified) that does not conform to the original inspection while the power is cut off, and the main control device 70 is changed by the subsequent power return. When activated, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, which makes it possible to launch the game ball. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch permission signal is explicitly cleared once before the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop, regardless of whether the activation is due to the power recovery or the RAM clear designation (the activation is performed). (Reset to OFF). After that, the main control CPU 72 confirms that the payout command permission signal has been input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then sends the payout command to the payout control device 92. The control that sets the launch permission signal to ON is adopted. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, the launch of the game ball is not permitted unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established. , It is possible to avoid the illegal launch of the game ball when the above-mentioned fraud is committed.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.
Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop, which will be described later, as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt process. By performing this process, it is possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop after the interrupt process is executed.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop from beginning to end.

Step S136, Step S138: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 611), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S138, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S138 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S136 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S210 in FIG. 611), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number. The timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU 72 executes the reception command management process. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process is performed according to the result. If the received command is a payout start specification command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation specification command to the payout command buffer. If not, is the received data within a predetermined range (receive command)? If it is out of the range, the payout error specification command is output to the production command buffer, and the payout radio error flag is set according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect command transmission process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124.

In the present embodiment, 9.0 seconds (2.5 seconds at the time of inspection) elapse from the power-on in consideration of the approximate time required for the processing executed when the power is turned on in the effect control device 124. We will wait and send the production command.

Step S144, Step S146: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during the execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes. The content of the interrupt process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Evacuation processing when power is turned off]
Next, a process to be executed when a power cutoff (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power cutoff") occurs will be described. FIG. 609 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the evacuation process when the power is turned off. In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power failure and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller (not shown)). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process, backup means) when the power is turned off, triggered by an input of a power cutoff warning signal (XINT interrupt) to the XINT terminal. Hereinafter, each procedure of the evacuation process when the power is turned off will be described later.

Steps S150 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power cutoff detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits interruption, ends the power off save process, and ends the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIGS. 607 to 608) (FIGS. 607 to 608). Returns to the program address indicated by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: In addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, the main control CPU 72 controls test signal terminals and commands. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the signal.

Step S156, Step S158: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S160: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area.
Step S164: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined value for counting the number of checks of the power failure warning signal in the loop counter.
Step S168: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power off warning signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter.
Step S172: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. If it cannot be confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU 72 shifts from the power outage save process to the CPU initialization process (FIG. 607). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before the transition to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started with other interrupts prohibited.

The processes of steps S166 to S172 described above are so-called standby processes (follow-up processes) executed in preparation for shutting off the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power off warning signal is continuously detected, step S166 to step S168 are repeatedly executed, so that the loop counter does not become "0". Therefore, the standby state will be continued as long as the power supply is sustained. On the other hand, if the detection of the power off warning signal is temporary (for example, detection due to a momentary power failure or the like), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is subtracted with the passage of time. Suddenly, when it becomes "0", the process shifts to the CPU initialization process. That is, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and performs other processing in the situation where the power supply is being cut off. While the standby state is maintained without execution and the upcoming power supply is cut off in a safe state, the CPU is initialized in a situation where the stable power supply is restored after a temporary power failure occurs. Move to processing and restart main processing. By executing such a standby process, it is possible to guarantee a stable gaming operation of the main control device 70 and thus the pachinko machine 1.

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (for example, a circuit including a capacitance element mounted on the main control device 70) after a power failure occurs, the stored contents of the RAM 76 are stored. It is retained without disappearing even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when a power failure occurs after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization process (FIG. 607).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a process to be executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 610 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the command reception interrupt process. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for specifying payout activation indicating that the payout of the game ball has started to the main control device 70, and various devices (for example, for example) related to payout of the prize ball as the game progresses. The command transmitted from the payout device board 100, the full tank switch 161 and the like) to the main control device 70 is relayed and transmitted. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes the command reception interrupt process (SCU interrupt process) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt process). Hereinafter, each procedure of the command reception interrupt processing will be described step by step.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the received data register (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that there is data in the received data register (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU 72 stores the contents of the data register in the receive command buffer.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, permits interrupts, and then ends the command reception interrupt process to perform the CPU initialization process. Return to the main loop (FIG. 608).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the timer interrupt process. The main control CPU 72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described later.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the values of the AF register (accumulator / flag register pair), BC, DE, and HL register (general purpose register pair) used during the execution of the main loop into the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits interruption. If the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step or later of the timer interrupt process is being executed. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted for the timer interrupt process. The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of the interrupt request signal, the priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. The interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 stores the contents output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 logically ANDs the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 with the inversion result values of the previous input values. Is stored in the input port-on detection flag. As a result, it is possible to grasp the accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag. Specific examples of the various switch signals include pass detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation region switch 95, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. 85, a winning detection signal from the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the like are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and updates counters such as various timers for external information and timers for security signals, in addition to the timer for managing the game time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described in the process of the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 608).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the hit symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 , The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, and another process is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). In this process, the process associated with changing or confirming the set value is executed. If the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed, that is, the game is possible, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process) and instead calculates the base. Then, the process of displaying on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

Further, when the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU 72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end specification command" is an effect command that notifies that the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting has been completed, and the setting-related end specification command includes information on the setting value in addition to this. Can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608) executed in the main loop.

Step S216, Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S216), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2. The variable display or stop display by the special symbol display device 35 is determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the main control CPU 72 determines the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the state management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is recovered to an abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entered into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and a base abnormality (to the back side of the game board unit 8). The degree of risk such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of prize balls in each of the winning openings 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, and 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check if a high condition has occurred. When an abnormal state is detected, the main control CPU 72 causes an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement park and by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124. Notify that.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, The prize ball control counters for each target are added by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. Although the detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is not empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and is not empty (the payout command is not empty). If it is set), various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the start mode when the power is turned on is set in the process of CPU initialization (step S118 and step S124 in FIG. 607) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 607). However, a payout command indicating this activation mode is sent here. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the process for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, the prize ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. To transmit the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFA) is a predetermined number. When less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFA in step S224 executed before the previous time has been transmitted, or when the transmission FIFA is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFA. ) Is executed only.

Further, particularly in step S224 at the time of turning on the power, when the payout command set in the process of CPU initialization processing is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch permission signal with this as an opportunity. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the emission permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the port output process (step S236) described later.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S226: The main control CPU 72 executes the firing position designation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the launch position designation flag to the previous launch position designation flag, and then clears the launch position designation flag. Then, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch position designation flag if the variable winning device is operating or the time reduction function is operating, and the launch position designation flag and the previous launch position designation flag match. If not, a launch position specification command is generated. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608) executed in the main loop.

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port outputs external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S230: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 represents various internal states (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). Generate test signals and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. Performs processing necessary for managing the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, in a mode corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol determined in the special symbol game processing (step S216) and the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the operation memory number display, the game state display, and the like. The drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

Here, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port one common at a time in the dynamic port output process (step S204) each time the timer interrupt process occurs. It is output. For example, in the timer interrupt process executed next time, the byte data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process executed one after another, the byte data stored for common 2 is output to the port. , And so on, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in a common unit, and lighting control is performed by a dynamic lighting method. Will be.

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 drives each drive signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region stored in the port output request buffer. , Test signals, etc. are also stored in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU 72 executes the port output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs the port. For example, the drive signals of the solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be made to operate according to the drive signal.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S216 to S236 are executed as a part of the timer interrupt process is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 returns the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt process, and enters the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 608). Return.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main control device 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 607), which is the main control program, the parallel that is the source of the XINT interrupt (power cut-off save process (FIG. 609)). I / O port 79 output interrupt request), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 610)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt) An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194, which is the source of the interrupt process (FIG. 611), may occur. These interrupt requests are managed / controlled by the interrupt controller 192 mounted on the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 permits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72, and prohibits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction), that is, so-called masqueradable interrupt. Is being controlled.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent factors that do not depend on each other, it is naturally possible that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority of the interrupt request in consideration of the importance of the interrupt process, the processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the priority of the XINT interrupt (evacuation processing when the power is turned off) is the lowest, and the SCU interrupt (command). The priority of reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 607), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. .. Actually, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 608), from the time when the interrupt is permitted (step S144 in FIG. 608) until the interrupt is prohibited (FIG. 608). When any interrupt request occurs during step S136) in 608, the interrupt controller 192 controls the received interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when XINT interrupt and PTC interrupt are received at the same time, the higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in the interrupt wait state, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the power outage save process is executed.

Further, when the procedure example of each interrupt process is reconfirmed, in the power failure save process (FIG. 609) and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 610), immediately before returning from each interrupt process (RETI instruction). The interrupt is permitted for the first time (immediately before executing) (step S152 in FIG. 609, step S188 in FIG. 610), whereas in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 611), the interrupt is interrupted at the beginning of the interrupt process. Interrupts are allowed (step S202 in FIG. 611), after which the main steps are performed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the power-off save process and the command reception interrupt process, while the interrupt controller 192 prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Allows execution of interrupts.

By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this way, the interrupt controller 192 enables execution of multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S214 in FIG. 611). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95 corresponding to the probability variation region provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region. As the process when passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). , Advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability change area passage command as a process when passing through the probability change area. The probabilistic region passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608) executed in the main loop. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probability variation region solenoid 99 is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 611).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 613 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 612). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 612). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 611).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When it is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 612).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 614 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 612). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 612). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 613), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 611) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 613) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 613) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 613) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (memory means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 613) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special symbol destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 612).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 613, step S46 in FIG. 614) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 613) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 614). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, as in the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 613) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 614). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this is "a symbol that can pass through the probability variation area (12 rounds, any probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol). ) ”, For example,“ A0H ”is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this random number corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the pre-determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot-determined random number acquired after the jackpot-determined random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 613) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 614). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, whether the jackpot type corresponds to "probability variation area passable symbol (12 round normal symbol)" or "probability variation region passable symbol". To determine. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variation region passable symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which is difficult to pass through the probabilistic region", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which can pass through the probabilistic region". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding earlier determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous judgment result is set. If is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high-probability schedule (). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 613) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 614).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 611) will be described. FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol fluctuation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 counts the number of balls entered for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit in this way is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 16 times in total, these are referred to as "16 rounds". May be generically referred to.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the first round to the fifth round, and the seventh to 16th rounds, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (probability fluctuation function activation flag, time reduction function activation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol is highly probable, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "6 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(2) "6 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(3) "12 rounds probability variation jackpot 1 (actually 4 rounds)"
(4) "12 rounds probability variation jackpot 2 (actually 9 rounds)"
(5) "12 rounds normal jackpot (actually 9 rounds)"
(6) "16 round probability change jackpot"
In this embodiment, big hits other than 6 rounds, 12 rounds, and 16 rounds may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "12 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", and "12 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "12 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, the "12-round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "12-round normal symbol", and the "16-round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "16-round probability variation symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 617 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[6 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[6 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "6th round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". The difference between the "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is the difference in the number of time reductions given (details will be described later).

[12 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the first round and the second round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial payout (prize ball). Further, in the third to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 12th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 7th to 12th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 4 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[12 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 9th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 10th to 12th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 10th to 12th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 2", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[12 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 10th and 11th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of falling under the "12th round normal symbol", the player is not given a substantial payout (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 rounds normal symbol", the player is substantially given 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round when the "12th round normal symbol" is applied, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region because the second big winning opening is short-opened. Therefore, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is not given the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

In addition, in the case of "12 round normal symbol", even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the "time reduction function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed. , The privilege to shift to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "16 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 16th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). For this reason, the jackpot game of the "16-round probability variation symbol" substantially gives the player 16 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, " The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of the "16 round probability variation symbol", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, after the jackpot game is completed. By activating the "time reduction function", the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) in one round, the longest opening time does not have to wait. It will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any probability variation symbol other than the 12-round normal symbol" and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "high probability" after the jackpot game ends. The player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "a probability variation symbol other than the 12-round normal symbol", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "low probability time" after the jackpot game ends. Move to "shortened state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common "1.5 seconds". The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When a small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the low probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning of the first large winning opening is hardly generated. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the end of the small hit game, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but it is also possible to use a game specification in which a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may simply read out random numbers in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 611), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high-probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low-probability state. To. Further, the range of the jackpot value differs depending on the current set value, and the range of the jackpot value is set wider in the case of the high setting than in the case of the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). ). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the disconnection pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is the "time reduction state". Check if it is not. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is supposed to be. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 619 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "3" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "6" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of order after the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "7" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of alignment after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after story reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation, the internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), and the winning symbol (hereinafter,). Similarly).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 618: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, six types of winning symbols are roughly divided as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the 6 types is "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 2", "12 round probability variation symbol 1", "12 round probability variation symbol 2", "12 round normal symbol", "16 round probability variation symbol". ". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 1a", "6 round probability variation symbol 1b", "6 round probability variation symbol 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 620 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "40", "10", "50" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. In the second column from the left, "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)", "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 9 rounds)", and "12 round normal symbol (substantially 9 rounds)" corresponding to each distribution value. (Actually 9 rounds) ”is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (= 40%), and "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 4 rounds)". The percentage of "9 rounds" selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the percentage of "12 rounds normal jackpot (substantially 9 rounds)" selected is 50/100 (= 50%). .. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of the "12 round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given. In addition, although it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.
On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times.
If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, although it corresponds to the "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or the "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 621 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "60", "20", "20" has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol" is 60/100 (= 60%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 1". Is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is 20/100 (= 20%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "16 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of probability variation is 170 times. Granted. In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation count is not given. ..

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number of times is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to the "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the time reduction number of times is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Granted.

[See Fig. 618: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 622 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "64" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the story reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "65" and "66" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the normal reach. It should be noted that, at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without executing the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 618: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "double open small hit symbol" or "three open small hit symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 616: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register into the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination, and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 608) executed in the main loop.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 618). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 618), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 is next. The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. .. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 618).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 624 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 616) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbol", the value corresponding to "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol", a value representing "12 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a value representing "6 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 618). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "16 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "12 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "6 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", respectively. In the present embodiment, since the so-called number-cut probability change function is adopted, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state", the number-cut counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times). The number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-times counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630 after generating the number-of-times counter value command.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number-of-times cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number-cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to "any one of the probability variation symbols other than the 6-round probability variation symbol 2", the number-cut counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is a predetermined numerical value. Since it is set to (for example, 170 times), it is the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset.

Further, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2, the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set. Is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Therefore, it is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset when the 100th variation ends, and the probability variation function activation flag that is reset when the 170th variation ends (advantageous gaming state transition means). , Special state transition means).

Furthermore, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function activation flag is reset. is there. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 611) executed in the timer interrupt process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag, respectively. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. If the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time saving status display lamp 38e. .. When the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "16 rounds (16R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "12 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b indicating "12 rounds (12R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a indicating "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 626 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the jackpot closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 627 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. The number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 617. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 618). Specifically, if "16 rounds probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16. If "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 12. Further, if "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation region timer (counting the probability variation region opening time) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the jackpot interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (temporarily changing the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for closing). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 626).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 628 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 617, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 627) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area opening process. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 617. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation region timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 627) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. To do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 627) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not still 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 626) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, "the number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 629 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 626). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. To do. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 630 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 626).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 612).

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 170 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-cutting counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the high probability state is provided with a substantial upper limit, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state and the game may return to the low probability state (so-called number-cut probability change). If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 618) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time reduction number is set depends on the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag. If is not set, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, even if the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 100 times as the number of time reductions when the winning symbol corresponds to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 (advantageous game). State transition means, special state transition means). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability is in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 616) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, the opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and in such an opening time, a prize is hardly generated in the large winning opening during one opening (difficult). It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launching device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 631). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is in the countdown (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 632) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 631). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of small hit at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 632).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 631). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 632). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 631) at the time of small hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 631). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set opening number (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 631) at the time of small hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 631).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 616) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 636 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "12 round normal symbols" or "12 round probabilistic symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game is started. It will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "12 round normal symbol", [F3] 12 round jackpot game (battle bonus) will be executed, and you will be defeated in the battle of [F4] big role production. , [F5] Shift to coastal mode.

[F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortened state. In the [F5] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F7] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", [F3] 12 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] in the battle of the big role production. win.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the [F9] 12-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [F10] V prize has occurred is executed, and the [F11] fireworks are displayed. Move to the rush.

[F11] The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability. In the [F11] fireworks rush, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

On the other hand, if [F13] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [F10] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 637 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "16 round probability variation symbols" or "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the fireworks rush or coastal mode.
If you win the jackpot of [G1] "16 round probability variation symbol" in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G2] 16 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the [G3] 16-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G4] V prize has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, although it corresponds to the [G5] 16-round probability variation symbol, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won), the [G6] V prize does not occur. The effect indicating that is executed is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

If the jackpot of [G10] "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is won in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the 6th round of the [G12] 6-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G13] V prize has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [G15] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and then the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode. Although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when it shifts to the fireworks rush and 100 fluctuations elapse, it shifts to the normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time shortened state. ing.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, an upper effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a lower effect symbol, and these are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower stages on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 600). .. The effect symbols include, for example, a number symbol with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9" and a blank symbol arranged one by one between each number symbol. Here, in the symbol sequence of the upper effect symbol, the number symbols are arranged in ascending order from right to left, whereas in each of the middle effect symbol and the lower effect symbol, the number symbols are arranged from the right. They are arranged in descending order to the left. These symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the horizontal direction from right to left in the upper, middle, and lower rows on the screen.

By the way, in the present embodiment, there are two modes: a vertical variation mode in which the effect progresses in a mode in which the rows of the effect symbols scroll in the vertical direction, and a horizontal variation mode in which the effect progresses in a mode in which the rows of the effect symbols scroll in the horizontal direction. There are different types of variable modes. The player can switch the variable mode by operating according to the instruction shown on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example, during the demonstration effect. The effect symbol illustrated in FIG. 600 is displayed when the lateral variation mode is selected. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the vertical variation mode is selected and an example of the effect when the horizontal variation mode is selected will be described step by step.

FIG. 638 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used). To do. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 638 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 round jackpot", "12 round jackpot", or "16 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color or red display color). Etc.), and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 638 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 by the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (memory image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Stop the left symbol]
FIG. 638 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 638 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed is increased accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 638 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 638 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
FIG. 638 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
Next, an example of production at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 639 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol. The super reach effect is a reach effect performed with a variation display in which a medium variation time (eg, 50-100 seconds) is selected.

Here, the flow of the super reach effect executed at the time of a big hit will be described, but the super reach effect is executed at a relatively low ratio not only at the time of a big hit but also at the time of a miss. Further, here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 639, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-variation display area X1 and the in-variation display area X2 are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 639 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling to the bottom).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 639 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 639 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 639 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the effect pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 639 (D): The variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped in the middle of the variable display effect. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 639 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the right side of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, "5") are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 639 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing "heart" figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. .. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 639 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "off". In the case of deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 639 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 639 (I): Then, the final middle effect symbol stops. In this example, by displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit.

In FIG. 639 (J): Then, for example, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined in the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible to keep the player from not disclosing to the player which winning symbol was won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the subject of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outlier reach effect".

[Example of production during a major role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" etc.]
640 to 643 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of a large-scale production when the "12-round normal symbol" or the "12-round probability variation symbol 2" is applicable.

In the present embodiment, when the "12 round normal symbol" is applicable, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the large role production, and when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is applicable. The effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

[1st round]
In FIG. 640 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect during the big role is started. In the illustrated example, the image of the ghost of the umbrella that is the enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, the image of the female character that is the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the image of the character "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect will be started from now on.

Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, the effect symbol of "5") is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 5 production symbols”.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 640 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and runs away, and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 640 (C): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from the fan (weapon).

[4th round]
In FIG. 640 (D): Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, a ghost of an umbrella performs a special move that causes a long tongue to pop out of the mouth, and a female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "12 round normal symbol", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "12 round probability variation symbol 2". ing.

[5th round (when the 12th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 641 (E): In the case of winning in the "12 round normal symbol", the defeat effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Defeat ...", the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (allied character defeat production).

[6th round (when the 12th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 641 (F): In the case of winning in the "12 round normal symbol", the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, a production is performed in which a female character utters a line such as "I will not lose next time!". As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for a big hit again. In the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game, the same re-challenge promotion effect as in the 6th round is executed.

In the sixth round when the player wins the "12th round normal symbol", the second variable winning device 31 opens, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball passes through the probability variation region. There is no.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 641 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the "12 round normal symbol" ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Fifth round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 642 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 642 (I): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. , The game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 642 (J): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game, the same blessing effect as in the 6th round is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 642 (K): At the timing when the jackpot game ends (during the termination process), the major winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

The above is an example of the effect when the game ball safely passes through the probability variation area corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 2", but the game ball corresponds to the probability variation area even if it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 2". If it does not pass through, the following production example will be obtained.

[Fifth round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 643 (L): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 643 (M): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the ball enters the second variable winning device 31. The game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the sixth round for some reason (not hitting right, jamming the ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 643 (N): In this case, a failure effect in which the panda character utters the line "sorry" is executed. In addition, the failure effect is continued in the 7th to 12th rounds of the big hit game.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 643 (O): At the timing when the big hit game in "12 round probability variation symbol 2" ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

Here, although the production example in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is not particularly shown, the battle production is executed and the victory production is executed in the same manner as in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2". Alternatively, an effect other than the battle effect may be executed. Even in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time in the 6th round, so when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, it rushes into the fireworks rush. In addition, in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", it is possible to obtain substantially 4 rounds of balls.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 644 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode in which the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol" and is transferred after the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game. Fireworks rush is in a state of high probability time reduction. Here, as an example, an example of production by the vertical fluctuation mode in the fireworks rush will be taken up. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 644 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 644 (B): Then, due to the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 644 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol Variable display is often performed. In addition, if the result of winning is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach production is executed and it becomes a big hit.

In the fireworks rush, the marker M1 and the marker M2 may be displayed by displaying the pre-variation display area X1 and the changing display area X2 as in the normal mode. This point is the same in the following coastal modes.

[Major role production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 645 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big winning combination effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2".

[1 round]
In FIG. 645 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 2 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 2 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 645 (B): In the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the 6th round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball launch is the same as in the previous rounds. Is obtained. Further, in the sixth round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the second variable winning device 31 When the game ball enters the ball, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 645 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 645 (D): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Major role production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 646 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to the “16 round probability variation symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 646 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 7 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 7 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "special bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character straddling a horse and performing a peace sign is displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 646 (B): In the case of winning in the "16 round probability variation symbol", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the sixth round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "16-round probability variation symbol", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the 16-round probability variation symbol is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is released. It passes through the probabilistic region by being guided by the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region.

In FIG. 646 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark appears next to the female character who jumps up. The displayed blessing effect is executed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 646 (D): After that, when the jackpot game progresses smoothly and the final 16 rounds are entered, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 16" is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed. In addition, an effect symbol (7 effect symbols) as a "remaining eye" is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 646 (E): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 647 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode. This coastal mode is a jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", or when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game which corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols. This is the mode that will be transitioned after the end of. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". Here, as an example, an example of production by the vertical fluctuation mode in the coastal mode will be taken up. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 647 (A): For example, after the jackpot game in the "12 round normal symbol" is completed, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. There is. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 647 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 647 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times without a winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Next, the control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126 of the effect control device 124 will be described.

[CPU initialization processing in the effect control device]
FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process in the effect control device 124.

The CPU initialization process in the effect control device 124 is a process for adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by clearing various information in the effect control device 124, and more specifically, when the effect control device 124 is started (more specifically). , When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the effect control device 124 is restarted for some reason), the effect control CPU 126 executes the operation. By executing the CPU initialization process, the realization of a stable effect in the pachinko machine 1 is guaranteed. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S300: The effect control CPU 126 releases the reset of the CPU. In order to guarantee the normal operation of the effect control device 124, the effect control CPU 126 resets the CPU after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124 until the output voltage rises normally to the operation guarantee level and the peripheral circuits are stabilized. During that time, the reset state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the program from operating in a state where the effect control device 124 is not stable. When the reset of the CPU is released, the execution of the control program in the effect control device 124 is started with this as an opportunity.

Step S310: The effect control CPU 126 executes the activation process. In the startup process, initial settings related to hardware, system operation settings, and the like are performed as initial settings required before various interrupt processes corresponding to the substance of the effect control are started. Specifically, for example, settings related to access to each register and I / O port of the effect control CPU 126 and each device connected to the effect control CPU 126 are made.

Step S320: The effect control CPU 126 executes the RAM initialization process. In the RAM initialization process, the RAM 130 (main memory) is initialized, various classes used in the execution process of the control program are initialized, the DRAM 191 is initialized, the command buffer is cleared, and the like.

Step S330: The effect control CPU 126 executes the task execution pre-processing. Here, the "task" refers to an individual process executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt. In the task execution pre-processing, preparations for executing the task are performed. For example, the effect control device 124 is provided with a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter, referred to as “status LEDs”) that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the effect control device 124 uses these LED lamps. The internal state is notified by a plurality of lighting patterns, and the initial state of the status LED is set in the task execution preprocessing. In addition, the frequency of the command input / output port required for receiving the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 is set, the RTC184 is set up, the interrupt is permitted, and the like. When the task execution pre-processing is completed, the status LED lights up in a manner indicating the completion of the initialization processing, various effect commands can be received, and various interruptions occur to perform tasks related to effect control (hereinafter, "" It shifts to the state where the effect control task ") can be woken up.

In the effect control device 124, there are various types such as timer interrupts that occur at preset time intervals and event interrupts that occur due to the occurrence of a predetermined event on the effect control device 124. Interruption can occur. In the following description, interrupts that occur periodically at regular intervals (for example, timer interrupts, event interrupts that occur at regular cycles, etc.) are referred to as "regular interrupts". A priority is set in advance for each interrupt, and when an interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 126 controls the interrupt according to the priority and executes the corresponding interrupt process.

Step S340: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, among the controls executed as the game progresses, other processes that are not executed in various tasks are performed. The contents of the effect control main process will be described later with reference to the following drawings.

As shown in FIG. 648, the effect control main process is incorporated in an infinite loop, and the effect control CPU 126 waits a predetermined execution interval after executing the effect control main process once, and then performs the next effect. The execution of the control main process is restarted. Therefore, unless the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is maintained and the effect control device 124 is restarted, the effect control CPU 126 continues to repeatedly execute the effect control main process. Further, in the above infinite loop, various interruptions are generated triggered by various factors, and the effect control CPU 126 executes processing according to each of the generated interruptions. In these processes, image display control on the liquid crystal display 42, audio output control on the speakers 54 to 58, drive control of the lamps 46 to 53 and the movable motor 57, etc. are performed and connected to the effect control device 124. By controlling each device, the content of the effect is constructed and the effect is embodied.

As described above, the infinite loop shown in FIG. 648 corresponds to the main loop in the effect control device 124, and the effect control main process is literally positioned as the main process executed in the effect control device 124. Therefore, in the following description, the infinite loop shown in FIG. 648 will be referred to as a "main loop for effect control".

By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, the NAND type SATA standard 64 Gbit ROM is adopted as the CGROM 190, but in the NAND type ROM, refreshing is executed with the start of power supply. The refresh is an operation for stably executing the reading of data from the NAND ROM, and is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM initialization process and independently of the effect control CPU 126. Become.

Therefore, the effect control CPU 126 manages the elapsed time from the start of the RAM initialization process by the elapsed time timer, and from the start of the RAM initialization process until the time expected to be required for refreshing the CGROM 190 elapses (elapsed time). Until the timer expires), various controls are performed so as not to generate access to the CGROM 190. The time required to refresh the CGROM 190 is assumed to be 2.8 seconds (in the case of 64 Gbits), but in this embodiment, 4.6 seconds with a margin in consideration of the possibility of specification changes and the like. Is secured.

[Production control main processing]
FIG. 649 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control main process.
The effect control main process is a process incorporated in the effect control main loop, and is called and executed at regular intervals by the effect control CPU 126. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S350: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the SATA preparing flag is “True”. Here, the "SATA preparing flag" means whether or not the refresh of the CGROM 190 and the transfer of all audio materials (sound data) from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 executed after the completion are completed, in other words, to the CGROM190. It is a flag indicating whether or not access is permitted, and is stored in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 130.

The SATA preparing flag "True" indicates that the refresh and transfer have been completed, that is, access to the CGROM 190 is permitted. When the power is turned on, the SATA preparing flag is set with a value "False" as an initial value indicating that refresh and transfer are not completed, that is, access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited.

As a result of the confirmation, if the SATA preparing flag is "False" (step S350: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S360. On the other hand, when the SATA preparing flag is "True" (step S350: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 proceeds to step S370 without executing step S360.

Step S360: The effect control CPU 126 executes sound-related processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 makes advance preparations necessary for outputting audio from various speakers. The specific contents of the sound-related processing will be described later using the following flowchart.

Step S370: The effect control CPU 126 executes the voltage control monitoring process. In the voltage control monitoring process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a monitoring process for canceling the interruption of the 5V signal supplied to the external driver in a fixed time. If a voltage is applied to the lamp or the movable body at the same time, the lamp or the movable body may generate excessive heat due to the inrush current, leading to malfunction or failure. Therefore, the timing of applying the voltage (timing of releasing the signal) is shifted to disperse the inrush current, and the lamp, the movable body, and the like are protected from heat generation.

Step S380: The effect control CPU 126 executes the watchdog clear process. In addition to being equipped with a watchdog timer IC188 connected to the effect control CPU 126 and a watchdog timer using the built-in function of the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a watchdog timer by a control program. There is. That is, in the effect control device 124, three types of watchdog timers are operating, and whether each watchdog timer normally generates a periodic interrupt due to a different monitoring time (executed when the periodic interrupt occurs). Whether or not the periodic interrupt processing to be performed is executed normally) is monitored. In the watchdog clear process, the effect control CPU 126 clears all watchdog timers and the like when the periodic interrupt process is normally executed.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 648) and executes the effect control main process again. The effect control main process is executed at substantially constant intervals when the effect control device 124 is in a normal state. For example, in the normal state, in the effect control main process, the frame interrupt that occurs every 33.3 ms (16.6 ms interval occurs twice) is triggered by the frame interrupt while returning from the interrupt process that is separately executed. It is called every), and the processing of each step goes through in the meantime. Therefore, when each step of the effect control main process completes without delay, the effect control CPU 126 performs the standby process in the remaining time until the next effect control main process is called, and waits for the start process (sleep) during that time. Transition to the state. With the exhaustion of the remaining time, the effect control CPU 126 ends the standby process, returns to the main loop, and calls the next effect control main process.

[Sound related processing]
FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of sound-related processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S362: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the refresh time of the CGROM 190 has elapsed. The effect control CPU 126 can determine that the refresh time has elapsed if the elapsed time timer has expired, and that the refresh time has not yet elapsed if the elapsed time timer has remaining time. As a result of the confirmation, when the refresh time of the CGROM 190 has elapsed (step S362: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S364. On the other hand, if the refresh time has not yet elapsed (step S362: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S364: The effect control CPU 126 executes the sound data transfer process and simultaneously executes the amplifier initialization process. In the sound data transfer process, the effect control CPU 126 transfers all the audio materials stored in the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 (transfer means). Further, in the amplifier initialization process, the effect control CPU 126 initializes the amplifier IC 193.

Step S366: The effect control CPU 126 updates the SATA preparing flag to “True”.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main process (FIG. 649) of the caller.

[Periodic interrupt processing in the production control device]
FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of various periodic interrupt processes (Vsync interrupt process, frame interrupt process, phase interrupt process) executed by the effect control device 124.

In the effect control device 124, periodic interrupt processing corresponding to various periodic interrupts generated in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 520 μs to 33.3 ms cycle) is executed at regular intervals in the main loop of the effect control. Will be done. Hereinafter, each periodic interrupt process will be described with reference to a procedure example.

FIG. 651 (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the Vsync interrupt process. The Vsync interrupt is an interrupt based on the input of an image signal (Vsync signal) periodically output from the VDP 152 at the timing of switching the effect image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It occurs 30 times per second (30 fps), that is, once at 33.3 ms intervals. The effect control CPU 126 executes the Vsync interrupt process when the Vsync interrupt occurs. By the Vsync interrupt processing, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is switched at regular intervals.

Step S1300: The effect control CPU 126 sets the Vsync interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The Vsync interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used for confirming whether or not Vsync interrupt is normally generated, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1302: The effect control CPU 126 executes the Vsync interrupt control process. In the Vsync interrupt control process, various processes required for drawing the effect image on the VDP 152 and displaying it on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 are executed. The specific contents of the Vsync interrupt control process will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 648).

FIG. 651 (B): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a frame interrupt process. The frame interrupt is an interrupt that occurs 60 times per second (60 fps), that is, once at 16.6 ms intervals. The effect control CPU 126 executes the frame interrupt process when the frame interrupt occurs.

Step S1310: The effect control CPU 126 sets the frame interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The frame interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not frame interrupt has occurred normally, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1312: The effect control CPU 126 executes the frame interrupt control process. In the frame interrupt control process, various tasks executed due to the frame interrupt process are controlled.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 648).

FIG. 651 (C): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a phase interrupt process. The phase interrupt is an interrupt for controlling the internal device of the effect control device 124, and occurs 1920 times per second (1920 fps), that is, once at intervals of 520 μs. The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interrupt process when the phase interrupt occurs.

Step S1320: The effect control CPU 126 sets the phase interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The phase interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not the phase interrupt has occurred normally, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1322: The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interrupt control process. In the phase interrupt control process, various tasks executed due to the phase interrupt are controlled.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 648).

In this way, in any timer interrupt process, first, a monitoring flag for each interrupt process is set, and then various tasks executed due to the interrupt are controlled.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the effect will be described.

[Production control processing]
As described with reference to FIG. 605, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). By coordinating, the operation of each device (display on the liquid crystal screen, sound output from the speaker, light emission by the lamp, operation of the movable body, etc.) is controlled, and the effect reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

The effect control CPU 126 as the effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and sets various messages and control tables instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents. Further, the effect control CPU 126 as the effect reproduction processor analyzes the message and the control table set by the effect control processor, and gives more specific instructions to each device based on the contents of the message and the operation of each device (the operation of each device ( The pachinko machine 1 controls screen display by the liquid crystal display 42, audio output by the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, etc., displacement of various movable bodies, etc.). Realize directing reproduction. The substance of these functions is an individual task that is woken up by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, a task that becomes an operation subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as an effect control processor is referred to as an "effect control unit 210", and the effect control CPU 126 serves as an effect reproduction processor. For tasks that are the main actors of operation when functioning, "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", or "movable body control unit 226", as appropriate, depending on the device to be controlled. It will be referred to as "input control unit 228". In addition, these tasks (control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228) that function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Further, the various lamps 46 to 52, the light sources built in each part of the board lamp 53 and the operation unit 60 are collectively referred to as "various lamps", and the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 are collectively referred to as "various speakers". May be called.

FIG. 652 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process.
The effect control process is called in the process of the frame interrupt control process (step S1312 in FIG. 651), and one of the frame interrupt control processes executed every 16.6 ms triggered by the occurrence of the frame interrupt. It is executed every other time, that is, every 33.3 ms (30 times per second). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S390: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the SATA preparing flag is “True”. As a result of the confirmation, when the SATA preparing flag is "True", that is, when the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 are completed (step S390: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S392. On the other hand, when the SATA preparing flag is "False", that is, when the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 has not been completed yet (step S390: No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S394.

Step S392: The effect control unit 210 executes the normal effect control process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the effect based on the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70. The specific contents of the normal effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S394: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect control process when the power is turned on. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the operation of each effect device in the section (access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited) until the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 are completed. The specific contents of the power-on effect control process will be described later with reference to the following flowchart.

[Production control process when the power is turned on]
FIG. 653 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process at power-on. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S395: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the execution of the effect control process at power-on this time is the first execution after the power is turned on. As a result of the confirmation, if it is the first execution (step S395: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S396. On the other hand, if it is not the first execution (step S395: No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S397.

Step S396: The effect control unit 210 executes the SATA preparing device control process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 sends an e-mail instructing the effect operation in the section until the SATA preparation flag becomes "True", that is, until the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 is completed (the section during SATA preparation). Send to the individual control unit. In response to this, each individual control unit controls the operation of each effect device based on the content of the received mail.

For example, the display control unit 220 instructs the VDP 152 to display an image corresponding to the section in which SATA is being prepared. Further, the lamp control unit 224 starts reproducing the data for alternating blinking of the frame lamps. As a result, an image showing the characters "Screen display is being restored" is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and all the frame lamps (glass frame top lamp 46, glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52) are displayed. It will blink alternately every second. However, since the audio material cannot be used during the SATA preparation, the audio control unit 222 does not control the speaker. Therefore, no sound is output from the various speakers, and the sound remains silent.

Step S397: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the production inspection start command has been received. Here, the "production inspection start command" is an effect command that can be transmitted only at the time of inspection, and is transmitted from the main control device 70 at the timing when the inspection is started in the pachinko machine 1. If the production inspection start command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the production inspection start command has been received.

As a result of the confirmation, when the production inspection start command is received (step S397: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S398. On the other hand, if the production inspection start command has not been received (step S397: No), the effect control unit 210 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S398: The effect control unit 210 executes the inspection lamp control process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 instructs the lamp control unit 224 to stop the effect operation during SATA preparation, and in response to this, the lamp control unit 224 reproduces the data for alternating blinking of the frame lamps. To finish. As a result, all the frame lamps are turned off. By turning off various lamps during SATA preparation, it is possible to quickly shift to a state where inspection of other lamp data can be performed without waiting for SATA preparation to be completed, and it is possible to improve inspection efficiency. Become.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 652) of the caller.

[Processes and state changes executed when the power is turned on]
FIG. 654 is a timing chart showing a process executed by the effect control device 124 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and a change in the state caused by the effect control device 124 and the main control device 70. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 654 (A): When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124), the CPU initialization process (FIG. 648) is started, and the start-up process is first executed. It takes about 1.0 second from turning on the power to completing the startup process.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 654 (A): When the startup process is completed, the RAM initialization process is subsequently executed. It takes approximately 1.4 seconds from the start of the RAM initialization process to the transition to a state in which the effect control task can be woken up, that is, to the completion of the CPU initialization process.
In FIG. 654 (B): The CGROM 190 is refreshed in parallel with the RAM initialization process. The time required for refreshing is 4.6 seconds with a margin.

In FIG. 654 (D): At this point, the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 cannot be received.
In FIG. 654 (E): Further, the effect control task is in a state of being prepared without being awakened yet.
(F), (G) in FIG. 654: Then, "False" as an initial value is set in the SATA preparing flag, and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is prohibited.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 654 (A): All CPU initialization processing is completed.
In FIG. 654 (B): At this time, the refresh of the CGROM 190 is still being executed (not yet completed).
In FIG. 654 (D): With the completion of the CPU initialization process, it becomes possible to receive the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70.
In FIG. 654 (E): Further, the effect control task is woken up and is in the running state.
(F), (G) in FIG. 654: "False" as an initial value is still set in the SATA preparing flag, and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is prohibited.

Since the effect control is started after the effect control task wakes up (after time t2), in the following description, the state indicated by the SATA preparing flag value "False" will be described in the effect control task. Before waking up is treated as "initial state", and after waking up is treated as "preparing".

[Time t4]
In FIG. 654 (B): The time required for refreshing the CGROM 190 has elapsed. With this, it is considered that the refresh of the CGROM 190 is completed.
In FIG. 654 (C): With the completion of the refresh of the CGROM 190, the sound-related processing (FIG. 650) is started, and the transfer of the sound data from the CGROM 190 and the initialization of the amplifier are executed in parallel. It takes approximately 3.2 seconds to complete the transfer of sound data. In addition, it takes about 1.2 seconds to complete the initialization of the amplifier.

[Time t5]
In FIG. 654 (C): The initialization of the amplifier is completed, but the sound data transfer is still executed (not yet completed).
(F), (G) in FIG. 654: Therefore, the SATA preparing flag is maintained as "False", and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is still prohibited.

It is technically possible to read the drawing material from the CGROM 190 and perform drawing during the transfer of sound data. However, if the transfer process and the drawing process are executed in parallel, each process may be delayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited during the transfer of sound data.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 654 (C): All sound-related processing is completed.
(F), (G) in FIG. 654: With the completion of the sound-related processing, the SATA preparing flag is updated to "True", and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is permitted.

As described above, the effect control device 124 can receive the effect command at time t2 (2.4 seconds after the power is turned on) with the completion of the CPU initialization process. Further, with the completion of the sound-related processing, access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is permitted at time t6 (8.8 seconds after the power is turned on).

By the way, also in the main control device 70, the CPU initialization process and the like are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (main control device 70), but the required time is shorter than that in the case of the effect control device 124. The effect command can be transmitted to the effect control device 124 at an early stage. However, as described above, in the effect control device 124, access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is prohibited until time t6 (8.8 seconds after the power is turned on), so that the effect control device 70 is prohibited from accessing the CGROM 190. The effect cannot be executed based on the effect command. Further, since communication from the effect control device 124 to the main control device 70 is not permitted, the main control device 70 cannot know the progress of the process in the effect control device 124.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transmission of the effect command from the main control device 70 is started after waiting for a predetermined time to elapse. Specifically, at the time of mass production, as shown in FIG. 654 (I), the transmission of the effect command is started after 9.0 seconds have elapsed from the power-on. Further, at the time of inspection, in order to enable the inspection of various lamps to be started at an early stage without considering the display on the liquid crystal display 42 (access to CGROM 190), as shown in FIG. 654 (H). In addition, the transmission of the effect command is started 2.5 seconds after the power is turned on.

Note that FIG. 654 shows the processing executed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the change in the state together with the time correspondence between the effect control device 124 and the main control device 70. When only the control device 124 is restarted, the process at the time of turning on the power is executed only in the effect control device 124, and the above-mentioned sequence occurs. At this time, since the main control device 70 is operating normally and there is no way to know that the effect control device 124 has been restarted, the effect command continues to be transmitted as a normal operation. However, in the effect control device, unless the SATA preparing flag is updated to the value "True" indicating "completion", even if the effect command from the main control device 70 is received, these are ignored and the power is turned on. The process will be executed. The change in the process executed by the effect control device 124 when the power is turned on will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

[Processes and state changes executed when the power is turned on in the comparative example]
FIG. 655 is a timing chart showing a process executed by the effect control device 124 ′ when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 ′ and a change in the state caused by the effect control device 124 ′ and the main control device 70 ′ in the comparative example. Is. In the comparative example, it is assumed that the NOR type ROM is adopted in the CGROM190'and the amplifier IC193 is not equipped.

Comparing FIG. 655 (Comparative Example) with FIG. 654 (Embodiment), in the Comparative Example, since the CGROM 190'is a NOR type ROM, refreshing is not executed and the sound data is transferred to the DRAM 191'in advance. Since it is not necessary to keep it, it is not necessary to manage the SATA preparing flag. Further, since the amplifier IC 193 is not provided, it is not necessary to initialize the amplifier separately from the CPU initialization process.

Therefore, in the effect control device 124', as shown in FIG. 655 (G'), access to the CGROM 190' by the effect control task is permitted as the CPU initialization process is completed. In response to this, in the main control device 70', 2.5 seconds have passed since the power was turned on, both during inspection and during mass production, as shown in FIGS. 655 (H') and (I'). Later, the transmission of the production command is started.

[Production control process executed when the power is turned on]
FIG. 656 is a timing chart showing details of changes in processing executed by the effect control device 124 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It should be noted that each time shown in FIG. 656 is not related to each time shown in FIGS. 654 and 655. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 656 (A): Immediately after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124, the SATA preparing flag is set to "False" as an initial value, and the state indicated by the flag is the "initial state". In this state, the production control task has not yet been woken up.
In FIG. 656 (B): Further, in this state, the effect command from the main control device 70 cannot be received.

In FIG. 656 (C): Since the task has not been woken up, the mail related to the display control cannot be received. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 42 is not controlled, and the liquid crystal screen is in a darkened state.
In FIG. 656 (D): Since the task has not been woken up, the mail related to voice control cannot be received. Therefore, various speakers are not controlled, and no sound is output from the various speakers, resulting in a silent state.
In FIG. 656 (E): Since the task has not been woken up, the mail related to the lamp control cannot be received. Therefore, the various lamps are not controlled, and all the various lamps are turned off.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 656 (A): The effect control task is woken up, and the state indicated by the SATA preparing flag shifts to “preparing”. In the following description, the section in which the SATA preparing flag indicates "preparing" will be referred to as "SATA preparing (section)".

In FIG. 656 (B): At this time, the effect command can be received from the main control device 70, but during the SATA preparation, only the production inspection start command is received and processed, and the other effect commands are received. But everything is destroyed.

In FIG. 656 (C): By waking up the task, it is possible to receive an e-mail related to display control, but all e-mails are discarded except for the first e-mail instructing the operation during SATA preparation. As a result, an image in which the characters "screen display is being restored" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen is displayed in the section where SATA is being prepared.

In FIG. 656 (D): By waking up the task, it is possible to receive an e-mail related to voice control, but since the voice material cannot be read and the voice cannot be output from the speaker during SATA preparation, all of them. The email is discarded. As a result, in the section during SATA preparation, a silent state in which no sound is output from various speakers is maintained.

In FIG. 656 (E): By waking up the task, it is possible to receive an e-mail related to lamp control, but except for the first e-mail instructing the operation during SATA preparation, only the e-mail based on the production inspection start command is executed. , Other emails will be discarded. As a result, all the frame lamps (glass frame top lamp 46, glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52) blink alternately in the section where SATA is being prepared.

When the production inspection start command is received, the mail sent based on this command is executed, and all the frame lamps are turned off. After that, when an e-mail is received from the inspection PC connected to the pachinko machine 1, the debugging environment, or the like, the e-mail is executed and the corresponding lamp data is reproduced. In this way, it is possible to quickly execute the inspection of other lamp data without waiting until the SATA preparation is completed.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 656 (A): The SATA preparing flag is updated to "True", and the state indicated by the flag shifts to "Complete".

In FIG. 656 (B): With this as an opportunity, all the effect commands from the main control device 70 are received and processed.

In FIG. 656 (C): In addition, an email related to display control is executed. As a result, immediately after the SATA preparation is completed, an image showing the characters "Returning to screen display / Please continue the game" is displayed on the LCD screen.

In FIG. 656 (D): In addition, a mail related to voice control is executed. As a result, after the SATA preparation is completed, voices corresponding to the contents of the received mail are output from the various speakers.

In FIG. 656 (E): In addition, all mails related to lamp control will be executed. As a result, immediately after the SATA preparation is completed, all the various lamps are turned off according to the contents of the received mail.

As described above, in the section during SATA preparation, the operation peculiar to the section during SATA preparation is executed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify that the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is in the stage of preparation for activation, and to make the staff and players of the game hall recognize this.

[Data flow in drawing process]
FIG. 657 is a diagram conceptually showing the flow of data in the drawing process while comparing the data flow during SATA preparation and the normal time.

FIG. 657 (A): Shows the flow of data in the drawing process during SATA preparation. Specifically, the drawing process during SATA preparation is performed from the main control device 70 after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124 and the SATA preparation flag is updated to "True" indicating "completion". It is a drawing process that can be performed until the production command is received.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited during the SATA preparation, the drawing material (specifically, the drawing material to be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 during the SATA preparation section). , A drawing material composed of the characters "returning to screen display") is stored in advance in the control ROM 180. Then, in the drawing process during SATA preparation, as shown in FIG. 657 (A), the drawing material is first transferred from the control ROM 180 to the DRAM 191 and the image is drawn on the VRAM 156 using the drawing material transferred to the DRAM 191. Then, the image drawn on the VRAM 156 is finally displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

FIG. 657 (B): Shows the flow of data in the normal drawing process. The normal drawing process is a drawing process that is executed except during SATA preparation. In the normal drawing process, the drawing material is first transferred from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 and an image is drawn on the VRAM 156 using the drawing material transferred to the DRAM 191. The image drawn on the VRAM 156 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Is displayed in.

The specific mode of data transfer in the normal drawing process will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing. Further, the drawing process can be executed by the common process shown in FIGS. 665 to 667, which will be described later, regardless of whether SATA is being prepared or during normal operation.

[Operation of production device when power is turned on]
FIG. 658 is a continuous diagram showing an operation example of the effect device with the passage of time after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 658 (A): In the initial state, the effect control task has not yet been woken up, so that the effect device cannot be controlled. Therefore, the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is dimmed, all the lamps are turned off, and no sound is output from the various speakers.

In FIG. 658 (B): In the section during SATA preparation, an operation for notifying that the effect control device 124 (pachinko machine 1) is in the stage of preparation for activation is instructed. In response to this instruction, an image showing the characters "Screen display is being restored" is displayed on the LCD screen, and all frame lamps (glass frame top lamp 46, glass frame decorative lamp 48, 50, 52) are displayed. ) Blinks alternately every second. At this time, no sound is output from the various speakers. The image displayed on the liquid crystal screen during the SATA preparation is drawn using the drawing material transferred from the control ROM 180.

In FIG. 658 (C): Immediately after the completion of SATA preparation, an operation for notifying that the effect control device 124 (pachinko machine 1) is returning to the normal state is instructed. In response to this instruction, an image with the characters "Returning to screen display / Please continue playing" is displayed on the LCD screen, and various speakers output audio for when SATA is ready. .. In addition, all the frame lamps that were blinking alternately until just before are turned off. The image displayed on the liquid crystal screen after the completion of SATA preparation is drawn using the drawing material transferred from the CGROM 190.

After that, when an effect command (for example, a RAM clear specification command or a power return specification command) is received, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect device according to the normal flow, and the main control device 70 takes this as an opportunity. The production based on the production command from is executed.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing a normal effect will be described. The variable display effect, reach effect, advance notice effect, memory display effect, major role effect, etc. described in accordance with the above-mentioned production example are all controlled through the normal effect control process.

[Normal production control processing]
FIG. 659 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the normal effect control process.

The normal effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display control process (step S404), input control process (step S405), and so on. The configuration includes subroutines for lamp control processing (step S406), voice control processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the normal effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The effect commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start opening winning sound. Control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, confirmation command, status specification command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end production command, count cut counter value command, There are fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, probability change area passage command, prize ball content command, RAM clear specification command, power return specification command, setting-related end specification command, production inspection start command, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the memory display effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and during the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the content of the production. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display control process, the effect control unit 210 tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice effect). Send an e-mail instructing the pattern number, the variation effect pattern number, the change notice effect number, the background pattern number, the pending deletion, etc. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific instruction regarding drawing to the VDP 152 based on the content of the received mail, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

The above-mentioned drawing-related processing by the display control unit 220 is separately called in the process of Vsync interrupt processing (step S1302 in FIG. 651) and executed every 33.3 ms (30 times per second). The content of the specific processing (Vsync interrupt control processing) related to drawing will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes the operation requesting the player with the progress of the effect, and the player sends the operation member such as the operation unit 60 to the input control unit 228. Instructs detection of whether or not the operation is performed in the specified mode. More specifically, the effect control unit 210 sets any of the input control tables defined in advance in the control ROM 180. In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the set input control table, and based on this, sets a period during which operations can be accepted for any of the operating members. In addition, the effect control unit 210 detects whether or not an operation (operation requested from the player) that matches the designated mode is performed, outputs the detection result, and returns it to the effect control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp control process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends an e-mail instructing the effect content to the lamp control unit 224. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the received mail, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and outputs various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the operation unit. A light source or the like built in each part of 60 is driven (turning on or off, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the voice control process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends an e-mail instructing the effect content to the voice control unit 222. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the received mail, and sounds (sound effects) according to the effect contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. , BGM, etc.) are output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In another process, for example, the effect control unit 210 first sends an e-mail instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the content of the effect. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 gives an instruction of specific control contents to the SMC 199 based on the contents of the received mail. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of various movable bodies based on an instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the various movable bodies. As a result, for example, the movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

In the above example, the effect control unit 210 outputs a message instructing the effect content to each individual control unit, but the content of the message is output together with the output of the message or instead of the output of the message. In some cases, a control table in which the details of the effect operation associated with is defined is started. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

Through the above-mentioned normal time effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content and the operation of each device that reproduces the effect in the pachinko machine 1. Then, while the effect playback instruction (mail transmission and control table setting) by the effect control unit 210 is executed in the process of the effect control process, the process related to drawing performed by the display control unit 220 in response to the instruction (the effect). The control of the liquid crystal display 42) is separately executed with the Vsync interrupt as an opportunity. Further, the control of each effect device by the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, and the movable body control unit 226 is performed in synchronization with the drawing-related processing by the display control unit 220. With such control, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the effect reproduction by each device.

[Functional configuration related to display control processing]
FIG. 660 is a block diagram showing a main functional configuration related to the display control process (step S404 in FIG. 659).

FIG. 660 (A): Shows the main functional configurations related to the display control process in the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the NAND type CGROM 190 is adopted, and the DDR3 standard DRAM 191 is mounted. The reason for adopting NAND ROM is that it is relatively inexpensive, has a high degree of integration (small circuit scale), and other market trends.

In the present embodiment, when the effect command from the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is received, the effect control unit 210 displays a message instructing the execution of the effect according to the content of the received effect command. Set for. In response to this, (1) the display control unit 220 analyzes the message and constructs a drawing command that gives a specific instruction regarding drawing to the VDP 152 (command construction process). When the constructed drawing command is transferred to the VDP 152, first, (2) the preload circuit 154 transfers the page containing the necessary drawing material from the NAND CGROM 190 to a predetermined area of the DRAM 191 and temporarily saves (preloads) it. (Preload processing, drawing means). Next, (3) the drawing circuit 155 acquires the drawing material from the predetermined area of the DRAM 191 and draws it on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) it using the decoder 157, and expands the effect image into the frame buffer in frame units. (Transfer / drawing process, drawing means). Then, (4) the display circuit 153 drives each pixel of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the display frame buffer (display processing). As a result, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the display control is executed in the four steps (1) to (4) in the figure.

In FIG. 660 (B): A main functional configuration related to display control processing is shown in a comparative example. In the comparative example, the CGROM 190'is composed of a NOR type ROM. Since the drawing material can be directly randomly read in the NOR type ROM, unlike the case of the embodiment, the DRAM 191 for preloading the page read data is not mounted.

In the comparative example, when the effect command from the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is received, the effect control unit 210 sends a message to the display control unit 220 instructing the execution of the effect according to the content of the received effect command. Set against. In response to this, (1) the display control unit 220 analyzes the message and constructs a drawing command that gives a specific instruction regarding drawing to the VDP 152 (command construction process). When the constructed drawing command is transferred to the VDP 152, (2) the drawing circuit 155 directly acquires the drawing material from the NOR type CGROM 190'and draws it on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) it using the decoder 157. Then, the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer on a frame-by-frame basis (transfer / drawing process). Then, (3) the display circuit 153 drives each pixel of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the display frame buffer (display processing). As a result, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

As described above, in the comparative example, since the preload processing is not required, the processing related to the display control is largely executed in the three steps (1) to (3) in the figure. Therefore, in terms of the number of steps, there are fewer comparative examples than in the embodiments. However, the read speed from the NAND ROM is very high, and if the speed of reading one page of data from the NAND ROM and the speed of reading data of the same size as one page from the NOR type ROM are simply compared, NAND ROM is faster (for example, 3 to 6 times faster in bit rate). Further, in the present embodiment, since the data preloaded in the DRAM 191 is reused (used a plurality of times) as much as possible, the number of times of reading from the CGROM 190 is reduced to reduce the processing time required for the entire reading of the data. It can be further shortened. Therefore, although the number of steps is increased by one as compared with the comparative example, the present embodiment is superior in that the processing efficiency is improved and the cost required for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. It can be said that there is sex.

Therefore, in the following, how to improve the efficiency of the process related to data reading in this embodiment will be described.

[Aspect of preload processing]
661 to 663 are schematic views showing a mode of preload processing according to a specific example.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the drawing material stored in the NAND type CGROM 190 (first storage means) is preloaded into the DRAM 191 (second storage means) by the preload circuit 154, but the area to be preloaded. Two types of regions (first preload region and second preload region) are provided.

Of these, the first preload area is an area managed in page units, and the data read in page units from the CGROM 190 is loaded as it is (a predetermined area of the second storage means). On the other hand, the second preload area is an area managed in frame units, and data is partially transferred from the data already loaded in the first or second preload area, and under a predetermined situation. , The data read from the CGROM 190 in page units is loaded (an area different from the predetermined area of the second storage means). By properly using these areas, it is possible to reuse the data already preloaded in the DRAM 191 as much as possible while minimizing the number of times of reading from the CGROM 190.

In FIG. 661 (A): An example of preloading performed to draw the first frame is shown. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the effect image is drawn using the image A and the image C in the first frame.

In the CGROM 190, the image A exists on the page 1 and the image C exists on the page 3, but can only be read from the CGROM 190 on a page-by-page basis. Therefore, the preload circuit 154 first preloads pages 1 and 3 from the CGROM 190 to the first preload area of the DRAM 191. As a result, the start ends of images A and B constituting page 1, the rear ends of image B constituting page 3, and the start ends of images C and D are loaded into the first preload area. There is. Then, the preload circuit 154 transfers data of the images A and C necessary for drawing the first frame from the first preload area to the second preload area of the DRAM 191.

In FIG. 662 (B): An example of preloading performed to draw the second frame is shown. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the effect image is drawn using the image B and the image C in the second frame.

In the CGROM 190, the image B exists over pages 1 to 3, but the page 1 including the start end of the image B and the page 3 including the end of the image B are already loaded in the first preload area. Therefore, only the page 2 forming the intermediate portion of the image B needs to be read from the CGROM 190. Therefore, the preload circuit 154 transfers data from the first preload area to the second preload area for the start and end portions of the image B, and the second preload area of the DRAM 191 from the CGROM 190 for the intermediate portion of the image B. Page 2 is preloaded to. As described above, a page in which the entire page is composed of a part or all of one image is loaded in the second preload area instead of the first preload area. Further, since the data of the image C has already been transferred to the second preload area when the first frame is drawn, here, the area for the first frame of the second preload area is changed to the area for the second frame. Data transfer is done.

In FIG. 663 (C): An example of preloading performed to draw the third frame is shown. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the effect image is drawn using the image C, the image D, and the image E at the third frame.

In the CGROM 190, the image D exists over the pages 3 to 4, but the page 3 including the start end portion of the image D is already loaded in the first preload area. Further, the image E exists on the page 4 including the end portion of the image D. Therefore, only page 4 needs to be read from the CGROM 190. Therefore, the preload circuit 154 first preloads page 4 from the CGROM 190 to the first preload area of the DRAM 191. Then, the preload circuit 154 transfers data for the image C from the area for the second frame of the second preload area to the area for the third frame, and the image D (start and end) and the image. For E, data is transferred from the first preload area to the second preload area.

In this way, in the preload process, for an image (for example, image A) that fits in a size of less than one page, first, the entire page including the image is read from the CGROM 190 and preloaded into the first preload area. Then, only the data area of the image A is transferred from the first preload area to the second preload area. Further, for an image in which a part or all of the image forms the entire page (for example, image B), the page in which the entire page is composed of one image is preloaded from the CGROM 190 into the second preload area, while the image of the image is preloaded. Pages containing other parts (start or end) are preloaded into the first preload area. Then, when the image used in the previous frame is also used in the next frame, data transfer is performed in the second preload area.

[Update mode of preload area]
FIG. 664 is a schematic diagram showing an update mode of the preload region.

FIG. 664 (A): is a schematic view showing an update mode of the first preload region. As described above, the first preload area is managed on a page-by-page basis. Further, about 10% of the area allocated for the drawing material of the DRAM 191 is allocated to the first preload area, and M pages (for example, 1600 pages) can be stored.

In the first preload area, the data read from the CGROM 190 is saved one after another in page units, and when the number of saved pages reaches M, the oldest data is overwritten in order. From a different point of view, if the required image is included in the past M preloads from the CGROM190 to the first preload area, it is saved in the first preload area without being read from the CGROM190. Data can be reused.

FIG. 664 (B): is a schematic view showing an update mode of the second preload region. As described above, the second preload area is managed on a frame-by-frame basis. Further, about 90% of the area allocated for the drawing material of the DRAM 191 is allocated to the second preload area, and data necessary for drawing N frames can be stored. For example, if the maximum capacity of the DRAM 191 is 8 Gbits, 4 Gbits of which are allocated for drawing materials, and data necessary for drawing 16 frames can be stored, the maximum capacity per frame is about. It will be 28 Mbytes.

In the second preload area, all the data necessary for drawing the frames are saved one after another, and when the number of saved frames reaches N, the oldest data is overwritten in order. From a different point of view, if the image required for drawing this frame is included within the latest N-1 frame, it is saved in the second preload area without being read from the CGROM190. Data can be reused. At this time, the data stored in the first preload area may also be reused.

[Vsync interrupt control processing]
FIG. 665 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the Vsync interrupt control process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1400: The display control unit 220 resets the delay flag. Here, the "delay flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a process related to drawing on the liquid crystal screen has a delay, and is stored in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 130. In this process, the display control unit 220 resets the delay flag to a value (“0”) indicating that no process delay has occurred.

Step S1402: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the command construction state is "finished". Here, the "command construction state" is the current state related to the command construction process, and a value indicating the current state is stored as a command construction state flag, for example, in the flag area of the RAM 130. The command construction state cyclically transitions between the "idle", "start", and "end" states. That is, the command construction status flag is set to a value indicating any of "idle", "start", and "end".

As a result of the confirmation, if the command construction state is "finished" (step S1402: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1406. On the other hand, if the command construction state is not "finished" (step S1402: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1404.

Step S1404: The display control unit 220 sets the delay flag. Specifically, the display control unit 220 sets a value (“1”) indicating that a processing delay has occurred in the delay flag (hereinafter, the same applies).

Step S1406: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the preload state is “finished”. Here, the "preload state" is a current state related to the preload process, and a value indicating the current state is stored as a preload state flag in, for example, a flag area of the RAM 130. The preload state cyclically transitions between the "idle", "start", and "end" states. That is, the preload state flag is set to a value indicating any of "idle", "start", and "end".

As a result of the confirmation, if the preload state is "finished" (step S1406: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1410. On the other hand, if the preload state is not "finished" (step S1406: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1408.

Step S1408: The display control unit 220 sets the delay flag.

Step S1410: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the transfer / drawing state is “finished”. Here, the "transfer / drawing state" is the current state related to the transfer / drawing process, and the value indicating the current state is stored as a transfer / drawing state flag in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 130. .. The transfer / drawing state cyclically transitions between the "idle", "start", and "end" states. That is, the transfer / drawing state flag is set to a value indicating any of "idle", "start", and "end".

As a result of the confirmation, if the transfer / drawing state is "finished" (step S1410: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1414. On the other hand, if the transfer / drawing state is not "finished" (step S1410: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1412.

Step S1412: The display control unit 220 sets the delay flag.

Step S1414: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the delay flag is set. If the delay flag is not set (step S1414: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1420. On the other hand, when the delay flag is set (step S1414: No), the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.

Step S1420: The display control unit 220 switches the display frame buffer. The contents of the display frame buffer switched by this process are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 by the display circuit 153.

Step S1430: The display control unit 220 updates the transfer / drawing state to “idle”.

Step S1432: The display control unit 220 starts the transfer / drawing process. Specifically, the display control unit 220 instructs the drawing circuit 155 of the VDP 152 to start processing. At this time, the drawing circuit 155 that received the instruction confirms whether or not the transfer / drawing process of the previous frame has been completed, and if the transfer / drawing process of the previous frame has already been completed, the current frame is used. Transfer / draw processing is executed. On the other hand, if the transfer / drawing process of the previous frame has not been completed yet, the drawing circuit 155 ignores the instruction to start the process and continues the process being executed. That is, the drawing circuit 155 skips the transfer / drawing process in the current frame and carries it over to the next frame.

Step S1434: The display control unit 220 refers to the state of the drawing circuit 155 and confirms whether or not the transfer / drawing process has been successfully started (the transfer / drawing process has been started normally). For example, the display control unit 220 determines that the start is successful if the transfer / drawing process in the current frame is executed in the drawing circuit 155, while the transfer / drawing process in the current frame is performed in the drawing circuit 155. If it is skipped, it can be determined that the start was not successful.

As a result of the confirmation, if the transfer / drawing process is successfully started (step S1434: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1436. On the other hand, if the start of the transfer / drawing process is not successful (step S1434: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1442.

Step S1436: The display control unit 220 updates the transfer / drawing state to “start”.

Step S1440: The display control unit 220 updates the preload state to “idle”.

Step S1442: The display control unit 220 starts the preload process. Specifically, the display control unit 220 instructs the preload circuit 154 of the VDP 152 to start processing. At this time, the preload circuit 154 that receives the instruction confirms whether or not the preload processing of the previous frame has been completed, and if the preload processing of the previous frame has already been completed, the preload processing in the current frame is performed. Execute. On the other hand, if the preload processing of the previous frame has not been completed yet, the preload circuit 154 ignores the instruction to start the processing and continues the processing being executed. That is, the preload circuit 154 skips the preload processing in the current frame and carries it over to the next frame.

Step S1444: The display control unit 220 refers to the state of the preload circuit 154 and confirms whether or not the preload process has been successfully started (the preload process has been started normally). For example, the display control unit 220 determines that the start is successful if the preload processing in the current frame is executed in the preload circuit 154, while the preload processing in the current frame is skipped in the preload circuit 154. If so, it can be determined that the start was not successful.

As a result of the confirmation, if the start of the preload process is successful (step S1444: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1446. On the other hand, if the start of the preload process is not successful (step S1444: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1452.

Step S1446: The display control unit 220 updates the preload state to "start".

Step S1450: The display control unit 220 updates the command construction state to “idle”.

Step S1452: The display control unit 220 executes the higher-level task activation process. In this process, when the command construction state is "idle", the display control unit 220 executes the command construction process as a higher-level task (processing of the upstream process) and of the effect device other than the liquid crystal display 42. Advance control. The specific contents of the higher-level task activation process will be described later with reference to the following flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.

[Upper task start processing]
FIG. 666 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the upper task activation process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1500: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the command construction state is “idle”. When the command construction state is "idle" (step S1500: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1502. On the other hand, when the command construction state is not "idle" (step S1500: No), the display control unit 220 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S1502: The display control unit 220 updates the command construction state to "start".

Step S1504: The display control unit 220 executes the command construction process.

Step S1506: The display control unit 220 updates the command construction state to "finished".

Step S1510: The display control unit 220 executes another device control progress processing. In this process, the control of other effect devices (speakers, lamps, etc.) is advanced in synchronization with the screen display by the liquid crystal display 42.

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.

[Drawing-related interrupt processing]
FIG. 667 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a process (drawing end interrupt process, preload end interrupt process) executed triggered by an interrupt that occurs at the end of a process related to drawing. Hereinafter, each interrupt process will be described with reference to a procedure example.

FIG. 667 (A): is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the drawing end interrupt process. The drawing end interrupt process is a process executed triggered by a drawing end interrupt that occurs at the end of the transfer / drawing process executed by the drawing circuit 155.

Step S1600: The display control unit 220 updates the transfer / drawing state to "end".

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 648).

FIG. 667 (B): is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the preload end interrupt process. The preload end interrupt process is a process executed triggered by a preload end interrupt that occurs at the end of the preload process executed by the preload circuit 154.

Step S1700: The display control unit 220 updates the preload state to “end”.

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 648).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the Vsync interrupt control process (FIG. 665) executed when the Vsync interrupt occurs and the higher-level task activation process executed at a predetermined timing in the Vsync interrupt control process (FIG. 665). FIG. 666), the drawing end interrupt processing / preload end interrupt processing (FIG. 667) controls four processes (command construction processing, preload processing, transfer / drawing processing, display processing) related to drawing the effect image. .. At the same time, the current states of each of the three processes excluding the display are managed by different flags (command construction state flag, preload state flag, transfer / drawing state flag), and based on these flags. , Whether or not there is a delay in any of the steps is controlled by the delay flag.

The current state of each process is updated to "start" when the process of each process is normally started, and is updated to "end" when the process of each process is completed, and the process of the next process is normally started. Then it will be updated to "idle". As described above, the four processes proceed from the upstream side to the downstream side in the order of command construction processing → preload processing → transfer / drawing processing → display processing, so the next process from the viewpoint of command construction processing is preload processing. The next step seen from the preload process is the transfer / drawing process, and the next step seen from the transfer / drawing process is the display process. Therefore, for example, when the preload process is normally started (step S1444: Yes in FIG. 665), the command construction state is updated to "idle" (step S1450 in FIG. 665). On the other hand, if the preload process is not normally started (start has failed) (step S1444: No in FIG. 665), the command construction state is not updated.

Then, when the command construction state is "idle", that is, when the preload processing which is the next step is normally started (step S1500: Yes in FIG. 666), the command construction processing of the current frame is executed. At the same time (step S1504 in FIG. 666), the control of other production devices is advanced in synchronization with this (step S1510 in FIG. 666). On the other hand, if the command construction state is not "idle", that is, if the start of the preload processing, which is the next step, has failed (step S1500: No in FIG. 666), the command construction processing of the current frame should be executed. It does not advance the control of other production devices.

With such control, when the preload process, which is the next process, fails to start, the command construction of the current frame before the drawing command constructed in the command construction process of the previous frame becomes the target of the preload process. It is possible to prevent the drawing command from being overwritten by the process, that is, the content of the drawing command is discarded without being embodied by the process after the next step. Further, when the command construction process is skipped, the control of the other effect device is not advanced, so that the execution timing of the process can be appropriately synchronized between the liquid crystal display 42 and the other effect device. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if a delay occurs in a part of the steps, it is possible to prevent the timing of the effect reproduction from being deviated and to continue the effect reproduction in a natural manner.

[Execution timing of drawing-related processing during normal operation]
FIG. 668 is a diagram showing execution timings of drawing-related processes (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process) in a normal state.

The number of frames attached to the arrows in the figure is the number of frames ahead when the processing of the arrow with the characters "± 0 frames" is the starting point, and the processing of the other arrows is viewed from the starting point. Is shown. For example, in FIG. 668, the arrow indicating the display process of the first frame is attached with the character "± 0 frame", and the arrow indicating the transfer / drawing process is attached with the character "+1 frame". Has been done. This indicates that the transfer / drawing process of the first frame is a process (for the second frame) for the first frame ahead when viewed from the display process of the first frame.

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed.

The same applies to the second and subsequent frames. When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in each frame, the display process executes the display for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process executes the transfer / drawing for the next frame and preloads. In the process, preload is executed for 2 frames ahead, and in the command construction process, command construction for 3 frames ahead is executed.

By normally executing each process in this way, the content of the command construction executed in the first frame is displayed in the fourth frame.

[Execution timing when command construction processing is delayed]
FIG. 669 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process when the command construction process is delayed among the processes related to drawing (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process).

The number of frames attached to the arrows in the figure is the number of frames ahead when the processing of the arrow with the characters "± 0 frames" is the starting point, and the processing of the other arrows is viewed from the starting point. Is shown. For example, in FIG. 669, the arrow indicating the command construction process in the first frame has the character "± 0 frame", and the arrow indicating the preload process has the character "-1 frame". Has been done. This indicates that the preload processing of the first frame is the processing (for the -1st frame) for the frame immediately before the command construction processing of the first frame. Here, in the command construction process, since the process for the third frame ahead is performed as described above, the command construction for the fourth frame is executed in the first frame. Therefore, in the preload processing of the first frame, the preload for the frame immediately before the fourth frame, that is, the third frame is executed (the same applies to FIGS. 670 and 671).

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed.

Here, it is assumed that a delay occurs in the command construction process for the 4th frame started in the 1st frame, and the process is delayed to the 2nd frame without ending within the frame (within 33.3 ms). In this case, the delay flag is set at the beginning of the Vsync interrupt control process executed in the second frame (step S1404 in FIG. 665). Therefore, the command construction process, preload process, and transfer / drawing process that should normally be executed in the second frame are all skipped. Further, in the display process, since the display frame buffer is not switched, the screen displayed in the previous frame is continuously displayed as it is. Then, since the command construction process in which the delay has occurred ends in the middle of the second frame, each process is executed according to the normal flow from the third frame onward. As described above, in the example illustrated in FIG. 669, the processing for one frame was skipped in the second frame due to the delay in the command construction processing, and as a result, the content of the command constructed for the fourth frame is one frame. The display is executed at the 5th frame with a delay.

If there is a delay in the command construction process started in the previous frame, the preload process cannot be executed in perfect condition because the command to be preloaded in the current frame is still under construction. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the same screen is displayed without switching the display frame buffer while skipping new executions of the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process until the frame at which the command construction process ends. To continue. As a result, even if the command construction process is delayed, the execution timing of each process can be appropriately controlled and a natural effect image can be displayed.

[Execution timing when preload processing is delayed]
FIG. 670 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process when the preload process is delayed among the processes related to drawing (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process).

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed. All of these processes are completed within the frame.

Subsequently, when the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the second frame triggered by the second Vsync interrupt C2, the display process executes the display (for the second frame) for the current frame, and transfers / draws the process. Then, transfer / drawing for the next frame (for the 3rd frame) is executed, preload for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 4th frame) is executed in the preload process, and preload for the 3rd frame ahead (for the 5th frame) in the command construction process. ) Command construction is executed.

Here, it is assumed that a delay occurs in the preload processing for the 4th frame started in the 2nd frame, and the processing does not end within the frame (within 33.3 ms) and is shifted to the 3rd frame. In this case, the delay flag is set at the beginning of the Vsync interrupt control process executed in the third frame (step S1408 in FIG. 665). Therefore, the command construction process, preload process, and transfer / drawing process, which should normally be executed in the third frame, are all skipped. Further, in the display process, since the display frame buffer is not switched, the screen displayed in the previous frame is continuously displayed as it is. Then, since the preload process in which the delay has occurred ends in the middle of the third frame, each process is executed according to the normal flow from the fourth frame onward. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 670, the processing for one frame is skipped in the third frame due to the delay in the preload processing, and as a result, the content preloaded for the fourth frame is delayed by one frame. The display is executed at the 5th frame.

If there is a delay in the preload process started in the previous frame, the image data to be transferred / drawn in the current frame is still in the preloading stage, so the transfer / drawing process is executed in perfect condition. Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the same screen is displayed without switching the display frame buffer while skipping new executions of the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process until the frame at which the preload process ends. continue. As a result, even if there is a delay in the preload processing, it is possible to appropriately control the execution timing of each processing and display a natural effect image.

[Execution timing when transfer / drawing process is delayed]
FIG. 671 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process when the transfer / drawing process is delayed among the processes related to drawing (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process).

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed. All of these processes are completed within the frame.

Subsequently, when the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the second frame triggered by the second Vsync interrupt C2, the display process executes the display (for the second frame) for the current frame, and transfers / draws the process. Then, transfer / drawing for the next frame (for the 3rd frame) is executed, preload for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 4th frame) is executed in the preload process, and preload for the 3rd frame ahead (for the 5th frame) in the command construction process. ) Command construction is executed. All of these processes also end within the frame.

Subsequently, when the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the third frame triggered by the third Vsync interrupt C3, the display process executes the display (for the third frame) for the current frame, and transfers / draws the process. Then, transfer / drawing for the next frame (for the 4th frame) is executed, preload for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 5th frame) is executed in the preload process, and preload for the 3rd frame ahead (for the 6th frame) in the command construction process. ) Command construction is executed.

Here, it is assumed that a delay occurs in the transfer / drawing process for the 4th frame started in the 3rd frame, and the process does not end within the frame (within 33.3 ms) and is shifted to the 4th frame. In this case, the delay flag is set at the beginning of the Vsync interrupt control process executed in the fourth frame (step S1412 in FIG. 665). Therefore, the command construction process, preload process, and transfer / drawing process that should normally be executed in the 4th frame are all skipped. Further, in the display process, since the display frame buffer is not switched, the screen displayed in the previous frame is continuously displayed as it is. Then, since the transfer / drawing process in which the delay has occurred ends in the middle of the fourth frame, each process is executed according to the normal flow from the fifth frame onward. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 671, the processing for one frame is skipped in the fourth frame due to the delay in the transfer / drawing process, and as a result, the content transferred / drawn for the fourth frame is displayed. The display is executed at the 5th frame with a delay of 1 frame.

If there is a delay in the transfer / drawing process started in the previous frame, the production image to be displayed in the current frame is still in the drawing stage, so the display frame buffer should be switched perfectly. I can't do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process are skipped until the frame at which the transfer / drawing process is completed, and the same screen is displayed without switching the display frame buffer. Continue displaying. As a result, even if there is a delay in the transfer / drawing process, it is possible to appropriately control the execution timing of each process and display a natural effect image.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a delay occurs in any of the processes of each process, the process of each process is skipped without being newly executed until the process is completed. The same effect image is continuously displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Then, the processing of each process is restarted along the normal flow by the Vsync interrupt control processing executed (in the next frame) after the processing in which the delay has occurred is completed.

If any of the processes in each process is delayed, but it is ignored and the process in each process is newly executed, each process will be executed in an incomplete state. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is disturbed. In addition, an error may occur in the middle of the process and the process may stop abnormally. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a delay occurs in any of the processes of each process, the execution timing of the processes of each process is appropriately controlled by executing the above control. .. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the screen from being disturbed and the processing from being abnormally stopped, and it is possible to display a natural effect image.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 669 to 671, the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process in which the delay occurred are all completed in the next frame, but depending on the situation, the next frame. However, there is a possibility that the processing will not be completed and the processing will be prolonged. In such a case, the effect image displayed before the delay occurs is displayed as it is while skipping the new execution of the process of each process until the process in which the delay occurs is completed.

Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the normal effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 672 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process.
The operation memory effect management process is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in conjunction with an increase or decrease in the number of lottery elements (operation memory number) stored in the main control device 70, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. It is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to (memory display effect executing means), and is called and executed in the process of the normal effect control process (step S401 in FIG. 659). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and changes the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the middle display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the normal effect control process (FIG. 659).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 673 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 616) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 616). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and responds to the result. The control information of the effect content (operation trigger effect, continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the VDP 152, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a 16-round big hit, the effect control unit 210 selects a 16-round large-duty effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the display control unit 220 of this. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 674 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo production pattern is a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in production (the first and second special symbols are in a so-called customer waiting state where the number of operating memories of the first and second special symbols is 0, and the first and second special symbols are in operation. It defines the content of the effect to be executed when the number of working memories is 0 and the game is temporarily interrupted due to the passage of a predetermined time while the player's hand is away from the handle unit 16. .. Here, the condition that the first and second special symbols have not changed (stop display) may be added.

Step S603: The effect control unit 210 executes the setting suggestion effect management process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the demo effect.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the normal effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display control process (step S404 in FIG. 659) and the lamp control process (step S406 in FIG. 659), the demo effect is performed based on the demo effect pattern. Control the content.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "C0H00H" to "D0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes the effect pattern variation schedule (variation time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the effect effect pattern number at that time. Determine the mode of stop display. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence). In this case, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 673), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The advance notice effect is executed based on the advance notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 675 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating time processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S904 to step S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operation process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning in the "12 round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the process of selecting the normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in the "16 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 during the execution of the jackpot effect, the input control unit 228 is made to detect whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and the effect content (operation trigger effect) according to the result is detected. , Continuous hitting effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220. Further, in the process during operation of the variable winning device, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 642 (J) or the like) is selected. While executing the process, if the probability variation area passage command is not received during the jackpot game, the process of selecting the effect indicating that the V prize has not occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 643 (N) or the like). To execute.

Step S908: In the post-operation processing of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes a coast mode rush effect or a fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not a winning symbol or a probability variation region has passed. Specifically, when a probability variation area passage command is received during the jackpot game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered (effect shown in FIG. 642 (K) or the like) is executed, and the jackpot is executed. If the probability variation area passage command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player is entering the coastal mode (effect shown in FIG. 641 (G) or the like) is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 673).

As described above, according to the above-described embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in the section during SATA preparation in which the refresh of the CGROM 190 and the data transfer from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 are performed, an operation peculiar to this section is executed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify and recognize that the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is in the stage of preparation for activation to the staff and the player of the game hall.

(2) According to the present embodiment, even if the effect command is transmitted from the main control device 70 in the section during SATA preparation, the effect control device 124 discards all but the production inspection start command, and the effect command is used. Since the effect control based on the effect is not performed, the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps continue to execute the unique operation during the SATA preparation, and the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is notified that the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is in the stage of preparation for activation. It can be done with the highest priority.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the transmission of the effect command from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 takes a predetermined time (9.0 seconds during mass production and 2.5 seconds during inspection) after the power is turned on. Since it is started after waiting for the elapse, the timing of the processing executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately synchronized between the main control device 70 and the effect control device 124.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the drawing material used for screen drawing of the liquid crystal display 42 in the section during SATA preparation is stored in the control ROM 180 in advance, and the drawing stored in CGROM 190 during SATA preparation. Since no material is used (the CGROM190 is not accessed), both the drawing process executed during SATA preparation and the data transfer process from the CGROM190 to the DRAM 191 should proceed smoothly without delay. And the data transfer process can be completed within the expected time.

(5) According to the present embodiment, when a production inspection start command is transmitted from the main control device 70 in the section under preparation for SATA, the effect control device 124 controls the lamp based on this command. , End the unique operation (alternate blinking of all frame lamps) by various lamps during SATA preparation (turn off all frame lamps), and inspect other lamp data without waiting until SATA preparation is completed. It is possible to quickly shift to a feasible state and improve inspection efficiency.

(6) According to the present embodiment, during the preparation for SATA, the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps are used to perform an operation peculiar to this section, and a notification to that effect is given. At the development stage, it is assumed that development and production inspection will be carried out in an environment where the liquid crystal display 42 is not equipped, but in such a case, notification is performed only by the screen display by the liquid crystal display 42. If it is configured, it will not be possible to determine whether or not SATA is being prepared. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the notification is made by the operation of various lamps in addition to the liquid crystal display 42, whether or not SATA is being prepared even in an environment where the liquid crystal display 42 is not equipped. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of production and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 70 starts transmitting the effect command after waiting for 9.0 seconds from the power-on during mass production, but the waiting time until the start of transmission is 9.0 seconds. It is not limited, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the CGROM 190 and the size of the area allocated for the audio material. Further, at the time of inspection, the transmission of the effect command is started after 2.5 seconds have passed from the power-on, but the same applies to this, and it can be changed as appropriate depending on the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps are used for notification in the section during SATA preparation, but the effect device used for notification is not limited to this. For example, the notification may be performed by using various movable bodies instead of the various lamps or together with the various lamps.

In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the Vsync interrupt is generated once at 33.3 ms intervals (30 times per second) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, Vsync interrupts may be generated once at 16.6 ms intervals (60 times per second). Further, in that case, the process executed when the Vsync interrupt occurs, the process executed every time (60 times per second) triggered by the occurrence of the interrupt, and the process executed every other time when the interrupt occurs. It is also possible to configure the process separately from the process to be executed (30 times per second).

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine not having a probability variation region. It is also possible to apply the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment I]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 676 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 677 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 676 and 677.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 677) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 676. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 676, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit), and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

Further, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with an error notification lamp 45 at the upper left portion thereof. The error notification lamp 45 has one full-color LED built-in, and when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it emits light in a manner corresponding to the type of the pachinko machine 1 to notify the error. The "error notification" here refers to notification that the game is not in a normal state, and specifically, an error during execution of the game (for example, an illegal winning error, a winning frequency abnormal error, a ball jam error, etc.) In addition to notifying that an error directly related to the game, a radio error that seems to have been caused by a so-called goto action, a magnetic error, etc. has occurred, operations related to maintenance (for example, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc.) are performed. Includes notification that it has been executed. If an operation related to maintenance is executed in the process of maintenance work (not due to fraud), it is not strictly an error, but these are also treated as errors for convenience. The specific contents of the error notification performed by using the error notification lamp 45 and other devices will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The various lamps 45, 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in the glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (preliminary effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off unlike the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times that of the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, the player can be made to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 677, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later with reference to another block diagram (FIG. 680 and FIG. 681).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1. The change of the setting will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 677 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 678 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game state). , Small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.) is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area). The left side portion of the game area 8a is also used in a high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged below the variable start winning device 28. ..

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and a ball entry port 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the obstacle nails. The entry port 19a and the discharge port 19b are connected by a connecting passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the ball entry port 19a is decelerated and rectified through this connecting passage, and is discharged from the discharge port 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined ball entry port) is arranged on the right side of the starting gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but when it is flipped to the right by an obstacle nail, it enters the out port 19c.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a enters the ball entry port 19a and is discharged from the discharge port 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 and the out port 19c is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ) Needs to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It enables the ball to enter the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) retracted from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the 5th round, or the condition that it is the 7th to 16th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31 is a case where the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode) as in the case of the first variable winning device 30, and is a predetermined second condition (for example,). It operates when the condition that it is the sixth round of the jackpot game) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second major winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special entry). Sphere event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second prize opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second large winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends downward to the left, and then extends downward again.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the induction passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability variation region and a hole 31e for the probability variation region are arranged in the middle flow of the guidance passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is arranged downstream of the above.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is turned off, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so that the game ball passes through the upper part of the probability variation region blade member 31d. It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability variation area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is an region through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 opens during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is that the production region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probability variation region is opened for a long period of time. It is a pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds). Since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, the game ball is not guided to the probability variation region by this operation. Further, even if the blade member 31d for the probability variation region operates, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region when the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened.

In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the central position to the right side portion thereof. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating a vehicle on which a female character is on board). The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game area includes the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the game ball that has entered the out opening 19c. All the game balls driven into 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 679 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). As shown in the figure, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second. A special symbol display device 35 and a game status display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, it is memorized that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Suddenly (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the reduced one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter, referred to as “common”) for the purpose of controlling the switching between lighting and extinguishing. From a different point of view, the integrated display board 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are driven in order in common units at intervals of interrupt cycles (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, not all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 680 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. Of these, the random number circuit 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the random numbers generated here are It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and receives these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset as needed, and these are circuit boards together with the main control CPU 72. Implemented above. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least a setting value of a plurality of stages regarding the winning probability of the special symbol lottery) (setting changing means), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is opened with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the state shifts to the setting changing state (setting change state, setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared. To do.

In the state where the setting is being changed, the display is not performed on the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38), and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and a set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off. , Move to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, but the setting change switch may be separately provided without using the RAM clear switch 304.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). ..

Similar to the state where the setting is being changed, the state where the setting is being confirmed is not displayed on the main display, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. The set value is displayed. In the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being confirmed ends, and the power is temporarily turned off. After shifting to the previous state, it shifts to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls. Further, the probability variation region switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the probability change area switch 95 are used. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 to the display board 89.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 sets the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening) to the number of outs (out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected in 99). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream of the probability variation region, and a first large winning opening. A solenoid 90, a second winning opening solenoid 97, and a solenoid 99 for a probability variation region are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the blade member 31d for the probability variation region. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch solenoid 110 is installed together with a launch control board 108 (ball launching means). Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, when the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 is built in together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53, and movable motor 57. The voice IC 134 also controls the driving of the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. The internal functional configuration of such an effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to the following figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of various effects commands (hereinafter, referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 45 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56 and 58. Further, a volume control switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136 in addition to the handle lever 62, the button motor 63, the push button 64, and the direction key 66, and when the player operates these operating members, they are connected. The contact signal of is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136. Here, an example in which the operating members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when the saucer illumination board is installed, the operation members 62, 64, 66 are attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124 to bring the push button 64 into either a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). Switch to (displace).

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 59 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The movable body sensor 59 is, for example, a photo sensor provided at the origin position (initial position) of the movable body 40f, and outputs a detection signal when the movable body 40f is detected. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 681 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

Normally, for controlling the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 45 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 are used as described above. (Effect operation execution means) is included to control the effect. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Etc.) are realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used (effect control means). In FIG. 681, the tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, and the input control unit. It is shown as 228 mag. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operating body. Further, in the individual control stage, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 operate in accordance with the device to be controlled. Become the subject. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further stores the VDP 152 for drawing the effect screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, the sound IC 134 for generating the sound accompanying the effect and outputting it from the speaker, and the image and sound used for the effect. In addition to the CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190 and the DRAM 191 used as the loading destination of the data stored in the CGROM 190, the audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, the LED driver 198, and the SMC (serial control). The controller) 199 and the driver IC 132 are equipped. Of these, the VDP152, the audio IC134, and the SMC199 are integrated into the effect control CPU 126 and one chip. A PLL circuit (phase-locked loop) (not shown) is mounted on the chip 128 that integrates these circuits. The clock signal generated by the crystal oscillator 181 is multiplied / divided by the PLL circuit and then input to each circuit on the chip 128.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm (first storage means). .. The maximum capacity of the CGROM 190 is 64 Gbits, of which 60 Gbits are allocated for drawing material and 4 Gbits are allocated for audio material. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

By the way, in this embodiment, a NAND type SATA (Serial ATA) standard ROM is adopted as the CGROM 190. In the NAND ROM, data is read out in page units (for example, 1 page = 32 Kbytes), but when various drawing materials and audio materials stored in the CGROM 190 are used for production, a specific address is used. It is necessary to read only the necessary data from from by random access.

Therefore, with the adoption of the NAND type CGROM190, in the present embodiment, the DRAM 191 is further equipped and used as the loading destination (temporary storage destination) of the data read from the CGROM190 in page units (second storage). means). As a result, the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 can read out the necessary drawing material and audio material from the data loaded in the DRAM 191 by random access. In addition, DDR3 (Double-Data-Rate3) standard SDRAM is adopted as DRAM 191. The maximum capacity of the DRAM 191 is 8 Gbits, and 4 Gbits are allocated for drawing material and audio material. Further, the DRAM 191 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a bus (not shown).

The maximum capacities and allocation ratios of the CGROM 190 and the DRAM 191 described above are examples until they get tired of them, and can be appropriately changed depending on the situation. Further, the CGROM 190 may be provided separately for the drawing material and the audio material.

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 on the same chip 128. Further, the VDP 152 incorporates a preload circuit 154, a drawing circuit 155, a VRAM 156, a drawing material decoder 157, and a display circuit 153. When an instruction (command) from the display control unit 220 is input to the VDP 152, the drawing material required by the preload circuit 154 is transferred from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 in advance and saved (hereinafter referred to as "preload"). , The drawing circuit 155 draws the effect image on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) the preloaded drawing material using the decoder 157, and the effect image is stored in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). expand. Then, the display circuit 153 individually drives each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the frame buffer, so that the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

Each mode of data preloading from the NAND type CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 and data transfer in the DRAM 191 performed by the preload circuit 154 will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated into the same chip 128 together with the production control CPU 126 like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is also connected to an amplifier (not shown) or an external DRAM other than the DRAM 191. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. When an instruction from the audio control unit 222 is input to the audio IC 134, the audio IC 134 reads out the necessary audio material from the DRAM 191 according to the instruction, and decodes the read audio material on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. While generating sound, the generated sound is output to the speaker 54 on the glass frame, the speaker 55 in the glass frame, the inner frame speaker 56, and the outer frame speaker 58 via the amplifier, so that the sound of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch Achieve playback (the number of channels is not limited to this). Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated. In the present embodiment, the amplifier IC 193 is provided between the audio IC 134 and the amplifier, and the amplifier IC 193 sets and adjusts the amplifier.

By the way, the audio IC 134 reads out the necessary audio material from the DRAM 191 as described above, which is related to the fact that the audio IC 134 does not have a function corresponding to the preload circuit 154 of the VDP 152. If the audio IC 134 reads data from the CGROM 190 at the stage when the audio material is needed, it cannot read a specific audio material because it can only read in page units, and it is difficult to control the audio. It becomes. Therefore, with the adoption of the NAND type CGROM190, in the present embodiment, all the audio materials stored in the CGROM190 are transferred to the DRAM 191 when the power is turned on. As a result, the audio IC 134 can read the necessary audio material by random access from the data loaded in the DRAM 191 without reading the data from the CGROM 190.

The LED driver 198 controls a lighting pattern and a brightness pattern associated with the execution of the effects of the various lamps 45 to 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of a motor (for example, the movable body motor 57) that is a drive source for various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and also controls a sensor for the movable body (for example, the movable body). The detection signal output by the sensor 59) is relayed and passed to the movable body control unit 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated into the same chip 128 together with the effect control CPU 126. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps 45 to 53 and the movable motor 57. By managing the operation, the effect reproduction using the lamp and the movable body is realized. The various lamps include the glass frame top lamp 46 installed in the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the error notification lamp 45, as well as a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60. And the board lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Further, although an example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer illumination board is attached to the glass frame decoration lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the driver IC 132.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the handle lever 62 or the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between set value and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 682 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or conversely clears the backup information to restore the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

683 and 684 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control the interrupt request generated during the execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets the priority defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, multiple interrupt requests will be executed in order. The control of the interrupt process will be described in detail later.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the values of the input port into which the RAM clear signal is input are acquired twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes the standby process here. This process is for securing a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) after the power is turned on, and checking the power off warning signal (signal indicating that the power is being cut off) during that time. It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power cutoff warning signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power off warning signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been operated (switch ON). To do. If the RAM clear switch 304 is not operated (No), step S112 is then executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the time of the previous power cutoff and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A5H") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S114. The process executed when the power is cut off will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of a part of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a continuous work area within a predetermined range based on the address of the backup valid determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. The main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power is cut off by clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes) and keeping the saved valid backup information as it is. (Memory restoration means).

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 should transmit a power return designation effect command (command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124) and a payout command (transmit to the payout control device 92) indicating that the main control CPU 72 has returned from the power cutoff and started. Command) is set.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 304 is operated when the power is turned on (step S110: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S112: No), or the backup information is not normal. In the case (step S114: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S122: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets a RAM clear designated effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and a payout command (command for the payout control device 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been started.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear specification) set in step S124 to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU 72 further includes various other effect commands (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state specification command, special symbol destination determination effect command, effect command when the number of operation memories increases, and decrease in the number of operation memories) required for the effect control. Set the time effect command, the number of times cut counter remaining number command, special game state specification command, launch position specification command, etc.) and output these to the effect command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect command transmission process (step S142), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, internal) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emitting state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal indicating to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits the command transmission to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, the payout control device 92 receives the payout command permission signal to indicate to the main control device 70 that the payout command is permitted to be transmitted. It becomes.

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow of power restoration in the CPU initialization process, and the state of the main control device 70 when the power is cut off based on the backup information. (Step S116), but as part of that, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

The emission permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76. However, the address of the output port buffer targeted here is located in the address space of the RAM 76, which is outside the continuous area targeted for clearing in step S116. Therefore, if, as part of the process of step S116, an attempt is made to clear the value of the specific bit of the specific address in which the launch permission signal is set in addition to the area to be cleared, the specific address is specified and then the specific address is specified. , It is necessary to perform an exceptional process of clearing only the data of a specific bit out of the 8-bit data stored at that address and maintaining the data of the remaining 7 bits, which is a part of the RAM 76. The efficiency of the process of clearing the area becomes very poor. Under such circumstances, the main control CPU 72 handles the launch permission signal in the same manner as other backup target data without clearing the launch permission signal in the previous step S116, and temporarily returns to the state when the power is cut off.

However, at the stage where the backup information is returned in the main control device 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 has not yet been established, and is the payout control device 92 started normally (main control device 92)? It has not been confirmed whether or not the instruction by the command from 70 can be accepted. When the power is cut off while the launch permission signal is ON, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, and as a result, the game ball can be launched even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. A condition will occur. Here, tentatively, the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product (for example, one in which the number of prize balls is modified) that does not conform to the original inspection while the power is cut off, and the main control device 70 is changed by the subsequent power return. When activated, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, which makes it possible to launch the game ball. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch permission signal is explicitly cleared once before the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop, regardless of whether the activation is due to the power recovery or the RAM clear designation (the activation is performed). (Reset to OFF). After that, the main control CPU 72 confirms that the payout command permission signal has been input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then sends the payout command to the payout control device 92. The control that sets the launch permission signal to ON is adopted. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, the launch of the game ball is not permitted unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established. , It is possible to avoid the illegal launch of the game ball when the above-mentioned fraud is committed.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.
Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop, which will be described later, as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt process. By performing this process, it is possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop after the interrupt process is executed.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop from beginning to end.

Step S136, Step S138: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 687), but the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S138, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S138 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S136 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S210 in FIG. 687), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number. The timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU 72 executes the reception command management process. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process is performed according to the result. If the received command is a payout start specification command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation specification command to the payout command buffer. If not, is the received data within a predetermined range (receive command)? If it is out of the range, the payout error specification command is output to the production command buffer, and the payout radio error flag is set according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect command transmission process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124.

In the present embodiment, 9.0 seconds (2.5 seconds at the time of inspection) elapse from the power-on in consideration of the approximate time required for the processing executed when the power is turned on in the effect control device 124. We will wait and send the production command.

Step S144, Step S146: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during the execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes. The content of the interrupt process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Evacuation processing when power is turned off]
Next, a process to be executed when a power cutoff (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power cutoff") occurs will be described. FIG. 685 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the evacuation process when the power is turned off. In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power failure and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller (not shown)). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process, backup means) when the power is turned off, triggered by an input of a power cutoff warning signal (XINT interrupt) to the XINT terminal. Hereinafter, each procedure of the evacuation process when the power is turned off will be described later.

Steps S150 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power cutoff detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits interruption, ends the power off save process, and ends the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIGS. 683 to 684) (FIGS. 683 to 684). Returns to the program address indicated by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: In addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, the main control CPU 72 controls test signal terminals and commands. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the signal.

Step S156, Step S158: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S160: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area.
Step S164: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined value for counting the number of checks of the power failure warning signal in the loop counter.
Step S168: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power off warning signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter.
Step S172: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. If it cannot be confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU 72 shifts from the power outage save process to the CPU initialization process (FIG. 683). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before the transition to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started with other interrupts prohibited.

The processes of steps S166 to S172 described above are so-called standby processes (follow-up processes) executed in preparation for shutting off the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power off warning signal is continuously detected, step S166 to step S168 are repeatedly executed, so that the loop counter does not become "0". Therefore, the standby state will be continued as long as the power supply is sustained. On the other hand, if the detection of the power off warning signal is temporary (for example, detection due to a momentary power failure or the like), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is subtracted with the passage of time. Suddenly, when it becomes "0", the process shifts to the CPU initialization process. That is, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and performs other processing in the situation where the power supply is being cut off. While the standby state is maintained without execution and the upcoming power supply is cut off in a safe state, the CPU is initialized in a situation where the stable power supply is restored after a temporary power failure occurs. Move to processing and restart main processing. By executing such a standby process, it is possible to guarantee a stable gaming operation of the main control device 70 and thus the pachinko machine 1.

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (for example, a circuit including a capacitance element mounted on the main control device 70) after a power failure occurs, the stored contents of the RAM 76 are stored. It is retained without disappearing even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when a power failure occurs after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization process (FIG. 683).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a process to be executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 686 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the command reception interrupt process. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for specifying payout activation indicating that the payout of the game ball has started to the main control device 70, and various devices (for example, for example) related to payout of the prize ball as the game progresses. The command transmitted from the payout device board 100, the full tank switch 161 and the like) to the main control device 70 is relayed and transmitted. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes the command reception interrupt process (SCU interrupt process) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt process). Hereinafter, each procedure of the command reception interrupt processing will be described step by step.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the received data register (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that there is data in the received data register (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU 72 stores the contents of the data register in the receive command buffer.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, permits interrupts, and then ends the command reception interrupt process to perform the CPU initialization process. Return to the main loop (Fig. 684).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 687 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the timer interrupt process. The main control CPU 72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described later.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the values of the AF register (accumulator / flag register pair), BC, DE, and HL register (general purpose register pair) used during the execution of the main loop into the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits interruption. If the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step or later of the timer interrupt process is being executed. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted for the timer interrupt process. The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of the interrupt request signal, the priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. The interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 stores the contents output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 logically ANDs the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 with the inversion result values of the previous input values. Is stored in the input port-on detection flag. As a result, it is possible to grasp the accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag. Specific examples of the various switch signals include pass detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation region switch 95, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. 85, a winning detection signal from the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the like are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and updates counters such as various timers for external information and timers for security signals, in addition to the timer for managing the game time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described in the process of the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 684).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the hit symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 , The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, and another process is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). In this process, the process associated with changing or confirming the set value is executed. If the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed, that is, the game is possible, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process) and instead calculates the base. Then, the process of displaying on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

Further, when the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU 72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end specification command" is an effect command that notifies that the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting has been completed, and the setting-related end specification command includes information on the setting value in addition to this. Can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684) executed in the main loop.

Step S216, Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S216), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2. The variable display or stop display by the special symbol display device 35 is determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the main control CPU 72 determines the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the state management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is recovered to an abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entered into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and a base abnormality (to the back side of the game board unit 8). The degree of risk such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of prize balls in each of the winning openings 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, and 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check if a high condition has occurred. When an abnormal state is detected, the main control CPU 72 causes an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement park and by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124. Notify that.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, The prize ball control counters for each target are added by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. Although the detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is not empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and is not empty (the payout command is not empty). If it is set), various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the start mode when the power is turned on is set in the process of CPU initialization (step S118 and step S124 in FIG. 683) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 683). However, a payout command indicating this activation mode is sent here. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the process for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, the prize ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. To transmit the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFA) is a predetermined number. When less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFA in step S224 executed before the previous time has been transmitted, or when the transmission FIFA is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFA. ) Is executed only.

Further, particularly in step S224 at the time of turning on the power, when the payout command set in the process of CPU initialization processing is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch permission signal with this as an opportunity. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the emission permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the port output process (step S236) described later.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S226: The main control CPU 72 executes the firing position designation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the launch position designation flag to the previous launch position designation flag, and then clears the launch position designation flag. Then, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch position designation flag if the variable winning device is operating or the time reduction function is operating, and the launch position designation flag and the previous launch position designation flag match. If not, a launch position specification command is generated. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684) executed in the main loop.

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port outputs external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S230: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 represents various internal states (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). Generate test signals and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. Performs processing necessary for managing the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, in a mode corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol determined in the special symbol game processing (step S216) and the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the operation memory number display, the game state display, and the like. The drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

Here, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port one common at a time in the dynamic port output process (step S204) each time the timer interrupt process occurs. It is output. For example, in the timer interrupt process executed next time, the byte data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process executed one after another, the byte data stored for common 2 is output to the port. , And so on, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in a common unit, and lighting control is performed by a dynamic lighting method. Will be.

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 drives each drive signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region stored in the port output request buffer. , Test signals, etc. are also stored in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU 72 executes the port output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs the port. For example, the drive signals of the solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be made to operate according to the drive signal.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S216 to S236 are executed as a part of the timer interrupt process is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 returns the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt process, and enters the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 684). Return.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main control device 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 683), which is the main control program, the parallel that is the source of the XINT interrupt (power cut-off save process (FIG. 685)). I / O port 79 output interrupt request), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of the command reception interrupt process (Fig. 686)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt) An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194, which is the source of the interrupt process (FIG. 687), may occur. These interrupt requests are managed / controlled by the interrupt controller 192 mounted on the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 permits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72, and prohibits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction), that is, so-called masqueradable interrupt. Is being controlled.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent factors that do not depend on each other, it is naturally possible that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority of the interrupt request in consideration of the importance of the interrupt process, the processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the priority of the XINT interrupt (evacuation processing when the power is turned off) is the lowest, and the SCU interrupt (command). The priority of reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 683), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. .. Actually, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 684), from the time when the interrupt is permitted (step S144 in FIG. 684) until the interrupt is prohibited (FIG. 684). When any interrupt request occurs during step S136) in 684, the interrupt controller 192 controls the received interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when XINT interrupt and PTC interrupt are received at the same time, the higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in the interrupt wait state, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the power outage save process is executed.

Further, when the procedure example of each interrupt process is reconfirmed, in the power failure save process (FIG. 685) and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 686), immediately before returning from each interrupt process (RETI instruction). The interrupt is permitted for the first time (immediately before executing) (step S152 in FIG. 685, step S188 in FIG. 686), whereas in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 687), the interrupt is interrupted at the beginning of the interrupt process. Interrupts are allowed (step S202 in FIG. 687), after which the main steps are performed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the power-off save process and the command reception interrupt process, while the interrupt controller 192 prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Allows execution of interrupts.

By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this way, the interrupt controller 192 enables execution of multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 688 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S214 in FIG. 687). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95 corresponding to the probability variation region provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region. As the process when passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). , Advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability change area passage command as a process when passing through the probability change area. The probabilistic region passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684) executed in the main loop. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probability variation region solenoid 99 is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 687).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 689 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 688). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 688). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 687).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When it is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 688).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 690 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 688). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 688). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 689), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 687) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random number value is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 689) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 689) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 689) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (memory means). The memory method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 689) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special symbol destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 688).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 691 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 689, step S46 in FIG. 690) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 689) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 690). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, as in the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 689) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 690). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this is "a symbol that can pass through the probability variation area (12 rounds, any probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol). ) ”, For example,“ A0H ”is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this random number corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the pre-determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot-determined random number acquired after the jackpot-determined random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 689) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 690). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, whether the jackpot type corresponds to "probability variation area passable symbol (12 round normal symbol)" or "probability variation region passable symbol". To determine. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variation region passable symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which is difficult to pass through the probabilistic region", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which can pass through the probabilistic region". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding earlier determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous judgment result is set. If is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high-probability schedule (). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 689) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 690).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 687) will be described. FIG. 692 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol fluctuation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 counts the number of balls entered for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit in this way is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 16 times in total, these are referred to as "16 rounds". May be generically referred to.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the first round to the fifth round, and the seventh to 16th rounds, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (probability fluctuation function activation flag, time reduction function activation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol is highly probable, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "6 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(2) "6 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(3) "12 rounds probability variation jackpot 1 (actually 4 rounds)"
(4) "12 rounds probability variation jackpot 2 (actually 9 rounds)"
(5) "12 rounds normal jackpot (actually 9 rounds)"
(6) "16 round probability change jackpot"
In this embodiment, big hits other than 6 rounds, 12 rounds, and 16 rounds may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "12 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", and "12 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "12 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, the "12-round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "12-round normal symbol", and the "16-round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "16-round probability variation symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 693 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[6 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[6 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "6th round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". The difference between the "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is the difference in the number of time reductions given (details will be described later).

[12 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the first round and the second round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial payout (prize ball). Further, in the third to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 12th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 7th to 12th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 4 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[12 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 9th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 10th to 12th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 10th to 12th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 2", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[12 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 10th and 11th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of falling under the "12th round normal symbol", the player is not given a substantial payout (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 rounds normal symbol", the player is substantially given 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round when the "12th round normal symbol" is applied, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region because the second big winning opening is short-opened. Therefore, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is not given the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

In addition, in the case of "12 round normal symbol", even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the "time reduction function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed. , The privilege to shift to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "16 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 16th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). For this reason, the jackpot game of the "16-round probability variation symbol" substantially gives the player 16 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, " The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of the "16 round probability variation symbol", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, after the jackpot game is completed. By activating the "time reduction function", the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) in one round, the longest opening time does not have to wait. It will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any probability variation symbol other than the 12-round normal symbol" and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "high probability" after the jackpot game ends. The player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "a probability variation symbol other than the 12-round normal symbol", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "low probability time" after the jackpot game ends. Move to "shortened state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common "1.5 seconds". The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When a small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the low probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning of the first large winning opening is hardly generated. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the end of the small hit game, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but it is also possible to use a game specification in which a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 694 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may simply read out random numbers in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 687), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high-probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low-probability state. To. Further, the range of the jackpot value differs depending on the current set value, and the range of the jackpot value is set wider in the case of the high setting than in the case of the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). ). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the disconnection pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is the "time reduction state". Check if it is not. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is supposed to be. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 695 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "3" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "6" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of order after the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "7" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of alignment after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after story reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation, the internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), and the winning symbol (hereinafter,). Similarly).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 694: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, six types of winning symbols are roughly divided as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the 6 types is "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 2", "12 round probability variation symbol 1", "12 round probability variation symbol 2", "12 round normal symbol", "16 round probability variation symbol". ". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 1a", "6 round probability variation symbol 1b", "6 round probability variation symbol 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 696 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "40", "10", "50" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. In the second column from the left, "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)", "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 9 rounds)", and "12 round normal symbol (substantially 9 rounds)" corresponding to each distribution value. (Actually 9 rounds) ”is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (= 40%), and "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 4 rounds)". The percentage of "9 rounds" selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the percentage of "12 rounds normal jackpot (substantially 9 rounds)" selected is 50/100 (= 50%). .. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of the "12 round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given. In addition, although it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.
On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times.
If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, although it corresponds to the "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or the "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 697 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "60", "20", "20" has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol" is 60/100 (= 60%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 1". Is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is 20/100 (= 20%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "16 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of probability variation is 170 times. Granted. In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation count is not given. ..

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number of times is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to the "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the time reduction number of times is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Granted.

[See Fig. 694: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 698 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "64" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the story reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "65" and "66" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the normal reach. It should be noted that, at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without executing the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 694: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "double open small hit symbol" or "three open small hit symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 692: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register into the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination, and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 684) executed in the main loop.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 694). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 694), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 is next. The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. .. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 694).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 700 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 692) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbol", the value corresponding to "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol", a value representing "12 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a value representing "6 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 694). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "16 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "12 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "6 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", respectively. In the present embodiment, since the so-called number-cut probability change function is adopted, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state", the number-cut counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times). The number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-times counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630 after generating the number-of-times counter value command.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number-of-times cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number-cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to "any one of the probability variation symbols other than the 6-round probability variation symbol 2", the number-cut counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is a predetermined numerical value. Since it is set to (for example, 170 times), it is the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset.

Further, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2, the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set. Is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Therefore, it is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset when the 100th variation ends, and the probability variation function activation flag that is reset when the 170th variation ends (advantageous gaming state transition means). , Special state transition means).

Furthermore, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function activation flag is reset. is there. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 701 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 687) executed in the timer interrupt process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag, respectively. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. If the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time saving status display lamp 38e. .. When the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "16 rounds (16R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "12 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b indicating "12 rounds (12R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a indicating "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 702 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the jackpot closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 703 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. The number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 693. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 694). Specifically, if "16 rounds probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16. If "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 12. Further, if "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation region timer (counting the probability variation region opening time) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the jackpot interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (temporarily changing the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for closing). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 702).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 704 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 693, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 703) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area opening process. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 693. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation region timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 703) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. To do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 703) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not still 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 702) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, "the number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 705 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 702). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. To do. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 706 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 702).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 688).

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 170 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-cutting counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the high probability state is provided with a substantial upper limit, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state and the game may return to the low probability state (so-called number-cut probability change). If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 694) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time reduction number is set depends on the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag. If is not set, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, even if the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 100 times as the number of time reductions when the winning symbol corresponds to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 (advantageous game). State transition means, special state transition means). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability is in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 692) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 707 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 708 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, the opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and in such an opening time, a prize is hardly generated in the large winning opening during one opening (difficult). It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launching device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 707). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is in the countdown (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 708) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 707). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of small hit at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 708).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 707). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 710 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 708). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 707) at the time of small hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 707). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set opening number (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 707) at the time of small hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 711 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 707).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 692) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 712 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "12 round normal symbols" or "12 round probabilistic symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game is started. It will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "12 round normal symbol", [F3] 12 round jackpot game (battle bonus) will be executed, and you will be defeated in the battle of [F4] big role production. , [F5] Shift to coastal mode.

[F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortened state. In the [F5] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F7] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", [F3] 12 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] in the battle of the big role production. win.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the [F9] 12-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [F10] V prize has occurred is executed, and the [F11] fireworks are displayed. Move to the rush.

[F11] The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability. In the [F11] fireworks rush, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

On the other hand, if [F13] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [F10] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 713 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "16 round probability variation symbols" or "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the fireworks rush or coastal mode.
If you win the jackpot of [G1] "16 round probability variation symbol" in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G2] 16 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the [G3] 16-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G4] V prize has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, although it corresponds to the [G5] 16-round probability variation symbol, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won), the [G6] V prize does not occur. The effect indicating that is executed is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

If the jackpot of [G10] "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is won in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the 6th round of the [G12] 6-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G13] V prize has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [G15] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and then the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode. Although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when it shifts to the fireworks rush and 100 fluctuations elapse, it shifts to the normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time shortened state. ing.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, an upper effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a lower effect symbol, and these are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower stages on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 676). .. The effect symbols include, for example, a number symbol with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9" and a blank symbol arranged one by one between each number symbol. Here, in the symbol sequence of the upper effect symbol, the number symbols are arranged in ascending order from right to left, whereas in each of the middle effect symbol and the lower effect symbol, the number symbols are arranged from the right. They are arranged in descending order to the left. These symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the horizontal direction from right to left in the upper, middle, and lower rows on the screen.

By the way, in the present embodiment, there are two modes: a vertical variation mode in which the effect progresses in a mode in which the rows of the effect symbols scroll in the vertical direction, and a horizontal variation mode in which the effect progresses in a mode in which the rows of the effect symbols scroll in the horizontal direction. There are different types of variable modes. The player can switch the variable mode by operating according to the instruction shown on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example, during the demonstration effect. The effect symbol illustrated in FIG. 676 is displayed when the lateral variation mode is selected. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the vertical variation mode is selected and an example of the effect when the horizontal variation mode is selected will be described step by step.

FIG. 714 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used). To do. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 714 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 round jackpot", "12 round jackpot", or "16 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color or red display color). Etc.), and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 714 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 by the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (memory image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Stop the left symbol]
In FIG. 714 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 714 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed increases accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 714 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 714 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 714 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
Next, an example of production at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 715 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol. The super reach effect is a reach effect performed with a variation display in which a medium variation time (eg, 50-100 seconds) is selected.

Here, the flow of the super reach effect executed at the time of a big hit will be described, but the super reach effect is executed at a relatively low ratio not only at the time of a big hit but also at the time of a miss. Further, here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 715, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-variation display area X1 and the in-variation display area X2 are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 715 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling to the bottom).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 715 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 715 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 715 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the effect pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 715 (D): The variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped in the middle of the variable display effect. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 715 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the right side of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, "5") are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 715 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing "heart" figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. .. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 715 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "off". In the case of deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 715 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 715 (I): Then, the final middle effect symbol is stopped. In this example, by displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit.

In FIG. 715 (J): Then, for example, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined in the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible to keep the player from not disclosing to the player which winning symbol was won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the subject of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outlier reach effect".

[Example of production during a major role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" etc.]
FIGS. 716 to 719 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of a large-scale production when the "12-round normal symbol" or the "12-round probability variation symbol 2" is applicable.

In the present embodiment, when the "12 round normal symbol" is applicable, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the large role production, and when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is applicable. The effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

[1st round]
In FIG. 716 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect during the big role is started. In the illustrated example, the image of the ghost of the umbrella that is the enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, the image of the female character that is the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the image of the character "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect will be started from now on.

Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, the effect symbol of "5") is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 5 production symbols”.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 716 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and runs away, and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 716 (C): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from the fan (weapon).

[4th round]
In FIG. 716 (D): Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, a ghost of an umbrella performs a special move in which a long tongue pops out of the mouth, and a female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "12 round normal symbol", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "12 round probability variation symbol 2". ing.

[5th round (when the 12th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 717 (E): In the case of winning in the "12th round normal symbol", the defeat effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Defeat ...", the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (allied character defeat production).

[6th round (when the 12th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 717 (F): In the case of winning in the "12th round normal symbol", the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, a production is performed in which a female character utters a line such as "I will not lose next time!". As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for a big hit again. In the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game, the same re-challenge promotion effect as in the 6th round is executed.

In the sixth round when the player wins the "12th round normal symbol", the second variable winning device 31 opens, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball passes through the probability variation region. There is no.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 717 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the “12 round normal symbol” ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Fifth round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 718 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 718 (I): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. , The game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 718 (J): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game, the same blessing effect as in the 6th round is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 718 (K): At the timing when the jackpot game ends (during the termination process), the major winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

The above is an example of the effect when the game ball safely passes through the probability variation area corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 2", but the game ball corresponds to the probability variation area even if it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 2". If it does not pass through, the following production example will be obtained.

[Fifth round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 719 (L): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 719 (M): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the ball enters the second variable winning device 31. The game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the sixth round for some reason (not hitting right, jamming the ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 719 (N): In this case, a failure effect in which the panda character utters the line "sorry" is executed. In addition, the failure effect is continued in the 7th to 12th rounds of the big hit game.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 719 (O): At the timing when the big hit game in "12 round probability variation symbol 2" ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

Here, although the production example in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is not particularly shown, the battle production is executed and the victory production is executed in the same manner as in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2". Alternatively, an effect other than the battle effect may be executed. Even in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time in the 6th round, so when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, it rushes into the fireworks rush. In addition, in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", it is possible to obtain substantially 4 rounds of balls.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 720 is a continuous view showing an example of producing a fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode in which the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol" and is transferred after the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game. Fireworks rush is in a state of high probability time reduction. Here, as an example, an example of production by the vertical fluctuation mode in the fireworks rush will be taken up. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 720 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 720 (B): Then, due to the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 720 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol Variable display is often performed. In addition, if the result of winning is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach production is executed and it becomes a big hit.

In the fireworks rush, the marker M1 and the marker M2 may be displayed by displaying the pre-variation display area X1 and the changing display area X2 as in the normal mode. This point is the same in the following coastal modes.

[Major role production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 721 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big winning combination effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2".

[1 round]
In FIG. 721 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 2 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 2 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 721 (B): In the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the 6th round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball launch is the same as in the previous rounds. Is obtained. Further, in the sixth round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the second variable winning device 31 When the game ball enters the ball, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 721 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 721 (D): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Major role production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 722 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role playing effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to the “16 round probability variation symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 722 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 7 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 7 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "special bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character straddling a horse and performing a peace sign is displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 722 (B): In the case of winning in the "16 round probability variation symbol", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "16-round probability variation symbol", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the 16-round probability variation symbol is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is released. It passes through the probabilistic region by being guided by the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region.

In FIG. 722 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark appears next to the female character who jumps up. The displayed blessing effect is executed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 722 (D): After that, when the jackpot game progresses smoothly and the final 16 rounds are entered, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 16" is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed. In addition, an effect symbol (7 effect symbols) as a "remaining eye" is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 722 (E): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 723 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode. This coastal mode is a jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", or when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game which corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols. This is the mode that will be transitioned after the end of. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". Here, as an example, an example of production by the vertical fluctuation mode in the coastal mode will be taken up. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 723 (A): For example, after the jackpot game in the "12 round normal symbol" is completed, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. There is. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 723 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 723 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times without a winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Next, the control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126 of the effect control device 124 will be described.

[CPU initialization processing in the effect control device]
FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process in the effect control device 124.

The CPU initialization process in the effect control device 124 is a process for adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by clearing various information in the effect control device 124, and more specifically, when the effect control device 124 is started (more specifically). , When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the effect control device 124 is restarted for some reason), the effect control CPU 126 executes the operation. By executing the CPU initialization process, the realization of a stable effect in the pachinko machine 1 is guaranteed. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S300: The effect control CPU 126 releases the reset of the CPU. In order to guarantee the normal operation of the effect control device 124, the effect control CPU 126 resets the CPU after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124 until the output voltage rises normally to the operation guarantee level and the peripheral circuits are stabilized. During that time, the reset state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the program from operating in a state where the effect control device 124 is not stable. When the reset of the CPU is released, the execution of the control program in the effect control device 124 is started with this as an opportunity.

Step S310: The effect control CPU 126 executes the activation process. In the startup process, initial settings related to hardware, system operation settings, and the like are performed as initial settings required before various interrupt processes corresponding to the substance of the effect control are started. Specifically, for example, settings related to access to each register and I / O port of the effect control CPU 126 and each device connected to the effect control CPU 126 are made.

Step S320: The effect control CPU 126 executes the RAM initialization process. In the RAM initialization process, the RAM 130 (main memory) is initialized, various classes used in the execution process of the control program are initialized, the DRAM 191 is initialized, the command buffer is cleared, and the like.

Step S330: The effect control CPU 126 executes the task execution pre-processing. Here, the "task" refers to an individual process executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt. In the task execution pre-processing, preparations for executing the task are performed. For example, the effect control device 124 is provided with a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter, referred to as “status LEDs”) that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the effect control device 124 uses these LED lamps. The internal state is notified by a plurality of lighting patterns, and the initial state of the status LED is set in the task execution preprocessing. In addition, the frequency of the command input / output port required for receiving the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 is set, the RTC184 is set up, the interrupt is permitted, and the like. When the task execution pre-processing is completed, the status LED lights up in a manner indicating the completion of the initialization processing, various effect commands can be received, and various interruptions occur to perform tasks related to effect control (hereinafter, "" It shifts to the state where the effect control task ") can be woken up.

In the effect control device 124, there are various types such as timer interrupts that occur at preset time intervals and event interrupts that occur due to the occurrence of a predetermined event on the effect control device 124. Interruption can occur. In the following description, interrupts that occur periodically at regular intervals (for example, timer interrupts, event interrupts that occur at regular cycles, etc.) are referred to as "regular interrupts". A priority is set in advance for each interrupt, and when an interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 126 controls the interrupt according to the priority and executes the corresponding interrupt process.

Step S340: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, among the controls executed as the game progresses, other processes that are not executed in various tasks are performed. The contents of the effect control main process will be described later with reference to the following drawings.

As shown in FIG. 724, the effect control main process is incorporated in an infinite loop, and the effect control CPU 126 waits a predetermined execution interval after executing the effect control main process once, and then performs the next effect. The execution of the control main process is restarted. Therefore, unless the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is maintained and the effect control device 124 is restarted, the effect control CPU 126 continues to repeatedly execute the effect control main process. Further, in the above infinite loop, various interruptions are generated triggered by various factors, and the effect control CPU 126 executes processing according to each of the generated interruptions. In these processes, image display control on the liquid crystal display 42, audio output control on the speakers 54 to 58, drive control of the lamps 45 to 53 and the movable motor 57, etc. are performed and connected to the effect control device 124. By controlling each device, the content of the effect is constructed and the effect is embodied.

As described above, the infinite loop shown in FIG. 724 corresponds to the main loop in the effect control device 124, and the effect control main process is literally positioned as the main process executed in the effect control device 124. Therefore, in the following description, the infinite loop shown in FIG. 724 will be referred to as a "main loop for effect control".

By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, the NAND type SATA standard 64 Gbit ROM is adopted as the CGROM 190, but in the NAND type ROM, refreshing is executed with the start of power supply. The refresh is an operation for stably executing the reading of data from the NAND ROM, and is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM initialization process and independently of the effect control CPU 126. Become.

Therefore, the effect control CPU 126 manages the elapsed time from the start of the RAM initialization process by the elapsed time timer, and from the start of the RAM initialization process until the time expected to be required for refreshing the CGROM 190 elapses (elapsed time). Until the timer expires), various controls are performed so as not to generate access to the CGROM 190. The time required to refresh the CGROM 190 is assumed to be 2.8 seconds (in the case of 64 Gbits), but in this embodiment, 4.6 seconds with a margin in consideration of the possibility of specification changes and the like. Is secured.

[Production control main processing]
FIG. 725 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control main process.
The effect control main process is a process incorporated in the effect control main loop, and is called and executed at regular intervals by the effect control CPU 126. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S350: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the SATA preparing flag is “True”. Here, the "SATA preparing flag" means whether or not the refresh of the CGROM 190 and the transfer of all audio materials (sound data) from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 executed after the completion are completed, in other words, to the CGROM190. It is a flag indicating whether or not access is permitted, and is stored in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 130.

The SATA preparing flag "True" indicates that the refresh and transfer have been completed, that is, access to the CGROM 190 is permitted. When the power is turned on, the SATA preparing flag is set with a value "False" as an initial value indicating that refresh and transfer are not completed, that is, access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited.

As a result of the confirmation, if the SATA preparing flag is "False" (step S350: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S360. On the other hand, when the SATA preparing flag is "True" (step S350: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 proceeds to step S370 without executing step S360.

Step S360: The effect control CPU 126 executes sound-related processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 makes advance preparations necessary for outputting audio from various speakers. The specific contents of the sound-related processing will be described later using the following flowchart.

Step S370: The effect control CPU 126 executes the voltage control monitoring process. In the voltage control monitoring process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a monitoring process for canceling the interruption of the 5V signal supplied to the external driver in a fixed time. If a voltage is applied to the lamp or the movable body at the same time, the lamp or the movable body may generate excessive heat due to the inrush current, leading to malfunction or failure. Therefore, the timing of applying the voltage (timing of releasing the signal) is shifted to disperse the inrush current, and the lamp, the movable body, and the like are protected from heat generation.

Step S380: The effect control CPU 126 executes the watchdog clear process. In addition to being equipped with a watchdog timer IC188 connected to the effect control CPU 126 and a watchdog timer using the built-in function of the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a watchdog timer by a control program. There is. That is, in the effect control device 124, three types of watchdog timers are operating, and whether each watchdog timer normally generates a periodic interrupt due to a different monitoring time (executed when the periodic interrupt occurs). Whether or not the periodic interrupt processing to be performed is executed normally) is monitored. In the watchdog clear process, the effect control CPU 126 clears all watchdog timers and the like when the periodic interrupt process is normally executed.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 724) and executes the effect control main process again. The effect control main process is executed at substantially constant intervals when the effect control device 124 is in a normal state. For example, in the normal state, in the effect control main process, the frame interrupt that occurs every 33.3 ms (16.6 ms interval occurs twice) is triggered by the frame interrupt while returning from the interrupt process that is separately executed. It is called every), and the processing of each step goes through in the meantime. Therefore, when each step of the effect control main process completes without delay, the effect control CPU 126 performs the standby process in the remaining time until the next effect control main process is called, and waits for the start process (sleep) during that time. Transition to the state. With the exhaustion of the remaining time, the effect control CPU 126 ends the standby process, returns to the main loop, and calls the next effect control main process.

[Sound related processing]
FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of sound-related processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S362: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the refresh time of the CGROM 190 has elapsed. The effect control CPU 126 can determine that the refresh time has elapsed if the elapsed time timer has expired, and that the refresh time has not yet elapsed if the elapsed time timer has remaining time. As a result of the confirmation, when the refresh time of the CGROM 190 has elapsed (step S362: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S364. On the other hand, if the refresh time has not yet elapsed (step S362: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S364: The effect control CPU 126 executes the sound data transfer process and simultaneously executes the amplifier initialization process. In the sound data transfer process, the effect control CPU 126 transfers all the audio materials stored in the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 (transfer means). Further, in the amplifier initialization process, the effect control CPU 126 initializes the amplifier IC 193.

Step S366: The effect control CPU 126 updates the SATA preparing flag to “True”.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main process (FIG. 725) of the caller.

[Periodic interrupt processing in the production control device]
FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of various periodic interrupt processes (Vsync interrupt process, frame interrupt process, phase interrupt process) executed in the effect control device 124.

In the effect control device 124, periodic interrupt processing corresponding to various periodic interrupts generated in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 520 μs to 33.3 ms cycle) is executed at regular intervals in the main loop of the effect control. Will be done. Hereinafter, each periodic interrupt process will be described with reference to a procedure example.

FIG. 727 (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the Vsync interrupt process. The Vsync interrupt is an interrupt based on the input of an image signal (Vsync signal) periodically output from the VDP 152 at the timing of switching the effect image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It occurs 30 times per second (30 fps), that is, once at 33.3 ms intervals. The effect control CPU 126 executes the Vsync interrupt process when the Vsync interrupt occurs. By the Vsync interrupt processing, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is switched at regular intervals.

Step S1300: The effect control CPU 126 sets the Vsync interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The Vsync interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used for confirming whether or not Vsync interrupt is normally generated, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1302: The effect control CPU 126 executes the Vsync interrupt control process. In the Vsync interrupt control process, various processes required for drawing the effect image on the VDP 152 and displaying it on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 are executed. The specific contents of the Vsync interrupt control process will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 724).

In FIG. 727 (B): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a frame interrupt process. The frame interrupt is an interrupt that occurs 60 times per second (60 fps), that is, once at 16.6 ms intervals. The effect control CPU 126 executes the frame interrupt process when the frame interrupt occurs.

Step S1310: The effect control CPU 126 sets the frame interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The frame interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not frame interrupt has occurred normally, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1312: The effect control CPU 126 executes the frame interrupt control process. In the frame interrupt control process, various tasks executed due to the frame interrupt process are controlled.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 724).

In FIG. 727 (C): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a phase interrupt process. The phase interrupt is an interrupt for controlling the internal device of the effect control device 124, and occurs 1920 times per second (1920 fps), that is, once at intervals of 520 μs. The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interrupt process when the phase interrupt occurs.

Step S1320: The effect control CPU 126 sets the phase interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The phase interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not the phase interrupt has occurred normally, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1322: The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interrupt control process. In the phase interrupt control process, various tasks executed due to the phase interrupt are controlled.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 724).

In this way, in any timer interrupt process, first, a monitoring flag for each interrupt process is set, and then various tasks executed due to the interrupt are controlled.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the effect will be described.

[Production control processing]
As described with reference to FIG. 681, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit). By coordinating, the operation of each device (display on the liquid crystal screen, sound output from the speaker, light emission by the lamp, operation of the movable body, etc.) is controlled, and the effect reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

The effect control CPU 126 as the effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and sets various messages and control tables instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents. Further, the effect control CPU 126 as the effect reproduction processor analyzes the message and the control table set by the effect control processor, and gives more specific instructions to each device based on the contents of the message and the operation of each device (the operation of each device ( The pachinko machine 1 controls screen display by the liquid crystal display 42, audio output by the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, light emission by various lamps 45 to 52, board lamp 53, etc., displacement of various movable bodies, etc.). Realize directing reproduction. The substance of these functions is an individual task that is woken up by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, a task that becomes an operation subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as an effect control processor is referred to as an "effect control unit 210", and the effect control CPU 126 serves as an effect reproduction processor. For tasks that are the main actors of operation when functioning, "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", or "movable body control unit 226", as appropriate, depending on the device to be controlled. It will be referred to as "input control unit 228". In addition, these tasks (control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228) that function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit) may be collectively referred to as "each individual control unit". Further, the various lamps 45 to 52, the light sources built in each part of the board lamp 53 and the operation unit 60 are collectively referred to as "various lamps", and the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 are collectively referred to as "various speakers". May be called.

FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process.
The effect control process is called in the process of the frame interrupt control process (step S1312 in FIG. 727), and one of the frame interrupt control processes executed every 16.6 ms triggered by the occurrence of the frame interrupt. It is executed every other time, that is, every 33.3 ms (30 times per second) (effect control means). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S390: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the SATA preparing flag is “True”. As a result of the confirmation, when the SATA preparing flag is "True", that is, when the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 are completed (step S390: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S392. On the other hand, when the SATA preparing flag is "False", that is, when the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 has not been completed yet (step S390: No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S394.

Step S392: The effect control unit 210 executes the normal effect control process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the effect based on the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70. The specific contents of the normal effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S394: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect control process when the power is turned on. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the operation of each effect device in the section (access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited) until the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 are completed. The specific contents of the power-on effect control process will be described later with reference to the following flowchart.

[Production control process when the power is turned on]
FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process at power-on. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S395: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the execution of the effect control process at power-on this time is the first execution after the power is turned on. As a result of the confirmation, if it is the first execution (step S395: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S396. On the other hand, if it is not the first execution (step S395: No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S397.

Step S396: The effect control unit 210 executes the SATA preparing device control process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 sends an e-mail instructing the effect operation in the section until the SATA preparation flag becomes "True", that is, until the refresh and transfer of the CGROM 190 is completed (the section during SATA preparation). Send to the individual control unit. In response to this, each individual control unit controls the operation of each effect device based on the content of the received mail.

For example, the display control unit 220 instructs the VDP 152 to display an image corresponding to the section in which SATA is being prepared. Further, the lamp control unit 224 starts reproducing the data for alternating blinking of the frame lamps. As a result, an image showing the characters "Screen display is being restored" is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and all the frame lamps (glass frame top lamp 46, glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52) are displayed. It will blink alternately every second. However, since the audio material cannot be used during the SATA preparation, the audio control unit 222 does not control the speaker. Therefore, no sound is output from the various speakers, and the sound remains silent.

Step S397: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the production inspection start command has been received. Here, the "production inspection start command" is an effect command that can be transmitted only at the time of inspection, and is transmitted from the main control device 70 at the timing when the inspection is started in the pachinko machine 1. If the production inspection start command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130, the effect control unit 210 can determine that the production inspection start command has been received.

As a result of the confirmation, when the production inspection start command is received (step S397: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S398. On the other hand, if the production inspection start command has not been received (step S397: No), the effect control unit 210 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S398: The effect control unit 210 executes the inspection lamp control process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 instructs the lamp control unit 224 to stop the effect operation during SATA preparation, and in response to this, the lamp control unit 224 reproduces the data for alternating blinking of the frame lamps. To finish. As a result, all the frame lamps are turned off. By turning off various lamps during SATA preparation, it is possible to quickly shift to a state where inspection of other lamp data can be performed without waiting for SATA preparation to be completed, and it is possible to improve inspection efficiency. Become.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 728) of the caller.

[Processes and state changes executed when the power is turned on]
FIG. 730 is a timing chart showing a process executed by the effect control device 124 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and a change in the state caused by the effect control device 124 and the main control device 70. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 730 (A): When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124), the CPU initialization process (FIG. 724) is started, and the start-up process is first executed. It takes about 1.0 second from turning on the power to completing the startup process.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 730 (A): When the startup process is completed, the RAM initialization process is subsequently executed. It takes approximately 1.4 seconds from the start of the RAM initialization process to the transition to a state in which the effect control task can be woken up, that is, to the completion of the CPU initialization process.
In FIG. 730 (B): The CGROM 190 is refreshed in parallel with the RAM initialization process. The time required for refreshing is 4.6 seconds with a margin.

In FIG. 730 (D): At this point, the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 cannot be received.
In FIG. 730 (E): Further, the effect control task is in a state of being prepared without being awakened yet.
(F), (G) in FIG. 730: Then, "False" as an initial value is set in the SATA preparing flag, and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is prohibited.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 730 (A): All CPU initialization processing is completed.
In FIG. 730 (B): At this time, the refresh of the CGROM 190 is still being executed (not yet completed).
In FIG. 730 (D): With the completion of the CPU initialization process, it becomes possible to receive the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70.
In FIG. 730 (E): Further, the effect control task is woken up and is in the running state.
(F), (G) in FIG. 730: “False” as an initial value is still set in the SATA preparing flag, and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is prohibited.

Since the effect control is started after the effect control task wakes up (after time t2), in the following description, the state indicated by the SATA preparing flag value "False" will be described in the effect control task. Before waking up is treated as "initial state", and after waking up is treated as "preparing".

[Time t4]
In FIG. 730 (B): The time required for refreshing the CGROM 190 has elapsed. With this, it is considered that the refresh of the CGROM 190 is completed.
In FIG. 730 (C): With the completion of the refresh of the CGROM 190, the sound-related processing (FIG. 726) is started, and the transfer of the sound data from the CGROM 190 and the initialization of the amplifier are executed in parallel. It takes approximately 3.2 seconds to complete the transfer of sound data. In addition, it takes about 1.2 seconds to complete the initialization of the amplifier.

[Time t5]
In FIG. 730 (C): The initialization of the amplifier is completed, but the sound data transfer is still executed (not yet completed).
(F), (G) in FIG. 730: Therefore, the SATA preparing flag is maintained as "False", and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is still prohibited.

It is technically possible to read the drawing material from the CGROM 190 and perform drawing during the transfer of sound data. However, if the transfer process and the drawing process are executed in parallel, each process may be delayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited during the transfer of sound data.

[Time t6]
In FIG. 730 (C): All sound-related processing is completed.
(F), (G) in FIG. 730: With the completion of the sound-related processing, the SATA preparing flag is updated to "True", and access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is permitted.

As described above, the effect control device 124 can receive the effect command at time t2 (2.4 seconds after the power is turned on) with the completion of the CPU initialization process. Further, with the completion of the sound-related processing, access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is permitted at time t6 (8.8 seconds after the power is turned on).

By the way, also in the main control device 70, the CPU initialization process and the like are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (main control device 70), but the required time is shorter than that in the case of the effect control device 124. The effect command can be transmitted to the effect control device 124 at an early stage. However, as described above, in the effect control device 124, access to the CGROM 190 by the effect control task is prohibited until time t6 (8.8 seconds after the power is turned on), so that the effect control device 70 is prohibited from accessing the CGROM 190. The effect cannot be executed based on the effect command. Further, since communication from the effect control device 124 to the main control device 70 is not permitted, the main control device 70 cannot know the progress of the process in the effect control device 124.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transmission of the effect command from the main control device 70 is started after waiting for a predetermined time to elapse. Specifically, at the time of mass production, as shown in FIG. 730 (I), the transmission of the effect command is started after 9.0 seconds have elapsed from the power-on. Further, at the time of inspection, as shown in FIG. 730 (H), in order to enable the inspection of various lamps to be started at an early stage without considering the display on the liquid crystal display 42 (access to CGROM 190). In addition, the transmission of the effect command is started 2.5 seconds after the power is turned on.

Note that FIG. 730 shows the processing executed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the change in the state together with the time correspondence between the effect control device 124 and the main control device 70. When only the control device 124 is restarted, the process at the time of turning on the power is executed only in the effect control device 124, and the above-mentioned sequence occurs. At this time, since the main control device 70 is operating normally and there is no way to know that the effect control device 124 has been restarted, the effect command continues to be transmitted as a normal operation. However, in the effect control device, unless the SATA preparing flag is updated to the value "True" indicating "completion", even if the effect command from the main control device 70 is received, these are ignored and the power is turned on. The process will be executed. The change in the process executed by the effect control device 124 when the power is turned on will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

[Processes and state changes executed when the power is turned on in the comparative example]
FIG. 731 is a timing chart showing a process executed by the effect control device 124 ′ when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 ′ and a change in the state caused by the effect control device 124 ′ and the main control device 70 ′ in the comparative example. Is. In the comparative example, it is assumed that the NOR type ROM is adopted in the CGROM190'and the amplifier IC193 is not equipped.

Comparing FIG. 731 (Comparative Example) with FIG. 730 (Embodiment), in the Comparative Example, since the CGROM 190'is a NOR type ROM, refreshing is not executed and sound data is transferred to the DRAM 191'in advance. Since it is not necessary to keep it, it is not necessary to manage the SATA preparing flag. Further, since the amplifier IC 193 is not provided, it is not necessary to initialize the amplifier separately from the CPU initialization process.

Therefore, in the effect control device 124', as shown in FIG. 731 (G'), access to the CGROM 190' by the effect control task is permitted as the CPU initialization process is completed. In response to this, in the main control device 70', 2.5 seconds have passed since the power was turned on, both during inspection and during mass production, as shown in FIGS. 731 (H') and (I'). Later, the transmission of the production command is started.

[Types and modes of error notification]
By the way, as described above, when an error directly related to the game occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or an operation related to maintenance is executed, the error notification is performed using the error notification lamp 45 or other effect device. .. In the following, the types and modes of error notification that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described separately for those related to fraud and those related to payout.

732 and 734 are diagrams showing a configuration example of error notification regarding fraud. In each figure, the types of errors related to fraud, the mode of notification when the error occurs, the error occurrence condition and the release condition are summarized in order from the one with the highest error priority. The "frame lamp" in each figure refers to the full-color LEDs of the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52. Further, "voice notification" refers to notification by voice output from various speakers, and "liquid crystal notification" refers to notification by screen display of the liquid crystal display 42. Hereinafter, the description will be given in order of priority.

"Preparing for SATA" is designated as the priority "1".
"Preparing for SATA" is an error that occurs when the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is started and is canceled after the preparation for SATA is completed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 is turned off, the frame lamp blinks in white, and all the board lamps 53 are turned off. In addition, no voice notification is given, and the characters "Screen display is being restored" are displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

"Change setting" is specified in the priority order "2".
"Setting change" is an error that occurs when the setting change operation is performed and is canceled when the setting change operation is completed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a voice saying "Settings are being changed" along with a weak warning sound, and the characters "Settings are being changed" are displayed on the LCD screen.

A "main board abnormality error" is specified in the priority order "3".
The "main board abnormality error" is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the RWM (RAM) or an abnormality in the set value is detected, and is canceled when the setting is changed and the RWM or the set value returns to normal. In other words, it is necessary to change the setting to clear the error. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a voice saying "Main board error error" along with a weak warning sound, and the characters "Main board error error / Please call a staff member" are displayed on the LCD screen.

A "backup error error" is specified in the priority order "4".
The "backup error error" is an error that occurs when a backup abnormality is detected and is canceled when the setting is changed and the RWM or the set value is restored to normal. In other words, it is necessary to change the setting to clear the error. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a sound saying "Backup error error" along with a weak warning sound, and the characters "Backup error error / Please call a staff member" are displayed on the LCD screen.

"RAM clear" is designated as the priority "5".
"RAM clear" is an error that occurs when the RAM is cleared and is cleared after 31 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a voice saying "Memory has been cleared". Then, the default screen (for example, the standby screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the error-specific display is not performed.

"Setting confirmation" is specified in the priority order "6".
"Setting confirmation" is an error that occurs when the setting confirmation operation is performed and is canceled when the setting confirmation operation is completed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed" along with a weak warning sound, and the characters "Settings are being confirmed" are displayed on the LCD screen.

An "attachment ID authentication error" is specified in the priority order "7".
The "attachment ID authentication error" is an error that occurs when an inconsistency occurs in the attachment ID authentication and is canceled when the power supply is cut off (continues until the next power failure). Here, the "attachment ID" is a unique identification ID assigned to a detachable part (attachment) that is attached and used from the outside after assembling the pachinko machine 1, and is an ID of the actually attached attachment. If does not match the expected attachment ID, an "attachment ID authentication error" occurs. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, no voice notification is given, and the characters "attachment ID error" are displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

An "illegal winning error" is specified in the priority order "8".
An "illegal winning error" occurs when 5 or more large prizes are detected in addition to the special electric hit operation, or 5 or more general electric prizes are detected in addition to the normal electric hit operation, and 60 seconds have passed. This is an error to be cleared. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Unauthorized winning was detected", and the characters "Unauthorized winning was detected" are displayed on the LCD screen.

In the priority order "9", "winning frequency abnormal error" is designated.
The "winning frequency abnormal error" occurs when a predetermined number or more are detected in 60 seconds at the switch corresponding to any of the starting port, the normal winning port, and the normal drawing operating port (for example, the starting gate), and occurs for 60 seconds. This is an error that is cleared when When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Abnormal winning frequency has been detected", and the LCD screen has the characters "Abnormal winning frequency detected / Error N / Please call a staff member". (“N” is the number associated with the switch that detected the abnormality) is displayed.

In the priority order "10", "large winning opening excess winning error" is designated.
"Large winning opening excess winning error" is the specified number of winnings + n or more winnings detected m times in one big role, or n or more winnings in one small hit between big hits. It is an error that occurs when it is detected twice (m and n are arbitrary numerical values) and is canceled after 60 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Excessive prizes have been detected", and the characters "Excessive prizes have been detected" are displayed on the LCD screen.

A "radio wave error" is designated as the priority "11".
The "radio wave error" is an error that occurs when a radio wave or a disconnection of the radio wave sensor is detected, and is cleared when 60 seconds have passed since the detection was stopped. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Radio waves have been detected", and the LCD screen has the characters "Radio waves detected / Error N / Please call a staff member"("N"). Is the number associated with the detected location) is displayed.

A "magnetic error" is designated as the priority "12".
A "magnetic error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic or magnetic sensor disconnection is detected and is canceled when the power supply is cut off (continues until the next power supply disconnection). When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Magnet detected", and the LCD screen says "Magnet detected / Error N / Please call a staff member"("N"). Is the number associated with the detection location) is displayed.

In the priority order "13", "probability variation area abnormal passage error" is specified.
"Probability change area abnormal passage error" occurs when the passage of the game ball to the probability change area is detected by the hit symbol that the probability change area solenoid does not open for a long time, and is canceled when the power supply is cut off (next time). It is an error (continues until the power is turned off). When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, no voice notification is given, and the characters "Detected abnormal passage in the probabilistic area / Please call a staff member" are displayed on the LCD screen.

In the priority order "14", "large winning opening entry / exit ball mismatch error" is designated.
"Large winning opening entry / exit ball mismatch error" is the number of winning balls and the number of ejected balls (the number of passing balls of the probabilistic region switch or the specific area switch and the number of passing balls of the ejection port switch). This is an error that occurs when the total) does not match and is cleared after 60 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Inconsistency in entry / exit ball has been detected", and the characters "A mismatch in entry / exit ball has been detected in the big prize opening" are displayed on the LCD screen.

In the priority order "15", "large winning opening abnormal discharge error" is designated.
In the "large winning opening abnormal discharge error", the passage of the game ball was detected in the probable change area or the specific area or the discharge port even though the game ball was not won in the large winning opening having the probability variation area or the specific area. This is an error that occurs in some cases and is cleared after 60 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Abnormal discharge has been detected", and the LCD screen displays the characters "Abnormal discharge has been detected at the big prize opening".

A "vibration error" is designated as the priority "16".
The "vibration error" is an error that occurs when a vibration error is detected and is cleared after 60 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Vibration detected", and the characters "Vibration detected" are displayed on the LCD screen.

In the priority order "17", "starting port abnormal winning error" is designated.
The "starting port abnormality winning error" is an error that occurs when a starting port abnormality (five or more consecutive winnings to the same starting port) is detected and is canceled after 60 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a voice saying "Abnormal start opening prize has been detected", and the LCD screen displays the characters "Abnormal start opening prize has been detected".

A "door release error" is specified in the priority order "18".
The "door release error" is an error that occurs when the integrated door unit 4 is opened and is released when the integrated door unit 4 is closed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "the door is open", and the LCD screen displays the characters "the door is open". After the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the notification is continued for about 15 seconds.

A "switch error" is specified in the priority order "19".
The "switch error" is an error that occurs when a board proximity switch error or an outswitch error is detected, and is canceled when the board proximity switch error or the outswitch error is cleared. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Switch error", and the LCD screen displays the characters "Switch error / Please call a staff member".

A "base error error" is specified in the priority order "20".
The "base abnormality error" means that the number of prize balls in each state of the game is a predetermined number (m in the normal state, n in the probabilistic state, p in the time saving state, q in the latent state (m, n, p,). q is an error that occurs when an arbitrary numerical value)) is exceeded and is canceled after 60 seconds have passed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "A base abnormality has been detected", and the characters "A base abnormality has been detected" are displayed on the LCD screen.

A "movable body error" is specified in the priority order "21".
The "movable body error" is an error that occurs when an error is detected in the movable body connected to the main control device 70, and is canceled when the error is not detected. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Movable body error", and the LCD screen says "Movable body error / error N / Please call a staff member"("N" is the detection location. The number associated with) is displayed.

An "attachment ID non-connection error" is specified in the priority order "22".
The "attachment ID non-connection error" is an error that occurs when a non-connection error of the upper attachment or the input device attachment is detected, and is canceled (continues until the next power off) when the power supply is cut off. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue and the frame lamp lights up in red, but the board lamp 53 does not notify. In addition, no voice notification is given, and the characters "attachment opening error" are displayed on the LCD screen.

In the priority order "23", "illegal game warning / strong" is designated.
"Illegal game warning / strong" occurs when a total of n prizes are awarded to the right start port while the left-handed state is specified, and the voice notification is repeated three times or is canceled when the right-handed state is specified. It is an error. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in red, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, various speakers output a warning sound and a voice saying "Please return to left-handed", and the LCD screen displays the characters "Please return to left-handed".

In the priority order "24", "illegal game warning / weak" is designated.
"Illegal game warning / weak" occurs when a total of n prizes are awarded to the right start port while the left-handed state is specified, and the voice notification is repeated three times or is canceled when the right-handed state is specified. It is an error. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45, the frame lamp, and the board lamp 53 do not notify the error, and various speakers output a voice saying "Please return to left-handed". In addition, the words "Please return to left-handed" are displayed on the LCD screen.

A "full tank error" is designated as the priority "25".
The "full tank error" is an error that occurs when the full tank switch 161 is turned on and is cleared when the full tank switch 161 is turned off. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, but the frame lamp and the board lamp 53 do not notify the error. In addition, the voice "Please pull out the ball" is output from various speakers, and the characters "Please pull out the ball" are displayed on the LCD screen.

In the priority order "26", "probability change area non-passing error" is specified.
The "probability change area non-passage error" occurs when the passage of the game ball to the probability change area is not detected in the hit symbol when the probability change area solenoid is opened for a long time, and is accompanied by the next operation of the condition device or the interruption of the power supply. It is an error that is canceled (continues until the next condition device is activated or the power is turned off). When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue and the frame lamp lights up in green, but the board lamp 53 does not notify. In addition, neither voice notification nor liquid crystal notification is performed.

In the priority order "27", "recovery from power failure" is designated.
"Recovery from power failure" is an error that occurs at the time of recovery from power failure, that is, when the power supply is restored, and is canceled when the initial operation of the movable body for production is completed. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, the frame lamp lights up in blue, and all the board lamps 53 go out. In addition, no voice notification is given. Then, the default screen (for example, the standby screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the error-specific display is not performed.

In the priority order "28", "effect movable body motor error" is designated.
The "effect movable body motor error" is an error that occurs when an error is detected in various movable bodies for production, and is canceled (continues until the next power off) when the power supply is cut off. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in a different manner depending on the location where the error is detected. Specifically, when an error is detected in the movable body provided on the board surface (game board unit 8), it lights up in blue and the movable body provided in the frame (outer frame unit 2 or integrated door unit 4). If an error is detected in, it lights up in green, and if an error is detected in both, it lights up in yellow. In addition, the frame lamp and the board lamp 53 do not give notification, and neither voice notification nor liquid crystal notification is made.

As described above, in the present embodiment, 28 types of errors are provided regarding fraud, and when an error occurs, an error notification is made by operating the effect device in a manner corresponding to the error. In addition, among the errors related to fraud, the notification of "SATA in preparation" having the highest priority is executed in preference to other errors. Then, in the notification of "Preparing SATA", the frame lamp blinks in white, but this mode is not executed by other errors. Further, among the error notifications related to fraud, the error notification lamp 45 does not light up in the notification of "Preparing for SATA", but in most of the other errors, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue.

The above-mentioned notification configuration is given as an example only, and is not limited to this. For example, the sound output from various speakers and the content displayed on the liquid crystal screen may be appropriately changed depending on the situation. It is also possible to execute a plurality of error notifications in a coordinated manner. For example, the error notification of "RAM clear" may be executed at the end of the error notification of "setting change" (the end of the setting change).

FIG. 735 is a diagram showing a configuration example of error notification regarding payout. The way of reading the figure is the same as that of FIGS. 732 to 734. Hereinafter, the description will be given in order of priority.

A "ball jam error" is specified in the priority order "1".
"Ball clogging error" occurs when the payout detection switch is turned on for 50 ms continuously (detection signal is output continuously), and is released when it is turned off for 50 ms continuously (detection signal is not output continuously). It is an error to be done. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 lights up in red, but the frame lamp and the board lamp 53 do not notify, and neither voice notification nor liquid crystal notification is performed.

A "payout count switch error" is specified in the priority order "2".
The "payout count switch error" occurs when the payout count switch error signal is turned on (continuously detected) for 300 ms continuously, and is canceled when it is turned off continuously (continuously undetected) for 300 ms. Error. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 blinks in red at high speed (for example, at a cycle of 100 ms), but the frame lamp and the board lamp 53 do not notify, and neither voice notification nor liquid crystal notification is performed.

A "payout error" is specified in the priority order "3".
"Payout error" occurs when the number of payouts is insufficient after the payout operation, or when a ball jam error or a payout detection switch error occurs during the payout operation, and the payout detection switch is turned off after 20 seconds have passed. This is an error that is cleared when one or more balls are detected at the time of re-payment in the state. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 blinks in red at a low speed (for example, at a cycle of 500 ms), but the frame lamp and the board lamp 53 do not notify, and neither voice notification nor liquid crystal notification is performed.

An "excessive prize ball error" is designated as the priority "4".
The "excess prize ball error" is an error that occurs when the excess prize ball count (the number of on-edges of the payout detection switch when there is no payout) reaches 10, and is canceled when the initial start command is received or when the RAM is cleared. .. When this error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 blinks alternately in red and green at a low speed (for example, in a cycle of 500 ms), but the frame lamp and the board lamp 53 do not notify, and neither voice notification nor liquid crystal notification is performed. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, four types of errors are provided for payout, and when an error occurs, the error notification lamp 45 is operated in a manner corresponding to the error, while the error notification is performed. None of the notification by the frame lamp or the board lamp 53, the voice notification, and the liquid crystal notification is executed. Further, in the error notification related to the payout, the error notification lamp 45 lights up or blinks in red regardless of any error.

Of the error related to payout (FIG. 735) and the error related to fraud (FIGS. 732 to 734), the error related to payout is preferentially processed. Therefore, when both errors occur at the same time, the error notification related to the payout is executed in preference to the error related to fraud.

[Production control process executed when the power is turned on]
FIG. 736 is a timing chart showing details of changes in processing executed by the effect control device 124 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It should be noted that each time shown in FIG. 736 is not related to each time shown in FIGS. 730 and 731. In addition, the relative ratio of the band (line) lengths between the illustrated times does not match the relative ratio of the actual time lengths. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

[Time t0]
In FIG. 736 (A): Immediately after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124, the SATA preparing flag is set to "False" as an initial value, and the state indicated by the flag is the "initial state". In this state, the production control task has not yet been woken up.
In FIG. 736 (B): Further, in this state, the effect command from the main control device 70 cannot be received.

In FIG. 736 (C): Since the task has not been woken up, the mail related to the display control cannot be received. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 42 is not controlled, and the liquid crystal screen is in a darkened state.
In FIG. 736 (D): Since the task has not been woken up, the mail related to voice control cannot be received. Therefore, various speakers are not controlled, and no sound is output from the various speakers, resulting in a silent state.
In FIG. 736 (E): Since the task has not been woken up, the mail related to the lamp control cannot be received. Therefore, the various lamps are not controlled, and all the various lamps are turned off.

[Time t1]
In FIG. 736 (A): The effect control task is woken up, and the state indicated by the SATA preparing flag shifts to “preparing”. In the following description, the section in which the SATA preparing flag indicates "preparing" will be referred to as "SATA preparing (section)".

In FIG. 736 (B): At this time, it is possible to receive an effect command from the main control device 70, but during SATA preparation, only the production inspection start command is processed, and other effect commands are processed even if they are received. It is discarded without being done.

In FIG. 736 (C): By waking up the task, it is possible to receive an e-mail related to display control, but all e-mails are discarded except for the first e-mail instructing the operation during SATA preparation. As a result, an image in which the characters "screen display is being restored" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen is displayed in the section where SATA is being prepared.

In FIG. 736 (D): By waking up the task, it is possible to receive an e-mail related to voice control, but since the voice material cannot be read and the voice cannot be output from the speaker during SATA preparation, all of them. The email is discarded. As a result, in the section during SATA preparation, a silent state in which no sound is output from various speakers is maintained.

In FIG. 736 (E): By waking up the task, it is possible to receive an e-mail related to lamp control, but except for the first e-mail instructing the operation during SATA preparation, only the e-mail based on the production inspection start command is executed. , Other emails will be discarded. As a result, the data for alternating blinking of the frame lamps is reproduced in the section where SATA is being prepared, and all the frame lamps (glass frame top lamp 46, glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52) blink in white.

When the production inspection start command is received, the mail sent based on this command is executed, and all the frame lamps are turned off. After that, when an e-mail is received from the inspection PC connected to the pachinko machine 1, the debugging environment, or the like, the e-mail is executed and the corresponding lamp data is reproduced. In this way, it is possible to quickly execute the inspection of other lamp data without waiting until the SATA preparation is completed.

[Time t2]
In FIG. 736 (A): The SATA preparing flag is updated to "True", and the state indicated by the flag shifts to "Complete".

In FIG. 736 (B): With this as an opportunity, all the effect commands from the main control device 70 are received and processed.

In FIG. 736 (C): In addition, an email related to display control is executed. As a result, immediately after the SATA preparation is completed, an image showing the characters "Returning to screen display / Please continue the game" is displayed on the LCD screen.

In FIG. 736 (D): Also, an email related to voice control is executed. As a result, immediately after the completion of SATA preparation, a silent state in which no sound is output from various speakers according to the content of the received mail is maintained.

In FIG. 736 (E): In addition, all mails related to lamp control will be executed. As a result, immediately after the SATA preparation is completed, all the various lamps are turned off according to the contents of the received mail.

[Time t3]
In FIG. 736 (B): It is assumed that the RAM clear designation command or the power return designation command transmitted from the main control device 70 is received at this timing.

In FIG. 736 (C): When the RAM clear designation command or the power return designation command is received, the mail regarding the display control transmitted in response to the command is executed. As a result, the standby screen as the default screen is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

In FIG. 736 (D): When the RAM clear designation command or the power return designation command is received, the voice control mail transmitted in response to the command is executed. As a result, when the RAM clear designation command is received, the voice "Memory cleared" for RAM clear is output from various speakers. On the other hand, no audio is output when the power recovery designation command is received (during power recovery).

In FIG. 736 (E): When the RAM clear designation command or the power return designation command is received, the mail regarding the lamp control transmitted in response to the command is executed. As a result, when the RAM clear designation command is received, the data for lighting the RAM clear is reproduced, the error notification lamp 45 is lit in blue, the frame lamp is lit in red, and all the board lamps 53 are kept off. On the other hand, when the power recovery designation command is received (during power recovery), the data for power recovery lighting is reproduced, the error notification lamp 45 and the frame lamp are lit in blue, and all the board lamps 53 remain off. Be maintained.

[Time t4]
In FIG. 736 (B): It is assumed that a plurality of effect commands such as a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 70 are received at this timing.

In FIG. 736 (C): When the fluctuation start command is received, the mail related to the display control transmitted in response to the command is executed. As a result, the model-specific display control data corresponding to the mail is reproduced, and for example, an image at the start of fluctuation is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

In FIG. 736 (D): When the fluctuation start command is received, the voice control mail transmitted in response to the command is executed. As a result, the model-specific voice control data corresponding to the mail is reproduced, and the voice for the start of fluctuation is output from various speakers, for example.

In FIG. 736 (E): When the fluctuation start command is received, the email regarding the lamp control transmitted in response to the command is executed. As a result, the model-specific lamp control data corresponding to the mail is reproduced, and the various lamps are turned on, for example, in a mode for starting fluctuation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the section during SATA preparation, the operation peculiar to the section during SATA preparation is executed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify that the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is in the stage of preparation for activation, and to make the staff and players of the game hall recognize this.

Further, during the SATA preparation, even if the effect command is transmitted from the main control device 70, the effect control device 124 discards all the effect commands other than the production inspection start command without being processed. That is, even if an effect command indicating an error related to fraud is transmitted during SATA preparation, the effect command is not processed at all, and effect control (operation control of the effect device) according to the content of the effect command is not performed. As a result, the notification that SATA is being prepared using the effect device can be executed with the highest priority, and even if another error related to fraud occurs during SATA preparation, the error is not notified. , It is possible to reliably notify that it is in the stage of preparation for activation.

[Data flow in drawing process]
FIG. 737 is a diagram conceptually showing the flow of data in the drawing process while comparing the data flow during SATA preparation and the normal time.

FIG. 737 (A): Shows the flow of data in the drawing process during SATA preparation. Specifically, the drawing process during SATA preparation is performed from the main control device 70 after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124 and the SATA preparation flag is updated to "True" indicating "completion". It is a drawing process that can be performed until the production command is received.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since access to the CGROM 190 is prohibited during the SATA preparation, the drawing material (specifically, the drawing material to be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 during the SATA preparation section). , A drawing material composed of the characters "returning to screen display") is stored in advance in the control ROM 180. Then, in the drawing process during SATA preparation, as shown in FIG. 737 (A), the drawing material is first transferred from the control ROM 180 to the DRAM 191 and the image is drawn on the VRAM 156 using the drawing material transferred to the DRAM 191. Then, the image drawn on the VRAM 156 is finally displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

FIG. 737 (B): Shows the flow of data in the normal drawing process. The normal drawing process is a drawing process that is executed except during SATA preparation. In the normal drawing process, the drawing material is first transferred from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 and an image is drawn on the VRAM 156 using the drawing material transferred to the DRAM 191. The image drawn on the VRAM 156 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Is displayed in.

The specific mode of data transfer in the normal drawing process will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing. Further, the drawing process can be executed by the common process shown in FIGS. 746 to 748, which will be described later, regardless of whether SATA is being prepared or during normal operation.

[Operation of production device when power is turned on]
738 and 739 are continuous views showing an operation example of the effect device with the passage of time after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 738 (A): In the initial state, the effect control task has not yet been woken up, so that the effect device cannot be controlled. Therefore, the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is dimmed, all the lamps are turned off, and no sound is output from the various speakers.

In FIG. 738 (B): In the section during SATA preparation, an operation for notifying that the effect control device 124 (pachinko machine 1) is in the stage of preparation for activation is instructed. In response to this instruction, an image showing the characters "Screen display is being restored" is displayed on the LCD screen, and all frame lamps (glass frame top lamp 46, glass frame decorative lamp 48, 50, 52) are displayed. ) Flashes white every second. At this time, the error notification lamp 45 is turned off, and no sound is output from the various speakers. The image displayed on the liquid crystal screen during the SATA preparation is drawn using the drawing material transferred from the control ROM 180.

In FIG. 738 (C): Immediately after the completion of SATA preparation, an operation for notifying that the effect control device 124 (pachinko machine 1) is returning to the normal state is instructed. In response to this instruction, an image with the characters "Returning to screen display / Please continue playing" is displayed on the LCD screen, but no sound is still output from the various speakers. .. In addition, all the frame lamps that were blinking in white until just before are turned off. Then, the error notification lamp 45 continues to be in the extinguished state. The image displayed on the liquid crystal screen after the completion of SATA preparation is drawn using the drawing material transferred from the CGROM 190.

After that, when the effect command is received, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect device according to the normal flow, and the effect based on the effect command from the main control device 70 is executed. ..

In FIG. 739 (D): Here, for example, when a RAM clear designation command is received, an operation for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is instructed. In response to this instruction, a standby screen is displayed on the LCD screen, and various speakers output a voice saying "Memory has been cleared" for clearing RAM. Further, the error notification lamp 45 is lit in blue, and all the frame lamps that have been turned off until just before are lit in red. The RAM clear notification ends after 31 seconds have elapsed, and the error notification lamp 45 is turned off accordingly, and the other effect devices execute, for example, an operation for demo effect. After that, the error notification lamp 45 will continue to be turned off unless an error related to fraud or payout occurs.

In FIG. 739 (E): After that, for example, when two game balls enter the middle start winning opening 26 in succession, various effect commands associated with the entry and the start of fluctuation are received. Then, the operation corresponding to these effect commands is instructed. In response to these instructions, three effect symbol rows are scrolled and displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed, and one of the two markers M1. Is displayed in the changing display area X2, and the other is displayed in the pre-changing display area X1. In addition, various speakers output voices for the start of fluctuations, and all frame lamps are lit in the manner for starting fluctuations.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing a normal effect will be described. The variable display effect, reach effect, advance notice effect, memory display effect, major role effect, etc. described in accordance with the above-mentioned production example are all controlled through the normal effect control process.

[Normal production control processing]
FIG. 740 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the normal effect control process.

The normal effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display control process (step S404), input control process (step S405), and so on. The configuration includes subroutines for lamp control processing (step S406), voice control processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the normal effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The effect commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start opening winning sound. Control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, confirmation command, status specification command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end production command, count cut counter value command, There are fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, probability change area passage command, prize ball content command, RAM clear specification command, power return specification command, setting-related end specification command, production inspection start command, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the memory display effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and during the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the content of the production. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display control process, the effect control unit 210 tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice effect). Send an e-mail instructing the pattern number, the variation effect pattern number, the change notice effect number, the background pattern number, the pending deletion, etc. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific instruction regarding drawing to the VDP 152 based on the content of the received mail, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

The above-mentioned drawing-related processing by the display control unit 220 is separately called in the process of Vsync interrupt processing (step S1302 in FIG. 727) and executed every 33.3 ms (30 times per second). The content of the specific processing (Vsync interrupt control processing) related to drawing will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes the operation requesting the player with the progress of the effect, and the player sends the operation member such as the operation unit 60 to the input control unit 228. Instructs detection of whether or not the operation is performed in the specified mode. More specifically, the effect control unit 210 sets any of the input control tables defined in advance in the control ROM 180. In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the set input control table, and based on this, sets a period during which operations can be accepted for any of the operating members. In addition, the effect control unit 210 detects whether or not an operation (operation requested from the player) that matches the designated mode is performed, outputs the detection result, and returns it to the effect control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp control process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends an e-mail instructing the effect content to the lamp control unit 224. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the received mail, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and outputs various lamps 45 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the operation unit. A light source or the like built in each part of 60 is driven (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, brightness gradation change, etc.).

Step S408: In the voice control process, first, the effect control unit 210 sends an e-mail instructing the effect content to the voice control unit 222. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the received mail, and sounds (sound effects) according to the effect contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. , BGM, etc.) are output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In another process, for example, the effect control unit 210 first sends an e-mail instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the content of the effect. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 gives an instruction of specific control contents to the SMC 199 based on the contents of the received mail. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of various movable bodies based on an instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the various movable bodies. As a result, for example, the movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

In the above example, the effect control unit 210 outputs a message instructing the effect content to each individual control unit, but the content of the message is output together with the output of the message or instead of the output of the message. In some cases, a control table in which the details of the effect operation associated with is defined is started. When the control table is activated, each individual control unit analyzes the contents of the control table and gives specific instructions to each device based on the contents.

Through the above-mentioned normal time effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content and the operation of each device that reproduces the effect in the pachinko machine 1. Then, while the effect playback instruction (mail transmission and control table setting) by the effect control unit 210 is executed in the process of the effect control process, the process related to drawing performed by the display control unit 220 in response to the instruction (the effect). The control of the liquid crystal display 42) is separately executed with the Vsync interrupt as an opportunity. Further, the control of each effect device by the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, and the movable body control unit 226 is performed in synchronization with the drawing-related processing by the display control unit 220. With such control, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the effect reproduction by each device.

[Functional configuration related to display control processing]
FIG. 741 is a block diagram showing a main functional configuration related to the display control process (step S404 in FIG. 740).

FIG. 741 (A): Shows the main functional configurations related to the display control process in the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the NAND type CGROM 190 is adopted, and the DDR3 standard DRAM 191 is mounted. The reason for adopting NAND ROM is that it is relatively inexpensive, has a high degree of integration (small circuit scale), and other market trends.

In the present embodiment, when the effect command from the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is received, the effect control unit 210 displays a message instructing the execution of the effect according to the content of the received effect command. Set for. In response to this, (1) the display control unit 220 analyzes the message and constructs a drawing command that gives a specific instruction regarding drawing to the VDP 152 (command construction process). When the constructed drawing command is transferred to the VDP 152, first, (2) the preload circuit 154 transfers the page containing the necessary drawing material from the NAND CGROM 190 to a predetermined area of the DRAM 191 and temporarily saves (preloads) it. (Preload processing, drawing means). Next, (3) the drawing circuit 155 acquires the drawing material from the predetermined area of the DRAM 191 and draws it on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) it using the decoder 157, and expands the effect image into the frame buffer in frame units. (Transfer / drawing process, drawing means). Then, (4) the display circuit 153 drives each pixel of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the display frame buffer (display processing). As a result, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the display control is executed in the four steps (1) to (4) in the figure.

In FIG. 741 (B): A main functional configuration related to display control processing is shown in a comparative example. In the comparative example, the CGROM 190'is composed of a NOR type ROM. Since the drawing material can be directly randomly read in the NOR type ROM, unlike the case of the embodiment, the DRAM 191 for preloading the page read data is not mounted.

In the comparative example, when the effect command from the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is received, the effect control unit 210 sends a message to the display control unit 220 instructing the execution of the effect according to the content of the received effect command. Set against. In response to this, (1) the display control unit 220 analyzes the message and constructs a drawing command that gives a specific instruction regarding drawing to the VDP 152 (command construction process). When the constructed drawing command is transferred to the VDP 152, (2) the drawing circuit 155 directly acquires the drawing material from the NOR type CGROM 190'and draws it on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) it using the decoder 157. Then, the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer on a frame-by-frame basis (transfer / drawing process). Then, (3) the display circuit 153 drives each pixel of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the display frame buffer (display processing). As a result, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

As described above, in the comparative example, since the preload processing is not required, the processing related to the display control is largely executed in the three steps (1) to (3) in the figure. Therefore, in terms of the number of steps, there are fewer comparative examples than in the embodiments. However, the read speed from the NAND ROM is very high, and if the speed of reading one page of data from the NAND ROM and the speed of reading data of the same size as one page from the NOR type ROM are simply compared, NAND ROM is faster (for example, 3 to 6 times faster in bit rate). Further, in the present embodiment, since the data preloaded in the DRAM 191 is reused (used a plurality of times) as much as possible, the number of times of reading from the CGROM 190 is reduced to reduce the processing time required for the entire reading of the data. It can be further shortened. Therefore, although the number of steps is increased by one as compared with the comparative example, the present embodiment is superior in that the processing efficiency is improved and the cost required for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. It can be said that there is sex.

Therefore, in the following, how to improve the efficiency of the process related to data reading in this embodiment will be described.

[Aspect of preload processing]
742 to 744 are schematic views showing the mode of the preload processing according to a specific example.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the drawing material stored in the NAND type CGROM 190 (first storage means) is preloaded into the DRAM 191 (second storage means) by the preload circuit 154, but the area to be preloaded. Two types of regions (first preload region and second preload region) are provided.

Of these, the first preload area is an area managed in page units, and the data read in page units from the CGROM 190 is loaded as it is (a predetermined area of the second storage means). On the other hand, the second preload area is an area managed in frame units, and data is partially transferred from the data already loaded in the first or second preload area, and under a predetermined situation. , The data read from the CGROM 190 in page units is loaded (an area different from the predetermined area of the second storage means). By properly using these areas, it is possible to reuse the data already preloaded in the DRAM 191 as much as possible while minimizing the number of times of reading from the CGROM 190.

In FIG. 742 (A): An example of preloading performed to draw the first frame is shown. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the effect image is drawn using the image A and the image C in the first frame.

In the CGROM 190, the image A exists on the page 1 and the image C exists on the page 3, but can only be read from the CGROM 190 on a page-by-page basis. Therefore, the preload circuit 154 first preloads pages 1 and 3 from the CGROM 190 to the first preload area of the DRAM 191. As a result, the start ends of images A and B constituting page 1, the rear ends of image B constituting page 3, and the start ends of images C and D are loaded into the first preload area. There is. Then, the preload circuit 154 transfers data of the images A and C necessary for drawing the first frame from the first preload area to the second preload area of the DRAM 191.

In FIG. 743 (B): An example of preloading performed to draw the second frame is shown. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the effect image is drawn using the image B and the image C in the second frame.

In the CGROM 190, the image B exists over pages 1 to 3, but the page 1 including the start end of the image B and the page 3 including the end of the image B are already loaded in the first preload area. Therefore, only the page 2 forming the intermediate portion of the image B needs to be read from the CGROM 190. Therefore, the preload circuit 154 transfers data from the first preload area to the second preload area for the start and end portions of the image B, and the second preload area of the DRAM 191 from the CGROM 190 for the intermediate portion of the image B. Page 2 is preloaded to. As described above, a page in which the entire page is composed of a part or all of one image is loaded in the second preload area instead of the first preload area. Further, since the data of the image C has already been transferred to the second preload area when the first frame is drawn, here, the area for the first frame of the second preload area is changed to the area for the second frame. Data transfer is done.

In FIG. 744 (C): An example of preloading performed to draw the third frame is shown. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the effect image is drawn using the image C, the image D, and the image E at the third frame.

In the CGROM 190, the image D exists over the pages 3 to 4, but the page 3 including the start end portion of the image D is already loaded in the first preload area. Further, the image E exists on the page 4 including the end portion of the image D. Therefore, only page 4 needs to be read from the CGROM 190. Therefore, the preload circuit 154 first preloads page 4 from the CGROM 190 to the first preload area of the DRAM 191. Then, the preload circuit 154 transfers data for the image C from the area for the second frame of the second preload area to the area for the third frame, and the image D (start and end) and the image. For E, data is transferred from the first preload area to the second preload area.

In this way, in the preload process, for an image (for example, image A) that fits in a size of less than one page, first, the entire page including the image is read from the CGROM 190 and preloaded into the first preload area. Then, only the data area of the image A is transferred from the first preload area to the second preload area. Further, for an image in which a part or all of the image forms the entire page (for example, image B), the page in which the entire page is composed of one image is preloaded from the CGROM 190 into the second preload area, while the image of the image is preloaded. Pages containing other parts (start or end) are preloaded into the first preload area. Then, when the image used in the previous frame is also used in the next frame, data transfer is performed in the second preload area.

[Update mode of preload area]
FIG. 745 is a schematic diagram showing an update mode of the preload region.

FIG. 745 (A): is a schematic view showing an update mode of the first preload region. As described above, the first preload area is managed on a page-by-page basis. Further, about 10% of the area allocated for the drawing material of the DRAM 191 is allocated to the first preload area, and M pages (for example, 1600 pages) can be stored.

In the first preload area, the data read from the CGROM 190 is saved one after another in page units, and when the number of saved pages reaches M, the oldest data is overwritten in order. From a different point of view, if the required image is included in the past M preloads from the CGROM190 to the first preload area, it is saved in the first preload area without being read from the CGROM190. Data can be reused.

FIG. 745 (B): is a schematic view showing an update mode of the second preload region. As described above, the second preload area is managed on a frame-by-frame basis. Further, about 90% of the area allocated for the drawing material of the DRAM 191 is allocated to the second preload area, and data necessary for drawing N frames can be stored. For example, if the maximum capacity of the DRAM 191 is 8 Gbits, 4 Gbits of which are allocated for drawing materials, and data necessary for drawing 16 frames can be stored, the maximum capacity per frame is about. It will be 28 Mbytes.

In the second preload area, all the data necessary for drawing the frames are saved one after another, and when the number of saved frames reaches N, the oldest data is overwritten in order. From a different point of view, if the image required for drawing this frame is included within the latest N-1 frame, it is saved in the second preload area without being read from the CGROM190. Data can be reused. At this time, the data stored in the first preload area may also be reused.

[Vsync interrupt control processing]
FIG. 746 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the Vsync interrupt control process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1400: The display control unit 220 resets the delay flag. Here, the "delay flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a process related to drawing on the liquid crystal screen has a delay, and is stored in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 130. In this process, the display control unit 220 resets the delay flag to a value (“0”) indicating that no process delay has occurred.

Step S1402: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the command construction state is "finished". Here, the "command construction state" is the current state related to the command construction process, and a value indicating the current state is stored as a command construction state flag, for example, in the flag area of the RAM 130. The command construction state cyclically transitions between the "idle", "start", and "end" states. That is, the command construction status flag is set to a value indicating any of "idle", "start", and "end".

As a result of the confirmation, if the command construction state is "finished" (step S1402: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1406. On the other hand, if the command construction state is not "finished" (step S1402: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1404.

Step S1404: The display control unit 220 sets the delay flag. Specifically, the display control unit 220 sets a value (“1”) indicating that a processing delay has occurred in the delay flag (hereinafter, the same applies).

Step S1406: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the preload state is “finished”. Here, the "preload state" is a current state related to the preload process, and a value indicating the current state is stored as a preload state flag in, for example, a flag area of the RAM 130. The preload state cyclically transitions between the "idle", "start", and "end" states. That is, the preload state flag is set to a value indicating any of "idle", "start", and "end".

As a result of the confirmation, if the preload state is "finished" (step S1406: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1410. On the other hand, if the preload state is not "finished" (step S1406: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1408.

Step S1408: The display control unit 220 sets the delay flag.

Step S1410: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the transfer / drawing state is “finished”. Here, the "transfer / drawing state" is the current state related to the transfer / drawing process, and the value indicating the current state is stored as a transfer / drawing state flag in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 130. .. The transfer / drawing state cyclically transitions between the "idle", "start", and "end" states. That is, the transfer / drawing state flag is set to a value indicating any of "idle", "start", and "end".

As a result of the confirmation, if the transfer / drawing state is "finished" (step S1410: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1414. On the other hand, if the transfer / drawing state is not "finished" (step S1410: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1412.

Step S1412: The display control unit 220 sets the delay flag.

Step S1414: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the delay flag is set. If the delay flag is not set (step S1414: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1420. On the other hand, when the delay flag is set (step S1414: No), the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.

Step S1420: The display control unit 220 switches the display frame buffer. The contents of the display frame buffer switched by this process are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 by the display circuit 153.

Step S1430: The display control unit 220 updates the transfer / drawing state to “idle”.

Step S1432: The display control unit 220 starts the transfer / drawing process. Specifically, the display control unit 220 instructs the drawing circuit 155 of the VDP 152 to start processing. At this time, the drawing circuit 155 that received the instruction confirms whether or not the transfer / drawing process of the previous frame has been completed, and if the transfer / drawing process of the previous frame has already been completed, the current frame is used. Transfer / draw processing is executed. On the other hand, if the transfer / drawing process of the previous frame has not been completed yet, the drawing circuit 155 ignores the instruction to start the process and continues the process being executed. That is, the drawing circuit 155 skips the transfer / drawing process in the current frame and carries it over to the next frame.

Step S1434: The display control unit 220 refers to the state of the drawing circuit 155 and confirms whether or not the transfer / drawing process has been successfully started (the transfer / drawing process has been started normally). For example, the display control unit 220 determines that the start is successful if the transfer / drawing process in the current frame is executed in the drawing circuit 155, while the transfer / drawing process in the current frame is performed in the drawing circuit 155. If it is skipped, it can be determined that the start was not successful.

As a result of the confirmation, if the transfer / drawing process is successfully started (step S1434: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1436. On the other hand, if the start of the transfer / drawing process is not successful (step S1434: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1442.

Step S1436: The display control unit 220 updates the transfer / drawing state to “start”.

Step S1440: The display control unit 220 updates the preload state to “idle”.

Step S1442: The display control unit 220 starts the preload process. Specifically, the display control unit 220 instructs the preload circuit 154 of the VDP 152 to start processing. At this time, the preload circuit 154 that receives the instruction confirms whether or not the preload processing of the previous frame has been completed, and if the preload processing of the previous frame has already been completed, the preload processing in the current frame is performed. Execute. On the other hand, if the preload processing of the previous frame has not been completed yet, the preload circuit 154 ignores the instruction to start the processing and continues the processing being executed. That is, the preload circuit 154 skips the preload processing in the current frame and carries it over to the next frame.

Step S1444: The display control unit 220 refers to the state of the preload circuit 154 and confirms whether or not the preload process has been successfully started (the preload process has been started normally). For example, the display control unit 220 determines that the start is successful if the preload processing in the current frame is executed in the preload circuit 154, while the preload processing in the current frame is skipped in the preload circuit 154. If so, it can be determined that the start was not successful.

As a result of the confirmation, if the start of the preload process is successful (step S1444: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1446. On the other hand, if the start of the preload process is not successful (step S1444: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1452.

Step S1446: The display control unit 220 updates the preload state to "start".

Step S1450: The display control unit 220 updates the command construction state to “idle”.

Step S1452: The display control unit 220 executes the higher-level task activation process. In this process, when the command construction state is "idle", the display control unit 220 executes the command construction process as a higher-level task (processing of the upstream process) and of the effect device other than the liquid crystal display 42. Advance control. The specific contents of the higher-level task activation process will be described later with reference to the following flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.

[Upper task start processing]
FIG. 747 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the upper task activation process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1500: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not the command construction state is “idle”. When the command construction state is "idle" (step S1500: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1502. On the other hand, when the command construction state is not "idle" (step S1500: No), the display control unit 220 returns to the process of the caller.

Step S1502: The display control unit 220 updates the command construction state to "start".

Step S1504: The display control unit 220 executes the command construction process.

Step S1506: The display control unit 220 updates the command construction state to "finished".

Step S1510: The display control unit 220 executes another device control progress processing. In this process, the control of other effect devices (speakers, lamps, etc.) is advanced in synchronization with the screen display by the liquid crystal display 42.

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.

[Drawing-related interrupt processing]
FIG. 748 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a process (drawing end interrupt process, preload end interrupt process) executed triggered by an interrupt that occurs at the end of a process related to drawing. Hereinafter, each interrupt process will be described with reference to a procedure example.

In FIG. 748 (A): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the drawing end interrupt processing. The drawing end interrupt process is a process executed triggered by a drawing end interrupt that occurs at the end of the transfer / drawing process executed by the drawing circuit 155.

Step S1600: The display control unit 220 updates the transfer / drawing state to "end".

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 724).

FIG. 748 (B): is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the preload end interrupt process. The preload end interrupt process is a process executed triggered by a preload end interrupt that occurs at the end of the preload process executed by the preload circuit 154.

Step S1700: The display control unit 220 updates the preload state to “end”.

When the above procedure is completed, the display control unit 220 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 724).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the Vsync interrupt control process (FIG. 746) executed when the Vsync interrupt occurs and the higher-level task activation process executed at a predetermined timing in the Vsync interrupt control process (FIG. 746). FIG. 747), the drawing end interrupt processing / preload end interrupt processing (FIG. 748) controls four processes (command construction processing, preload processing, transfer / drawing processing, display processing) related to drawing the effect image. .. At the same time, the current states of each of the three processes excluding the display are managed by different flags (command construction state flag, preload state flag, transfer / drawing state flag), and based on these flags. , Whether or not there is a delay in any of the steps is controlled by the delay flag.

The current state of each process is updated to "start" when the process of each process is normally started, and is updated to "end" when the process of each process is completed, and the process of the next process is normally started. Then it will be updated to "idle". As described above, the four processes proceed from the upstream side to the downstream side in the order of command construction processing → preload processing → transfer / drawing processing → display processing, so the next process from the viewpoint of command construction processing is preload processing. The next step seen from the preload process is the transfer / drawing process, and the next step seen from the transfer / drawing process is the display process. Therefore, for example, when the preload process is normally started (step S1444: Yes in FIG. 746), the command construction state is updated to "idle" (step S1450 in FIG. 746). On the other hand, if the preload process is not normally started (start has failed) (step S1444: No in FIG. 746), the command construction state is not updated.

Then, when the command construction state is "idle", that is, when the preload processing which is the next step is normally started (step S1500: Yes in FIG. 747), the command construction processing of the current frame is executed. At the same time (step S1504 in FIG. 747), the control of other production devices is advanced in synchronization with this (step S1510 in FIG. 747). On the other hand, if the command construction state is not "idle", that is, if the start of the preload processing, which is the next process, has failed (step S1500: No in FIG. 747), the command construction processing of the current frame should be executed. It does not advance the control of other production devices.

With such control, when the preload process, which is the next process, fails to start, the command construction of the current frame before the drawing command constructed in the command construction process of the previous frame becomes the target of the preload process. It is possible to prevent the drawing command from being overwritten by the process, that is, the content of the drawing command is discarded without being embodied by the process after the next step. Further, when the command construction process is skipped, the control of the other effect device is not advanced, so that the execution timing of the process can be appropriately synchronized between the liquid crystal display 42 and the other effect device. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if a delay occurs in a part of the steps, it is possible to prevent the timing of the effect reproduction from being deviated and to continue the effect reproduction in a natural manner.

[Execution timing of drawing-related processing during normal operation]
FIG. 749 is a diagram showing execution timings of drawing-related processes (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process) in a normal state.

The number of frames attached to the arrows in the figure is the number of frames ahead when the processing of the arrow with the characters "± 0 frames" is the starting point, and the processing of the other arrows is viewed from the starting point. Is shown. For example, in FIG. 749, the arrow indicating the display processing of the first frame is attached with the character "± 0 frame", and the arrow indicating the transfer / drawing processing is attached with the character "+1 frame". Has been done. This indicates that the transfer / drawing process of the first frame is a process (for the second frame) for the first frame ahead when viewed from the display process of the first frame.

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed.

The same applies to the second and subsequent frames. When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in each frame, the display process executes the display for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process executes the transfer / drawing for the next frame and preloads. In the process, preload is executed for 2 frames ahead, and in the command construction process, command construction for 3 frames ahead is executed.

By normally executing each process in this way, the content of the command construction executed in the first frame is displayed in the fourth frame.

[Execution timing when command construction processing is delayed]
FIG. 750 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process when the command construction process is delayed among the processes related to drawing (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process).

The number of frames attached to the arrows in the figure is the number of frames ahead when the processing of the arrow with the characters "± 0 frames" is the starting point, and the processing of the other arrows is viewed from the starting point. Is shown. For example, in FIG. 750, the arrow indicating the command construction process in the first frame has the character "± 0 frame", and the arrow indicating the preload process has the character "-1 frame". Has been done. This indicates that the preload processing of the first frame is the processing (for the -1st frame) for the frame immediately before the command construction processing of the first frame. Here, in the command construction process, since the process for the third frame ahead is performed as described above, the command construction for the fourth frame is executed in the first frame. Therefore, in the preload processing of the first frame, the preload for the frame immediately before the fourth frame, that is, the third frame is executed (the same applies to FIGS. 751 and 752).

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed.

Here, it is assumed that a delay occurs in the command construction process for the 4th frame started in the 1st frame, and the process is delayed to the 2nd frame without ending within the frame (within 33.3 ms). In this case, the delay flag is set at the beginning of the Vsync interrupt control process executed in the second frame (step S1404 in FIG. 746). Therefore, the command construction process, preload process, and transfer / drawing process that should normally be executed in the second frame are all skipped. Further, in the display process, since the display frame buffer is not switched, the screen displayed in the previous frame is continuously displayed as it is. Then, since the command construction process in which the delay has occurred ends in the middle of the second frame, each process is executed according to the normal flow from the third frame onward. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 750, the processing for one frame was skipped in the second frame due to the delay in the command construction processing, and as a result, the content of the command constructed for the fourth frame is one frame. The display is executed at the 5th frame with a delay.

If there is a delay in the command construction process started in the previous frame, the preload process cannot be executed in perfect condition because the command to be preloaded in the current frame is still under construction. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the same screen is displayed without switching the display frame buffer while skipping new executions of the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process until the frame at which the command construction process ends. To continue. As a result, even if the command construction process is delayed, the execution timing of each process can be appropriately controlled and a natural effect image can be displayed.

[Execution timing when preload processing is delayed]
FIG. 751 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process when the preload process is delayed among the processes related to drawing (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process).

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed. All of these processes are completed within the frame.

Subsequently, when the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the second frame triggered by the second Vsync interrupt C2, the display process executes the display (for the second frame) for the current frame, and transfers / draws the process. Then, transfer / drawing for the next frame (for the 3rd frame) is executed, preload for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 4th frame) is executed in the preload process, and preload for the 3rd frame ahead (for the 5th frame) in the command construction process. ) Command construction is executed.

Here, it is assumed that a delay occurs in the preload processing for the 4th frame started in the 2nd frame, and the processing does not end within the frame (within 33.3 ms) and is shifted to the 3rd frame. In this case, the delay flag is set at the beginning of the Vsync interrupt control process executed in the third frame (step S1408 in FIG. 746). Therefore, the command construction process, preload process, and transfer / drawing process, which should normally be executed in the third frame, are all skipped. Further, in the display process, since the display frame buffer is not switched, the screen displayed in the previous frame is continuously displayed as it is. Then, since the preload process in which the delay has occurred ends in the middle of the third frame, each process is executed according to the normal flow from the fourth frame onward. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 751, the processing for one frame is skipped in the third frame due to the delay in the preload processing, and as a result, the content preloaded for the fourth frame is delayed by one frame. The display is executed at the 5th frame.

If there is a delay in the preload process started in the previous frame, the image data to be transferred / drawn in the current frame is still in the preloading stage, so the transfer / drawing process is executed in perfect condition. Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the same screen is displayed without switching the display frame buffer while skipping new executions of the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process until the frame at which the preload process ends. continue. As a result, even if there is a delay in the preload processing, it is possible to appropriately control the execution timing of each processing and display a natural effect image.

[Execution timing when transfer / drawing process is delayed]
FIG. 752 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process when the transfer / drawing process is delayed among the processes related to drawing (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process).

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame destination. Is executed. All of these processes are completed within the frame.

Subsequently, when the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the second frame triggered by the second Vsync interrupt C2, the display process executes the display (for the second frame) for the current frame, and transfers / draws the process. Then, transfer / drawing for the next frame (for the 3rd frame) is executed, preload for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 4th frame) is executed in the preload process, and preload for the 3rd frame ahead (for the 5th frame) in the command construction process. ) Command construction is executed. All of these processes also end within the frame.

Subsequently, when the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the third frame triggered by the third Vsync interrupt C3, the display process executes the display (for the third frame) for the current frame, and transfers / draws the process. Then, transfer / drawing for the next frame (for the 4th frame) is executed, preload for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 5th frame) is executed in the preload process, and preload for the 3rd frame ahead (for the 6th frame) in the command construction process. ) Command construction is executed.

Here, it is assumed that a delay occurs in the transfer / drawing process for the 4th frame started in the 3rd frame, and the process does not end within the frame (within 33.3 ms) and is shifted to the 4th frame. In this case, the delay flag is set at the beginning of the Vsync interrupt control process executed in the fourth frame (step S1412 in FIG. 746). Therefore, the command construction process, preload process, and transfer / drawing process that should normally be executed in the 4th frame are all skipped. Further, in the display process, since the display frame buffer is not switched, the screen displayed in the previous frame is continuously displayed as it is. Then, since the transfer / drawing process in which the delay has occurred ends in the middle of the fourth frame, each process is executed according to the normal flow from the fifth frame onward. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 752, the processing for one frame is skipped in the fourth frame due to the delay in the transfer / drawing process, and as a result, the content transferred / drawn for the fourth frame is displayed. The display is executed at the 5th frame with a delay of 1 frame.

If there is a delay in the transfer / drawing process started in the previous frame, the production image to be displayed in the current frame is still in the drawing stage, so the display frame buffer should be switched perfectly. I can't do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process are skipped until the frame at which the transfer / drawing process is completed, and the same screen is displayed without switching the display frame buffer. Continue displaying. As a result, even if there is a delay in the transfer / drawing process, it is possible to appropriately control the execution timing of each process and display a natural effect image.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a delay occurs in any of the processes of each process, the process of each process is skipped without being newly executed until the process is completed. The same effect image is continuously displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Then, the processing of each process is restarted along the normal flow by the Vsync interrupt control processing executed (in the next frame) after the processing in which the delay has occurred is completed.

If any of the processes in each process is delayed, but it is ignored and the process in each process is newly executed, each process will be executed in an incomplete state. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is disturbed. In addition, an error may occur in the middle of the process and the process may stop abnormally. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a delay occurs in any of the processes of each process, the execution timing of the processes of each process is appropriately controlled by executing the above control. .. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the screen from being disturbed and the processing from being abnormally stopped, and it is possible to display a natural effect image.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 750 to 752, the command construction process, the preload process, and the transfer / drawing process in which the delay occurred are all completed in the next frame, but depending on the situation, the next frame. However, there is a possibility that the processing will not be completed and the processing will be prolonged. In such a case, the effect image displayed before the delay occurs is displayed as it is while skipping the new execution of the process of each process until the process in which the delay occurs is completed.

Next, the contents of the working memory effect management process executed in the normal effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 753 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process.
The operation memory effect management process is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in conjunction with an increase or decrease in the number of lottery elements (operation memory number) stored in the main control device 70, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. It is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to (memory display effect executing means), and is called and executed in the process of the normal effect control process (step S401 in FIG. 740). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and changes the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the middle display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the normal effect control process (FIG. 740).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 754 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 692) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 692). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and responds to the result. The control information of the effect content (operation trigger effect, continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the VDP 152, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a 16-round big hit, the effect control unit 210 selects a 16-round large-duty effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the display control unit 220 of this. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 755 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo production pattern is a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in production (the first and second special symbols are in a so-called customer waiting state where the number of operating memories of the first and second special symbols is 0, and the first and second special symbols are in operation. It defines the content of the effect to be executed when the number of working memories is 0 and the game is temporarily interrupted due to the passage of a predetermined time while the player's hand is away from the handle unit 16. .. Here, the condition that the first and second special symbols have not changed (stop display) may be added.

Step S603: The effect control unit 210 executes the setting suggestion effect management process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the demo effect.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the normal effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display control process (step S404 in FIG. 740) and the lamp control process (step S406 in FIG. 740), the demo effect is performed based on the demo effect pattern. Control the content.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "C0H00H" to "D0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes the effect pattern variation schedule (variation time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the effect effect pattern number at that time. Determine the mode of stop display. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence). In this case, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 754), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The advance notice effect is executed based on the advance notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 756 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating time processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S904 to step S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operation process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning in the "12 round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the process of selecting the normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in the "16 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 during the execution of the jackpot effect, the input control unit 228 is made to detect whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and the effect content (operation trigger effect) according to the result is detected. , Continuous hitting effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220. Further, in the process during operation of the variable winning device, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 718 (J) or the like) is selected. While executing the process, if the probability variation area passage command is not received during the jackpot game, the process of selecting the effect indicating that the V prize has not occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 719 (N), etc.). To execute.

Step S908: In the post-operation processing of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes a coast mode rush effect or a fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not a winning symbol or a probability variation region has passed. Specifically, when a probability variation area passage command is received during the jackpot game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered (effect shown in FIG. 718 (K) or the like) is executed, and the jackpot is executed. If the probability variation area passage command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player is entering the coastal mode (effect shown in FIG. 717 (G) or the like) is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 754).

As described above, according to the above-described embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in the section where the CGROM 190 is refreshed and the data is transferred from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191, the "SATA preparing" notification is executed, so that the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is used. It is possible to reliably notify that the game is in the stage of preparation for activation and make the staff and players of the game hall aware of it.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the priority (priority) of "Preparing for SATA" is set to be the highest among the plurality of errors related to fraud, and the main controller 70 is fraudulent in the section during SATA preparation. Even if an effect command indicating an error related to is transmitted, the effect control device 124 does not process any effect command other than the production inspection start command, and therefore, the operation control of the effect device corresponding to the error related to fraud based on the effect command is not performed. Therefore, even if other errors related to fraud occur at the same time, the notification of "Preparing for SATA" can be given the highest priority, and the notification that the pachinko machine 1 (effect control device 124) is in the stage of preparation for activation is ensured. Can be executed.

(3) According to the present embodiment, among a plurality of errors related to fraud, in the notification of "SATA in preparation", the frame lamp blinks in white while the error notification lamp 45 is off, whereas most of the others. In the case of the error, the frame lamp lights up in red while the error notification lamp 45 lights up in blue, and the white blinking of the frame lamp changes to "SATA in preparation" which is not executed in other error notifications. Since it is a dedicated mode, it is possible to identify that "SATA is being prepared" from the clear difference in the notification mode by these various lamps.

(4) According to the present embodiment, if an operation related to maintenance (for example, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc.) is executed during the game, it is performed by using various lamps or other production devices. Since it is possible to notify, the pachinko machine that was notified by notifying the players and staff of the amusement park in the vicinity that an error has occurred (the operation related to maintenance may have been performed illegally). 1 can be dealt with in some way.

(5) In the present embodiment, priorities are set in advance for individual errors, and when a plurality of errors occur at the same time, notification regarding the error having the higher priority (priority) is notified. Is executed preferentially, so that notification of a higher-severity error can be executed more reliably.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of production and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 70 starts transmitting the effect command after waiting for 9.0 seconds from the power-on during mass production, but the waiting time until the start of transmission is 9.0 seconds. It is not limited, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the CGROM 190 and the size of the area allocated for the audio material. Further, at the time of inspection, the transmission of the effect command is started after 2.5 seconds have passed from the power-on, but the same applies to this, and it can be changed as appropriate depending on the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 and various lamps are used for notification in the section during SATA preparation, but the effect device used for notification is not limited to this. For example, the notification may be performed by using various movable bodies instead of the various lamps or together with the various lamps.

In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the Vsync interrupt is generated once at 33.3 ms intervals (30 times per second) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, Vsync interrupts may be generated once at 16.6 ms intervals (60 times per second). Further, in that case, the process executed when the Vsync interrupt occurs, the process executed every time (60 times per second) triggered by the occurrence of the interrupt, and the process executed every other time when the interrupt occurs. It is also possible to configure the process separately from the process to be executed (30 times per second).

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine not having a probability variation region. It is also possible to apply the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment D]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 757 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 758 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 757 and 758.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 758) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 757. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 757, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 above behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a saucer unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, a gaming machine connected to the card unit is given as an example, but a gaming machine not connected to the card unit may be used.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the saucer unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is being played. It is possible to generate some kind of production (notice production, probabilistic promotion production, promotion production during a major role, etc.).

Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 758, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be seen in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. ..

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. Further, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each of the 7-segment LEDs has seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. It is composed of.
The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM (initializing the RAM 76), that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit. Further, the setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing a setting or referencing a setting.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92, and the RAM clear process is performed. Is executed. The RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power supply control unit 162. Further, when the RAM clear signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 receives the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. May be good.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 758 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 759 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40.

The left side portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in the first game state (for example, low-probability non-time shortening state, left-handed state, etc.). The right part of the game area 8a is a second gaming state (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, a high probability non-time shortened state, a right-handed state, a small hit rush This is the second game area (right-handed area) used in (state, etc.).

Further, in the game area 8a, in the vicinity of the effect unit 40, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, a middle starting winning opening 26, an upper right starting winning opening 27, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, The second variable winning device 31 and the like are distributed and installed.
Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 are arranged at the lower left of the game area 8a. Further, the starting gate 20, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a.

The game ball launched into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow, enters the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, and the upper right starting winning opening 27, or during the opening operation. The variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation.

The game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the normal winning opening 22 or the middle starting winning opening 26. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the upper right start winning opening 27, or enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of opening operation. Alternatively, there is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation or entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, The game ball entered in the second variable winning device 31 is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board 8b (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and the ball can be entered into the lower right starting winning opening 28b accordingly. (Normal electric accessory, special electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in the drawing, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with the tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult (impossible) to enter the lower right starting winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width of the variable start winning device 28 is expanded to the left and right. During this period, the game ball can easily flow into the lower right starting winning opening 28b. The variable start winning device 28 is a tongue piece type device that moves from a position where the opening / closing member is retracted to the back from the board surface to a position where the opening / closing member protrudes toward the front side, or a tongue piece type device that moves forward using the lower end edge of the opening / closing member as a hinge. It may be a device that is displaced so as to collapse.

The variable start winning device 28 is in an open state in which the lower right starting winning opening 28b (starting winning opening) is opened at a predetermined frequency (for example, a probability of 1 / 60,000 in a normal symbol lottery) in a non-time shortened state (normal state). It is a special electric accessory that can be shifted to the open state at a frequency higher than a predetermined frequency (for example, a probability of about 1 in the normal symbol lottery) in the time shortened state (advantageous state).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit), and enables the ball to enter the first big winning opening 30b (special). Electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 may be operated at the time of a small hit.

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged downstream of the variable starting winning device 28 (upper attacker, jackpot attacker, V attacker, attacker with probability variation region), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. There is. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

Further, inside the first variable winning device 30, a guidance passage 30c for guiding the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30 is arranged. The guide passage 30c extends downward from the entrance of the first winning opening 30b.

A first count switch 84 is arranged upstream of the guidance passage 30c, and a probability variation region blade member 30d and a probability variation region hole 30e are arranged in the middle flow of the guidance passage 30c. A discharge port 30f is arranged downstream.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30 is first entered by the first count switch 84. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 30d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 30d moves to the front side of the board surface and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 30e. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 30d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 30d is retracted to the rear side of the board surface, so that the game ball is in front of the probabilistic region blade member 30d. It passes through the side and heads for the discharge port 30f.

[Probability variation area (specific area, probability fluctuation function operation area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 30e. The probability variation region is an region through which the game ball cannot pass when the first variable winning device 30 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 30d operates even when the first variable winning device 30 is in the open state. If so, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 30d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 30d is that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time (for a long period of time (about 2 to 3 seconds)). Either a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probability variation region blade member 30d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 30d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 30d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region blade member 30d is opened. The opportunity for 30d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 30d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability variation region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the jackpot game, the probability shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The second variable winning device 31 (attacker) operates when special conditions are met (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and it is possible to enter the second large winning opening 31b. (Special electric accessory, second special ball entry event generating means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated at the time of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged downstream of the first variable winning device 30 (lower attacker, small hit attacker), and has one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 to the inside is arranged. The guide passage 31c is branched into two routes, and a second count switch 85 is arranged on each route.
The game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by any of the second count switches 85, and is finally guided to the discharge port 31f and collected inside.

Further, a plurality of protrusions 21 for reducing the moving speed of the game ball are arranged on the upper portion of the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31. The plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged on the front side and the rear side with respect to the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit.

For example, the protrusion on the front side is arranged on the front side of the game board unit (for example, the back surface of the cover of the front transparent member), and the protrusion on the rear side is the rear side (for example, the back side transparent) of the game board unit. It is arranged on the front surface of the cover of the member).

In this way, since the plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit 8, the game balls that randomly flow down can be advanced in a zigzag manner, and the game balls can be advanced. The deceleration effect of can be improved.
The plurality of protrusions 21 can be appropriately arranged at places where deceleration of the game ball is required, in addition to the upper portion of the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31.

The effect unit 40 is installed at the center of the game board unit 8. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts (including those not shown) inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitting device (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. The liquid crystal display 42 can display the effect image by dividing it into a plurality of layers. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f (for example, a decoration imitating a train) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, a game including a game ball that has entered the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the lower right starting winning opening 28b, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31. All the game balls driven into the area 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 760 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after increasing one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery occurs. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (1st symbol display means, 2nd symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is the middle start winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 each time a game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b). In order to remember that the game ball has entered the (lower right start winning opening 28b), the display mode changes to the display mode after increasing one by one (up to 4), and the special symbol is triggered by the entry. Each time the fluctuation of is started, the display mode is changed by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the upper right start winning opening 27, the game ball enters the upper right starting winning opening 27. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 Alternatively, the display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b). In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball enters the upper right start winning opening 27 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of stored items (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is still a variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. Indicates the number of times the ball has not been started.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the firing position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 761 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting change device 300 is a device that switches the setting (the setting value of a plurality of stages related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery can be changed to any setting value), such as the RAM clear switch 304 provided in the pachinko machine 1. Operated by operation (setting change means). Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting key keyhole 306 for inserting a setting key and a RAM clear switch 304, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 and the setting key is pressed. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the set value can be changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation state, setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of the six stages, for example.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment segment LED, or a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be pulled out from the keyhole for the setting key. By this operation, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment segment LED, the game status display device 38, or the like, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Details of setting change]
The details of the setting change are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is being changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. LED. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off, the game is ready for play. Transition.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are also used is described, but the setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Details of setting confirmation]
The details of the setting confirmation (see setting) are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation mode).
Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being confirmed, the main display is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and a set value such as "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the setting is terminated, and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 includes a middle start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b), an upper right starting winning opening 27, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31, respectively. Correspondingly, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, the upper right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84 and the second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80, 82, and 83 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b), and the upper right starting winning opening 27. Is. Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls. Regarding the two second count switches 85, a configuration in which a common switch is used is given as an example, but two switches may be installed to individually detect the entry of the game ball. Furthermore, the probability variation region switch 95a is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the first variable winning device 30.

Further, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 22. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to enter a game ball into each ordinary winning opening 22. May be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, and the upper right starting winning opening switch 83 most directly affect the interests of the player. Is transmitted to the main control device 70 without particularly passing through a relay object, and other detection signals are transmitted to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87. The panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 passes through the normal winning opening 22, the middle starting winning opening 26, the upper right starting winning opening 27, the lower right starting winning opening 28b, the first major winning opening 30b, the second major winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32. A merging passage for merging the game balls is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in this merging passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the confluence passage, and each time the game ball is detected, a detection signal is input to the main control device 70. The main control device 70 counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from the out switch 99. Here, since the game balls launched into the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch 99 determines the number of launch balls launched into the game area 8a. That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of the 7 segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, in the game board unit 8, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream region of the probability variation region, respectively, and the first large A winning opening solenoid 90, a second large winning opening solenoid 97, and a probability variation region solenoid 95b are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 95b operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the probabilistic region blade member 30d. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, 95b are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 or a RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. The process of making the speakers 54, 55, 56 actually output sound effects, voices, and the like is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator incorporating a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives speakers 54, 55, 56 to output acoustics.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 and various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated board 136. Entered. Further, the above-mentioned jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illumination substrate 136. .. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the glass frame illumination board 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are used for the saucer illumination. It may be connected to the board.

In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable motor 57 is connected to the panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of its storage area as a frame buffer.

A basic program related to the control of the effect is stored in the ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, an effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in the frame buffer, and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is displayed. Drive individually.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 762 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/313".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/308".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/291".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/273".

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/72".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/70".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/68".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/67".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/65".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/62".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example of providing a setting difference in the low probability state and the high probability state, but the setting difference may be provided only in the low probability state or only in the high probability state. .. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

763 and 764 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector interrupt mode (mode 2), and modifies the default RST interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, after that, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply disconnection detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply disconnection detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the mask register is initially set in order to set the main control CPU 72 and the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is then executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup valid determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special symbol destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, and an operation memory number) to the effect control device 124. (Decrease production command, count cut counter value command, special game state specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 receives the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. The light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize balls to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register and sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 764 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power supply cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, the probability variation region solenoid 95b, etc., and then the RAM 76 The entire contents of the work area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is saved in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 766), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 766), so that there is duplication (conflict) with this. ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 766). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 765 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output, for example.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply disconnection detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power failure detection signal is output. The main power supply disconnection detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 (No) at this point, the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power supply disconnection detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: As described above, the main control CPU 72 has a test signal terminal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the probability variation region solenoid 95b. And clear the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters the standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is cut off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 763).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 766 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above (step S120 in FIG. 764).

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) ports 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation area switch 95a, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, the upper right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84, and the second It reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the count switch 85 and the winning opening switch 86.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the game is played based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, and the upper right starting winning opening switch 83. The events that have occurred during the process are determined, and further processing is executed according to the events that have occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, or the upper right starting winning opening switch 83, the main control CPU 72 has the first special symbol or the first special symbol, respectively. 2 It is determined that an event that triggers an internal lottery (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80, the lower right starting winning opening switch 82, or the upper right starting winning opening switch 83 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S204a: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when the set value is changed or a setting confirmation process executed when the set value is confirmed. (Setting-related processing execution means). It should be noted that this process can be prevented from being executed when the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed (when the game is in the normal game state). Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to calculate the base and execute the process of displaying the calculated base on the performance display monitor 200. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the outswitch) (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means).

When the setting change process (setting-related process) is actually executed in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a "setting-related end designation command" as a subcommand. The "setting-related end specification command" can include information that the setting-related processing (processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation) has been completed and information on the setting value. The generated "setting-related end designation command" is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Step S205, Step S206a, Step S206b: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol game process, the first special symbol game process, and the second special symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the normal symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the first special symbol game process (step S206a), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol (first lottery execution means, lottery execution means), or displays the first special symbol. The fluctuation display and the stop display by the device 34 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. Further, in the second special symbol game process (step S206b), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (second lottery execution means, lottery execution means), or displays the second special symbol. The fluctuation display and the stop display by the device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command.

The main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball instruction command for instructing the number of prize balls to the payout control device 92, or a period from the start of payout until the time predicted to be paying out elapses. For (for example, several seconds), a payout command indicating that the game ball is being paid out can be transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 10 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when a winning detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 86 corresponding to the normal winning opening 22, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for five game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 766).

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls that can be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). It may be set. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are specified. When the above condition is satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in the port output request buffer. The external information signal stored in the port output request buffer is transmitted to the data display device or the hall computer via the external terminal plate 160.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, fluctuation time shortening function operating). Generate and store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the above-mentioned normal symbol game processing (step S205), first special symbol game processing (step S206a), and second special symbol game processing (step S206b) is used. Output to port. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is performed.

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the probabilistic region solenoid 95b stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 767 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 766). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the middle-starting winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the middle-starting winning opening 26 (whether or not a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the lower right starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the lower right starting winning opening 28b (whether or not a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S15 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S16. In the present embodiment, the lower right starting winning opening 28b is a starting opening corresponding to the second special symbol, but it may be a starting opening corresponding to the first special symbol.

Step S16: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the upper right starting winning opening switch 83 corresponding to the upper right starting winning opening 27 (whether or not a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S17 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95a corresponding to the probability variation region provided inside the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S23 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region.

As the process when passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the probability variation area passage flag to ON. When the probability change area passage flag is set to ON, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means). , Probability fluctuation function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). The set of the probability fluctuation function operation flag may be executed in this process or in the jackpot end process. Even when the probability variation area passage flag is set to ON, when the limiter is reached (for example, when the number of limiters at the start of the big hit game = 1), the main control CPU 72 uses the game state flag as the game state flag. The value (01H) of the probability fluctuation function operation flag can be prevented from being set in the flag area of the RAM 76.

The probability variation area passage flag is reset at the end of the jackpot game. Further, the probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the next big hit game is started or when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (10000 times) without obtaining the winning result after the end of the big hit game.
The main control CPU 72 generates a probability change area passage command as a process when passing through the probability change area. The probability variation area passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probability variation region solenoid 95b is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 766).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 768 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections for the first special symbol and four sections for the second special symbol (for example, 2 bytes each), and each section contains a big hit determination random number and The jackpot symbol random numbers can be stored as a set (set) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 767). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 766).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When it is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing (memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 767).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 769 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 767). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 768), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 766) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 768) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 768) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 768) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). The memory method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 768) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (memory number notification means). .. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 767).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 770 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 768 and step S46 in FIG. 769). Execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (at the time of entering the middle start winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (lower right starting winning opening 28b)) and the second special symbol (to the upper right starting winning opening 27). It is executed for each of (at the time of entering the ball). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 768) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 769). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "variation time shortening function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "fluctuation time shortening function" is operating, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "off reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "variation time shortening function" is not operating, whether or not the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach variation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. To judge. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 768) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 769). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this corresponds to the "probability variation symbol (10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3)". If so, for example, "A0H" is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this is a "normal symbol (10 round normal symbol)", then For example, "01H" is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the pre-determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot-determined random number acquired after the jackpot-determined random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag represents a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned pre-determination process (step S80) of the variation pattern information at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 768) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 769). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 above, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to the "probability variation symbol" or the "normal symbol". The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a "normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents the "probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "probability variation symbol". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. As described above, the probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. .. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely, the previous judgment result immediately before. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 768) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 769).

[Parallel fluctuation of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol]
Next, the details of the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing will be described. In the present embodiment, by separately executing the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol display device 34 changes the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to display the variation of the second special symbol by the display device 35 in parallel (symbol parallel variation means). Therefore, in the present embodiment, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process are separately performed (1 in one interrupt cycle) under the control of the main control CPU 72. It is supposed to be executed (once).

[1st special symbol game processing]
FIG. 771 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol game processing.
The first special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1000a) for confirming whether or not the internal state flag is "start of big win (during big hit game)".

Step S1000a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state (internal state) corresponding to the second special symbol is "start of big win (during big hit game)". This confirmation can be performed based on the progress of the processing (value of the second special symbol game management status) that has been performed so far for the second special symbol. This confirmation is performed in the present embodiment because when the jackpot game is in progress with respect to the other second special symbol, the game related to the first special symbol is not advanced.

At present, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of the next step S1000b unless it is during the jackpot game (the value of the second special symbol game management status is during the jackpot), particularly with respect to the second special symbol (No).

Further, in the first special symbol game process, a procedure (step S1000b) for confirming whether or not the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the game state is a small hit is performed. Have. If the fluctuation time measurement pause flag is ON, it means that the fluctuation time measurement is paused, and if the fluctuation time measurement pause flag is OFF, the fluctuation time measurement is performed. It means that it is not paused.

Step S1000b: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the gaming state is in the small hit. In the present embodiment, this confirmation is performed when the other second special symbol is in the small hit game and the first symbol is changing, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily performed. This is because it is supposed to be stopped.

At present, if the variable time measurement paused flag is not ON, or even if the variable time measurement paused flag is ON but the gaming state is not in the small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 takes the next step. The processing after S1000b1 is executed. Steps S1000b1 to S6000 are program modules that form the basis of the first special symbol game processing, respectively. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the first special symbol through the processes of steps S1000b1 to S6000, which are the basis thereof.

On the other hand, when the variable time measurement paused flag is ON and the small hit game is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S7000.

The basic part of the first special symbol game process is the special game special symbol determination flag update process (step S1000b1), the execution selection process (step S1000c), the special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), and the special symbol change process (step). S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000), small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000) subroutine (program module) group is included. .. Here, first, the basic flow of the basic part of the first special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000b1: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game special symbol determination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a symbol to be processed as to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be processed. Here, the special game special symbol discrimination flag is a flag for specifying the symbol to be processed, and is stored in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, "0") corresponding to the first special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1000c: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S6000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the first special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (first special symbol game management status). For example, if the first special symbol has not yet started the variation display (first special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (first special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changes. If the process during fluctuation is completed (first special symbol game management status: 02H), the process during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. Specifically, the jackpot determination (first lottery execution means, lottery execution means) and the fluctuation pattern are determined here, and in the case of a jackpot, the winning type is also determined. Further, according to the determination of the winning type, the main control CPU 72 sets a number-of-times cut counter for the "time reduction state" and the "high probability state". The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

Further, in this process, a process of determining whether or not to activate the skip function is also performed, and in the previous jackpot determination, for example, the first special symbol is changing the jackpot and the second special symbol is not elected. If applicable, the skip function is activated for the second special symbol. By operating this skip function, a process of forcibly ending the non-winning fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). Regarding the first special symbol During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, a preset number of continuous operations is performed for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) by the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97. It is excited over (for example, 10 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 in total, this is referred to as "10 rounds". Collectively.

When the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 or the first variable winning device 30 for one round 2 The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) with respect to the first special symbol only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operation flag, fluctuation time shortening function operation flag). (High-probability state transition means, time-reduced state transition means, low-probability time-reduced state transition means, high-probability non-time-reduced state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual. Further, in the "time reduction state", the fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended to open. The number of times increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

In the present embodiment, the "time reduction state" means that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is shortened by operating the fluctuation time shortening function, and the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high and variable. It means a state in which the opening time of the start winning device 28 is extended (opening extension function operation).

Further, in the "non-time shortening state", since the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is not shortened, and the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes low. It means a state in which the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is not extended (opening extension function is not activated).

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is selected when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes a predetermined number of times in a predetermined opening time.

Step S7000: The process during suspension of fluctuation time measurement is a process for maintaining the fluctuation of the first special symbol without stopping it. The main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 when the small hit game is in progress with respect to the second special symbol and the first special symbol is changing. As the drive control of the first special symbol display device 34, a process of outputting an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) for each segment and dot (No. 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED is executed. As a result, the state in which the first special symbol is not stopped is maintained. If the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Even if the main control CPU 72 determines that the second special symbol is in the small hit game, if the first special symbol is not changing, the main control CPU 72 does not execute the processing during the suspension of fluctuation time measurement. Further, the measurement of the fluctuation time may be a forced termination instead of a temporary stop.

[2nd special symbol game processing]
FIG. 772 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol game processing.
The second special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1900a) for confirming whether or not a big hit is being made with respect to the other first special symbol.

Step S1900a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state corresponding to the first special symbol is “big hit gaming”. This confirmation can also be performed based on the value of the first special symbol game management status as described above. In addition, a determination as to whether or not the player is in a small hit game may be added to this determination.

At present, if the first special symbol is not in the jackpot game (the first special symbol game management status is the value during the jackpot) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S1900a1 and subsequent processes. Steps S1900a1 to S6900 are program modules that form the basis of the second special symbol game processing, respectively. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the second special symbol through the processes of steps S1900a1 to S6900, which are the basis thereof.

As described in the first special symbol game process above, the special game special symbol determination flag update process (step S1900a1), execution selection process (step S1900b), and special symbol variation are also performed for the basic part of the second special symbol game process. Pre-processing (step S2900), special symbol change processing (step S3900), special symbol stop display processing (step S4900), big hit variable winning device management process (step S5900), small hit variable winning device management process (step) The subroutine (program module) group of S6900) is included. The description of the same content as that of the first special symbol game processing will be omitted as appropriate.

Step S1900a1: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game special symbol determination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a symbol to be processed as to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be processed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, "1") corresponding to the second special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1900b: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2900 to S6900) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the second special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Similarly, which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (second special symbol game management status). For example, if the second special symbol has not yet started the variation display (second special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (second special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3900) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changes. If the process during fluctuation is completed (second special symbol game management status: 02H), the process during display of special symbol stop display (step S4900) is selected as the next jump destination.

Step S2900: In the special symbol variation preprocessing in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the second special symbol (second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). ..

Step S3900: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer.

Step S4900: In the process during the special symbol stop display in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, whereby the stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

Step S5900: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. Here as well, the stop display mode of the second special symbol is determined in a mode according to the winning type. Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 sets the second variable winning device for one round. The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of 31 is completed. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) with respect to the second special symbol only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed with respect to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the jackpot game is completed based on the game state flags (probability variation function operation flag, fluctuation time shortening function operation flag).

Step S6900: The small hit variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing (special game execution means). For example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes a predetermined number of times in a predetermined opening time.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, as a plurality of winning types, (1) "10 round probability variation jackpot 1", (2) "10 round probability variation jackpot 2", (3) "10 round probability variation jackpot 3", (4) "10 rounds""Normaljackpot" is provided. A jackpot other than 10 rounds may be set.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", and "10 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "10 round probability variation jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 3", and "10 round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round normal symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 773 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[10 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long-opened (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds), the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, and the probabilistic region is long-opened. Therefore, the game ball may pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the first variable winning device 30 in the first round, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the game shifts to the "high probability state". ..

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Further, in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 1", after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is activated to shift to the "time reduction state".
As described above, the "10-round probability variation symbol 1" is a winning symbol that shifts to the high probability time shortening state.

[10 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long-opened (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds), the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, and the probabilistic region is long-opened. Therefore, the game ball may pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the first variable winning device 30 in the first round, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the game shifts to the "high probability state". ..

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 2", 10 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

Further, in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is not activated to shift to the "non-time reduction state".
In this way, the "10-round probability variation symbol 2" is a winning symbol that shifts to a high-probability non-time shortening state.

[10 round probability variation symbol 3]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol 3" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is long-opened (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds), the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, and the probabilistic region is long-opened. Therefore, the game ball may pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the first variable winning device 30 in the first round, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the game shifts to the "high probability state". ..

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 round probability variation symbol 3", the player is given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Further, when the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is applied in the non-time shortened state, the "non-time shortened state" is entered by not activating the "time shortening function" after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the "10-round probability variation symbol 3" is applied in the time-reduced state, the "time-reduced state" is entered by activating the "time-reducing function" after the jackpot game is completed.
As described above, the "10-round probability variation symbol 3" is a winning symbol that shifts to a high-probability non-time shortening state or a high-probability time-shortening state according to the gaming state at the time of winning.

[10 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means).

In this case, in the first round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). However, although the probabilistic region solenoid is turned on, the probabilistic region is not opened for a long time. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region. Therefore, after the jackpot game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated, and the state shifts to the "low probability state".

Further, in the 2nd to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Since the probabilistic region solenoid is OFF, the probabilistic region is not opened.
Therefore, in the big hit game of "10 rounds normal symbol", the player is given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Further, in the case of corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol", after the jackpot game is completed, the "time reduction function" is activated to shift to the "time reduction state".
As described above, the "10-round normal symbol" is a winning symbol that shifts to the low probability time shortened state.

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 also wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) within one round (during one small hit game), It will be closed without waiting for the longest opening time.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "one of the probabilistic symbols" and the game ball passes through the probabilistic region during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the "high probability time shortened state" or "high probability time shortened state" or " Shift to "high probability non-time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "10 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state". To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "one of the probability variation symbols", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the "low probability time shortened state" or "low probability time reduction state" or "low probability time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to the "probability non-time reduction state".

In addition, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the opening time is common "10.0 seconds", the interval time between rounds is common "1.5 seconds", and the ending time is common. It is "8.0 seconds". The opening time is the start time set at the start of the jackpot game, the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between rounds, and the ending time is. , The end time set at the end of the jackpot game (after the final round is over). The interval time between rounds is also set in the final round.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type of the second special symbol. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). More specifically, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the game in which the second variable winning device 31 operates) is executed. .. In such a small hit game, since the second variable winning device 31 operates in a predetermined opening pattern (for example, 0.5 seconds x 1 opening), a certain number of prizes are generated in the second large winning opening (average). Then, about 1.7 pieces are generated).

Even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted. Further, even if a small hit is won in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the small hit game ends. It should be noted that the "time reduction state" may be terminated by winning a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 774 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. The contents of the special symbol change preprocessing listed below can be shared in the first special symbol game processing (FIG. 771) and the second special symbol game processing (FIG. 772). However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol. To do. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2090: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the fluctuation time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON.

When it is determined that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2092.

Step S2092: The main control CPU 72 executes the stop symbol reading process. In this process, the information of the stop symbol saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, based on the read stop symbol information, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2094: The main control CPU 72 executes the remaining fluctuation time reading process. In this process, the value of the fluctuation timer (value of the remaining fluctuation time) saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the read value of the variable timer in the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

Step S2096: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol revariation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the re-variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a re-variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This revariation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2098: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning off the variation time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76. As a result, the situation in which the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended is released.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed in step S2090 that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2100.

Step S2100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the number of controlled special symbol operation memories (first special symbol operation memory number or second special symbol operation memory number) remains (is greater than 0). To do. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of operation memories of the target symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2150.

Step S2150: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol operation memory number is 0. That is, if the control target is the first special symbol, it is confirmed whether or not the second special symbol operation memory number is 0, and if the control target is the second special symbol, the first special symbol operation memory is confirmed. Check if the number is 0. This confirmation can also be performed by referring to the value of the special symbol working memory counter. Then, when the other special symbol operation memory number is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process in step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not any of the start winning openings has won a prize for a predetermined time, and if it confirms that there has been no prize for a predetermined time, generates a command for demo production. .. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 771) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 772). At the time of return, it returns to the end address of each special symbol game processing (the same applies hereinafter).

On the other hand, when the other special symbol operation memory number is not 0 (step S2150: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute the demo setting process, and the first special symbol game process (FIG. 771) or the second special symbol game. Return to the process (FIG. 772).

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol operation memory counter to be controlled is larger than 0 (step S2100: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2160.

Step S2160: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag with respect to the other special symbol. The big hit flag or the small hit flag is a flag set when a big hit or a small hit is hit by an internal lottery, and is reset at the end of the big hit game or the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the confirmation in this process is confirmation of whether or not the result of the internal lottery regarding the other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If the variation display of the other special symbol is not executed, the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, so that the confirmation result is inevitably No. Further, although the determination content is set to "big hit or small hit" here, only "big hit" or only "small hit" may be used.

In this process, when a value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2202. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol, that is, when the value is "00H" (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S2200. To execute.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the special symbol to be controlled. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be controlled) stored in the RAM 76, and the value after the subtraction. Is set to "Working memory number at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process, the display mode of the number of stored symbols is changed (decreased by 1) for the control target of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random number value (big hit determination random number value) is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, second). Lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high-probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low-probability state. To. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag to "01H". By executing such processing, when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game, the main control CPU 72 can execute a special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) with a winning probability corresponding to the currently set set value. Yes (lottery execution means).

Step S2302: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit determination process (internal lottery).
When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution means).

The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the second variable winning device 31. If the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag to "01H".

In this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning (regulation means other than the non-winning), but the big hit determination table for each state is prepared in advance. The small hit determination table may be written in each ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2202: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the same process as in step S2200 is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination process is completed (step S2302), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2400.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2402, and if the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 is next. Step S2410 is executed.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous small hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the disconnection pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol to be controlled (variation pattern determining means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be controlled, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as non-reach fluctuation, reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to large hits and small hits). Information about the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command.

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process and is currently Check whether the state of is "high probability state" or "time reduction state". For example, in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to the shortened time (for example, about 4 to 12 seconds).

Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. May be shortened. However, when the special fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of stored items. The stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery by the first special symbol, for example, "reach effect" may be generated and the result may be missed, or "reach effect" may be generated and the result may be missed. It is supposed to control the operation. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of 1st special symbol deviation pattern selection table]
FIG. 775 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state) when the first special symbol is out of alignment.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the low-probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "6" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (hereinafter, the same applies).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

The fluctuation pattern may be a fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed (the same applies to the fluctuation pattern selection table below). The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the effect symbol changes once or a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one change of the special symbol.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: 1st pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: 2nd pseudo variation). Pseudo-variation) is a variation in which the pseudo-variation of the effect symbol is executed twice. Further, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: 3rd pseudo variation) is a variation in which the pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed 3 times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: 4th pseudo variation). (Fluctuation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the effect symbol is executed four times.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 776 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state / high probability time shortened state) when the first special symbol is removed.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when non-winning is applicable) in the low probability time shortened state or the high probability time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "21" to "28" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 777 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol out-of-time fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when non-winning is applicable) in the high-probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "41" to "48" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "48" correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 778 is a diagram showing a second special symbol off-time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss due to low probability non-time reduction in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is a specified time (for example, a time of several seconds to several hours)) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation) is set. The table configuration is such that pattern 51) is selected (variable time defining means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “51” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 779 is a second special symbol off-time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss in the second special symbol in the low probability time shortened state, the high probability time shortened state, or the high probability non-time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern 52) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “52” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[See FIG. 774: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (in the case of non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols, which are selectively determined at the time of a big hit, are prepared. The breakdown of the four types is "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 2", "10 round probability variation symbol 3" and "10 round normal symbol". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 1a", "10 round probability variation symbol 1b", "10 round probability variation symbol 1c" and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 780 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "30", "30", "40" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. Further, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 2", and "10 round normal symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. At the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is 100 minutes. 30 (= 30%), and the ratio of selecting "10 round normal symbol" is 40/100 (= 40%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[When the limiter is not reached]
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1" or "10 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1" or "10 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given). ).

[When the limiter is reached]
When the limiter is reached, the number of probability changes is not given even if the game ball passes through the probability change area during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[Winning in non-time saving (non-time saving state)]
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 1", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times.

Further, if the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to the "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is not given. As a result, it shifts to the small hit rush state (latent probability change state). In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times.
On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "10 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Winning in a short time (shortened time)]
If you win during the time reduction, you will be given the same number of time reductions as if you won during the normal time. In addition, the number of time reductions different from the case of winning during normal times may be given.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 781 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and the distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation symbol 3" corresponding to the distribution value is shown. At the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is 100/100 (= 100%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H01H". Become.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[When the limiter is not reached]
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[When the limiter is reached]
When the limiter is reached, the number of probability changes is not given even if the game ball passes through the probability change area during the jackpot game.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.

[Winning in non-time saving (non-time saving state)]
If the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is not given, which corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3" in the non-time reduction period (non-time reduction state).
In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Further, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time reduction number may not be given (even if the time reduction number is 0 times). Good).

[Winning in a short time (shortened time)]
When the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 10,000 times, which corresponds to the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" during the time reduction (time reduction state).
In either case of non-time reduction or time reduction, when the limiter is reached, the probability change number is not given even if the game ball passes through the probability change area, so the time reduction number is given 100 times. ..

FIG. 782 is a diagram showing a winning symbol of a small hit, a winning probability of a small hit, and an opening pattern of a small hit game.
In the first special symbol lottery, there is no small hit.
In the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that it corresponds to a small hit, and in this case, the small hit symbol is selected as the winning symbol.

The small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery is 0, and the small hit probability of the second special symbol lottery is approximately 1/1 (for example, 317/319). The jackpot probability can be 1/319. The winning probability of a big hit or a small hit can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the game. The second special symbol lottery can be set to be out of order.

When a small hit is hit in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit game is executed based on a predetermined opening pattern (0.5 seconds x 1 opening). The second variable winning device 31 is an electric accessory that can shift to an open state in which the second large winning opening 31b is opened based on a predetermined opening pattern when a small hit is hit.

The opening pattern of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit is not limited to the one-time opening pattern, and an opening pattern such as a two-time opening pattern or a three-time opening pattern may be set.
However, the small hit game ends within a certain period of time (for example, within 1.8 seconds) regardless of which opening pattern is set.

[See FIG. 774: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be. In addition, when winning in a state where the fluctuation time shortening function is activated, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern without reach effect) is selected without selecting a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. May be good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 783 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is not distinguished according to the type of jackpot (winning symbol), but a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 784 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "71" to "78" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "71" to "78" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit without the reach effect being performed.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “72” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 785 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state / high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state or the high probability time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "81" to "88" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 786 is a diagram showing an example of the second special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state / high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state or the high probability time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "91" to "98" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "91" to "98" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit without reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “92” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 787 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 101 per non-reach) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “101” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 788 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 102 per non-reach) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[See FIG. 774: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit.
In this process, the type of winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "10 round probability variation symbol 3 (limited to short-time winning)" or "10 round normal". In the case of "design", the main control CPU 72 sets a value (01H) in the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag as the game state flag stored in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, fluctuation time reduction function operation). Means, advantageous state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
The winning symbol at the time of a small hit may be only one type of "small hit symbol that opens once", and in addition to this, for example, "small hit symbol that opens twice" or "small hit symbol that opens three times", etc. You may prepare the type of. As for the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery, a "small hit symbol of one opening" can be provided without being bound by the provision of "two rounds (opening twice) or more".

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

FIG. 789 is a diagram showing a second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit with a low probability of non-time reduction in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is a specified time (for example, a few minutes to several hours)) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small) is set. The table configuration is such that the hit fluctuation pattern 201) is selected (variation time defining means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “201” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 790 is a second special symbol small hit time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit with the second special symbol in the low probability time shortened state, the high probability time shortened state, or the high probability non-time shortened state (variation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern) is set. The table structure is such that 202) is selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “202” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[See FIG. 774: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

Step S2416: The main control CPU 72 executes the number-cut counter value management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the value of the number-cut counter value. The details of the process will be described later. Further, such a process may be executed in the process during the special symbol stop display.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 771, Fig. 772: Processing during special symbol change]
In the special symbol change processing (step S3000 or step S3900), the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer set as described above from the register into the timer counter, and then the passage of time (count number of clock pulses). Or the value of the timer counter is decremented according to the value of the interrupt counter). Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be controlled until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination.

Further, in this process, a determination process of whether or not to activate the skip function is also performed, and in the big hit determination or the small hit determination of the previous special symbol change preprocessing, one of the special symbols is in the process of being out of order and is changing. When it is determined that the other special symbol corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, the skip function is activated for one special symbol. By operating this skip function, the variable display of one special symbol is forcibly terminated.

[FIGS. 771 and 772: Processing during special symbol stop display]
In the process during special symbol stop display (step S4000 or step S4900), the main control CPU 72 uses the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2092, step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 774). Controls the stop display of. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

Here, the execution conditions of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S2300) and small hit determination process (step S2302) will be briefly described.

[Internal lottery correspondence table]
FIG. 791 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of the internal lottery.
In the correspondence table of the internal lottery, when the corresponding special symbol executes the big hit lottery (big hit judgment processing) or the small hit lottery (small hit judgment processing) of the internal lottery, it is executed based on the state of the other special symbol. It is shown that it is decided whether or not to do it.

When the other special symbol is "during jackpot fluctuation (during variable display when the jackpot flag is 01H)", the jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to "missing".

Similarly, when the other special symbol is "small hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", in the internal lottery of the special symbol, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed. You may not execute it. In this case, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to "missing". In the case of "small hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", a method of executing the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery may be adopted.

On the other hand, when the other special symbol is "out of alignment (during display of fluctuation when the jackpot flag or small hit flag is 00H)", the jackpot lottery is first executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, if it does not correspond to a big hit, a small hit lottery is executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to either "big hit", "small hit" or "missing". It should be noted that the out-of-change fluctuation includes waiting for fluctuation and a stop display.

In this way, when one of the special symbols is "big hit fluctuating" (or "small hit fluctuating"), the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the other special symbol, and as a result, the big hit is not executed. No game or small hit game is executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is "big hit fluctuating" (or "small hit fluctuating"), the other special symbol is substantially in a big hit or small hit no lottery state.

[Counter value management process]
FIG. 792 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the counter value management process for cutting the number of times. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described according to an example.

Step S2420: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the number-cut counter value. As for the "count cut counter value", the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", respectively. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), but the number cut counter for the time reduction state is not set. .. Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "high probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is also set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times). Is set to.

Step S2422: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-cut counter value is not 0 (No), after the number-cut counter value command (time reduction count designation command, special count designation command, ST count designation command, etc.) is generated, the main control CPU 72 is next. Step S2424 is executed.

Step S2424: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-cut counter value.
Step S2426: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number-cut counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2428. On the other hand, when the value of the number-of-times cut counter is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 774).

Step S2428: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the flag when the number-of-times cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number-of-count counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), so that the reset is performed in this case. Only the probability fluctuation function activation flag. Further, when shifting to the "low probability time shortening state", the number-of-count counter related to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that the variable time shortening function is reset in this case. Only the activation flag. When shifting to the "high probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), and the number cut counter for the high probability state is also set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times). ), So in this case, the probability fluctuation function activation flag and the fluctuation time shortening function activation flag are reset, but there is a situation where the special symbol fluctuates 10,000 times without obtaining the winning result. The probability of doing so is extremely low.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 774).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 793 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. The content of the special symbol storage area shift processing can be common to the processing of the first special symbol and the processing of the second special symbol. However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol, the control target is the second special symbol. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: First, the main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 corresponding to the special symbol to be controlled. The specific contents of the processing are as already described in the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2212: Further, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the special symbol to be controlled. For example, if the special symbol to be controlled is the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special symbol to be controlled is the second special symbol. If so, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2214: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” for the special symbol to be controlled from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction.

Step S2216: Further, the main control CPU 72 sets an operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction, with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. That is, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol. If the control target is the second special symbol, the preceding value is a value (for example, "BCH") indicating that it is an operation memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2218: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled set in the previous step S2216 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 774).

FIG. 794 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol change. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the special symbol changing processing described below can be common to the first special symbol game processing (FIG. 771) and the second special symbol game processing (FIG. 772). That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S3100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the variable timer (decrements the value corresponding to the interrupt cycle) for the special symbol to be controlled.

Step S3200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the variable timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the fluctuation timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the fluctuation display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000b in FIG. 771 or step S1900b in FIG. 772) in the next interrupt cycle, and processes during special symbol variation display. Is repeated.

On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the fluctuation display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3300.

Step S3300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag for the special symbol to be controlled. When the jackpot flag has a value (01H) set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3400. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S3600.

Step S3400: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In this confirmation process, is it necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol (forcibly terminate the other missed variation) when the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the target special symbol ends? Executed to confirm whether or not. Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3500, assuming that it is necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and it is not necessary to activate the skip function, so that the main control CPU 72 steps next. Execute S3600.

Step S3500: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of activating the skip function for the other special symbol. That is, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of ending the variation display related to the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets 0 to the value of the variable timer for the other special symbol.

Step S3600: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol variation end processing. In this process, a value (01H) is set in the symbol stop display flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76 as the variable display of the special symbol to be controlled ends. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 771) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 772).

Here, the jackpot lottery probability of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is set as follows.
For example, the jackpot probability when the game state is the normal state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a low probability state) is set to about 1/319. Further, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is an advantageous state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a high probability state) is set to about 1/100.

[Skip function and fluctuation time measurement pause function]
Hereinafter, the skip function for forcibly stopping the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol display device 34 are temporarily stopped. The function will be described in detail.

FIG. 795 is a timing chart showing changes in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
Of these, FIG. 795 (A) shows an "example in which the skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function are not activated", and the first special symbol corresponds to the loss while the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display when the skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function are not activated when the fluctuation display is started.

Further, FIG. 795 (B) shows an "example of operating the fluctuation time measurement pause function", and the fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol while the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is a small hit is shown. It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display when the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated when is started.

Further, FIG. 795 (C) shows a "skip function operation example", and when the first special symbol starts the fluctuation display corresponding to the big hit during the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is removed. , It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display at each time when a skip function is activated. The skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function will be described by taking the timing charts (A) to (C) as an example.

[(A) in FIG. 795: Examples of non-operation of each function]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of big hit.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a big hit, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not performed in the internal lottery related to the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery is out of order. In the illustrated example, a loss (non-winning) is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display ends at time t2. Is being done. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

Next, at time t2, since the fluctuation timer for the first special symbol becomes 0, the fluctuation display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss. Since the result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is not won, the skip function does not operate for the second special symbol here. Therefore, the variable display regarding the second special symbol is continued. That is, the variable timer related to the second special symbol (at the time of big hit) is not replaced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening for the other special symbol while the variable display at the time of a big hit (may be a small hit) in one special symbol, the other special symbol Of the internal lottery related to symbols, the big hit lottery is not executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a big hit, the other special symbol is in a non-lottery state.

[(B) in FIG. 795: Example of operation of the fluctuation time measurement pause function]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of a small hit.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a small hit, the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the internal lottery related to the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery is out of order. In the illustrated example, the outlier is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. There is. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

However, here, it is assumed that the fluctuation at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol ends at the time tx, which is the time between the times t1 and t2. Then, the small hit game related to the second special symbol is executed after the time tx. Here, it is assumed that the small hit game is executed from the time tx to the time t2. Then, the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated, and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, when the small hit game ends at time t2, the measurement of the remaining fluctuation time is restarted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the starting winning opening for the other special symbol during the variable display at the time of a small hit in one special symbol, the internal lottery for the other special symbol The big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed. Then, when the small hit game with one special symbol is started, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is suspended, and then the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted after the small hit game is completed. To. During the small hit fluctuation, a small hit lottery or a big hit lottery may be performed.

[(C) in FIG. 795: Example of skip function operation]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of disconnection.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when it is removed, the big hit lottery is first executed in the internal lottery related to the first special symbol, and the small hit lottery is performed when the big hit is not applicable. That is, the first special symbol is in a state where the big hit lottery can be executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. If a small hit is not selected in the first special symbol lottery, a big hit or a miss is applicable. In the illustrated example, a jackpot is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. There is. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

Next, at time t2, since the fluctuation timer for the first special symbol becomes 0, the fluctuation display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol stops and displays in a manner corresponding to the big hit. Since the result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is a big hit, and the variable display for the second special symbol is being executed, the skip function is activated. Then, by the operation of this skip function, the variation display at the time of a miss or a small hit regarding the second special symbol is terminated (forced termination means). Specifically, the variable timer related to the second special symbol is replaced with 0. Therefore, the set fluctuation time will be skipped. It should be noted that the variation display at the time of the skipped second special symbol is not executed again unlike the operation example in FIG. 795 (B).

As described above, in the present embodiment, if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening for the other special symbol while the fluctuation display at the time of loss is displayed for one special symbol, the internal lottery for the other special symbol is a big hit lottery or a small lottery. A winning lottery is executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is not in the variable display at the time of big hit or small hit, it means that the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is possible for the other special symbol. For example, if the game ball wins the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol while the fluctuation is displayed when the second special symbol is out of alignment or the second special symbol is waiting for the fluctuation as described above, the first Of the internal lottery related to special symbols, the big hit lottery is executed first, and then the small hit lottery is executed. In addition, while the fluctuation display at the time of a miss or a small hit regarding one special symbol (second special symbol) is started, the fluctuation display at the time of a big hit regarding the other special symbol (first special symbol) is started and ends after the fluctuation time elapses. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is skipped, and the variable display can be forcibly terminated.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
FIG. 796 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 in FIG. 771 or step S4900 in FIG. 772). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the processing during the special symbol stop display described below can also be common to the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing. That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer for the special symbol to be controlled (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 771 or step S1900b in FIG. 772) in the next interrupt cycle, and processes during the special symbol stop display. Is repeated.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set.

Step S4603: Then, when it is confirmed that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4300: Yes), the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. To do. This confirmation process is to confirm whether or not it is necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol when the variation display at the time of small hit of the target special symbol ends. Will be executed.

Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is displaying the fluctuation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next steps S4604a, assuming that it is necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol. And step S4604b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), it is assumed that the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and it is not necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function, and the main control CPU 72 Then executes step S4605.

Step S4604a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of activating the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol, that is, a process of saving the fluctuation information of the other special symbol. Specifically, in order to temporarily stop the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 transmits the current fluctuation timer value (the value of the remaining fluctuation time) and the information of the stop symbol to the RAM 76. Execute the process to save.

Step S4604b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning on the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 (variable time measurement pause means). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended.

Step S4605: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as a control internal state flag for the special symbol to be controlled. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress for the special symbol to be controlled. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4600: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table for the special symbol to be controlled to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated, and the fluctuation time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3" or "10 round normal symbol", the value corresponding to "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the special symbol to be controlled is in the jackpot. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 774). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3" or "10 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.
Then, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Then, when the processing of step S4500, step S4602 or step S4606 is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing (FIG. 771 or 772).

[Display output management process]
FIG. 797 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 766) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 lights the LED corresponding to the time saving state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Output a signal. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. In this case, the main control CPU 72 determines the launch direction of the game ball according to the progress of the game (value such as special game management status or internal state) (launch direction determining means). For example, when the gaming state is a left-handed gaming state (when it is a low-probability non-time shortening state), the main control CPU 72 determines that the gaming ball should be launched into the first gaming area (left-handed gaming area). On the other hand, when the game state is a right-handed game state (low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, high probability non-time shortened state, big hit game state, small hit In the game state), the main control CPU 72 determines that the game ball should be launched into the second game area (right-handed area). Then, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a launch position designation command. The launch position designation command includes information for identifying whether the game state is the left-handed game state or the game state is the right-handed game state. The generated launch position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". In addition, as in this embodiment, when there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot), it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described.
FIG. 798 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the jackpot closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

When the jackpot game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command during the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is in progress to the effect control device 124.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 799 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. The number of winnings), the operation pattern of the probabilistic region solenoid 95b, the opening time, and the ending time are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the probabilistic region solenoid 95b, the interval time between rounds, the opening time, and the ending time are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 773. Is. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 774). Specifically, if "10 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3" or "10 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 10. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation region timer (the opening time of the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 95b set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily closes the jackpot interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (temporarily closing the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 95b set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for this. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 798).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 800 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 773, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 799) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area opening process. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 95b is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 773. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 30d is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the first variable winning device 30.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 799) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 95b is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 30d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the first variable winning device 30.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. To do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 95b is executed. As a result, the probability variation region blade member 30d is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 799) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 799) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, "the number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. If such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 801 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 798).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 798). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a big hit again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot, and performs steps S5402 to S5408 above. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (10 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 798). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 802 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 798).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 774) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5508: When the value is set in the probability variation function operation flag (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 10000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, for example, and becomes the above-mentioned number-cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol changes (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the high probability state is not provided with a substantial upper limit, the probability that the probability variation number is subtracted to 0 is low. If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 774) during the above-mentioned special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value is set in the variable time shortening function operation flag (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 10000 times). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the variable time shortening function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

By executing such a process, when the fluctuation time shortening function operation flag is ON (when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 provides a predetermined condition (electric chew support) for the game. Time reduction state (advantageous state, winning state) to which advantageous conditions (state in which electric chew support is performed) are applied compared to non-time reduction state (normal state, non-winning easy state) to which no state) is applied It is possible to shift to (easy state) (advantageous state transition means).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the limiter management process. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability medium" is generated as the internal state, and if the fluctuation time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction". Generates a state specification command that represents "medium". These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 771 and step S1900b in FIG. 772) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 798).

[Limiter management process]
FIG. 803 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the limiter management process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning of any of the probabilistic symbols (10 round probabilistic symbols 1 to 3).

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the current winning is a winning with any of the probabilistic symbols (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current winning is a winning with any of the probabilistic symbols, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5603a.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting (setting to 0) the number of limiters. Here, the number of limiters indicates the number of consecutive times that can be continuously shifted to the high probability state, that is, the number of consecutive times that the special game (big hit game) can be continuously executed. In this embodiment, a game specification in which four big hit games including the first hit are set as one set is adopted, and the value of the number of limiters takes any value of "0" to "3". ..

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can set the number of limiters (continuous number of times) capable of continuously shifting to the high probability state (continuous number of times setting means).

Here, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the limiter number to the effect control device 124 at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, at the start of big hit, at the end of big hit, at the time of updating the limiter number, etc.). The limiter count command including can be sent.

Step S5603a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning is a winning in a low probability state (whether or not the internal state at the time of winning is a low probability non-time shortened state or a low probability time shortened state). To do.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning is a winning in a low probability state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5603b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current winning is a winning in a low probability state (No), that is, when the current winning is a winning in a high probability state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S5604.

Step S5603b: The main control CPU 72 executes the limiter number setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the limiter number of times to "4". For control purposes, the number of limiters is temporarily set to "4", but it is immediately subtracted to "3" in the next process.

Step S5604: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting (-1) the number of limiters.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can update the limiter number of times based on the winning in the internal lottery (continuous number of times updating means).

Step S5606: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the "limiter number of times" and the specified value (for example, "0") match.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the "limiter number of times" and the specified value match (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5608. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the value of the "limiter number of times" and the specified value match, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot end process (FIG. 802).

Step S5608: The main control CPU 72 executes the transition process to the low probability state.
In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process when the specified value is reached (means for executing the process when the specified value is reached), which limits the transition to the high probability state (advantageous gaming state).

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to a winning symbol that does not shift to a high probability state (advantageous gaming state) by setting the probability variation number to 0 even if the probability variation number is set to 10000 times. Execute the processing when the specified value is reached (that is, the processing that does not shift to the high probability time shortened state without changing the winning symbol) (processing when the specified value is reached).

The process when the specified value is reached is a process that assumes that the winning symbol does not shift to the high-probability state even if it corresponds to the winning symbol that shifts to the high-probability contraction state (that is, the process of changing the winning symbol). There may be. In addition, the processing when the specified value is reached is a process that makes it impossible to select the winning symbol that shifts to the high probability state when the specified value is reached, that is, a process that makes it possible to select only the winning symbol that does not shift to the high probability state (breakdown of big hits (breakdown of big hits). (Breakdown of the winning symbol selection table) may be a process) in which all the winning symbols do not shift to the high probability state).
As a result, when the limiter is reached, the state is forcibly shifted to the low probability state.

Step S5610: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the number of limiters. As a result, the number of limiters is reset to "0 times". When this process is executed, the limiter count has already been reset to "0 times" in the subtraction process in step S5604, so that this process may not be executed.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot end processing (FIG. 802).

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described.
FIG. 804 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 805 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the present embodiment, a predetermined opening pattern (opening pattern that opens 0.5 seconds x 1 time) is set. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the second variable winning device 31 is operated.

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is a game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. The time is set so that the timers are lined up without any gap (for example, about 2 seconds).

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 804). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

When the small hit game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command during the small hit game indicating that the small hit game is in progress to the effect control device 124.

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 806 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is in the countdown (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 805) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (the opening second large winning opening 31b) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed in one opening (in one small hit game). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 804). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of small hit at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 is in step S6301 to step S6310 described above. Repeat the procedure.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 805).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 804). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 804). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 807 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 805). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 804) at the time of small hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 804). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process, and the actual number of opening times is set as the set number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times). The opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the value is reached.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 804) at the time of small hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 808 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 804).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "in small hit game" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 771 and step S1900b in FIG. 772) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.

[Game flow]
FIG. 809 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. [F1] In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "low probability state" (low probability non-time shortening state). [F1] In the normal mode, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

In [F1] normal mode, if [F2] "10 round normal symbol" is won, [F3] 10 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, [F4] coast mode is entered. To do.

[F4] In the coast mode, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "high probability state" (low probability time shortened state). In the [F4] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F5] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

[F4] In the coastal mode, the variable start winning device 28 operates with high frequency, and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates. In the second special symbol lottery, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it corresponds to a substantially small hit, but in the coast mode in which the low probability time is shortened, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency, so that it is downstream of the variable start winning device 28. The game ball hardly reaches the second variable winning device 31 that executes the small hit game.

In [F1] normal mode, if [F6] "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is won, [F7] 10 round jackpot game (special bonus effect) is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, [F8] fireworks mode is set. Transition.

[F8] In the fireworks mode, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "high probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "high probability state" (high probability time shortened state). In the [F8] fireworks mode, when the [F9] limiter is reached (when the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is hit three times and the big hit game is executed three times), the mode shifts to the [F4] coast mode.

[F8] In the fireworks mode, the variable start winning device 28 operates with high frequency, and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates. In the second special symbol lottery, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it corresponds to a substantially small hit, but in the fireworks mode in which the probability time is shortened, the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency, so that it is downstream of the fireworks mode. The game ball hardly reaches the second variable winning device 31 that executes the small hit game.

In the [F1] normal mode, when the [F10] "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the [F11] 10 round big hit game and the premium bonus effect by the small hit rush state are executed.

In the small hit rush state, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "high probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "low probability state" (high probability non-time shortening state). When the [F12] limiter is reached during the execution of the premium bonus effect (when the "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is hit 3 times and the big hit game is executed 3 times), the mode shifts to the [F4] coast mode. If the [F12] limiter is reached during the execution of the premium bonus effect, the mode may be shifted to the [F1] normal mode.

In the high-probability non-time shortening state, the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, but since the variable start winning device 28 does not operate frequently, the second variable winning device 31 that executes the small hit game downstream thereof , Game balls are coming to arrive frequently.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 executes a variable display effect using an effect symbol or the like.

The effect symbols used in the normal mode include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 on the left, middle, and right. Liquid crystal. Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, middle area, and right area on the screen.

FIG. 810 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect is performed between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used) starts the variable display and the time when the stop display (including the fixed stop) is performed. It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 810 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory number display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually, for example, "15 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to them (for example, red display color). The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board instead of being displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 810 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol strings on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (effect execution). means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 by the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (the changing memory display effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Left production symbol stop]
In FIG. 810 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 810 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed increases accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 810 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 810 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 810 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 811 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode.
The coast mode is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol". The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 811 (A): The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "coast mode". The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 811 (B): And this fluctuation is won in a small hit, and all the production symbols are stopped and displayed by the end of this fluctuation ("1"-"1"-. "5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit.

In FIG. 811 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. If you win a big hit in the coastal mode, the reach effect will be executed and you will be a big hit.

[Example of fireworks mode production]
FIG. 812 is a continuous view showing an example of the effect of the fireworks mode.
The fireworks mode is shifted to after the end of the jackpot game in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 1". The fireworks mode is a "high probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 812 (A): The variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks mode". The background image in the fireworks mode is a background image with the motif of an image in which fireworks are launched in the night sky. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 812 (B): Then, a small hit was won this time, and all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("2"-"2"-"6" due to the end of this fluctuation. ). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit.

In FIG. 812 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. If you win a big hit in the fireworks mode, the reach effect will be executed and you will be a big hit.

813 to 815 are continuous views showing an example of the first effect of the premium bonus effect.
The first effect example is an effect example in which the memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" does not exist in the memory of the first special symbol.

The premium bonus effect is a big hit game state based on the winning of "10 round probability variation symbol 2" or "10 round probability variation symbol 3" and a small hit rush state that shifts between two big hit games (small hits occur frequently). It is executed as a series of big hit-like effects using the state). The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 813 (A): When the "10 round probability variation symbol 2" is applied at the time of the first hit (when the jackpot is from the low probability non-time shortened state), the premium bonus effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot game. In the premium bonus production, the character information of the premium bonus and the character dedicated to the premium bonus are displayed.

[V prize → execution of guaranteed number of balls reported]
In FIG. 813 (B): In the first round in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the probability variation region is opened for a long time. Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the guaranteed number of balls to be announced is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect of displaying 3000 character information is executed as a guaranteed number of balls to be announced. The premium bonus effect in which the guaranteed number of balls to be notified is executed is the first big hit effect (first special game effect) that suggests that a continuous big hit game is executed. Here, the character information of 3000 means the minimum number of game balls to be paid out in the premium bonus effect (= one big hit (1000 balls) x 3 big hits). In the present embodiment, 4000 game balls are paid out when all the limits are exhausted, but since the final jackpot is an ending bonus, at least 3000 game balls are paid out in the premium bonus production.

[Guaranteed ball icon display production]
In FIG. 813 (C): Following the guaranteed ball number notification effect, the guaranteed ball icon display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a guaranteed exit icon displaying 3000 character information is displayed. Once the guaranteed ball exit icon is displayed large on the screen, it will continue to be displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen until the number of acquired balls reaches 3000.

[Incremental production]
In FIG. 814 (D): During the execution of the premium bonus effect, the game ball is moved to the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) or the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b). When the ball is entered, the chopping effect is executed every time 10 game balls are entered. The ticking effect is executed in the display mode of 001RUSH to 999RUSH. 1RUSH means that 10 game balls have entered the big winning opening, that is, a profit equivalent to one round of balls has been obtained.

[Acquired ball display production]
In addition, at the lower right of the display screen, the winning ball display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the character information of "100/3000" is displayed. With such a display, in the premium bonus production, the acquisition of 3000 game balls is guaranteed at a minimum (denominator part), and 100 game balls have been paid out so far (numerator part). Is expressed.

In FIG. 814 (E): In the ticking effect, the number part of the character information is updated every time 10 game balls are inserted into the large winning opening, such as 002RUSH and 003RUSH.

In FIG. 814 (F): Even if the jackpot game ends and the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the premium bonus effect is continuously executed. Here, the small hit variation of the second special symbol is executed. The effect pattern is displayed in a small variation at the lower center of the screen. The fourth symbol Z2 is also in a fluctuating state. The first special symbol is in a stopped state.

In FIG. 815 (G): In substantially synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the small hit game is started. When the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 31 is opened, and the game ball can be inserted into the second large winning opening 31b. Then, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

[Incremental production]
Here, too, the nicking effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the ticking effect is performed in the display mode of 011RUSH. In addition, at the lower right of the display screen, the winning ball display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the character information of "1100/3000" is displayed.

In FIG. 815 (H): When the small hit game is completed, the next variation starts. The effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 are in a fluctuating state.

In FIG. 815 (I): In substantially synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot, the jackpot game is started. Even if the jackpot game is started, the premium bonus effect will continue to be executed. Then, the premium bonus production continues until the small hit rush state immediately before the final big hit game that reaches the limiter ends.

FIG. 816 is a continuous diagram showing a second production example of the premium bonus production.
The second effect example is an effect example in which the memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" exists in the memory of the first special symbol.

In FIG. 816 (A): When the first hit (the big hit from the low probability non-time shortened state) corresponds to the "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the premium bonus effect is executed.

[V prize → non-execution of guaranteed number of balls reported]
In FIG. 816 (B): In the first round in the case of corresponding to "10 round probability variation symbol 2", the probability variation region is opened for a long time. Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region, the guaranteed number of balls to be announced is normally executed. However, here, since the memory of the first special symbol has a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol", the guaranteed number of balls to be notified effect (the effect of displaying 3000 character information) is not executed. The premium bonus effect in which the guaranteed number of balls notification effect is not executed is the second big hit effect (second special game effect) that does not suggest that a continuous big hit game is executed.

[Other productions]
In FIG. 816 (C): In this case, it is possible not to execute the guaranteed ball exit icon display effect or the acquired ball exit display effect.

817 and 818 are continuous views showing other production examples related to the premium bonus production.

In FIG. 817 (A): The game is proceeding in the state of the premium bonus effect (small hit rush state). The guaranteed ball exit icon is displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the acquired ball is displayed in the lower right of the screen (2900/3000).

In FIG. 817 (B): Here, it is assumed that the number of acquired balls has reached 3000 (3000/3000). In this case, the guaranteed ball icon at the upper left of the screen is hidden. While the guaranteed ball icon is displayed, the guaranteed period is continuing, so the premium bonus effect will not end, but when the guaranteed ball icon is hidden, the guaranteed period will end, so the premium bonus effect will not end. , It becomes an unknown state when it ends (a state where it can be finished at any time).

[Special character display production]
In FIGS. 817 (C) and (D): When the guaranteed ball exit icon is hidden, an effect in which a special character is displayed may be executed. As shown in FIG. 818 (C), when the female character is displayed, it is determined that at least "5 RUSH minutes (round games for 5 rounds)" remain. Further, as shown in FIG. 818 (D), when the male character is displayed, it is confirmed that at least "8 RUSH minutes (8 rounds worth of round games)" remains.

In FIG. 818 (E): Then, it is assumed that the fourth big hit including the first hit is won. The effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z2 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

In FIG. 818 (F): In this case, the ending bonus effect is executed. The ending bonus effect is an effect that is executed after the premium bonus effect is completed, and is executed during the execution of the jackpot game when the limiter is reached (during the execution of the final jackpot game).

[Example of reach production]
819 to 822 are continuous views showing an example of the reach effect. Before the reach effect is executed (before the tempai) and during the execution (after the tempai), various notice effects are executed. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 819 (A): The rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll vertically on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started. Here, it is assumed that a production pattern that becomes a big hit after the reach production is selected.

[Dialogue notice production]
In FIG. 819 (B): When a certain time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the dialogue notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, an animal character (for example, a snake) is performing a production in which the line "chance" is uttered.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 819 (C): The left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed in order or at the same time. Here, the left effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped and displayed at the left side of the screen, and the right effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped and displayed at the right side of the screen. As a result, the reach states of the numbers "5"-"changing"-"5" are generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen, and an effect of outputting the voice "reach!" Is executed.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 820 (D): After a while after the reach state occurs, images representing animal characters (for example, polar bears) form a group and pass on the screen from right to left. (Direction) is performed.

In FIG. 820 (E): The reach effect continues even after the advance notice effect is executed after the reach occurs. In the illustrated example, a production in which a male character appears on a train is executed. At the upper center position of the screen, the variable display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("5"-"changing"-"5").

In FIG. 820 (F): Then, the effect of stopping the train is executed, a male character appears from the train, and the effect of saying "I am the other party !!" is executed.

In FIG. 821 (G): Following this, a "pumpkin ghost" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen, a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen, and "VS" appears in the center of the screen. The effect that the character "" appears is performed. This makes it possible to teach the player that the battle is about to begin.

In FIG. 821 (H): Then, at the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" delivers innumerable punches, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a win.

In FIG. 821 (I): At the final stage of the reach effect, the cut-in notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a female character or the like is displayed in the area cut left and right on the screen, and the background color of the cut-in is green (weak cut-in). In addition, another type of cut-in notice effect in which the background image is red may be executed (strong cut-in).

[Decisive character production]
In FIG. 822 (J): When the current fluctuation is the winning fluctuation, the deciding character effect is executed at the final stage of the fluctuation. In the illustrated example, the effect of the movable body 40f falling in the center of the screen is executed as the effect of the decisive object. The movable body 40f can be raised and lowered by a link mechanism (not shown), a motor, or the like, and can be tilted in a lowered state.

[Direction at the time of winning]
In FIG. 822 (K): After that, when the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small along with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a win (winning). There is. At the upper center position of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("5"-"5"-"5"). However, all three sets of production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the fluctuation of the production symbols has not completely stopped. At this time, the first special symbol is in a fluctuating state, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also fluctuated and displayed.

In FIG. 822 (L): The stop display effect is also performed on the effect symbol in substantially synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. Stop display of the effect symbol The effect is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. After that, a big hit effect is executed according to the winning symbol.

[Example of rainbow color filter production]
823 to 827 are continuous views showing an example of the production of the rainbow color filter. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 823 (A): The rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll vertically on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started. Here, it is assumed that the effect pattern that becomes a big hit after the reach effect is selected, and that it corresponds to the big hit (the big hit of "10 round probability variation symbol 2") in which the premium bonus effect is executed.

[Dialogue notice production]
In FIG. 823 (B): When a certain time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the dialogue notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, an animal character (for example, a snake) is performing a production in which the line "super heat" is uttered.

[Premium production]
In FIG. 823 (C): The premium production is executed after the dialogue preview production is completed. In the illustrated example, a premium character (for example, a dog) wearing a rainbow-colored aura appears from the right side of the screen. When the premium character is displayed, "big hit" and "10 round probability variation symbol 2 winning" are confirmed. In other words, the premium production is a big hit confirmation production.

[Emphasis production]
In FIG. 824 (D): When a premium character appears, an emphasis effect (appeal action) that emphasizes the appearance of the premium character is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect of rotating the display screen and sucking it backward is executed, and when the display screen becomes small to some extent, an effect of returning to the original size is executed.

[Rainbow color filter]
In FIG. 824 (E): Here, the rainbow color filter is superimposed and displayed on the entire display screen. The iridescent filter is a transparent or translucent iridescent filter (sheet-like image).
As a result, the effect executed in the hierarchy lower than the rainbow color filter can be confirmed through the rainbow color filter.
Specifically, a premium character wearing a rainbow-colored aura is moving to the left side of the screen, and such an effect can be confirmed through a rainbow-colored filter. The rainbow-colored filter is a big hit confirmation effect as well as a premium effect.

[Information display effect]
In addition, when the rainbow color filter is displayed, the information display effect is also executed. The information display effect is an effect of displaying a strip-shaped information image BI in which character information (character information approaching the premium bonus) suggesting a jackpot effect to be executed after this is displayed.

Here, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 (special effect symbols), markers M1 and M2 (stored images), the display area before fluctuation X1, the display area X2 during fluctuation, and the information image BI are placed in a higher hierarchy than the rainbow color filter. It is displayed.
On the other hand, the effect symbols, various effects, background images, etc. are displayed in a lower layer than the rainbow color filter.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 824 (F): The left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed in order or at the same time. Here, the left effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped and displayed at the left side of the screen, and the right effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped and displayed at the right side of the screen. As a result, the reach states of the numbers "5"-"changing"-"5" are generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen, and an effect of outputting the voice "reach!" Is executed.

The effect symbols are displayed in a hierarchy lower than the rainbow color filter. Therefore, the player can confirm the variable display effect by the effect pattern through the rainbow color filter.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 825 (G): After a while after the reach state occurs, images representing animal characters (for example, polar bears) form a group and pass on the screen from right to left. (Direction) is performed.

The image of the notice effect after the reach occurs is displayed in the lower layer than the rainbow color filter. Therefore, the player can confirm the advance notice effect after the reach occurs through the rainbow color filter.

In FIG. 825 (H): The reach effect continues even after the advance notice effect is executed after the reach occurs. In the illustrated example, a production in which a male character appears on a train is executed. At the upper center position of the screen, the variable display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("5"-"changing"-"5").

In FIG. 825 (I): Then, the effect of stopping the train is executed, a male character appears from the train, and the effect of saying "I am the other party !!" is executed.

In FIG. 826 (J): Following this, a "pumpkin ghost" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen, a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen, and "VS" appears in the center of the screen. The effect that the character "" appears is performed.

In FIG. 826 (K): Then, at the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" punches innumerably, and the "male character" responds with a chop.

Then, the images related to such a series of reach effects are displayed in a layer lower than the rainbow color filter. Therefore, the player can confirm the reach effect through the rainbow color filter.

In FIG. 826 (L): When the final stage of the reach effect is reached, the cut-in notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a female character or the like is displayed in the area cut left and right on the screen, and the background color of the cut-in is green (weak cut-in).

The image of the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a lower layer than the rainbow color filter. Therefore, the player can confirm the cut-in notice effect through the rainbow-colored filter.

[Decisive character production]
In FIG. 827 (M): When the current fluctuation is the winning fluctuation, the deciding character effect is executed at the final stage of the fluctuation. In the illustrated example, the effect of the movable body 40f falling in the center of the screen is executed as the effect of the decisive object.
Then, the rainbow color filter and the information image BI are hidden at the stage when the deciding character effect is executed. The rainbow color filter and the information image BI may continue to be displayed until the variation of the special symbol is completed.

[Direction at the time of winning]
In FIG. 827 (N): After that, when the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small along with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a win (winning). There is. At the upper center position of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced ("5"-"5"-"5"). However, all three sets of production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the fluctuation of the production symbols has not completely stopped. At this time, the first special symbol is in a fluctuating state, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also fluctuated and displayed.

Since the rainbow-colored filter is hidden at the stage when the deciding character effect is executed, the visibility of the effect pattern is improved.

In FIG. 827 (O): The stop display effect is also performed on the effect symbol in substantially synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. Stop display of the effect symbol The effect is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. After that, the premium bonus effect is executed.

Since the rainbow color filter is hidden even at the stage where the effect symbol is completely stopped, the stop display effect of the effect symbol can be executed in a state where the visibility is improved.

828 and 829 are diagrams schematically showing a hierarchy for displaying various images.
There are many layers for displaying various images, but here, for convenience of explanation, the layers will be divided into five layers.
Here, the first layer L1 is the highest layer, the layer lower than the first layer L1 is the second layer L2, the layer lower than the second layer L2 is the third layer L3, and the third layer L3. The layer lower than the third layer L3 is the fourth layer L4, and the layer lower than the fourth layer L4 is the fifth layer L5.

As shown in FIG. 828 (A), at the stage when the premium character appears, the fourth symbol Z1, Z2, the markers M1 and M2, the pre-change display area X1, and the changing display area X2 are in the first layer L1. No image is displayed in the second layer L2, an image related to the advance notice effect (premium character image) is displayed in the third layer L3, and an effect symbol is displayed in the fourth layer L4. Then, a background image is displayed on the fifth layer L5.

It should be noted that, depending on the content of the effect and the timing at which the effect is executed, each image may be displayed in a layer different from the layer shown here. For example, the effect symbol is displayed on the fourth layer L4, but may be displayed on the layer between the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 depending on the content of the effect and the time when the effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 828 (B), at the stage when the emphasis effect is executed, the fourth symbol Z1, Z2, the markers M1 and M2, the pre-variation display area X1, and the changing display area X2 are in the first layer L1. Is displayed, no image is displayed in the second layer L2, an image related to the emphasis effect is displayed in the third layer L3, an effect symbol is displayed in the fourth layer L4, and the fifth layer is displayed. A background image is displayed on L5.

As shown in FIG. 829 (C), at the stage where the premium character moves to the left, the first layer L1 has the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the markers M1 and M2, the pre-change display area X1, and the changing state. The display area X2 and the information image BI are displayed, the rainbow color filter is displayed in the second layer L2, the image related to the notice effect (premium character image) is displayed in the third layer L3, and the fourth layer L4. The effect symbol is displayed in, and the background image is displayed in the fifth layer L5.

As shown in FIG. 829 (D), at the stage where the premium character is hidden and the effect symbol is in the reach state, the fourth symbol Z1, Z2, the markers M1 and M2, and the pre-change display are displayed on the first layer L1. The area X1, the changing display area X2, and the information image BI are displayed, the iridescent filter is displayed in the second layer L2, no image is displayed in the third layer L3, and the fourth layer L4. Is displayed with an effect symbol in a reach state, and a background image is displayed on the fifth layer L5.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. All of the above-mentioned effects are controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 830 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), special bonus effect management process (step S403), display output process (step S404), and so on. The configuration includes subroutines for lamp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the number of operation memories increases, an effect command when the number of operation memories decreases, a start opening winning sound control command, and a demo effect. Command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, status specification command, round number command, count cut counter value command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, launch position specification command, payout There are medium command, big hit game command, small hit game command, prize ball content command, setting related end specification command, probability change area passage command, limiter count command, etc.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory display effect using the storage marker or the like while referring to the effect command when the number of operation memories increases, the effect command when the number of operation memories decreases, and the like. ..

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the variable display effect or the stop display effect using the effect symbol or the fourth symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or The effect content during the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled (effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.).

The effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for displaying the effect symbol in a layer (fourth layer) lower than the layer (second layer) for displaying the rainbow color filter (covered image) (effect symbol display means).
Further, the effect control CPU 126 moves the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 (special effect symbols) that change in conjunction with the effect symbols in a layer (first layer) higher than the layer (second layer) for displaying the rainbow color filter. Select the effect pattern to display (special display means). The fourth symbol may be a 3-digit mini symbol.

Step S403: In the special bonus effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the special bonus effect (premium bonus effect, ending bonus effect). The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with respect to the basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, change effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 transmits the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 831 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described with reference to a procedure example.

Step S700: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes steps S702 and S703. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute steps S702 and S703.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The effect control CPU 126 places markers M1 and M2 (stored image, reserved image) and images associated therewith (pre-variation display) in a layer (first layer) higher than the layer displaying the rainbow color filter (second layer). Area X1 and variable display area X2) can be displayed (special display means). The markers M1 and M2 are images (images showing the existence of the lottery element, images corresponding to the memory of the lottery element) that are elements that change the effect symbol.

Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes the look-ahead effect management process (look-ahead effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a determination process as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (marker change effect, zone effect, continuous effect, etc.), and if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect Executes the process of determining the specific contents of.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 has an effect content to be executed when the change arrives, and an effect content to be executed in the previous change prior to the change (for example, the content of the marker color change effect and the deviation. The process of determining the content of the stop effect, the content of the zone effect, the content of the effect effect, the content of the continuous effect, the content of other notice effects, and the scenario of these effects) is executed. The determined content is stored (stored) in the look-ahead effect content holding buffer of the RAM 130, and is executed for the fluctuation. The effect control CPU 126 turns on the pre-reading effect executing flag from the time when the pre-reading effect scenario is set until the end of the scenario. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed can be confirmed by the look-ahead effect execution flag. The fluctuation is a fluctuation when the memory (hold) to be read ahead is consumed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 can execute the look-ahead effect that is executed over the fluctuation of the special symbol once or a plurality of times when the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is satisfied. (Pre-reading effect execution means).

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of operating memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery is being changed from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 830).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 832 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination when the large hit variable winning device management process is selected or when the small hit variable winning device management process is selected in the main control CPU 72. Ru. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (reach other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-occurrence notice pattern, a post-occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines (selects) the content of the variable display effect when a small hit is won.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and an effect according to the result. The control information of the content (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type and the gaming state at the time of winning). For example, when the "10 round probability variation symbol 1" is won, the effect control CPU 126 selects a large role medium effect pattern corresponding to the "10 round probability variation symbol 1" as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and produces this effect. Instruct the display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses. Further, when a probability change area passing command is received during the big hit game, the effect control CPU 126 can execute an effect emphasizing that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area. In addition, when "10 round probability variation symbol 2" or "10 round probability variation symbol 3" is won, the process of selecting the image of the big role production corresponding to the premium bonus production and the ending bonus is executed. This process may be executed in this process, or may be executed in the special bonus effect management process (step S403) of FIG. 830.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 833 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 830) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 830). To do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. it can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule (variation time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time, and stop. Determine the display mode and the like. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. When the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect during execution of the variation display effect (at the time of loss). Is the same). In the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and revariated, the pseudo continuous symbol can be stopped at the middle effect symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) and executes a variation schedule (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, reach effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time. In this case, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that such control contents are the same at the time of a big hit and a small hit.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify the player that there is a possibility of a small hit or a big hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 126 wins the lottery for whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (when the specified effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 is elected during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect). The advance notice effect (related to the predetermined effect, which suggests the success or failure of the predetermined effect) suggesting that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode is executed (preliminary effect execution means).

Further, when the effect control CPU 126 determines in the advance notice selection process that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining at which timing during the variable display the advance notice effect is to be started. In addition, various notice effects (step-up notice effect, conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect, character drop effect, next notice effect, title color change effect) executed during the variable display are included in the notice effect. ), Pseudo continuous advance notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect, memory marker change advance notice effect, etc. are also included.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low probability non-time reduction state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. Further, when the stay mode is the "fireworks mode (high probability time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with a fireworks motif. Further, when the stay mode is the "coastal mode (low probability time shortened state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with the coast as a motif. When the stay mode is "high probability non-time reduction state", the process of selecting the background image corresponding to the premium bonus effect is executed, but such a process may be executed in this process. , May be executed in the special bonus effect management process (step S403) of FIG. 830.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 832), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern, and based on various advance notice effect patterns. The notice production is executed.

[Notice selection process]
FIG. 834 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the advance notice selection process.
In this advance notice selection process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute various advance notice effects based on the fluctuation pattern command, and if it is determined to execute various advance notice effects, executes a process of determining the effect contents. To do. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S720: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of fluctuation pattern this fluctuation is.

Step S721: The effect control CPU 126 executes the dialogue advance notice effect lottery process. In this process, the production control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the dialogue advance notice effect by lottery, and if it is determined to execute the dialogue advance notice effect, any kind of dialogue image (for example, chance, intense heat, etc.). To decide whether to display. It should be noted that the rate at which the dialogue image with a high expectation of winning is selected is set higher at the time of winning than at the time of losing.

Step S722: The effect control CPU 126 executes the cut-in notice effect lottery process. The effect control CPU 126 executes this process when executing the reach effect. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect by lottery, and if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect, any kind of cut-in image (for example, weak cut-in). , Strong cut-in, etc.) is displayed. It should be noted that the ratio of the cut-in image having a high expectation of winning is set higher at the time of winning than at the time of losing.

Step S723: The effect control CPU 126 executes the premium effect lottery process. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S724: The effect control CPU 126 executes other advance notice effect lottery processes. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 performs advance notice effects other than the above advance notice effects (step-up advance notice effect, group advance notice effect, pseudo continuous advance notice effect, mini character effect, zone effect, marker color change effect, shape change effect, look-ahead effect. , Button effect, effect effect, deciding character effect, etc.) is selected by lottery.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 833).

[Premium production lottery process]
FIG. 835 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the premium production lottery process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S730: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Whether or not it is a big hit can be confirmed by the fluctuation pattern command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S731, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current fluctuation is a big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 determines. The process returns to the advance notice selection process (FIG. 834).

Step S731: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the winning symbol this time is "10 round probability variation symbol 2". The winning symbol can be confirmed by the stop symbol command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning symbol this time is "10 round probability variation symbol 2" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S732, and the winning symbol this time is "10 round probability variation symbol 2". If it cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the advance notice selection process (FIG. 834).

Step S732: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect execution lottery and executes a process of confirming whether or not the effect execution lottery has been won. The effect execution lottery can be a lottery in which the player wins with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/10).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the effect execution lottery has been won (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S733, and when it cannot be confirmed that the effect execution lottery has been won (No), the effect control CPU 126 selects the advance notice. Return to the process (FIG. 834).

Step S733: The effect control CPU 126 executes the premium effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of displaying the premium character during the execution of the variable display effect and selecting an effect pattern for hiding the premium character after a certain period of time (for example, after a few seconds). To do. Premium characters are displayed on the third level.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 can display the premium character (special image) at a predetermined opportunity and hide the premium character after a lapse of a certain period of time (special image display means).

Step S734: The effect control CPU 126 executes the emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an emphasis effect after displaying the premium character. The image related to the emphasis effect is displayed on the third layer.

Step S735: The effect control CPU 126 executes the rainbow color filter effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the rainbow color filter after executing the emphasis effect.

The iridescent filter is preferably displayed while the premium character is displayed. Further, the rainbow color filter is displayed in a layer (second layer) higher than the layer (third layer) in which the premium character is displayed. Further, the rainbow color filter continues to be displayed after the emphasis effect is executed until the deciding character effect is executed. Further, even when the rainbow color filter is displayed, various effects are continuously executed in the lower layers (third layer to fifth layer).

By executing such processing, when the premium character is displayed, the effect control CPU 126 raises the premium character to a layer (second layer) higher than the layer displaying the premium character (third layer). A rainbow-colored filter (transparent or translucent covered image) that covers the image can be displayed (covered image display means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, in the state where the rainbow color filter is displayed, is lower than the layer (second layer) displaying the rainbow color filter (third layer to the third layer). In the 5th layer), it is possible to execute a plurality of effects (variable display effect, notice effect, reach effect, effect of displaying a background image, etc.) in chronological order (effect execution means).

Step S736: The effect control CPU 126 executes the information display effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing an information display effect (an effect of displaying a strip-shaped information image BI) when the rainbow color filter is displayed. The information image BI is displayed in the first layer.

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 makes it possible to display the information image BI in a layer (first layer) higher than the layer (second layer) for displaying the rainbow color filter (special display). means).

When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the advance notice selection processing (FIG. 834).

[Special bonus production management process]
FIG. 836 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special bonus effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the jackpot game transitions to the high-probability non-time reduction state or the high-probability non-time reduction state is in progress.
During the jackpot game that shifts to the high-probability non-time shortening state, is during the jackpot game when the low-probability non-time shortening state or the low-probability time-shortening state corresponds to "10-round probability variation symbol 2", or during the high-probability non-time reduction. It is in the big hit game when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 3" in the shortened state (however, except during the big hit game when the limiter is reached).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the jackpot game to shift to the high-probability non-time reduction state or the high-probability non-time reduction state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S812 to enter the high-probability non-time reduction state. When it cannot be confirmed that the transitional jackpot game is in progress or the high-probability non-time reduction state is in effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826.

Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 executes the premium bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as displaying a background image of the premium bonus effect or displaying a character appearing in the premium bonus effect.

Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a V prize has occurred at the time of the first hit.
The V prize at the time of the first hit corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol 2" in the low probability non-time reduction state or the low probability time reduction state, and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game (V). If you win a prize). Whether or not a V prize has occurred can be confirmed by a probability variation area passage command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the V winning at the first hit has occurred (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S816, and when it cannot be confirmed that the V winning at the first hit has occurred (No), the effect The control CPU 126 executes step S818.

Step S816: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the V prize is generated at the time of the first hit. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S818: The effect control CPU 126 executes the stepping effect management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 enters the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) or the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) during execution of the premium bonus effect. , Every time 10 game balls are inserted, the chopping effect is executed. In the stepping effect, every time the stepping effect is executed, a process of updating and displaying (+1) the numerical portion of the character information of RUSH is executed.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 executes the acquisition / exit management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 enters the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b) or the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) during execution of the premium bonus effect. Every time a game ball enters, a process of updating and displaying (+10) the character information of the molecular part displayed in the acquired ball display effect is executed. The update display of the character information can be executed based on the prize ball content command.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 executes the guaranteed exit icon management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting an effect pattern for erasing the guaranteed ball exit icon when the character information of the molecular part displayed in the acquired ball output display effect reaches a specified value (3000). Execute. The process of first displaying the guaranteed ball exit icon is executed in the process of generating the V prize at the time of the first hit in step S816.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special character management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of erasing the guaranteed ball exit icon when the character information of the molecular part displayed in the acquired ball exit display effect has reached the specified value (3000). ), And if the remaining number of RUSH remains more than a certain number, an execution lottery for whether to display a special character is executed, and if this execution lottery is won, an effect pattern for displaying the special character is selected. Execute the process to be performed.

When the remaining number of RUSH is more than a certain number, when the third big hit including the first hit is not executed, the third big hit including the first hit is executed, but at least 5 rounds. It may be a case where a round game for a minute or at least 8 rounds has not been executed.

If at least 5 rounds of round games have not been executed, the effect of displaying a female character as a special character can be selected, and if at least 8 rounds of round games have not been executed, as a special character. An effect of displaying a female character or a male character can be selected.

Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 is a process of confirming whether or not the jackpot game at the time of reaching the limiter is in progress (during the jackpot game when the jackpot is from a high probability non-time reduction and the number of limiters is 1). To execute.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the jackpot game when the limiter is reached (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828, and when it cannot be confirmed that the jackpot game when the limiter is reached (No), the effect is produced. The control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 830).

Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes the ending bonus effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern such as selecting a background image of the ending bonus effect or displaying a character appearing in the ending bonus effect. In the ending bonus effect, the total number of balls acquired during the premium bonus effect and the ending bonus effect may be displayed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 830).

[Processing when V prize occurs at the first hit]
FIG. 837 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when a V prize is generated at the time of the first hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S840: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming the contents of the memory of the first special symbol. For example, when the number of stored first special symbols is one, the contents of the stored first special symbol are confirmed by only one. On the other hand, when the number of stored first special symbols is four, the contents of the stored contents of all the first special symbols are confirmed. The confirmation of the stored contents can be executed based on the fluctuation pattern destination determination command or the like.

Step S842: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not there is a memory corresponding to the “10 round normal symbol” in the memory of the first special symbol confirmed in step S840.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S846 and cannot confirm that there is a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol". In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S844.

Step S844: The effect control CPU 126 executes the guaranteed number of balls notification effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (effect pattern shown in FIG. 813 (B)) for executing a guaranteed number of balls notification effect (effect of displaying 3000 character information), and guarantees output. Executes the process of selecting the effect pattern for displaying the effect of displaying the ball icon and the effect of displaying the acquired ball.

Step S846: The effect control CPU 126 executes the guaranteed number of balls notification effect non-selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (effect pattern shown in FIG. 816 (B)) that does not execute the guaranteed number of balls notification effect (effect of displaying 3000 character information). In this case, it is possible to select an effect pattern that does not execute the guaranteed ball icon display effect or the acquired ball display effect.

When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special bonus effect management process (FIG. 836).

By executing such a process (processes shown in FIGS. 836 and 837), the effect control CPU 126 performs a guaranteed number of balls notification effect according to the memory state of the first special symbol during the execution of the jackpot game. It is possible to execute the first big hit effect including the first big hit effect or the second big hit effect not including the guaranteed number of balls notification effect (special game effect in which the content of the effect differs depending on the memory state of the lottery element) (special game effect execution). means).

Further, by executing such a process, when the effect control CPU 126 does not have a memory corresponding to the "10 round normal symbol" in the memory of the first special symbol (the state of the memory of the lottery element is a continuous special game). (If it is in a state where it can be executed), the first big hit effect (the first special game effect suggesting that a continuous special game is executed) including the guaranteed number of balls notification effect is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed. If there is a memory corresponding to "10 rounds normal symbol" in the memory (if the memory state of the lottery element is a state in which continuous special games cannot be executed), the second big hit that does not include the guaranteed number of balls notification effect It is possible to execute an effect (a second special game effect that does not suggest that a continuous special game is executed) (special game effect execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the memory state of the first special symbol when a V prize (predetermined event) occurs during the execution of the jackpot game. (Special game production execution means).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, in a state where the rainbow color filter is displayed, it is possible to execute a plurality of effects in a time-series manner in a layer lower than the layer in which the rainbow color filter is displayed. Even if the filter display is continued, the player can confirm multiple effects through the transparent or translucent rainbow-colored filter while looking at the rainbow-colored filter, and as a result, a novel game machine is provided. be able to.

(2) According to the present embodiment, since the effect symbol is displayed in a layer lower than the layer in which the rainbow color filter is displayed, the variation display of the effect symbol does not interfere with the rainbow color filter, and the rainbow. You can emphasize the special feeling of the color filter.

(3) According to the present embodiment, since the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 (special effect symbols) are displayed in the hierarchy higher than the hierarchy in which the rainbow color filter is displayed, the fourth symbol plays a role of displaying the lottery result. It is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the symbols Z1 and Z2.

(4) According to the present embodiment, since the markers M1 and M2 (stored images) are displayed in a layer higher than the layer in which the rainbow color filter is displayed, the colors of the rainbow color filter overlap the markers M1 and M2. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the markers M1 and M2 are all winning.

(5) According to the present embodiment, since the information image BI can be displayed in a layer higher than the layer in which the rainbow color filter is displayed, important information for the player without being restricted by the rainbow color filter. Can be reliably transmitted.

(6) When the premium production (display of the premium character) ends in a certain time, there is a problem that the premium production is overlooked or it is difficult to notice even if it is viewed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rainbow color filter is displayed together with the premium effect, and the trigger for hiding the displayed rainbow color filter is the variable end (until the execution of the deciding character effect). Then, by adopting such a configuration, an effect (premium effect) that triggers the display of the rainbow color filter is generated, and after the rainbow color filter is displayed, the rainbow color filter is displayed for a long time until the fluctuation ends. Can be displayed. As a result, after executing the premium effect (after the appearance of the rainbow color effect), multiple effects can be executed with the rainbow color filter left on the display screen, and the jackpot confirmed effect can be enjoyed until the end of the fluctuation. Not to miss a photo (which can provide the player with a longer opportunity to take a photo).

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of effect described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine not having a probability variation region.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine, but the present invention may be applied to a non-simultaneous turning machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the content of the jackpot effect is different depending on whether the memory of the first special symbol has a jackpot corresponding to the normal symbol or not, but the winning symbol of the second special symbol has a normal symbol. In the case of a game specification in which is present, the content of the jackpot effect may be different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot corresponding to the normal symbol in the memory of the second special symbol.

In the above-described embodiment, the special image has been described with the example of the image of the premium character with the big hit confirmed, but the special image may be an image without the big hit confirmed (an image of a specific advance notice effect or an image of a specific character).

In the above-described embodiment, the covering image has been described with the example of the rainbow color filter displayed on the full screen, but may be an image displayed on a part of the display screen (for example, an image such as an effect).

The above-described embodiment can also be modified as follows.
(1) As an effect that can be displayed lower (lower layer) than the rainbow color filter, a character display effect in which the shape (silhouette) of the displayed object differs depending on the degree of expectation may be executed, and it can be displayed higher than the rainbow color filter. As an effect, an icon display effect in which the shape (silhouette) of the displayed object is the same or substantially the same may be executed depending on the degree of expectation. In this case, the color of the effect lower than the rainbow color filter effect becomes unclear due to the rainbow color filter, but the recognition of the silhouette is not easily hindered. In the production higher than the color filter production, the rainbow color filter does not hinder the color recognition, so the degree of expectation can be transmitted by the color instead of the silhouette.

Specific examples of each production are as follows.
(Example 1) Character display effect One of the characters A, B, and C is displayed according to the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning). Each character has a different shape and size. Characters A, B, and C may contain similar colors.
(Example 2) Icon display effect Any of the icons A, B, and C is displayed according to the degree of expectation. Colors and patterns differ depending on the icon. The icons A, B, and C may have the same or substantially the same shape.

(2) It is possible to make the effect performed during the period covered with the rainbow filter higher in expectation than the effect performed during the period not covered by the rainbow filter.
For example, when it is decided to execute an effect by the rainbow color filter, the effect selection to be executed during the execution period of the rainbow color filter is set to a ratio that makes it easy to select the effect with high expectation, and before the start of the rainbow color filter. As for the production performed during the period of, the production with low expectation may be selected at a ratio that is easy to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to collect the high-expectation effects that the player wants to see during the execution of the filter that attracts attention (the high-expectation effects can be executed frequently), and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(3) The rainbow color filter effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations (may be executed by a look-ahead effect over a plurality of fluctuations). For example, the effect by the rainbow color filter is started from the middle of the first variation, and the effect by the rainbow color filter is also executed in the second variation and the third variation. In this case, the rainbow color filter is executed before and after the confirmation display (processing at the end of the fluctuation that keeps displaying the result of success / failure for a predetermined time) for the first variation and the second variation, but during the confirmation display, The iridescent filter may not be displayed. As a result, even when the effect by the rainbow color filter is executed over a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result of success or failure on the way from being hindered.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

[Embodiment K]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 838 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 839 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 showing the game board unit 8 in a visible manner. Further, FIG. 840 is a diagram showing a state in which the upper end of the pachinko machine 1 showing the game board unit 8 in a visible manner is tilted rearward. Furthermore, FIG. 841 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 838 to 841.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated so as to face the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the lower side when viewed from the player, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side thereof when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 841) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 838. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 838, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 (see FIG. 839) is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 839, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (a game area on which the game ball flows down, a board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the plate receiving unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the example of the model connected to the card unit is described, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can push the lower plate ball removing lever 6e backward to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration in the game area 8a will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from the built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame (see FIG. 840), and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52, respectively. The speaker 55 in the glass frame is incorporated. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (preliminary effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off unlike the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times that of the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, the player can be made to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Decorative unit]
A decorative unit 400 is attached to the upper front portion of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative unit 400 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined mounting member (mechanical mechanism such as a screw or a hook). The decorative unit 400 may be non-removable from the pachinko machine 1.
The decoration unit 400 (decoration) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light.

The decoration unit 400 includes a main body unit 410 arranged at the upper part and a front lamp unit 420 arranged at the lower part of the main body unit 410.

The main body unit 410 is a cube-shaped member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and emits light when an LED (glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light.

Further, the front lamp unit 420 is a member in which a hemispherical member is coupled to a cylindrical member, and the LED (board surface lamp 53) arranged in the rear game board unit 8 emits light to emit light.

The cylindrical member is preferably colorless and transparent in order to improve the visibility of the upper spherical passage 500, and the hemispherical member is preferably colored and transparent in order to improve the effect of effect.

As shown in FIG. 840, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed with the upper end of the pachinko machine 1 tilted rearward (when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from below the pachinko machine 1), the decoration unit 400 (front lamp unit 420) The upper ball passage 500 arranged behind the above ball passage 500 becomes visible. The upper ball passage 500 is a passage for guiding the game ball to the right-handed area.

The upper ball passage 500 is a first region of the game area 8a on which the decorative units 400 (decorative objects) overlap in the horizontal direction (front-back direction).
On the other hand, the game area 8a other than the upper ball passage 500 is a second area of the game area 8a where the decorative units 400 do not overlap in the horizontal direction.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 841, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later with reference to another block diagram (FIGS. 847 and 848).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyhole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control unit, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 841 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 842 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game state). , Small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.) is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area). The left side portion of the game area 8a is also used in a high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged on the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. There is.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during open operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ) Needs to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It enables the ball to enter the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) retracted from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the 5th round, or the condition that it is the 7th to 10th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the ball into the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31 is a case where the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode) as in the case of the first variable winning device 30, and is a predetermined second condition (for example,). It operates when the condition that it is the sixth round of the jackpot game) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second major winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special entry). Sphere event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second prize opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second large winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends downward to the left, and then extends downward again.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the induction passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability variation region and a hole 31e for the probability variation region are arranged in the middle flow of the guidance passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged downstream of the above.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is turned off, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so that the game ball passes through the upper part of the probability variation region blade member 31d. It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability variation area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is an region through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 31d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region is that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long time. One of a long opening pattern that opens long for (for example, about 20 seconds) and a short opening pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. .. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probability variation region blade member 31d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 31d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 31d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region The opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the blade member 31d for the probability change region in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability change region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the jackpot game, the probability shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the central position to the right side portion thereof. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added.

In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f (for example, a decoration imitating a butterfly) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that have been released are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

A rear lamp unit 430 is arranged above the game board unit 8. After that, the rear lamp unit 430 is arranged at a position overlapping the front lamp unit 420.
An LED (not shown) as a board lamp is arranged in the rear lamp unit 430, and when this LED is turned on, the front lamp unit 420 emits light.

FIG. 843 is a diagram showing only the game board unit 8 and the decorative unit 400. Other parts are not shown.
As shown in this figure, the decoration unit 400 is arranged above the game board unit 8, and the upper end portion of the decoration unit 400 is arranged so as to protrude from the game board unit 8. Therefore, it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

Further, since the decorative unit 400 is arranged so as to project forward from the game board unit 8 (because it is arranged in front of the glass unit), it is possible to give a great impact to the player in this respect as well.

FIG. 844 is a sectional view taken along line VII-VII of FIG. 843.
In the present embodiment, the main body unit 410 of the decorative unit 400 is arranged on the most front side, and the front lamp unit 420 is arranged behind the main body unit 410. Then, the rear lamp unit 430 of the game board unit 8 is arranged behind the front lamp unit 420 with the glass unit (not shown) interposed therebetween.

The upper ball passage 500 is arranged on the front side of the game plate 8b of the transparent resin plate, and the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 are provided on the rear side of the game plate 8b and at positions corresponding to the upper ball passage 500. The LED board 600 is arranged.

The upper ball passage 500 is arranged behind the decoration unit 400. For this reason, the upper sphere passage 500 is not invisible, but tends to be dark. Therefore, by turning on the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 arranged on the back surface of the upper ball passage 500, the upper ball passage 500 becomes brighter and the visibility of the game ball can be improved.

The upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 are first light emitting means arranged at positions corresponding to the upper ball passage 500 (first region).
On the other hand, the board surface lamps 53 other than the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 are second light emitting means arranged at positions corresponding to the game area 8a (second area) other than the upper ball passage 500.

FIG. 845 is a diagram showing the LED substrate 600.
The LED board 600 is a board for lighting the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 (9 LEDs).
As shown in FIG. 845 (A), the upper ball passage lamp L1 is arranged on the lower left side of the LED substrate 600. Further, the upper ball passage lamps L2 to L5 are arranged on the left side of the upper center of the LED substrate 600. Further, the upper ball passage lamps L6 to L9 are arranged on the lower right side of the LED substrate 600.
The reason why the lamps are arranged separately in the upper and lower parts is to secure a sufficient amount of light while illuminating the upper sphere passage 500 from the vertical direction and avoiding other structures (for example, a motor).

Then, as shown in FIG. 845 (B), when the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 are turned on, the upper ball passage 500 arranged in front of the upper ball passage lamps 500 becomes bright, and the game ball passing through the upper ball passage 500. Visibility is improved.

FIG. 846 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). As shown in the figure, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second. A special symbol display device 35 and a game status display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The individual is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, it is memorized that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Suddenly (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the reduced one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started to change. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter, referred to as “common”) for the purpose of controlling the switching between lighting and extinguishing. From a different point of view, the integrated display board 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are driven in order in common units at intervals of interrupt cycles (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, not all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 847 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 are integrated. Further, the main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. Of these, the random number circuit 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the random numbers generated here are It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and receives these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset as needed, and these are circuit boards together with the main control CPU 72. Implemented above. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least a setting value of a plurality of stages regarding the winning probability of the special symbol lottery) (setting changing means), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is opened with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key keyhole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the state shifts to the setting changing state (setting change state, setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared. To do.

In the state where the setting is being changed, the display is not performed on the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38), and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and a set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off. , Move to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, but the setting change switch may be separately provided without using the RAM clear switch 304.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). ..

Similar to the state where the setting is being changed, the state where the setting is being confirmed is not displayed on the main display, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. The set value is displayed. In the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being confirmed ends, and the power is temporarily turned off. After shifting to the previous state, it shifts to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls. Further, the probability variation region switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the probability change area switch 95 are used. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 to the display board 89.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 sets the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening) to the number of outs (out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying the base calculated by dividing by the number of game balls detected in. The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

The game board unit 8 is formed with a merging passage for merging game balls that have passed through all the winning openings and out openings, and an out switch can be provided in this merging passage. The out switch detects a game ball passing through the confluence passage, and each time the game ball is detected, a detection signal is input to the main control device 70. The main control device 70 can count the number of out spheres based on the detection signal input from the out switch. Since the game balls launched into the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch is the number of launch balls launched into the game area 8a, that is, the game area. The number of discharges (number of out balls) discharged from 8a can be counted.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream of the probability variation region, and a first large winning opening. A solenoid 90, a second winning opening solenoid 97, and a solenoid 99 for a probability variation region are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the blade member 31d for the probability variation region. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100. A payout detection switch can be arranged in the vicinity of the payout counting switch 106.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch solenoid 110 is installed together with a launch control board 108 (ball launching means). Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, when the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted into the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 is built in together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, board surface lamps 53, upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9, and a movable body motor 57. The voice IC 134 also controls the driving of the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. The internal functional configuration of such an effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to the following figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of various effects commands (hereinafter, referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56 and 58. Further, a volume control switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136 in addition to the handle lever 62, the button motor 63, the push button 64, and the direction key 66, and when the player operates these operating members, they are connected. The contact signal of is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136. Here, an example in which the operating members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when the saucer illumination board is installed, the operation members 62, 64, 66 are attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124 to bring the push button 64 into either a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). Switch to (displace).

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board surface lamps 53 and the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board surface lamp 53, the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9, and the movable body motor 57, respectively, via the driver board 138.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 848 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program for controlling the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. To do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

Normally, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect according to the program stored in the control ROM 180. As described above, the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9, and the speaker 54, The control of the effect using a device such as 55, 56, 58 is included. The flow of this effect control can be roughly divided into two stages, "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Etc.) are realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126. In FIG. 847, the internal resources of the effect control CPU 126 are divided into several functional blocks, which are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, and the input control unit 228. Etc. are shown. In the following description, it is assumed that each functional block is treated as an operation subject of the control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operating body. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operating units according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, in addition to the circuit board (effect display control board) and CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190 on which the VDP 152 is mounted, the effect control device 124 also includes an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect. It is equipped with an LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199, and a driver IC 132.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when developing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads out the necessary drawing material from the CG ROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the production, and is integrated with the production control CPU 126 and one chip like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, or a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded sound to the speaker 54 on the glass frame, the speaker 55 in the glass frame, the inner frame speaker 56, and the outer frame speaker 58 via the amplifier, the sound reproduction of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch (as a larger number of channels). May be good). Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting patterns and the brightness patterns of the various lamps 46 to 53 and the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57, which is a drive source for the movable body 40f for effect provided inside the effect unit 40. The SMC 199 is also integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. In SMC199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches the drive voltage applied to the various lamps 46 to 53, the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9, and the movable motor 57. By (or duty switching) and managing the operation, the effect reproduction using the lamp or the movable body is realized. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board surface lamp 53, the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9, and the like are included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. The upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 correspond to LEDs arranged behind the upper ball passage 500. Further, although an example in which the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer illumination board is attached to the glass frame decoration lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the driver IC 132.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the handle lever 62 or the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between set value and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 849 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or conversely clears the backup information to restore the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

850 and 851 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control the interrupt request generated during the execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets the priority defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, multiple interrupt requests will be executed in order. The control of the interrupt process will be described in detail later.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the values of the input port into which the RAM clear signal is input are acquired twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes the standby process here. This process is for securing a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) after the power is turned on, and checking the power off warning signal (signal indicating that the power is being cut off) during that time. It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power cutoff warning signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power off warning signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been operated (switch ON). To do. If the RAM clear switch 304 is not operated (No), step S112 is then executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the time of the previous power cutoff and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A5H") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S114. The process executed when the power is cut off will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of a part of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a continuous work area within a predetermined range based on the address of the backup valid determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. The main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power is cut off by clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes) and keeping the saved valid backup information as it is. (Memory restoration means).

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 should transmit a power return designation effect command (command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124) and a payout command (transmit to the payout control device 92) indicating that the main control CPU 72 has returned from the power cutoff and started. Command) is set.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 304 is operated when the power is turned on (step S110: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S112: No), or the backup information is not normal. In the case (step S114: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S122: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets a RAM clear designated effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and a payout command (command for the payout control device 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been started.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear specification) set in step S124 to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU 72 further includes various other effect commands (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state specification command, special symbol destination determination effect command, effect command when the number of operation memories increases, and decrease in the number of operation memories) required for the effect control. Set the time effect command, the number of times cut counter remaining number command, special game state specification command, launch position specification command, etc.) and output these to the effect command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect command transmission process (step S142), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, internal) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emitting state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal indicating to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits the command transmission to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, the payout control device 92 receives the payout command permission signal to indicate to the main control device 70 that the payout command is permitted to be transmitted. It becomes.

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow of power restoration in the CPU initialization process, and the state of the main control device 70 when the power is cut off based on the backup information. (Step S116), but as part of that, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

The emission permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76. However, the address of the output port buffer targeted here is located in the address space of the RAM 76, which is outside the continuous area targeted for clearing in step S116. Therefore, if, as part of the process of step S116, an attempt is made to clear the value of the specific bit of the specific address in which the launch permission signal is set in addition to the area to be cleared, the specific address is specified and then the specific address is specified. , It is necessary to perform an exceptional process of clearing only the data of a specific bit out of the 8-bit data stored at that address and maintaining the data of the remaining 7 bits, which is a part of the RAM 76. The efficiency of the process of clearing the area becomes very poor. Under such circumstances, the main control CPU 72 handles the launch permission signal in the same manner as other backup target data without clearing the launch permission signal in the previous step S116, and temporarily returns to the state when the power is cut off.

However, at the stage where the backup information is returned in the main control device 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 has not yet been established, and is the payout control device 92 started normally (main control device 92)? It has not been confirmed whether or not the instruction by the command from 70 can be accepted. When the power is cut off while the launch permission signal is ON, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, and as a result, the game ball can be launched even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. A condition will occur. Here, tentatively, the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product (for example, one in which the number of prize balls is modified) that does not conform to the original inspection while the power is cut off, and the main control device 70 is changed by the subsequent power return. When activated, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, which makes it possible to launch the game ball. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch permission signal is explicitly cleared once before the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop, regardless of whether the activation is due to the power recovery or the RAM clear designation (the activation is performed). (Reset to OFF). After that, the main control CPU 72 confirms that the payout command permission signal has been input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then sends the payout command to the payout control device 92. The control that sets the launch permission signal to ON is adopted. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, the launch of the game ball is not permitted unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established. , It is possible to avoid the illegal launch of the game ball when the above-mentioned fraud is committed.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.
Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop, which will be described later, as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt process. By performing this process, it is possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop after the interrupt process is executed.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop from beginning to end.

Step S136, Step S138: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 854), and the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S138, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S138 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S136 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S210 in FIG. 854), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number. The timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU 72 executes the reception command management process. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process is performed according to the result. If the received command is a payout start specification command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation specification command to the payout command buffer. If not, is the received data within a predetermined range (receive command)? If it is out of the range, the payout error specification command is output to the production command buffer, and the payout radio error flag is set according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect command transmission process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124.

Step S144, Step S146: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during the execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes. The content of the interrupt process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Evacuation processing when power is turned off]
Next, a process to be executed when a power cutoff (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power cutoff") occurs will be described. FIG. 852 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the evacuation process when the power is turned off. In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power failure and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller (not shown)). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process, backup means) when the power is turned off, triggered by an input of a power cutoff warning signal (XINT interrupt) to the XINT terminal. Hereinafter, each procedure of the evacuation process when the power is turned off will be described later.

Steps S150 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power cutoff detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits interruption, ends the power off save process, and ends the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIGS. 850 to 851) (FIGS. 850 to 851). Returns to the program address indicated by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: In addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, the main control CPU 72 controls test signal terminals and commands. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the signal.

Step S156, Step S158: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S160: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area.
Step S164: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined value for counting the number of checks of the power failure warning signal in the loop counter.
Step S168: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power off warning signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter.
Step S172: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. If it cannot be confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU 72 shifts from the power outage save process to the CPU initialization process (FIG. 850). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before the transition to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started with other interrupts prohibited.

The processes of steps S166 to S172 described above are so-called standby processes (follow-up processes) executed in preparation for shutting off the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power off warning signal is continuously detected, step S166 to step S168 are repeatedly executed, so that the loop counter does not become "0". Therefore, the standby state will be continued as long as the power supply is sustained. On the other hand, if the detection of the power off warning signal is temporary (for example, detection due to a momentary power failure or the like), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is subtracted with the passage of time. Suddenly, when it becomes "0", the process shifts to the CPU initialization process. That is, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and performs other processing in the situation where the power supply is being cut off. While the standby state is maintained without execution and the upcoming power supply is cut off in a safe state, the CPU is initialized in a situation where the stable power supply is restored after a temporary power failure occurs. Move to processing and restart main processing. By executing such a standby process, it is possible to guarantee a stable gaming operation of the main control device 70 and thus the pachinko machine 1.

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (for example, a circuit including a capacitance element mounted on the main control device 70) after a power failure occurs, the stored contents of the RAM 76 are stored. It is retained without disappearing even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when a power failure occurs after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization process (FIG. 850).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a process to be executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 853 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the command reception interrupt process. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for specifying payout activation indicating that the payout of the game ball has started to the main control device 70, and various devices (for example, for example) related to payout of the prize ball as the game progresses. The command transmitted from the payout device board 100, the full tank switch 161 and the like) to the main control device 70 is relayed and transmitted. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes the command reception interrupt process (SCU interrupt process) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt process). Hereinafter, each procedure of the command reception interrupt processing will be described step by step.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the received data register (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that there is data in the received data register (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU 72 stores the contents of the data register in the receive command buffer.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, permits interrupts, and then ends the command reception interrupt process to perform the CPU initialization process. Return to the main loop (FIG. 851).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 854 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the timer interrupt process. The main control CPU 72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described later.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the values of the AF register (accumulator / flag register pair), BC, DE, and HL register (general purpose register pair) used during the execution of the main loop into the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits interruption. If the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step or later of the timer interrupt process is being executed. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted for the timer interrupt process. The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of the interrupt request signal, the priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. The interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 stores the contents output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 logically ANDs the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 with the inversion result values of the previous input values. Is stored in the input port-on detection flag. As a result, it is possible to grasp the accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag. Specific examples of the various switch signals include pass detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation region switch 95, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. 85, a winning detection signal from the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the like are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and updates counters such as various timers for external information and timers for security signals, in addition to the timer for managing the game time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described in the process of the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 851).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the hit symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 , The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, and another process is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). In this process, the process associated with changing or confirming the set value is executed. If the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed, that is, the game is possible, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process) and instead calculates the base. Then, the process of displaying on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

Further, when the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU 72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end specification command" is an effect command that notifies that the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting has been completed, and the setting-related end specification command includes information on the setting value in addition to this. Can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851) executed in the main loop.

Step S216, Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S216), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2. The variable display or stop display by the special symbol display device 35 is determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the main control CPU 72 determines the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 fluctuates the normal symbol to display the stop display of the normal symbol in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the state management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is recovered to an abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entered into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and a base abnormality (to the back side of the game board unit 8). The degree of risk such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of prize balls in each of the winning openings 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, and 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check if a high condition has occurred. When an abnormal state is detected, the main control CPU 72 causes an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement park and by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124. Notify that.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, The prize ball control counters for each target are added by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. Although the detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is not empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and is not empty (the payout command is not empty). If it is set), various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the start mode when the power is turned on is set in the process of CPU initialization (step S118 and step S124 in FIG. 850) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 850). However, a payout command indicating this activation mode is sent here. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the process for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, the prize ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. To transmit the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFA) is a predetermined number. When less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFA in step S224 executed before the previous time has been transmitted, or when the transmission FIFA is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFA. ) Is executed only.

Further, particularly in step S224 at the time of turning on the power, when the payout command set in the process of CPU initialization processing is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch permission signal with this as an opportunity. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the emission permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the port output process (step S236) described later.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S226: The main control CPU 72 executes the firing position designation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the launch position designation flag to the previous launch position designation flag, and then clears the launch position designation flag. Then, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch position designation flag if the variable winning device is operating or the time reduction function is operating, and the launch position designation flag and the previous launch position designation flag match. If not, a launch position specification command is generated. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851) executed in the main loop.

Step S227: The main control CPU 72 executes the security management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not an illegal prize has been generated and whether or not an excessive prize has been generated based on the input state (ON / OFF) of various prize detection signals. Make a judgment. Further, the main control CPU 72 monitors fraudulent activity based on input signals from a magnetic detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, etc. (not shown). Then, when it is determined that such an error has occurred, the main control CPU 72 generates an error command. The main control CPU 72 can execute the corresponding processing corresponding to the error. Corresponding processing is, for example, processing of rewriting the bit of the winning detection signal due to illegal winning from ON to OFF, processing of generating a warning sound, processing of stopping the game, and the like. The errors detected by the main control CPU 72 include various errors shown in FIGS. 879 to 884, which will be described later. When the main control CPU 72 detects an error, the main control CPU 72 transmits an error command corresponding to each error to the effect control device. The error may include not only an error such as fraud but also the state of the gaming machine (state such as setting change).

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 port outputs external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S230: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 represents various internal states (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). Generate test signals and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. Performs processing necessary for managing the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, in a mode corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol determined in the special symbol game processing (step S216) and the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the operation memory number display, the game state display, and the like. The drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

Here, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port one common at a time in the dynamic port output process (step S204) each time the timer interrupt process occurs. It is output. For example, in the timer interrupt process executed next time, the byte data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process executed one after another, the byte data stored for common 2 is output to the port. , And so on, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in a common unit, and lighting control is performed by a dynamic lighting method. Will be.

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 drives each drive signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region stored in the port output request buffer. , Test signals, etc. are also stored in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU 72 executes the port output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs the port. For example, the drive signals of the solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be made to operate according to the drive signal.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S216 to S236 are executed as a part of the timer interrupt process is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 returns the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt process, and enters the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 851). Return.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main control device 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 850), which is the main control program, the parallel that is the source of the XINT interrupt (power cut-off save process (FIG. 852)). I / O port 79 output interrupt request), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of the command reception interrupt process (Fig. 853)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt) An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194, which is the source of the interrupt process (FIG. 854), may occur. These interrupt requests are managed / controlled by the interrupt controller 192 mounted on the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 permits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72, and prohibits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction), that is, so-called masqueradable interrupt. Is being controlled.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent factors that do not depend on each other, it is naturally possible that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority of the interrupt request in consideration of the importance of the interrupt process, the processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the priority of the XINT interrupt (evacuation processing when the power is turned off) is the lowest, and the SCU interrupt (command). The priority of reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 850), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. .. Actually, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 851), from the time when the interrupt is permitted (step S144 in FIG. 851) until the interrupt is prohibited (FIG. 851). When any interrupt request occurs during step S136) in 851, the interrupt controller 192 controls the received interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when XINT interrupt and PTC interrupt are received at the same time, the higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in the interrupt wait state, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the power outage save process is executed.

Further, when the procedure example of each interrupt process is reconfirmed, in the power failure save process (FIG. 852) and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 853), immediately before returning from each interrupt process (RETI instruction). The interrupt is permitted for the first time (immediately before executing) (step S152 in FIG. 852, step S188 in FIG. 853), whereas in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 854), the interrupt is interrupted at the beginning of the interrupt process. Interrupts are allowed (step S202 in FIG. 854), after which the main steps are performed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the power-off save process and the command reception interrupt process, while the interrupt controller 192 prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Allows execution of interrupts.

By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this way, the interrupt controller 192 enables execution of multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 855 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S214 in FIG. 854). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability variation area switch 95 corresponding to the probability variation region provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region. As the process when passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). , Advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a probability change area passage command as a process when passing through the probability change area. The probabilistic region passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851) executed in the main loop. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probability variation region solenoid 99 is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 854).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 856 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 855). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 855). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 854).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When it is not during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 855).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 857 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 855). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 855). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 856), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 854) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 856) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 856) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 856) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (memory means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 856) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". it can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special symbol destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 855).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 858 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 856, step S46 in FIG. 857) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 856) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 857). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of small hit, as in the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 856) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 857). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this is "a symbol that can pass through the probability variation area (8 rounds, any probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol). ) ”, For example,“ A0H ”is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this random number corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the pre-determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot-determined random number acquired after the jackpot-determined random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag represents a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 856) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 857). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, the jackpot type is "probability change area passable symbol (8 round normal symbol)" or "probability change area passable symbol (other than 8 round normal symbol)". Determining which of the probabilistic symbols) ”is applicable. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variation region passable symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which is difficult to pass through the probabilistic region", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which can pass through the probabilistic region". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding earlier determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous judgment result is set. If is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 856) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 857).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 854) will be described. FIG. 859 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol fluctuation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 counts the number of balls entered for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit in this way is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 in total, these are referred to as "10 rounds". May be generically referred to.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the first round to the fifth round, and the seventh to tenth rounds, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the jackpot game is completed based on the game status flag (probability fluctuation function activation flag, time reduction function activation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol is highly probable, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "6 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(2) "6 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(3) "8 rounds probability variation jackpot 1 (actually 4 rounds)"
(4) "8 rounds probability variation jackpot 2 (actually 8 rounds)"
(5) "8 rounds normal jackpot (actually 7 rounds)"
(6) "10 round probability change jackpot"
In this embodiment, big hits other than 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "8-round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "8-round probability variation symbol 1", and "8-round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "8-round probability variation symbol 2". Further, the "8-round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "8-round normal symbol", and the "10-round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "10-round probability variation symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 860 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[6 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[6 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "6th round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". The difference between the "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is the difference in the number of time reductions given.

[8 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the first and second rounds in the case of corresponding to the "8th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Further, in the third to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 7th and 8th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "8th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial number of balls (prize balls). Therefore, in the big hit game of "8 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 4 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "8th round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "8 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "8 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[8 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the big hit game of "8 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 8 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "8th round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "8 round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "8 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[8 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "8th round normal symbol" is completed without giving the player a substantial number of balls (prize balls). Further, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). For this reason, the jackpot game of the "8-round normal symbol" substantially gives the player 7 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round when the "8th round normal symbol" is applied, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region because the second big winning opening is short-opened. Therefore, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is not given the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

In addition, in the case of "8 round normal symbol", even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the "time reduction function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed. , The privilege to shift to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

[10 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 7th to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the big hit game of the "10-round probability variation symbol", the player is substantially given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "10 round probability variation symbol", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "10-round probability variation symbol", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, " The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "10 round probability variation symbol", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, after the jackpot game is completed. By activating the "time reduction function", the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) in one round, the longest opening time does not have to wait. It will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any probability variation symbol other than the 8-round normal symbol" and the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "high probability" after the jackpot game ends. The player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "8-round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. To do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "any of the probabilistic symbols other than the 8-round normal symbol", if the game ball does not pass through the probabilistic region during the jackpot game, the internal state is "low probability time" after the jackpot game ends. Move to "shortened state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common "1.5 seconds". The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When a small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the low probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning of the first large winning opening is hardly generated. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the end of the small hit game, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but it is also possible to use a game specification in which a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 861 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may simply read out random numbers in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 854), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high-probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low-probability state. To. Further, the range of the jackpot value differs depending on the current set value, and the range of the jackpot value is set wider in the case of the high setting than in the case of the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). ). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the disconnection pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is the "time reduction state". Check if it is not. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is supposed to be. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 862 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "3" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "6" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of order after the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "7" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of alignment after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after story reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation, the internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), and the winning symbol (hereinafter,). Similarly).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 861: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, six types of winning symbols are roughly divided as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the 6 types is "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 2", "8 round probability variation symbol 1", "8 round probability variation symbol 2", "8 round normal symbol", "10 round probability variation symbol". ". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 1a", "6 round probability variation symbol 1b", "6 round probability variation symbol 1c" and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 863 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "40", "10", "50" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. In the second column from the left, "8 round probability variation symbol 1 (effectively 4 rounds)", "8 round probability variation symbol 2 (effectively 8 rounds)", and "8 round normal symbol" corresponding to each distribution value (8 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" Actually 7 rounds) "is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "8 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (= 40%), and "8 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 4 rounds)". The ratio of selecting "8 rounds" is 10/100 (= 10%), and the ratio of selecting "8 rounds normal symbol (substantially 7 rounds)" is 50/100 (= 50%). .. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte means that the winning symbol this time is selected at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "8 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "8-round probability variation symbol 1" or "8-round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of the "8-round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given. In addition, although it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol 1" or "8 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "8-round probability variation symbol 1" or "8-round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of corresponding to "8 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, although it corresponds to the "8-round probability variation symbol 1" or the "8-round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 864 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "60", "20", "20" has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol" is 60/100 (= 60%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 1". Is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is 20/100 (= 20%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "10 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of probability variation is 170 times. Granted. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation count is not given. ..

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number of times is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to the "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the time reduction number of times is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Granted.

[See Fig. 861: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 865 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "64" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the story reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "65" and "66" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the normal reach. It should be noted that, at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without executing the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random number value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 861: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "double open small hit symbol" or "three open small hit symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 859: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register into the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination, and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 851) executed in the main loop.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 861). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 866 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 861), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 is next. The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. .. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logically) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 861).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 867 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 859) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbol", the value corresponding to "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" or "8 round normal symbol", a value representing "8 round" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a value representing "6 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 861). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "10 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "8 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "8 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "6 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", respectively. In the present embodiment, since the so-called number-cut probability change function is adopted, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state", the number-cut counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times). The number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, if the number-of-times counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630 after generating the number-of-times counter value command.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number-of-times cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number-cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to "any one of the probability variation symbols other than the 6-round probability variation symbol 2", the number-cut counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is a predetermined numerical value. Since it is set to (for example, 170 times), it is the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset.

Further, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2, the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set. Is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Therefore, it is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset when the 100th variation ends, and the probability variation function activation flag that is reset when the 170th variation ends (advantageous gaming state transition means). , Special state transition means).

Furthermore, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function activation flag is reset. is there. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 868 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 854) executed in the timer interrupt process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag, respectively. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. If the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time saving status display lamp 38e. .. When the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "10 rounds (10R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "8 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b indicating "8 rounds (8R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a indicating "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 869 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the jackpot closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing as the next jump destination ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 870 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. The number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 860. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 861). Specifically, if "10 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 10. If "8-round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "8-round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to eight. Further, if "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation region timer (counting the probability variation region opening time) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the jackpot interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (temporarily changing the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for closing). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 869).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 871 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 860, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 870) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area opening process. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 860. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 870) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. To do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 870) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not still 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 869) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, "the number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 872 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 869). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. To do. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (6 times, 8 times, or 10 times). Will be done.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 873 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 869).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 855).

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 170 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-cutting counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the high probability state is provided with a substantial upper limit, the winning result may not be obtained in the high probability state and the game may return to the low probability state (so-called number-cut probability change). If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the jackpot other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 861) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time reduction number is set depends on the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag. If is not set, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, even if the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 100 times as the number of time reductions when the winning symbol corresponds to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 (advantageous game). State transition means, special state transition means). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability is in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 859) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 874 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 875 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, the opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and in such an opening time, a prize is hardly generated in the large winning opening during one opening (difficult). It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launching device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 874). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 876 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is in the countdown (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 875) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 874). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of small hit at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 875).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 874). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 877 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 875). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 874) at the time of small hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 874). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set opening number (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 874) at the time of small hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 878 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 874).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 859) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit.

[Error handling details related to fraud, etc.]
879 to 883 are diagrams for explaining the details of error processing contents related to fraud and the like.
The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment executes the error processing of the contents described in these figures by the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124. Note that the content of the described error processing may not be executed depending on the compatible model, and some processing may not be an error depending on the processing.

First, the "priority" in the upper part of the figure indicates the priority when notifying an error. For example, when a "setting change" having the highest priority and a "main board abnormality error" having the second priority occur at the same time, notification processing of the setting change having a high priority (lamp lighting, voice notification, liquid crystal notification) ) Is executed. However, processing other than notification processing (for example, processing such as command transmission) can be executed in parallel regardless of the priority. As for the priority, the order with the highest priority is assigned to the one that is likely to affect the progress of the game.

"Error name" indicates the name of the error. The "error notification LED on the glass frame" corresponds to the LED of the glass frame top lamp 46. When a plurality of LEDs are arranged on the glass frame top lamp 46, it can be one LED on the upper left.
The "glass frame decorative LED" corresponds to the LED of the glass frame top lamp 46, the LED of the left glass frame decorative lamp 48, the LED of the right glass frame decorative lamp 50, and the LED of the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52. The "G board decoration LED" corresponds to the LED of the board lamp 53.

The "voice notification" represents the content of the voice or warning sound output from the speakers 54, 55, 56. The "liquid crystal notification" represents the content of character information or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 42.
"Error management" indicates which control device (main control device or effect control device) manages the error. However, both controllers may manage the error.

The "error occurrence condition" represents a requirement as to what kind of condition should be met to assume that the error has occurred.
The "error cancellation condition" represents a requirement regarding what kind of condition is satisfied to cancel the error that has occurred.

The “external information” represents the content of a signal transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. Hereinafter, the contents of each error will be specifically described in descending order of priority.

〔setting change〕
Priority: 1
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting (single color part does not light)
G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Weak warning sound and "Settings are being changed"
LCD notification: "Settings are being changed"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When setting is changed (setting is being changed)
Error cancellation condition: At the end of setting change External information: Output during setting change (output for at least 0.128 seconds)
Remarks: After the setting change is completed, the RAM clear notification is executed for the specified time (31 seconds). When other errors are combined, the RAM is cleared and then notified according to the priority.

[Main board error]
Priority: 2
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound weak and "Main board error error"
LCD notification: "Main board error error. Please call the staff."
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: RAM (RWM) error, set value error Error release condition: Setting change and RAM / set value returns to normal External information: Error detection output Remarks: Setting for error cancellation Changes are needed.

[Backup error error]
Priority: 3
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound weak and "Backup error error"
LCD notification: "Backup error error. Please call the staff."
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: Backup error error Error cancellation condition: Setting change and RAM / setting value returns to normal External information: Error detection output Remarks: Setting change is required to clear the error.

[RAM clear]
Priority: 4
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: all off Voice notification: "Memory cleared" (voice can be set depending on the model)
LCD notification: "None" (display of default screen (normal game screen))
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When RAM is cleared Error release condition: 31 seconds after the error occurs External information: 0.128 seconds output (security signal is output for 0.128 seconds)
Remarks: None

[Check settings]
Priority: 5
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound weak and "Settings are being confirmed"
LCD notification: "Settings are being confirmed"
Error management: Main controller error occurrence condition: At the time of setting confirmation (setting is being confirmed)
Error cancellation conditions: (1) Setting confirmation completed, (2) When 31 seconds or more have passed since the setting confirmation started and (1) and (2) are satisfied External information: Setting confirmation output (minimum 0.128) Second output)
Remarks: If 31 seconds have not passed at the end of the setting confirmation, only the liquid crystal is restored and the voice / lamp continues to notify. After the setting confirmation is completed, the power failure recovery notification is performed. When other errors are compounded, it is notified according to the priority.

[Illegal winning error]
Priority: 6
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: all off Voice notification: Warning sound and "illegal winning was detected"
LCD notification: "Illegal winning was detected"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: (A) When five or more game balls are won in the large winning opening other than when the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) is operating. Or (B) When five or more game balls are won in the ordinary electric accessory (right start winning opening 28a) in addition to the hitting operation of the ordinary electric accessory (variable start winning device 28) Error cancellation condition: From the occurrence of an error After 60 seconds have passed External information: 0.128 seconds output Remarks: The above numerical settings for each condition can be set according to the model. In the eight-hold model (a model in which the memory of the first special symbol and the memory of the second special symbol may be alternately stored up to the maximum number in a low probability non-time shortened state), the normal electric combination of the above (B) Unauthorized prize-winning errors are left unused.

[Abnormal winning frequency error]
Priority: 7
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "Abnormal winning frequency was detected"
LCD notification: "Abnormal winning frequency has been detected. Please call the staff."
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: Detects more than the specified number of game balls in each winning opening in 60 seconds Error cancellation condition: 60 seconds after the error occurs External information: None Remarks: LCD notification is an error The winning opening in which the error occurred can be displayed so as to be identifiable.

[Large winning opening excess winning error]
Priority: 8
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: all off Voice notification: Warning sound and "excessive winning detected"
LCD notification: "Excessive winning was detected"
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: When two or more prizes of "specified number of prizes + specified number" or more occur twice in one round during one big role (during big hit game) Error release condition: 60 from error occurrence After seconds elapse External information: None Remarks: None

[Radio wave error]
Priority: 9
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "Radio wave detected"
LCD notification: "Radio waves have been detected. Please call the staff."
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When radio wave is detected or when radio wave sensor disconnection is detected Error release condition: 60 seconds after the radio wave error is released External information: Error detection output (minimum 0.128 seconds output)
Remarks: The liquid crystal notification can be displayed so that the location where the radio wave error has occurred can be identified. The error notification is continued for 60 seconds after the error is cleared.

[Magnetic error]
Priority: 10
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "Magnet detected"
LCD notification: "Magnet detected, please call the staff"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: Magnetic detection or magnetic sensor disconnection detection Error cancellation condition: Until power failure External information: Error detection output Remarks: LCD notification is a display that can identify the location where the magnetic error occurred. Can be.

[Probability change area abnormal passage error]
Priority: 11
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part Red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: None Error management: Main controller LCD notification: "Detected abnormal passage in the probability change area Call the staff Please
Error occurrence condition: When the passage of the game ball to the probability change area is detected during the short opening round of the large winning opening with the probability change area Error release condition: Until the power is turned off External information: Output during error detection Remarks: The probability change area is not installed Not used in the model

[Large winning opening entry / exit ball mismatch error]
Priority: 12
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "In / out ball mismatch detected"
LCD notification: "A mismatch in the entrance and exit of the big prize opening was detected."
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: Winning ball and discharge ball of a large winning opening with a probability change area (probability change area switch 95a (specific area switch if it is a specific area), and the number of passing balls of the discharge port switch) If they do not match. Inside the second variable winning device 31, a discharge port switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the discharge region can be installed.
Error cancellation condition: 60 seconds after the error occurred External information: None Remarks: Not used in models that do not have a probabilistic area or a specific area

[Large winning opening abnormal discharge error]
Priority: 13
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound + "Abnormal discharge detected"
LCD notification: "Abnormal discharge of the winning opening was detected"
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: When the passage of the game ball to the probability change area or the specific area or the discharge port is detected even though the prize has not been won in the large winning opening having the probability change area or the specific area. : After 60 seconds have passed since the error occurred External information: None Remarks: Not used in models that do not have a probability variation area or a specific area

[Vibration error]
Priority: 14
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "vibration detected"
LCD notification: "Vibration detected"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When vibration error occurs Error release condition: 60 seconds after the error occurs External information: 0.128 seconds output Remarks: Not used in models without a vibration sensor. Detects only while the special electric accessory is operating. If it is detected within a certain time (5 seconds) after the door is closed, no voice notification will be given.

[Starting port abnormal winning error]
Priority: 15
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: "Abnormal start opening prize was detected"
LCD notification: "Abnormal start opening prize was detected"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When a start port abnormality occurs (5 or more consecutive winnings to the same start port)
Error cancellation condition: 60 seconds after the error occurred External information: 0.128 seconds output Remarks: 8 pieces Not used for models that are not reserved models

[Door opening error]
Priority: 16
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: all off Voice notification: Warning sound and "door is open" (always notify for about 15 seconds after opening the door)
LCD notification: "The door is open"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When the door is opened Error release condition: When the door is closed External information: Output while the door is open Remarks: The door open error LED notification pattern is retained for 30 seconds after the door is closed.

[Switch error]
Priority: 17
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "Switch error"
LCD notification: "Call the switch error staff"
Error management: Main controller error occurrence condition: Board surface proximity switch error occurrence or out switch error occurrence Error cancellation condition: Board surface proximity switch error cancellation or out switch error cancellation External information: Error detection output Remarks: Error cause ( When separating (board proximity switch or out switch), 10 game balls can be inserted in the out port and it can be judged by whether or not the external information (out) is lit (when external information is lit: board proximity switch error, external information non-existence). When lit: Outswitch error).

[Base error error]
Priority: 18
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: all off Voice notification: Warning sound and "base abnormality detected"
LCD notification: "A base abnormality has been detected."
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: When the number of prize balls between 100 outswitches exceeds the specified number in each game state except during big hits Error cancellation condition: 60 seconds after the error occurs External information: None Remarks :None

[Movable body error]
Priority: 19
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "movable body error"
LCD notification: "Call the person in charge of movable body error"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When main control movable body error occurs Error cancellation condition: When main control movable body error is cleared External information: Error detection output Remarks: LCD notification can identify the moving body where the error occurred Display can be made.

[Unauthorized game warning "strong"]
Priority: 20
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part Red lighting G board decoration LED: All off Voice notification: Warning sound and "Please return to left-handed" (Voice depends on the model )
LCD notification: "Please return to left-handed"
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: When a specified number of game balls win a prize in the start port 2 (start port corresponding to the second special symbol) while the left-handed state is specified after the power failure is restored or the jackpot is completed (over). There are additional conditions specific to the model, such as winning a prize, excluding 3 fluctuations after the right-handed jackpot game is over)
Error cancellation condition: Warning sound and voice repeated 3 times or right-handed state designation Occurrence External information: None Remarks: None

[Unauthorized game warning "weak"]
Priority: 21
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: None (off)
Glass frame decoration LED: As usual in the game (lights up according to the content of the production)
G board decoration LED: As in normal game Voice notification: "Please return to left-handed" (Voice can be changed depending on the model)
LCD notification: "Please return to left-handed"
Error management: Effect control device Error occurrence condition: When a specified number of game balls are won in the start port 2 while the left-handed state is specified (There are additional conditions specific to the model such as excluding 3 fluctuations after the right-handed jackpot game is completed).
Error cancellation condition: Until voice is repeated 3 times or right-handed state is specified External information: None Remarks: None

[Full tank error]
Priority: 22
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Lights blue Glass frame decoration LED: As usual game G board decoration LED: As usual game Voice notification: "Please pull out the ball" (It can be a voice depending on the model)
LCD notification: "Please pull out the ball"
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When full tank error occurs Error cancellation condition: When full tank error is cleared External information: None Remarks: Voice notification can be started 30 seconds after the error occurs.

[Probability change area non-passing error]
Priority: 14
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Blue lighting Glass frame decoration LED: Full color part Green lighting G board decoration LED: As in normal game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error management: Production control device Error occurrence condition: Large with probability change area When the passage of the game ball to the probability change area is not detected during the long open round of the winning opening Error cancellation condition: Next condition Until the device is activated or the power is turned off External information: None Remarks: Not used in models that do not have the probability change area

[Recovery from power failure]
Priority: 24
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: lit blue Glass frame decoration LED: full color part blue lit G board decoration LED: all off Voice notification: None LCD notification: None (default screen display)
Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When recovering from power failure Error release condition: When the initial operation of the movable body for production is completed External information: None Remarks: The initial operation time of the movable body for production differs depending on the model.

[Production movable body motor error]
Priority: 25
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Lights blue when an error has occurred in the movable body on the board (game board unit), and lights in green when an error has occurred in the movable body in the game machine frame. If there is an error in both movable bodies, it lights up in yellow.
Glass frame decoration LED: As in normal game G board decoration LED: As in normal game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error management: Production control device Error occurrence condition: When an error occurs in the movable body for production Error cancellation condition: Until the power is turned off External information: None Remarks: None

[Error handling details related to payout]
FIG. 884 is a diagram illustrating details of error processing contents related to payout and the like.
The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment executes the error processing of the contents described in this figure by the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124. Note that the content of the described error processing may not be executed depending on the compatible model. The items in the upper part of the figure are the same as the items in FIG. 879 and the like. Hereinafter, the contents of each error will be specifically described in descending order of priority.

[Ball jam error]
Priority: 1
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Lights red Glass frame decoration LED: As usual game G board decoration LED: As usual game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: Payout detection switch is 50ms Continuous on detection Error cancellation condition: Payout detection switch detects continuous off for 50ms External information: None Remarks: None

[Payout count switch error]
Priority: 2
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: High-speed red blinking (100ms cycle)
Glass frame decoration LED: As in normal game G board decoration LED: As in normal game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: Payout count switch error signal from payout count switch is continuous for 300 ms On detection Error cancellation condition: Payout counting switch error signal from payout counting switch is off continuously for 300ms External information: None Remarks: None

[Error during payout]
Priority: 3
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Low speed red blinking (500ms cycle)
Glass frame decoration LED: As in normal game G board decoration LED: As in normal game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When the number of payouts is insufficient after payout operation, or payout operation If a ball jam error or discharge detection switch error occurs inside Error release condition: 20 seconds have passed and the payout detection switch signal is off, and the payout detection switch detects one or more game balls at the time of repayment External information: None Remarks: It may overlap with a ball jam error or a payout detection switch error.

[Excessive prize ball error]
Priority: 4
Glass frame upper left error notification LED: Low speed alternating red-green blinking (500ms cycle)
Glass frame decoration LED: As usual game G board decoration LED: As usual game Voice notification: None LCD notification: None Error management: Main controller Error occurrence condition: When the excess prize ball count reaches 10 (when there is no payout) (Judged by the number of times the payout detection switch is on-edge)
Error clearing condition: When the initial start command is received When the RAM is cleared External information: None Remarks: The error is not cleared by the power recovery start (power cycle without RAM clear) or the power recovery start command.

As described above, in the error processing content related to fraud in FIGS. 879 to 883, the LED of the glass frame top lamp 46 is basically lit in blue, and in the error processing content related to payout in FIG. 884, the glass frame top lamp 46 Since the LED lights up and blinks in red or the like, it is possible to perform a lamp notification effect that is easy to understand at a glance as to what kind of error type has occurred.

Further, when the error processing content related to fraud in FIGS. 879 to 883 and the error processing content related to the payout in FIG. 884 occur at the same time, the priority of either processing can be higher. For example, if the error processing content related to payout is set higher, even if the setting change of the error processing content related to fraud etc. has occurred, the priority of the error processing content related to payout is the 4th excess prize. When ball errors occur at the same time, the error notification effect regarding the excess prize ball error is preferentially executed.

Then, such error processing is executed in, for example, the security management process and other processes on the main control device 70 side, and in the error effect management process and other processes described later on the effect control device 124 side. Is executed by.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 885 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "8-round normal symbol" or "8-round probabilistic symbols 1 and 2" is applicable in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game is started. It will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "8 round normal symbol", [F3] 8 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and you lose in the battle of [F4] big role production. , [F5] Shift to coastal mode.

[F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortened state. In the [F5] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F7] "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", [F3] 8 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] in the battle of the big role production. win.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the [F9] jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [F10] V prize has occurred is executed, and the [F11] fireworks rush is performed. Transition.

[F11] The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability. In the [F11] fireworks rush, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

On the other hand, if [F13] "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [F10] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 886 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "10 round probability variation symbols" or "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the fireworks rush or coastal mode.
If you win the jackpot of [G1] "10 round probability variation symbol" in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G2] 10 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the sixth round of the [G3] jackpot game (when the V prize is won), an effect indicating that the [G4] V prize has occurred is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, [ F11] Shift to fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won) even though it corresponds to the [G5] "10 round probability variation symbol", the [G6] V prize occurs. An effect indicating that the game was not performed is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

If the jackpot of [G10] "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is won in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the sixth round of the [G12] jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G13] V prize has occurred is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, [G12] F11] Shift to fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [G15] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and then the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode. Although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when it shifts to the fireworks rush and 100 fluctuations elapse, it shifts to the normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time shortened state. ing.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 838). ). Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, middle area, and right area on the screen.

FIG. 887 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used). To do. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 887 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 round jackpot", "8 round jackpot", or "10 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color or red display color). Etc.), and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 887 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 by the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (memory image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Stop the left symbol]
In FIG. 887 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 887 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed increases accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 887 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 887 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. is there. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 887 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
Next, an example of production at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 888 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol. The super reach effect is a reach effect performed with a variation display in which a medium variation time (eg, 50-100 seconds) is selected.

Here, the flow of the super reach effect executed at the time of a big hit will be described, but the super reach effect is executed at a relatively low ratio not only at the time of a big hit but also at the time of a miss. Further, here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 888, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-variation display area X1 and the in-variation display area X2 are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 888 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling to the bottom).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 888 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 888 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 888 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the effect pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 888 (D): The variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped in the middle of the variable display effect. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 888 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the right side of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, "5") are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 888 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing a heart shape form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. In this case, since the image of the heart group is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 888 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "off". In the case of deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 888 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 888 (I): Then, the final middle effect symbol is stopped. In this example, by displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit.

In FIG. 888 (J): Then, for example, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined in the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible to keep the player from not disclosing to the player which winning symbol was won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the subject of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outlier reach effect".

[Example of production during a major role when it corresponds to "8 round normal design" etc.]
889 to 892 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of a large-scale production in the case of corresponding to "8-round normal symbol" or "8-round probabilistic symbol 1, 2".

In the present embodiment, when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol", the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the big role production, and it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2". In that case, the effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

[1st round]
In FIG. 889 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect during the big role is started. In the illustrated example, the image of the ghost of the umbrella that is the enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, the image of the female character that is the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the image of the character "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect will be started from now on.

Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, the effect symbol of "5") is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 5 production symbols”.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 889 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and runs away, and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 889 (C): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from the fan (weapon).

[4th round]
In FIG. 889 (D): Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, a ghost of an umbrella performs a special move that causes a long tongue to pop out of the mouth, and a female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "8 round normal symbol", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "8 round probability variation symbols 1, 2". Means.

[5th round (when the 8th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 890 (E): In the case of winning in the "8th round normal symbol", the defeat effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Defeat ...", the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (allied character defeat production).

[6th round (when the 8th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 890 (F): In the case of winning in the "8th round normal symbol", the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, a production is performed in which a female character utters a line such as "I will not lose next time!". As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for a big hit again. In the subsequent round game, the same re-challenge promotion effect as in the sixth round is executed.

In the sixth round when the player wins the "8th round normal symbol", the second variable winning device 31 opens, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball passes through the probability variation region. It is difficult.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 890 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the “8 round normal symbol” ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[5th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 891 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 891 (I): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are won, the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 because the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. When the ball is thrown, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 891 (J): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the subsequent round game, the same blessing effect as in the sixth round is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 891 (K): At the timing when the jackpot game ends (during the termination process), the major winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

The above is an example of the production when the game ball safely passes through the probability variation area corresponding to "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", but even if it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the game If the sphere does not pass through the probability variation region, the following production example is obtained.

[5th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 892 (L): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 892 (M): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "8-round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. Then, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the sixth round for some reason (not hitting right, jamming the ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 892 (N): In this case, a failure effect in which the panda character utters the line "sorry" is executed. In the subsequent round game, the failure effect will continue.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 892 (O): At the timing when the big hit game in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

In addition, when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol 1", the profit obtained is smaller than that when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol 2", so that an effect other than the battle effect may be executed.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 893 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode in which the player wins the "8-round probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol" and is transferred after the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game. Fireworks rush is in a state of high probability time reduction. The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 893 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 893 (B): Then, since the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game is completed, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 893 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol Variable display is often performed. In addition, if the result of winning is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach production is executed and it becomes a big hit.

In the fireworks rush, the marker M1 and the marker M2 may be displayed by displaying the pre-variation display area X1 and the changing display area X2 as in the normal mode. This point is the same in the following coastal modes.

[Major role production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 894 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big win-play effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2".

[1 round]
In FIG. 894 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 2 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 2 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 894 (B): In the case of winning in "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or "6th round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the second variable winning device 31 When the game ball enters the ball, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 894 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 894 (D): At the timing when the jackpot game ends, the major winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Major role production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 895 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role playing effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to the “10 round probability variation symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 895 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 7 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 7 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "special bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character straddling a horse and performing a peace sign is displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 895 (B): In the case of winning in the "10 round probability variation symbol", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "10 round probability variation symbol" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game is played. The sphere is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 895 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark appears next to the female character who jumps up. The displayed blessing effect is executed.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 895 (D): After that, when the jackpot game progresses smoothly and the final 10 rounds are entered, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND10" is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed. In addition, an effect symbol (7 effect symbols) as a "remaining eye" is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 895 (E): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be shifted after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 896 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode. This coastal mode is a jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "8 round normal symbol", or when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game which corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols. This is the mode that will be transitioned after the end of. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". The flow of the production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 896 (A): For example, after the jackpot game in the "8 round normal symbol" is completed, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. There is. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 896 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 896 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times without a winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, notice effect, memory display effect, large role effect, and the like are all controlled through the following control processes executed by the effect control device 124.

[Production control processing]
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor and a function as an effect reproduction processor, and realizes these two functions by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126 to each of them. .. The effect control CPU 126 as the effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and sets various control tables for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents. Further, the effect control CPU 126 as the effect reproduction processor analyzes the control table set by the effect control processor and gives more specific instructions to each device based on the contents of the control table to operate each device (liquid crystal display). Screen display by the device 42, audio output by the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, board lamp 53 and upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9, displacement of various movable bodies by the movable body motor 57, etc. ) Is controlled, and the production reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operation subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor is expressed as "effect control unit 210", and the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect display processor. The operating subject of the case is appropriately expressed as "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "lamp control unit 224", or "motor control unit 226" depending on the content.

FIG. 897 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), error effect management process (step S400a), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), lamp effect management process (step S403), Subroutines for display output processing (step S404), input control processing (step S405), lamp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). It is a composition including a group. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The effect commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start opening winning sound. Control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, confirmation command, status specification command, round number command, various error commands, jackpot end production command, count cut counter value command , Fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, probability change area passage command, prize ball content command, setting-related end specification command, etc.

Step S400a: In the error effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the error effect based on various error commands (error effect execution means). The contents of the effect to be executed (voice notification and liquid crystal notification) are as described with reference to FIGS. 879 to 884.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the memory display effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and during the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the content of the production (effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S403: In the lamp effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content of the lamp effect. The details of the processing will be described later.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control unit 210 first tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. A message or a control table for instructing an effect pattern number, a variable effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, the hold deletion, etc.) is set. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the set message and the contents of the control table, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes the operation requesting the player with the progress of the effect, and the player sends the operation member such as the operation unit 60 to the input control unit 228. Instructs detection of whether or not the operation is performed in the specified mode. More specifically, the effect control unit 210 sets any of the input control tables defined in advance in the control ROM 180. In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the set input control table, and based on this, sets a period during which operations can be accepted for any of the operating members. In addition, the effect control unit 210 detects whether or not an operation (operation requested from the player) that matches the designated mode is performed, outputs the detection result, and returns it to the effect control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sets a control table for instructing the lamp control unit 224 of the effect content. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the contents of the set control table and outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. The light sources and the like built in the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 and each part of the operation unit 60 are driven (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, brightness gradation change, etc.).

Step S408: In the acoustic drive process, the effect control unit 210 first sets a control table for instructing the voice control unit 222 of the effect content. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives a specific output content instruction to the voice IC 134 based on the set content of the control table, and sounds (sounds 54, 55, 56, 58) according to the effect content from the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. Sound effects, BGM, etc.) are output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control unit 210 first sets a control table that instructs the motor control unit 226 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the motor control unit 226 gives an instruction of specific control contents to the SMC 199 based on the contents of the set control table. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on an instruction from the motor control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 898 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process.
The operation memory effect management process is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in conjunction with an increase or decrease in the number of lottery elements (operation memory number) stored in the main control device 70, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. It is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to (memory display effect executing means), and is called and executed in the process of the effect control process (step S401 in FIG. 897). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of operation memories is reduced has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and changes the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the middle display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 897).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 899 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 859) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 859). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and responds to the result. The control information of the effect content (operation trigger effect, continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the VDP 152, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, when the "10-round probability variation symbol" is won, the effect control unit 210 selects a 10-round major role effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the display control unit 220 of this. To do. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 900 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 897) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 897), the content of the demo effect is displayed based on the demo effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or the outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "C0H00H" to "D0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes the effect pattern variation schedule (variation time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the effect effect pattern number at that time. Determine the mode of stop display. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence). In this case, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes the mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low probability non-time reduction state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. Further, when the stay mode is the "fireworks mode (high probability time shortened state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image with a fireworks motif. Further, when the stay mode is the "coast mode (low probability time shortened state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image with the coast as a motif. When the stay mode is in the "high probability non-time reduction state", the effect control unit 210 may select a background image corresponding to the normal mode, or may select a background image different from the normal mode. Good.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 899), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The advance notice effect is executed based on the advance notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 901 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating time processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S904 to step S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operation process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning in the "8 round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the process of selecting the normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in the "10 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 during the execution of the jackpot effect, the input control unit 228 is made to detect whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and the effect content (operation trigger effect) according to the result is detected. , Continuous hitting effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220. Further, in the process during operation of the variable winning device, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 891 (J) or the like) is selected. While executing the process, if the probability variation area passage command is not received during the jackpot game, the process of selecting the effect indicating that the V prize has not occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 892 (N), etc.). To execute.

Step S908: In the post-operation processing of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes a coast mode rush effect or a fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not a winning symbol or a probability variation region has passed. Specifically, when a probability change area passage command is received during the jackpot game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered (effect shown in FIG. 891 (K) or the like) is executed, and the jackpot is executed. If the probability variation area passage command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player is entering the coastal mode (effect shown in FIG. 890 (G) or the like) is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 899).

[Lamp production management process]
FIG. 902 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the lamp effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control unit 210 executes the upper ball passage lamp management process. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the upper ball passage lamp. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S820: The effect control unit 210 executes other lamp management processes. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of controlling the lighting and extinguishing of lamps (various lamps 46 to 52, board surface lamp 53, etc.) other than the upper ball passage lamp. The details of the process will be described later.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 897).

[Upper ball passage lamp management process]
FIG. 903 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the upper ball passage lamp management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S811: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not an error has occurred. Whether or not an error has occurred can be confirmed by an error command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that an error has occurred (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S812, and when it cannot be confirmed that an error has occurred (No), the effect control unit 210 determines. Step S814 is executed.

Step S811: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not a specific error has occurred. Whether or not a specific error has occurred can be confirmed by an error command. The specific error can be an error that turns off the "G board decoration LED (LED of the board lamp 53)" (see FIGS. 879 to 884).

As a result, when it is confirmed that a specific error has occurred (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S813, and when it cannot be confirmed that a specific error has occurred (No), the effect control Unit 210 executes step S814.

Step S813: The effect control unit 210 executes the process of turning off the upper ball passage lamp. Specifically, a process of selecting a control pattern for turning off the upper ball passage lamp is executed.

Step S814: The effect control unit 210 executes the upper ball passage lamp lighting process. Specifically, a process of selecting a control pattern for lighting the upper ball passage lamp (a control pattern for constantly emitting white light) is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the lamp effect management process (FIG. 902).

[Other lamp management processing]
FIG. 904 is a flowchart showing another procedure example of the lamp management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S821: The effect control unit 210 executes a process of confirming whether or not an error has occurred. Whether or not an error has occurred can be confirmed by an error command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that an error has occurred (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S822, and when it cannot be confirmed that an error has occurred (No), the effect control unit 210 determines. Step S823 is executed.

Step S822: The effect control unit 210 executes other lamp control processing according to the error. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 executes other processes of turning on and off the lamps as described in FIGS. 879 to 884.

Step S823: The effect control unit 210 executes other lamp control processes according to the effect content. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 demonstrates the content according to the selected effect content (if it is fluctuating, it corresponds to the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit game). If it is during the production, the other processing of turning on and off the lamp is executed (in a manner corresponding to the demonstration production).
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the lamp effect management process (FIG. 902).

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 controls the light emission of the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 (first light emitting means) when no error has occurred (when it is determined that the state is predetermined). It is possible to make the light emission control of the board lamp 53 (second light emitting means) different (one is to constantly emit light and the other is to emit light according to the content of the effect) (light emission control means).

Further, by executing such a process, when a specific error has occurred (when it is not determined to be a predetermined state), the effect control unit 210 has the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 (first light emitting means). It is possible to make the light emission control of the above and the light emission control of the board lamp 53 (second light emitting means) common (all of them are turned off) (light emitting control means).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, when no error has occurred (when a predetermined state is determined), light emission control of the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 (first light emitting means) and the board surface lamp 53 (when it is determined) Since it is possible to make the light emission control of the second light emitting means different from that of the light emitting control, the darkened area can be brightened by arranging the decorative unit 400 (decoration), and the area where the decorative unit 400 is not arranged is produced. It is possible to execute light emission control according to the contents of. In this way, by flexibly changing the light emission control depending on the presence or absence of the arrangement of the decoration unit 400, it is possible to execute efficient light emission control, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(2) According to the present embodiment, when a specific error does not occur (when it is determined to be a predetermined state), light emission control of the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 (first light emitting means) is performed. Although the light emission control of the board lamp 53 (second light emitting means) is different, when a specific error occurs (when it is not determined to be a predetermined state), the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 (first light emitting means). Since the light emission control of the 1st light emitting means) and the light emitting control of the board lamp 53 (the second light emitting means) are shared, the light emission is more flexible according to the situation than the method in which the light emission control is uniformly different. Control can be performed and, as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

(3) An upper ball passage 500 is arranged behind the decorative unit 400 projecting forward. The upper ball passage 500 is visible through the transparent portion of the decorative unit 400, but the visibility of the game ball may be deteriorated because it is darkened by the main body unit 410 (upper additional design) of the decorative unit 400. There is sex. Therefore, the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 are mounted on the back surface of the upper ball passage 500 to constantly emit white light. By constantly causing the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9 to emit white light in this way, the upper ball passage 500 and its surroundings become brighter, and the visibility of the upper ball passage 500 and the game ball passing through the passage is improved.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of production and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

The pachinko machine 1 may be a gaming machine equipped with a power saving mode (for example, a mode in which an LED or the like is turned off to suppress power when the game is not played for a certain period of time). Then, when the power saving mode is turned on, the upper ball passage lamp may be turned off or kept on.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine not having a probability variation region. It is also possible to apply the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The above-described embodiment can be modified as follows.
(1) The first region (first light emitting means) on which the decorations overlap can be more visible if the brightness can be adjusted to the brightness that the player feels most comfortable to see. Therefore, the brightness of the first region (first light emitting means) may be changed by the operation of the player.
On the other hand, in the second region (second light emitting means) where the decorations do not overlap, it is easy to visually recognize the game ball without adjusting the brightness. Therefore, in order to reduce the processing load, the brightness of the second region (second light emitting means) may not be changed by the player.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the light emission control of the first light emitting means (upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9) and the second light emitting means (board lamps 53 other than the upper ball passage lamps L1 to L9) is controlled during the error occurrence. As explained in the common example, a maintenance mode that allows the presence or absence of the effect of the gaming machine and the mode can be set may be provided, and the light emission control may be shared during the maintenance mode, or during a specific jackpot or all jackpots. May have common light emission control.

(3) When the light emission control is common, it is not limited to being common to the off state, but is common to the same brightness (brightness improvement or brightness decrease), common to the same blinking pattern, common to the same light emission color. It may be controlled such as to make it.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

Claims (1)

Operation means that can accept operation input and
Using the operation means, a stepwise effect execution means that enables a stepwise effect to progress the stage of the effect step by step from the first stage to the final stage, and a stepwise effect execution means.
If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied from the start to the end of the effective time for validating the operation of the operation means, the stage of the stage effect is advanced according to the first progress mode, and the predetermined conditions are met. If is satisfied, the gaming machine is provided with a progress effect executing means capable of executing a progress effect that advances the stage of the effect of the stage effect by a second progress mode different from the first progress mode. ..

Images